Author: Webmaster

  • A Legacy of Freaks

    Christopher Pizzino

    Department of Literatures in English
    Rutgers University
    pizzino@fas-english.rutgers.edu

     

    Review of: Slavoj Zizek, The Fragile Absolute, or, Why is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For? New York: Verso, 2000.

     

    In one of the more arresting moments in The Fragile Absolute, Slavoj Zizek connects the Pauline concept of agape, commonly known as Christian love, to the closing shot of Krzysztof Kieslowski’s Blue.1 The shot is a series of tableaux, each focused on a character somehow related to the life of the film’s heroine, Julie. The tableaux are separated by a formless void in which each seems to float. After panning through the void from one character to another, the camera comes to rest on the weeping face of Julie herself. Emotionally paralyzed by the death of her husband and child, she has moved through the film untouched by her encounters with those around her. The effect of the conclusion is to suggest that Julie has delivered herself from paralysis and once again become a participant in the psychic life of others. Her tears indicate that “her work of mourning is accomplished, she is reconciled with the universe; her tears are not the tears of sadness and pain, but the tears of agape, of a Yes! to life in its mysterious synchronic multitude” (103). The tone is unusually lyrical for Zizek, and indeed for cultural theory in general, yet it is easy to recognize the standard maneuver being executed here. A canonical theoretical (or in this case theological) text is expounded using a popular text as an example. In this instance as in previous works, what distinguishes Zizek’s connections from those of most other cultural theorists (aside from their frequency) is the way the popular text becomes more than mere illustration. The usual priorities could be said to be reversed; theory itself seems the subsidiary thing. One might observe in the provocative tone of overstatement Zizek has mastered that if we examine Paul’s ultimate statement of the nature of agape, the famous passage from 1 Corinthians 13, it amounts only to a sort of illustration of the conclusion of Blue (in fact the passage is being sung in the background). In his attempt to express an affirmation that could overcome the fragmentation of historical experience, Paul creates a shadowy and insufficient illustration of the “mysterious, synchronic” truth expressed by Kieslowski’s camera.

     

    As bracing as such moments are, Zizek’s allegiance to a specific set of theoretical touchstones lets us know that theory, or at least a certain kind of theory, never remains in the supporting role for long. Though the tone of the commentary on Blue is climactic, the work of Zizek’s argument is not complete until the book’s final chapter, in which agape itself is connected to Marxist and psychoanalytic points of reference. Like the use of popular culture, this argumentative procedure is now familiar. In a sense Zizek reads Paul’s theology much as he has read an array of Western philosophers, notably Hegel and Schelling. The wide field of application sheds light on the status of both philosophy and popular culture. Examples from either sphere gain value insofar as they express, in whatever form, the truths of the powerful theoretical principles Zizek has formed from his readings of Marx on the one hand and Lacan and Freud on the other. Working on the canon of Western philosophy in this way leaves Zizek open to the challenge that although he has given us new ways to understand Marx, Freud, and Lacan, he has distorted our view of the raw material on which he operates. The question of distortion, however, is likely to be more interesting if we follow Zizek’s own habits of investigation and reverse the direction of inquiry, asking in what ways his own work is affected by his appropriations. Such a question seems particularly relevant for this book, his first to give sustained attention to Christian theology. The question to ask, then, is not how Zizek distorts Christianity but how the presence of Christianity distorts Zizek. The distortion turns out to have a familiar shape. By asserting from a perspective one could provisionally define as secular that Christianity is “worth fighting for,” The Fragile Absolute enters a long-standing set of conflicts between religion and the secular, and these conflicts determine the shape of the argument in ways that are at odds with Zizek’s own theoretical program.

     

    As the reading of agape suggests, Zizek’s purpose in this book is to establish parallels between Christian thought and his own, situated athwart Marxism and psychoanalysis. Despite the urgency of the project implied by the book’s title, however, the parallels are slow to appear. The preface announces a crisis that precipitates the need for a consideration of Christianity, namely the rise of “fundamentalism” in various political and social contexts. After this announcement, Zizek turns abruptly to the lively ideological critique for which he is known, focusing his attention on the implications of global capitalism in a post-Soviet era. Here too Zizek finds a state of crisis, one which threatens the very possibility of a meaningful Marxism. Then follows another abrupt turn, this time to the concept of agape in the writings of Paul. Agape represents for Zizek the part of Christianity worth saving, the “legacy” that can undo the double bind in which Marxism is caught. What is particularly striking about the book’s trajectory is the way that Christianity appears first in a threatening role and then in a fruitful one, nearly vanishing in between. Before it can appear in a redemptive capacity, it seems, religion must first appear in the ominous guise of “fundamentalism.”

     

    Alongside Zizek’s misguided attacks on “fundamentalism,” there is a single moment of insight worth mentioning. In a chapter memorably entitled “Victims, Victims Everywhere,” the media portrayal of conditions in Kosovo is said to illustrate “the paradox of victimization: the Other to be protected is good insofar as it remains a victim… the moment it no longer behaves like a victim, but wants to strike back on its own, it magically turns all of a sudden into a terrorist/fundamentalist/drug-trafficking Other” (60). Here the figure of the “fundamentalist” is clearly a fetishized construction, a simplification structured to serve the interests of Western capitalist understanding. The target of Zizek’s critique is not “fundamentalism” at all but rather those who use the term unreflectively, dividing Others into “victims of religious persecution” and “fundamentalist radicals.” Such a critique is certainly long overdue in the context of U.S. discourse, where accusations of “fundamentalism” are readily directed at groups within the nation as well as without. Theoretical tasks immediately suggest themselves. For instance, there is the need to understand the relationship between familiar images of “fundamentalism” on the home front–the fanatical terrorist in Contact–and instantly recognizable images of “Islamic fundamentalism” deployed in films like Rules Of Engagement. It could be claimed that in popular film, fundamentalists, as well as victims, are everywhere.

     

    Unfortunately, and despite this suggestive moment of critique, fundamentalism as a secular fantasy also has a strong presence in this book. In fact the preface contains what qualifies as a classic instance of this fantasy. First there is an indictment of “one of the most deplorable aspects of the postmodern era,” namely “the return of the religious dimension in all its different guises: from Christian and other fundamentalisms, through the multitude of New Age spiritualisms, up to the emerging religious sensitivity within deconstructionism itself.” This alleged return raises the abiding question of “the religious legacy within Marxism itself” (1). Zizek’s approach to this question is, not surprisingly, an attempt at reversal:

     

    Instead of adopting such a defensive stance, allowing the enemy to define the terrain of the struggle, what one should do is to reverse the strategy by fully endorsing what one is accused of: yes, there is a direct lineage from Christianity to Marxism; yes, Christianity and Marxism should fight on the same side of the barricade against the onslaught of the new spiritualisms–the authentic Christian legacy is much too precious to be left to the fundamentalist freaks. (2)

     

    This certainly appears to reverse a traditional Marxist position on the question of religion, but it does so by way of a view of fundamentalism that could hardly be more predictable. The fundamentalist is the political “enemy,” the one whose dogmatic theological stance not only justifies but actually requires hostility on the part of the critic.2

     

    The baldness of this declaration is itself something of a landmark. Never before in a work of cultural theory has the prejudice against certain forms of religion been expressed so openly, and never have the specific contours of that prejudice surfaced in such a condensed form. The self/other antagonism finds clear expression in a language of boundaries and alliances but also deploys a language of monstrosity. The choice of the word “freaks” carries the conviction that fundamentalists, those on the other side of the “barricade,” are so utterly other as to put themselves beyond the reach of analysis. Tied to the image of the fundamentalist-as-other is an equally significant feature of secular ideology, namely a historicizing structure that approaches religion by way of its particular relation to temporality. The familiar Weberian claim that religion is in decline is the most visible example of this, but Zizek provides another. If the traditional language of “secularization” suggests that religion’s decline is inevitable, the language of “return” suggests some tidal rhythm that allows it to keep resurfacing. Though it might seem that there is a contradiction here between Zizek’s claim and the traditional line, the point of Zizek’s claim is not to critique the traditional position but simply to reverse it. The fact that secular historicism has trouble accounting for such returns is not itself a cause of distress, although religion’s “return” obviously is. This is not the first time a claim of return has been uttered, but its use necessitates a certain degree of forgetfulness.

     

    The more Zizek’s historicizing language about religion is examined, the less difference there appears to be between the traditional claim to decline and this latest announcement of return. In Weber’s Protestant Ethic, the stance is one of distance; religion is made an object of study, and its value is paradoxically derived from the assumption that it is vanishing. In his conclusion, Weber remarks that “the idea of duty in one’s calling prowls about in our lives like the ghost of dead religious beliefs” (182). The death of religion is so deeply presumed that it provides the kind of automatic reference point necessary for a simile. For Zizek, religion is not simply another element of culture to be studied and is certainly not vanishing from history. In fact its ahistoricity relative to other elements of culture, combined with the abhorrent reality of its “fundamentalist” manifestations, give it a peculiar and traumatic presence. In taking the fight to Christianity, insisting that it must be made to confess its alliance with Marxism, Zizek gives the impression that there is more than an external threat here–not simply a political challenge but an epistemological problem. It could certainly be argued that this anxiety is already latent in Weber’s assumption of theoretical distance, the insistence on containing religion within a framework of historical necessity. Nearly a century after Weber, religion has demonstrated an unexpected staying power, and the position of distance collapses. The question that haunts the background is the same.

     

    In order to function as an assumption, the question itself has to stay in the background. If made visible, it might read thus: How can secular thought tolerate the idea that religions continue to exist at all? More specifically, how can secular thought approach those forms of faith that make their political presence felt while subjugating the concerns of history to those of eternity (i.e., “fundamentalists”)? Once asked, the question smacks of the “immodest demands of transcendental narcissism” that William Connolly has ascribed to secular thought (8), a charge that would seem to require retrenchment of its claims to cultural and epistemological ascendancy. But in this book, the latest and boldest in a tradition of such immodesty, the shape of the answer still conceals its question.3 Clearly, the persistence of religion as a political and cultural force contradicts secular assumptions. But the self/other dichotomy created by the image of the “fundamentalist freak” places the blame for this contradiction on fundamentalists. The frequently declared “return” of religion, despite what secular thought knows to be true of its continuing existence, becomes the very evidence that return is unthinkable. In the tone of Zizek we might say that the fantasy of fundamentalism works like this: We all know that religion, because it is in decline, is illegitimate at best and potentially monstrous; therefore, if it is discovered that religion is not in decline at all and is in fact not only a living element of culture but a political and intellectual force as well, this proves beyond a shadow of a doubt just how monstrous it is!

     

    Given the circular nature of such assumptions about fundamentalism, it is not surprising that Zizek does little to analyze it as such. After the preface, he largely ignores religion for several chapters, turning instead to the issue that has always been central to his thought: the relationship between psychoanalytic conceptions of the subject and Marxist conceptions of ideology and politics. One of the central claims Zizek makes about subjectivity, stated here in a vocabulary less explicitly Lacanian than he has used in the past, is that “the paradox of the subject is that it exists only through its own radical impossibility, through a ‘bone in the throat’ that forever prevents it (the subject) from achieving its full ontological identity” (28). As always, such formulations are surrounded by examples (though again, this is not the best word for them) from the realm of culture and especially popular culture. There is a discussion of the crucial place of trash or excrement in postmodern art, an analysis of Coke as the ultimate example of surplus enjoyment, and a reading of the place of simulation in the constitution of sexual relationships in My Best Friend’s Wedding. In addition to this typical procedure, however, there is a reconsideration of the whole question of “radical impossibility” in light of current problems in Marxist thought. In this book even more than in his previous work, it is clear that for Zizek psychoanalysis is not merely a way to upgrade Marxism by making it more sensitive to questions of culture and subjectivity. A psychoanalytically informed Marxism seems to Zizek the best hope for a systematic critique of Marxism’s weaknesses and failures in the context of post-Soviet Europe.

     

    The failure of Communism, Zizek insists, was not the result of some defeat from without by the forces of capitalism. Instead, Communism was already “a fantasy inherent to capitalism itself” (18). If capitalism struggles with the contradictions created by surplus value and finds itself plunged again and again into crisis, then Communism is the fantasy that such crises could be abolished forever while the productive drive of capitalism is retained. In other words, Communism is a fantasy that the “radical impossibility” of the capitalist economy could be overcome without altering the structures of desire and enjoyment it produces. Zizek asserts not only that the progressive/utopian idea of pushing capitalism toward some final stage into Communism is a trap, but also that there is no hope of some return to pre-modern conditions which would do away with capitalist machinery and economics (as Tyler Durden aspires to do in Fight Club, to mention a film that will no doubt find its way into Zizek’s work in the very near future). Marxism must continue its work stripped of all its fantasies about a past before the advent of Capital or about a future that awaits it:

     

    The task of today’s thought is thus double: on the one hand, how to repeat the Marxist “critique of political economy” without the utopian-ideological notion of Communism as its inherent standard; on the other, how to imagine actually breaking out of the capitalist horizon without falling into the trap of returning to the eminently premodern notion of a balanced, (self)-restrained society. (19-20)

     

    Needless to say, this double task challenges Marxist theory far more than the business of critiquing artifacts of popular culture. Having implicated Marxism in capitalism’s “radical impossibility” in the fullest possible way, Zizek then attempts to work toward a new means of surpassing that impossibility. It is at this point that religion reappears, this time in the role of ally.

     

    Zizek’s key move is a transmutation of the problem of “radical impossibility” that leads back into the realm of theology. The double bind of Marxist theory, he asserts, has much in common with the paradox of the law in Christianity and Judaism. The problem of surpassing the fantasy of Communism without falling into fantasies of historical regression is seen to parallel the problem of how, finally, to settle the law’s demands. This second double bind is expressed thus:

     

    The “repressed” of Jewish monotheism is not the wealth of pagan sacred orgies and deities but the disavowed excessive nature of its own fundamental gestures: that is–to use the standard terms–the crime that founds the rule of the Law itself, the violent gesture that brings about a regime which retroactively makes this gesture itself illegal/criminal. (63)

     

    The “violent gesture” Zizek discusses here is the killing of the lawgiver that Freud posits in Moses and Monotheism, but it is translated into “standard terms,” that is, into the terms of a Lacanian discourse that can comprehend the productive drives of capitalism on the one hand and the cycle of law and transgression on the other. Just as Marxism is denied both the fantasy of a return to a “premodern” economy and the hope of a utopian future for capitalism, so Judaism is cut off from pagan conditions where the regime of the law does not yet exist and from a future in which the demands of the law could be met once and for all. Zizek’s leap from ideology to theology is a large one, but it is evidently made in the most serious way. The paradox that structures the Judeo-Christian economy is posited as a kind of spiritual proto-capitalism, giving explicit form to Zizek’s initial claim of a “direct lineage from Christianity to Marxism.”

     

    It is clear that Zizek does not think Christianity in any of its institutional forms provides the solution to Marxism’s dilemma. However, he still finds in Christian theology formulations that can point the way. The essence of the “authentic Christian legacy” is found in another passage from Paul, his analysis of the relationship between law and transgression in Romans 7. Paul’s observation that without law there is no knowledge of sin becomes an exploration of Christianity as a move to end the cycle of law and transgression. Far from simply attempting to fill up the structure of Judaic law through messianic redemption, Christianity seeks to move beyond the structure altogether. Zizek asks:

     

    What if the Christian wager is not Redemption in the sense of the possibility for the domain of the universal Law retroactively to “sublate”–integrate, pacify, erase–its traumatic origins, but something radically different, the cut into the Gordian knot of the vicious cycle of Law and its founding transgression? (100)

     

    What enables this cut is agape, which “simultaneously avoids narcissistic regression and remains outside the confines of the Law” (112-13). If all this sounds familiar, it is because it makes Christianity bear such a strong resemblance to a psychoanalytic model of self-transformation. Zizek even goes so far as to claim that “while it is easy to enjoy acting in a egoistic way against one’s duty, it is, perhaps, only as the result of psychoanalytic treatment that one can acquire the capacity to enjoy doing one’s duty” (141).4

     

    If we take Zizek’s claims simply as a reading of certain key moments in the writings of Paul, it is difficult to dispute the plausibility of the resemblance between psychoanalytic treatment and Christian conversion.5 But it is difficult to avoid the thought that there is a pattern of fetishism at work in a theoretical position that enthusiastically embraces those elements of Christianity which match psychoanalytic theory while rejecting what cannot be subsumed with corresponding zeal. Do we not have here an example of the “double attitude” Freud discusses, which simultaneously venerates and denigrates the fetish? Are not Zizek’s defense of the “subversive core of Christianity” (119) and his hostility for “fundamentalist freaks” two aspects of the same construction? Here we see how the collapse of Weber’s theoretical distance brings religion into play on both sides of the “barrier”; religion is at once a source of authorization and an uncanny threat. At the same time that it provokes the most extreme ideological hostility, religion’s traumatic status is the impetus for a struggle over its “legacy,” the core value that is the ostensible prize to be won from “fundamentalism.”

     

    Zizek’s way of treating religion in general and Christianity in particular suggests that before we secular critics declare ourselves fit to pass judgment on the nature of the “authentic Christian legacy,” we have much to do in the way of understanding the role played by religion in secular fantasy. In The Fragile Absolute, religion is made the basis for a solution to a dilemma in Marxist thought, providing both an enemy to oppose from without and a way to restructure difficulties from within. The question for secular theory at present is how to avoid this procedure of deploying religion in the interest of this or that project. If many of Zizek’s moves are examples of what we should avoid, his concepts of subjectivity nevertheless suggest the direction we might go from here. Agape, he argues, gives us a way to “liberate [ourselves] from the grip of existing social reality” by “renounc[ing] the transgressive fantasmic supplement that attaches us to it” (149). This renunciation must take the form of “the radical gesture of ‘striking at oneself’” (150), of aiming directly at the object of desire that grounds subjective and ideological stability. This gesture is illustrated, not surprisingly, by popular texts: The Shawshank Redemption, Beloved, Medea, and others. The line of thought I have been suggesting is meant to serve as another illustration, one that hits closer to home. The way in which Zizek’s argument is overtaken by the fetish of fundamentalism (and its complement, the “subversive core”) suggests that at the moment secular discourse needs to “strike at itself,” to make the secular and not religion the primary object of its critique.

     

    As a beginning, it seems worthwhile to get to work on a redefinition of the word “secular,” which needs to be understood (and has been used here, I hope) as marking a certain subjective stance with its own complex psychic life and not simply a set of pre-given discursive structures. At the same time, the secular will have to be more rigorously critiqued as an ideology which gives a place for that subjectivity. Such a redefinition will be greatly helped by the work of Slavoj Zizek. If his use of “fundamentalism” is cautionary, his understanding of ideological subjectivity gives us a way forward. Whatever “forward” means, it will involve neither a renewal of hostilities with this or that form of religion on the basis of historical presumption nor a “return,” repentant or otherwise, to a theological source of authorization. The history of such hostilities and returns should now become the focus. In the realm of critical theory, The Fragile Absolute is the latest chapter in that history. Caught between a vision of “the tears of agape” on the one hand and a fear of “fundamentalist freaks” on the other, it stops short of a recognition of its own secular ideology.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Thanks to Larry Scanlon for a timely word on Pauline scholarship.

     

    2. The majority of this review was completed before September 11 and I thought it inadvisable to attempt a revision which would address recent events at length. Suffice it to say that official and unofficial responses alike have largely conformed to the generic parameters I describe for “fundamentalism” as a discourse. We have repeatedly heard the notion that fundamentalism is beyond the reach of analysis, that it falls into some category of absolute evil which renders it unworthy of discursive engagement (and eminently worthy of hostility). Even some responses which attempt to challenge this notion nonetheless end up reiterating it. Take for example the parallels many have made between Osama bin Laden and Jerry Falwell. If the impetus of the parallel is to upset racist and nationalist notions about fundamentalism, the end result is to establish a more unilateral prejudice which blocks an understanding of fundamentalism as a discourse (and does little to get at the roots of racism or nationalism either).

     

    3. I am thinking of Louis Althusser’s discussion of Marx in the opening chapter of Reading “Capital.” Althusser insists that Marx’s achievement lies not in his providing more accurate answers to the questions posed by classical economics but rather in his ability to perceive the real nature of its questions. So here, the point is not to differ with Zizek concerning what ought to be done with the Christian legacy nor suggest a different response to the “return” of religion. Rather than attempting to answer such questions, the unexpressed intention of the questions themselves must be examined.

     

    4. This kind of enjoyment would seem also to be the subject of Blue and particularly of its conclusion. The music playing in the background as Julie is “reconciled with the universe” is a piece written by the heroine to celebrate the formation of the EEC. Throughout the movie she has disavowed authorship of the piece, but at the last she decides to claim it as her own and complete it. What strikes a chord with Zizek’s view of agape is that Julie does not act against her duty, as it were, and refuse to complete a work officially intended to commemorate a new era of capitalism in Europe. Instead, she actively and passionately embraces the work, though in such a way as to give it a more particular and more radical meaning in relation to her life. Such an intensely private political vision raises questions about the value of agape other than those I discuss here.

     

    5. Though my concern with Zizek’s view of Christianity is the way it functions as a secular ideology, it is at least worth mentioning that his “Christian” view of Paul has related problems as well. By stressing the distinction between Judaism and Christianity in a way that re-canonizes Paul as a Christian, Zizek makes a highly contestable theological claim, even if his intentions are only to reclaim Paul for Lacan, Freud, and Marx.

    Works Cited

     

    • Althuser, Louis, and Etienne Balibar. Reading “Capital.” Trans. Ben Brewster. New York: Random House, 1970.
    • Connolly, William. Why I Am Not a Secularist. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Fetishism.” Trans. Joan Riviere. Sexuality and the Psychology of Love. Ed. Philip Rieff. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1963.
    • Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Trans. Talcott Parsons. New York: Routledge, 1992.

     

  • Returning to the Mummy

    Lisa Hopkins

    School of Cultural Studies
    Sheffield Hallam University
    L.M.Hopkins@shu.ac.uk

     

    Review of: The Mummy Returns.Dir. Stephen Sommers. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Rachel Weisz, and Arnold Vosloo. MCA/Universal, 2002.

     

    On her arrival at a pre-election Conservative Party rally at the Plymouth Pavilion in May 2002, former British Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher cracked a rare joke. “I was told beforehand my arrival was unscheduled,” she said, “but on the way here I passed a local cinema and it turns out you were expecting me after all. The billboard read, ‘The Mummy Returns’” (MacAskill). Predictably, this got a laugh from her audience. What, however, did she actually mean? The word “mummy” has two senses–an affectionate diminutive of “mother” and an embalmed corpse–and, depending perhaps on one’s own political affiliation, either might seem an appropriate description of Thatcher. The Guardian seemed to incline to the former when it headed its report “Tory matriarch goes on stage and off message,” which posited her as a kind of monstrous mother returning to smother and stymie the hapless William Hague, but The Independent quoted an unidentified former Tory minister as saying after the election, “I wish The Mummy had stayed in her box…. Every time she pops up, she costs us votes” (Grice), where the reference to “box” seems clearly to align her with a corpse. It is, perhaps, suggestive that the generally left-wing, anti-Thatcher Guardian should think of her as a mother, while a former Tory minister, who might reasonably be supposed to be more in sympathy with her, should think of her merely as a corpse: is the mother actually more menacing than the embalmed body?

     

    At first sight, this ambiguity may seem to be entirely absent from the film to which Thatcher was referring, Stephen Sommers’s 2002 blockbuster The Mummy Returns, the sequel to his 1999 hit The Mummy, since the mummy in question is, in both films, male: it is that of the high priest Imhotep, condemned to eternal undeath after he murdered the Pharaoh Seti I because he desired the latter’s mistress, Ankh-Su-Namun. We see both their love and their death in a brief vignette at the start of the film, and then switch swiftly to the early twentieth century, where Brendan Fraser’s legionnaire becomes involved in helping Rachel Weisz’s Egyptologist search for Hamunaptra, the city where Seti is supposed to have concealed his treasure. Inevitably, Weisz accidentally brings Imhotep back to life, and he proceeds to regenerate by sucking dry the team of American adventurers who first disturbed his resting place. This seems a bit rough on them, since it was Weisz’s character, Evie Carnahan, who actually reanimated him, but then Imhotep has designs of another sort on her, since he proposes to sacrifice her to effect the resurrection of Ankh-Su-Namun. To this extent, Sommers’s Mummy obviously pays homage to Karl Freund’s 1932 film of the same name, where the heroine, Zita Johann’s Helen Grosvenor, is identified by Boris Karloff’s reanimated mummy as the long-lost princess Ankh-Su-Namun. The debt is also acknowledged when a severed hand moves of its own accord across the floor, though Sommer’s film of course leaves its predecessor far behind in special effects, even allowing itself a little self-congratulation when Kevin J. O’Connor’s disreputable Beni says to Imhotep, “I loved the whole sand-wall effect…. Beautiful, just beautiful.”

     

    It goes without saying that Evie is rescued from Imhotep in the end by Fraser’s character, the relentlessly gung-ho Rick O’Connell, thus leaving the way clear for a sequel (the film was such an instant hit that studio bosses requested a second one immediately). The Mummy Returns was released almost exactly two years after its predecessor and brought together pretty much every character from the first film who wasn’t dead, plus two who were, since Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun both returned. It also added a new villain, the Scorpion King, played by the wrestler The Rock; gave Evie and Rick an eight-year-old son, Alex; and introduced Rick’s old friend Izzy (played by Shaun Parkes). Plot, as many reviewers commented, is not the strong point of The Mummy Returns, but to give a quick summary, Alex is kidnapped by Ankh-Su-Namun and Imhotep; Izzy produces a dirigible which allows the frantic parents to trace their son; and there is a spectacular three-way showdown between Rick, Imhotep, and the Scorpion King which concludes with the villains defeated but with enough life in them still to make it back for the inevitable second sequel, which will doubtless have even bigger battles and ever more monstrous monsters.

     

    These, then, sound like clear-cut action films, with no place for the kind of ambiguity that was operating when the title of The Mummy Returns was borrowed as a designation for Margaret Thatcher. In fact, it becomes increasingly clear that the ambiguity is indeed active in Sommers’s film, for there is an alternative candidate for the role of the returning mummy, one whom the film arguably does, at least on some level, find more menacing even than Imhotep. Both kinds of mummies are scary, as I hope to show by tracing the changing nature of the narratives of Sommers’s two films in relation both to each other and to their influences and predecessors.

     

    Though the ambiguity in the nature of the menace is more pronounced in The Mummy Returns, it was to some extent present from the very outset of Sommers’s project. The souvenir film program for The Mummy lists “Jerry Glover’s Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies.” Glover’s number 6 is the 1959 The Mummy, which, he observes, “spawned three sequels, proving that, along with Dracula, Hammer’s heart belonged to mummy” (31). Forty years later, the 1999 The Mummy showed clear signs of an allegiance equally split between mummies and Dracula, for those familiar with the works of Bram Stoker could hardly fail to notice that Sommers’s first film was, in many respects, a heady mixture of Dracula and The Jewel of Seven Stars. The conjunction is an interesting one in many respects. It is notable that eight out of ten of Jerry Glover’s “Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies” center, like Dracula and Frankenstein, on male monsters, and in recent years the trend toward co-opting vampirism as a metaphor for AIDS has meant that it is the sexual predatoriness of men rather than women that tends to be emphasized, making Stoker’s male monster a culturally useful avatar. When Stoker wrote The Jewel of Seven Stars, though, Queen Victoria had only just died, leaving the memory of a long matriarchy fresh in people’s minds, and the alarming figure of the New Woman, to which Stoker refers directly in Dracula, loomed equally large in the popular consciousness. Consequently, perhaps, both his mummy and four out of the five vampires we encounter in Dracula (as well as the pseudo-vampire in The Lady of the Shroud) are female, as also was the first vampire to be encountered in the original version of the novel, Countess Dolingen of Gratz. If The Mummy wanted to explore anxieties about gender, therefore, what better way than to draw on both Stoker’s kinds of monsters, his mummy and his vampire?

     

    Given the fact that the film’s central character was a mummy, the debt to The Jewel of Seven Stars was unsurprising. This had already been the inspiration, as Glover acknowledges, for Blood From the Mummy’s Tomb (1971) and The Awakening (1980), not to mention Jeffrey Obrow’s 1997 Bram Stoker’s Legend of the Mummy and, subsequently, David DeCoteau’s Ancient Evil: Scream of the Mummy (2000). Some of these show more obvious signs of indebtedness than Sommers’s film, but there are clear parallels between The Jewel of Seven Stars and The Mummy. In each case, the mummy of an accursed individual who hopes for resurrection is buried in a hidden grave whose occupant is identified only as “nameless.” In The Mummy, the inscription on the tomb of Imhotep is “he who must not be named,” and Evie comments that the intention is clearly to destroy both his body and his soul–“This man must have been condemned not only in this life but in the next” (though this is also a detail found in Universal’s original 1932 The Mummy). In The Jewel of Seven Stars, Corbeck is told by the locals when he asks about Tera’s tomb that “there was no name; and that anyone who should name it would waste away in life so that at death nothing of him would remain to be raised again in the Other World” (96). In each, cats play a part in the story–in the case of The Mummy, in an episodic and ultimately unsatisfactory way which, in its failure to be logically integrated into the narrative, clearly suggests that an original source text has not been fully assimilated. (There was a cat in the 1932 Mummy, but it was Imhotep’s ally rather than his enemy.) In each, the natives show a fear not shared by the explorers, which in both instances proves abundantly justified by the fact that both tombs are booby-trapped. In both texts, too, a disembodied hand moves by itself, and in both the identity of a daughter proves to have been fundamentally constituted by an Egyptologist father. In Stoker’s novel, Margaret Trelawny proves to have been radically shaped by the explorations her father was undertaking at the time of her birth, whilst in The Mummy, Evie owes her very existence to her father’s passion for Egypt and his subsequent decision to marry her Egyptian mother. Even Evie’s employment in an Egyptological library is due to the fact that her parents were among its most generous benefactors. Finally, in each case the reanimation of a female mummy is partially achieved and then abruptly aborted, and in each this leads directly to the death of at least one of the main male characters: in the original ending of The Jewel of Seven Stars all but Malcolm Ross died, and in The Mummy it is because he is distracted by the fate of Ankh-Su-Namun that Imhotep fails to stop Jonathan from reading the incantation that will make him mortal and allow Rick to kill him. (In The Mummy Returns, it will, of course, be even more obvious that it is to Ankh-Su-Namun that Imhotep directly owes his death.)

     

    That it should be the attempt to create a female monster which ultimately brings about the destruction of the male monster is, however, not a characteristic of The Jewel of Seven Stars–where those who die as a result are those whom we have by and large identified as “good” characters. It does, however, serve as a pretty fair description of both Dracula and its great avatar Frankenstein: in Dracula, it is the count’s vamping of Lucy which first alerts the Crew of Light to his existence, and his attempted vamping of Mina then creates a telepathic link that allows them to locate and destroy him; in Frankenstein, Victor’s refusal to complete the female monster leads ultimately to the deaths of both himself and the Creature, not to mention Elizabeth. There are also other crossovers that weave their way between Dracula, The Jewel of Seven Stars, and The Mummy, most notably in the scene in which Imhotep enters Evie’s locked room in the form of sand, a clear emblem of affiliation with the desert, before metamorphosing into a man who bends down and kisses her as she sleeps, just as Dracula does with Mina.

     

    Equally, though, there are some elements of The Mummy that appear to owe their genesis to Dracula alone. In The Jewel of Seven Stars, the alien being is female and, in an obvious parody of the contemporary popularity of “mummy” striptease acts, must submit to being stripped naked by the Edwardian gentlemen who have control of her corpse. In The Mummy, however, as in Dracula, these roles are reversed because the monster is male and poised to sexually prey on modern females. The increasing skimpiness of Imhotep’s costume, culminating in a pair of briefs and a cloak for his planned reunion with his lost love, makes this abundantly clear; the cape-like cloak further reinforces the echoes of Dracula, as does the fact that the fleeing soul of Ankh-Su-Namun clearly resembles a bat. Equally, Beni’s attempt to deter Imhotep by holding up a crucifix might serve to align Imhotep with a vampire–this is certainly how it is seen in Max Allan Collins’s official novelization of the film (Mummy 156). The way in which Imhotep sucks people dry in order to rejuvenate also directly parallels the way in which the count’s blood-drinking causes him to appear significantly younger when Jonathan Harker sees him in London, and indeed the curse on Imhotep’s tomb explicitly affirms that he will return initially as an “Un-dead.” The shared name of Jonathan Harker and Evie’s brother Jonathan Carnahan functions as a further link between the two texts, as does Imhotep’s ability to command the elements and predatory lower life-forms. Similarly, the idea of using a modern woman to resurrect an ancient one may be central to The Jewel of Seven Stars, but the specifically erotic inflection provided by the fact that in The Mummy it is not the dead woman herself but her long-lost lover who wishes to effect the resurrection is more reminiscent of Coppola’s Dracula than of Stoker’s mummy fiction. Also strongly echoing the basic situation of Dracula is the dearth of women in The Mummy and the subsequent fierceness of the competition over them.

     

    Most interestingly, both texts share a fascination with Jewishness. As many critics have noticed, Dracula, with its bloodsucking, gold-grubbing, hook-nosed monster, is a clearly anti-Semitic text. The Mummy, meanwhile, shows strong debts not only to Stoker but also to Steven Spielberg’s Raiders of the Lost Ark, whose plot centers on the recovery of the Hebrew Ark of the Covenant. This is perhaps most obvious in the depiction of the hero, which is also where The Mummy departs most sharply from Stoker. Stoker’s heroes, with the notable exception of Rupert Sent Leger in The Lady of the Shroud, tend to be found wanting in moments of crisis; all too often, they are still worrying about what they should do long after they have lost the moment when they could have done anything at all. In this respect Rick O’Connell, singlehandedly five times more effective than the entire Crew of Light put together (not to mention the negligible Frank Whemple in the 1932 Mummy), clearly owes much less to Stoker than to Indiana Jones, of whom he is obviously a direct descendant.

     

    There are a number of points of marked similarity between The Mummy and the Indiana Jones trilogy: the long-lost Egyptian city, locatable only by an antique map, which houses fabulous treasures; the transformation in the appearance of the hero, from adventurer-archaeologist to college professor in the case of Indiana Jones and from legionnaire to wild man and back again in the case of Rick O’Connell; the repeated hair’s-breadth escapes from danger; and our hero’s ultimate disdain of personal profit. (Though the camels on which Rick and Evie escape are in fact loaded with the treasure stashed in the saddlebags by Beni, which presumably finances the splendor of their house in The Mummy Returns, they are unaware of these riches at the time.) There is also the fact that Evie, like Marion in Raiders of the Lost Ark, has to make up to her captor to distract his attention from the doings of her true love; there is the presence of hideous supernatural peril and of parallels between The Mummy‘s Ardeth Bay and his followers and the hereditary guardians of the holy place in Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade; and at the end of both The Mummy and Raiders of the Lost Ark the villain’s soul is borne away to Hell. Even Imhotep’s nonchalant crunching of the beetle which enters his face through the hole in his cheek could be seen as a reprise of the moment in Raiders of the Lost Ark in which a fly crawls across the cheek of the French archaeologist Belloc while he is speaking, apparently disappearing into his mouth without him noticing. (This moment has been airbrushed out of the video version of Raiders of the Lost Ark but was clearly visible in the original film.)

     

    In the Jewish Spielberg’s Raiders of the Lost Ark, however, the villains are Nazis, whom Indiana Jones, though not himself Jewish, detests. By contrast, The Mummy is not without its share of Jewish actors–Oded Fehr’s Ardeth Bay, Rachel Weisz’s Evelyn–but they play Arab characters (Evelyn is half-Egyptian, Ardeth Bay a Tuareg), and though the mummy (unlike Dracula) has no fear of the cross or of the image of Buddha, he spares Beni and indeed gives him gold when he brandishes the Star of David and utters what Imhotep terms “the language of the slaves” (Hebrew–which Beni conveniently happens to know). Later, what finally returns Imhotep to mortality is Evie’s utterance of a word which sounds suspiciously like “Kaddish,” and one might also note the film’s distinct animus against the redundancy of the British air force, in the presence of the emblematically named Winston, who have nothing better to do than fool around drunkenly and futilely in the Middle East–with, perhaps, the possible implication that this was effectively what they were doing when they later presided over the birth of the state of Israel. In this respect, the conjunction of Dracula with The Jewel of Seven Stars allows not only for a convergence of vampires and mummies, but also for another convergence which the film seems to find ideologically interesting: that of Egypt with Israel. (It is notable that the equivalent character to Beni in the 1932 Mummy, who is also identified as a hereditary slave of the Egyptians, was Nubian.)

     

    Even more anxiety-ridden than the film’s depiction of racial and national identities, however, is its depiction of gender. Although O’Connell is far closer to the classically heroic status of Indiana Jones than to the beleaguered masculinity of Stoker’s heroes, there are also distinct differences from the Indiana Jones films in general and from Raiders of the Lost Ark in particular. In the first place, in The Mummy it is the heroine, not the hero, who is knowledgeable about Egypt, able to decipher hieroglyphic inscriptions and correct the obnoxious Beni’s translation of Imhotep’s ancient Egyptian. When Jonathan Hyde’s Egyptologist dismisses his rivals’ expedition on the grounds that its leader is a woman and therefore incapable of knowing anything, the camera immediately cuts to Evie expounding precisely what she knows. Conversely, although Brendan Fraser (who plays O’Connell) remarks in the film program that his character is “sometimes the brain and sometimes the brawn in a situation” (11), the element of brawn is far more pronounced, not least in the fact that whereas college professor Indiana Jones always preferred to try his hand with a rope, falling back on a gun principally for the sake of a gag–as in the famous scene in Raiders of the Lost Ark where, confronted with a crack swordsman, he shoots him–O’Connell shoots (usually with two guns) at everything, whether it is animate or not. (At one point, Evie, being led to be sacrificed, hears a gunshot outside and says happily, “O’Connell!” Quite.) Even when he is standing against a wall at which bullets are being shot at regular intervals, Evie has to tug him out of what will obviously be the trajectory of the next one. His resolute preference for not using whatever intelligence he may possess seems all part of a reversal of roles that is completed when, in a direct inversion of a scene from Raiders of the Lost Ark, the build-up to a kiss between hero and heroine is interrupted by one of them passing out–only this time it is the heroine, not the hero, who loses consciousness, and it is through drunkenness, not excessive fatigue.

     

    In one way, what seems to be at work here is simply a cultural shift which has ensured that the feistiness of Raiders of the Lost Ark‘s Marion has been replaced by quietist, post-feminist gender roles–it is notable that Evie, unlike Marion, cannot hold her drink and falls over when she tries to learn to throw punches. (Indeed one might notice that the Indiana Jones films themselves discarded Marion, and in fact never settled to a heroine, with Karen Allen’s Marion giving way without explanation or comment to Kate Capshaw’s Willie Scott in the second and no heroine at all in the third, since Alison Doody’s Dr. Elsa Schneider turns out to be a villainess.) Thus, though Evie may be clever, she is quite incapable of looking after herself (she even has an accident in her own library) and must rely on O’Connell periodically to rescue her. Indeed, one might well conclude that the film’s ultimate moral is that while half-naked hussies will only attract losers, nice demure girls will always find themselves properly taken care of.

     

    Equally, however, there are clear traces of a counternarrative at work in The Mummy. In this respect, the most interesting figure is Evie’s feckless brother, Jonathan. The first time we see him is when Evie, alone in the Egyptological museum, hears a noise. Clearly scared, she goes to investigate and is horribly startled by Jonathan popping up out of a sarcophagus. Quietly but implicitly, Jonathan is thus initially identified with a mummy, though he himself seems immediately to seek to undo this by addressing Evie as “Old Mum.” In the next sequence, Jonathan and Evie visit an imprisoned O’Connell, whose pocket Jonathan had previously picked. Reaching through the bars, O’Connell punches Jonathan and kisses Evie, actions which, amongst other purposes, seem clearly to interpellate them in their respective gender roles. Jonathan, however, does not stay put in his, because not only does he prove to need rescuing by O’Connell nearly as often as Evie does, he also puts himself into her place in other ways: when O’Connell, having seen off Imhotep, asks Evie, “Are you all right?,” it is Jonathan who answers, “Well… not sure.” Not for nothing does he refer to O’Connell at one point as “the man” (assuming as he does so that O’Connell’s injunction to stay put and keep out of danger applies to him as well as to Evie). Most notably, when O’Connell sets off to rescue the parasol-carrying Egyptologist from Imhotep, he tells Jonathan, Henderson, and Daniels to come with him and Evie to stay in safety. The three men, however, are all too scared to come, while Evie is equally adamant that she won’t stay behind. Not until O’Connell scoops her up in a fireman’s lift, tosses her on the bed, and locks the door on her are gender roles restored–but even then it is visibly at the price of conceding that however firmly they may thus be instantiated, the majority of the film’s characters don’t actually conform to them.

     

    Moreover, intertextual echoes may well mean that, for some members of the audience at least, even O’Connell’s position is not fully assured. When he appears long-haired and unkempt in a Cairo prison, Brendan Fraser is obviously reprising his role as the eponymous hero of the 1997 Disney film George of the Jungle, while Evie’s “What’s a nice place like this doing in a girl like me?” recalls the chat-up line George proposes to use on Ursula, “What’s a nice girl like you doing in a plane like this?” In one sense George is of course the ultimate wild man, over whom all Ursula’s girlfriends swoon when they see him running with a horse, but he does also appear in a dress and, at the outset, has indeed no concept of gender at all, referring to the hyper-feminine Ursula as a “fella.” Since Ursula dislikes her official fiancé and runs off instead with the socially unacceptable outsider George, the possible intertext with The Mummy is doubly interesting here.

     

    In The Mummy Returns, the note of uncertainty thus introduced in The Mummy is further developed, and new areas of anxiety are highlighted. The Mummy Returns opened, in Britain at least, to a barrage of distinctly lukewarm reviews that stressed the incoherence of its plot. The Independent reviewed it twice in two days and hated it both times, with Anthony Quinn demanding, “Are you following all this? I don’t think the filmmakers could care less if you do or not…. There’s nothing so old-fashioned as plot development here, just a pile-up of set-pieces.” Peter Preston in The Observer asked, “What’s going on here? Silly question, one beyond any computer’s figuring…. Summon the Raiders of the Lost Plot. Nothing in Stephen Sommers’s screenplay makes, or is intended to make, any sense,” while Xan Brooks in The Guardian more succinctly advised, “Forget trying to follow the plot.”

     

    There certainly are uncertainties about its plot. “Why?” asks Imhotep when the Scorpion King hoists up the curator, and one can think of few better questions. What is the curator’s motivation? Why does he need Imhotep to fight the Scorpion King? What happens to Evie’s previously mortal wound when she is resurrected? What is the nature of the apparent feud between Ardeth Bey and Lock-Nah? Who is Patricia Velazquez’s character before the soul of Ankh-Su-Namun takes possession of her? Is Rick really a Medjai, and if so, does it matter? Where exactly would Anubis, a jackal, wear a bracelet? Perhaps most puzzlingly, who on earth are the pygmies? The only possible explanation for them seems to come from Rick’s remark right at the beginning about the shortness of Napoleon, together with production designer Allan Cameron’s observation, in The Mummy Unwrapped, that design for the film had relied heavily on a volume of Egyptian sketches produced for Napoleon.

     

    A far deeper faultline, however, runs through the second film, and that is its representation of its characters. In the preview of The Mummy Returns included in the “ultimate edition” of The Mummy, director Stephen Sommers observes that his paramount aim in making the sequel was to retain as many of the same characters as possible, but to make their relationships “more intertwining.” He has certainly reprised for all he is worth: Cairo Museum in the first film is replaced by the British Museum in this, Alex collapses pillars in a domino-like fashion just as Evie did the bookshelves, and he can’t read the last word of the incantation just as Jonathan couldn’t in the first film (and it’s the same word). So close are the similarities, indeed, that Anthony Quinn in The Independent complained that “this didn’t look like a sequel. This looked like a remake… this is the worst case of déjà vu I’ve ever had in a cinema.” The debt to Indiana Jones, too, is not only revisited but extended, with the lamplit digging scene directly pastiching that in Raiders of the Lost Ark and the presence of Alex invoking the spinoff series Young Indiana Jones, particularly in the scene in which he runs through the ruins of a temple, with gunfire all around him, looking like a miniature version of his father in the legionnaire sequence of the first film. (This element is even more pronounced in the spinoff novelization Revenge of the Scorpion King, billed as the first of “The Mummy Chronicles,” in which Alex, now 12, bands together with Jewish refugee Rachel to prevent Hitler doing a deal with Anubis.)

     

    There are changes, though. Perhaps the most noticeable of these is that almost as strong as the influence of the Indiana Jones trilogy is that of the Star Wars films, and most particularly The Phantom Menace, which opened in the same summer as the original Mummy and was thus its direct comparator and rival. Nicholas Barber in The Independent on Sunday scathingly listed just a few of the similarities:

     

    The Phantom Menace introduced a mop-topped blond boy to the cast; The Mummy Returns does the same. The Phantom Menace used racial caricatures; The Mummy Returns has dozens of desert-folk machine-gunned and burned alive. And just as Star Wars had an archetypal fairy-tale clarity that was subsequently obscured by portentous back-story and pseudo-spiritual mumbo jumbo, The Mummy Returns is clogged up with complicated exposition and flashbacks that serve no purpose except to lay foundations for another sequel. It even blabs on about the sacred “Medjai” warriors – couldn’t Sommers have come up with a name that didn’t share four letters with Jedi?

     

    Other elements of similarity between the two films could also be pointed out. The final battle of The Mummy Returns, where the warriors of Anubis disappear on the death of the Scorpion King, clearly echoes the final fight of The Phantom Menace, where the droids drop when the mother ship is disabled (and in each case the large-scale fight is taking place in the open air while the crucial smaller one is in a confined space). When the first vision generated by the bracelet of Anubis fades away, there is a noise just like that of a light sabre. There are also echoes of the earlier Star Wars films. The new character Izzy closely parallels Lando Calrissian from The Empire Strikes Back: both are black (something to which Izzy draws attention by referring to Rick as “the white boy”), both are introduced by the hero to the heroine as an old acquaintance but immediately react in an apparently hostile way, and both supply an aircraft. Thus Rick, having started his career in the first film as Harrison Ford in the Indiana Jones trilogy, seems now to have been reinvented as Harrison Ford in the Star Wars trilogy, a parallel made even clearer when Ardeth, having identified him as a Medjai and Evelyn as the reincarnation of Nefertiri, tells him that it is his preordained role to protect a royal woman just as Han Solo protects Princess Leia.

     

    Most significantly, the incorporation of motifs and borrowings from the Star Wars series has helped The Mummy Returns become something which The Mummy, by and large, was not: Gothic. This is an element clearly present in Star Wars, where the ostensible opposition of Darth Vader and Luke Skywalker rapidly gives place to a paired and conflicted relationship in which the one sees the other in the mirror. In The Mummy, however, oppositions stay, by and large, opposed. There are one or two moments of doubling–Imhotep staring after his own soul-self as it is borne away to hell, the twinned books, Beni facing the mummy for the first time with matching expressions on their faces–but in general the film occupies a terrain in which the bad are simply bad and the good are simply good.

     

    In the second film, however, identities and affiliations prove much less stable: it is after all, as Max Allan Collins’s novelization declares, an expedition for Evie “to discover not the history of the pharaohs, but the meaning of her own dreams” (16-17). We may, for instance, be disconcerted to find Ardeth Bay in the company of the baddies, and although we may guess that his motive is to keep an eye on them, Rick’s first response is to smash him against the wall and demand to know where Evie is. Most notably, although actions are directly repeated from the first film, as with the reading of the incantation and the demolishing of the pillars, they are not performed by the same person, as though identities are shifting. There are also other doublings and pairings. We learn for the first time that Evie was Nefertiri in a previous life (a doubling strongly reminiscent of that of Margaret and Tera in Stoker’s The Jewel of Seven Stars). Similarly, Meela is Ankh-Su-Namun reincarnated and Rick’s tattoo seems to identify him as one of the Medjai. (Though this, unless it is leading up to a further sequel, proves to be a bit of a narrative red herring and is also complicated by the fact that the novelization for children describes the tattoo as proving that he is “a Masonic Templar” [Whitman 63] and the novelization for adults calls him a “Knight Templar” [Collins, Mummy Returns 96], even though common elements to both which do not appear in the film clearly indicate that both were based on the shooting script.)

     

    The most notable instance of these doublings and slippages takes us back to Margaret Thatcher’s joke. When Evie goes with Imhotep in the first film, she turns back to Rick and says, “If he makes me into a mummy, you’re the first one I’m coming after.” In one way, the meaning of this remark and of the surrounding sequence is obvious: she loves Rick and is hoping he will rescue her before Imhotep can kill her. But it is also shadowed by other meanings. In the first place, what would she be “coming after” Rick for–because she loves him, or because, having been made into a monster herself, she would seek him as prey? There would certainly be a direct Stokerian precedent here in a precisely parallel situation: Lucy’s attempted vamping of Arthur. More troublingly, from the first time he sees her, Imhotep has identified Evie with his lost love, Ankh-Su-Namun. Every time he has met her subsequently, he has tried to kiss her (and on one occasion has succeeded). He has therefore clearly been established as an alternative suitor. Of course, there might well seem to be no contest: O’Connell is dashing, handsome, honorable, and alive, whereas Imhotep passes through a variety of stages of decay and proposes to kill Evie. Nevertheless, a different interpretation is offered in Max Allan Collins’s novelization of the film.

     

    Collins–who, suggestively, also directed and novelized Mommy (1995) and Mommy’s Day (1997), in which an apparently perfect mother is revealed to be evil–seems several times to incriminate Evie. He develops the idea sketched in the sequence where she tells O’Connell and the Americans, “Let’s be nice, children. If we’re going to play together we must learn to share,” by having her think, “Men were such children” (142). He also makes Jonathan ask the Americans after the blinding of Burns, “Going back home to mummy?” (166). Again this develops a much fainter hint in the film, when Jonathan explains to Rick the meaning of a preparation chamber–“Mummies, my good son. This is where they made the mummies”–where sons and mothers are forced briefly but uneasily into conjunction. Most suggestively, Collins invents for the sleeping Evie a dream sequence in which she is having

     

    nearly delirious images of herself and O’Connell fleeing from the mummy across the ruins of the City of the Dead, only at times she was fleeing from Rick and holding on to the mummy’s hand… it was all very troubling, which was why she was moaning, even crying out in her fitful sleep. (188)

     

    For Collins, Imhotep here is less a monster than the handsome prince awakening Snow White (189). And after all, Rick has already had to demand of Evie, “You dream about dead guys?”

     

    Can this really be true? When Evie says to O’Connell, “if he makes me into a mummy, you’re the first one I’m coming after,” can her words, at any level, really be gesturing at an alternative possibility in which it is Imhotep who becomes her successful suitor, going so far as to impregnate her, and O’Connell whom she would seek to destroy? On the level of common sense, this is patently absurd. But on the darker levels of the subconscious, perhaps the film does not find its heroine so biddable as it might like–it is certainly not hard to read her slamming of the suitcase on Rick’s hands as a snapping vagina dentata, while the scarabs which emerge from mouths clearly recall the Alien films, with their clear interest in the monstrous-feminine–nor is its mummy quite so repellent as one might expect. In The Mummy Unwrapped, producer Sean Daniel refers to Imhotep as “an extremely dangerous and extremely handsome man,” and Pete Hammond, whose role as “film analyst” introduces an interesting ambiguity, opines that “people want to believe in a life after death situation,” and thus sees the figure of the mummy as representing, however bizarrely, a wish fulfilment rather than a threat. Certainly when Ardeth and Dr. Bey explain that Imhotep must still love Ankh-Su-Namun after three thousand years, Evie observes, “that’s very romantic,” and in one sense, so it is. It is of course unusual for a mummy fiction to include a romance element at all. (Though it is true that both The Jewel of Seven Stars and the 1932 Mummy do, both are nugatory.) We might thus expect the initial concentration on the romance of Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun to continue to be the focus of interest and to be viewed more sympathetically than ultimately it is. We certainly could not predict at that stage that the initial kiss between Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun would ultimately be replaced by that between Rick and Evie at the close, and though Ardeth Bay obviously regards Imhotep as evil, we are not necessarily inclined to take his word for it since, in the first place, others of the Medjai have already tried to stab Evie, and, in the second, Ardeth Bey was actually the alias used by Imhotep himself in the 1932 Mummy. And it is also noticeable that The Mummy Returns seems to find Imhotep so insufficiently scary that it feels obliged to supplement the menace he offers with that provided by the Scorpion King (who, in another instance of these films’ perverse ability to find their villains rather than their hero attractive, in fact upstages Imhotep so much that he is now set to star in his own spinoff, The Scorpion King, due for release in 2002).

     

    In one way, however, the Scorpion King proves unnecessary, because there is already an extra threat present in the second film, and it comes from Evie. However faint the hint of menace playing over her in the first film, it is far more clearly marked in the second. (The menace was also there in the 1932 Mummy, where Helen Grosvenor, pathologized from the outset by being under the care of the doctor, fed bromide when she puts on her make-up and tries to join Imhotep, and explicitly associated with the adulterous temptress Helen of Troy, is a reincarnation of Ankh-Su-Namun.) Indeed, while the treatment of O’Connell in The Mummy Returns is much as it was in The Mummy, the characterization of Evie has been fundamentally reconceived. Despite her hopelessness during the boxing lesson in the first film, where she displayed an inability to cope so profound that she even had to ask a blind man for help, she is now a superbly accomplished fighter and rescues Jonathan from Ankh-Su-Namun. She no longer needs her glasses, and she wears trousers. Most strikingly, toward the end of The Mummy Returns, there is an entirely unprepared-for narrative twist: Ankh-Su-Namun, on her way into the temple, turns and stabs Evie in the stomach, from which Evie shortly after dies, only to be restored to life by Alex reading the incantation from the Book of Amun-Ra. Since Evie’s death proves to be only temporary, the event may seem to have little narrative significance, but its thematic resonances are great. In particular, it is the first time that her son Alex, rather than O’Connell, rescues her. For him, at least, Evie is the mummy who returns.

     

    Is she for the rest of us? Is Evie, in some bizarre sense, the monster we most fear? Ankh-Su-Namun’s choice of the stomach as the site of attack is certainly suggestive. (Rick, by contrast, is habitually attacked in the neck: the botched hanging at a Cairo prison, the Medjai grabbing him round the neck on the burning ship, Imhotep’s attempt to throttle him–almost as though he were the victim of a vampire.) In the first film, both Imhotep and Ankh-Su-Namun herself die from precisely similar wounds to the stomach (in Ankh-Su-Namun’s case twice), so that Evie is thus linked with them, as she also is when she is seen as Nefertiri wearing a mask just as Imhotep does before he is fully regenerated, and when Ankh-Su-Namun pacifies a group of gun-wielding men just as Evie herself did in the first film. Moreover, Meela adopts pseudo-maternal behavior toward Alex, and Max Allan Collins’s novelization even suggests that Imhotep does so too:

     

    And Imhotep, grinning, almost as if proud of the boy, wagged a finger down at Alex.

     

    “Naughty, naughty,” he said, and held out his hand.

     

    Swallowing, reluctant, Alex got to his feet, brushed off his short pants, and took the mummy’s hand. (169)

     

    A mummy thus merges with a mummy (and we might note that when Meela stabbed herself in the stomach and was then revived, she came back with a completely different personality, which could suggest that Evie too might do so). Ankh-Su-Namun’s thrust into Evie’s stomach can also, indeed, be read as a direct blow at the womb, with Ankh-Su-Namun, childless and with no sign of any other relatives, pitted deliberately against Evie, who is a wife, a mother, a sister, and a daughter both to Seti and to her Carnahan parents (with the name, according to the novelization, deliberately invoking a blend of Carter and Carnarvon; the first name of Evie’s father is specifically given in the book as Howard, and he is said to have discovered the tomb of Tutankhamun). It would be easy to see this as motivated primarily by the childless woman’s envy of the mother, while it would be equally possible to see it as also configured by the fact that, in the story as it is now told, Ankh-Su-Namun is also the replacement for Evie/Nefertiri’s mother, who is never mentioned and is thus her stepmother. (O’Connell too is now identified as motherless: both the children’s and the adult novelizations have him referring to having received his tattoo in an orphanage in Hong Kong, though in the movie itself he appears to say “Cairo,” while Revenge of the Scorpion King is equally the revenge of Rachel for the death of her mother at the hands of the Nazis, and immediately after the revelation of this Alex uncovers a cache of weapons and shouts, “We’ve hit the mother lode!” [Wolverton 71, 72].)

     

    But though Ankh-Su-Namun’s attack on Evie could be read as the rage of a childless woman against a mother, it is by no means clear that the film as a whole does regard motherhood as an enviable state. “Run, you sons of bitches!” screams Henderson in The Mummy to O’Connell and Jonathan, casually indicting all mothers as he flees. “Mother!” screams the Cockney lackey in The Mummy Returns when he first sees Imhotep. “Mummies!” says Rick in the first film disgustedly, adding, “I hate mummies!” in the second. This is unfortunate, since Evie’s dying words, “Look after Alex…. I love you,” in a sense constitute him as a mummy. Moreover, Rick is at first prostrated by grief at Evie’s death and, though he goes to fight Imhotep and the Scorpion King, he is soon knocked to the ground again and raised only by the unexpected sound of her voice. The effect is of a resurrection from the dead, something that is repeated when Evie pulls him up from the abyss: in one sense, then, it is now he who has returned from a symbolic grave. That his reprieve is, however, conditional is clearly indicated by the fact that the classic hand-over-the-edge shot here has the suggestive variation that Rick’s hand has a wedding ring: the suggestion is clearly that Evie comes and pulls him up because they are properly married, whereas Ankh-Su-Namun leaves Imhotep to die because they aren’t.

     

    Rick’s survival, then, is contingent on his status as a family man. But, as he himself says, “Sometimes it’s hard being a dad,” and the film does indeed make us clearly aware of the pressures of having children (not least since Jonathan, to whom Rick says sternly, “I thought I said no more wild parties?,” in effect functions as a substitute teenager, while Collins’s novelization makes quite clear the extent to which the pygmy mummies are also conceived of as hideously threatening children [228]). Indeed, the very casting of Brendan Fraser as Rick creates ripples, since two years before The Mummy he had appeared in Ross Marks’s Twilight of the Golds (another film with a highly conflicted view of Jewishness), playing a gay man whose sister is appalled to discover that the son she is carrying is likely to share his sexuality: in the end, she keeps the child, but the decision breaks up her marriage. (Not to mention Fraser’s even more recent appearance as Ian McKellen’s lust object in Bill Condon’s 1998 Gods and Monsters, where he once again sports a tattoo which allows another man to guess his past and appears too with Kevin J. O’Connor, who was to play Beni in The Mummy.) In The Mummy Returns, Alex’s repeated “Are we there yet?” seems only partly parodic; he and Jonathan both groan whenever Rick and Evie kiss (and it is also during a kiss that Alex manages to get himself kidnapped), and it is in fact only when Rick and Evie are without Alex that they are actually able to reprise the first film. The first two dangers Rick faces in the film come from his own family: Alex creeps up behind him, and Evie throws a snake just as he enters. Most notably, although the second film seems to be deliberately less frightening than the first, it still received a 12 certificate in the U.K., so that if you actually have a child like Alex, you can’t go to see it without a babysitter. Gothic is often predicated on the loss of a parent; here, though, the ultimate, darkest fantasy may well be the loss of a child. It is played out in safety (you can of course retrieve your own offspring from the babysitter later), but, just briefly, you can acknowledge that the role of mummy is the enemy, and kill it.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Ancient Evil: Scream of the Mummy. Dir. David DeCoteau. Perf. Jeff Peterson, Trent Latta, Ariauna Albright. Amsell, 2000.
    • The Awakening. Dir. Mike Newell. Perf. Charlton Heston, Susannah York. Orion Pictures/Warner Bros, 1980.
    • Barber, Nicholas. “Never Invest in Pyramid Sales.” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Independent 20 May 2002 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=73724>.
    • Blood from the Mummy’s Tomb. Dir. Michael Carreras, Seth Holt. Perf. Andrew Keir, Valerie Leon. Hammer Films, 1971.
    • Bram Stoker’s Legend of the Mummy. Dir. Jeffrey Obrow. Perf. Louis Gossett Jr., Amy Locane. Unapix Films, 1997.
    • Brooks, Xan. Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Guardian 18 May 2002 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4188668,00.html>.
    • Collins, Max Allan. The Mummy. London: Ebury Press, 1999.
    • —. The Mummy Returns. New York: Berkley Boulevard, 2002
    • The Empire Strikes Back. Dir. Irvin Kershner. Perf. Mark Hamill, Harrison Ford, Carrie Fisher. Lucasfilm, 1980.
    • George of the Jungle. Dir. Sam Weisman. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Leslie Mann, John Cleese. Disney, 1997.
    • Glover, Jerry. “Jerry Glover’s Nearly Top Ten Mummy Movies.” The Mummy Souvenir Program. 1999. 30-31.
    • Grice, Andrew. “Europe: The Single Issue that Left Hague to Take a Pounding.” The Independent 9 Jun. 2002: 2 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=77078>.
    • Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Sean Connery. Paramount, 1989.
    • Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Kate Capshaw. Paramount, 1984.
    • MacAskill, Ewen. “Tory Matriarch Goes On Stage and Off Message.” The Guardian 23 May 2002: 1 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4191057,00.html>.
    • The Mummy. Dir. Karl Freund, Perf. Boris Karloff, Zita Johann. Universal, 1932.
    • The Mummy. Dir. Stephen Sommers. Perf. Brendan Fraser, Rachel Weisz, Arnold Vosloo. MCA/Universal, 1999.
    • The Mummy Souvenir Program. 1999.
    • The Mummy Unwrapped. Dir. Christopher Sliney. Perf. Rachel Weisz, Brendan Fraser, Stephen Sommers. Universal, 1999.
    • Quinn, Anthony. “You Can’t Say Pharaoh Than That.” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Independent 18 May 2002 <http://www.independent.co.uk/story.jsp?story=73090>.
    • The Phantom Menace. Dir. George Lucas. Perf. Liam Neeson, Ewan McGregor, Natalie Portman. Lucasfilm, 1999.
    • Preston, Peter. “Mummy, What’s Anthea Doing on the Floor?” Rev. of The Mummy Returns. The Observer 20 May 2002 <http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4189085,00.html>.
    • Raiders of the Lost Ark. Dir. Stephen Spielberg. Perf. Harrison Ford, Karen Allen. Paramount, 1981.
    • Stoker, Bram. Dracula. Ed. A. N. Wilson. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • Stoker, Bram. The Jewel of Seven Stars. Intr. David Glover. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1996.
    • Whitman, John. The Mummy Returns. London: Bantam Books, 2002.
    • Wolverton, Dave. Revenge of the Scorpion King. London: Bantam, 2002.

     

  • Solvent Abuse: Irvine Welsh and Scotland

    Matthew Hart

    Department of English
    University of Pennsylvania
    matthart@english.upenn.edu

     

    Review of: Irvine Welsh, Glue.New York: Norton, 2002.

     

    There’s a passage in Bill Buford’s celebrated account of football violence, Among the Thugs, that is relevant to the question of Irvine Welsh’s Scottishness. Buford is on the Italian island of Sardinia, amidst a rioting crowd of hooligan inglesi, fleeing from the police in the aftermath of a 1990 World Cup match between England and Holland:

     

    Then I collided with the people near me. Someone had brought the crowd to a stop. I didn’t understand why: the police were behind us; they would appear at any moment. Someone then shouted that we were all English. Why were we running? The English don’t run…. And so it went on. Having fled in panic, some of the supporters would then remember that they were English and that this was important, and they would remind the others that they too were English, and that this was also important, and, with a renewed sense of national identity, they would come abruptly to a halt, turn around, and charge the Italian police. (Buford 296)

     

    Questions of national identity are at the center of Buford’s book. An American, writing about British football, he observes that hooliganism runs through concentric circles of club, city, caste, and country. But given that the ne plus ultra of football violence is the foreign campaign–the “taking” of a Continental city–Buford’s analysis necessarily privileges the great circle of nationalism: “The effect was immediate: these were no longer supporters of Manchester United; they were now defenders of the English nation. They had ceased to be Mancunians; in an instant, their origins had, blotterlike, spread from one dot on the map of the country to the entire map itself” (38-9). Hooliganism has been described as “the English disease.” And so, in Among the Thugs, football violence becomes the privileged sociological lens through which to view the post-industrial unmaking of the English working class: “a highly mannered suburban society stripped of culture and sophistication and living only for its affectations: a bloated code of maleness, an exaggerated, embarrassing patriotism, a violent nationalism, an array of bankrupt social habits” (262).

     

    Substitute “Scotland” for “England” and Buford’s dystopic sociology will serve as a fair entrance-point to the world of Irvine Welsh’s Glue, a novel with much to say about football, violence, “codes of maleness,” and the fate of four working-class men as they come to adulthood during the 1980s and ’90s. Of course, it would be foolish to link Buford and Welsh without some strong sense of the difference between Scottish and English class and sporting cultures.1 What is more significant, however, is that both Glue and Among the Thugs are texts trapped endlessly between national and “post-national” interpretive and structural imperatives. For if Buford’s Manchester United fans fill out their identities, “blotterlike,” to color the entire map of England, then it is also true that this is a nationalism subject to some of the most profoundly internationalizing forces in the contemporary world. The plots of both texts depend fundamentally on mass international travel: budget airlines, the package tour, and the Continental “weekender.” Both texts are written under the sign of the 1992 Maastricht treaty, which abolished immigration and labor controls between most European countries, creating a class of “Eurotrash” itinerants–both poor and wealthy–and giving fits to Continental policemen, struggling to separate law-abiding vacationers from an impossible-to-define “hooligan element.” Finally, both hooligans and literary cognoscenti revel in the recent unprecedented expansion in European and international cultural events, whether Glasgow Celtic vs. Juventus of Torino or a city-break to the new Guggenheim Museum in Bilbao. This last phenomenon gets great comic treatment in Glue, when Welsh’s protagonists–in Munich for the Oktoberfest beer festival–crash a cultural reception of the “Munich-Edinburgh Twin Cities Committee.”

     

    Though he barely addresses it outright, the Europeanization of England is the ever-present determining context for Buford’s narratives. The single market is a political economy that his motley crew of electricians and skinheads struggles to comprehend, yet knows intimately: “I thought: this is a parody of the holiday abroad. Except that it wasn’t a parody. This was the holiday abroad. Their dads, they kept telling me, never had a chance to see the world like this” (Buford 54). For Welsh, and Glue, the tensions between nation and post-nation are more complicated, in part because of the long struggle between Scottish nationalists and an Anglocentric cultural and political elite; for whereas the “Other” of English nationalism has usually been found across the Channel, the Scottish have always found their antagonists closer to home.2 But such tensions are also due to Welsh’s increasingly certain status as a representative Scottish author–a celebrity of Scottishness whose every character, setting, and incident will be put through the mincer of a cultural media which demands authentic national types even as it writes endless obituaries for the idea of the nation itself.

     

    The worldwide success of J. K. Rowling’s Harry Potter series means that Welsh is no longer the best-selling novelist identified with Edinburgh but, adolescent wizards aside, no other Scottish writer has equivalent celebrity and none has gone so far to upset common perceptions of Scotland as a land of heather and history. Welsh has often appeared in the major newspapers and magazines as an avatar of a new, harsh, and dole-queue-glamorous Scottishness. He is a twofold prophet, national and international at once: a spokesperson for post-Thatcherite parochial youth culture, buoyed up by the global success of the scene that he documents and promotes. Welsh upsets the genteel notions of tartan traditionalists yet, inevitably, the new Scotland he has anatomized over the last decade is immediately marketable as a new national type, his vision of a growing but underrepresented subculture coming to dominate, for a while, the calcified history of Old Caledonia. The irony is that Trainspotting, a novel that scorns “ninety minute patriotism”–the duration of an international football match–survives in the popular mind as a portable symbol of Scotland. What price Renton’s (self-)loathing for a nation that let itself be “colonized by wankers”?

     

    Glue is the first Welsh novel since the frankly awful Filth. Its main advance over that abortive satire on the police is that Welsh has toned down some of the overly psychologized experiments in typography and narrative form that worked well in the short stories of The Acid House but never synthesized with the claustrophobic character-study at the heart of Filth. Glue has all the drugs-‘n-sex-‘n-violence of any Welsh tome, but tries less hard to be obviously literary. It is the longest Welsh novel, yet little is wasted; it has generational ambitions–being the life story of four men, set in Scotland, Germany and Australia–but never loses sight of its roots in tribal, parochial, friendships. Welsh is very much a popular author, in literary as well as commercial terms. Besides being full of black-hearted belly laughs, the great strength of Welsh’s best stories is that they bring the traditional values of narrative prose–revealing character through action and dialogue–to a proletarian and pop-cultural scene badly in need of the kind of unsanctimonious comedy and pathos at which he excels. Here’s Gally, the tragic anti-hero of Glue, in bed with Sharon, having recently discovered that he’s HIV-positive:

     

    When she started kissing ays deeply ah thoat for ah while ah wis somebody else. Then it came back tae ays exactly who ah wis. Ah telt her she wis hingin aboot wi rubbish, n ah included maself in that, n told her she wis better thin that and she should sort it oot. (192)

     

    Gally is the misfit, the bad luck charm; contracting HIV is not even the end of his Job-like litany of misfortune. There’s something unbelievable–melodramatic and formulaic–about so much misery and mischance: Gally is the original scapegoat, the communal raw nerve. But there’s also real pathos in his story and narration: a tenderness and insight that are rarely mawkish and which derive in large part from Welsh’s suturing of idiom and consciousness. When Sharon finally understands why Gally won’t have sex with her, she reveals her own secret:

     

    Her sweaty face pulled away fae mines and came intae view.–It’s awright… disnae matter. Ah sortay guessed. Ah thoat ye kent: ah’m like that n aw, she told me with a mischievous wee smile.

     

    There wis no fear in her eyes. None at all. It was like she was talkin aboot bein in the fuckin Masons or something. It put the shits up me. Ah goat up, went through, and sat cross-legged in the chair, lookin at ma crossbow oan the waw. (193)

     

    Gally has only ever wanted to be “somebody else” and the last thing he desires is to hear the words “ah’m like that n aw.” Such a blank and fearless statement of affinity can only ever “put the shits” up a man with such depths of self-loathing and denial. Still, there’s time for a joke at the expense of Masons–and so, by extension, all Protestants and fans of Glasgow Rangers F.C. Reading these passages, it helps to link the paradox of Welsh’s Scots to the paradox of Gally’s mind. Both are decidedly parochial, forged out of a restricted vocabulary. But they are also surprisingly rich, endlessly comic and pathetic–mined from some cosmic source of narrative rogues and dialect one-liners.

     

    Welsh is not the only Scottish author writing in vernacular language, but he’s among the very few with anything like a mass audience. It’s difficult to know whether non-Scottish readers come to Welsh because of his Scots, or in spite of it. It is a problem that bothers the American media in particular.3 Here’s a comical exchange from a 1998 Time interview with Welsh; the question of language bleeds, inevitably, into the question of audience and sales:

     

    Q: Are you afraid that you have fewer American readers than you would if you didn’t write in Scottish dialect?
    A: Yeah, I’m doing a reading tonight, and nobody’s going to understand a word.
    Q: I haven’t understood anything you’ve said. I’m going to have to make most of it up. Oh, well, thanks anyway. (Stein)

     

    Either way, Welsh’s work draws attention to its Scottishness as a matter of language; as always, writing in Scots begs very basic questions of writing itself. Is using the “national” tongue a necessarily nationalist gesture? Is Anglophone Scottish writing a contradiction in terms? And in Scotland, which is the national tongue anyway? Is it Scots, the traditional language of the Lowlands, derived from Northumbrian Anglo-Saxon? And if so, shall we prefer Welsh’s Edinburgh vernacular to, say, the Glasgow Scots of James Kelman’s Booker-winning How Late It Was How Late? If we privilege longevity over popularity, shall we fasten on the Scottish Gaelic of the Highlands and western islands? And there are other alternatives, ancient and modern: Hugh MacDiarmid fused medieval Scots and contemporary coinage with the fruits of 19th-century etymological research, creating a literary language of a mobile and synthetic kind; Robert Alan Jamieson has written a series of novels and short stories which collectively mine and record the mixed Scandic-Scots vernacular of Sanni communities in the Shetland Isles of the far north.

     

    And what of English, that thousand-pound gorilla? Almost every Scottish author since the Reformation has written in English, to greater or lesser degree–and usually greater. Linguists can identify multiple dialects of Scottish English, including a Scottish Standard English to set against the dialect of the southern metropolis; English has been the language of church, court, and school for over 400 years; and so for every writer who talks of escaping the shadow of Anglophone cultural authority, there’s another who’ll celebrate the wholesale Scottishing of British English–a language confidently mastered and manipulated by Scottish writers from Burns (Robbie) to Burns (Gordon). It’s a sociological fact one can trace through the Scottish education system, where a side-effect of programmatic Anglophonization was a level of popular literacy far higher than in the linguistically homogeneous south. Scottish intellectuals likewise take pride in the fact that the academic study of English language and literature was pioneered in Scotland’s ancient universities. In the twentieth century these Scottish universities blazed a trail in the revivification of Scottish literature; in the eighteenth, they gave witness to “The Scottish Invention of English Literature.”4

     

    There are solid historical reasons for this duality. Cairns Craig, the general editor of the standard multi-volume history of Scottish literature, talks of Scottish literature existing “between cultures rather than within a culture” (3). Scottish writing necessarily partakes of the postcolonial politics that propels African writers like Ngugi wa Thiong’o to reject the language of Empire. But the Scottish situation is peculiar because “Scotland was an active partner in the extension of Empire that made English a world language, while at the same time, in its own linguistic experience, it shared the experience of the colonised” (Craig 5). This is a reality that Welsh recognizes: “I really like standard English but it is an administrative language, an imperialist language.” Nevertheless, his abandonment of the standard-English first drafts of Trainspotting is a decision he justifies in aesthetic, rather than wholeheartedly political terms: “It’s not very funky” (O’Shea and Shapiro). While the sometimes-hostile press reaction to Welsh’s Scots reminds him of his political affinity with a vernacular writer like Kelman, this is one more author who wants to have his Anglophone cake and eat it too.

     

    Welsh’s decision to write much of his fiction in the argot of the Edinburgh streets and schemes resurrects these historical and linguistic questions, now spun and counter-spun by the political economics of market globalization.5 More than anything, his commercial success testifies to the groundbreaking work done since MacDiarmid inaugurated the modernist “Scottish Renaissance” program of revivifying the vernacular in the 1920s. But what of Welsh’s Scots? What are its literary qualities? In the first place, his use of Edinburgh Scots is not especially innovative. His dialogue has a satirical bite missing from the late Romantic-era novels of James Hogg and Walter Scott, but doesn’t add much more to their technical example, using Scots largely as an indicator of social standing. Instead of the literate shepherd who betrays his peasant origins when he opens his mouth, meet the Pilton schemie, his Edinburgh accent flashing through the neutral English narration of “The Acid House”:

     

    Then the rain came: at first a few warning spits, followed by a hollow explosion of thunder in the sky. Coco saw a flash of lightning where his glowing vision had been and although unnerved in a different way, he breathed a sigh of relief that his strange sighting had been superseded by more earthly phenomena. Ah wis crazy tae drop that second tab ay acid. The visuals ur something else. (Welsh, Acid House 153)

     

    In “The Acid House” working class characters speak Edinburgh Scots, while the narrator takes on the standard English of the bourgeois citizens who have, through a coincidence of lightning and LSD, given birth to a baby with the mind of a football hooligan: “This is fuckin too radge, man, Andy conceded,–cannae handle aw this shite, eh” (167). Throughout Welsh’s writing, Scots is identified with spoken language–if not dialogue then interior monologue, the speech of the thinking mind. More often than not, the two registers are drawn together. In the opening of Glue, a man is leaving his wife and family, nervous during this last public outing as a nuclear unit:

     

    Henry Lawson shuffled around to check who’d heard. Met one nosy gape with a hard stare until it averted. Two old fuckers, a couple. Interfering auld bastards. Speaking through his teeth, in a strained whisper he said to her,–Ah’ve telt ye, they’ll be well looked eftir. Ah’ve fuckin well telt ye that. Ma ain fuckin bairns, he snapped at her, the tendons in his neck taut. (6)

     

    The narrative slides toward Scots as it moves toward Henry’s speech. The passage opens with two relatively standard English sentences, plainly descriptive; but by the third sentence the narrative point-of-view is Henry’s–though we remain in standard English, there’s no doubt about who’s calling whom an “old fucker.” The next sentence even more plainly belongs to Henry; and as we move closer to his next vocalized thought, the English word “old” mutates into the Scottish “auld.” The narrator needs just one more descriptive connector before Henry’s self-justifying rage can be given full throttle in the vernacular. As in much purportedly vernacular fiction, third-person omniscience requires the (seeming) authority and (seeming) transparency of administrative English, while Scots marks a register that is simultaneously social and subjective.

     

    It would be a mistake, however, to confuse the innately realist signifying-effect of Scots dialogue with a similar commitment to naturalist realism–telling it like it is, in the words of the street. According to The Guardian newspaper, the 2002 Edinburgh Book Festival saw Ronald Frame lump Welsh’s writing among the “cliched brand of novels celebrating such dark subjects as cannibalism, necrophilia and sado-masochism.” Frame has been joined in the attack by the poet Kenneth White, who accuses Welsh of serving-up the “remains of last night’s fish supper, sauced up with sordid naturalism.” But this is sour-faced and misplaced criticism. Welsh is no “dirty realist” after the fashion of Americans like Raymond Carver, still less some sort of S&M Zola. As he says in response to Frame and White, “I’ve never thought of myself as a realist. I don’t think that talking tapeworms and squirrels is all that realistic” (qtd. in Gibbons). Judging by his published remarks, Welsh’s chosen American precursor is William S. Burroughs, another prophet of chemical communities; but Welsh’s writing is most fully in the tradition of the “Caledonian Antisyzygy,” as identified by G. Gregory Smith in 1919. According to Smith, Scottish literature is marked by one overweening characteristic: the union of opposites such as the known and unknown, quotidian and fantastic, standard and vernacular, genteel and vulgar. This involves a linguistic, stylistic, and generic commitment to existing–as MacDiarmid put it–“Whaur extremes meet” (87). Welsh’s writing is nothing if not extreme: an always raw collage of generic mixing, surrealist fantasy, everyday bother, and hallucinatory black humor.6

     

    And yet, despite the omnipresent excesses of Welsh’s prose, Glue is largely constructed around friendships and human encounters. It boasts no talking tapeworms and its realism is interrupted not so much by fantasy and hallucination but by the sense that we’ve heard these stories before. The main characters are novel versions of familiar types: Gally, the victim of a schoolyard code of Omerta that he upholds but never controls; Billy, the loner who finds success and single-mindedness in sports and business; Juice Terry, hapless burglar, incorrigible dole-ite, and awesomely successful Don Juan; and Carl, a dreamer, lost in music and the excesses of life as an international DJ. As in most coming-of-age narratives, these are lives we can chart on mirror-image x/y graphs: a rising line on the graph marking social standing almost inevitably implies a fall in the chart that grades happiness, contentment, and the good feelings of friends left behind. It’s not that Glue is unoriginal but that its familiarity moves it in the direction of urban folklore, so that even the novel’s more improbable moments, like Terry’s night out with an American R-‘n’-B star, read like excursions into a well-established narrative sociology. In the case of the Sherman chanteuse,7 the thematics of high versus low cultures is a direct repeat from the brilliant short story “Where the Debris Meets the Sea.” In that ironic set-piece, Kim Basinger, Madonna, Kylie Minogue and Victoria Principal lust over magazines stuffed full with working-class Edinburgh man-meat: “A pile of glossy magazines lay on a large black coffee table. They bore such titles as Wide-o, Scheme Scene and Bevvy Merchants. Madonna flicked idly through the magazine called Radge, coming to an abrupt halt as her eyes fastened on the pallid figure of Deek Prentice, resplendent in purple, aqua and black shell-suit.” This abrupt reversal in the sexual economy of pop culture is cemented by Welsh’s decision to make his Hollywood stars speak broad Scots: “‘We’ll nivir go tae fuckin’ Leith!’ Kim said, in a tone of scornful dismissal. ‘Yous are fuckin’ dreamin’” (Welsh, Acid House 87-88, 92).

     

    Some reviewers have interpreted such echoes as evidence of repetition. Tired of tales told from nightclubs and housing schemes, reviewers have begun to dismiss Welsh as a one-trick pony. I generally enjoy the folkloric repetition that is increasingly a part of Welsh’s fiction–fans of serial fiction will be pleased to hear that he is penning a sequel to Trainspotting–and despite all the excess of a book like Glue the pleasures it gives are ultimately ones of recognition, as when the protagonists of earlier novels show up in cameo roles. Glue‘s argot and setting are familiar by now. The individual lives of the four friends are given structure by their similar movement out-and-back–an actual or metaphorical journey away, and the journey home. Glue ends with homecomings, both literal and symbolic, where an Oedipal politics of masculinity and maturation tries to crowd-out the vicissitudes of the nation. It closes with the death of one character’s father, shared grief mending damaged friendships. The dead man was the symbolic father of the group, an apologist for youth and the author of their childhood code of silence and loyalty. By closing with this death, Glue‘s narrative takes on a generational and patrilineal shape.

     

    One can see Welsh, and perhaps his audience, getting older. More seriously, we can see how the strength of Welsh’s fiction, and perhaps the source of its greatest popular appeal, is its study of the formation and deformation of tribal groups, as familial, musical, and pharmacological subcultures come to dominate–and now find some accommodation–in their struggle with (and within) traditional allegiances of class and nation. Trainspotting, for instance, is much more than days-in-the-life of a group of smack addicts: it documents the breakdown of the social and cultural bonds made by shared experiences of childhood, drugs, city, and nation. Like the middle section of Glue, its narrative charts the movement from punk rock and heroin to techno and MDMA. This cultural movement is itself predicated on a simultaneous physical movement away from the symbolic geography of the Scottish nation. Renton escapes first to London and the burgeoning club scene, then finally into European anonymity, flush with the drug money he stole from his friends, heading for a life outside of Scotland and the provinciality of its capital city. One can, it should be admitted, read even Renton’s narrative as a national allegory–Welsh’s use of Scots makes that almost inevitable. And despite its ultimately Oedipal structure, it’s clear that Welsh also sees Glue as an allegory of the nation–one that, this time, ends happily in New Caledonia, friends gathered round the big multi-cultural mixing desk of devolutionary Scotland.

     

    Welsh wants to have it both ways; Scotland, that antisyzygetical nation, insists on it. The Scotland that we see in Glue is both newly confident and newly irrelevant. Welsh’s characters are unabashed national stereotypes, yet we see them abroad in both mind and place, drawn to the international affinities of music, sport, and pharmaceuticals. Welsh has so far shown no sign of wanting to escape the triple Scottishness of language, setting, and type; but the Scotland he portrays is unimaginable without other criss-crossing elective affinities, running counter to the claims of the nation. In Glue, the nation is non-negotiable: a monument to modernity that postmodern chancers can neither overcome nor gainsay. A book like Glue, so full of the contradictions of international culture, nevertheless appears as a local affirmation of Tom Nairn’s global formula: “Blessing and curse together, nationality is simply the fate of modernity” (199).8 Scotland, its languages, its unknown destiny in the marketplace of nations and ethnicities, is a fundamental ingredient in the “glue” that holds these characters, and these pages, together. That we come to know such stickiness by watching its interaction with various global solvents shouldn’t surprise us. Didn’t the kids invent huffing? Didn’t they know what they were doing?

     

    Notes

     

    1. For example, Scottish football fans are very proud of their public difference from English supporters, especially when traveling abroad for international matches. While domestic Scottish games have seen their fair share of violence (witness Welsh’s many pages on the über-hooligans of Edinburgh’s Hibernian FC) traveling fans of the Scottish national team have styled themselves as the drunken but ultimately avuncular “Tartan Army.” The booze and military metaphors remain the same, but the relations between fans, police, foreign and local governments, and national public sentiment are quite different.

     

    2. Contrast, for instance, the different stances of English and Scottish political nationalists toward the question of E.U. federation. For Scottish nationalists, the slogan “Independence in Europe” represents the desire to root small-nation autarky within transnational (constitutional, cultural, and economic) structures and institutions. Current English nationalism is, on the contrary, largely of the xenophobic, “Eurosceptic” kind. This contemporary phenomenon is more interesting when considered next to Linda Colley’s argument that an Anglo-Scottish “British” identity was made possible, in part, by the common threat to England and Scotland from Napoleonic and Catholic France.

     

    3. The first American edition of Trainspotting (New York: Norton, 1996) printed a glossary of Scottish phrases not included in the original UK edition (London: Minerva, 1994). This troubles an interviewer for the U.S. online magazine, Feed: “Reading Trainspotting, at first you feel sort of alienated and distanced by the phonetic spellings, but after about five pages you really get into it, the language. But when the glossary of Scottish terms came out for the American edition it almost seemed to turn that language into a gimmick for Americans.” See O’Shea and Shapiro’s “RE: Irvine Welsh: William O’Shea and Deborah Shapiro Talk to the Author of Trainspotting about Populist Literature, the Drug Novel, and Surviving the Millennium.”

     

    4. See Robert Crawford, Devolving English Literature.

     

    5. For example, Danny Boyle’s 1996 Miramax film of Trainspotting becomes an international success and a text of archetypal modern Scottishness, in part because of its use of vernacular language; but the pop culture it does so much to celebrate is marked by cosmopolitan eclecticism–equal parts Sean Connery and Iggy Pop, with seemingly no tension between them. The movie of the film gains much attention for its depiction of post-industrial Scotland, partly because of the drug use, partly because of the language. But the film’s greatest marketing push comes from its brilliantly selected soundtrack, full of English Brit-poppers, European dance music, and American punk. Despite the insistently national focus of the press, the demographic assumed by the soundtrack is definitively post-national in the question of marketing and musical taste.

     

    6. There is much to distinguish Welsh from MacDiarmid, despite their common situation as writers made famous by Scots and Scottishness; the generalized horizon of Smith’s antisyzygy no doubt obscures as much as it reveals. Nevertheless, they share a common scabrous and antinomian quality, best found perhaps in a fuller version of the above quotation. The narrator of MacDiarmid’s A Drunk Man Looks at the Thistle proudly declares that he will “ha’e nae hauf-way hoose, but aye be whaur / Extremes meet–it’s the only way I ken / To dodge the curst conceit o’ bein’ richt” (87).

     

    7. “Sherman” is one of Welsh’s favorite pieces of rhyming slang, a form of demotic that Edinburgh Scots have perfected after the Cockney example. “Sherman” means “American,” deriving from “Sherman Tank,” which rhymes, of course, with “Yank.” Welsh’s rhyming slang invariably follows this kind of abbreviation and homophonic substitution–arguably the defining characteristics of traditional rhyming slang. The beauty of this argot lies in the distance between the slang-word and its referent. Thus, “Manto” from “Mantovani,” meaning “bit of fanny.”

     

    8. For a useful critique of Nairn’s fatalistic conjunction of modernity and nationality, see Mulhern (58-61).

    Works Cited

     

    • Buford, Bill. Among the Thugs. New York: Vintage, 1993.
    • Colley, Linda. Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837. New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1992.
    • Craig, Cairns, ed. The History of Scottish Literature, Vol 4: Twentieth Century Scottish Literature. 4 Vols. Aberdeen: Aberdeen UP, 1988.
    • Crawford, Robert. Devolving English Literature. Oxford: Clarendon, 1992.
    • Gibbons, Fiachra. “Eight Years on from Trainspotting, Irvine Welsh Pens the Sequel: Porno.” The Guardian 22 Aug. 2002 <http://books.guardian.co.uk/news/articles/0,6109,540572,00.html>.
    • MacDiarmid, Hugh. Collected Poems, Vol. 1. 2 vols. Michael Grieve & W. R. Aitken, eds. London: Penguin, 1985.
    • Mulhern, Francis. “Britain After Nairn.” New Left Review 5 (Sep.-Oct. 2000): 53-66.
    • Nairn, Tom. After Britain: New Labour and the Return of Scotland. London: Granta, 2000.
    • O’Shea, William, and Deborah Shapiro. “RE: Irvine Welsh: William O’Shea and Deborah Shapiro Talk to the Author of Trainspotting about Populist Literature, the Drug Novel, and Surviving the Millennium.” Feed 3 Sep. 1999.
    • Smith, G. Gregory. Scottish Literature: Character and Influence. London: MacMillan, 1919.
    • Stein, Joel. “Irvine Welsh: The Arts/Q+A.” Time 28 Sep. 1998 <http://www.time.com/time/magazine/1998/dom/980928/the_arts.q_a.irvine_wel32a.html>.
    • Welsh, Irvine. The Acid House. New York: Norton, 1994.
    • —. Trainspotting. New York: Norton, 1996.

     

  • “What’s It Like There?”: Desultory Notes on the Representation of Sarajevo

    Jim Hicks

    English and Comparative Literature
    Smith College
    james@transpan.it

     

     

     

    Figure 1

    “What does the earth look like in the places where people commit atrocities?”

     

    — Robert D. Kaplan, Balkan Ghosts

     

    In order to begin, I’ll have to confess: what follows here will be an essay in the early sense of the term (in other words, I have no idea whatsoever how it’s going to come out).1 I’ve decided, nonetheless, to make an effort to address–or at least avoid in a somewhat more professional manner–an issue which for me, in the five or so years that I’ve been visiting Sarajevo, just won’t go away. The problem is that I continue to have no real answer to the question that my title poses, the question that, for understandable reasons, I’m asked on almost every occasion when someone finds out I’ve been spending time in postwar Bosnia-Herzegovina.

     

    To some extent, my lack of a well-considered response may be personal. I also have a great deal of trouble with word association games (“What’s the first thing that comes to your mind when I say ‘Bosnia’?”); invariably, what comes to my mind–no matter what the word is–is nothing. Faced with such questions, rather than “associate freely” (as if such a thing were possible!), I become increasingly embarrassed at not having a response, more or less in the way that insomniacs lie awake obsessed with their inability to sleep. On the other hand, such a reaction may be situational as well. Hannah Arendt long ago argued that there is essentially nothing to say about events which require our compassion. For Arendt, the problem with compassion is precisely that: it puts an end to all discussion, and hence, to any possibility for political remedy (53-110).2 (There are, of course, other opinions about the relation between compassion and expression: Clarissa, La nouvelle Héloïse, and Uncle Tom’s Cabin are all very long novels.)

     

    In any case, in conversations with friends, I found out quick enough that my problem couldn’t easily be finessed through intellectualization. Like some character from a Woody Allen film, I tried to begin my (non)responses by describing my inability to describe, cleverly attributing this inability to my complete lack of adequate representational categories. My experience, in short, was “like” nothing in the least. And without adequate categories, some would argue, we may not even have the experience at all–“a blooming, buzzing confusion” is the phrase usually evoked in such contexts. Yet, for Walter Benjamin, experience itself–at least its truest, and increasingly rarest form–may in effect only come at times like these, where we lack all preparation.

     

    Friends, since they know you, can’t be put off by such diversionary tactics, and, to be frank, I wasn’t even satisfied myself with this non-answer. But then, at some point–I don’t remember precisely when–I came up with an alternate strategy. I still began by describing my inability to describe, but now this ramble became only the preamble to my next gambit–telling a joke or two. The number, as well as the character, of the war-related jokes that I heard on my initial trip to Sarajevo no doubt prompted this idea. In retelling these jokes, I also eventually managed to convince myself that there was logic behind my strategem: where do such jokes come from, after all? why do people tell them? and wasn’t the collective voice behind them more direct, more authentic, than anything that I myself might say? At one point, I even thought about compiling a Sarajevo Joke Book, a sort of exercise in contemporary folklore. One Bosnian who heard this idea from me commented, “Sure, everyone who comes here wants to do that.”

     

    A couple of jokes, then. Here’s one that nearly everybody there knows:

     

    Q. How do they give directions in Banja Luka?

     

    A. Turn left where the mosque used to be.

     

    Too quick? Lack the relevant history? (In case you don’t already know, during the war, Bosnian Serbs dynamited the mosques in the towns they controlled; Banja Luka used to have many, including the celebrated fifteenth-century Ferhadija mosque, which is now a parking lot).3 Let me try another one:4

     

    Mujo is walking down the street, just out of the hospital after having his right arm amputated. He’s depressed to the point of desperation, crying, talking to himself, thinking about suicide. He can’t bear the thought of life without his arm. Suddenly he sees Suljo walking towards him, skipping and smiling. When he gets closer, Mujo sees that Suljo is actually laughing out loud. What is most amazing to Mujo is that Suljo is carrying on like this despite the fact that not just one, but both of his arms have been amputated.

     

    So Mujo stops Suljo, who continues to snicker and smile. Mujo says, “Suljo, I don’t understand you. I’m desperate, I’m even thinking about killing myself, all because I’ve had one arm amputated. You’ve had both your arms cut off and here you are smiling and laughing like an idiot. In your condition, how can you be so happy?”

     

    Suljo replies, “Mujo, if you’d had both of your arms cut off, like I did, and your ass was itching like crazy, like mine is, you’d be laughing too.”

     

    So you get the picture. Or at least some of the picture. Whatever these jokes are, they’re certainly not timid. Part of their impact, no doubt, comes from the particular ways in which they violate our conventions and expectations. Take a look back at the image at the beginning of this essay. How does your sense of it change when I tell you that–although the site is in fact located in Sarajevo–it is not actually war-related? It’s just an abandoned farmhouse, and it’s looked more or less as it does here for as long as any of my Bosnian friends can remember.5

     

    Actually, the first photo I took in Sarajevo was this one:

     

    Figure 2

     

    This was the view from the window of the Human Rights Coordination Center, in the Office of the High Representative, downtown Sarajevo, Mar�ala Tita Street, in early January, 1997. I like it–something about the perspective reminds me of Bruegel.6 Given the stories about Sarajevans burning furniture and books in order to heat their homes, the sight of children sledding in this wooded urban park might surprise you. (It did me, which is probably why I took the photo.) Just above the park is the central police headquarters, used by the Bosnian military during the siege. The trees, in other words, were left as cover–anyone silly enough to try and cut one down would probably have been shot. A second park survived for similar reasons, and there is also still a beautiful, tree-lined avenue next to the river (and next to the former front line as well).

     

    My next photo is an exterior shot of the building from which the sledding picture was taken:

     

    Figure 3

     

    I have a theory about this one. This is, or was, the headquarters of the Office of the High Representative (the international supervisory agency set up as part of the Dayton Accords, <http://www.ohr.int>). The High Representative has very extensive powers to enforce the implementation of the peace accords; among other things, OHR has designed Bosnia’s new currency, license plates, and flag, and the High Rep has also dismissed a fairly large number of Bosnia’s elected officials (including on two occasions, members of the Presidency). If you’ve seen Men in Black, the movie that’s being advertised in this photo, you’ll understand my suspicions: my guess is that the placement of this particular advertisement is meant as a comment on the internationals working just behind these curtains. There’s certainly no cinema in this building, or anywhere close by, and, as far as I know, no other movie was ever advertised here.7

     

    My overall point so far, with the “farmhouse” photo as with the others, is fairly simple. Pictures don’t speak for themselves, however much we may be predisposed to let them do so. But then neither do my Bosnian jokes: one thing that strikes me about the two cited here, besides their ruthlessness, is that they are both in some sense directed at the very group that is telling them. Much like Jewish anti-Semitic jokes, Bosnian humor has a long tradition of self-parody. The two amputees of my second joke are actually the stock characters, the fools, of Bosnian comedy (Mujo, by the way, is short for Mustafa, or Muhamed, and Suljo for Sulejman). A third character, Mujo’s wife Fata (short for Fatima), also makes frequent appearances. But those jokes you don’t want to hear.8

     

    You have no doubt been waiting to see a photo like this:

     

    Figure 4

     

    Actually, I would go further than that. My guess is not only that you’ve been expecting to see a photo like this: if you followed the war in the former Yugoslavia at all, I imagine that, on some level, you’ve been waiting to see this very photo. This, of course, is the Oslobodjenje building, headquarters of the Sarajevan newpaper of the same name (which means “liberation” in English).9 I haven’t heard what, if anything, is planned for this building, but I wouldn’t be surprised to see it left as it is now, as a war memorial of sorts. Which, once again, changes what it is that we’re looking at, does it not? Is it event or emblem? In a certain sense, memorials may not be seen at all; to paraphrase Robert Musil, if you want to be absolutely certain that someone is forgotten by history, build them a statue.

     

    One more photo in this vein:

     

    Figure 5

     

    I reproduced this shot for two reasons. The photo shows a government office building in the foreground and the two UNIS skyscrapers in the background. What I mean to give you here–the academics among you–is a rather unique vantage point. The shot was taken from the balcony at the end of the hall on the fourth floor of the Filozofski Fakultet, right next to the English Department offices. (Does it make you feel at home?) My second reason is explained on the back of a map which the FAMA group–a local artists collective–did to commemorate the siege (<http://www.saray.net/SurvivalMap/Index.html>). It seems that Sarajevans had nicknamed these twin towers “Momo” and “Uzeir” after a popular pair of local comedians (their names mark them as members of two different cultural groups). According to FAMA, no one knew which tower was which, and so the Bosnian Serb army had to destroy them both. Such are the stories one hears.

     

    Time for another sort of story, I think.

     

    Figure 6

     

    This one is from Miljenko Jergovic, a journalist, novelist, and poet. Jergovic wrote for Oslobodjenje during the war, and he now writes for the Feral Tribune in Zagreb. The text of his that I will examine here is, in a sense, the titular story of his first published collection, Sarajevo Marlboro. The final scene of Jergovic’s short story unwraps this pair of name-brands for his reader–but I’ll get to that in a minute.10 The tale itself, in contrast, is titled “Grob” (“The Grave”–for reasons unclear to me, his translator decided to retitle the story “The Gravedigger,” i.e., “Grobar”).

     

    When Jergovic chose his title, it is absolutely certain that the grave he had in mind was not shown in this last photo. First of all, it’s not even the right graveyard. Second, this shot, if it were published in Sarajevo today, might well appear to be Bosnian Muslim propaganda. The tombstones in front, with their Arabic inscriptions written in calligraphy said to be found only in Bosnia, are just the sort of things used to send a “nationalist” message. (There are, of course, items of this sort available for all of the so-called nationalist parties. If it’s old enough, and culturally specific enough, it will do.) Nice photo, though.

     

    Figure 7

     

    The story begins by asking us a question: “Know why you should never bury people in a valley?” (78). Jergovic’s gravedigger, a Shakespearian character in more than one sense, goes on to answer the question with a story. He tells a tale of two lovers, and two deaths, related (in the original text) by means of a single long sentence, a conversational diatribe that twists and turns at least twice as often as the lives the story traces. In high school, Rasim and Mara fell in love (again, their names are markers), his father said no, and they ran away. Rasim’s father eventually found them, but his son wouldn’t come home alone; so the couple moved in but she wasn’t allowed to leave the house by day. Eventually the father built them a home in another neighborhood, they married publicly at last, and then she died. (As the gravedigger comments, “[the dead] just happened to lose [their lives], the way some people lose a pinball [… after] having scored a hundred points a hundred times–you could have scored more, but… you didn’t” [82].)11 Rasim moved again, mourned by day and worked in his uncle’s bakery at night, and, when WWII broke out, he joined the Usta�e (the Croatian fascists); then the war ended and the Partisans arrived, who jailed him and were planning to shoot him, at which time a certain Salamon Finci appeared and convinced them that, during the war, Rasim had helped five Jewish families escape through Italy. So Rasim was freed, but nothing changed, and he continued to mourn his wife until, one day, he too was found dead, facedown in a pile of bread dough, and was brought back to his father’s house and buried “just here beneath the patch of grass you are standing on” (80).

     

    As told by the gravedigger (as opposed to the account you just heard), this story is not only an answer to the opening question, it is a demonstration of the answer. As the narration unfolds, it is filled, in line after line, with gestures toward the neighborhoods, buildings, and landmarks where the lives of Rasim and Mara are said to unfold. Its refrain is “ono ti je Bistrik… ono ti je �irokaca… ono ti je Vrbanja” (Roughly, “That’s Bistrik for you,” “That’s �irokaca for you,” etc.) In my last photo, the lower section of the Alifakovac cemetery can just be seen on the upper left; like us, though from the other side, the gravedigger looks down the Miljacka river with all of the Old City before him. His story concluded, he points to Rasim’s grave below his feet and ends by commenting, with obvious satisfaction:

     

    From this spot, it’s possible for you to review and reflect on Rasim’s whole life. Only thieves and children and people with something to hide get buried in valleys. There’s no life left in the valleys–you can’t see anything from down there. (Jergovic 64, translation modified)

     

    In an essay entitled “Dell’opaco,” Italo Calvino has described how people can sometimes be imprinted with a particular topography of the imagination, just as goslings are imprinted with a maternal form. For Calvino, that topography was his native city of San Remo, with its rugged, mountainous coastline sloping sharply down to the west, opening out expansively toward the mist-covered sea. Jergovic’s gravedigger carries a different template, but his principles are those of Calvino.

     

    And there may be more. As we are painstakingly shown, Rasim’s life, with and without Mara, stitches together most of old Sarajevo, geographically and topographically (and hence, we may conclude, socially and culturally as well). We are even told that Mara’s distraught husband “blamed each of the local districts… for her death” (79), and that he responded by moving to Vrbanja. Now I don’t know what Vrbanja looked like before WWII, but I can show it to you on the FAMA Survival Map.

     

    Figure 8

     

    There it is, at the start of the modern city, where the Parliament building is, and where most major social protests in Sarajevo begin. It’s also where, on April 6, 1992, Radovan Karadzic’s men–from a position atop the Holiday Inn (the yellow building, circled in red)–started firing at a crowd of antiwar protesters. Serb paramilitaries had already killed one young student during similar demonstrations the previous day, on the bridge right at the bottom of the image. The bridge is also called Vrbanja.12

     

    However relevant such commentary may–or may not–be to the Jergovic story, it still leaves unmentioned that narrative’s central connection to the essay at hand. As it turns out, about half of “Grob” actually relates a second anecdote, one that speaks of the living rather than the dead. Immediately after his comment that “There’s no life left in the valleys,” the gravedigger begins telling a more recent tale, one that recounts the unpleasant experience of being interviewed by an American journalist:

     

    Perhaps he’d heard that I lived in California for a while, and had seen the world, spoke languages and knew important people. But now I was working as a gravedigger again, so perhaps he thought that I might be able to explain to him what had happened to the people of Sarajevo. (80)

     

     

    The journalist claims that “he wants to know everything” (81); in order to respond to his questions, however, Jergovic’s narrator has either to ask for clarifications or resist the terms in which the questions are put. Asked to speak indiscriminately of both the living and the dead, the gravedigger replies that such a task is impossible, “because the dead have their lives behind them while the living don’t know what’s just around the corner” (81); asked if he’s sorry, after all his travels, to have “ended up” in besieged Sarajevo, the narrator corrects his interrogator, commenting that, “I didn’t end up here. I was born here” (81). Then, when “the idiot” reporter asks if the gravedigger is ready to die now in Sarajevo, the latter replies, “I’ve thought up hundreds of ways to stay alive, and I like all of them” (82). Moreover, when the gravedigger does respond to the questions, his philosophizing appears to be of little interest: “I can tell that he doesn’t understand or even care what I’m saying, but I don’t take offense” (81).

     

    In short, Jergovic’s second anecdote relates an account of failed communication. This failure, we should know, is a specific sort, one probably common in such interviews. The central difficulty involves what might even be a familiar trope of journalistic performance, if readers and viewers were sufficiently aware of the tricks of the trade. At the risk of losing my own audience, I’ll venture to call this particular sleight of hand “Live Puppet Ventriloquism” (and I’m thinking here, analogically, of the “Live Organ Donors” scene from the Monty Python film, The Meaning of Life).

     

    As far as Balkanist writings go, the classic work for illustrating this trope is, without a doubt, Robert D. Kaplan’s Balkan Ghosts. For those not familar with this work, let me cite Kaplan’s thesis statement (a claim which, not by coincidence, is also a perfect example of the figure in question). Here then, for your information, is the essence of the Balkans, according to Kaplan:

     

    This was a time-capsule world: a dim stage upon which people raged, spilled blood, experienced visions and ecstasies. Yet their expressions remained fixed and distant, like dusty statuary. “Here, we are completely submerged under our own histories,” Luben Gotzev, Bulgaria’s former Foreign Minister, told me. (xxi)

     

     

    The sentence that ends this quote makes its author’s thesis explicit, yet it is ostensibly not the author speaking. Live Puppet Ventriloquism.

     

    In contrast, Jergovic’s tale is meant to reveal the way that such shenanigans obstruct communication (rather than, like a chemical precipitant, giving evidence of otherwise invisible interactions). The gravedigger is extremely clear on this point. When the interview finally breaks down entirely, he comments, “I understand that he is researching the subject for his article, except he can’t write the piece because he already knows what it’s going to say” (82). The apparent paradox in this sentence’s latter half (isn’t it easier to write when we know what we will say?) is, in effect, a clever subversion of the sort of journalistic research to which its first half refers. What sort of “research” is it, after all, that aims at producing, from the lips of another, speech that you yourself have scripted? Live Puppet Ventriloquism.

     

    Unlike Jergovic’s journalist, Kaplan is overtly and insistently conscious that he–or at least his American audience–may not yet possess the necessary script. Like Jergovic’s gravedigger, moreover, Kaplan sees this issue as a problem of perspective, of obtaining the correct distance and vantage point. The very first lines of Kaplan’s prologue summon up a relevant scene: the author has chosen an “awful, predawn hour to visit the monastery of Pec in ‘Old Serbia’” (xix). Moreover, he comments, “I brought neither flashlight nor candle. Nothing focuses the will like blindness” (xix). There, while pondering the monastery’s medieval frescoes, the author has his book-generating revelation. “Fleetingly, just as the darkness began to recede, I grasped what real struggle, desperation, and hatred are all about” (xx). We should also note that Kaplan opposes this knowledge–obtained as he “shivered and groped” (xix)–to the judgments typical of “a Western mind… a mind that, in Joseph Conrad’s words, did ‘not have an hereditary and personal knowledge of the means by which an historical autocracy represses ideas, guards its power, and defends its existence’” (xx). (A mind that is also, we may assume, comfortably installed in its favorite Western easy chair, reading Balkan Ghosts.)

     

    By the end of this prologue, Kaplan is capable of answering the question that he himself posed only a few pages ago, the same question which I borrowed as an epigraph for this essay. He pictures himself again, this time while crossing the Austrian border with the former Yugoslavia.

     

    The heating, even in the first-class compartments of the train, went off. The restaurant car was decoupled. The car that replaced it was only a stand-up zinc counter for beer, plum brandy, and foul cigarettes without filters. As more stops accumulated, men with grimy fingernails crowded the counter to drink and smoke. When not shouting at each other or slugging back alcohol, they worked their way quietly through pornographic magazines. (xxx)

     

     

    Needless to say, our Western mind turns quickly away from this scene of dirt, disease, and misogyny to look outside, only to find dirt, disease, and misogyny:

     

    Snow beat upon the window. Black lignite fumes rose from brick and scrap-iron chimneys. The earth here had the harsh, exhausted face of a prostitute, cursing bitterly between coughs. The landscape of atrocities is easy to recognize… (xxxi)13

     

    At last, increasingly fed up with his interviewer, Jergovic’s gravedigger finally shuts him up:

     

    I tell him that he shouldn’t gaze into people’s faces so intently if he doesn’t understand what he sees. Perhaps he should just look at things the way I used to look at neon signs in America, in order to get a rough idea of the country. (82)

     

     

    In other words, the American journalist is told that he, like Robert Venturi, ought to “learn from Las Vegas”: anyone moving at that speed, with those sort of interests, anyone so obviously out of place, certainly shouldn’t pretend to intimacy. “When you look at advertising billboards from fifty feet away, you don’t have a clue what Sarajevo Marlboro is or isn’t” (84). Telling the story of Rasim from a vantage point overlooking the city, or even reading into that story some significance which might still be of use for the living, is one thing. Reading the faces of strangers is certainly another.

     

    Or is it? An undeniable characteristic of the stories contained in Sarajevo Marlboro is that they often read like fables or parables. It is equally obvious that, unlike some fables or parables, the moral to these stories is anything but explicit. Capturing both qualities, the final scene of “Grob” will function as a synecdoche for the book as a whole. Having despaired of direct communication, Jergovic’s gravedigger resorts once again to demonstration. He takes from his pocket an unmarked pack of cigarettes. He explains that Bosnia has no factory capable of printing brand names and logos. “I bet you think we’re poor and unhappy because we don’t even have any writing on our cigarettes” (83). Whether this particular journalist, in this instance, had this particular thought or not, it’s safe to say that some journalist nearby did. If not about cigarette packs, about something.

     

    Having snared his opponent, the gravedigger moves in for the kill. He begins to undo the packet, ready to show that it does indeed contain printing, on the inside. Sometimes movie poster paper is used, sometimes soap boxes, sometimes other forms of advertisements. What’s inside is, in the narrator’s words, “always a surprise” (83). This time, however, hidden around the corner is a joke, one played on the gravedigger himself. In this particular case, the paper used was from the old Bosnian brand of Marlboros. Hidden inside the paper of this particular cigarette pack was the paper of a pack of cigarettes: Sarajevo Marlboros.

     

    The narrator comments:

     

    Later on, I regretted that I ever opened my big mouth to the American. Why didn’t I just say that we are an unhappy and unarmed people who are being killed by Chetnik beasts, and that we’ve all gone crazy with bereavement and grief. He could have written that down, and I wouldn’t have ended up looking ridiculous in his eyes or in my own. (84)

     

    Time to sum up. Having at last recounted “Grob”‘s final anecdote, I may now also be in a position to say something further about a contradiction, or at least a confusion, in my essay thus far. How exactly does the gravedigger’s favorite point of view, the template of his imagination, differ from that of Kaplan’s “Western mind”? Both, it seems clear, are a product of distance, and both attempt to present their subjects by placing them on some sort of narrative map; furthermore, the explanations that both give are explicitly meant to be seen as products of those maps. It wouldn’t be all that unfair to say, like Rasim, that Robert D. Kaplan blames “each of the local districts” for the tragic fates of its inhabitants. Given the unexpected, and self-defeating, result of the gravedigger’s final demonstration, could it then be said that a Las Vegas blur is the only sort of vantage that remains?

     

    It seems to me that such a conclusion, or any such conclusion, is precisely what Sarajevo Marlboro resists. Let me offer some small bit of evidence, albeit indirect. Until the final paragraph of “Grob” (I checked), none of the three so-called “ethnic” or “national” labels occur, even once, in Jergovic’s story. This is not to say, of course, that this is not a tale about cultural difference–above, you will recall, I argued that it is precisely that. If forced to summarize, I’d probably say that Jergovic shows us culture as the product of many things and people as the product of many cultures: names, neighborhoods, war, family, all of these things–even “a brand of cigarettes developed by Philip Morris Inc. to suit the taste of Bosnian smokers” (83, emphasis added).

     

    One more comment. When the gravedigger points out, with great satisfaction, each key site in the life of a single Sarajevan, I am quite certain that I don’t know what it is he’s talking about. I myself never set foot in any part of the former Yugoslavia while it was still Yugoslavia, I never visited Sarajevo until after the war, and, although I read journalists, I don’t plan to become one. You, in all likelihood, have never been to Sarajevo at all. Even so, you probably understand why some people wondered whether “Mara had in fact remained Mara, or had become Fatima” (79). Some people do worry about such things; in Jergovic’s tale, however, we are also told that no one asks, and that Rasim doesn’t tell. My point is quite simple. When we hear a litany of place names in a story about Sarajevo during the siege, just what does a given place, or even its name, mean to any given Sarajevan? How could we even ask?

     

    By way of closing, however, I will relate one last anecdote of my own (a brief one, I promise). Actually, what I’d like to do, even if only in virtual space, is to take you on a nice little walk, first up above the gravedigger’s cemetery (where it says “Alifakovac”–just below the first sharp turn in the river) to a sort of two-lane highway (the yellow road below the river), and then walking east along the hillsides, following the Miljacka upstream–eventually taking you right off the Sarajevo town map, I’m afraid.

     

    Figure 9

     

    I learned about this particular itinerary on my first trip to Sarajevo, from Leah Melnick, a close friend of my sister (and an inveterate flaneuse, I was told). That’s when the following pictures were taken.

     

    Walking down the highway, after fifteen minutes or so you come to a tunnel (visible on the far right of the map above). You don’t want to go in the tunnel, not even in a car. Tunnels in Bosnia don’t have artificial lighting and they’re usually full of water and potholes (although these days at least they no longer have little surprises like an IFOR tank at the other end).14 In any case, Leah’s directions were clear–follow a little path, off to the right, up over the tunnel. You should be a bit nervous about that, and, of course, you will remember the rule: don’t walk anywhere where many, many others haven’t already walked before you. Follow footprints. Otherwise, as the public safety announcement tells you, it’s not a question of “if,” just “when” (cf. <http://www.unicef.org/newsline/super.htm>). Here, the path is in fact a very well-trodden path, and it leads surprisingly soon into a small village, one that was hidden until now by the curve of the hill in front of you. (And by me.) Here’s a part of what you find.

     

    Figure 10

     

    I haven’t got anything to say about this one. Just look at it. And imagine, if you can. (I can’t.) Then, as you continue to walk along the small, two-track path though the village, this is what you see.

     

    Figure 11

     

    And this is all you see.15 And there’s plenty more of it, above these houses too and in front of you along the path, as well.

     

    And then, at the very last house before your road starts to wind around and down to the river, there’s something different. A dog barking. Not a friendly dog. Some movement and some noise in the back corner of a yard.

     

    Figure 12

     

    It’s not much of a house, not yet at least, but it’s standing. And there’s someone there, living there perhaps, working in the yard at the moment, probably cleaning up. I have no way of telling you how glad I was to see him.16

     

    After I followed the path down toward the river, I turned back once more. Here’s that shot as well:

     

    Figure 13

     

    Now then. Leah had mentioned that eventually I would come to a bridge, so that I would be able to get across the river and walk back along the other side. (This soon after the war, a bridge wasn’t by any means a given). Here’s the bridge:

     

    Figure 14

     

    The locals call this ancient monument, this sculpture, this testament to both place and time, The Goats’ Bridge. Though I didn’t know it then, it’s traditionally thought of as the easternmost border of Sarajevo. So here’s where we turn back, walking along the river back into town. What will greet us at this end of the city is, for a couple of reasons at least, a fitting conclusion to our (or at least my) cyberramble.

     

    Figure 15

     

    This, of course, is (or was) the National Library, first built as a city hall by the Austrians at the end of the nineteenth century. If the Oslobodjenje building has any competition in the category of de facto memorials to the Sarajevo siege, this would be it. Appropriately for us, Miljenko Jergovic ends his Sarajevo Marlborocollection with a piece entitled “The Library.” Its final words are as follows:

     

    The fate of the Sarajevo University Library, its famous city hall, whose books took a whole night and day to go up in flames, will be remembered as the fire to end all fires, a last mythical celebration of ash and dust. It happened, after a whistle and an explosion, almost exactly a year ago. Perhaps even the same date that you’re reading this now. Gently stroke your books, dear strangers, and remember, they are dust. (154)

     

    Figure 16

     

    Notes

     

    1. A shifty statement, for obvious reasons. The following text was first presented on April 21, 2001 as part of the “Visible Cities” session of the annual meeting of the American Comparative Literature Association, at the University of Colorado, Boulder. Given that it investigates public, and published, modes of representation, including my own, I think it best to present the paper here more or less “as is,” or “as it was.” With the exception of minor adjustments intended to ease the shift from oral to written, all elaborations, corrections, qualifications, commentaries, and other forms of more recent speculation on my part are given in italics.

     

    The quote by Kaplan, presented here as epigraph, was not read at the conference, although I did, and do, feel that my analysis as a whole can be characterized as an attempt to understand how someone–and quite possibly anyone–could think (not to say publish) such a thought. If I have an answer to Kaplan’s question, it would be, quite simply, “Home.”

     

    2. My summary of Arendt’s argument is borrowed from Elizabeth Spelman’s Fruits of Sorrow (62-8). Another important recent work, also responding to Arendt’s views, is Luc Boltanski’s La souffrance à distance (15-21).

     

    3. This reference, for anyone following events in the region, is particularly loaded. As it turned out, a couple of weeks after the ACLA conference, a ceremony was held in Banja Luka to mark the beginning of this very mosque’s reconstruction. The event was attended by various members of the international community, including the U.S. Ambassador. It was also attended by a well-organized, well-equipped mob of Bosnian Serb nationalists, who broke up the ceremony by stoning the officials and lighting buses on fire, fatally injuring at least one Bosnian Muslim man. For more information, see the Institute for War and Peace Reporting’s “Balkan Reports,” #245 and #258, by Gordana Katana (<http://www.iwpr.net>).

     

    4. At Boulder, I had to cut the second joke to keep within (or at least close to) my allotted time.

     

    5. This may be overstated. When I double-checked my story after the conference with another Sarajevan friend of mine, one who often goes rock-climbing near there, he agreed that the house was abandoned before the war, but added that it was also damaged significantly–the roof for example–during the war. My point in introducing the photo, and introducing the essay with the photo, was to evoke a certain ready response in my audience, one that is based on some fundamental assumptions. One such assumption is, of course, our belief that we know what we’re looking at: “We’ve seen this kind of thing before.” Also prevalent is our faith in the testimony of “experts.”

     

    6. Actually, the photo shown at the conference was somewhat different. Here various smudgy areas in the snow hide (poorly, I assume, since this is my first attempt at doctoring a photo) telephone and electricity wires, as well as a garbage can.

     

    7. The question remains, however, just how far my knowledge goes. Again, on further inquiry, I found out that there was in fact a cinema–The Dubrovnik–in this building before the war and that, a year or so after this photo was taken, the space was again used to advertise a movie (in this case, of all things, Runaway Bride). Despite these ugly facts, I still like my joke; moreover, it still sounds, to my ear, sort of “Bosnian.”

     

    As in the previous note, I mean to call attention to the dogmatic character of the language used: e.g., “no other movie was ever”. By now it should be evident that I don’t really trust such statements, yet I nonetheless find myself drawn into making them–as if it somehow goes with the territory.

     

    8. This section was also cut, mostly for lack of time.

     

    9. The story of how the paper kept going throughout the siege is recorded in a book called Sarajevo Daily, by Tom Gjelten. The paper’s editor-in-chief during the war, Kemal Kurspahic, has also published an account.

     

    10. Actually I didn’t. At the conference I decided, nonetheless, to leave in this reference to my original destination. The commentary on Jergovic’s story has been extended in this version, and now does include some analysis, however brief, of the section alluded to here.

     

    Ozren Kebo, in a war diary which rivals the achievements of Sarajevo Marlboro, has commented on the branding of the Bosnian capital:

     

    Anything blessed by the media acquires exchange value. The market is blind to morality, to the fight between good and evil. This market begins just behind the Serb trenches at Kiseljak. Once the media have managed to make people sick of one product, something that they’ve robbed of its tragic character, or its greatness, or whatever, that product becomes nothing more than consumer goods. In Milan, on the 24th of December, 1993, I came across a porno video that was titled “Sarajevo.” It was on display in a black street vendor’s stall. Here, in short, was the dirty trick played on us by CNN. The cassette offered a profusion of coprophagic mischief, of copulations, of trilingus, of cunnilingus, of fellatio, but that wasn’t enough to attract buyers. The title was there in order to sell it. The black man had no idea what this eight-letter word signified. ‘It’s a really good video,’ he told me, ‘Look at the title.’

     

    Sarajevo is becoming a brand name, like Benetton, Coca-Cola and Nike. (103, my translation of the French translation)

     

    11. Time constraints.

     

    12. Laura Silber and Allan Little’s Yugoslavia: Death of a Nation gives the following account

     

    As the leaders of the procession, gathering in the Parliament forecourt, declared a ‘National Salvation Committee,’ the demonstrators swung right, over the bridge, and into Grbavica. Unwittingly, they were moving up the hill towards the beseiged police academy and into the Serb guns. Shots rang out… someone threw a hand-grenade. The crowd panicked and dispersed. Unknown to most of the demonstrators–for whom the prospect of open war still seemed preposterous–Sarajevo had suffered its first casulties of war. Suada Dilberovic, a twenty-one-year-old medical student from Dubrovnik, was the first to die. She was shot in the chest as she crossed Vrbanja Bridge and was dead on arrival at Ko�evo Hospital. (227)

     

     

    Enida Jahic, a friend and former student, after reading the conference version, added a comment about the memorial now on this site. “The Vrbanja bridge is now [itself] called Suada Deliberovic…. So I guess that the whole bridge stands for her tombstone, and it can hardly be used for propaganda. The inscription is: ‘Krv moje krvi potece, i Bosna ne presu�i’ (‘A drop of my blood was spilt, and Bosnia–i.e., the river and the country–has not become dry.’)” The inscription was written by the Bosnian poet Abdulah Sidran.

     

    13. My excerpts from the Kaplan text may perhaps be criticized in that they intentionally excise the “big idea” which it is the purpose of this scene to convey (that bourgeois democracy and prosperity, with time, make fascism impossible). He gets “the old Nazi hunter [Simon] Wiesenthal” to mouth this one for him. My point, that Kaplan’s distinction between the West and the rest is, to put it as mildly as possible, self-serving, is certainly no less true of his actual thesis. To show that both the distinction and the idea are wrong–which I also believe–would require another essay, and, I’m afraid, another essayist.

     

    14. IFOR stands for “Implementation Force,” i.e., the 60,000 troops, led by NATO, that were dispatched into Bosnia-Herzegovina as a part of the Dayton accords. The name has since been changed to “SFOR,” an abbreviation of “Stabilization Force.”

     

    15. Again, the language here (“All you see,” “it”) now strikes me as particularly coercive. Moreover, things are no longer as they were then. In the years since this photo was taken, about half of these homes were rebuilt; on the other hand, the home that I show in the next photo hasn’t changed much at all.

     

    16. When I sent this essay to my friend in Sarajevo, I added the following comment: “In reading these lines, it occurs to me how the expression is typical of sentimental writing. The person writing this doesn’t know this man, and doesn’t want to know him. What he wants is a receptacle for his own interpreting sensibility. The man himself, here portrayed as a hero, may conceivably be just the opposite. Or he could just be an ordinary human being. What do we see, if we see?”

    Works Cited

     

    • Arendt, Hannah. On Revolution. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1963.
    • Boltanski, Luc. La souffrance à distance: Morale humanitaire, médias et politique. Paris: Editions Métailié, 1993.
    • Calvino, Italo. “Dell’opaco.” La Strada di San Giovanni. Milano: Mondadori, 1990. 117-34.
    • Gjelten, Tom. Sarajevo Daily: A City and Its Newspaper Under Siege. New York: HarperCollins, 1995.
    • Jergovic, Miljenko. Sarajevo Marlboro. Trans. S. Toma�evic. London: Penguin, 1997.
    • Kaplan, Robert D. Balkan Ghosts: A Journey Through History. New York: Vintage, 1994.
    • Kebo, Ozren. Bienvenue au enfer: Sarajevo mode d’emploi. Trans. Mireille Robin. Paris: La Nuée Bleue, 1997.
    • Musil, Robert. “Monuments.” Posthumous Papers of a Living Author. Trans. Peter Wortsman. Hygiene, CO: Eridanos, 1987. 61-64.
    • Silber, Laura, and Allan Little. Yugoslavia: Death of a Nation. London: Penguin, 1997.
    • Spelman, Elizabeth V. Fruits of Sorrow: Framing Our Attention to Suffering. Boston: Beacon Press, 1997.

     

  • Marxism, Postmodernism, Zizek

    Brian Donahue

    Department of English
    Gonzaga University
    donahue@gonzaga.edu

     

    This essay begins in the midst of the ongoing dilemma posed by late-capitalist society and postmodern culture, namely, whether these remain the ultimate horizon of the contemporary world and whether efforts to resist, oppose, represent critically, or propose alternatives to the “cultural dominant” of postmodernism are merely atavistic. Below, I address some of the challenges to Marxism (as the discourse of the alternative to and the critique of capitalism par excellence) posed by the conditions of what Ernest Mandel has famously named “late capitalism” and by the theoretical discourse of what Dick Hebdige has called “the posts,”1and make a case for the continued relevance and value of Marxist theory for an ostensibly post-Marxist, would-be post-ideological period. The developments in the theory of ideology advanced in Slavoj Zizek’s work, focusing on the role of psychology in the functioning of ideology under conditions of late capitalism, are then taken as valuable criticisms and revisions of the Marxist tradition that open useful avenues for critically understanding American culture and society in recent decades.

     

    Hard Times for Marxism

     

    The zeitgeist is anti-Marxist to the same extent that it is antimodern, exhibiting what Jean-François Lyotard calls in The Postmodern Condition, in what has become one of the great slogan-definitions of postmodernism, an “incredulity toward metanarratives” (xxiv), including especially those inherited from the modern European Enlightenment tradition, such as progress and liberation. Lyotard’s argument in brief: totalizing “master narratives” no longer function to legitimate and unify knowledge; the postmodern condition is marked by heterogeneous and radically incommensurable language games; attempts to reconcile language games through the principle of consensus are “terrorist” (63). This argument is typical of postmodern neopragmatist theorizing in that it precludes the kind of large-scale analyses that would allow adequate attempts to elaborate connections between the epistemological-linguistic theory he proposes and the social, economic, and cultural forces to which he only occasionally refers. Obviously, Marxism is directly challenged in Lyotard’s analysis since it traditionally promotes both a progressive teleology and an emancipatory politics.

     

    Other specific challenges to particular Marxist concepts and protocols are widespread; for example, its utopianism, a topic much discussed by Fredric Jameson,2 often comes under fire. As Clint Burnham notes, the contemporary criticisms of utopia take two primary forms: “First, the culture doubts the possibility of some ‘better place’ than the undoubtedly excellent world of late capitalism,” a criticism that he characterizes as “‘bad,’ or negative, or ideological, or neoconservative”; and second, “that culture characterizes itself as already nonrepresentational by doubting the possibility of representationalism,” a claim that he calls the “‘good,’ or positive, or utopian, or postmodern critique of utopia” (2). In either case, a conception of radical social change toward an imagined (better) future beyond the capitalist horizon is eradicated. Other Marxist categories and concepts–everything from the labor theory of value to the claims for dialectical materialism as a “science” of inquiry3–have come under attack in various high theoretical arguments. Such writings, combined with the collapse of state socialism in Eastern Europe, have raised the question for leftist intellectuals at the start of the twenty-first century: why Marxism (still)?

     

    Burnham offers several answers to this question that are worth repeating: first, Marxism has for the past thirty years or so found its “moral legitimacy (for better or for worse)” more in the Western new social movements of “youth, ecology, feminism, antiracism” and the like and in the “Third World (from Che to postcolonialism)” than in Eastern European state socialism; second, Marxism is not a monolithic discourse, and even during the Soviet era its most significant theorists always maintained an “independent and skeptical attitude” rather than a blind allegiance to the Communist party; third, the European revolutions have demonstrated that “the masses can opt to take control of their own destinies,” invalidating fascist hopes for efficient control, even if these particular revolts were “as much about consumer goods as… about freedom”; and fourth, Marxist Third World liberation movements and Marxist critical analyses of world political-economic situations remain as relevant as ever in the post-Cold War period (4-5). Regardless of whether we wish to accept Burnham’s claims in their entirety, they certainly indicate at a minimum that Marxism should not be dismissed as casually as it often is in the current intellectual climate. For all of its demonstrable continued relevance, however, Marxism does face difficult times, not least among intellectuals, as can be seen in the debates over postmodernism in theoretical circles since the 1970s as well as in the events and developments that have prompted those debates.

     

    Postmodernism as Post-Marxism

     

    Most theoretical accounts of postmodernism have focused on various features of advanced industrialized societies since the end of the second World War, citing an array of historical transformations as signs of the birth of a new era. Such trends and events as the detonation of the first atomic bomb; the proliferation of television; the rise of rock and roll and youth culture; the first transmissions of images of the earth as seen from space; the expansion of finance capital and money markets; the attenuation of the distinction between high art and commercial popular culture; the development of sophisticated computer technology and the related nexus of information, power, and profit; the migration of the middle classes from cities to suburbs; the emergence of new social movements and political alliances unconstrained by older party affiliations; the shift in economically advanced regions away from heavy industrial manufacturing toward a service economy and consumer society, accompanied by an increased international division of labor; the rise of nationalist political independence movements; the proliferation of cynicism and suspicion of traditional narratives of legitimation; the expansion of multinational corporations; and the consolidation of reactionary fundamentalist religious and political movements have all been deemed hallmarks or inaugural moments of postmodern times.

     

    Different theorists associated with the discourse on postmodernism have taken different features as definitive and have approached the topic through different critical frameworks. Lyotard, as noted above, focuses on epistemology and aesthetics in The Postmodern Condition, addressing the crisis of legitimation in contemporary intellectual discourse and advocating the agonistics of irreconcilable language games. Jean Baudrillard, especially in his work since the late 1970s, experiments with a postmodern theoretical sociology that abandons traditional modes of critique and conceptual schemata in favor of pointed, ironic descriptions of consumer society and mass media. Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari espouse a militant philosophy of desire, championing the decentered, nomadic, postmodern subject as “schizo.” Jameson, writing on the postmodernism question from within the Marxist tradition, takes a broad historical perspective, linking postmodern culture explicitly to changes in the structure of capitalist political economy in the postwar era.4 The differences among the critical perspectives underlying these positions–in particular the differences between those that treat postmodernism as an aesthetic style, discursive problematic, or mood of schizophrenic, contradictory, conflicted subjectivity, and those that conceptualize postmodernity via a totalizing dialectical model as an overarching global, political-economic, historical reality or periodizing concept–remain significant. They are the differences that make a difference in this debate, marking a key theoretical dividing line.

     

    Slavoj Zizek discusses the implications of the way this dividing line is usually presented in contemporary theory. In a defense of dialectical totalization against the notions of dissemination and radically irreconcilable fragmentation that prevail in postmodern theory, Zizek claims that the very form of the opposition as posed in the question “gives predominance to the second term of the alternative” because it “silently assumes that every attempt at rational totalization is in advance doomed to failure” (For They 99). But this characterization misrepresents the Hegelian understanding of a rational totality, he writes, in that “the very impetus of the ‘dialectical progress’” has to do with “the possibility of ‘making a system’ out of the very series of failed totalizations, to enchain them in a rational way, to discern the strange ‘logic’ that regulates the process by means of which the breakdown of a totalization itself begets another totalization” (99). He goes on to make a similar argument with regard to the Marxist notion of the class struggle, which is widely criticized by postmodernists as “the ‘totalizing’ moment of society, its structuring principle,… a kind of ultimate guarantee authorizing us to grasp society as a rational totality” (100). Such characterizations, Zizek argues, overlook “the ultimate paradox of the notion of ‘class struggle,’” which is that

     

    society is “held together” by the very antagonism, split, that forever prevents its closure in a harmonious, transparent, rational Whole–by the very impediment that undermines every rational totalization. Although “class struggle” is nowhere directly given as a positive entity, it none the less functions, in its very absence, as the point of reference enabling us to locate every social phenomenon not by relating it to class struggle as its ultimate meaning (“transcendental signified”) but by conceiving it as an(other) attempt to conceal and “patch up” the rift of the class struggle, to efface its traces–what we have here is the typical structural-dialectical paradox of an effect which exists only in order to efface the causes of its existence; of an effect which in a way “resists” its own cause. (100)

     

    Here Zizek, like Jameson, rebuts condemnations of the maligned “closed, totalized system,” claiming that Hegelian and Marxist dialectical theory never aimed at total closure in the first place and reasserting its methodological value in the face of postmodern criticisms by arguing that those criticisms are based on a generalized and mistaken conception of Hegelian and Marxist thinking in terms of absolute, total, and unified systems. In other words, even Hegel knew that Absolute Spirit’s destiny of perfect, static self-contemplation was always already rendered impossible by the ineluctable necessity of movement, and, as Zizek writes, even Marx understood that the “‘normal’ state of capitalism is the permanent revolutionizing of its own conditions of existence,” even though he sometimes proceeded “as if he [did] not know it, by describing the very passage from capitalism to socialism in terms of… vulgar evolutionist dialectics” (Sublime 52-53). While he does defend the dialectical tradition, Zizek does not simply revert to a “vulgar” Marxism (although Jameson has recently suggested that such a move might in fact be called for in the post-Cold War era5). I develop a more thorough discussion of his work below.

     

    Returning now to the issues at stake in the postmodernism debate, I find persuasive the efforts of Jameson and Zizek to link them to a dialectical tradition that, according to their arguments, has not been “made obsolete” by the advent of postmodern theory. The concerns of this latter discourse–from problems of representation and language to concerns with history, subjectivity, aesthetics, and politics–have been and continue to be central concerns of Marxist theory, notably in the work of the critical theorists of the Frankfurt School. Thus, just as the postmodernism question–even after all the pages devoted to it over the past thirty years–still looms in the background of any contemporary Marxist criticism, so too the questions of totality, capitalism, praxis, telos, and the “properly political” must be brought to bear on any postmodern theory and criticism that avoids such topics.

     

    As for the term postmodernism itself, it has taken on multiple meanings in its various incarnations and has provoked numerous attacks and debates. The semantic widening that has occurred as the term has appeared in more and more discursive fields over the course of its popularization should not, however, according to Hebdige, be taken as reason to dismiss it as meaningless gibberish. On the contrary, following Raymond Williams’s reasoning in Keywords, he suggests that “the more complexly nuanced a word is, the more likely it is to have formed the focus for historically significant debates, to have occupied a semantic ground in which something precious and important was felt to be embedded” (182).

     

    As nonacademic writers and traditional humanist scholars have made forays into this semantic ground, the assaults against the concept of postmodernism have taken a variety of forms, including claims that the term has no clear definition, that it’s a faddish sign of changing academic fashion or an irrelevant topic for elites to ponder and debate in coded jargon, and especially recently, that the arguments surrounding the term have run their course and deserve to die out quietly. Yet each of these claims holds whatever degree of validity it may retain only to the extent that it implicitly accepts to some degree from the start the very kind of immanent, nominalist epistemology that is alleged to be the hallmark of postmodernism, an epistemology according to which the Jamesonian thesis–that postmodernity names the current historical totality of our actual global political economy (even if an exhaustive catalog of its empirical features remains properly impossible and if a selective description of such features would necessarily reveal contradictions)–is bracketed from the start. That is, it is possible to dismiss the concept of postmodernism as a “mere” fad only within an epistemological context that assumes that such fads constitute nothing more than elements of a linguistic game played by the academic “discourse community” and that they have relevance only to the extent that they, for example, provide fodder for conversations, presentations, and publications without ever “touching ground.” In this sense, conservative intellectuals who call for a return to essential Western values, the great classics, moral authority, and foundational principles and who simultaneously dismiss theories of postmodernism out of hand as fashionably relativistic nihilism are trying to have it both ways: they want foundationalism, but they want to insist at the same time that in the case of the concept of postmodernism, there is no foundation, as if with a vigorous enough rhetorical flourish they could make it–and what it signifies–disappear.

     

    In other words, there is a call to a reflection model of language in the conservative position, yet the idea that the sign postmodernism might refer to or reflect an actual “reality” is dismissed (and therefore the sign is deemed meaningless). Of course, one of the key features of postmodern theory–insofar as its lineage includes structuralist linguistics and the application of the linguistic model across the full range of theoretical discourse and cultural practices (and even the critique of the binary coding of this model in the poststructuralist moment)–is its questioning of the strict distinction between the “real world” and (linguistic) representation. As Derrida put it, “From the moment there is meaning there are nothing but signs” (50). But then at another level, mimesis reintroduces itself because such a theory may be held to “reflect” a certain virtualization, spectacularization, and intensified semioticization of the “real world” itself in the era of mass media and computerization and of the movement of scientific research toward what Lyotard calls “postmodern science” (53-60).6

     

    In any case, the conservative criticism wants to refuse both postmodern theory itself and the possibility that the theory may indicate that something “really has changed” about the world conceived and described in the discourses of modernity. Any tendencies in intellectual and cultural discourse that have emphasized the role of language and cultural forms in constructing social reality are therefore deemed suspect and potentially dangerous in that they allegedly put the cart of language and culture before the horse of the reality they reflect. Examples would include the aesthetic and cultural politics of the modernist avant-garde, who understood their work to be ahead of its time and who emphasized the autonomy of art and its consequent role in shaping rather than reflecting social reality; the Nietzschean-Heideggerian-Derridean philosophical lineage that emphasizes language as a kind of inescapable horizon circumscribing reality, history, experience, and consciousness; the Althusserian structuralist-Marxist emphasis on “ideological state apparatuses” as determinants of subjectivity; the propensity within literary criticism after the rise of semiotic theory to see signs everywhere, even where–the conservative critic would want to say–we used to see things; and the Lacanian psychoanalytic focus on the linguistic structure of the unconscious and the determining role of language in the formation of subjectivity. All of these very different critical approaches would be considered a departure from “common sense” realism and traditional foundational premises.

     

    The reflection or mimetic model of language and representation is also, however, a simplified version of a certain line of anti-poststructuralist Marxist critique. That is, as a counter to the tendency in poststructuralism to insist on the omnipresence of textuality, a traditional Marxist theoretical response insists on the determination of the cultural superstructure in the last instance by the economic base even if that “last instance” functions as a limit that is never actually reached and even if such determinations are mediated in multiple complex ways. So a kind of affinity can be seen between conservative and Marxist arguments against extreme versions of poststructuralism, but that shared criticism is where the similarity generally ends. The conservative argument is usually made in the name of an idealized conception of intellectual history as “great men who wrote great books.” Thus the critical-materialist dimension of Marxism is at odds with it. But there is a contending discourse, to which I have already referred, that offers a dialectical critical theory also strictly at odds with extreme versions of postmodern theory yet at the same time apparently comfortably “post”-Marxist and therefore (more of) a puzzle (than humanist liberalism or conservatism) for anyone claiming allegiance to traditional or “vulgar” Marxist materialism.

     

    Zizek, Defender of the Dialectic

     

    Among the most celebrated academic celebrities of the nineties, Slavoj Zizek is a prolific and authoritative writer who explains philosophical and psychoanalytic concepts through references to popular culture, jokes, and political ideologies. His work has done much to advance a psychoanalytic theory of ideology, offering a combined Lacanian-Hegelian model as a counter to both traditional Marxist ideology critique and more recent poststructuralist discourse analysis. His style is often breezy, associative, enjoyable, and hyperbolic, to the extent that it is not until one finishes reading that one begins to feel that he has been repeating the same idea throughout the various short segments of the text. This observation is not meant to imply that he is literally repeating himself but to suggest that the form of his arguments often appears the same even if the content shifts restlessly. From a certain distance, he appears to be an entertainer who can quickly and cleverly make Moebius strips out of every kind of material he encounters. Nonetheless, much of his work seems to capture perfectly the workings of ideology in our “post-ideological” times.

     

    To take one example, in The Sublime Object of Ideology Zizek revisits Pascal’s argument about the real effectivity of material practice, regardless of what one takes to be one’s subjective beliefs (33-40). The simplified version of Pascal’s approach to this topic is, “Kneel, and you will believe.” In other words, the ritualized practice of regulated bodily movements in particular religious settings, accompanied by specific physical sensations over time in a regular pattern, is enough to “induce” belief in a doubter. Zizek is careful to stress, however, the distinction between this materialism of “custom” and the simplistic concept of brainwashing or “insipid behaviorist wisdom (‘the content of your belief is conditioned by your factual behavior’)” (40), a distinction based on “the paradoxical status of a belief before belief“:

     

    By following a custom, the subject believes without knowing it, so that the final conversion is merely a formal act by means of which we recognize what we have already believed. In other words, what the behaviorist reading of Pascalian “custom” misses is the crucial fact that the external custom is always a material support for the subject’s unconscious. (40)

     

    Zizek applies this argument about the “automatism of the signifier” to a variety of homologous situations, such as the spinning of Tibetan prayer wheels and the practice in some cultures of hiring “weepers” to grieve on one’s behalf. He draws from these various examples the general lesson that external, material factors play an important though paradoxical role in producing, which is to say enabling retrospective recognition of, what are usually taken to be internal, spiritual-ideological states. This process thus demonstrates “the objectivity of belief”: the ritualized behavior “does the believing” for the doubter and induces/allows acknowledgment of “real” belief; the spinning wheels carrying written prayers effectively “do the praying” for whoever spins them; the hired mourners “do the grieving” for the relative of the deceased. As further examples, Zizek cites Lacan’s comments on the Chorus in Greek tragedy, which does “our duty of compassion for the heroes” even if we are “just drowsily watching the show,” as well as the familiar current example of canned laughter and applause on the soundtracks of television shows, sounds that perform the same function as the classical Chorus: “the Other–embodied in the television set–is relieving us even of our duty to laugh–is laughing instead of us” (35).

     

    Developing this idea in specifically Marxist terms, Zizek emphasizes the point that commodity fetishism is a property not of consciousness but of objective behavior and that belief in the fetish is always ascribed to a “subject presumed to believe.” Thus in their actual socioeconomic behavior, in their everyday activity, people fetishize commodities, even though consciously, they are perfectly aware that the “relations between things” mask “relations between people” (“Supposed” 41). In such a context, Zizek points out, the task for theory is not to “demonstrate how the original human belief was transposed onto things”; on the contrary, “displacement is original and constitutive” (“Supposed” 41). No one consciously acknowledges that he or she believes in the magical properties of commodities; rather, this belief is attributed always to an Other, in this case, to the uncritical consumer who is duped by the messages of advertising, ignorantly seeking happiness through the consumption of commodities:

     

    There are some beliefs, the most fundamental ones, which are from the very outset “decentered,” beliefs of the Other; the phenomenon of the “subject supposed to believe” is thus universal and structurally necessary…. All concrete versions of this “subject supposed to believe” (from the small kids for whose sake their parents pretend to believe in Santa Claus to the “ordinary working people” for whose sake communist intellectuals pretend to believe in socialism) are stand-ins for the big Other. So the answer to the conservative platitude according to which every honest man has a profound need to believe in something is that every honest man has a profound need to find another subject who would believe in his place. (“Supposed” 41-42)

     

    After summarizing this argument about the psychological displacement of belief that characterizes the subject’s relation to commodities in capitalist society, Zizek specifies the appropriate Marxist response, which is not to perform a kind of primary-level ideology critique, since the bourgeois subject is already consciously critical:

     

    What the fetish objectivizes is “my true belief,” the way things “truly seem to me,” although I never effectively experience them this way…. So when a critical Marxist encounters a bourgeois subject immersed in commodity fetishism, the Marxist’s reproach to him is not “Commodity may seem to you a magical object endowed with special powers, but it really is just a reified expression of relations between people”; the actual Marxist’s reproach is rather “You may think that the commodity appears to you as a simple embodiment of social relations (that, for example, money is just a kind of voucher entitling you to a part of the social product), but this is not how things really seem to you–in your social reality, by means of your participation in social exchange, you bear witness to the uncanny fact that a commodity really appears to you as a magical object endowed with special powers.” (“Supposed” 54)

     

    In other words, bourgeois subjects think they see through the veil of the commodity form and rest comfortably in that critical knowledge of socioeconomic relations; but in reality, they behave as if they believe differently from what they know, and their relation to commodities is the objective illustration of this disavowed belief.

     

    This line of reasoning, then, locates ideology not in consciousness but in real activity. Zizek cites the formula for contemporary cynical ideology proposed in Peter Sloterdijk’s Critique of Cynical Reason: as opposed to the traditional Marxist notion, according to which people are “duped” into believing the ruling ideology and thus “do not know what they are doing” when they effectively participate in their own subjugation, contemporary popular cynicism forces us to consider the notion of an “enlightened false consciousness” whereby “they know very well what they are doing, but still, they are doing it” (Sublime 29).

     

    Like most analyses of subjectivity in contemporary theory, this version disrupts radically the notion of a fully self-present subject: the grain of material practice in time is always already altering all ideological symbolization. To use Zizek’s Lacanian language: the irreducible “hard kernel” of the Real remains unassimilated into the Symbolic order. One can, for example, have a self-conception as an ironic, critical viewer who watches TV comedies as kitsch or as the detritus of the culture industry, but according to Zizek’s version of externalized ideology, as long as one sits and watches–whether laughing idiotically or making ironic, cynical comments–objectively, one is doing one’s duty to “enjoy the show.” This notion has significant implications for theories of both ideology and subjectivity. For example, the determining effect of objective activity regardless of subjective intention can be read as another way of stating the existentialist slogan that there is no “dress rehearsal” for life: at each moment actions are final and decisive, even if one believes oneself to be, for example, merely “performing a role” temporarily before returning to some other “real life.” That real life is being determined at each instant by numerous material factors in the face of which a concept like “personal choice” loses the certainty of its suggestion of direct action in pursuit of clearly understood interests.

     

    This Lacanian “hard kernel” that appears prominently in Zizek’s work can have varying political valences. Its value for radical politics derives from its affirmation of the Lacanian notion of the inherent lack enabling subjectivity: the subject is constituted through, yet simultaneously split by, the object-cause of desire such that the “it” is always already there before the “I” can be recognized. This focus on that which cannot be made consciously transparent to the subject through linguistic symbolization counters a prevailing current of contemporary mainstream U.S. culture that denies or derides the unconscious as an invention of psychoanalysis in the same way that it denies or derides class struggle as an invention of Marxism, both treated as entirely discredited projects. The idea that rational linguistic processes can never achieve transparency and that subjects are unable to know fully their own motivations is corrosive to the basic assumptions of liberalism. If rational discourse is subtended by an unassimilable, extradiscursive Real, then the model of liberal politics–free, rational subjects representing their interests through transparent communication in an effort to achieve consensus–is called into question. “Freedom,” “rationality,” and “transparency” are shown to be ideological fictions draped over the Real, which is never fully covered by them. Such a model poses problems for, among other projects, the Habermasian social-democratic ideal of rational intersubjective communication as well as the American liberal neopragmatism promoted by Richard Rorty.7

     

    For all the ground it gains in destabilizing liberal politics, the “hard kernel of the Real” also raises problems for radical politics. To the extent that it can be understood as a zone of absolute, prediscursive otherness beyond criticism, the Real can function as a naturalized, ahistorical alibi that assures in advance the failure of systemic critique and future-oriented political projects by fetishizing the moment at which we must throw up our hands and admit ignorance and the failure of representation. This insistence on the Real as radically foreclosed from symbolization thus effectively serves existing hegemonic relations by reinforcing the lines of inclusion and exclusion that determine the relative power accorded to various subject positions as inevitable effects of an invariant law of the Real. This is essentially Judith Butler’s critique of Zizek along feminist-poststructuralist lines.8

     

    Another common criticism of Zizek holds that he ultimately takes no position on the ideological issues he addresses. The problem is related to that Moebius strip quality mentioned above: Zizek consistently performs stunning critical analyses, but the question of where they are supposed to lead is not always answered, especially in The Sublime Object of Ideology, his first book published in English. Indeed, at the 1999 MLA convention, Teresa Ebert criticized Zizek from a strictly traditional Marxist standpoint, characterizing him as a contemporary cynic trapped in the dead-end of “enlightened false consciousness,” and arguing that despite his self-presentation as a critic who exposes the workings of contemporary popular-cynical ideology, Zizek himself assumes what amounts to a meta-cynical posture that does not free him from the charge of cynicism.

     

    Perhaps as a result of criticisms that his work avoids adopting clear and consistent political stances, Zizek has made some of his “ideological” positions more explicit in his recent writing.9 These recent essays directly address contemporary ideological issues, undermining critical comments such as the following by Sean Homer:

     

    His work never really moves to that second moment, whereby a consideration of what ideology returns to us may facilitate the formulation of oppositional ideologies and the space of politics proper. I always remain unclear, for example, what Zizek is actually arguing for. Moreover, for Zizek, this is not really a legitimate question; it is somehow to miss the point. (par. 12)

     

    In a similar gesture, Denise Gigante has made this characterization of Zizek’s work as apolitical or “undecidable” the central point of her recent article on him: “But where Zizek is unique, and where he makes his radical break with other literary theorists who take up a position, any position at all that pretends to some notional content, is the fact that he fundamentally has no position” (153).

     

    This conception of Zizek as a political cipher is perhaps understandable on a first reading of a text like Looking Awry or even The Sublime Object of Ideology and on a hasty categorization of him as a “poststructuralist psychoanalytic theorist” (a categorization that would require considerable elaboration). But in light of careful analysis of a wide selection of his writings, it would be difficult to insist on Zizek’s political inscrutability. On the contrary, his work evinces a general ideological commitment to a radical democracy that is critical of both the globalizing capitalism of the present and the bureaucratic state socialism of the recent past. Thus, he advocates an (admittedly somewhat nebulous) “third way” for the future while acknowledging the need for nation-states in the present as a counter both to the increasing transnationalism of capital and to the dialectically co-determined phenomenon of increasing ethnic and religious “fundamentalist” violence and racism. While Zizek does not frequently perform detailed analysis of specific policy issues, he does write consistently from within the broad ideological framework I have described above–contrary to the effort of Gigante to build an entire argument on the premise that Zizek’s “subjective transparency is precisely his point” (154) and of Homer to chastise him for failing to draw connections between his critical writing and the political sphere. Indeed, the following passage provides a clear statement of his ideas about at least one major topic of recent political philosophy, the “civil society” of late capitalism:

     

    People have this ethics of the bad state and good civic, independent structures. But sorry, in Slovenia I am for the state and against civil society! In Slovenia, civil society is equal to the right-wingers. In America, after the Oklahoma bombing, they suddenly discovered that there are hundreds of thousands of jerks. Civil society is not this nice social movement but a network of moral majority conservatives and nationalist pressure groups, against abortion, for religious education in schools: a real pressure from below. (“Japan,” par. 24)

     

    As for his stance with respect to political economy, it is clear that a major aim of Zizek’s work is a critique of capitalism in an effort to contribute to the building of an anti-capitalist agenda in the realm of the political, where struggles for hegemony are constantly engaged and renewed. Following the general thrust of post-Gramscian Marxism, he stresses that this hegemonizing process of “winning consent” is always at work, even at the supposedly objective level of the economy. Thus he argues, for example, that warnings from financial experts about the dangers of certain economic reform measures, even when such warnings are backed up by citations of crises “caused” by similar policies in other situations, should not be understood as neutral descriptions of “objective” economic causality:

     

    The fact that, if one does not obey the limits set by Capital, a crisis “really follows,” in no way “proves” that the necessity of these limits is an objective necessity of economic life. It should rather be conceived as proof of the privileged position Capital holds in the economic and political struggle, as in the situation where a stronger partner threatens that if you do X, you will be punished by Y, and then, upon your doing X, Y effectively ensues. (“Multiculturalism” 35)

     

    While this is a recent and fairly direct comment on the dynamics of multinational capitalist economic policy, his work has always exhibited an engagement with Marxist theory and has always been implicitly and often explicitly grounded in the project of a critique of capitalist social relations and ideology, especially as these are connected with questions of subjectivity. Numerous other examples could be cited in addition to the two passages above, each a rebuke to the attempt to represent Zizek as an apolitical ironist, resistant “to being born into any critical stance,” as Gigante characterizes him (160).

     

    In any case, many of Zizek’s arguments and concepts seem “intuitively” accurate in the contemporary world: representation does fail; evil does show itself; rational discourse does break down; motivations for behavior are not always explicable; ideology does seem to function through enjoyment at some level; ironic distance and cynicism, far from being subversive, do seem to be built into hegemonic discourse today. The relevance of these issues can be seen in recent episodes of violence in U.S. schools. It is possible to string the shootings together and interpret their meaning, drawing rational conclusions of various ideological shadings: the events are a sign of the moral bankruptcy of our secular society, an aftereffect of the permissive, anti-establishment counterculture of the sixties, which has left young people without a consistent moral code and ex-hippie adults with no authority to enforce such a code if it did exist. Conversely, one can argue that the violence is a sign of the growing alienation of youth in an increasingly competitive late-capitalist socioeconomic system in which all value has been translated into market value, a situation that sends parents to work for more hours of the week and leaves children to be surrogate-parented by television and other forms of commercial mass culture, which merely replicate and augment the alienation of the adult world, cynically positioning them solely as consumers representing market segments. Zizek’s work seems to suggest that neither the moralistic-conservative nor the Marxist-radical analysis (nor even the liberal reformer’s argument for gun control and educational prevention programs) will ultimately touch the “hard kernel of the Real” that emerges in all these cases of youth violence. Indeed, notwithstanding broad characterizations of contemporary theory as “antimetaphysical,” something like a theological conception of primal evil seems to be operating here and in work by theorists like Baudrillard, who argues in The Transparency of Evil that all the effort at eliminating evil from contemporary discourse (the various constructive engagement policies, win-win scenarios, conflict resolution programs, self-esteem workshops, and up-with-people organizations) cannot eradicate it, even if that evil is hidden and denied, or more accurately, is desymbolized:

     

    The world is so full of positive feelings, naive sentimentality, self-important rectitude and sycophancy that irony, mockery, and the subjective energy of evil are always in the weaker position. At this rate every last negative sentiment will soon be forced into a clandestine existence. (107-08)

     

    Another passage in the same text seems to forecast the logic of the school-violence outbursts of recent years:

     

    In a society which seeks–by prophylactic measures, by annihilating its own natural referents, by whitewashing violence, by exterminating all germs and all of the accursed share, by performing cosmetic surgery on the negative–to concern itself solely with quantified management and with the discourse of the Good, in a society where it is no longer possible to speak of Evil, Evil has metamorphosed into all the viral and terroristic forms that obsess us. (81)

     

    Thus evil erupts in any number of instances of the return of the repressed, among which the school shootings would no doubt be deemed exemplary, 10 as would the plot of their precursor text, Michael Lehmann’s film Heathers (1989), a dark comedy about the class structure of a “typical” suburban high school (an especially relevant reference in light of media reports about the clique-resentment that at least in part fueled the April 1999 killings at a “typical” suburban high school in Colorado). In this film the narrator, who at first tries to become accepted by the dominant group of girls (all named Heather), is eventually drawn by her sociopathic boyfriend into unknowingly helping him murder their popular-girl and jock-boy classmates, passing off the incidents as suicides, an explanation that the adults and other students are exceedingly willing to accept. The point for Baudrillard, following Bataille, is that the “accursed share” cannot be extricated from any economy: the “bad subject” may eventually try to blow up the school during the pep rally. This analysis essentially repeats a formula that Zizek frequently quotes from Lacan’s Third Seminar, Les Psychoses: “What is refused in the Symbolic order returns in the Real.”

     

    But we should not let this “theological” reading of contemporary evil stand without further elaboration since neither Zizek nor Baudrillard grounds his comments in Christian theology or calls for a stricter adherence to traditional moral codes as a “solution.” For Zizek this would be no solution at all, since morality operates in Symbolic reality while the particular kind of evil that he diagnoses in, for example, racist violence, skinhead beatings, and school shootings has roots in the non-symbolized Real of jouissance.

     

    Simulacrum, Superego, Lacanian Ethics, and the Problem of Evil

     

    According to Zizek, theorists of postmodern society who make much of the usurpation of the Real by the simulacrum either long nostalgically for the lost distinction between them or announce the final overcoming of the “metaphysical obsession with authentic Being,” or both (he mentions Paul Virilio and Gianni Vattimo, and we might add Baudrillard to the list). In either case they “miss the distinction between simulacrum and appearance”:

     

    What gets lost in today’s plague of simulations is not the firm, true, nonsimulated Real, but appearance itself. To put it in Lacanian terms: the simulacrum is imaginary (illusion), while appearance is symbolic (fiction); when the specific dimension of symbolic appearance starts to disintegrate, imaginary and real become more and more indistinguishable…. And, in sociopolitical terms, this domain of appearance (that is, symbolic fiction) is none other than that of politics…. The old conservative motto of keeping up appearances thus today obtains a new twist:… [it] stands for the effort to save the properly political space. (“Leftist” 995-96)

     

    Making the same argument about a slightly different version of this problem, Zizek writes that the standard reading of “outbursts of ‘irrational’ violence” in the postmodern “society of the spectacle” is that “our perception of reality is mediated by aestheticized media manipulations to such an extent that it is no longer possible for us to distinguish reality from its media image” (Metastases 75). Violent outbursts in this context are thus seen as “desperate attempts to draw a distinction between fiction and reality… [and] to dispel the cobweb of the aestheticized pseudo-reality” (75). Again with reference to the Lacanian triad of Imaginary-Symbolic-Real, Zizek argues that this analysis is “right for the wrong reasons“:

     

    What is missing from it is the crucial distinction between imaginary order and symbolic fiction.

     

    The problem of contemporary media resides not in their enticing us to confound fiction with reality but, rather, in their “hyperrealist” character by means of which they saturate the void that keeps open the space for symbolic fiction. (75)

     

    A society of proliferating, promiscuous images is thus not overly fictionalized but is, on the contrary, not “fictionalized” enough in the sense that the basis for making valid statements, the structure guaranteeing intersubjective communication, the order permitting shared narratives and, to use Jameson’s term, “cognitive mapping”11–in short, the realm of the Symbolic–is short-circuited by an incessant flow of images, which solicit not analysis and the powers of thought but rather nothing more than blank, unreflective enjoyment.

     

    The kind of subjectivity that corresponds to this hyperreal, spectacularized society without a stable Symbolic order is what Zizek calls in Looking Awry the “pathological narcissist” (102). That is, following the predominance of the “‘autonomous’ individual of the Protestant ethic” and the “heteronomous ‘organization man’” who finds satisfaction through “the feeling of loyalty to the group”–the two models of subjectivity corresponding to previous stages of capitalist society–today’s media-spectacle-consumer society is marked by the rise of the “pathological narcissist,” a subjective structure that breaks with the “underlying frame of the ego-ideal common to the first two forms” (102). The first two forms involved inverted versions of each other: one either strove to remain true to oneself (that is, to a “paternal ego-ideal”) or looked at oneself “through the eyes of the group,” which functioned as an “externalized” ego-ideal, and sought “to merit its love and esteem” (102). With the stage of the “pathological narcissist,” however, the ego-ideal itself is dissolved:

     

    Instead of the integration of a symbolic law, we have a multitude of rules to follow–rules of accommodation telling us “how to succeed.” The narcissistic subject knows only the “rules of the (social) game” enabling him to manipulate others; social relations constitute for him a playing field in which he assumes “roles,” not proper symbolic mandates; he stays clear of any kind of binding commitment that would imply a proper symbolic identification. He is a radical conformist who paradoxically experiences himself as an outlaw. (102)

     

    Thus the “permissive” society of the last decades of the twentieth century, marked by the often-noted “decline of paternal authority,” turns out not to be more liberating than earlier social formations after all; in fact, Zizek writes, “this disintegration of the ego-ideal entails the installation of a ‘maternal’ superego that does not prohibit enjoyment but, on the contrary, imposes it and punishes ‘social failure’ in a far more cruel and severe way, through an unbearable and self-destructive anxiety” (103).

     

    While its generalized form may be more recent, the effects of this overbearing presence of the maternal superego are already evident in Orson Welles’s Citizen Kane (1941).12 The film offers viewers a fairly simple “psychological” reading of the title character’s dying utterance, “Rosebud”: we learn at the end of the narrative that this was the name of Kane’s childhood sled; thus we surmise that Kane’s saying the word as he dies indicates his nostalgic longing for his idyllic Colorado childhood. The word evokes the period before Kane was separated from his parents–at a time when he was not yet mature enough (still a “rosebud”) to make decisions for himself–and was inserted into a position of wealth and power that he never sought and in which he could not, after all, find true happiness. But this reading overlooks the fact that it is Kane’s mother who initiates the tragic progression of her son’s future through her desire that Charles should have a “better life” than was possible in their rural home. It also overlooks the related fact that she does so over the impotent objections of Kane’s ineffectual father, a man who is without power because he is without property: the deed to the mine that has become the source of the family’s sudden wealth belongs to Mrs. Kane alone.

     

    Kane’s acts of youthful rebellion against his despised guardian-father Thatcher, which include transgressions that get him expelled from various elite colleges, and his decision to enter adult public life as the publisher of a sensationalistic, populist, anti-big-business newspaper because running a newspaper might be “fun,” as he tells Thatcher, appear at first to be attempts to break free of the restrictive “law of the father” embodied in the stern and humorless banker, who predictably disapproves of Kane’s activities and decisions. But Thatcher is merely a substitute-father put in place to enact the desire of Kane’s mother that Charles should grow up to be someone important, a situation that Kane never shows any awareness of in his defiance. As Kane’s friend Jed Leland, thinking back on their relationship, comments about Kane, “He loved Charlie Kane, of course, very dearly; and his mother–I guess he always loved her.” Kane’s explicit rebellion, then, is directed against the world of sober responsibility as law-of-the-father and thus takes the form of his “enjoying himself,” “having fun,” and “championing the cause of the common man,” behavior that he experiences as transgressive but that actually involves his acting out the paradoxical injunction to enjoy imposed by the maternal superego.

     

    As for Kane’s fight for “the common man,” it is ambiguous at best and seems to be motivated initially by the enjoyment that he derives from defying Thatcher and promoting causes antithetical to his interests. His “convictions” are sustained thereafter by his enjoyment of the support and adulation of friends and voters during his political campaign. Significantly, it is just when it appears inevitable, according to polls, that Kane will win the election and become governor–that is, just when he will have to make good on his attested convictions and assume the symbolic position of paternal authority as embodiment of Law–that he initiates an extramarital affair, which, when exposed, leads to his defeat on election day. This pathological pattern is continued later in the film as he begins wasting money by making wildly irrational expenditures on useless objects to fill his “fantasy palace,” Xanadu, violating the paternal laws of utility and economy and evading the “reality principle”: he remains trapped in a cycle of compulsive repetition on a narcissistic quest for enjoyment that can never be achieved precisely because it is demanded by the maternal superego, which determines his actions despite his properly egotistical claims that only he himself decides what he will do.

     

    On the night when he first meets his mistress and second wife Susan Alexander while on the way to a warehouse where his deceased mother’s possessions are stored, Kane learns that Alexander’s mother always wanted Susan to be an opera singer. As if by command, he immediately asks her to sing for him that evening and soon begins the process of training her for an opera career, fulfilling the desire of her mother regardless of Susan’s own desire and thereby taking on the role that Thatcher played for Kane himself as a youth. As both Kane’s and Susan’s misery demonstrate, however, avoiding the law of the father by fulfilling the desire of the mother is hardly an advisable course of action.13 As Leland remarks, directly contradicting the affected ethical resolution of Kane’s “declaration of principles,” which Kane signs with a flourish in front of Leland and publishes in his newspaper early in the film, Kane “never believed in anything except Charlie Kane; he never had a conviction except Charlie Kane in his life”–precisely the definition of the “pathological narcissist.” This subjective structure is figured near the end of the film in the famous shot of Kane walking past a mirrored mirror, producing a brief infinite regression of images of himself. Inasmuch as his “self” of infinite narcissistic images and his own private (blocked) enjoyment mark the limits of his “care,” Kane has remained under the command of the maternal superego and never acceded to symbolic law.

     

    Zizek specifies this crucial opposition between symbolic law and superego explicitly in terms of the movement from permission to obligation, from possibility based on clearly defined universal prohibition to necessity based on radical contingency. Paradoxically, in the absence of prohibition, where one might expect the free flow of libidinal energy, superego intervenes to require what is already permitted:

     

    Law is the agency of prohibition which regulates the distribution of enjoyment on the basis of a common, shared renunciation (the “symbolic castration”), whereas superego marks a point at which permitted enjoyment, freedom-to-enjoy, is reversed into obligation to enjoy–which, one must add, is the most effective way to block access to enjoyment. (For They 237)

     

    It is because of this obscene, harsh, punitive quality of the superego that the subject can never settle accounts with it. There is always more that can be sacrificed, Zizek explains, which is why Lacanian psychoanalytic ethics is based explicitly on opposing the coercion of the superego, in contrast to the ordinary association of superego with “conscience” or the moral sense guiding ethical behavior:

     

    Lacan’s maxim of the ethics of psychoanalysis (“not to compromise one’s desire”) is not to be confounded with the pressure of the superego…. Lacan takes seriously and literally the Freudian “economical paradox” of the superego–that is, the vicious cycle that characterizes the superego: the more we submit ourselves to the superego imperative, the greater its pressure, the more we feel guilty. According to Lacan, this “feeling of guilt” is not a self-deception to be dispelled in the course of the psychoanalytic cure–we really are guilty: superego draws the energy of the pressure it exerts upon the subject from the fact that the subject was not faithful to his desire, that he gave it up. Our sacrificing to the superego, our paying tribute to it, only corroborates our guilt. For that reason our debt to the superego is unredeemable: the more we pay it off, the more we owe. (Metastases 67-68)

     

    Indeed, Lacan’s ethical imperative must be taken as explicitly opposed to the concept of conventional morality with its focus on maximizing the Good, which functions as the arbiter of all action, since this model ultimately leads to a psychological paralysis arising from infinite consideration of ramifications, a process that turns the subject into a perpetual Hamlet, standing behind Claudius but unable to decide whether killing him or not killing him would be the better option. The interminable process of trying to decide which course of action leads to the “greater Good” entails its own kind of choice (that is, to “compromise one’s desire” by default) with its own kind of psychic consequences for the subject. Zizek explains this ethical-moral distinction through a Greimasian semiotic square based on the four possible arrangements of the positive and negative versions of these terms and the figures corresponding to the four pairings–moral, ethical (Saint); immoral, unethical (Scoundrel); immoral, ethical (Hero); and moral, unethical (superego)–and endorses the Lacanian championing of Hero over superego (Metastases 67).

     

    Zizek also anticipates the anxious objection that this Lacanian ethical attitude is too radical in its practical implications: is it reasonable to propose that everyone unrelentingly pursue his or her own desire and renounce all other considerations? Don’t “ordinary” people need an “ethics of the ‘common Good,’… despicable as it may appear in the eyes of the suicidal heroic ethics advocated by Lacan?” (Metastases 69). But he concludes that this concern–“What if everyone were to do the same as me?”–is simply another way of introducing the “pathological consideration of the consequences of our act in reality” and therefore functions as a way of imposing superego injunctions, restraints, and cycles of guilt through the insistence that we renounce our desire precisely because it cannot be universalized (69).

     

    From these comments on the Lacanian ethics of desire, Zizek moves, understandably, into a section on the unavoidable corollary to such an ethics, that is, the problem of evil, which has prompted the present discussion. Zizek identifies three kinds of evil, categorized according to the Freudian scheme of Ego, Superego, and Id. Ego-Evil is the most common kind: “behavior motivated by selfish calculation and greed”; Superego-Evil is the kind attributed to “fundamentalist fanatics,” that is, “Evil accomplished in the name of fanatical devotion to some ideological ideal”; finally, there is Id-Evil, “structured and motivated by the most elementary imbalance in the relationship between the Ich and jouissance, by the tension between pleasure and the foreign body of jouissance at the very heart of it” (Metastases 70-71). In other words, Id-Evil involves a kind of pure, irrational enjoyment in the evil act. The skinheads who beat up foreigners because it “feels good” to do so, the white racists who killed an African-American man by dragging him from a chain tied behind their pickup truck because the mere presence of a black man “bothered” them, the adolescents who committed the shooting sprees in U.S. schools over the past several years: all of these cases involve “violence not grounded in utilitarian or ideological reasons” (“Leftist” 998) but rather raw outbreaks of the Real of jouissance:

     

    The psychotic passage à l’acte is to be conceived of as a desperate attempt of the subject to evict objet a from reality by force, and thus gain access to reality. (The psychotic “loss of reality” does not arise when something is missing in reality, but, on the contrary, when there is too much of a Thing in reality.) (Metastases 77)

     

    Of course, what is most disturbing about such instances of the psychotic passage à l’acte is the often-reported “desensitization” of the subject toward the violent acts that he performs. The reports about the Columbine High School shooting incident, for example, included witnesses’ recollections of some details of the two killers’ comments as they walked around shooting their classmates. It was reported that they were laughing and saying, “We’ve been wanting to do this for years,” and commenting to each other about how “cool” it looked to see blood and pieces of victims’ bodies “fly” when they shot them. This last statement precisely illustrates Zizek’s diagnosis of the breakdown of the distinction between the Imaginary and the Real in a society marked by the attenuation of the Symbolic: the Real, the actual spraying of blood, is experienced as Imaginary, as a “cool” image or effect, a purely aesthetic phenomenon, while the Symbolic identity of the victim (someone with a name, a family, a “story,” a network of intersubjective connections) is not considered or recognized.

     

    Violence, Evil, and Late Capitalism at the Movies

     

    Such cases of “desensitization” toward violence and desymbolization of victims’ identities are widespread in contemporary film, as conservative politicians, desperate to locate in the culture industry the “causes” of violent crime (while impeding legislative efforts to curb easy access to guns), are quick to mention. But limited claims for causality (bad movies, bad parenting, bad guns) begin within a positivist framework that, as discussed above, misses the eruption of the Real in these cases of Id-Evil and that fails to account for the socioeconomic, historical context of multinational capitalism within which such eruptions take place. Even broader claims for causality based on the notion of a widespread “culture of death”–encompassing media violence, the prevalence of guns, drug abuse, as well as legalized abortion, euthanasia, and other indicators of an alleged rejection of belief in the “sanctity of human life”–fail to address the ways in which the structural demands of capitalism have contributed to the unwelcome social and cultural transformations since the “good old days” (usually meaning anytime before the 1960s).

     

    These criticisms, in both narrow and broad versions, are underwritten by the belief that with the correct combination of policy reforms to excise the diseased elements of the social body we might return to the “normal” state of society, having eliminated its anomalous, disruptive features. This belief, however, itself depends on ignoring the dialectical logic of the symptom, which Zizek, following Lacan, reminds us was “invented” by Marx:

     

    Marx’s great achievement was to demonstrate how all phenomena which appear to everyday bourgeois consciousness as simple deviations, contingent deformations and degenerations of the “normal” functioning of society (economic crises, wars, and so on), and as such abolishable through amelioration of the system, are necessary products of the system itself–the points at which the “truth,” the immanent antagonistic character of the system, erupts. (Sublime 128)

     

    Thus if many U.S. adolescents feel isolated and desperate, see no future for themselves that they would want to occupy, feel no symbolic identification with any entity beyond themselves (nation, community, family), resent their “well-adjusted” peers, expect little from others or themselves, and shift among affective states of manic euphoria, defensive denial, and depressive anomie, and if some of these adolescents realize their abject frustration in acts of violence, those acts are not to be understood as anomalies that might be “fixed” with appropriate reform measures but rather as symptomatic eruptions of the “truth” of the current capitalist world system. In other words, the explanation for these violent outbursts has more to do with what Zizek has assessed as the attenuation of the Symbolic order under conditions of globalizing media-technology-consumer capitalism and the concomitant rise of the “pathological narcissist” as a dominant mode of subjectivity than with any isolated individual “causes” upon which empirical studies may be (and will be) performed.

     

    Still, a brief examination of late-capitalist film violence is worthwhile, not as a direct cause behind actual violent incidents but as a symptom of rationalized systemic violence and also (sometimes) as a critical representation of it. For examples of the former, we need look no further than action-adventure genre films, as well as the video games based on this genre, and their often-noted uncritical, “gratuitous” violence, which may certainly be characterized as “symptomatic” of late capitalism to the extent that it functions within hyper-masculine fantasy scenarios.14 While such cultural products may encode a justifiable desire for an alternative to the “managed society” of “soft” liberalism, that alternative is usually figured in terms of a fascistic emphasis on law and order brought about through the exercise of violent masculine power and domination.

     

    But then other films present violent situations in ways that challenge prevailing genre conventions and invite critical reflection on the meaning of the violence depicted. Perhaps the most relevant case of the latter in recent years is Quentin Tarantino’s Pulp Fiction (1994), especially the famous scene in which John Travolta’s working-man gangster character Vincent Vega, gesturing with his gun, accidentally shoots the character Marvin in the face when the car they are riding in goes over a bump. The incident is treated as an irritating inconvenience, prompting arguments between Vincent and Samuel Jackson’s Jules Winnfield character over Vincent’s carelessness, the potential for being seen by cops, and the general disruption in the smooth routine of their day. Cleaning the car and disposing of the body are regarded as chores to be dealt with as efficiently as possible. In fact, “The Wolf” (Harvey Keitel), a specialist who “fixes things,” is called in to manage the clean-up operation. He, like Jules and Vincent, wears a black business suit.

     

    First, it should be noted that many features of the film, including the business suits, combine to create what looks like an allegory of contemporary capitalism: Vincent and Jules are, after all, hit-men working for Ving Rhames’s black-market entrepreneur character Marsellus Wallace, and their sudden, unpredictable violence is the truth of a system whose purpose is to rationalize and manage that violence and its perpetual threat efficiently in order to ensure the continuation of exchange and profit. The Wolf is a free-agent consultant called in when business “difficulties” arise. The “postmodern” quality of the representation of capitalism here is evident by contrast with earlier generations of crime films, in which the criminal enterprise is justified by reference to some ideological principle, such as “beating the system” by sticking together in bonds of friendship and allegiance to the “old neighborhood,” as in William Wellman’s Public Enemy (1931) and Michael Curtiz’s Angels with Dirty Faces (1938), or maintaining the “old way of life” associated with family and ethnic heritage, as in Francis Ford Coppola’s Godfather trilogy (1972, 1974, 1990).

     

    Pulp Fiction “reflects” the late capitalist moment in that its “post-ideological” criminals have no commitment to anything but getting their own “piece of the action”: the performativity of the system is its own justification; no metanarrative is needed for ideological legitimation. Other features of the film are also consistent with late capitalism and contrast with earlier crime genre films: the structure of the criminal operation appears to be decentralized and “flexible”; the dividing line between criminal and non-criminal is blurry at best; the criminals maintain loose, diversified connections across a wide range of social strata, covering the decentered space of greater Los Angeles’s urban sprawl; and the idea of an alternative way of life–what might have appeared as the position of the “good citizen” in an earlier crime story–can be figured only by reference to a possibility that is never shown.

     

    This alternative possibility is raised hypothetically in Jules and Vincent’s conversations about miracles and the gangster life. After he and Vincent are fired upon multiple times in a surprise attack from across a room without being hurt–an experience that Jules interprets as a miracle–Jules raises the idea of giving up “the life” to “walk the earth” as a kind of modern-day religious mendicant. Dismissing Jules’s interpretation of what he considers a “freak occurrence,” Vincent scoffs and tells Jules that there is a name for people who do what he has proposed: “they’re called bums.” A typical contemporary “pathological narcissist,” Vincent mocks the suggestion that he and Jules have experienced a miracle. As a skeptical nominalist, he is living in what he takes to be, for better or worse, the “best of all possible worlds” and cannot accept even the possibility of singularity or transcendence or of a utopian potential beyond “the life.” Significantly, Vincent is killed on his next job for Marsellus, after Jules has quit, and the fact that his death has been shown out of chronological sequence earlier in the plot adds dramatic impact to the conversation in which Jules decides to quit and Vincent ridicules him. We know already as they leave the diner at the end of the film what their respective fates are–or at least we know Vincent’s; we never learn what happens to Jules. That reference to the alternative–the desire to “walk the earth,” to live outside the paranoid circuits of power without participating in rationalized violence and exploitation–suggests the utopian (and non-representable) dimension of the film: the continuation of Jules’s story cannot be shown precisely because it gestures beyond the limits of contemporary capitalist society. Any actual content provided for this future story would restrict and trivialize the utopian desire suggested by his speculations.

     

    Just as the violent incidents in Pulp Fiction in the context of the film as a whole estrange the violence of the “normal,” smooth, everyday functioning of contemporary capitalism, inviting critical reflection, so too the jarring suddenness of the violence when Vincent shoots Marvin, and in other scenes (and in other Tarantino films), disrupts the smooth operation of ordinary narrative film form, in which climactic, redemptive violent moments are usually cued through narrative suspense, music, editing, lighting, and other techniques. The unexpected intrusion of violence into scenes of witty hipster banter among likable characters forces us to confront these characters as agents of the violent system in which they participate, even when they do not intend to use violence, that is, even when someone like Marvin is killed “accidentally” as opposed to someone who “had it coming.”

     

    In other words, the ethical-political lesson is Zizekian: actions speak louder than words; the material actuality of practice overrides intention. Vincent cannot guarantee that the Real will not intrude on his rationalized, mundane, and solipsistic Ego-Evil. His participation in the criminal life would be justified from his perspective in terms of self-interest: as a contemporary cynic, he would reason that if the entire capitalist system is just a large-scale criminal racket, then his work as a gangster is the only intelligent response–he might as well enjoy the high life instead of working like a sucker to line the pockets of the corporate bosses in the legitimate economy. At the allegorical level, then, this reading suggests that smart, hip cynics like Vincent are actually the dutiful foot soldiers of contemporary capitalism. Justifying any action in terms of “enlightened” cynical reason, such a person is, as Zizek puts it in another context, a “crook who tries to sell as honesty the open admission of his crookedness,” effectively functioning as a “conformist who takes the mere existence of the given order as an argument for it” (“Leftist” 1004-05).

     

    Two final and related points deserve to be made, via Zizek, about Jules and Vincent and their relationship to the event that only Jules takes to be a miracle. First, their difference in interpretation perfectly exemplifies Zizek’s argument about the strict separation between belief and knowledge:

     

    Belief can only thrive in the shadowy domain between outright falsity and positive truth. The Jansenist notion of miracle bears witness to the fact that they were fully aware of this paradox: an event which has the quality of a miracle only in the eyes of the believer–to the commonsense eyes of an infidel, it appears as a purely natural coincidence. (“Supposed” 44)

     

    This precise relationship is enacted in the conversation in which Jules and Vincent argue over their respective interpretations of the event: no amount of convincing will cause the other to abandon his interpretation because logical proofs and rhetorical appeals operate in the realm of knowledge, which will not touch belief. As Zizek puts it, “the miracle is inherently linked to the fact of belief–there is no neutral miracle to convince cynical infidels” (“Supposed” 44).

     

    The other point is that this argument also takes place in the somewhat different register of class consciousness and subjectivity. Perhaps stretching the allegorical reading of the Jules and Vincent story in Pulp Fiction to its limit, I would suggest that Jules’s “conversion” experience might as easily be read in Marxist as in religious terms. (And for the reasons cited above, the Marxist reading is not without justification.) Thus allegorically, if Vincent clings to his egocentric and effectively neoconservative cynicism, Jules’s experience of the miracle amounts to his interpellation as a proletarian subject, or at least (since his story ends after his testament of faith) to a protopolitical baptism. This moment of divergence in the trajectories of the stories of two (until then) similar characters illustrates what Zizek identifies as the crucial importance of class consciousness as distinct from objective class position in the class struggle:

     

    From a truly radical Marxist perspective, although there is a link between the working class as a social group and the proletariat as the position of the militant fighting for universal Truth, this link is not a determining causal connection, and the two levels are to be strictly distinguished. To be proletarian involves assuming a certain subjective stance (of class struggle destined to achieve redemption through revolution) that, in principle, can occur to any individual; to put it in religious terms, irrespective of his (good) works, any individual can be touched by grace and interpellated as a proletarian subject. The limit that separates the two opposed sides in the class struggle is thus not objective, not the limit separating two positive social groups, but ultimately radically subjective; it involves the position individuals assume towards the Event of universal Truth. (“Leftist” 1003)

     

    Thus a long line of conversion stories–from the sudden, terrible hailing of Saul of Tarsus through the more gradual radicalization of American literary proletarians like Tom Joad and Biff Loman (whose relationship to his brother Happy, despite numerous differences in detail, including especially the absence of cynicism in Death of a Salesman, is nonetheless homologous with that of Jules to Vincent after the disputed event)–become enmeshed in the sociohistorical narrative of the formation of revolutionary subjectivity. Zizek’s commentary explains, among other things, how class traitors are possible, since the class struggle, as he puts it,

     

    mobilizes… not the division between two well-defined social groups but the division, which runs “diagonally” to the social division in the Order of Being, between those who recognize themselves in the call of the Truth-Event, becoming its followers, and those who deny or ignore it. (“Leftist” 1003)

     

    The impetus behind this recognition and conversion need not, of course, be a brush with violent death, as in the case of Jules. In principle, the negative motivation for conversion is available everywhere in capitalist society. As for positive or utopian “calls to conversion,” these can be found in unexpected spaces occasionally wrested free from the demands of the vast commerical strip mall of contemporary U.S. culture.

     

    Conclusion: Zizek as Late Marxist

     

    The title of this essay may be read to imply a progression of the type thesis, antithesis, synthesis. Such a progression is not my intention. I certainly do not wish to give the impression that I take Zizek’s work to be the culminating synthesis of the problematic of Marxism and postmodernism. Nonetheless, I do regard his work, which responds with dialectical thoroughness (and with humor, and with perceptive references to popular culture, and with brilliant on-the-run insights) to new problems of ideology and subjectivity in late capitalism, as a valuable critical contribution to the tradition of Marxist theory, despite Ebert’s (and others’) criticisms characterizing him as a cynical “post-Marxist.” If anything, his explicit appropriation of Hegel would perhaps better qualify him for the critical label “pre-Marxist.” But even such a half-serious appellation would fail to account for the variety of careful analyses, explanations, and criticisms appearing throughout his work that can be characterized only as Marxist without a prefix. Or, if a prefix is needed, then Jameson’s term late Marxist would perhaps actually be the most accurate for Zizek’s work.

     

    Jameson has the following to say about the term late Marxism in his 1990 book of that title:

     

    I find it helpful above all for a sharpening of the implication I developed above: namely, that Marxism, like other cultural phenomena, varies according to its socioeconomic context. There should be nothing scandalous about the proposition that the Marxism required by Third World countries will have different emphases from the one that speaks to already receding socialism, let alone to the “advanced” countries of multinational capitalism. (11)

     

    Thus late Marxism’s “big tent,” according to this conception, would have room for a revival of a Freudian-Marxist theory of ideology by way of Lacan and Hegel in the socioeconomic context of defeated state socialisms in the former Eastern bloc and in the context of a triumphal, expanding multinational capitalism based in the “advanced” capitalist countries. If this version of Marxism is among those “required” for critically understanding the dynamics of capitalist society and culture in this context, then it belongs alongside the other Marxisms speaking to other contexts of the late-capitalist world system.

     

    The more narrow context for Zizek’s project of a revived psychoanalytic Marxism is, as he puts it in the abstract opposite the title pages of books in the Wo Es War series that he edits, “the twin rule of pragmatic-relativist New Sophists and New Age obscurantists” in critical writing. Commenting more specifically on the state of theory and criticism in the age of globalizing capitalism and dominant market ideology, Zizek writes:

     

    It is effectively as if, since the horizon of social imagination no longer allows us to entertain the idea of an eventual demise of capitalism–since, as we might put it, everybody silently accepts that capitalism is here to stay–critical energy has found a substitute outlet in fighting for cultural differences which leave the basic homogeneity of the capitalist world-system intact. (“Multiculturalism” 46)

     

    If we accept these descriptions of the socioeconomic and critical contexts into which Zizek intervenes, then the revival of dialectical models of criticism that are capable of addressing systemic problems at a level of sufficient generality and of drawing connections between “local” objects and the “totality” of their relations is indeed precisely what is needed. In any case, efforts to purge or discredit Zizek from an assumed position of orthodoxy are not especially helpful to the Marxist cause in either of the above contexts.

     

    Marxist and Freudian theory are parallel and privileged theoretical discourses, according to Zizek, in part because the relationship of each to theory itself is one aspect of its domain of inquiry. This contentious reflexivity makes error a structurally necessary element of the theory, as opposed to the case of positivist sciences:

     

    In both cases we are dealing with a field of knowledge that is inherently antagonistic: errors are not simply external to the true knowledge…. In Marxism, as in psychoanalysis, truth literally emerges through error, which is why in both cases the struggle with “revisionism” is an inherent part of the theory itself…. The “object” of Marxism is society, yet “class struggle in theory” means that the ultimate theme of Marxism is the “material force of ideas”–that is, the way Marxism itself qua revolutionary theory transforms its object (brings about the emergence of the revolutionary subject, etc.). This is analogous to psychoanalysis, which is also not simply a theory of its “object” (the unconscious) but a theory whose inherent mode of existence involves the transformation of its object (via interpretation in the psychoanalytic cure). (Metastases 181-82)

     

    Each theory, in short, “acknowledges the short circuit between the theoretical frame and an element within this frame: theory itself is a moment of the totality that is its ‘object’” (Metastases 182). Such a process, Zizek insists, is not to be confused with a “comfortable evolutionary position,” which, “from a safe distance,” seeks “to relativize every determinate form of knowledge” (Metastases 182-83). On the contrary, each tradition is characterized by what he calls a “thought that endeavors to grasp its own limitation and dependence” even as it proceeds, and this perpetual critical interrogation of its own “position of enunciation” enables whatever claims to truth it may make: “Marxism and psychoanalysis are ‘infallible’ at the level of enunciated content, precisely insofar as they continually question the very place from which they speak” (Metastases 182-83).

     

    I cite these comments in order to defend Zizek’s Marxist credentials against charges of post-Marxist cynicism. But I also recognize that his welding of Lacanian psychoanalysis onto Marxism is not seamless: irreducible traditional antagonisms between the two discourses can easily seem to disappear because of Zizek’s deft handling of both. Nonetheless, his writing offers fresh and cogent criticism of contemporary culture and society and opens avenues for further critical reflection, as I hope the preceding analyses have shown. His Marxism is “late” not in the sense of “fading fast” or even “already deceased” but rather in the Jamesonian sense cited above. It is “recent” and addresses current socioeconomic and critical contexts. In other words, Zizek’s Marxism is only as late as what it proposes to criticize–the late capitalism so named in the somewhat hopeful title of Ernest Mandel’s 1978 book. Whatever label is attached to it, Zizek’s work fulfills one of the primary goals of Marxist theory, that is, to harness the “material force of ideas” in an effort to expose and criticize the workings of capitalism.

    Notes

     

    1. Hebdige uses this abbreviated term to accommodate the various “post” terms and discourses that have emerged in theoretical writing since the late 1960s, especially postmodernism/postmodernity. See Hiding in the Light, Chapter 8, “Staking out the Posts.”

     

    2. See especially Jameson’s essay “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture,” Social Text 1 (1979), reprinted as Chapter 1 of Signatures of the Visible.

     

    3. Jean Baudrillard’s writing in the late 1960s and 1970s offers a critique of the production-oriented labor theory of value in favor of a consumption-oriented model of sign value; see Selected Writings, especially Chapters 1-4. The implicit and explicit critique of dialectical method and teleology can be seen in many versions of postmodern theory; Lyotard’s Postmodern Condition is exemplary, especially the discussions of postmodern science and paralogy in Chapters 13 and 14. The generally critical stance of “French poststructuralists” toward Marxism may be explained partly as a reaction against the influential role of Communist parties in European intellectual debates of the 1950s and 1960s, as Burnham suggests:

     

    Lyotard’s critique, based as it is on a certain causal relationship between grand narratives and local actions, is more suited to a culture of powerful communist parties and unexamined Stalinism than the less rigorous Marxism to be found in the Anglo-American tradition…. An important flaw in Lyotard’s analysis is that he overestimates the aforementioned causality. (13)

     

    4. See Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition; Baudrillard’s recent apocalyptic and impressionistic essays can be found in America, Cool Memories, and The Transparency of Evil; Deleuze and Guattari develop their project of “schizoanalysis” in Anti-Oedipus, especially Section 4; Jameson presents his extended critique of postmodern culture in Postmodernism.

     

    5. Commenting on the ongoing globalization of capital and the accompanying triumphalist discourse of neoliberal market economists, Jameson writes:

     

    Now that, following master thinkers like Hayek, it has become customary to identify political freedom with market freedom, the motivations behind ideology no longer seem to need an elaborate machinery of decoding and hermeneutic reinterpretation; and the guiding thread of all contemporary politics seems much easier to grasp, namely, that the rich want their taxes lowered. This means that an older vulgar Marxism may once again be more relevant to our situation than the newer models. (“Culture” 247)

     

    6. The notion of a historical transformation of the “real world” into semiotic spectacle is the thesis of Guy Debord’s critique of media-consumer capitalism in Society of the Spectacle: “everything that was directly lived has moved away into a representation” (par. 1). Debord, however, has no patience for the structuralist effort to interpret all phenomena in terms of differential sign-systems, a project that he sees as the philosophical corollary to spectacular society: “Structuralism is the thought guaranteed by the State which regards the present conditions of spectacular ‘communication’ as an absolute” (par. 202). My citation of Derrida in this context should by no means be taken as an effort to characterize his work as part of this “thought guaranteed by the State,” merely uncritically reflecting prevailing semio-capitalist society. On the contrary, the opening pages of the first chapter of Of Grammatology indicate an acute critical awareness of the historical determination of the meditation on writing undertaken in that text: beyond his general emphasis on the historical dimension of the problem, Derrida mentions specifically the “death of the civilization of the book” and the rise of cybernetic theory and the DNA-coding paradigm in biology, among other historically recent developments, as catalysts for a theory of generalized writing (6-10).

     

    7. See Habermas’s Theory of Communicative Action and Rorty’s Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity, among other texts by these authors.

     

    8. See Butler, Chapter 7, “Arguing with the Real,” in Bodies That Matter.

     

    9. See Zizek’s essays “Multiculturalism, or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism” and “A Leftist Plea for ‘Eurocentrism,’” as well as the interview “Japan through a Slovenian Looking Glass.”

     

    10. For an analysis–via Bataille and Baudrillard–of the Columbine High School shooting incident in Colorado in terms of a heterological politics of the unassimilable, see Wernick.

     

    11. For discussion of this term, see Jameson’s essay “Cognitive Mapping” as well as the last segment of Chapter 1 of Postmodernism (45-54).

     

    12. My reading of a “darker” truth behind the film’s overt suggestion of nostalgia for lost childhood as an explanation for Kane’s downfall is based on Marshall Deutelbaum’s article “‘Rosebud’ and the Illusion of Childhood Innocence in Citizen Kane.” Zizek includes Citizen Kane among those films in which, he claims, Welles depicts a “larger-than-life” individual with an “ambiguous relationship to morals” but a nonetheless heroic ethical nature (Metastases 66). My reading suggests a rejection of this notion that Kane’s “acts irradiate a deeper ‘ethics of Life itself’” (66).

     

    13. A useful contrast to this case of oppressive desire of the mother is raised in the following passage in which Zizek discusses Lacan’s determination of Name-of-the-Father as the “metaphoric substitute of the desire of the mother” (For They 135). Zizek explains this relationship in terms of the scene from Hitchcock’s North by Northwest in which Roger Thornhill–certainly also a “pathological narcissist,” but one whose story ends “happily”–is “‘mistakenly identified’ as the mysterious ‘George Kaplan’ and thus hooked on his Name-of-the-Father, his Master-Signifier.” The precise instant of the mistaken identification, Zizek writes,

     

    is the very moment when he raises his hand in order to comply with his mother’s desire by phoning her…. North by Northwest thus presents a case of “successful” substitution of the paternal metaphor for the mother’s desire. (For They 135)

     

    14. See Susan Jeffords’s analysis of Hollywood masculine-fantasy narratives and the New Right in Hard Bodies.

    Works Cited

     

    • Althusser, Louis. “Ideology and Ideological State Apparatuses.” Lenin and Philosophy. Trans. Ben Brewster. New York: Monthly Review, 1971. 127-86.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. America. Trans. Chris Turner. London: Verso, 1989.
    • —. Cool Memories, 1980-1985. Trans. Chris Turner. London: Verso, 1990.
    • —. Selected Writings. Ed. Mark Poster. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1988.
    • —. The Transparency of Evil: Essays on Extreme Phenomena. 1990. Trans. James Benedict. London: Verso, 1993.
    • Burnham, Clint. The Jamesonian Unconscious: The Aesthetics of Marxist Theory. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • Citizen Kane. Dir. Orson Welles. Perf. Orson Welles, Joseph Cotton, Dorothy Comingore. RKO, 1941.
    • Debord, Guy. Society of the Spectacle. 1967. Detroit: Black and Red, 1983.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. 1977. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • Deutelbaum, Marshall. “‘Rosebud’ and the Illusion of Childhood Innocence in Citizen Kane.The Kingdom of Dreams: Selected Papers from the Tenth Florida State University Conference on Literature and Film. Ed. Douglas Fowler. Tallahassee: Florida State UP, 1986. 46-61.
    • Ebert, Teresa L. “Beyond ‘Enlightened False Consciousness’ and for a Red Theory.” Div. on Sociological Approaches to Literature, MLA Convention. Chicago, IL. 28 Dec. 1999.
    • Gigante, Denise. “Toward a Notion of Critical Self-Creation: Slavoj Zizek and the ‘Vortex of Madness.’” New Literary History 29 (1998): 153-68.
    • Habermas, Jürgen. The Theory of Communicative Action. Trans. Thomas McCarthy. Boston: Beacon, 1984.
    • Hebdige, Dick. Hiding in the Light: On Images and Things. New York: Routledge, 1988.
    • Homer, Sean. “Psychoanalysis, Representation, Politics: On the (Im)possibility of a Psychoanalytic Theory of Ideology?” University of Sheffield, Centre for Psychotherapeutic Studies (1995): 16 pars. <http://www.shef.ac.uk/uni/academic/N-Q/psysc/staff/sihomer/prp.html>.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Cognitive Mapping.” Cultural Studies. Ed. Lawrence Grossberg, Cary Nelson, and Paula A. Treichler. New York: Routledge, 1992. 347-57.
    • —. “Culture and Finance Capital.” Critical Inquiry 24 (1997): 246-65.
    • —. Late Marxism: Adorno, or, The Persistence of the Dialectic. London: Verso, 1990.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • —. Signatures of the Visible. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Jeffords, Susan. Hard Bodies: Hollywood Masculinity in the Reagan Era. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers UP, 1994.
    • Lacan, Jacques. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book III: The Psychoses. Trans. Russell Grigg. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. New York: Norton, 1993.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P. 1984.
    • Mandel, Ernest. Late Capitalism. Trans. Joris DeBres. London: Verso, 1978.
    • Pulp Fiction. Dir. Quentin Tarantino. Perf. John Travolta, Samuel L. Jackson, Uma Thurman. Miramax, 1994.
    • Rorty, Richard. Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity. New York: Cambridge UP, 1989.
    • Sloterdijk, Peter. Critique of Cynical Reason. Trans. Michael Eldred. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Wernick, Andrew. “Bataille’s Columbine: The Sacred Space of Hate.” Ctheory (3 Nov. 1999): 43 pars. <http://www.ctheory.net/text_file.asp?pick=119>.
    • Williams, Raymond. Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society. 1983. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. For They Know Not What They Do: Enjoyment as a Political Factor. London: Verso, 1991.
    • —. “Japan through a Slovenian Looking Glass: Reflections of Media and Politics and Cinema.” Interview. InterCommunication 14 (1995): 40 pars. <http://www.ntticc.or.jp/pub/ic_mag/ic014/zizek/zizek_e.html>.
    • —. “A Leftist Plea for ‘Eurocentrism.’” Critical Inquiry 24 (1998): 988-1009.
    • —. Looking Awry: An Introduction to Jacques Lacan through Popular Culture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1991.
    • —. The Metastases of Enjoyment: Six Essays on Woman and Causality. London: Verso, 1994.
    • —. “Multiculturalism, Or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism.” New Left Review 225 (1997): 28-51.
    • —. The Sublime Object of Ideology. London: Verso, 1989.
    • —. “The Supposed Subjects of Ideology.” Critical Quarterly 39.2 (1997): 39-59.

     

  • Inhuman Love: Jane Campion’s The Piano

    Samir Dayal

    English Department
    Bentley College
    sdayal@bentley.edu

    Introduction: What Does the Woman Want?

     

    The release of Jane Campion’s The Piano (1993) was almost an epochal event. It arrived to mark the zenith of a phase of extraordinary creativity in Australian cinema in the 1970s and 1980s with films such as Picnic at Hanging Rock, My Brilliant Career, The Lighthorsemen, Breaker Morant, and Gallipoli. In the following decade, close on the heels of Strictly Ballroom, Romper Stomper, and The Adventures of Priscilla, Queen of the Desert, Campion’s film won the Palm D’Or at Cannes and three Academy Awards (see Orr 151, Coombs and Gemmell, “Preface” vii). Highly successful at the box office, the film elicited praise and stirred much passionate debate among critics and ordinary filmgoers. Neither were audiences oblivious to its sheer ambition in cinematic technique.1 That ambition foregrounds itself here in virtuoso camera movement, as when the camera seems to enter a character’s pocket, and there in an homage to a grand auteur, as when a close-up of Ada McGrath’s (Holly Hunter’s) hair tied in a tight spiral knot, in evoking an ocular vertigo, invites comparison to an emblematic shot in Hitchcock’s Vertigo and with equal point, for in this gesture the camera in each case indexes the female object of its fascinated gaze.2 Inviting attention to its own gaze, the camera elevates the piano to the level almost of a character in the film, even a gendered character, as Felicity Coombs argues (85). And if the music “made” by the piano is in some ways the real voice of the speechless protagonist, her voiceover also functions as a kind of spectral extradiegetic intrusion, particularly in a crucial scene when Ada becomes the victim of savage violence at the hands of Stewart, her husband. Ada’s haunting voice-over, however, is not just a trick: it functions at the ideological level as a counter to the customary “othering” of the feminine voice in cinema, and at the representational level to problematize the real versus the symbolic. The visual language of the film is frequently as telling. In one scene, for instance, an important and mischievous point about Ada’s second husband’s twisted libido is made by the camera. Stewart is voyeuristically spying on his wife and her lover, whose face is buried in her skirts. As he watches, her lover’s pet dog, possibly this man’s only (or best) friend, licks Stewart’s open palm.

     

    Above all, the film was, and remains, thought provoking. It became the focus of intense debates about the postcolonial critique of New Zealand’s–and Australia’s–colonial past (and, by implication, their neocolonial present and their multicultural future); about feminine desire and its institutional containment within marriage; and about the psychological perplexities of human relationships, particularly love, that are the film’s main subject. These debates raise issues that remain vital in contemporary cultural studies–the inarticulacy of what enables women’s agency, the possibility of alternative forms of desire and human intercourse, the quandaries of aspirations to a meaningful postcolonial or ethnic citizenship that does not slip into the quagmire of racial and identity politics. However, when reviewing these central debates focused on feminine agency in the film, one has a strange sense of irresolution, as though some of the major issues were being abandoned without being fully developed, let alone resolved. The crux of these debates has to do with this question: what does Ada want? In this essay I offer a contribution to the debate that seeks to reinterpret this as a question not only about what Ada wants from love, but as a question about what drives her beyond love–a question about the structure of that drive.

     

    Love, after all, is the telos of melodrama, which is itself the focus of one important trend in the film’s reception. The nineteenth century saw the rise of melodrama in an age where traditional anchors of society in organized religion and hierarchical authority were on the wane. Into the vacuum came the private individual as the locus of meaning. This individual, however, was defined primarily by his or her role within the nuclear family (Vasudevan 310), and needless to say, the role assigned to the woman within the bourgeois family was particularly narrow, restricting the orbit of her desire and imagination. Indeed, where the modernist work of art in the West was coded as an autonomous, “masculine,” form (see Huyssen), the mass cultural form of melodrama was itself coded as “feminine” and addressed to women as those who were subjugated or even rendered voiceless by that masculinist discourse. This view is in line with Peter Brooks’s The Melodramatic Imagination (1976), which provides an important formal schematization of the silencing that is constitutive of melodrama, although since the publication of Brooks’s work, melodrama has come to be regarded as having as much claim to facilitating the democratic revolution as realism (Prasad 56).3 If Brooks offered a formal account of melodrama, then an important feminist advance in theorizing melodrama was achieved by Mary Ann Doane, who is credited with the most widely cited claim about the way in which classical women’s melodrama portrays the suppression of women’s agency by patriarchal structures of society (The Desire to Desire).

     

    As melodrama came more and more to be addressed to women it gave rise in the Hollywood of the 1950s to a “women’s melodrama.” In the age of classical Hollywood cinema, as Neil Robinson notes, women’s melodrama “tells the story of a woman who attempts to resolve the tensions between her own subjectivity and erotic desire, and the patriarchal world in which she lives” and in doing so the melodrama seeks to “[re]define the contours of… community” (19). The Piano is, in these terms, a women’s film (see Barcan and Fogarty). But what is often missed in such a claim about this film is precisely that The Piano‘s spin on melodrama is not to posit the goal of reintegration into community as in traditional melodrama. It is not even a “critique [of] the false either/or choices which patriarchy offers to both women and men” as Robinson puts it (20), for that too implies a desire to be reintegrated into a regenerated community. Doane was criticized for being too pessimistic to recognize melodrama’s potential for enabling feminine agency: “the woman’s film,” she concluded, “does not provide us with an access to a pure and authentic female subjectivity, much as we might like it to do so” (4). Whatever the merits of this criticism, perhaps we should not make of melodrama a Procrustean bed, simply in order to cut Campion’s film down to size so that it will fit the structure of melodrama, as Robinson does when he writes that “Patriarchy is a nightmare from which Ada is trying to awake, and her near death [near the end of the film] demonstrates that only by the narrowest of margins does she escape its prohibitions against female desire” (37). Similarly, Bridget Orr, an otherwise astute reader of the film, can only conclude that “it seems curious that Ada’s resistance… [at the end of the film] should be rewarded by her establishment in white picket contentment” (158). If we read The Piano as merely one more women’s melodrama, even what Richard Allen describes as a “gothic melodrama” (44-45), we might fail to see something crucial about the ending. I argue below that it is structured around a darker intensity, a jouissance that constitutes a deformation of melodrama and betrays no wish to be so reintegrated. This deformation involves a kind of radical exceptionalism and implies an erotics that is better described, as I argue at the acknowledged risk of overinterpreting the film, in terms of courtly love as a negation of romantic love.

     

    Campion does offer, in this “women’s film,” an oppositional structure of desire, or at least of a woman’s desire, that counters both the tepid agency that is freed up for women in women’s melodrama and the more realist script of restrictive bourgeois domesticity with an alternative erotic structure. This is a structure that Bruce Fink specifices as a “feminine structure,” namely a “position or stance with respect to (an experience of) jouissance” (Lacanian Subject 117). That oppositional structure of desire is homologous, I suggest, to the structure of courtly love in that it respects both the erotic attachment familiar to anyone who has been in love or has desired another body and the “impossibility” of the sexual relation, as Jacques Lacan has insistently theorized it. The sexual relation is “impossible” because sexual difference is enigmatic, because it is as though feminine desire and masculine desire were not speaking the same tongue. But beyond this always failing love is something else that we can trace, an inhuman love.

     

    The Structure of the Essay

     

    In the light of what has been said above, the essay is structured in three sections of unequal length:

     

    Section I:

     

    In the first section, the shortest because it treats themes given relatively lower prominence by the film, I discuss the colonial context of the film, describing the significance of its setting in New Zealand and developing its critique of colonialism. It is as easy to offer a reductive reading of such a film as to claim too great a sophistication for it. Still, I suggest that the film is informed by the insights of postcolonialism and is sensitive to postcolonialism’s own reinscription of the advances of poststructuralist discourse.

     

    Section II:

     

    In the second section I discuss Campion’s exploration of feminine desire, or at least of Ada’s irregular desire within the context of her relationship to Baines–and therefore to romantic love. This is a way not only of critiquing received ideas about love but of revisiting related issues: choice of sexual object, desire as a support of subjectivity, and femininity as an epistemological category. It is equally a way of asking about masculine desire, when it exceeds the bounds of normative sexuality. Just as Campion critiques the structuring of (colonial) racial minorities and women, she is also sensitive to the class differentiations among women as a group, and she is committed to the destabilization of pieties about sexual relations and social institutions. This section of course is intimately linked to the first and the third, and in this section I discuss what I see as the surface of the film: its narrative of a woman’s struggle to connect with her “dark talent.”

     

    Section III:

     

    In the final and necessarily densest section, I come to Ada’s radical, psychoanalytically suggestive, and intriguing psychic structure. I employ here a Lacanian terminology of desire and drive because I believe Campion is interested in exploring a particular psychic structure that captures Ada’s desire, a desire that transgresses the melodrama of bourgeois domesticity and is outside the ken of patriarchal discourse.4 While I invoke a Lacanian paradigm in order to highlight this transgressive excess, I am not unaware of the accusation (leveled by Judith Butler in Antigone’s Claim, for instance) that Lacanian psychoanalysis lends itself to a support of a patriarchal status quo. Insensitivity to this accusation would be especially egregious in my generally appreciative reading of Campion’s film, a reading that is aligned with feminist approaches. I am not appealing to the Lacan who has been construed as ultimately tethered to a defence of a patriarchal, phallic order, in which a woman of course has no real agency, no real voice. But neither do I preoccupy myself here with an exposé of Lacan’s patriarchal blind spots by way of noticing how woman’s voice is indeed suppressed. It would be a real disservice to Campion to turn her exquisitely complex portrayal of Ada into merely a representation of this muteness. I turn instead to another Lacan who, even if his oeuvre betrays him as a man of his era and a creature of a patriarchal worldview, offers a useful vocabulary that moves beyond pat, dismissive accounts of his theoretical advances.

     

    A couple of further clarifications seem in order at this juncture. First, many contemporary critics (particularly feminists) have rightly discredited the thesis of the autonomy of the aesthetic, removed from the political, the linguistic, the cultural, or the psychoanalytic. Therefore it is appropriate to present a “cultural studies” approach to the film, not only to read the film as aesthetic object but to see it as presenting a politicized representation of a psychic problematic. Second, my suggestion is that Lacan offers a particularly useful vocabulary of drive, of courtly love, of the “real” body, of “das Ding,” of the partial object, of desubjectivation or acephalous subjectivity. As I develop my argument, the significance of this difficult terminology will, I hope, become evident. I don’t want to detain the reader by a long excursus on definitions. But let me say here that one of the most important features of Ada’s structure as it is represented in filmic language is a kind of excess. I propose that the secret to her desire is this excess, and my essay furthermore tracks the relationship between her and George Baines (Harvey Keitel) as anchored to their mutual, but differently inflected, gendered orientation to excess.

     

    Ada’s excess is synecdochically, if ironically, represented by her darkly eloquent, voluntary muteness. If the Lacanian paradigm of subject formation is customarily understood in film studies to propose that the advent of the subject is coeval with the moment of entry into the symbolic, we should note that Ada’s elective muteness may not contradict this mechanically reproduced truism of that conventional application of Lacanian theory to film studies. But neither does it lend itself unproblematically to the kind of recuperative utopian narrative of a Tania Modleski, whose “project,” in the words of Ruth Barcan and Madeleine Fogarty, is “to save the possibility of referential language for a feminist future when the traditionally mute body, the mother, will be given the same access to the names–language and speech–that men have enjoyed” (5). It marks instead an inverse trajectory whereby Ada’s silence signals her withdrawal from a conventional individualization within the bourgeois patriarchal narratives into which she has been interpellated, first as the daughter of a father who practically sells her into marriage, and then as the wife of a man whom she has not chosen, never met, and can never love. The film projects her straining to move beyond the straitjacket of the identity positions sanctioned for her within the patriarchal symbolic. Yet, and this is a diacritic of my approach, many readings of Ada-as-subject limit themselves to a narrow interpretation of “symbolic” identity. Lacanian discourse, in elaborating the beyond of the symbolic (in other words, the realm of the “real” associated with the drive), better approximates Ada’s–and Baines’s–psychic structures.

     

    For the purposes of structural contrast between normative heterosexual coupling and the odd (even strange) couple of Ada and Baines, I have recourse late in the essay to the structure of “courtly love.” Beyond the banalized “symbolic” interpretation of subject-formation that has bedeviled some readings of the film, Lacan’s elaboration of the structure of courtly love helps explain the excess of Woman, what Lacan terms the “not All,” over and above romantic love and the sexual relation. I maintain that this ostensibly archaic structure, as it is reappropriated by Lacan (and glossed by Slavoj Zizek and Renata Salecl), helps us appreciate Ada’s relinquishment of romantic love and what I call her instrumentalization of sexuality. The Lacanian reading of courtly love as a psychic structure also permits a perspectivization of the strange arrangement, or structure, of her relationship with her lover, George Baines, and of Baines’s own equally irregular desire. In spelling out what I have called their mutual orientation to excess of enjoyment, I refer to the vocabulary of the “subject of drive” oriented to jouissance, as opposed to the subject of (the Other’s) desire. As I understand it–and this understanding is substantiated by the fastidious exegeses of Bruce Fink–desire and drive are ultimately along the same continuum, but desire belongs to the realm of the symbolic, while drive circulates in the (Lacanian) real (see A Clinical Introduction). The real, and this is a fundamental distinction in Lacan, is distinguished from quotidian reality. And jouissance, which is itself associated with drive, not desire, is as much about pain as it is about pure pleasure. Jouissance indeed also indexes what must be protected against, if the subject is to be maintained: falling into jouissance entails desubjectivation.

     

    The alternative structure of courtly love is of course to be read in terms of a filmic code in this instance, rather than as “straight” psychoanalysis. It is in the interaction of the visual, narrative, and sound elements of the film that Ada’s desire is represented, and here Lacanian psychoanalysis functions as no more than an aid in understanding the workings of Ada’s desire and drive–it helps us understand the representation of Ada as a subject constituted by conscious desire and unconscious drive.

     

    Section I:
    Nature Denaturalized; Or, Postcolonial Critique in The Piano

     

    Ada has been married off by her father and sent to join her new and as yet unseen husband, Stewart, in New Zealand in the 1850s. Accompanying Ada on this journey from a satellite of the former imperial center, Scotland, to New Zealand is Flora (Anna Paquin), her daughter from an earlier marriage. Stewart is a pakeha pioneer (neither truly “European” nor accepted as one of the local Maori natives). Sam Neill describes Stewart as rendered vulnerable by his unrequitable love/lust for a woman who happens to be his wife but remains truly strange to him: he is “a man who has lost all his skin” (qtd. in Bilborough 147). Campion takes great pains to portray Stewart’s utterly benighted attitude to the land, which he can only see as property. He wants to buy Maori land, which they don’t “use” but hold sacred, and he asks Baines, “What do they want it for?” and “How do they even know it’s theirs?” In fact the land has always been sacred to Maori, and more recently has been a major bone of contention between Maori and the Pakeha. Stewart is marooned within the colony as a pakeha and within heteronormative conventionality as an unfulfilled man in desperate need of a wife–he is so uptight about his sexuality that Maori call him “Old dry balls.” Ada rejects him in all but name as husband. But Ada is a misfit too. An elective mute from age six, she relies mainly on Flora for communication. To the spectator she speaks in voiceover–in her “mind’s voice,” as she says. A newcomer to the settler postcolony, she is no less a border figure than Stewart.

     

    The film’s postcolonialist representation of colonial New Zealand raises the question of the significance of the lush colonial setting. Is this only an aesthetic convention? Richard Allen rightly suggests that the setting is not arbitrary: he observes that Campion has filmed the bush as “a muddy, glutinous, fecund landscape, a kind of primal swamp that is filmed in a luminous aquamarine. In Campion’s naturalist vision, the bush is a feminine landscape, boldly celebrated as an antidote to the denaturing of the land enacted by a patriarchal colonialism” (46-47).

     

    The film’s treatment of landscape, in other words, is construed as informed by a progressive politics. I would argue that it is more, and it is less. It is more than a critique of the “colonial narrative of origin… as the appropriation and enclosure of landscape as the first and only expression of civilisation” (Coombs and Gemmell, “Preface” ix). It is “a liminal zone,” as Laurence Simmons observes, “of beaches of encounter and boundary fences between self and savagery”–the topos of a landscape of liminality is crucial to the film (132), but I argue here that landscape, particularly the ocean itself, is also a liminal zone in that it metaphorically suggests a porous border between the realms of the symbolic and the real. Campion herself has intimated the psychic allegory subtended by the film’s re-presentation of the natural: “The bush has got an enchanted, complex, even frightening quality to it, unlike anything that you see anywhere else…. I was after the vivid, subconscious imagery of the bush, its dark, inner world” (qtd. in Bilborough 139). It is the “dark continent,” the psychic landscape of unconscious desire and (death) drive modulated as opposition to the life force represented in the physical landscape, that the film seeks to fathom. Precisely because an examination or problematization of subject construction within a colonial context is a central project of the film, the “beautiful” as a category of audience reception is problematized by making this beautiful setting the context for the territorial violence of the colonial expropriation of Maori land, as well as for sexual violence.

     

    The film presents a strange love story, but a love story set in a specific location, and in a specific historical, socio-political, and discursive context; moreover it is a love story that undoes itself. Ostensibly, Ada’s struggle is to achieve agency–faithfulness to her own desire–in a social and physical environment that hinders it. Noting some of the complicating subtexts of this struggle, Bridget Orr observes that “arguably, The Piano‘s feminocentric narrative seeks to recentre its female protagonist by writing her out of history into romance; to absolve her from settler guilt by linking her through an erotic economy to Maori” (149).

     

    There is evidently much contemporary appeal in this emancipatory narrative of gender as tied to the representation of nature. However, in articulating the natural environment and the national romance, Campion ironically invites the question whether her representation of the relationships among landscape and racial hierarchy and material conditions is not somewhat unreconstructed. In this sense, the film’s treatment of landscape is less than politically progressive. Anna Neill has rightly noted that “despite, or more precisely, because of the way the film’s luscious footage of remote bush trades in the exotic, it brings New Zealand right into the global economic arena, offering its hardly touched landscape up to the tourist’s (or foreign investor’s) eye” (137). However, Campion is aware that nature, as the “first” world of Maori culture, cannot be simply counterposed to pakeha or colonial civilization.

     

    Whether representing social arrangements such as marriage or expressions of the body such as desire, the film refuses to participate in the simple opposition of nature and culture. Thus the life force represented by the lush natural environment is contrasted not only with the deadening conformity of a dislocated European culture, but also with Ada’s “dark talent” for self-annihilation, which her father had presciently identified as fundamental to her being. This opposition of the death drive and life force is repeated in the mother-daughter pairing of the austere and “driven” Ada with the aptly named Flora, as a young girl full of life and as much at home in the landscape as Maori children.

     

    Denaturalization, I would suggest, is an overdetermined figure for the film: the denaturalization of identitarian and libidinal, as well as ontological, social, or epistemological objects. If landscape has often functioned to territorialize the imagined national identity, this denaturalization has a critical function. The liminal space of the colony is an appropriate context in which to dramatize the destabilizations of subject-position: Campion’s film works to destabilize identities or subject positions with regard to race and gender or sexual position in order to interrogate the relations between pakehas and Maoris, and to suggest that a colonial structure depends on the subordination and “feminization” or queering of Maoris, as well as on the subordination of women in a hierarchical structure. Colonialism is about racial and sexual oppression. The postcolonial setting of The Piano emphasizes that Stewart is a placeholder for bourgeois postcolonial white masculinity in New Zealand, an identity that is specifically in crisis.

     

    The political and economic inflections of this crisis are muted in the film, but it is clear that the location is not incidental. Linda Dyson has argued that the film “re-presents the story of colonization in New Zealand as a narrative of reconciliation.” Here in the periphery of the former empire, argues Dyson, “the film addresses the concerns of the dominant white majority… providing a textual palliative for postcolonial anxieties generated by the contemporary struggles over the nation’s past” (267). Dyson remarks that “the critical acclaim surrounding the film constructed The Piano as a feminist exploration of nineteenth-century sexuality and tended to ignore the way in which ‘race’ is embedded in the text” (267). The film rehearses a familiar Orientalist trope: Maoris are once again on the wrong side of the nature/culture, primitive/modern divide. They are “on the margins of the film as the repositories of an authentic, unchanging and simple way of life”–a paradise or “New Jerusalem” which could become the site for the self-regenerative project of the whites “energized by the utopian fantasy of building a society free of the political and economic divisions and inequalities of Europe” (268). The British Crown in 1840 actually signed the Treaty of Waitangi with five hundred Maori tribal leaders acquiring land from Maori, who in return could see this moment as marking their achievement of sovereign national status. The Crown did not honor the treaty, and Maori have frequently had to fight over the issue of land acquisition. The treaty has become a rallying point for a bicultural Maori Renaissance, but today, despite the worldwide recognition of Maori claims, they remain a peripheral people in political and social terms (269-70).

     

    Near the film’s conclusion, the relocation of Ada and Baines to a house in Nelson, because it is a landscape of apparent contentment, has misled some critics to conclude, reading the film’s own narrative too literally, that Ada has chosen “life” at the end of the film. Felicity Coombs and Suzanne Gemmell, the editors of what they themselves describe as “an authoritative collection” of criticism on the film (x), venture the editorial generalization that the film “establish[es]” a “colonial narrative” only to “disrupt” it “via the narrative machinations of romance, whereby desire transcends the unequal relations of power and, albeit violently, the colony releases the heroine to pursue her fortunes with her lover. Such an ending is a testament to the problematic terrain that the film must negotiate in order to resolve the converging post-colonial themes it employs en route” (viii-ix). Even critics who do not, against the evidence of the film’s ending, endorse a sentimental narrative of the integration of Ada within a completely fulfilling marriage to Baines in Nelson–and Dyson is a good example–undertheorize the film’s conclusion with regard to Ada herself. Dyson fails to underscore what I would argue is crucial–the imbrication of the sexual with the sociopolitical and postcolonial registers. I don’t wish to single out Dyson but to point up a blockage in the body of criticism of the film: that it inadequately conceptualizes the interlinkages even when it takes the trouble to mention them. The result is a substantial underinterpretation or a partial understanding. This essay demonstrates that such readings miss an important dimenson of irresolution: the crucial trajectory of the drive that retains, at least as fantasy, Ada’s passages to jouissance against the semblance of happy matrimony.

     

    Section II:
    A Beautiful Relationship or a Perverse Couple?

     

    In this section I discuss the film’s representation of Ada as desiring subject, a subject that also seeks access to the freedom to pursue an “other” satisfaction than the one she is officially granted within the family romance. My intention is to raise the question of why Ada seeks something beyond the limits of what looks like the best human love can offer: a relationship that grows into a non-exploitative, mutually respectful, and erotically complete arrangement, one that culminates in an apparently happy marriage with room for growth. This, as I indicated at the outset, is an issue around which the most vigorous debates about the film have raged: What does Ada want? What other satisfaction does she seek if she rejects marriage? Could marital bliss with a man who comes to love her be really all that she desires–and does the film’s power not lie in its unmasking of the power relations undergirding the institution of conventional marriage? Why does Ada consent to the “bargain” Baines proposes, which as he himself observes as the relationship develops, makes a “whore” out of her, if she is a figure on whom so many viewers have projected (cathected?) a passionate resistance to patriarchal relations? I will discuss these important issues. But first I want to re-emphasize here that ultimately it is the relationship with Baines that allows us to recognize Ada’s access to that satisfaction, so a consideration of Baines must be a part of any analysis of Ada’s dark talent, her drive toward satisfaction.

     

    The film received a great deal of attention as a riveting and profoundly disturbing portrait of a woman’s self-assertion. It has less frequently been discussed as an equally powerful representation of the remaking of masculinity in the postcolony. Many critics, while offering illuminating, complex, and even confessedly ambivalent and multiple readings of Ada (Barcan and Fogarty, for instance), underestimate the role of Ada’s partner, Baines, as though his desire were beneath serious consideration. Dyson, in an essay that is in many ways solid and helpful, focuses almost exclusively on Ada, missing a crucial dimension of the film by underestimating the significance of Baines’s borderline subjectivity and unorthodox libidinal impulses–although admittedly Campion herself cannot sustain the oddity of Baines’s “love” and too quickly contains it in a more conventional, tranquil domesticity, as if he had suddenly relinquished his journey toward going native and had become a respectable burgher in colonial garb, embracing a new domesticity in Nelson with Ada. Many other persuasive readings, such as Bridget Orr’s, that purport to be attentive to the “speaking subjectivity” and “accession to agency” of Ada as a resistant and “desiring subject,” underestimate the importance of Baines’s desiring subjectivity. Orr’s interpretation cannot go beyond noticing the film’s “final wish-fulfilling retreat from the ‘frontier,’ the back-blocks site of pioneer endeavour, to the gentility of Nelson, [which] concludes a process by which Baines is transformed into the sentimental hero of female desire, while Stewart is left alone in the bush” (149). The film in such accounts appears little more than a narrative, albeit an admittedly complex one, of a white man saved from going native by a process of something like embourgeoisement–a return to the settler colonial fold and a return to domesticity.

     

    I want to redirect exclusive attention from Ada onto her relationship with Baines, the perplexities of which are precisely the source of the puzzlement of even friendly feminist spectators with whom I align myself.5 I propose that a signal contribution of The Piano lies in its representation of the erotic attachment and detachment that constitute this relationship. The film is certainly gripping, but it is also unusual (and this is insufficiently emphasized in the critical reception of the film) in that here in the settler postcolony it is the white male subject (whiteness being the presumptively invisible marker of race)–represented by Stewart–who is represented as being in crisis. It is the white man in the film who, emerging from the nightmare of colonialism, seems in need of therapeutic transformation, not the distressed colonial black- or brown-skinned subject. But Baines too is a subject in crisis–except that he is in transition toward going native, as indicated by the unfinished moko on his face. So in a sense he is in a quite different psychosocial place from Stewart.

     

    There is a noticeable effort on the part of the filmmaker to point the way to the redemption of the white male colonial subject in the case of Baines. As the third element in the love triangle with Ada and Stewart, Baines is a pivotal figure whom Ada first resists as an “oaf” but gradually warms to when he turns out to have unsounded depths. In addition to transgressing the border of sexual identification, he also crosses cultural barriers, as Harvey Keitel states: “Baines has given up his culture–he’s not a pakeha and he’s not a Maori. He’s nowhere, looking for a place to be” (qtd. in Bilborough 143). If Baines is culturally borderline he is, even more intriguingly, sexually liminal. This is visually indicated in an early scene in which both a Maori woman and a young man “dressed as a woman” (Campion 53) make sexual overtures to him: clearly he appeals to both men and women, and this already introduces a degree of doubt about his desire, a doubt that is encouraged by the fact that he is living apart from his wife, who never appears in the film. But this visual index of his ambiguous sexuality does scant justice to the radically “border” status of Baines’s eroticized body in the film, and in some ways is really a red herring if it suggests a latent homosexuality: I argue that in his own way Baines wants “something else” too, like Ada.

     

    The need to complicate the structure of what Baines really wants as a subject is indicated in the screenplay of the film where Campion repeatedly describes Baines as a kind of radically innocent or culturally naive voluptuary, who desires neither an ordinary relationship of the kind consecrated in marriage nor a kind of crude sexual encounter, however sustained. Baines, I would argue, wants in some way to “suffer”–and to enjoy through the suffering, which is precisely the meaning of jouissance–the body of the other in this subjective sense. In her own screenplay directions, Campion repeatedly emphasizes Baines’s “odd sensual pleasure-taking” (Campion 61). When he has secured his “bargain” with Ada, we see an indication of what he really wants: “Twice he closes his eyes and breathes deeply. BAINES is experiencing an unpractised sense of appreciation and lust” (Campion 56; emphasis added). The discordant yoking together of “appreciation and lust” is an index of Campion’s struggle to demarcate the psychic territory of drive that she is trying to map–the territory one might say of a kind of “perverse couple.”6 She is entirely uninterested in either the hydraulics of sex or the soap operas of romance.

     

    Contrary to what some commentators insist, even the infamous “bargain” for the piano is something more or less than sexual harassment; and it is not simply rape (see Barcan and Fogarty 7). One reviewer, Kerryn Goldsworthy, even suggests the compact is of a kind that “doesn’t really have a name” (qtd. in Barcan and Fogarty 10). For one thing, Ada herself is actively bartering for her piano from the very beginning of the film, even before Baines says that he wants to “touch” her as she plays. Certainly it is Ada who approaches Baines to arrange for the piano to be retrieved from the beach, so that one could say that it is she who endows the piano with its commodity character (exchange value) as well as its symbolic value for her. Yet it is Stewart who, at the suggestion of Baines, barters piano lessons from Ada in exchange for land–and Baines approaches Stewart first with his proposal. At this initial phase Ada has little say in the bargain. Stewart has a key role, and he and Baines both treat her at least initially as a tradeable commodity–woman as a means of exchange between men. This homosociality complicates the bargain Ada and Baines strike together for the piano itself. Ada does not or cannot refuse the lessons, but neither does she communicate, even in writing to Stewart, how Baines queers the barter.

     

    A crucial turning point in the relationship is marked by the moment when she comes to find the mere fulfilling of the bargain without the erotic component unsatisfactory to her. By this time Baines has practically given the piano to her to his own disadvantage, so for Ada it is no longer just about winning back the piano, at least in the later stages of the game. As Neil Robinson correctly notices, Baines gives her the piano because he too has come to feel that the body cannot be enjoyed unless affect is also invested in it (31). Yet this is not to say that it is simply a matter of Ada and Baines growing fonder (in the sense of romantic love) of each other despite the “ugliness” of the barter–nothing makes this point more indisputable than the actual ending of the film, and this ending is emphatically not the scene of happy matrimony as so many have suggested. It is the frankly erotic nature of the terms that fuels their “love.” I would add that the apparent domestication, or taming, of Baines’s specific libidinal drive suggests a failure of energy or nerve on the part of the filmmaker–Campion’s interest in sustaining the symmetry of Baines’s drive appears to flag in comparison with her pointed concern to retain Ada’s exorbitant drive, which courses well beyond the boundary of bourgeois domesticity, as I argue below. Surely we have here a relationship that is more than the enforced prostitution of a desperate woman without choices by a sexually predatory male, even though there are elements of both prostitution and predation in play?

     

    I suggest that what is “more” is precisely the excess that I am trying to trace, particularly in Section III of the essay. It has to be acknowledged that the relationship grows as the story develops, but there is something about the ending of the film that suggests that ordinary bourgeois domesticity, no matter how emancipated the partners, does not speak the language of the drive, which is so crucial in fathoming Ada’s continuing urge to tarry with the negative even when she has available to her the sunny positive of married life in Nelson. It is an excess of the drive speaking through the body–the real body, and not just the fleshly. Explicitly and self-consciously, Campion plumbs the unconscious or extraconscious intelligence of the body:

     

    My exploration can be a lot more sexual [than if she had been writing in the nineteenth century], a lot more investigative of the power of eroticism, which can add another dimension. Because then you get involved in the actual bodyscape of it as well, because the body has certain effects, like a drug almost, certain desires for erotic satisfaction which are very strong forces too. (qtd. in Bilborough 140)

     

    Campion’s epigraph to the screenplay unwittingly captures something of this excess, although she elects a banal vocabulary: “the romantic impulse is in all of us,” she writes, “but it’s not part of a sensible way of living. It’s a heroic path and it generally ends dangerously. I treasure it in the sense that I believe it’s a path of great courage. It can also be the path of the foolhardy and the compulsive” (7). Campion’s monitory tone echoes Lacan’s account of the attraction of transgression. But the “romantic impulse” as conceived within the bourgeois ideal of happiness is a lure; for Lacan, love requires moving beyond a limit. Whatever Campion says, the film itself has complex resonances for a reader of Lacan.

     

    It would be perverse to suggest that Baines, and masculine sexuality, are more important in the film than the issue of feminine sexuality, or to focus on his desire to the exclusion of female desire in the film. And of course there are other women in the film besides Ada, and a discussion of the sexual economy in this colonial context cannot ignore the structural position of those other women within it. They help us to see Ada’s desire more clearly, if only by contrast. But they also complicate our understanding of Ada’s structural positioning in settler colonial society. Many of the other white women in the film are presented in rather complex hierarchies of race and class. One of the white women, Nessie, who has designs on Baines as in effect a bachelor (he is separated from his wife), is presented as infantile and a creature of petty jealousies and dreams. But even the white matriarch, Aunt Morag, is presented as gullible and controlling, hardly an attractive figure. Her gullibility is only redoubled when one recognizes to what extent she has incorporated settler colonial ideology. The native women have a natural vitality, but they and their men remain even more gullible than Morag and Nessie (as when the Maori in the audience are taken in by the shadow play performance of Bluebeard wielding an ax, in a foreshadowing of Stewart’s own act of chopping off Ada’s finger; the whites in the audience do not have the same reaction). In effect, Maori remain relegated to the natural world, outside of “culture,” that is to say opposed to the “civilized” world of the colonial white man. Under the colonial regime, natives and whites cannot occupy the same cultural space except as divided from each other. Baines straddles the border between the races, at least in the first half of the film, but ultimately he cannot bring it down, even in himself, which perhaps is why our final view of him is of him dressed again in white settler clothes. There is, in short, much that is troubling about the way Maori are presented in the film, although one does not have to go as far as a 1993 newsletter of the Coalition against Sexual Violence, which reviewed The Piano as a racist and even sexist film (Barcan and Fogarty 7).

     

    Campion is not entirely insensitive to race and class concerns. At some level the film also makes the white female colonial subject exorbitant to the colonial economy, since the film’s theme is resistance and agency. Ada and her daughter are able in the worst circumstances to carve out a zone of intensely private fulfillment and therefore an empowerment; this empowerment is not commensurate with the empowerment that would be available in the public sphere to women. The film also subtly ironizes the claims of Western modernity and civilization, suggesting that the white male postcolonial subject may redeem himself not by a return to the former metropolitan center but by way of a self-deconstruction. The film’s double project, then, is to trace the unmaking of postcolonial subjectivity and to imagine a radical reconceptualization of love–between subjects that are no longer merely subjects of desire. The film does give fresh meaning to the cliché that love requires the dissolution of the self by provocatively exploring the contours of an “inhuman” love as a constitutive contradiction of ordinary romantic love. Perhaps no film could fully succeed in such a project.

     

    The film works hard to save Baines from heteronormative conventionality as a subject. Unlike Stewart, whose desire for Ada is conventional and desperate, Baines’s desire for Ada appears tepid to a casual viewer. But if his desire seems attenuated, he is psychically driven by a lust for an “other satisfaction” that also drives Ada. Campion herself emphasizes the word “satisfaction” in this connection (qtd. in Bilborough 140) and explicitly indicates her interest in something like the drive as associated with satisfaction: “We grow up with so many expectations around [sex], that it’s almost like the pure sexual erotic impulse is lost to us” (qtd. in Bilborough 138). The film also eroticizes Baines’s body. In one charged scene, the nude Baines caresses Ada’s piano, while Campion’s camera’s gaze in turn “caresses” his buttocks, at eye level. Sue Gillett’s observation here is that “jealously [Baines] wishes to be the piano, to be the receiver of such rapturous touching,… to have such haunting music evoked in and through his own body, to tremble under the powerful cadences of [Ada’s] transcendence” (278-9). Yet Gillett says little about the nature of Ada’s transcendence or Baines’s wish to “be the piano.” The “other satisfaction,” according to Lacan’s formulae of sexuation, is available only to Woman. But Baines’s desire to “tremble,” the transcendence Baines “really wants,” is to enjoy and be enjoyed as Woman.

     

    Campion’s own notation is suggestive of Baines’s unusual orientation to jouissance: in the direction to a scene when Ada is playing contrary to Baines’s wishes, she writes, “Ada starts playing again; Baines feels powerless. He no longer admires her absorption with the piano, he is jealous of it” (67). In the notes to the scene in which Baines caresses the piano Campion hints at Baines’s aspiration to a kind of ec-stasy, or transcendence of the body: “As he wipes the smooth wood he becomes aware of his nakedness. His movements become slower until he is no longer cleaning, but caressing the piano” (49). And the film’s transgressive momentum lies in its ability to tease us into a beyond where even an inhuman love could be conceived as affording an other satisfaction, where “being played like the piano” might function as a figure for the play of the drive through the real body enjoying jouissance beyond the reach of “speaking being.” My attempt is to resituate that inhuman love at the heart of the film.

     

    The trajectory of Campion’s project involves a deconstruction and reconstruction of masculinity, as well as the deformation and retexturing of racialized postcolonial subjectivity. If the film has a purpose in refashioning postcolonial masculinity, it is precisely to offer an alternative to the violence (epistemological, existential, sexual, emotional), not only of colonialism but of conventional love. In his relations with Ada, the film seems to present Baines as being redeemed as a “sensitive” (“non-masculine”) man, a fool for love, in short the regenerate man of women’s melodrama. But this is an inadequate description. It turns out that his “hysterical” desire is not so much to love or have sex with Ada as to be loved. In Gillett’s words, “contravening the Oedipal logic of desire, Baines comes to the realization that his desire, crucially, has the passive aim ‘normally’ allotted to woman. His desire is for her desire” (282). His passivized–one might even call it masochistic–masculinity is a major theme of the film, in stark contrast to the violent and stereotypical phallic masculinity of Stewart. He rises out of the confines of his raced and gendered body, as well as beyond the confines of the Oedipal structure. I had earlier quoted a comment by Harvey Keitel to the effect that Baines is “looking for a place to be, and he finds it through his ability to suffer” (qtd in Bilborough 143). I want to read Baines’s desire to suffer as a desire to enjoy the body of the other through suffering–which is precisely the meaning of jouissance.

     

    Stewart’s entrapment in the melodramatic orthodoxy of bourgeois love, within the parameters of which he is condemned to being uncomplicatedly masculine, is understandable in terms of the arc of desire. But Baines’s fantasmatic ambition is clearly of another order, and the film fascinatingly makes us distinguish between Stewart’s and Baines’s dispositions to desire, by first soliciting the viewer’s identification with Stewart, followed by a disidentification, and therefore a return of the look to Baines’s strange positioning as a subject.7 The difference between these two pakeha men is also clear in that Stewart is much more anxious to retain some anchor for his endangered postcolonial masculinity, much more anxious not to open himself to feminization than is Baines. Stewart is defensive about all the markers of European superiority in matters of society and sexuality. By contrast, Baines is presented in the position of eroticized object, part of the film’s tactic (noted by Barcan and Fogarty) of offering female viewers opportunities for erotic identification that are rare in contemporary mainstream cinema (7). Stewart is anerotic; Baines becomes an erotic object not only for Ada but for the (female) viewer. But my point is not so much to dwell on the contrast between the two men, to condemn one and praise the other, as to mark the subtle way the film explores an alternative to the melodrama of love.

     

    More than being increasingly drawn to Baines (which is partly true), Ada finds herself increasingly drawn by Baines’s desire to be loved by her: “I want you to love me, but you can’t,” he says. This is in proportion to the degree to which she is repulsed by Stewart’s desperate and violent desire to possess her. Stewart’s desperation (metonymic of the pakeha‘s desperate confrontation with the fact of his own impotent interstitiality in the postcolony) is not lost on the Maori. Baines offers her the promise of a love that an ordinary (violent) man could never offer her. It is this promise, the film seems to suggest, that draws the elective mute out of her silence and her death wish–for it is clear that the typical heterosexual domesticity, marriage, or love she had previously been offered were among the aspects of a woman’s fate Ada was declining through her exorbitant silence.

     

    But it is precisely here that many astute observers and commentators, such as Gillett and Gordon, tend to turn the film into an exploration of issues of consent, rape, and Ada’s progression toward a sentimental love, even a love contained within the paradigm of bourgeois domesticity (see Gordon 197). But such interpretations, I have argued, make the film seem a rather simpler artifact than it is, set the viewer up for “disappointment” and, worse, obliterate a crucial “remainder” or “excess,” a conatus of negativity to which Ada cleaves and to which cleaves the sentimental narrative. The excess seems to be minimized even by those who, like Dyson, register Ada’s resistant performative. Dyson focuses on the presumed choice of “life” that Ada makes, ultimately undertheorizing both the excess as well as the issue of postcolonial masculinity that she also recognizes is at the heart of the film: “At the end of the film, Ada chooses ‘life’ after jumping overboard with her piano. She leaves the instrument (the symbol of European bourgeois culture) at the bottom of the ocean, thus severing her connection with the imperial centre and begins her life anew with her man who has already ‘gone native’” (268).

     

    On the contrary, I would suggest that if she renounces one instrument she also takes up another–that Baines becomes Ada’s instrument and Ada his. This is why Ada can ultimately renounce the piano, and not because Baines has given her marital bliss and love. This brings us closer to understanding why Ada, who has taken such a significant step in renouncing ordinary love and sexual relationships as having elected to go mute, should consent so readily to the strange compact with Baines. Even some critics such as Barcan and Fogarty, who find the category of romantic love apposite to describing Ada and Baines’s relationship, admit that it fails to capture something important about the “affective economy” of the relationship, and it is not just that this economy is “subtended by an economic one” (12). My sense is that Ada’s “surrender” has in the final analysis less to do with loving that particular man and more to do with finding, or at least seeking, a kind of pleasure–not love but a kind of jouissance. Nor is it Baines’s “actual lived body”–to use Donald Lowe’s phrase–that she wants to “enjoy” in jouissance.

     

    If the film disappoints, it is in losing track of Baines’s transgressive drive, his aspirations to jouissance, while Ada is permitted to remain complex and mysterious. The film also seems to leave underdeveloped the ethics of Baines’s transgressive performative, which is really a crucial foil to Ada’s performative.8 In the final moments of the film, her memory of jouissance persists as her subversive secret, interrupting the trajectory and temporality of melodrama and refusing the idyll of bourgeois domesticity. Yet Campion allows Baines to turn back into a frog, into a happily married white burgher, after having gone so far to save him from erotic and racialized conventionality. In part, this essay’s project is an anamnesis, or re-membering of Baines’s lost enjoyment. If we do not attend to Baines’s orientation to an other jouissance, we risk reading only his desire and misconstruing his relationship with Ada, just as we would if we read only Ada’s desire in her consenting to a “deal” to regain her piano and to a marriage with Baines.

     

    Readings that focus on desire are too reductive to account for the refractions of love that the film presents to us. After Stewart discovers what Ada has been doing instead of giving Baines piano lessons, he first tries to assault her, but since she coldly rejects him, he boards her up in the house with her daughter. Alone in her bed, she is seen kissing her own reflection in a hand mirror: this is neither narcissism nor an example of a woman newly in love. It is a portrait of a woman re-discovering a pleasure that exceeds its object or makes an accident of its object. At night, in bed with her daughter, she first lasciviously caresses the little girl and then, in a scene rarely commented on, approaches Stewart, running her hands over his chest and then between his buttocks. This is the first time she makes a sexual advance to Stewart, whom she has always rejected with phobic energy. But when Stewart reacts with relief admixed with panic, she turns away, and he finds himself unable to grasp the opportunity that has been his obsession: he is “unmanned” by this advance, as Campion tells us (92). Ada’s is not a gesture of rapprochement; she still denies him. Shortly afterwards, in a fit of jealous rage, Stewart chops off Ada’s index finger in a symbolic castration for which Baines will later try to compensate with a prosthesis of his own fashioning.9 But where is Ada’s jouissance? What does the woman want?

     

    Certainly phallic jouissance. But Ada seeks something else through Baines than what “Old dry balls” Stewart could offer. Were Ada simply “in love” with Baines, it would be strange for her to transfer desire onto her daughter and then, without missing a beat, onto Stewart. It is more productive to recognize in this strange recathexis an anamorphic emblem of the circuit of the drive as it seeks an other satisfaction in keeping with Lacan’s dictum that “all the needs of speaking beings are contaminated by the fact of being involved in an other satisfaction” (Four Fundamental 51). Clearly, it is not Stewart she wants, but erotic fulfillment; nor is he a stand-in for Baines, for sex with Baines is evidently quite as satisfying as one could expect it to be. Rather, we are witnessing here a token of the instrumentalization of love in the service of an other satisfaction, and Campion’s notation confirms that “Ada seems removed from Stewart as if she has a separate curiosity of her own” (Campion 90). Ada wants to be a subject not wholly defined by the Other’s desire–to be what Fink calls a “subject [that is] someThing else” (“Desire” 37).

     

    If we take Baines’s own pleasure as seriously as Ada’s drive toward satisfaction, it is hard to ignore the fact that while there is clearly some sympathy and affection that Baines feels for Ada, there is also, from the beginning, something radically narcissistic in Baines’s desire to be looked at with the gaze of love, to “be the piano.”10 In truth, from his perspective too this is a non-reciprocal relationship, not constrained within the paradigm of melodrama. Baines does not want only romantic love, any more than Ada thinks good sex or good companionship negates her misgivings about sexual relationships within patriarchy or about marriage and its social meaning within the Oedipal paradigm. A description of the forms of their jouissance requires a different structure.

     

    Section III:
    Not Courtship But Courtly Love

     

    If I have returned to this film that has already been discussed at such length, it is in part because of a dissatisfaction with the discussion I have already described, but also because of the lessons to be gleaned from Campion’s suggestive exploration of the psychic economy of love. Some of these lessons are anticipated by the Lacanian distinction between romantic courtship and courtly love. Sam Neill, who plays Stewart, observes that “this film explores both the desperate and the wonderful things that happen between men and women in a way that’s not often done in films. And these things make for moments of sublime ecstasy and moments of the most terrible fear, of terror. It’s been pretty scary territory to be acting in–it helps to have had a little life experience” (qtd. in Bilborough 147). Life experience provides, if nothing else, a recognition that we never find a total, blissful love. We contrast this actually experienced imperfection of human love with what one might call the myth (myths being something other than mere falsehoods) of a perfect, and therefore inhuman, love.

     

    A useful framework for understanding the irregular dispositions of the two main characters toward pleasure or jouissance is Jacques Lacan’s psychoanalytic adaptation of “courtly love.” While courtly love may appear to be an outmoded discursive paradigm, it can help us to grasp something of the real power of the film’s representation of Ada’s strange relationship with Baines.11 What’s more, the admittedly extreme artificiality of courtly love today is precisely its strongest recommendation because it defamiliarizes the category of bourgeois sexual relationship afresh and reperspectivizes the overdetermination of Baines’s cultural and sexual liminality as well.

     

    Within the optics of courtly love’s categories adapted to a psychoanalytic understanding, we need no longer agonize over whether Baines and Ada are involved in a romance or a rape, or whether they really find domestic bliss in Nelson. Ada’s strange compact with Baines comes into sharper focus as neither simply the quid pro quo of desire, nor a reciprocation of exactly contrapuntal trajectories of desire. It is rather a mutual a-relational groping after jouissance that is nevertheless supported by the scaffolding of a relationship. How else might we explain the fact that images of Ada’s near-drowning intrude immediately after the scenes of her new, happily married life with Baines? Why does Ada not choose between these two “endings”? What is this trace of trauma that is nurtured by Ada in the midst or embrace of married bliss?

     

    Ada’s settling into married life with Baines is certainly shocking in its bathos and tameness.12 “Feminist friends,” Gillett writes, “have criticized the film for offering [an] apparent return [at the end of the film] to sexual conventionality” (280); but as Gillett observes, this is not really the “end” of the film:

     

    The seeming closure offered by the domestic ending is only temporary. It is immediately undercut by another vision: Ada’s body is floating underwater above her piano, Victorian dress ballooning around her. The return to this second image, coming so soon after Ada’s rescue from drowning, unsettles the happily-ever-after of the couple, not in that it forebodes an end to this happiness but in its recognition of the insistent presence of another territory and mode of experience. (281; emphasis added)

     

    In part agreeing here with Gillett, I argue that this “other territory” is the territory of the Lacanian real (distinguished from the symbolic and the imaginary). The image of a delicious death is not merely “consign[ed]… to fantasy” (Bruzzi 266; emphasis added); it irrupts into the idyll of the actual, disappointing Gillett’s “feminist friends,” perhaps, but redeeming the melodramatic bourgeois idyll of love through the anamorphotic ideal of courtly love in the real. Apparently some viewers–like Gillett–have the experience of being “affected… very deeply” by the film, “entranced, moved, dazed” (Gillett 286). But if those feminist viewers were often nonplussed or felt betrayed first by Ada’s participation in the not very feminist “bargain” and then by her apparent scuttling of the narrative of feminine resistance by acquiescing to a conventional and conventionally happy marriage to Baines, could it not have been because they had the experience but missed the meaning? That they underestimated the tour de force of Ada’s displacement, her anamorphosis, of “love” from the actual to the real, even if they acknowledged that, like Gillett herself, they felt that they had visited “another territory,” and therefore felt “reluctant to re-enter the everyday world after the film had finished” (286; emphasis added)?

     

    The last moments of the film do seem a letdown. But as I have already suggested, it is not so much because Ada settles into a conventional settler marriage, “a sensible way of living,” in Campion’s equally sensible phrasing. In some minor respects the film is bathetic because, even if Ada retains at least the memory of jouissance as a subversive secret splitting the temporality of the film, the film loses track of Baines‘s jouissance. Baines has a crucial role in enabling Ada’s passage to jouissance and her safe passage back from what otherwise could be annihilation for her. Like the knight of courtly love, his service to his lady is to enable her access to “enjoyment,” jouissance–an “other” satisfaction. They are partners in supporting each other, “renouncing” romantic love as well as taking satisfaction through each other.13

     

    Lacan’s formulae of sexuation suggest that an other satisfaction is theoretically available to the position “Woman,” even if no actual women experience it. “Woman” is a category under erasure. The Woman is an empty category. But that is what makes possible the fantasy of occupying that position. As fantasy, it can be indulged equally by anatomical men and anatomical women. In theorizing the problem to which courtly love offers an alternative, Lacan says that there is no sexual relation: “the only basis of analytic discourse is the statement that there is no–that it is impossible to pose–sexual relation” (qtd. in Heath 53). In the Lacanian misprision of the paradigm of courtly love, the Woman is coded as the Lady, the obscure object of the courtly lover who must renounce sexual relations (not the same thing as “the sexual relation”) with her. To “have” her he must forgo her. But in what sense does the courtly lover forgo her?

     

    The Anamorphosis of Anamorphosis

     

    Everybody “falls in love” sometime, as the song goes; people fall in and out of love, experience its successes and its failures, and sex has its place. How is courtly love different? If Lacan’s disillusioned perspective (that there is no sexual relation) is meaningful, what does the distance between everyday or ordinary notions of love and Lacan’s technically evacuated category of love and the sexual relation signify? In the first place, as Charles Shepherdson puts it, “sexuality” is not completed–does not achieve satisfaction–in sexual intercourse. Rather, if we remember the Lacanian distinction between the object of need and the object of demand, “the first being necessary to biological life, the second designating an object that belongs to the field of the Other,” sexuality “emerges in the difference between need and demand, and… its object and its modes of satisfaction, are distinct from the satisfaction of biological need,” although sexuality may find expression as the bodily inscription of demand (139). Sexuality is “not all” contained in the symbolic register, but exceeds the law. The excess can be enjoyed only by God or Woman, both of which are structural positions and not people. Since ordinarily women never experience this excessive jouissance, and since the structural position “Woman” is under erasure, Woman’s completion occurs in the real where the sexed Other obtains. Courtly love formulates this (phantasmatic) perfected love as anamorphosis. If the inamorata, the Lady of courtly love, is allowed access to a real jouissance with the real sexed God, then the courtly lover, or knight, might also be imagined as wishing for a real jouissance and completion according to the Lacanian formula “There is some One.”

     

    But I want to disfigure even this anamorphotic figure of courtly love, and to suggest that the courtly lover’s goal may be not the Lady (even as sublimated) but her real jouissance: her experience that “There is some One” (‘Y a de l’un). The Piano points obliquely to this insight by making Baines an instantiation of the anamorphic courtly lover. What the sexually liminal Baines “really wants” (unconsciously fantasizes) is to enjoy the jouissance of Woman, as though he occupied the empty position. The film represents this anamorphically in the attenuation of his desire. Baines seems to recognize the impossibility of love (“I want you to love me but you can’t,” he tells her, more truly than even he understands) and the inevitable failure covered over in love by what we usually call the “consummation” of love, namely the coming together, in sexual union, of the lovers. He “chooses” to renounce that always imperfect love, his act of abnegation mirroring the much more obvious election of silence on Ada’s part, for a higher, more ritualized and purer love–in short, an anamorphosis of ordinary love. It is in this sense that the courtly lover, here represented by Baines, forgoes romantic love with the lady–but one “forgoes” only in the hope of attaining some higher goal.

     

    Ordinary romantic love is circumscribed in the ambit of desire, converging there with, at best, what Lacan would call “phallic” jouissance, which can be experienced by women as well as men, in sex. By contrast, courtly love, precisely because it is a formal, ritual sacrament that displaces God in the realm of jouissance, affords a satisfaction that love could never promise. (This ability finally to enjoy enjoyment [Fink, “Desire and the Drives” 41] is something even a thinker of the order of Marx could miss in the admittedly odd arrangement called courtly love.)14 Desire and satisfaction are really at odds in romantic love and ordinary sex; Lacan notes that most adults never want to wake up–“when something happens in their dreams that threatens to cross over into the real, it distresses them so much that they immediately awaken… they go on dreaming” (Seminar XX 53). Fink observes that the later Lacan of The Four Fundamental Concepts does not argue that the subject who has traversed his most basic fantasy in order to live out the drive [vivre la pulsion] “becomes a kind of non-stop pleasure-seeking machine, but rather that desire stops inhibiting the subject from obtaining satisfaction” (41). Desire is also “a defense against satisfaction” (43). You can have your cake and eat it.

     

    Courtly love, as an anamorphosis of ordinary love, obviates the premises of romantic love and the usual laments of “sublunary” lovers. It shows how for Baines Ada is something more, or less, than a woman he falls for and seduces, just as it shows that Ada is after something that is not “in” Baines. The principle of courtly love is a kind of abnegation of ordinary completion or consummation, a denial from the outset of what ordinary lovers are said to pine for. Then why do they have sex? How, to return to one of the key questions I posed above, should we read the sexual relationship of the couple, which has caused such flutter even among the film’s more sophisticated commentators?

     

    I would argue that as mere mortals Baines and Ada can hardly help seeking satisfaction through sex and romantic love–but that is not where satisfaction obtains, and they “know” this without perhaps understanding it. As Lacan writes in Seminar XX, “all the needs of speaking beings are contaminated by the fact of being involved in an other satisfaction… that those needs may not live up to” (51).15 That men and women couple or marry does not mean that they have contradicted the Lacanian nostrum that there is no sexual relation. The failure of the sexual relation is inevitable because, as Lacan’s formulae of sexuation suggest, it is only God as a sexed Other who perfects the sexual relation and the jouissance of the Woman. This sexed God is not the Christian God but is “unsignifiable” in speech, beyond language, in Serge André’s terms (91). “The sexual act of coitus,” André goes on to say,

     

    takes on then the figure of an eternal missed act where repeatedly the absence of the sexual relation, the failure to reunite the subject with the Other to form one body, is verified. The resulting satisfaction can only be defined as the failure of the jouissance of the body and the return to the jouissance of the organ. Lacan gives to it a pretty name: jouissance of the idiot–‘idiot’ should be understood according to its Greek root–that is to say, jouissance that can do without the Other” (98).

     

    The sexual act of coitus remains the “figure of an eternal missed act,” writes André (91), represented in courtly love’s eternal deferral of union between lover and Lady. In this (missed act), satisfaction “can only be defined as the failure of the jouissance of the body and the return to the jouissance of the organ”–but this obtains only if the Other can be killed off, and castration refused. The is an anamorphosis of the inhuman love in which the drive would find an other satisfaction, and in which the Woman would find her real partner, not just the Other’s desire with whom all castrated beings must deal. In the film, the anamorphosis of love reveals-and-conceals that what binds the lovers is that they are each after “someThing else” (Fink, “Desire and Drive” 37): this pursuit of “someThing else” is operative at the level of fantasmatic drive.

     

    The fact that Baines and Ada actually have sex is thus merely the predictable human attempt to achieve an ideal, or it represents a conscious or unconscious covering-over or endless deferral (tuxn) of the recognition of the ideal’s unachievabliity. Men and women want to sleep together because “in fact, they want ‘encore,’ to unite with the real Other, even if they are supposed to know that the latter is out of reach,” André writes (97). And furthermore:

     

    Post coitum omne animal triste,” the saying goes. But it should be corrected in the sense that only the speaking being has a fundamental reason to experience some sadness. In fact, only for him alone can aiming toward the Other and failing to reach it make any sense. Language, in short, does not keep its promises: it makes us believe in the Other and by the same token takes it away from us; it evokes the horizon of a jouissance of the body, but makes it inaccessible to us. Sexual jouissance can only connote dissatisfaction. (98)

     

    The sadness of the speaking being is the inevitable end(point) of the sexual relation, which as Lacan insists “does not take place” (Lacan, Feminine Sexuality 138). The other jouissance is by definition beyond. The heuristic frame of courtly love psychoanalytically interpreted allows us to negotiate the question of satisfaction, jouissance, in connection with the status and signification of the body.

     

    My emphasis on Ada’s jouissance and drive is not intended to suggest that her desire is inoperative–precisely the contrary. Ada’s desire, however, points beyond itself. Playing Ada, Holly Hunter was conscious that Campion “was very brave in holding out for a more original kind of sexuality and sensuous quality in Ada” (qtd. in Bilborough 149). And in her analysis of the film, Gordon herself acknowledges that there is indeed a “something else“–not just desire–that circulates in the film, although her gloss on it is somewhat different from the one I have given it above:

     

    On first reading “The Piano debate,” I was struck by the curious sense that something else had gone missing, in addition to… [the] loss of a referent for the negativity that the film entertains in its account of female desire. Something both more and less than the brutal violence (attempted rape, “castration”) depicted onscreen: “more” because the film stages a potentially unlimited replay of that violence as an affect [sic] of cinematic spectatorship; and “less” because the final violation of the woman’s body is rehearsed at repeated moments of spectatorship within the film. (193-94)

     

    It turns out that while she draws upon Freud and Lacan, all Gordon means by negativity is “the mechanism by which destructiveness can exert a threat on, and provide the means for, the subject” (194). Her interest is to suggest that “to the extent that [the film] provides a commentary on the negativity of female desire and female spectatorship… this negativity is inextricable from the sexually differentiated dynamics of cinematic looking” (197).

     

    Ada’s renunciation of speech (a “negativity” that permits self-assertion for Ada) represents something like an intuitive grasp of André’s point that

     

    the fact of being caught in language implies a loss for the human being at the level of the body–as much of his body as of the body of the Other. This loss appears as a loss of being whose tongue carries its trace: one does not say of man that he is a body, but rather that he has a body. By the fact that he speaks, the human being is no longer a body: a disjunction is introduced between the subject and his body, the latter becoming an external entity from whom the subject feels more or less separated. The subject that the effect of language brings into existence is as such distinct from the body. What remains for him is to inhabit it or to reach that of the Other. But he can only do so by way of the signifier, since it is the signifier that, to start with, tells us that we have a body, indeed, induces in us the illusion of a primordial body, of a being-body prior to language. Language intervenes between subject and body. This intervention constitutes at the same time an access and a barrier: access to the body insofar as it is symbolized, and a barrier to the body insofar as it is real. [André 94; emphasis added]

     

    This account better approximates Ada’s experience of the disjunction between body and speech. The disjunction is absolutely central to her character. Ada has renounced speech. And as Campion herself has stated, the conceit of making Ada an elective mute is at one level not some grand feminist statement but merely the result of a formal decision about how to make the piano figure as a larger presence in the film: “I felt that if [Ada] couldn’t speak, the piano would mean so much more to her” (qtd. in Barcan and Fogarty 8). Nevertheless, to say that she “communicates through her piano, and that is why she does not need to speak” is to make only the most banal observation about her uncanny ability to divorce body and speech, and fails to address the enormous power of the film to speak, at least to women, of a specifically gendered muting. Campion also says that Ada’s muteness makes her “sexier”; this has been interpreted “both as fashionably feminist, for example, by Neil Jillett, and as alarmingly conservative” (Barcan and Fogarty 8).

     

    In any case, it is inaccurate to say that the piano says in music what Ada cannot say in speech. It would be more accurate to say that the function of the piano represents the insight that art, as Julia Kristeva puts it, enables the “flow of jouissance into language” and that music in particular connects us “directly to the otherwise silent place of its subject” (167). But even this optimistic and harmonious metaphor does not capture Ada’s access to jouissance, which occupies another place from the place occupied by music in her life, as I trust my analysis will show. The piano is not just her way of communicating. The music is, for one thing, not Ada’s own, although Michael Nyman, who based his compositions on Scottish folk and popular songs, also intended the pieces to be received as Ada’s repertoire “as if she had been the composer” (qtd. in Coombs 92). As Kirsten Thompson has demonstrated in her fine essay on the film, the progression of Ada’s complicated relationship with Baines, and as I would argue the progression of erotic complications of her libidinal investments, “is charted through the narrative structuring of six piano lessons, the final one of which ends with the two making love. The subtle transformations are marked in this relationship by the shift in the music played by Ada, beginning with scales (first visit), Silver Fling (the first lesson), Big My Secret (the second lesson), and The Attraction of the Pedaling Ankle (the third lesson)” (71). Other key moments are also marked by music, again mostly that of Michael Nyman. As I noted at the outset of this essay, in crucial scenes the music has an extradiegetic presence. The thawing of Ada’s resistance to Baines, her choice to open herself to him, is signaled by “A Bed of Ferns,” a nondiegetic melody (75) accompanying a dolly shot that focuses on Ada, who is facing away from the camera. This allows the camera’s “eye” to enter the whirlpool of her coiled hair in a Hitchcockian reference, indicating the intensification of her erotic energies. That she now wants Baines’s attention is signaled by yet another brief melody, “Little Impulse,” when she looks around to see if Baines is watching her, and stops because he is not. Perhaps the most stirring accompaniment occurs in the sequence when Stewart takes one of Ada’s playing fingers with his ax, to the score of the again appropriately titled “The Sacrifice,” played very loudly. Other important musical accompaniments include Chopin’s “Prelude in E,” as Allen reminds us (54), and the especially apposite title “The Heart Asks Pleasure First.” Again, the piano does not simply “stand in” for Ada’s lost voice in a simple compensatory relationship, for that would imply that the melodic strains of the piano adequately contain Ada’s “big secret.” On the contrary, as I argue, Ada’s drive toward “pleasure” is in excess of such harmonious equations.

     

    Not only does Ada’s daughter translate for her, but more importantly with Ada it is almost as if her body, not just her piano, “speaks.” She tells Flora that with Flora’s father, her teacher, “I didn’t need to speak, I could lay thoughts out in his mind like they were a sheet.” Ada’s relinquishment of the speech of the physical body is a metonymy for her choice of jouissance over language as support of subjectivity. But the choice cannot be final: only an inhuman being could dwell in or with jouissance. There is something homologous in her dilemma and in the “lethal factor” that characterizes the Lacanian “alienating vel” between Being and Meaning. Lacan suggests that the concept of the vel, derived from Hegel, describes a (non-)choice framed as “Your money or your life” or “Your freedom or your life” or “freedom or death”–choosing one the subject loses the other; there is no good choice (Four Fundamental 211-13).

     

    Ada is a being for death much the way Lacan’s Ethics seminar (number VII) situates Antigone between two deaths, at the limit or 16 She arrives and stays at this limit at the film’s conclusion as a result of her calculated traversal (which implies both formal denial and “crossing through”) of the choice between acquiescing completely to the bourgeois and sentimental idyll of marital bliss with Baines, and surrendering completely to the other, darker bliss she has already tasted in the depths of the ocean. It is this traversal that many critical approaches miss. Understanding Ada’s jouissance is facilitated by the Lacanian (dis)articulation of desire and drive because we find ourselves continually having to discriminate between Ada’s absence of diegetic speech and her extradiegetic speech that is saturated with negative passion (and for Stewart with palpable force); we are similarly confronted repeatedly by the contrast between the stunted or restricted desire of Ada’s physical body and the excessive and transgressive drive of her real body, and by the division between the real body and the fleshly body.

     

    The Heart Asks Pleasure First

     

    What would it mean for a human being to aspire to or to approximate a perfect bliss–to respond to the demand encapsulated in the title of one of The Piano‘s signature musical pieces by Nyman, “The Heart Asks Pleasure First”? If the “heart” asks pleasure first, what is the nature of its demand? Do we not see here the demand of the drive, rather than some sentimental notion of romantic love? Wouldn’t “pleasure” construed in the radical sense of jouissance, a sense that is apposite in the film, be at once total ecstasy and terror–like the experience of trauma?

     

    When we mention trauma, we are already in the realm of the unconscious. To pursue this question I consider here the role of the body in Ada’s erotic investments. There is also the matter of the subject, however, a linguistic effect. That (always divided) subject is the subject of desire, $<>a. But at the structural level of drive there is no identification as desiring subject. A freeing of drive entails desubjectivation of the signified subject. Parallel to the distinction between desire and the drive is that between the “actual lived body” that experiences the failed sexual relation and the real body that could enjoy an other jouissance. Jouissance obliterates being: for where there is jouissance there is only a real body.

     

    The split between the ontic body and the real body appears most clearly when Stewart has an uncanny experience with this voiceless “speech.” As she is recuperating from having her finger chopped off by Stewart, he tries to rape her. But he is stopped in his tracks by her black stare and her disembodied voice, which seems to strike him on his forehead. “I am frightened of my will,” she says, “Let Baines try to save me.” What is this disembodied voice but a “real” body’s language, a body for which the will (or drive) has a kind of suprasubjective status? This traumatic moment of physical mutilation is tied to the equally traumatic event of near-drowning; in both she is situated at a limit, between will and aphanisis. In the latter scene, following her will (or her drive), which her father had already diagnosed as her “dark talent,” she allows herself to be dragged off a boat by her own piano. As Campion details the moment, the force of the drive is neatly emblematized as a “fatal curiosity”: “As the piano splashes into the sea, the loose ropes speed their way after it. Ada watches them snake past her feet and then, out of a fatal curiosity, odd and undisciplined, she steps into a loop” (Campion 120-21). Slipping into the ocean depths she enjoys a kind of jouissance until she kicks away the rope and allows herself to be saved from the completion of the death drive’s circuit–or should we say that the symbolized body reasserts itself against the real body’s jouissance. Back on the boat of life she “says” in her spectral voiceover, “What a death! What a chance! What a surprise!” (Campion 121; see also Campion and Pullinger 214).

     

    One could call Ada a masochist. Baines, too, has corresponding masochistic traits.17 The masochist’s question is, in André’s words, about “knowing what is experienced by the body that the other enjoys through whiplashes or signifiers” (100)–or actually enjoying what the other enjoys. Lacan observes that “Man cannot reach Woman without finding himself run aground on the field of perversion” (qtd. in André 100); André explains, “the masochistic man manifests something on the order of a feminine position…. The masochist is woman or tries hard to be one” (101). A masochistic courtly lover, Baines sublimates the Lady at one level, and at another desublimates her in order to occupy her place as desubjectivated subject of drive. He recognizes that the enjoyment he seeks is not sexual relation. Baines, too, wants to enjoy as Woman. Thus Baines’s subjectivity is, like Ada’s, constituted not so much in terms of desire as in terms of drive. And he understands very clearly that enjoyment is only for a “body” that is not simply the biological organism. As we have seen, only the Woman under erasure can enjoy such enjoyment. From Baines’s point of view, Ada as a woman merely embodies the metaphor of the Other, something made clear in André’s theorization: “If a woman can incarnate the body that the subject tries in vain to unite with, it is because woman, or the body of woman, has the value of the metaphor of the Other to which there is no signifiable relation: like the Other, the woman is discompleted, not-all subjected to the signifying law” (97).18 Baines does not want so much to seduce Ada or even to love her as to be loved, to be in the gaze, in psychoanalytic terms. Now it becomes clear that even though he can say in the film that “I want you to care for me, but you can’t” he is in love, as they say, with love. He does not merely desire–and now it becomes clear why Gillett is less than precise when she writes that “His desire is for her desire” (282). Gillett herself recognizes that things are more complex:

     

    Baines calls the bargain [between Ada and himself] to end, realizing that he cannot buy, and Ada cannot sell, the personal connection, the experience of love, which he desires. Her desire, which he desires, does not exist in market terms: “I am giving the piano back to you. I’ve had enough. The arrangement is making you a whore and me wretched.”

     

    Irigaray writes: “The economy of desire–of exchange–is man’s business.” Baines experiences the poverty of this economy. He yields to this knowledge, allowing it to make him sick…. Baines’s experience of his own femininity does not lead to a usurping of the feminine for the bolstering of a threatened masculinity at the expense of the woman herself. It is effected through both an imaginative inquiry into Ada’s experience and an acceptance of his own lack of power with regard to the otherness presented by her, and leads him to turn away from the appropriative aims of a phallicly defined masculinity. (282-83; emphases added)

     

    But Gillett does not pursue (or fully grasp?) the implications of her own observations. What, for instance, are the parameters of Baines’s “imaginative inquiry” into Ada’s experience? To what extent is he himself able to enter a non-phallic, feminine “experience”? I would submit that the model of courtly love offers the best answer. Baines does idealize Ada, but this idealization is what enables Baines to enjoy the experience of love. He does not merely desire Ada’s sexual body. If the Lacanian Woman-under-erasure enjoys jouissance, she also knows that the sexual relation is impossible. It is because Baines knows this too, at some level, that he idealizes Ada. What motivates Baines, even if he does not recognize this, is the drive–he embodies the Lacanian understanding, perhaps not entirely consciously or self-reflexively, that “it is not heterosexual genital reproductive sexuality that is sought by the drives, but a partial object that provides jouissance” (Fink 41). This is a central issue in the eroticization of Baines’s colonial male body. His orientation to love evokes the paradoxical questions posed by André: “Why does Achilles pursue the tortoise, why does a man relentlessly seek Woman, why does the subject drive himself crazy to rejoin his body?” (96). Baines’s wish to enjoy as Woman is tellingly evoked when he crawls under the piano as Ada plays. He asks her to hike up her Victorian skirt higher and higher and closes his eyes rapturously–Campion in her directions uses the word “enthralled” (57)–and inserts his finger through a hole in her black stocking, under which lies the blankness of her skin. It is as if this were the black hole through which the impossible Thing could be accessed, but also kept at bay.

     

    Narcissism and Renunciation: Self-Reflexivity and Self-Silencing

     

    Baines wants to “enjoy” a jouissance, a state of being in the gaze, a gaze here instantiated as the gaze of a woman he has idealized as the Lady of courtly love, Ada. But what is the nature of this idealization? Zizek reminds us that the Lady of courtly love is idealized in the sense of becoming an “inhuman partner,” as she is raised to the status of das Ding.19 Furthermore, there is a certain sublime narcissism about Baines’s sublimation of Ada that is frequently missed. Lacan glosses the narcissistic dimension of the sublimation of the Lady as das Ding:

     

    The object in front of us, our anamorphosis, will also enable us to be precise about something that remains a little vague in the perspective adopted, namely, the narcissistic function…. The element of idealizing exaltation that is expressly sought out in the ideology of courtly love has certainly been demonstrated; it is fundamentally narcissistic in character. (Seminar VII 151)

     

    If Woman is the limit of courtly love, das Ding, the courtly lover attempts to place himself at that limit, which means going beyond the Lady. It is by a kind of anamorphosis that the courtly lover’s position coincides with that of the Woman of the sexuation graph–not that of the Lady of courtly love. (Lacan defines anamorphosis as that which “geometral researches into perspective allow to escape from vision” [Four Fundamental 87].) There is something essentially unself-reflexive about this narcissistic becoming Woman in jouissance, something exemplified by St. Theresa:

     

    As for Saint Theresa–you only have to go and look at Bernini’s statue in Rome to understand immediately that she’s coming, there is no doubt about it. And what is her jouissance, her coming from? It is clear that the essential testimony of the mystics is that they are experiencing it but know nothing about it. (Lacan, Feminine Sexuality 147)

     

    This theme of unself-consciousness is crucial–one cannot have jouissanceas well as self-reflexivity about knowledge. Lacan writes,

     

    There is a jouissance proper to her, to this “her” which does not exist and which signifies nothing. There is a jouissance proper to her and of which she herself may know nothing, except that she experiences it–that much she does know…. The woman can love in the man only the way in which he faces the knowledge he souls for. But as for the knowledge by which he is, we can only ask this question if we grant that there is something, jouissance, which makes it impossible to tell whether the woman can say anything about it–whether she can say what she knows of it. (Feminine Sexuality 144-45, 159)

     

    I bring up this point about unself-reflexivity to suggest why the filmmaker instinctively insists on Baines’s illiteracy, his “oafishness”–to employ the terms of Ada’s initial reaction to him. It is precisely because he makes no pretense to knowledge, mastery, control, understanding, and power, because he does not question Ada’s own deliberate self-silencing and self-disempowerment, that Ada finds the route to her own jouissance through him, and he through her. Through the operation of das Ding, they both “[come] to desire death” as Lacan puts it (Seminar VII 83). Ada, too, renounces knowledge in favor of the delicious surrender to the possibility of jouissance (most explicitly when faced with the prospect of drowning). Ada and Baines are thus linked in their renunciation of self-reflexivity: their “non-knowledge or even… anti-knowledge” is in fact an epistemological vel, just as there is a vel between meaning and being.20 It could be argued that both Ada and Baines choose “being” over “meaning,” just as they seek jouissance over desire. But the point about non-knowledge must not be precipitated into a question merely of feminist resistance.

     

    For Mary Ann Doane, ultimately, “the question is why the woman must always carry the burden of the philosophical demonstration, why she must be the one to figure truth, dissimulation, jouissance, untruth, the abyss, etc., why she is the support of these tropological systems–even and especially anti-metaphysical or anti-humanistic systems” (Femmes Fatales 74). Thus for Doane, but not for me, the issue is a matter of a return of the look:

     

    Usually, the placement of a veil over a woman’s face works to localize and hence contain dissimulation, to keep it from contaminating the male subject. But how can we imagine, conceive her look back? Everything would become woven, narrativized, dissimulation. Derrida envies that look [and, as Doane suggests, Lacan as well: c.f. Lacan’s “invidia“]…. It would be preferable to disentangle the woman and the veil, to tell another story. As soon as the dichotomy between the visible as guarantee and the visible as inherently destabilized, between truth and appearance, is mapped onto sexual difference, the woman is idealized, whether as undecidability or jouissance. The necessary incompletion or failure of the attempt to leave behind the terms of such a problematic is revealed in the symptomatic role of the woman, who takes up the slack and becomes the object of a desire which reflects the lack that haunts theory. (75; emphasis added)

     

    Placing the emphasis elsewhere, I suggest that at least in courtly love, which I am treating without evaluative prejudice as a rarefied and “purified” form of love as such, the idealization of the woman as Lady is not the real issue. Certainly the Lady in courtly love is idealized, elevated to sublimity as das Ding. But the “completion” of love occurs in the real, at the level of jouissance, for it is impossible in the actual.

     

    The Sublimated Lady and the Acephalous Subject

     

    Zizek cautions that it is not enough to rehearse commonplaces about the differences between the Lady of courtly love and actual women, and that it will not do to say merely that the Lady in courtly love “stands for the man’s narcissistic projection which involves the mortification of the actual, flesh-and-blood woman.” Instead, he says, we must address the larger question about narcissism: “where does that empty surface come from, that cold, neutral screen which opens up the space for possible projections? That is to say, if we are to project onto the mirror our narcissistic ideal, the mute mirror-surface must already be there. This surface functions as a kind of ‘black hole’ in reality, as a limit whose Beyond is inaccessible” (97).

     

    The Lady of courtly love is idealized; indeed she is idealized away, beyond the point of sexual consummation. She functions as das Ding that covers the hole in the real. But in the real she allows the courtly lover, the chevalier or knight, a kind of jouissance that is beyond phallic jouissance. But it is available only to an acephalous subject, or a subject who is not construed as a desiring subject. Perhaps it would be useful to specify further the nature of that idealization and that acephalousness. As Fink writes:

     

    What Lacan comes to see in the later stage of his work is that the unconscious desire is not the radical, revolutionary force he once believed it to be. Desire is subservient to the law! What the law prohibits, desire seeks. It seeks only transgression, and that makes desire entirely dependent on the law (that is, the Other) that brings it into being… we can say that desire remains inscribed… within the Other, while the subject is someThing else [sic]. (“Desire and the Drives” 37)

     

    What is that “someThing else”? How can it escape the ambit of the Other, the law? Fink traces the shift in Lacan’s thinking from conceiving the subject as/of Demand to the subject as/of desire to, in the late stage, the subject as/of drive. The significance of this is that the desiring subject, not to speak of the subject of Demand, is blocked from enjoyment or jouissance precisely by that desire, which is always the desire of the Other (38, 39). When the subject is conceptualized as drive, there opens up, in this almost utopian move, the theoretical possibility of the pursuit of satisfaction: “Subjugated first by the Other’s demands and then by the Other’s desire, the drive is finally freed to pursue object a” (39). This subject, constituted after the traversal of fantasy, is the subject in the real, the acephalous subject as drive. I am suggesting that Baines, though admittedly he may be no great prize, embodies (if that’s the word) such a subjectivity. He is motivated not to seek the aim of his desire, but to pursue his enjoyment, or jouissance. First, however, he must go beyond the petty narcissism of the subject as desiring.

     

    Lacan speaks of a “something that in its subsistence appears as possessing the character of a beyond of the sacred–something that we are precisely trying to identify in its most general form by the term, the Thing. I would say it is primitive subsistence viewed from the perspective of the Thing” (Seminar VII 140). This is what Baines is after. It is a something else, something not violent but violence’s contradiction in him, that Ada recognizes as basic to his being, and it is that something else which she finds it possible to respond to, to yield to. Is there not a certain receptivity in Baines that allows her to make nearly arbitrary demands on him, like the Lady of courtly love, and does not Baines on occasion ostentatiously present himself as submitting to these (unspoken?) demands quite readily? This helps explain also the nature of the compact Ada enters into with Baines. But why bother with getting married if bourgeois marriage is not really the source of the deepest satisfaction for either of them? Why construct a barrier to the real satisfaction?

     

    The Construction of Obstacles to Love as Aids to the Metaphor of Love

     

    For Lacan, courtly love is “an altogether refined way of making up for the absence of sexual relation by pretending that it is we who put an obstacle to it. It is truly the most staggering thing that has ever been tried. But how can we expose its fraud?” (Feminine 141). We might emend this to, what is at stake for us in not exposing the fraud of what Lacan, following Aristotle, calls “Entasis” or obstacle (141)? The construction of the obstacle is self-protective on the part of the subject. Renata Salecl writes: “One of the greatest illusions of love is that prohibition and social codes prevent its realization. The illusionary character of this proposition is unveiled in every ‘self-help’ manual: the advice persons desperately in love usually get is to establish artificial barriers, prohibitions, and make themselves temporarily inaccessible in order to provoke their love object to return love” (179). The difference in The Piano is that the prohibitions and social codes preventing realization do double duty; in their case a prohibition is also constructed barring them from jouissance. As Zizek writes, to have power we must limit our access to power; “the impediment that prevents the full realization of love is internal” (“There Is No” 209). Baines demonstrates a degree of renunciation: to have ordinary love, the lovers must renounce complete love, must renounce jouissance, for as Zizek suggests through a pithy quotation from Edith Wharton, “I can’t love you unless I give you up” (qtd. in Zizek, 209). The reward Baines seeks is not the seduction of Ada, but access to jouissance through her, along the lines of courtly love. One could as well say that Baines engages in a certain psychic detour: as Lacan puts it, “The techniques involved in courtly love… are techniques of holding back, of suspension, of amor interruptus” (152).21

     

    Courtly love, at least, is not a wholesale seduction by the lure of love. It is emancipated, for instance, from the belief in complete reciprocity between lover and beloved. This is what Lacan means when he says in “God and the Jouissance of The Woman” that “in the case of the speaking being the relation between the sexes does not take place” (Feminine Sexuality 138). Similarly, the knight in courtly love is not a figure representing a delusion about the delusion we commonly call “love.” The knight seeks no cheap solace in keeping alive a hope that the Lady will actually enable him to achieve the sexual relation, which is already marked as impossible. The metaphor captured by the technically obsolete and limited social formation that goes by that name is a figure for the willed suspension of disbelief, and therefore a canny self-seduction into the uncanny: canny because it requires a recognition that those who presume to be non-duped about love do err, a recognition that the sexual relation is impossible, except in the real, but also that love does not have to be reciprocal precisely because it is not wholly within the ambit of desire.

     

    While Lacan says that there is no sexual relation and that love is a lure, Zizek reminds us that love is available as a metaphor. But what are the contours of this metaphor? In the first place if there is a reciprocity, it is a reciprocity within an asymmetry. In the first instance, the beloved (eromenos) turns, and in the turning becomes the loving one, the lover (erastes). But the complementary moment is that the subject himself (now) attains the status of “an answer of the real” (qtd. in Zizek, “Courtly Love” 105). The subject himself becomes the beloved of the beloved: but this reciprocity is not the real thing called love. It is a reciprocity within a more general asymmetry, for love remains unattainable: “the other sees something in me and wants something from me, but I cannot give him what I do not possess–or, as Lacan puts it, there is no relationship between what the loved one possesses and what the loving one lacks” (106). But the significance of this reversal is not to be obscured. Zizek observes that “although we have now two loving subjects instead of the initial duality of the loving one and the loved one, the asymmetry persists, since it was the object itself which as it were confessed to its lack by way of its subjectivization. There is something deeply embarrassing and truly scandalous in this reversal by means of which the mysterious, fascinating, elusive object of love discloses its deadlock and thus acquires the status of another subject” (106). But how do we understand this in the heuristic frame of courtly love?

     

    Again, Zizek explains that “in courtly love… the long-awaited moment of the highest fulfilment, called Gnade, mercy (rendered by the Lady to her servant), is neither the Lady’s surrender, her consent to the sexual act, nor some mysterious rite of initiation, but simply a sign of love from the side of the Lady, the ‘miracle’ of the fact that the Object answered, stretched its hand back to the supplicant” (“Courtly Love” 106). I would emphasize that it is only a sign, not a performative act of love, and it may well be a fantasy projected by the knight. It is not a reciprocal act of love; there is no sexual relation, except “in the real.” It is in this nonreciprocity that Baines’s love is most pure, and the relationship between Ada and Baines is by the same token least compelling when it degenerates into mere “reciprocal” domesticity. In his purest moments, furthermore, Baines wants not so much to love Ada as to be loved, to be looked at. Baines, as I have said, seeks in fact to take the place of the Woman under erasure, not merely to admire and love the Lady. Reciprocity indeed has little to do with it.

     

    Salecl notes that in Plato’s Symposium, Socrates deliberately declines Alcibiades’ “courting” (203) and denies his own elevation as the loved one because, as Lacan points out in Le transfert, for Socrates, “there is nothing in himself worthy of love. His essence was that ouden, emptiness, hollowness” (qtd. in Salecl 203). If I follow Salecl’s line of reasoning, Socrates’ declining of the elevation to the status of the loved one is a denial of “agalma”–the “something” precious that Alcibiades asks for “without knowing what it is” (Lacan, Four Fundamental 255) or even presumably without knowing that he is asking for it.22 Salecl writes that “Socrates’s denial is a denial too of the discourse of the Master in preference for the discourse of the Analyst. It is in courtly love that this agalma, this “someThing else” exists, the thing that Baines and Ada seek without knowing what it is. As Holly Hunter, who plays Ada, recognized from the outset, the script had “one ingredient that almost every script I read does not have: a vast dimension of things being unexplained to the audience or even to the characters themselves–and that’s just a real haunting part of the story, very, very haunting” (qtd. in Bilborough 149). Salecl adds helpfully,

     

    One can ask whether Socrates does not act in a similar way to the lady in courtly love when she also constantly refuses to return love. It can be said that both Socrates and the lady occupy the same place–both are objects of unfulfilled love. However, the function that they perform at this place is different. The lady is the master who constantly imposes on her admirer new duties and keeps him on a string by hinting that sometime in the future she might show him some mercy. Socrates, on the other hand, refuses the position of master. With his refusal Socrates points to the emptiness of the object of love, while the lady believes that there is in herself something worthy of love. That is why she puts herself in the position of the Master (S1), from which she capriciously gives orders. Socrates opposes this attitude altogether and does not want to encourage false hope. (203, n. 53)

     

    In a subsequent note, Salecl continues this thread:

     

    Socrates’s position is similar to that of the analyst, since both of them occupy the position of the object a and try to “keep that nothingness,” emptiness, the traumatic and horrifying nature of the object. Putting oneself in the position of the object accounts for the fact that the subject is not represented by any signifier–what we have here, is therefore the subject as pure emptiness. The analyst is not a Master whom the analysand would identify with and who would impose duties on the subject. By occupying the place of the object, the analyst enables the subject to find the truth about his or her desire. (207, n. 55)

     

    I agree with Salecl that in courtly love the Lady’s discourse is the discourse of the Master and Socrates’ that of the analyst. But my disagreement with Salecl is on the following grounds: I would suggest that the courtly lover–André’s knight–enters the “contract” of courtly love in the full recognition that the Lady’s “mercy” is always already deferred; the object is always already suffused with différance. That is, as I have argued, precisely the essence of courtly love. The knight knows that the Lady is elevated precisely because she is inaccessible. She is not the object of a lovelorn romantic lover. Furthermore, I believe we must also emend Salecl’s argument that “With his refusal Socrates points to the emptiness of the object of love, while the lady believes that there is in herself something worthy of love. That is why she puts herself in the position of the Master (S1), from which she capriciously gives orders” (203). In fact, even if the lady does “believe” anything, her belief is irrelevant; the lady who “believes” is in some sense not the Lady who is elevated to the level of the Real, to the level at which God has jouissance. Woman as mystic does not “know,” as Lacan himself recognizes.

     

    Conclusion

     

    The Anamorphic Inamorata is sublimated, therefore, in the following manner. In the first place, the Object is elevated to the status of das Ding but remains only a “stand-in” for the Thing. Second, it is both spatially and temporally anamorphotic: it can only be viewed from an oblique perspective, although it transforms the experience of the whole; and it is susceptible to a perpetual deferral–as Zizek writes, “the Object is attainable only by way of an incessant postponement, as its absent point-of-reference” (“Courtly” 101). As Zizek himself says, “‘sublimation’ occurs when an object, part of everyday reality, finds itself at the place of the impossible Thing. Therein consists the function of artificial obstacles which all of a sudden hinder our access to some ordinary object: they elevate the object into a stand-in for the Thing” (101). Similarly, Salecl writes that “what love as a demand targets in the other is… the object in him or herself, the Real, the nonsymbolizable kernel around which the subject organizes his or her desire. What gives to the beloved his or her dignity, what leads the loving subject to the survalorization of the beloved, is the presence of the object in him or her” (192). The object is what plugs the lack in the Other, and it is in these terms, Salecl tells us, that we can differentiate the two relations of the subject to this object. Used as a plug or stopper, the object “renders invisible” the lack in the Other–this is the function of the object in romantic love. But in sublimationwe encounter

     

    a circulation around the object that never touches its core. Sublimation is not a form of romantic love kept alive by the endless striving for the inaccessible love object. In sublimation, the subject confronts the horrifying dimension of the object, the object as das Ding, the traumatic foreign body in the symbolic structure. Sublimation circles around the object, it is driven by the fact that the object can never be reached because of its impossible, horrifying nature. Whereas romantic love strives to enjoy the Whole of the Other, of the partner, the true sublime love renounces, since it is well aware that we can [as Lacan puts it in Seminar XX] “only enjoy a part of the body of the Other…. That is why we are limited in this to a little contact, to touch only the forearm or whatever else–ouch!” (Salecl 193)

     

    Salecl notes that such a sublimation is “well exemplified” in The Piano. But where is the true renunciation in The Piano? My argument about The Piano is rather different from Salecl’s. First, we need to be clear about the vectors of renunciation, which indeed doesplay an important role in courtly love. Here Baines’s “sublimation” of Ada is not a spiritualizing, chaste adoration; nor is it a matter of desiring sex with the “ideal mate.” As Zizek observes, the sublimated Lady “is in no way a warm, compassionate, understanding fellow-creature” (95).

     

    Sublimation as renunciation can take two trajectories: the first is an Aristotelian renunciation: Aristotle says in the Nicomachean Ethics that “most people seem… to wish to be loved rather than to love” (482). And loving someone means in fact wishing the loved one well, rather than merely desiring that the look of love is returned by the loved person, or that, as Zizek puts it, the hand of love is extended by the loved one to the loving one. The Aristotelian renunciation is the renunciation of the wish to be loved as object of romantic affection, which is, in one sense, no more than a fetish covering over the “someThing else.” The second renunciation is the willed suspension of reciprocity: here the loving one is like the knight or the mystic, or indeed Woman–there may not be a noble love here, but there is a one-way jouissance that is precisely not constrained by phallic jouissance. It does not require a response from the loved one, indeed the loved one (God) is reduced to an idiotic (to exploit the etymological connection with idios, meaning private, own, peculiar to one’s own universe) construct, an “as if.”

     

    The model of the courtly lover’s elevation of the Lady and of his accompanying self-abnegation is only half the story–it only marks once again the failure of mortal love. The interest of courtly love is that there is an excess, a jouissance, which theoretically the knight or courtly lover could access. What Baines wants is the gaze as jouissance, an intense form of auto-erotism, defined as the turning away of sexuality “from its natural object” and its “find[ing] itself delivered over to phantasy” (Laplanche and Pontalis 46); it is not just a question of Baines’s “desire… for her desire,” as Gillett formulates it (282). For Gillett, the iconic moment is the one in which Ada kisses her own mirrored reflection as a rejection of her husband and a preference for auto-eroticism. But Gillett fails to clarify that there are two trajectories of auto-eroticism–Baines’s as well as Ada’s. In a similar undertheorization, Gordon, following Bruzzi, reads Baines as a “masochistic male” subject whose “desire” merely “mirrors” Ada’s and “is constituted in the staging of the non-reciprocity of desire” (199). Thus,

     

    Masochistic male desire… is also part of a logic of recuperation where the impossibility of desire’s absent object can be substituted. Here, it is the woman’s desire that stands in for the return on the man’s. The question of the woman’s desire, then, continually shifts from the proximity of the object to its absolute alienation. Indeed, auto-erotism similarly teeters on the brink of masochism proper, and ultimately suicide. The scene of the lips that kiss themselves, then, circumscribes precisely the mutual association of danger and enablement that complicates, and makes especially apposite, the relation of auto-erotism to The Piano. (199)

     

    This analysis is too simple. Baines is like the courtly lover whose aim may be the Lady, but whose goal really is the jouissance of the Woman under erasure. It is not the flesh of the Lady/Ada that is desired, but the “body” of the Woman under erasure–this is the focus of Baines’s masochism, as again André makes plain: “The man who lets himself be humiliated, insulted, whipped by his associate seeks in reality to take the place of the woman” (99)–the woman being analogous to the Woman under erasure, not the Lady of courtly love in this instance, and the masochism being largely a matter of discursive enunciation or emotional disposition.23 As masochist, Baines is not simply interested in loving Ada, but in discovering the conditions of his own enjoyment, in a nonreciprocal way, beyond sexual intercourse. The masochist’s question is about an enjoyment beyond. Thus, André continues, “The question that the masochist puts to the test through his practice is that of knowing what is experienced by the body that the other enjoys through whiplashes or signifiers: does this body enjoy as well? and does it enjoy beyond what is provided by the instrument that marks him?” (100). As Lacan himself writes in Television, “a woman only encounters Man (l’homme) in psychosis…. She is a party to the perversion which is, I maintain, Man’s” (40).

     

    Furthermore, there is a way in which the masochistic man “manifests something on the order of a feminine position: it is his position as subject that is feminine…. The sense of the expression ‘feminine masochism’ is… not that woman is masochistic, but really that the masochist is woman or tries hard to be one” (André 101; emphasis added). Finally, we can see why Baines’s feminization, his crossover sexuality, and his hybridized postcolonial interpellation as subject are the key to his eroticization–he is Woman under erasure, but he also displaces whiteness as a postcolonial subject. His relationship with Ada conforms to a model of courtly love. It is only courtly love’s anamorphosis that enables Baines and Ada to say to each other, “I love in you something more than you.”

     

    One could therefore propose that the usefulness of the category of courtly love is that it allows us to see the relationship in terms of the psychoanalytic model of Lacan’s formulae of sexuation, which more fully addresses the unconscious or phantasmatic motivations of Baines and Ada. It is in this connection that an ambiguity in André’s argument about the meaning of wanting to enjoy as Woman emerges. God is the sexed real Other because in the real there is a sexual relation, whereas in the case of the divided subject of desire there is not. One possible outcome of the constellation of positions presented in Lacan’s formulae of sexuation is that it is possible that the knight’s Lady is analogous to the Woman under erasure, in that they are both idealized (and the Woman is under erasure because she is–in Lacanian terms–not the ordinary, divided subject). I think the more likely analogy is that the knight himself is, to some extent, similar to the Woman under erasure, for his fantasmatic relation to the Lady is like that of the Woman who has a fantasmatic relation to God. The knight and the Woman (the reference of course is not to any actual biological female) are isomorphically disposed toward das Ding and God the Other in the real. Das Ding, the Thing, is that absent or “excluded” center around which “the subjective world of the unconscious [is] organized in a series of signifying relations” (Lacan, Seminar VII 71). Appropriating the language of Paul’s Epistle to the Romans, Lacan implies that the Thing is that which the Law forbids and makes desirable to the point of self-annihilation: “the Thing finds a way by producing in me all kinds of covetousness thanks to the commandment, for without the Law the Thing is dead. But even without the Law, I was once alive. But when the commandment appeared, the Thing flared up, returned once again, I met my death…. Through it I came to desire death” (83).

     

    I contend therefore that the knight in courtly love can be installed in the place of the Woman under erasure. The knight is thus also beyond phallic jouissance,24 and since the knight elevates the Lady to the place of das Ding, the jouissance of speech displaces phallic jouissance, although as we have seen, the jouissance of speech fails relative to the jouissance of being (André 89). In courtly love, the knight is disposed to the Lady in a relationship where he enjoys a sexual relation that is unavailable in ordinary sex. The knight, prototype for Baines, seeks the enjoyment enjoyed by the Woman in the real. This Woman under erasure enjoys jouissance with God in the real (this God is “sexed” so that a “real sexual relation” is “completed” again in the real as it could never be in sex). Finally, there is an analogous relation in the real between “the subject” and “the body” (which in André’s phrase has a real sexed consistency), but the relation between subject and body is cleaved by language, since the subject is only the subject of a signifier. The film approximates this schema in that Baines elevates (“sublimates”) Ada to the position of the Lady of courtly love, while he himself is structurally in the discursive site, the place of the Woman under erasure. I maintain that Baines and Ada seek the experience of sexuality as satisfaction of the drive, beyond the “actual lived body,” but this point requires some clarification.

     

    For the later Lacan, Fink reminds us, in the subject who has traversed his fundamental fantasy to live out the drive, “desire stops inhibiting the subject from obtaining satisfaction,” although desire is also a needed defence against jouissance (“Desire and the Drives” 41, 43). This subject has evolved from a relation to demand to a relation to a partial object of the drive–ultimately the death drive. No longer identified with unconscious desire but with satisfaction, he becomes an acephalous subject with head enough to heed “symbolic constraints” in order to manage jouissance (to have protection and pleasure, and protection of pleasure) (Fink, Clinical 208). Ada and Baines, like courtly lovers, manage their inhuman love by acquiescing to bourgeois domesticity as symbolic constraint but simultaneously preserve perversion, as if to say with Lacan that they seek “something in you more than you.” This acquiescence is a kind of complicated masquerade: Baines masquerades as a man, while Ada masquerades femininity, although in fact she (and Baines to some extent) are really seeking to be in the place of Woman.25

     

    Ada manages her approach to the impossible Thing not by the process of sublimation described by Zizek as the erection of artificial obstacles that “hinder our access to some ordinary object: they elevate the object into a stand-in” for das Ding (101). For Ada, the Thing is not sublimated but sublated by the ordinary stand-in of the edifice of heteronormativity itself. The film stages this in cutting from the scene of their new domestic bliss to Ada’s re-memoration, as Toni Morrison might put it, of the encounter with das Ding: “At night I think of my piano in its ocean grave and sometimes myself floating above it. Down there everything is so still and silent it lulls me to sleep. It is a weird lullaby. And so it is. It is mine.” Ada eroticizes the negative, das Ding. And Campion’s final image of Ada is of the perfection of a kind of inhuman love, or jouissance: “Ada’s piano on the sea bed… Above floats Ada, her hair and arms stretched out in a gesture of surrender, her body slowly turning on the end of the rope. The seaweed’s rust-coloured fronds reach out to touch her” (Campion 122). Ada’s unusual satisfaction approximates Lacan’s idea, in Four Fundamental Concepts, phrased as a rhetorical question: “Is there no satisfaction in being under the gaze?” (75). In the gaze, the subject experiences an extreme pleasure (jouissance) precisely through an aphanisis or desubjectivation, when the subject’s pleasure comes from filling a lack in the Other. Baines functions merely as a stand-in for the Other, for whom Ada is also an object. Ada takes some erotic satisfaction, of course, from Baines’s erotic satisfaction; but her jouissance lies elsewhere, in her own desubjectivation.

     

    This is the secret of this perverse couple’s ec-static relationship: something other than human love, and it is thus that Ada and Baines hold the Thing at bay, recognizing that humankind cannot bear very much Lacanian “reality,” and that the other satisfaction each seeks is agalma if kept at a ritualized distance but turns monstrous if approached too closely. The Piano, then, is an exemplary if not fully self-conscious staging of the dialectic between erotic attachment and de-tachment, sublimation and sublation, desubjectivation and subjectification–a dialectic that must remain unresolved.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The ambition is evident even in the sequences that appear close to the beginning of the film, such as when Ada McGrath, the protagonist, plays on the beach in New Zealand–sequences which Campion edits, as Kirsten Thompson notes,

     

    with alternating close ups of Ada, medium shots of [her lover-to-be] Baines, and full shots of her daughter [Flora]. The dominant impression is one of movement, accentuated by Campion’s constant use of camera movement within shots, mimicked through the visual arc Baines paces around Ada, and echoed in the lyrical movements of her daughter’s ballet…. The final shot of this central sequence is a crane shot showing the three in long shot, mother and daughter walking off together, with Baines slowly joining the two ahead. Their footprints in the sand form a triangle, counterpointed by the spiral swirls of Flora’s seahorse sculpture. This graphic patterning allegorically foreshadows the future narrative formation of this particular family. (69)

     

    2. And this is not a purely gratuitous homage, for as in Hitchcock’s film, the close-up of the hair functions as a visual metaphor for the vertigo of the core mystery the film wants to plumb: what Ada wants.

     

    3. Brooks, as Prasad points out, theorized not only the characteristically hyperbolic gesture of melodrama and its signature melody (melos), but also the muting or suppression of the protagonist.

     

    4. I consistently speak of desire and drive as being discrete but also as part of the same dynamic circuit. This reading of the continuity of desire and drive is, I believe, faithful to Lacan. Bruce Fink makes this continuity clear.

     

    5. It need hardly be said that my approach in no way disparages a viable feminist approach or denies the importance of the film’s representation (Darstellung) of dissident femininity. Nor do I wish to deprecate the fascination of the (albeit negative) expression of feminine agency in the film. I would, however, like to consider briefly one example of how a reading that almost exclusively privileges a critical focus on the feminine can prove inadequate in the case of this film. Indeed, it is significant that not only are women’s spaces separated from and valorized above masculine spaces (the male sphere of action), but there are also differentiations among the women in the film, even differentiations among the white women in terms of class and age, not to mention differentiations between white women and Maori women in terms of culture versus nature. But such a reading leads Dyson, for instance, to the misleadingly underdetermined conclusion that “While never relinquishing his whiteness, [Baines] is able to arouse Ada’s passions because he is closer to nature than Stewart” (271). The misled viewer/reader, if she or he follows this line of reasoning, is then drawn into an extremely narrow understanding of the erotic dimensions of the film (which are in themselves admittedly crucial here). We are told that although Baines is a “member of the lower orders–in an early scene Ada describes him as an ‘oaf’ because he is illiterate”–Baines’s “baseness is constructed through the eroticization of his body” (271), as if Baines’s own erotic imagination were never an issue. My reading seeks in part to restore precisely this issue to its rightful importance, at least so that we can better understand what makes the relationship between the two principals so undeniably riveting–and I do so precisely by complicating the eroticization of Baines’s “body,” something which is inadequately articulated by Dyson and other critics even when they notice or thematize that body. Even a feminist analysis of the film, I would also insist, ought to do justice to the complex and subtle relay of the sexual and the sociopolitical vectors that define Baines’s place between pakeha and Maori positionalities: especially, it ought not to ignore the problematization of colonial masculinity.

     

    6. Zizek, as well as scholars such as Jean Clavreul, emphasize the conceptual importance of the perverse couple. He writes, “history has to be read retroactively: the anatomy of man offers the key to the anatomy of ape, as Marx puts it. It is only the emergence of masochism, of the masochistic couple, towards the end of the last century, which enables us to grasp the libidinal economy of courtly love” (“Courtly Love” 95).

     

    7. Pace Stella Bruzzi’s too-sweeping assertion that “our look is most emphatically not aligned with Stewart’s” as we watch Baines and Ada making love (262), I would argue that we are congruently situated with Stewart. That is, we are almost caught, at least for a moment, in the position of identification with Stewart, although of course the audience must subsequently reject any identification with this voyeuristic or fetishistic position. In the scene where Stewart discovers what Ada has been doing instead of giving Baines piano lessons, the director goes to extreme lengths to portray him in a degrading act of voyeurism. As he watches Baines kneel before Ada, his face buried under her skirt, he doesn’t notice that Baines’s dog is licking his palm. Stewart then crawls under the floorboards, positioning himself the better to experience their lovemaking vicariously.

     

    Could this be seen as the film’s way of juxtaposing and contrasting ordinary heterosexual desire with an other economy of love? The effectiveness of the mise en scène is precisely that first there must be an identification before there can be this element of renunciation of the male voyeur position in which the audience shares, an experience of a renunciation analogous to Baines’s performative: a relinquishment of unambivalent masculinity, of pure whiteness, of the former colonizer’s presumed superiority. Stewart “watches” Baines and Ada making love because he himself wants to be where Baines is; he is condemned forever to watching Ada as a husband who cannot himself enjoy her but must fantasize such a scene with someone in his (Stewart’s) “rightful” place. Thus one can conclude that ultimately the point of the audience’s initial, momentary structural identification with Stewart, followed immediately by a rejection of emotional identification, is to defamiliarize the masculine or phallic position. Such a defamiliarization is consistent with the defamiliarization of colonial masculinity effected by Baines. In saying this, I acknowledge the possibility that the very feminization could be yet another masculinist turn. But it is precisely because the renunciation of an unambivalent masculinity has a fundamental and fantasmatic dimension–it is not just an act–that this possibility seems remote.

     

    8. The “ethical” here is Lacan’s almost catachrestic conception of ethics, which has very little of the Kantian “ought.” He speaks rather of the knotting of moral questions with the fatal attraction of transgression (Seminar VII 2), tied to the death instinct. Glossing Freud, Lacan explains that “that ‘I’ which is supposed to come to be where ‘it’ was… is nothing more than that whose root we already found in the ‘I’ which asks itself what it wants” (7). The transgressive subject is finally able to ask the question of its deepest satisfaction, when the drive functions according to the classic formula, “Wo es war soll Ich werden.

     

    In other words, subjectivation beyond divided subjectivity is made possible by a freeing of the drive, a transgression enabling the subject to enjoy an “other jouissance” than phallic jouissance. The distinction between two kinds of jouissance maps onto the crucial (dis)articulation of drive and desire. It is desire that, according to the Lacanian ethical credo, the subject must not cede. Since drive is anterior to the advent of the divided subject, the drive is also amoral, exorbitant to the ethical. To privilege a subjectivation beyond divided subjectivity (as the subject of the drive able to enjoy the other jouissance) is therefore a post-ethical position.

     

    The post-ethical imperative confronts the subject who would enjoy the other jouissance with two alternatives. The first is death. The second is transgression, the attraction of which is that it promises an other jouissance, but which requires a certain brinkmanship or management of jouissance. This is encapsulated in the Lacanian misprision of the paradigm of courtly love. While it implies an irresolvable dialectic, the attraction of transgression need not be forsaken, as I argue in this rereading of Campion’s film.

     

    9. “The Piano literalizes the woman’s castration,” as Suzy Gordon notes, in presenting Ada’s chopped finger as “a prosthetic substitute and an actual bodily lack (‘visible’ because invisible)”–a lack that constitutes the subject (Gordon calls it “identity,” wrongly, in my opinion). But “it does so simultaneously with an insistence on the trauma of male subjectivity, the impotency of which serves to conceal the violence of the colonial encounter” (201). This is too linear a reading of colonial masculinity, in my view, rendering Campion’s impulse to put masculinity in question too flatly, as though the only interest one ought to take in this problematizing of masculinity were to critique and then dispose of the category of masculinity, presumably to focus on the really important issue of femininity. The film certainly does not “conceal the violence of the colonial encounter,” but rather emphasizes it and articulates it as an element of the overdetermined problematization of postcolonial masculinity in the film.

     

    10. The only place in The Four Fundamental Concepts where Lacan presents himself explicitly in the mode of desiring to be looked at is in the episode of the sardine can that looks at him. This is a moment of a curious loss of energy, a near dissolution. Lacan’s rhetoric is more “feminine” here than anywhere else. My contention is that in The Piano this wished “looked at-ness” is Baines’s essential position.

     

    11. With Slavoj Zizek, I would argue that the paradigm of courtly love remains a powerful one for understanding the continuing, even increasing, charisma of and public attraction to icons such as Marilyn Monroe, the Kennedys, Lady Diana, and even Ronald Reagan, not to mention Bill Clinton. This is in spite of and to some extent because of their peccadilloes and failings as ordinary mortals. The metaphor of love encapsulated in the formulae of courtly love helps to explain how these figures maintain their charisma precisely because they are unlike the people with whom we ordinarily find ourselves able to conceive a reciprocal romantic attachment. They are not sexual objects for us even though the scaffolding of our relationships to these public figures may involve the structure of our erotic projection or libidinal investment in them. While “courtly love has remained an enigma,” as Lacan writes,

     

    Instead of wavering over the paradox that courtly love appeared in the age of feudalism, the materialists should see this as a magnificent opportunity for showing how, on the contrary, it is rooted in the discourse of fealty, of fidelity to the person. In the last resort, the person is always the discourse of the master. For the man, whose lady was entirely, in the most servile sense of the term, his female subject, courtly love is the only way of coming off elegantly from the absence of sexual relation. (Feminine Sexuality 156, 141)

    We should perhaps insist that there is more at stake for the man than for the woman. Lacan also writes that “what it is all about is the fact that love is impossible, and that the sexual relation founders in non-sense, not that this should in any way diminish the interest we feel for the Other” (Feminine 158). “Ultimately,” he says, “the question is to know, in whatever it is that constitutes feminine jouissance where it is not all taken up by the man–and I would even say that feminine jouissance as such is not taken up by him at all–the question is to know where her knowledge is at” (158).

    Lacan asks the question of what purpose is served by the jouissance of the body if there is in fact no sexual relation (Feminine 143). His answer is that “short of castration, that is, short of something which says no to the phallic function, man has no chance of enjoying the body of the woman, in other words, of making love”:

     

    Contrary to what Freud argues, it is the man–by which I mean he who finds himself male without knowing what to do about it, for all that he is a speaking being–who takes on the woman, or who can believe he takes her on…. Except that what he takes on is the cause of his desire, the cause I have designated as the objet a. That is the act of love. To make love, as the term indicates, is poetry. Only there is a world between poetry and the act. The act of love is the polymorphous perversion of the male, in the case of the speaking being. (143)

     

    12. See Suzy Gordon, Stella Bruzzi, Sue Gillett, and Lynda Dyson.

     

    13. One could say then that the film poses an ethics of relinquishment as the radical alternative to these positions of privilege and power through the figure of Baines as well. Of course, this ethics of relinquishment is explicit in the case of Ada, who has relinquished speaking as a kind of ethical withdrawal. One could also suggest that Ada enacts a renunciation in accord with Lacan’s suggestion, in Television, that women are to be credited with an even more quotidian renunciation or accommodation, “to the point where there is no limit to the concessions made by any woman for a man: of her body, her soul, her possessions” (44). Women renounce Man so that their man “remains a man” (André 103). This is why Lacan can say that “some ingrates” cease to recognize her ethical position, even her generosity (Television 44). But one could also argue that both Ada and Baines also aim to relinquish “speaking being” in favor of the Other jouissance, in Lacanian terms.

     

    14. Marx writes,

     

    Although monogamy was the only known form of the family out of which modern sex love could develop, it does not follow that this love developed within it exclusively, or even predominantly, as the mutual love of man and wife. The whole nature of strict monogamian marriage under male domination ruled this out. Among all historically active classes, that is, among all ruling classes, matrimony remained what it had been since pairing marriage–a matter of convenience arranged by the parents. And the first form of sex love that historically emerges as a passion, and as a passion in which any person (at least of the ruling classes) has a right to indulge, as the highest form of the sexual impulse–which is precisely its specific feature–this, its first form, the chivalrous love of the Middle Ages, was by no means conjugal love. On the contrary, in its classical form, among the Provencals, it steers under full sail towards adultery, the praises of which are sung by their poets. (233)

     

    15. Lacan notes that here he is returning to the notion of “the jouissance on which that other satisfaction depends, the one that is based on language” (Seminar XX 51).

     

    16. See also Lacan’s Four Fundamental Concepts (273).

     

    17. Harvey Keitel conceives of the character he plays in the film as a masochist in Freud’s sense; masochist fanstasies “place the subject in a characteristically female situation” (Freud 124). André cites a passage from Pierre Klossowski’s Sade My Neighbor to the effect that the pervert (masochist) seeks to enjoy the body of the victim of his sadistic torturer “in the subjective sense of the expression rather than in the objective sense”–by putting himself in the victim’s body and seeing his own body as foreign. André deduces from this that “the sadistic act, from this point of view, is supported by a masochistic fantasm” (99).

     

    18. The “tension between Woman and the Other,” André says,

     

    can be analyzed… as that of the relation of the subject to the body. The apprehension of the body by the subject reveals, in fact, the same polarities that we have identified regarding the Other: the place where the signifier is inscribed and as such exists and is identifiable as a being of signifiance, and on the other hand, as a real sexed consistency that is unnameable as such. This disjunction between the Other of desire, which exists, and the Other of jouissance, which does not exist, is thus reproduced at the level of the body. (93)

     

    19. As Zizek writes in “Courtly Love,”

     

    The Lady is… as far as possible from any kind of purified spirituality; she functions as an inhuman partner [and Lacan uses this very word] in the precise sense of a radical Otherness which is wholly incommensurable with our needs and desires; as such, she is simultaneously a kind of automaton, a machine which randomly utters meaningless demands. This coincidence of absolute, inscrutable Otherness and pure machine is what confers on the Lady her uncanny, monstrous character–the lady is the Other which is not our “fellow creature,” i.e., with whom no relationship of empathy is possible. This traumatic Otherness is what Lacan designates by the Freudian term das Ding, the Thing. The idealization of the Lady, her elevation to a spiritual, ethereal Ideal, is therefore to be conceived as a strictly secondary phenomenon, a narcissistic projection whose function is to render invisible her traumatic, intolerable dimension…. Deprived of every real substance, the Lady functions as a mirror onto which the subject projects his narcissistic ideal. (“Courtly” 96)

     

    20. Here it is not a question of a Nietzschean anti-hermeneutics of truth, as Mary Ann Doane describes it, where “woman” is veiled because she knows that there is no truth behind the veil of femininity (Femmes 57). While Luce Irigaray criticizes Nietzsche for contructing femininity as “the living support of all the staging/production of the world” and thus of masculinity, Jacques Derrida approves of Nietzsche’s anti-essentialist account, as Doane observes, quoting Derrida:

     

    There is no such thing as the essence of woman because woman averts, she is averted of herself…. And the philosophical discourse, blinded, founders on these shoals and is hurled down these depthless depths to its ruin. There is no such thing as the truth of woman, but it is because of that abyssal divergence of the truth, because that untruth is “truth.” Woman is but one name for that untruth of truth. (qtd. in Doane 58)

     

    Doane points out that Nietzsche’s woman induces in herself a state of innocence, of non-subjectivity. As Doane puts it, “The philosopher-voyeur sees quite well that the woman ‘closes her eyes to herself’ [Nietzsche’s phrase]. She does not know that she is deceiving or plan to deceive; conscious deception would be repellent to the man and quite dangerous. Rather, she intuits or ‘divines’ what the man needs–a belief in her innocence–and she becomes innocent. Closing her eyes to herself she becomes the pure construct of a philosophical gaze” (59). And “a woman is granted knowledge when she is old enough to become a man–which is to say, old enough to lose her dissembling appearance, her seductive power. And even then, it is a kind of ‘old wives[‘]’ knowledge, not, properly speaking, philosophical” (59). But as I understand it, if the woman is naive, the man is not so much sentimental as duped. The courtly lover is not a dupe in that sense. It is he who “becomes innocent” in courtly love. Neither is he just a lover of appearances. On the contrary, we see again how he comes, in his peculiar devotion, to occupy not the place of (old) women, or of women no longer invested in lending themselves to the uses of masculinity, but the place of the “jouissant” Woman. He can therefore afford to yield to the arbitrary whims of the Lady, for he is not just a man whose masculinity depends on the willed innocence of women, nor on a woman, on the other hand, whose very being depends on an illusion.

     

    21. Lacan tells us that the reward in the tradition of courtly love is the “strange rite, namely, reward, clemency, grace or Gnade, felicity” (146). The detour to jouissance is described in terms of asceticism as an “ethical function of eroticism”:

     

    It is an artificial and cunning organization of the signifier that lays down at a given moment the lines of a certain asceticism, and… the meaning we must attribute to the negotiation of the detour in the psychic economy. The detour in the psyche isn’t always designed to regulate the commerce between whatever is organized in the domain of the pleasure principle and whatever presents itself as the structure of reality. There are also detours and obstacles which are organized so as to make the domain of the vacuole stand out as such. What gets to be projected as such is a certain transgression of desire.

     

    And it is here that the ethical function of eroticism enters into play. Freudianism is in brief nothing but a perpetual allusion to the fecundity of eroticism in ethics, but it doesn’t formulate it as such. (152)

     

    22. This is presumably different from what Aristotle speaks about as the “attribute” (325) called “happiness,” that is to say, “something final and self sufficient, and… the end of action” (317); this “attribute” of happiness “belong[s] to the happy man” (322; see also 323-24, 529, 531). Rather, Alcibiades seeks something that answers the drive. This is to go beyond both the deontological and the teleolgical as Aristotle conceives them: what Alcibiades “seeks” is both a good in itself, for him, as well as a good that always defers its own ends. At the same time the demand of Alcibiades, insofar as its fantasmatic goal is a partial object ultimately responsive to the partial drive, cannot be reduced to mere selfishness. (Aristotle asks, “Do men love… the good, or what is good for them?” [472].) Nor for that matter can Alcibiades’s goal in loving be judged as a shortfall within a rationalistic calculus, what Aristotle points to as definitive of Man when he speaks of “an active life of the element that has a rational principle” (318; see also 315, 317).

     

    23. André usefully asks, “what distinction should be made between the two forms of cleavage that are implied by the perverse position and the feminine position?” This important question receives the following answer:

     

    In both cases, the subject sees itself divided between two sides: one where castration is recognized and subjectified, the other where it is neither recognized nor subjectified. In what does the nonrecognition (the denial) of castration by the pervert differ from a woman’s nonsubjectification (the not-all)? This question is equivalent to asking what logical distinction separates the two parts of the Lacanian table of sexuation. This table shows us indeed that on one side a cleavage is made between subjection to castration (.) and the negation of castration (.~), while on the other side, the cleavage operates between the affirmation of a partial nonsubjection (.~) and the negation of the negation of castration (~.~). The masochistic position, whatever it may have in common with the feminine position regarding its aim, thus remains distinct from it: it is only a caricature of it. This difference becomes more apparent if we note that the pervert himself believes in the Other, in the subjective jouissance of the Other, while a woman does not have to believe it–she simply finds herself in the place of where the question of the Other is formulated. For the masochist, the bar is never really inscribed on the Other and must, consequently, replay incessantly the scenario in which the Other receives this mark from his partner, while what woman attests to is actually the irremovable character of this bar–that is to say, the impossible subjectification of the body as Other. The pervert appears able to slide into the skin of this Other body like a hand into a glove; women themselves repeatedly say that this body does not fit them like a glove, that it is Other to them as well, and that the jouissance that can be produced here is foreign to them and is not subjectifiable. (101-2)

     

    24. We must acknowledge, as André cautions, that “Phallic jouissance should not be confused with what happens in the lovers’ bed–in any case it cannot be restricted to it. One of the fundamental revelations of the analytic experience consists in this recentering of the jouissance called sexual: its space is less the bed [lit] than the said [dit]. This is the reason why jouissance is repressed and unrecognized by the subject: jouissance does not even fulfill the requirement that the subject properly meet its partner in bed!” (90-91).

     

    25. See Joan Rivière’s “Womanliness as a Masquerade” and Mary Ann Doane’s “Film and the Masquerade: Theorizing the Female Spectator.”

    Works Cited

     

    • Allen, Richard. “Female Sexuality, Creativity, and Desire in The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 44-63.
    • André, Serge. “Otherness of the Body.” Lacanian Theory of Discourse: Subject, Structure, and Society. Ed. Mark Bracher, Marshall W. Alcorn, Ronald J. Corthell, and Françoise Massardier-Kennedy. New York: New York UP, 1994. 88-104.
    • Aristotle. Nicomachean Ethics. Introduction to Aristotle. Ed. Richard McKeon. New York: The Modern Library, n.d. [1947]. 308-543.
    • Barcan, Ruth, and Madeleine Fogarty. “Performing The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 3-18.
    • Bilborough, Milo. “The Making of The Piano.” Campion 135-53.
    • Bruzzi, Stella. “Tempestuous Petticoats: Costume and Desire in The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 257-266.
    • Brooks, Peter. The Melodramatic Imagination: Balzac, Henry James, Melodrama, and the Mode of Excess. New Haven: Yale UP, 1976.
    • Butler, Judith. Antigone’s Claim: Kinship Between Life and Death. New York: Columbia UP, 2000.
    • Campion, Jane. The Piano. New York: Hyperion, 1993.
    • Campion, Jane, and Kate Pullinger. The Piano: A Novel. New York: Miramax Books, 1994.
    • Coombs, Felicity. “In the Body of The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 82-96.
    • Coombs, Felicity, and Suzanne Gemmell, eds. Piano Lessons: Approaches to The Piano. Southern Screen Classics: 1. London: John Libbey, 1999.
    • Coombs, Felicity, and Suzanne Gemmell. “Preface.” Coombs and Gemmell vii-x.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. The Desire to Desire: The Woman’s Film of the 1940s. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1987.
    • —. Femmes Fatales: Feminism, Film Theory, Psychoanalysis. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • —. “Film and the Masquerade: Theorizing the Female Spectator.” Merck 227-243.
    • Dyson, Lynda. “The Return of the Repressed? Whiteness, Femininity and Colonialism in The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 267-287.
    • Fink, Bruce. A Clinical Introduction to Lacanian Psychoanalysis: Theory and Technique. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • —. “Desire and the Drives.” UMBR(a) 1 (1997): 35-51.
    • —. The Lacanian Subject: Between Language and Jouissance. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1995.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “The Economic Problem of Masochism.” The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Trans. J. Strachey. Vol. 19. London: Hogarth, 1924.
    • Gillett, Sue. “Lips and Fingers: Jane Campion’s The Piano.Screen 36.3 (Autumn 1995): 277-287.
    • Gordon, Suzy. “‘I Clipped Your Wing, That’s All:’ Auto-Erotism and the Female Spectator in The Piano Debate.” Screen 37. 2 (Summer 1996): 193-205.
    • Heath, Stephen. “Difference.” Merck 47-106.
    • Huyssen, Andreas. After the Great Divide. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1986.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Desire in Language: A Semiotic Approach to Literature and Art. Ed. Leon S. Roudiez. Trans. Thomas Gora, Alice Jardine, and Leon S. Roudiez. New York: Columbia UP, 1980.
    • Lacan, Jacques. Écrits: A Selection. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • —. Feminine Sexuality: Jacques Lacan and the École Freudienne. Ed. Juliet Mitchell and Jacqueline Rose. Trans. Jacqueline Rose. New York: Norton, 1982.
    • —. The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psycho-Analysis. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • —. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book VII: The Ethics of Psychoanalysis 1959-1960. Trans. Dennis Potter. New York: Norton, 1992.
    • —. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan, Book XX: Encore. Trans. Bruce Fink. New York: Norton, 1998.
    • —. Television: A Challenge to the Psychoanalytic Establishment. Ed. Joan Copjec. Trans. Denis Hollier, Rosalind Krauss, and Annette Michelson. New York: Norton, 1990.
    • Laplanche, Jean, and Jean-Bertrand Pontalis. The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    • Lowe, Donald M. The Body in Late-Capitalist USA. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. On Literature and Art. Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1978.
    • Merck, Mandy, ed. The Sexual Subject: A Screen Reader in Sexuality. London: Routledge, 1992.
    • Neill, Anna. “A Land Without a Past: Dreamtime and Nation in The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 136-147.
    • Orr, Bridget. “Birth of a Nation? From Utu to The Piano.” Coombs and Gemmell 148-160.
    • The Piano. Dir. Jane Campion. Perf. Holly Hunter and Harvey Keitel. Miramax: 1993.
    • Prasad, M. Madhava. Ideology of the Hindi Film: A Historical Construction. Delhi: Oxford UP, 1998.
    • Rivière, Joan. “Womanliness as a Masquerade.” Psychoanalysis and Female Sexuality. Ed. Hendrick M. Ruitenbeek. New Haven: College and University Press, 1966.
    • Robinson, Neil. “With Friends Like These, Who Needs Enemies?” Coombs and Gemmell 19-42.
    • Salecl, Renata. “I Can’t Love You Unless I Give You Up.” Gaze and Voice as Love Objects. Ed. Renata Salecl and Slavoj Zizek. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996. 179-207.
    • Shepherdson, Charles. “The Elements of the Drive.” UMBR(a) 1 (1997): 131-145.
    • Simmons, Laurence. “From Land Escape to Bodyscape: Images of the Land in The Piano. Coombs and Gemmell 122-135.
    • Thompson, Kirsten Moana. “The Sickness unto Death: Dislocated Gothic in a Minor Key.” Coombs and Gemmell 64-80.
    • Vasudevan, Ravi S. “Addressing the Spectator of a ‘Third World’ National Cinema: The Bombay ‘Social’ Film of the 1940s and 1950s.” Screen 36.4 (Winter 1995): 305-324.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “From Courtly Love to The Crying Game.New Left Review 202 (Nov./Dec. 1993): 95-108.
    • —. “There Is No Sexual Relationship.” Gaze and Voice as Love Objects. Ed. Renata Salecl and Slavoj Zizek. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996. 208-249.

     

  • Practical Politics at the Limits of Community: The Cases of Affirmative Action and Welfare

    Scott Michaelsen

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    smichael@pilot.msu.edu

     

    and

     

    Scott Cutler Shershow

    Department of English
    Miami University
    shershsc@muohio.edu

     

    As soon as, through the movement of those forces tending toward a break, revolution appears as something possible, with a possibility that is not abstract, but historically and concretely determined, then in those moments revolution has taken place.

     

    –Maurice Blanchot

    We are left with a simple command, and an infinite responsibility. Be just with Justice.

     

    –Drucilla Cornell

     

    This essay attempts to confront perhaps the most obvious and yet the most difficult challenge of radical social critique: the question of the practical. Both of its authors have been interested for many years in various modes of deconstruction and post-Marxism, and we have attempted, in our separate ways, to expose the limits not only of the historical discourses of economy and anthropology, but even of some of the cherished concepts of contemporary left-wing thought. But our work on multiculturalism, political economy, and cultural studies has brought us to the limit of our own critiques. At this limit, how does one say “yes” to the affirmative? How can we, in the words of the famous Marxist injunction, “prove the truth, that is, the reality and power, the this-sidedness” of our thinking in practice (Marx and Engels 144)?

     

    We thus respond here to two challenges. The first concerns the general perception in many circles that poststructuralist thought is either a form of quietism with no political consequences or a reactionary practice that easily slides into the anti-Semitisms and fascisms of Nazi-era Heidegger and deMan. Much recent work in the tradition of poststructuralist Marxism, including our own, has been attacked on one or the other of these grounds. To some, the work seems merely theoretical and thus utterly impractical. To others, even more seriously, the work seems counterproductive in its relentless critique of seemingly promising possibilities for political thought and action. In other words, poststructuralist and post-Marxist modes of theory are perceived as merely alternating between a scholastic cataloguing of utopian (im)possibilities, and a categorical rejection of all down-to-earth, practical-progressive thought. A great deal has been written in recent years attempting to disprove these views. One might mention, among others, Michael Ryan’s Marxism and Deconstruction: A Critical Articulation (1982), Drucilla Cornell’s Beyond Accommodations (1991; new edition 1999), Geoff Bennington’s Legislations (1996), Richard Beardsworth’s Derrida and the Political (1996), Chantel Mouffe’s The Democratic Paradox (2000), and Derrida’s own many recent writings on politics, including, most famously, Specters of Marx (1994), and his response to the critics of that book in Ghostly Demarcations (Sprinker ed. 1999). It must be admitted, however, that little of this work undertakes a deconstructive approach to particular instances of politico-economic decision-making (although Derrida’s writing on South Africa is one of several interesting exceptions).1 Our project here would be unimaginable without the rigorous work of these and many other contemporary theorists. But whatever its myriad achievements, none of this work has stilled the well-meaning voices that constantly interpose to it the belittling claims of brute practicality. All of us have frequently heard these voices: it is well and good, they say, to debate such things in a seminar room or an academic journal, but how will any of this help the refugees in Kosovo or Afghanistan, or feed the homeless, or fight racism, or relieve any of the other small or large acts of violence and injustice among which we daily live and work? In this essay, we do not shrink from such questions. Instead, we embrace them and, in a preliminary way, attempt to take up what we acknowledge to be this necessary burden.

     

    The second matter to which we attempt to respond is the one that Roberto Mangabeira Unger has elaborated: the question of remaining committed to an ultimate radicality of thought even as one examines and endorses certain sorts of practical reformism, such as affirmative action and welfare. As Unger observes, “The idea of institutional tinkering, or part-by-part change, has often been associated with the abandonment of the challenge to the fundamental institutions of society,” and “Conversely, the conception of such a challenge has just as often been connected with the idea that our institutional structures exist as indivisible systems, standing or falling together” (Unger 19). Marx himself sometimes positioned himself in such a way as to rule out the possibility of anything but an absolute transformation of society. In the “Critique of the Gotha Program,” for example, Marx deploys a logic that seems to suggest that any given social arrangement can be declared either bourgeois or revolutionary, with nothing in between, and with an absolute divide between the two. Marx will occasionally grade the various forms of bourgeois society, as when he argues that “vulgar democracy… towers mountains” over the Gotha Program’s projected Lassallian arrangements (Marx and Engels 538-39), but he also insists that all bourgeois arrangements remain bourgeois through and through and hence should be rigorously rejected. And by such logic, Marx finds himself declaring at the end of this text, for example, that “a general prohibition of child labor” is “incompatible with the existence of large-scale industry” and therefore not only an “empty, pious wish,” but even “reactionary” (Marx and Engels 541). We cite such a passage not to suggest it somehow vitiates the whole Marxist project, within whose broad lines we continue to place our own, but rather to underline our contrasting belief that certain modes of practical political reform are entirely commensurate with more radical forms of theoretical critique. Here, we consider whether certain versions of affirmative action and welfare might remain faithful to what Jean-Luc Nancy, Maurice Blanchot, and Giorgio Agamben, among others, have described as a community beyond the limits of all prevailing models of community, a community that is not the end-result of some forever-deferred cataclysm but that is, rather, uncovered or recognized in the acknowledgment of our being-in-common.2 In this way, we position ourselves at one remove from Unger’s twin concerns regarding “the dangerous limiting case of transformative politics”: on the one hand, the demand for nothing less than an absolute revolution, an all-transformative intervention within an imagined History; on the other hand, the inevitable lapse into a “pessimism” about change that no longer aspires to do more than “humanize the inevitable” (Unger 19, 20). The first case is that of the “would be revolutionar[y]” suffering from a “hypertrophy of the will,” while the second is that of the “disillusioned ex-Marxist become the institutionally conservative social democrat” (Unger 20). Here, we seek to avoid either of these extremes and agree generally with Unger that it is valid and important to experiment at the border of existing social arrangements–that is, to imagine practical, incremental reforms even as one also tries to think a society that, by contrast, wholly exceeds the exclusionary practices of the present moment.

     

    In what follows, we first critique at length the reasoning of some of the well-known legal decisions of recent years that address the issues of affirmative action and welfare, in order to suggest how and why the prevailing thought on either issue has reached an impasse. Then we go on to discover the possibility of a new opening of theory and practice that takes place at the very limit of the prevailing logic on either issue.

     

    1. Toward a Theory of Affirmative Action Without White Affirmation

     

    In the third presidential debate of 2000, candidates George W. Bush and Albert Gore, Jr. jousted over affirmative action. Gore attempted to show that Bush did not accept affirmative action’s fundamental principles–by which he apparently meant the celebrated opinion of Supreme Court Justice Louis Powell in Regents of California v. Bakke (1978). Bush, conversely, asserted that he supported the Texas system: that is, the system instituted in the wake of Hopwood v. Texas (1996), in which ten percent of every public high school graduate class is guaranteed admission into Texas higher education. But there was clear agreement over the matter of “quotas.” Both vigorously asserted their opposition to that form of affirmative action. Indeed, the term “quotas” has become in recent years the all-purpose bugbear in affirmative action discourse.

     

    But precisely what are we referring to when we use this crucial term? The commonplace in this regard is that “quota” signals an interest in placing racial minorities in jobs and admitting them as students irrespective of merit. Thus, according to this account, quota-based affirmative action involves the placement of unqualified or considerably less qualified racial minorities into sought-after positions. But as anyone knows who has served, for example, on an admitting committee for graduate students at a major university, the question of qualifications simply cannot be settled: excellent students come from all types of colleges, with all forms of credentials, and with all manner of test scores and grades; and the same is true of mediocre students. Success in graduate school is premised on factors that are impossible to weigh according to any simple standards. The enormous body of literature surrounding, for example, the matter of standardized test scores should have convinced anyone long ago of the foolishness of predicting talent and performance.3

     

    Something else, of course, is at stake in the rhetoric of “quotas,” and while it might be obvious to some, it is also worth rehearsing. One can start with the key decision in Hopwood v. Texas (1996; also known as “Hopwood II”), where a striking series of consecutive paragraphs signals some hard kernel of ideology in their very repetitiveness. The decision, handed down 18 March 1996 by the United States Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit, rejects the idea that a state or a state institution has “a compelling state interest in remedying the present effects of past societal discrimination” and makes clear the limits of remedial action (Hopwood 949). The three-member court unanimously and approvingly cites Justice Powell’s decision in Wygant v. Jackson Board of Education (1986):

     

    In the absence of particularized findings, a court could uphold remedies that are ageless in their reach into the past, and timeless in their ability to affect the future. (Hopwood 950)

     

    And again, the Court cites Powell in Wygant:

     

    A remedy reaching all education within a state addresses a putative injury that is vague and amorphous. It has “no logical stopping point.” (950)

     

    Then, citing the Supreme Court’s plurality opinion in City of Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co.(1989):

     

    The “evidence” relied upon by the dissent, history of school desegregation in Richmond and numerous congressional reports, does little to define the scope of any injury to minority contractors in Richmond or the necessary remedy. The factors relied upon by the dissent could justify a preference of any size or duration. (950-1)

     

    And, finally, the Fifth Circuit declares in its own voice that the previous decision of the district court, the decision they are overturning, must be rejected because it “employs no viable limiting principle” (950), and because

     

    the very program at issue here shows how remedying such past wrongs may be expanded beyond any reasonable limits. (951)

     

    “Ageless and timeless,” “no logical stopping point,” “preference of any size or duration,” “no viable limiting principle,” “beyond any reasonable limits”: what each of these moments has in common is an assertion that affirmative action can go too far, can overrun what Wygant calls the “limiting [of] the remedial purpose to the ‘governmental unit involved’” (qtd. in Hopwood 952, n. 44). The argument here is clear: the Court in Hopwood II asserts that the University of Texas Law School is only permitted to take account of its own local and particular discriminatory practices (not those of society in general, or Texas education, or even the University of Texas) and only with regard to citizens of the State of Texas.

     

    And indeed, nested in this flurry of limits, the Court asserts yet one more–here once again citing Croson:

     

    Relief for such an ill-defined wrong could extend until the percentage of public contracts awarded to [minority businesses] in Richmond mirrored the percentage of minorities in the population as a whole. (950; for original, see Croson 498)

     

    In the context of all of the other, repetitive phrases regarding “no reasonable limits,” the logic of the whole becomes visible: parity or equivalence between the state’s racial categorization and public contract awards, or between racial categorization and law school admissions, would be the moment when one has gone “beyond” the “viable,” when one has clearly exceeded all “reasonable limits.” In other words, “reasonable” affirmative action must never approach an equalization of opportunities between and among racial categories. What will remain absolutely unthinkable, unreasonable, and without any “viable” stopping point or limit would be a world in which an X percent statewide African-American population would yield an X percent African-American entering class at the University of Texas Law School.

     

    This is, then, one of the crucial decipherings for the term “quota”: a system in which affirmative action targets might produce equal opportunities. It is as simple as that. (Conversations about “merit,” therefore, are merely code for continued white supremacy; as Richard Delgado, through the fictional professor “Rodrigo,” writes: “The first problem I have with the idea of merit has to do with its majoritarian quality…. Merit is what the victors impose” [Delgado 71].) And while it is certainly true that Hopwood in general represents the rhetorical opposite or end of affirmative action (striking down remedies for any but the most egregious, intentional, and local examples of discrimination and exclusion), one should not too quickly presume that one will find a different logic operating elsewhere–in Justice Powell’s decision in Bakke, for example, which Hopwood explicitly seeks to overturn. Powell quite clearly asserts the same logic of “boundlessness’” in his decision:

     

    In the school cases, the States were required by court order to redress the wrongs worked by specific instances of racial discrimination. That goal was far more focused than the remedying of the effects of “societal discrimination,” an amorphous concept of injury that may be ageless in its reach into the past. (Regents 307)

     

    What precisely does Powell imply here by “amorphous” and “ageless”? Earlier in the opinion, he writes:

     

    The clock of our liberties cannot be turned back to 1868…. It is far too late to argue that the guarantee of equal protection to all persons permits the recognition of special wards entitled to a degree of greater protection than that accorded others. “The Fourteenth Amendment is not directed solely against discrimination due to a “two-class theory”–that is, based upon differences between “white” and Negro.” Hernandez, 347 U.S., at 478. (Regents 295)

     

    Powell in essence argues that the Fourteenth Amendment embodies a “two-class theory” that, if it were 1868, might be of relevance for deciding the matter. One hundred and ten years later, however, he asserts that the Fourteenth Amendment has other agendas; somewhere between 1868 and 1978, then, the Fourteenth Amendment was transformed. There was a time limit, he asserts, on strict construction of the Amendment.4 During this period, the mode of interpretation of the Amendment shifted from strict to loose construction, from original intent to new historical needs and exigencies. Powell dates this transition by signaling that something new has taken place “over the last 30 years”–meaning, roughly, 1950 (Regents 293). The implication is that by 1950 it was “too late” for race-based remedies. The fact that Powell here directly alludes in his language to the most famous passage in Brown v. Board of Education (1954) tells us a great deal. Brown had argued that, “we cannot turn the clock back to 1896 when Plessy v. Ferguson was written. We must consider public education in the light of its full development and its present place in American life throughout the Nation” (Brown 492-3). Thus, Brown suggests that Plessy (the notorious “separate yet equal” case) belongs to a historical moment, and Powell does much the same, but to reverse effect: the project of Brown, he concludes, has made race-based affirmative action an impossibility. Affirmative action at the University of California is thus more like Plessy than Brown, according to Powell.

     

    The effects of an “ageless” remedy for social discrimination are multiple, according to Powell. “Gender-based distinctions,” for example, “might become part of affirmative action,” although, as Powell writes, “gender-based classifications do not share” the “lengthy and tragic history” of race-based classifications (Regents 303). More troubling, he indicates, is that while gender involves only “two possible classifications,” the matter of “racial and ethnic preferences presents far more complex and intractable problems than gender-based classifications” (303):

     

    The white “majority” itself is composed of various minority groups, most of which can lay claim to a history of prior discrimination at the hands of the State and private individuals. Not all of these groups can receive preferential treatment and corresponding judicial tolerance of distinctions drawn in terms of race and nationality, for then the only “majority” left would be a new minority of white Anglo-Saxon Protestants. (Regents 295-6)

     

    Thus, the hinge for Powell’s determination of that which is too unbounded for consideration in matters of affirmative action is precisely that moment when whiteness would no longer constitute a majority. In other words, affirmative action, for Powell, is a “majority” solution to the problem of minorities that can operate only to the limit of the maintenance of majority status for whites. In this way, the limit of affirmative action in Powell’s opinion in Bakke is precisely the same as the limit described in Hopwood, and the one thing that the entire tradition of court decisions regarding affirmative action can never tolerate, therefore, is the disenabling of white privilege and thus the disenabling of “race.”5 Although Ronald Dworkin suggests that the “ultimate goal [of University-based affirmative action] is to lessen not to increase the importance of race in American social and professional life” (Dworkin 294), this most certainly has not turned out to be the case in practice–not since Bakke, at least. In this regard, all liberal scholarly celebrations of the Powell opinion’s “pragmatic accommodation” and “shining virtues” (Post 24, 20) and its “salutary” character of opening up rather than closing debate on affirmative action (Sunstein 118) are misguided. If the Powell opinion settled anything, it was that affirmative action must be accommodated to the presumed views of the “white majority.”

     

    Indeed, there are so many moments of dicta in this regard in Powell’s opinion, separate and distinct from any form of legal argumentation, that it is difficult to read it without being struck by the sheer force of its defense of white privilege. In a moment (lurking in Powell’s footnotes) that interests the distinguished legal scholar Reva Seigel, Powell marshals onto the side of his argument the “outrage” of white people:

     

    All state-imposed classifications that rearrange burdens and benefits on the basis of race are likely to be viewed with deep resentment by the individuals burdened. The denial to innocent persons of equal rights and opportunities may outrage those so deprived and therefore may be perceived to be invidious. These individuals are likely to find little comfort in the notion that the deprivation they are asked to endure is merely the price of membership in the dominant majority and that its imposition is inspired by the supposedly benign purpose of aiding others. One should not lightly dismiss the inherent unfairness of, and the perception of mistreatment that accompanies, a system of allocating benefits and privileges on the basis of skin color and ethnic origin. (Regents 294, n. 34)

     

    One might want to underline the words “merely the price of membership in the dominant majority” in order to underscore the way that Powell takes as a given the continued existence of a “dominant” white majority, and that even an affirmative action that in no way imperils this status might cross the line of “inherent unfairness.” In this sense, affirmative action theory as embedded in the Powell opinion and its many later judicial and scholarly commentaries begins from the assumption that affirmative action may only set as its goal a minimal sort of tokenism. Again, one perhaps wants to underline the extra-legal character of this moment: a U.S. Supreme Court justice decides here to speak for the white race rather than on behalf of a legal principle.

     

    And there is still to consider in this regard one more matter buried in the Powell decision that will permit the theorization of affirmative action in a far more explicit way. It should be remembered, of course, that Powell’s opinion in Bakke pleased no one on the court: that Justices Burger, Stewart, Rehnquist, and Stevens affirmed the overturning of the University of California affirmative action program but wrote a combined dissent to Powell; and that Justices White, Brennan, Marshall, and Blackmun accepted Powell’s logic only at its most minimal point, Section V-C, which is one paragraph long and provides no guidance as to how “the competitive consideration of race” might continue (Regents 320). Historically, however, the totality of Powell’s decision has become increasingly important, with large chucks of its entirely solo logic cited in later court decisions.

     

    Justice Powell relied not only on his reading of the Fourteenth Amendment and of Brown v. Board of Education in order to reject California-Davis’s version of affirmative action. He also linked his opinion on several occasions to a network of Supreme Court and other court cases concerning Asian-Americans. Section III-A, for example, which was joined by Justice White and thus perhaps stands firmer than any other part of the decision except for V-C, ends by citing approvingly the language from Hirabayashi v. United States (1942) and Korematsu v. United States (1944):

     

    Racial and ethnic classifications, however, are subject to stringent examination without regard to these additional characteristics {i.e., “discreteness” and “insularity” of the classification}. We declared as much in the first cases explicitly to recognize racial distinctions as suspect:

     

    “Distinctions between citizens solely because of their ancestry are by their very nature odious to a free people whose institutions are founded upon the doctrine of equality.” Hirabayashi, 320 U.S., at 100. “[A]ll legal restrictions which curtail the civil rights of a single racial group are immediately suspect. This is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitutional. It is to say that courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny.” Korematsu, 323 U.S., at 216.

     

    The Court has never questioned the validity of these pronouncements. Racial and ethnic distinctions of any sort are inherently suspect and thus call for the most exacting judicial examination. (Regents 290-91)

     

    These perhaps fine-sounding words appear in cases that leave the blackest mark on the Supreme Court’s record in the twentieth century. Hirabayashi and Korematsu are the Japanese-American Exclusion Order cases; both affirm the Constitutional authority to discriminate and exclude U.S. citizens on the basis of race if “a group of one national extraction may menace that safety more than others” (Hirabayashi 101) and if it is “deemed necessary because of the presence of an unascertained number of disloyal members of the group” (Korematsu 218).

     

    Both cases were reopened through Congressional inquiry shortly after Powell’s decision in Bakke, and the final Congressional Report concluded that the cases had been “overruled in the court of history.”6 Yet, of course, the cases stood as precedent in 1978, just as they stand today. As Reggie Oh and Frank Wu have written, “Korematsu remains controlling case law” (167). The cases constitutionally authorize a two-tier or two-class model of U.S. citizenship, upholding the Exclusion Orders during a time of emergency even as they affirm Asian-American “status as citizens” (Hirabayashi 113-14).

     

    Thus, the question of what Powell has accomplished by yoking his decision in Bakke to these cases is a curious one, and yet one which must be asked because Powell continues along the same lines in Section III-B of the decision. Here, he includes a long footnote that uses the Exclusion Order cases to declare that “no Western state… can claim that it has always treated Japanese and Chinese in a fair and evenhanded manner” in order to demonstrate that an affirmation of general “minority” entitlement will open the door to an unbounded number of groups which might claim discrimination (Regents 297, n. 37l; also 292, 294).

     

    Powell is here operating by complex analogy. When he writes, “This is not to say that all such restrictions are unconstitutional. It is to say that courts must subject them to the most rigid scrutiny,” he suggests that the logic of the state of emergency in Hirabayashi and Korematsu will be applied to California-Davis in order to ascertain whether the State of California’s racial hierarchies justify the emergency measure of quota-based affirmative action. For Powell, of course, California does not meet the test. Thus, the same standard which permits the Japanese concentration camps denies the need for affirmative action. But this is more than the mere application of some clear and determinate standard in two separate cases. By thinking these two instances together as a coherent political strategy, one can conclude that the logic of the limit in Bakke is double: Affirmative action can only proceed so long as it does not disturb white privilege, while at the same time the Constitutional protection of raceless citizenship extends also only to the point where white privilege senses its disturbance. The Supreme Court, then, has clarified the matter of racial politics in the following way: the only race that always counts (or matters) is the white race. All other races are counted (that is, enumerated and taken account of) flexibly, and this depends entirely on whether such counting is seen as a furtherance or hindrance to white majoritarian rule.

     

    Hirabayashi and Korematsu are by any measure highly exceptional cases, but such exceptions, as Carl Schmitt argues, reveal the precise location of “sovereignty”: “Sovereign is he who decides on the exception” (Schmitt 5). “What characterizes an exception is principally unlimited authority, which means the suspension of the entire existing order,” and therefore “the exception reveals most clearly the essence of the state’s authority” (Schmitt 12, 13). Exceptions to Constitutional norms, then, are not precisely exceptional:

     

    The rule proves nothing; the exception proves everything: It confirms not only the rule but also its existence, which derives only from the exception. (Schmitt 15)

     

    It is only in the exception that one can see clearly the grounding of the norm. In this case, legal racelessness, legal color-blindness, is premised, grounded, and founded upon a bedrock of Constitutional white privilege, of white supremacy. The law of white supremacy “is not wholly beyond the limits of the Constitution and is not to be condemned merely because in other and in most circumstances racial distinctions are irrelevant” (Hirabayashi 101). Powell’s founding of all future affirmative action theory on the base of Hirabayashi and Korematsu thus assures theoretically that affirmative action must content itself with results far below those that would permit the equalization of racial opportunities in the United States. The body of affirmative action decisions in the U.S. since 1978 are coextensive with the entire history of state-based and state-sponsored racial hierarchies and exclusions. (From a related perspective, as Oh and Wu suggest, the affirmative action decision Adarand Constructors v. Pena (1995) explicitly reinforces the logic of Korematsu and lays the groundwork for a future related race-emergency decision [182]).

     

    One sees the results of Powell throughout the country, in institutions that claim to be strongly operating under the principles of affirmative action. At Michigan State University, for example, where Michaelsen teaches, the official affirmative action goals of colleges and departments are set far below general population distributions and are instead keyed to a concept of market “availability” of potential faculty. In addition, in setting unit goals all “minorities” are lumped together; thus, at a time when the national minority population officially nears 30% and rapidly heads toward 50%, the total target for the Department of English is 10.6% minority composition (or six out of approximately fifty faculty). The implications are serious, as the University’s Affirmative Action Officer reports: once these minimal targets are met, no University-level support need be offered in terms of the hiring of additional minority faculty members. “The test is whether there is underutilization,” according to the UAAO. Since the English Department has two American Indian faculty members, one Asian/Pacific Islander, and two Black faculty members, no “unit hiring goal” is set in terms of Hispanic faculty, for example, even though the Department has no Chicano/Latino faculty members. There are, in essence, too many other minorities already in place, and there currently is 1.6% “over-utilization” of minority faculty positions in the Department from the University’s perspective. Indeed, the Department has been officially notified that it has no “hiring goal” at all at the present time as far as racial minorities are concerned. In this game, no unit can easily or even reasonably manage to achieve parity with larger social demographics, and “minorities” are condemned to super-minority or “minority-minority” status.7

     

    None of this is surprising in the wake of Bakke, and MSU in this regard is neither better nor worse than its peer institutions. Everything in the case law concerning affirmative action would steer an institution in this direction. For example, in Fullilove v. Klutznick (1980), a case that considered the Public Works Employment Act of 1977, the Supreme Court found that a 10% set-aside for federally funded contracts was constitutional, while in the Croson decision, which was cited at the crucial ideological moment in Hopwood, the court threw out a 30% set-aside instituted by a major U.S. city (a city, by the way, that claimed at the time a 50% minority population). The Supreme Court produced a highly contorted logic in Croson in order to reach the conclusion that one form of set-aside was constitutional and the other not. Justice O’Connor, writing the majority opinion, argued, for example, that the U.S. Congress had stronger powers in regard to determining set-asides and noted that the Thirteenth and Fourteenth Amendments themselves had limited the powers of states to undertake their own initiatives and enlarged those of the U.S. Congress (City of Richmond 490). Thus, in part, Richmond’s plan was overturned because it represented local rather than federal affirmative action.

     

    But it would be difficult not to see in these two opinions that the Supreme Court has determined that affirmative action has an appropriate target goal, and that it is closer to 10% inclusion than it is to 30%. Justice O’Connor writes tellingly in Croson: “the 30% quota cannot be said to be narrowly tailored to any goal, except perhaps outright racial balancing” (City of Richmond 507). This is precisely the heart of the matter: 10% tokenism is acceptable to the Supreme Court, while 30% “racial balancing” is not (even though “racial balancing,” or attention to affirmative action with regard to population, would go far further than 30%). Therefore, when one finds that a Research 1 institution such as Michigan State has adopted a roughly 10% plan, it is clear that the University seeks to position itself in relation to the case law in a space where its policy cannot easily be contravened. In fact, it is in Croson that the logic of “availability” is laid down as law in the clearest fashion. But the results of this “lowballing” of affirmative action targets are also perfectly clear.

     

    One related area in which Croson completely overturned Fullilove, rather than distorted it, concerns the matter of statistical analysis. Fullilove had cited approvingly a House Committee on Small Business report that had argued that statistical disparities constituted prima facie evidence of discrimination:

     

    While minority persons comprise about 16 percent of the Nation’s population, of the 13 million businesses in the United States, only 382,000, or approximately 3.0 percent, are owned by minority individuals. The most recent data from the Department of Commerce also indicates that the gross receipts of all businesses in this country totals about $2,540.8 billion, and of this amount only $16.6 billion, or about 0.65 percent was realized by minority business concerns.

     

    These statistics are not the result of random chance. The presumption most be made that past discriminatory systems have resulted in present economic inequities. (qtd. in Fullilove 465)

     

    And the Court concludes on this point: “we are satisfied that Congress had abundant historical basis from which it could conclude that traditional procurement practices, when applied to minority businesses, could perpetuate the effects of prior discrimination” (Fullilove 478).

     

    Croson‘s rejection of this sort of statistical evaluation is sweeping: “But where special qualifications are necessary, the relevant statistical pool for purposes of demonstrating discriminatory exclusion must be the number of minorities qualified to undertake the particular task” (Croson 501-02). “Blacks may be disproportionately attracted to industries other than construction,” the Court argues (Croson 503). And the court describes as “non-racial factors” such matters as “deficiencies in working capital, inability to meet bonding requirements, unfamiliarity with bidding procedures, and disability caused by an inadequate track record” (Croson 498-99). Thus, according to Croson, affirmative action begins and ends with things as they are in the present moment. The fact that in the city of Richmond, with a minority population base of 50%, 0.67% of the city’s recent contracts had been awarded to minority firms belongs to a network of “inherently unmeasurable claims of past wrongs” (Croson 506). The Supreme Court in the area of affirmative action has long been and has continued to be the protector, then, of white privilege, accepting or rejecting various affirmative action plans and evidence of discrimination entirely on the basis of whether percentage hiring/contracting goals for such programs are kept to a bare minimum. Every time the Supreme Court invokes its logic of “unboundedness,” therefore, the dirty secret is that the Court means that a particular program has come too close to racial redress. At times, the Court completely strips away its own masking of this agenda, as in Croson, in which a 10% set-aside is declared “flexible,” while a 30% set-aside is deemed a “quota.” Here, the Court declares its preference for not calculating discrimination and the limit of deracialization, while more typically (and even in Croson) the court rhetorically has rested on the logic of rejection of any “amorphous claim” for a program “of any size or duration” (Croson 499, 505).

     

    The absolute disaster of attempting to build an affirmative action program atop the logic of Powell and the Supreme Court decisions that follow is clear, then, but for one exception. As is well known, Powell often is celebrated (even by his detractors) for Section IV of the opinion, in which he affirms the “benefits that flow from an ethnically diverse student body” and the first amendment “freedom of the university” (Regents 306, 312). As is also well known, this limited defense of affirmative action has become the crucial matter in all subsequent affirmative action discussion.

     

    Indeed, the summary judgment issued in Gratz v. Bollinger (2000), which ruled that the University of Michigan’s undergraduate affirmative action program (at least in its most recent incarnation) is constitutional, turns on the question of diversity, and here one should first note the language that the Court reiterates from Plaintiffs’ arguments:

     

    Plaintiffs have presented no argument or evidence rebutting the University Defendants’ assertion that a racially and ethnically diverse student body gives rise to educational benefits for both minority and non-minority students. In fact, during oral argument, counsel for Plaintiffs indicated his willingness to assume, for purposes of these motions, that diversity in institutional settings of higher education is “good, important, and valuable.” Counsel for Plaintiffs, however, contends that “good, important, and valuable” is not enough, and that the diversity rationale is too amorphous and ill-defined, and “too limitless, timeless, and scopeless,” to rise to the level of a compelling interest. According to counsel for Plaintiffs, the University’s diversity rationale has “no logical stopping point” but rather is a “permanent regime” in direct conflict with strict scrutiny standards. (Gratz 25)

     

    It is here that something novel perhaps enters the case law of affirmative action: an affirmation of that which is unlimited, rather than minimal, in Judge Duggan’s rejection of Plaintiff’s argument. Already one can note some guarded celebration in liberal quarters regarding the Gratz affirmation of affirmative action, but Gratz comes with important and barbed qualifiers in its unwillingness to determine the limit of affirmative action. First, “in other contexts, i.e. the construction industry context” (which historically has been another important site for affirmative action law), a diversity law rationale may well be “too amorphous and ill-defined” (Gratz 25). Thus, what Powell has left as affirmative action’s only leg to stand on will function only in an educational context, with its specialized needs in terms of diversity.

     

    Second, Gratz precisely reflects Powell’s opinion in Bakke (and the limiting logic of the combined Fullilove and Croson decisions) in its rejection of quotas. Most dramatically, Gratz signals its agreement with the Supreme Court in specifying some indistinct numerical limit to affirmative action:

     

    A university’s interest in achieving the educational benefits that flow from a diverse student body does not justify an admissions program designed to admit a predetermined number or proportion of minority students. Instead, a university must carefully design its system to fall between these two competing ends of the spectrum, i.e., between a system that completely fails to achieve a meaningful level of diversity, under which the benefits associated with a diverse student body will never be realized, and a rigid quota system, which is clearly unconstitutional under Justice Powell’s opinion in Bakke. (Gratz 31-2)

     

    Thus, “the fact that the University cannot articulate a set number or percentage of minority students that would constitute the requisite level of diversity” poses no problem for Judge Duggan, because the “requisite level” is already limited by Bakke (Gratz 25).

     

    Gratz, read carefully, thus affirms only that proper affirmative action falls somewhere between total “failure” to diversify and quotas (or “racial balancing”). It remains balanced precariously between, roughly, the 10% and 30% continuum, and likely closer to the former than the latter, given the earlier case law.

     

    What Gratz does affirm turns entirely and merely, then, on “diversity,” and Judge Duggan’s decision includes several pages of reference to Patricia Y. Gurin’s contribution to a very large document prepared by the University of Michigan toward its defense, entitled, “The Compelling Need for Diversity in Higher Education.” Though a number of more famous commentators weigh in with pages on the history and results of racism and affirmative action (Derek Bok, Eric Foner, and the like), it is clear that the most interesting part of the document is Gurin’s, and her claim is that she has generated the first quantified results of the benefits of diversity.

     

    Duggan writes: “The University Defendants have presented this Court with solid evidence regarding the educational benefits that flow from a racially and ethnically diverse student body” and it is quite likely that Gurin’s findings as well as similar sorts of future studies will now become part of the next phase of defense of university-based affirmative action programs (Gratz 21). It is thus worth pondering the implications of Gurin’s argument, in order to understand whether affirmative action theory finally has broken through the barrier of white privilege or instead has recapitulated it in some new but entirely recognizable form.

     

    Gurin’s text refers to an enormous body of literature on psychological development in order to advance a complex thesis whose main features can be boiled down to the following:

     

    • College students are still psychologically unformed in terms of their positioning in a “pre-reflective stage of judgment” (Gurin, “Theoretical” 5);

     

    • Late adolescent and early adult experiences, when they are discontinuous enough from the home environment and complex enough to offer new ideas and possibilities, can be critical sources of development. (“Theoretical” 2)

     

    College students, therefore, in order to engage in “deep thinking” and in order generally to “help… democracy thrive” through reflexive acts of citizenship, must be thrown into a college environment that is sufficiently racially and culturally different from the one they have occupied until age eighteen (“Theoretical” 4, 6). The particular categories of useful outcomes include such matters as “growth in active thinking processes,” “engagement and motivation” concerning learning and thinking, as well as general “citizenship engagement,” “racial/cultural engagement,” and recognition of the “compatibility of differences” in modern society (Gurin, “Studies” 4).

     

    Several levels of analysis are necessary to understand the implications of these arguments, but first one should acknowledge that Gurin’s text is attempting to salvage affirmative action within the set of highly narrow constraints imposed by the Supreme Court’s previous decisions. Her general goals in this regard often are admirable, including the “disrupt[ion]” of a “pattern” of post-college “segregation,” and here it is possible to square her goals with those of an affirmative action of deracialization (Gurin, “Empirical” 2). Gurin’s defense can never go far enough, however, given the discursive constraints imposed on the defense in Gratz, and major portions of the structure of the argument prove problematic on closer examination.

     

    First, to the extent that a dynamic shift or change in racial/cultural milieu for college-age students is necessary for the achievement of important social objectives, such as thinking itself, the argument is weakened by the fact that the universally positive social benefits she cites are only possible, in the first place, within a society that is segregated. In other words, if the U.S. were not segregated in the first place–if college students had already been brought up in a diverse environment–then no such outcomes would be possible. By defining and valuing critical thinking in this way, the argument could be interpreted as implicitly supporting the maintenance of a geographically racialized United States.

     

    Second, to the extent that one of the key outcomes is greater “knowledge and awareness” of racial/cultural difference, the argument values “an increasingly heterogeneous and complex society” (“Studies” 4; “Theoretical” 6). “It is discourse over conflict, not unanimity, that helps democracy thrive” (“Theoretical” 6). Rather than defending affirmative action as anti-racialist practice, as deracialization, therefore, the argument subtly promotes difference-construction and difference-building, in order to continue to exploit such differences for intellectual purposes. Here one would need to confront the text’s fibrillation when using the terms “race” and “culture”–a fibrillation that is perhaps symptomatic, since the two are notoriously difficult to disentangle analytically. As Michaelsen has argued elsewhere at length, there is no benign concept of “culture” or “cultural difference” that might be separated from “race” and “racial difference.” The ideas of cultural difference and cultural pluralism in this century simply replace “race” in anthropological thought, and the discourse of “culture” is therefore a product of racial thought. To the extent that there are lived experiences of cultural difference in the United States, they remain tied necessarily to the heritage of race violence and exclusion in such a way as to always function analogously when made to operate politically.

     

    Finally, one should note that the diversity argument in Gurin’s text primarily and perhaps fundamentally emphasizes the benefits that accrue to white student populations (“Empirical” 4). In contradistinction, “peer interaction must be considered in more complex ways for African American students. These findings suggest the supportive function of group identity for African American students, and the potentially positive effects of having sufficient numbers of same-race peers” (“Empirical” 5). Gurin believes that difference benefits everyone, intellectually and democratically, although she also argues that a substantially African-American college environment for African-American students may well benefit them in precisely the same ways that a diverse environment benefits whites. In other words, the world of education need not be reformed in the manner of the University of Michigan, unless the needs of whites constitute the primary agenda. For example, benefit for African-Americans would accrue equally well in a world of primarily black colleges, with all African-Americans attending them rather than historically white institutions. In this way, the University of Michigan’s defense of its affirmative action policy is continuous with all of the affirmative action decisions in arguing from the position of white needs.

     

    But the privileging of white benefit in the argument should come as no surprise to those who know the Wygant decision, which explicitly reversed any form of affirmative action on the basis of a “role model” theory.8 In other words, any argument for affirmative action that claims that historically racialized students will benefit from classrooms run by similarly racialized teachers is struck down in Wygant as a reintroduction of Plessy‘s exclusionary logic:

     

    Carried to its logical extreme, the idea that black students are better off with black teachers could lead to the very system the Court rejected in Brown v. Board of Education. (Wygant 276)

     

    After Wygant, then, the only avenue left to pursue is precisely the one that Gurin’s text takes up: that whites benefit from teachers and peers of color. In this way, the University of Michigan’s defense of its affirmative action policy is continuous with all of the affirmative action decisions in arguing from the position of white needs.

     

    To be perfectly clear here: this argument does not reject the very limited inroads that have been made in the wake of Bakke and that may come if Gratz remains the law of the land (increasingly unlikely as this may be, given more recent developments).9 It is true, however, that the thinking that underlies this tradition is one that has a coherent relationship to the logic of Hopwood and thus to the logic of anti-affirmative action. The coherence takes place around the determination of the limit of affirmative action as a permanent system of affirming and supporting hierarchical racial/cultural difference rather than a project of deracialization. Deracialization’s promise cannot be realized until a moment when the historic “races” that live and work in the United States find themselves with truly equal opportunities all the way down, in a pattern of economic well-being and career prestige that matches population statistics. One clear roadblock to deracialization is a hundreds-of-years-old pattern of general economic and social inequality amongst the historic “races.” The disruption of the pattern depends, minimally, not on the achievements of diversity but upon the ending of deep structural inequalities.

     

    Affirmative action explicitly has separated itself from this goal after Bakke, and the entire line of post-Bakke court decisions operate as one.10 These decisions, in fact, take their place as merely part of a whole landscape of history and policy–including the colonization and reservationization of Native America, African-American slavery, the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, Jim Crow, the Chinese Exclusion Act and its reiterations, the WWII concentration camps for Japanese Americans, Manning Marable’s formulation of capitalism’s underdevelopment of black America, and in general what Charles Mills calls “the racial contract”–in which minority citizenship in the United States remains constantly at risk or even impossible to inaugurate. As it was in 1868 so it remains in the twenty-first century, when the “savage inequalities” of racialization, to borrow Jonathan Kozol’s phrase, are as much on evidence as they were one hundred and thirty five years ago.11

     

    One possible redefinition, then, of affirmative action that might take us beyond a mere reiteration of the past (and this is precisely the one that none of the various courts have taken seriously) is as follows: affirmative action should be the white race’s expenditure without reserve of its privilege. Phrasing the matter in this way, affirmative action is about deracialization and the disempowerment of a whiteness that will remain in place for as long as there are income, savings, and property-holding discrepancies between the historic races. Affirmative action, then, must become a special form of what is called “race traitorism”–and not an individuated, voluntarist one (as one finds in the work of Mills, for example), but a white-state-based traitorism. The legal arguments for a Constitutionally based dismantling of white property have been carefully and compellingly assembled in the 1990s by scholars such as Ronald J. Fiscus, Cheryl I. Harris, and Barbara J. Flagg, and this body of work is of great historico-theoretical importance. One must underline, however, that this dismantling or dissolving of that whole social construct called “race” need not and should not become anything affirmative at all–such as, most clearly, an affirmation of diversity. It is a spending that does not explicitly produce new works, does not build anything, does not begin from the idea of “humanity” or “diversity” in order to divest itself of privilege. Such affirmative action does not have any concept in advance of “who” will appear at the limit of such expenditure. In this sense, affirmative action is neither action, in the sense of a positive project or a building up of something, nor, strictly, affirmative of anything, including constitutionalism itself. Indeed, such a version of affirmative action would take one necessarily and theoretically to the limits of U.S. constitutionalism and sovereignty in order to confront its structurally embedded ruling class in the form of, for example, a conception of citizenship as a work or a labor that is judged or determined in terms of its completeness. (In terms of the Japanese exclusion act cases, it was precisely this citizen-structure that permitted the ascription of the Japanese as foreign nationals, who had somehow not yet worked themselves into the figure of “Americans.” The question of the truth of matters of Americanization is not at stake here, but merely the bare politico-social scientific structure known as the “citizen.”) This is simply to say that rather than a process of reforming the U.S. Constitution (making it live up to its best intentions), affirmative action at its limit necessarily amounts to a dismembering of constitutionalism, to a “politics” at the edge of what Schmitt has called “the concept of the political” and toward, for example, what Derrida has briefly described as “the State as it ought to be–as a counter-institution, necessary for opposing those institutions that represent particular interests and properties” (Derrida and Ferraris 51). Another way to say the preceding would begin with Schmitt’s definition of sovereignty as the exception and continue with Benjamin’s eighth thesis on the philosophy of history, Agamben’s Homo Sacer (1995), and Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s Empire (2000), all of which suggest in their different ways that the exception has become the “rule” and that the modern state is characterized by a permanent state of exception (Agamben, Homo Sacer 12; Hardt and Negri 17-18). Such thought allows us to conclude that, if sovereignty is the right to declare the exception, then the limit of such sovereignty would be the exception to the exception.12 Transformative affirmative action therefore will appear only at the limit of the present juridical order (at the limit of white supremacy).

     

    This maximal form of affirmative action is entirely faithful to our understanding of the Marxist project in general, which, as Shershow suggests elsewhere, inaugurates a process of calculation in order to end the regime of calculation (Shershow 491). Affirmative action, if it is to be anything, will have to calculate itself to the limits of its calculability–to the limit at which the calculation and counting of a white privileged majority would have no meaning. The promise of affirmative action will thus remain of interest to political progressives strictly as a project that seeks to remove “race” as a mode through which the state may distinguish and exclude.

     

    Affirmative action does not, however, take us to the limit of all forms of exclusivity. For example, because affirmative action begins and ends with the attempt to rationally allocate scarce resources (contracts, tenure-track jobs, graduate student fellowships, and the like), affirmative action remains complicit with the construction of social and economic classes. One certainly could imagine a future world in which the historic races no longer have meaning, yet in which the opportunity to attend an Ivy League university instead of a community college continues to be denied to some citizens. And even a policy of guaranteed higher education for all might not in itself prevent some educations from being (to borrow from George Orwell) “more equal than others.” Though “race” is an analytically distinct category from “class,” their relationship remains overdetermined, and the attempt to address one inevitably opens out onto the other (and onto still other domains of inequity, such as gender, sexuality, and the like). In the next section of this essay, we specifically take up another hotly debated policy matter of recent years in order to explore the economic implications of post-structuralist politics.

     

    2. Towards a Theory of Welfare without Exclusion

     

    On the subject of welfare, candidates Bush and Gore in the last presidential campaign didn’t disagree even in the measured and ambiguous way that they did on the subject of affirmative action. Rather, both candidates hailed as a significant achievement the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act passed by Congress and signed by President Bill Clinton in 1996, an act that ended the very idea of a federal entitlement to subsistence benefits and set strict new limits on the amount of time a family could receive cash relief. In fact, today it can easily seem as though practically everyone, on all sides of the political spectrum, agrees that the constellation of programs known loosely as “welfare”–especially the Aid for Families with Dependent Children (AFDC)–had for a long time been promoting a so-called “dependence” on the part of the poor.13 This apparent political consensus about welfare has somehow overcome what from another perspective might seem a broad and fundamental ideological opposition. In this apparent opposition, one side emphasizes a kind of altruism or mutual obligation (“we must help those less fortunate than ourselves”), while the other side emphasizes a kind of possessive individualism or self-reliance (“look out for number one”; “charity begins at home”). Michael B. Katz, author of a history of welfare policy in the United States, summarizes the enduring American debate about welfare in almost exactly such terms: one side asks “what do we owe each other, not simply as individuals, but as a community or nation?” while the other side seeks to strengthen an “open market in which responsible individuals [can] carve out their success or accept the consequences of their failure” (Katz 332-3). The first of these positions is typically thought of as liberal or Left, the second as conservative or Right. We want to argue, however, that the prevailing consensus about welfare is not simply the triumph of the conservative position, but rather a kind of internal collapse of the opposition itself, something that takes place at the conjunction of questions of common being and the economic calculus.

     

    The thought of the Left seems to focus on the first of these terms, grounding our social obligation in what Michael Walzer, for example, calls our “membership” in a particular community, a particular commonality of being. For Walzer, “the members of a political community owe to one another… the communal provision of security and welfare” (Walzer 63). The members of a community provide for one another, and they do so precisely on the basis of their membership: the immanent common being they share with other members.14 This is a vision of communal inclusion founded, in the most basic sense, on an exclusion, for members of a community owe one another, as Walzer puts it, “mutual provision of all those things for the sake of which they have separated themselves from mankind as a whole” (65). And just as the communal membership requires separation from and exclusion of other social subjects, so it must involve an act of economic calculation. In other words, when we ask, to whom are we obligated and why?, we must then also ask, how much do we owe one another? how much can we afford to give? For further example, the liberal economist Robert M. Solow, in his Tanner lectures at Princeton University in 1998, begins by denouncing the so-called “welfare-reform” bill of 1996 but nevertheless advocates a model of welfare that (citing Amy Gutmann’s introductory summary) “is guided by two explicit aims: one, to increase self-reliance among those citizens who are now on welfare, and two, to decrease the need for altruism among those citizens who now pay for welfare” (viii). Altruism itself, Solow concludes, “is scarce; there is never enough to go around” (3). In such a model, social policies, even of the most “liberal” or “progressive” kind, are literally constituted by acts of calculation, for not only material resources but sociality itself is grasped as being in short supply.

     

    Correspondingly, the conservative or right-wing approach to social welfare, however much it seems to emphasize individual responsibility and self-reliance instead of altruism or mutual obligation, does not simply turn the other position inside-out to suggest that we owe one another nothing. On the contrary, conservative approaches to welfare envision an even more complex and subtle network of mutual obligation.15 In this case, the connection of common being and the economic calculus is even more fundamental, since what is believed most to unite us is our status as economic subjects of a particular kind, whose behavior is the aggregate product of a balance of needs and exertions, and who must accordingly be constantly subjected to the goad of subsistence and survival. The basic conservative position can thus be schematically summarized like this: poverty occurs when individuals are either unable or unwilling to work. When people are truly unable to work because of factors beyond their control, such as a crippling disability, they are “deserving” of economic support, and the community is obligated to give it. But more often, people are merely unwilling to work, either because of some moral weakness such as drug addiction or because they are just plain lazy. In this case, it is argued, to relieve their poverty merely rewards and encourages their moral failure and makes them dependent on what more extreme ideologues like to call the “public trough.”16 Therefore, any system of organized charity or welfare always tends to foster rather than alleviate poverty; our moral obligation to prevent “undeserving” objects from receiving relief is, if anything, even greater than our original obligation to give.

     

    In recent years, this argument has been expounded at length by an interrelated group of social scientists and historians, including, among others, Martin Anderson, George Gilder, Gertrude Himmelfarb, Lawrence M. Mead, Charles Murray, and Marvin Olasky.17 (The latter also coined the slogan “compassionate conservatism” on which George W. Bush successfully campaigned for president in 2000, a slogan that in this context is revealed as referring specifically to the thesis just summarized by denoting an alleged mode of proper compassion characterized by its refusal to give to the “undeserving” poor. We will only cite one brief example, since all these writers make essentially the same argument and often cross-reference one another. Murray, in his introductory remarks to one of Olasky’s books, argues that even if our society went far beyond all previous models of welfare relief and literally “put everyone above the poverty line with a check,” this would simply mean that “families that once managed to stay above the poverty line through their own labor” would begin “to take it a little easier,” producing “significant reductions in work effort.” Therefore, to provide welfare in the form of cash relief, Murray asserts, “is an efficient way to increase the size of the underclass, not reduce it” (Murray, “Preface” xiii-xiv).

     

    To compare these apparently opposed visions of Left and Right is to see clearly how they merely propose what might be called negative and positive versions of the same argument: the Right emphasizes how a kind of naked and impersonal economic coercion forces people to be self-reliant, and the Left emphasizes, instead, helping people to help themselves… to be self-reliant. As Judith N. Shklar suggests,

     

    What is really astonishing is the degree of agreement between these critics and defenders of welfare. Independence, exchanging the welfare check for a paycheck, is what both sides hope for. All want to make good citizens of the “underclass” by getting them a job and making them, too, earning members of society. (96)18

     

    And for either Left or Right, the seemingly inevitable claims of common being, however such being is understood, always require an exclusion: we will provide for our own, we will not relieve the “undeserving” poor, and so on. And such observations also further indicate how, for Right and Left alike, scarcity itself remains the one utterly irreducible assumption, and therefore the economic calculus remains the one essential and forever-unfinished operation of all social thought. It is here that one rediscovers, on the axis of class, a version of the same formula we previously uncovered on the axis of race. Just as the prevailing logic of affirmation action can never go past the point where white privilege senses its disturbance, so the prevailing logic of welfare can never relieve poverty all the way down, to the point where economic privilege itself might be threatened. Here, conventional liberal or conservative approaches to the question of poverty converge in a kind of aporia, an argument whose fatal circularity is hidden in plain sight–precisely because its fundamental underlying assumption both addresses and itself appears as what might be called “nature,” the ultimate otherness of material Necessity itself. People require the goad of subsistence, it is argued, in order to keep them working. And they must be kept working in order to subsist. Need keeps us working and work overcomes our need. But this means that the one absolute assumed in every version of this thought, subsistence itself, is in effect something that cannot and must not be guaranteed. Our daily victory over scarcity is the condition of our very existence and also something that cannot be ensured in some political or social sense as an expectation or a right. Subsistence itself must always be both present and absent; for only the threat of its absence produces its presence. Or, to phrase this ruinous argument in its most absolutely paradoxical form: in order to overcome scarcity we must never overcome scarcity.

     

    This paradoxical and self-defeating logic, we go on to argue, underlies a pair of interrelated Supreme Court decisions that were issued about thirty years ago, but whose primary themes continue to figure centrally in contemporary debates about welfare. At the time of the first of these decisions, Shapiro v. Thompson (1969), the Warren Court–now approaching its end and already, of course, celebrated for its innovative decisions in civil rights–had seemed to some observers to be on the brink of declaring a constitutional “right” to economic subsistence, a hope that was, however, effectively dashed the following year with Dandridge v. Williams (1970).19 In Shapiro, the Court struck down durational residency requirements in Connecticut and several other states, laws that required a needy family to establish residence in a state for one full year before becoming eligible for welfare benefits. In briefs submitted to the Court on both sides of the case, it was acknowledged that such policies descend from the so-called “poor laws” of Elizabethan England and early colonial America, laws that prohibited indigent persons from leaving their own parish and established draconian penalties for vagrancy.20 For example, Robert K. Killian and Francis J. MacGregor, attorneys general of Connecticut, acknowledge in their appellant’s brief that the central question of the case is

     

    whether unlimited migration of those poor who do not want to enter the labor market should be allowed, with the end result that Connecticut’s liberal program would be curtailed because of this additional tax bite, or whether Connecticut should set up a reasonable residence requirement that protected… those poor resident applicants, who in the past, had contributed to the economy. (LBA 68: 10)

     

    In other words, the appellants argue that durational residency requirements are necessary to prevent indigents migrating to a state with relatively higher benefits and hence putting pressure on that state’s welfare budget.

     

    The issues in this case thus locate themselves precisely at the fatal intersection of common being and the economic calculus, for there would be no dispute at all if there were not different levels of welfare benefit in different American states. In effect, three different levels of identity are at issue in this question: citizenship in a particular state, citizenship in the United States, and membership in a common humanity–this latter, in the discourse of this case, explicitly understood as a mode of being characterized by particular needs and a particular degree of willingness to work for the sake of the community (or, as the appellants put it, to “contribute to the economy”). The appellants defend residency requirements in the name of that social calculation which all modes of common being seemingly make necessary and by emphasizing the most particular mode of identity or common being at issue. Killian and MacGregor concede that the state of Connecticut was, in its laws, discriminating “against potential applicants [for welfare], who come into the state… to get on the welfare rolls, and who would not come into the state if there were no liberal welfare benefits” (LBA 68: 24); but stipulate that such discrimination is not “racially aimed” (LBA 68: 7) and is therefore not a “suspect” classification. Instead, the classification is made only as part of a necessary process of quantitative provision: that is, because “there is a practical limit to the amount of tax dollars that can be raised” to provide for the “members” of the state of Connecticut (LBA 68: 37). Correspondingly, another advocate for the appellants, Lorna Lawhead Williams of Iowa, defended her state’s similar welfare residency laws during oral arguments as something made necessary by the attempt to balance individual and communal needs. Williams claimed that the distinction between residents and nonresidents is reasonable

     

    because it affords the ones who want to have a sort of permanency in that community and have the professionally hired counselors come into their homes and help them on their family problems…. They help them. They consult with them. They have a friend in the community, besides just bread and butter money. (LBA 68: 339)

     

    In this argument, it is made particularly clear how one must allegedly exclude in order to include and must discriminate against outsiders in order to maintain the intimacy of the community itself.

     

    Against such claims, Archibald Cox, representing the appellees, moved the argument back towards broader modes of identity and common being. He successfully convinced a majority of the court that welfare residency requirements, precisely in their intended protection of the integrity of individual state borders and budgets, infringed on a constitutionally protected liberty: the right to travel. “Our constitutional law,” Cox writes in his brief for the case, “recognizes the basic human right to geographic mobility,” a liberty that “was a key element in our development as a free people” (LBA 68: 100). (Cox even points out, in a telling historical detail, that the Articles of Confederation except “paupers and vagabonds” from what they otherwise guaranteed to be “free ingress and regress to and from any other State,” but that this exception was omitted in Article IV, Section 2 of the U.S. Constitution, which declares that “the Citizens of each State shall be entitled to all the Privileges and Immunities of Citizens in the several States” [LBA 68: 100].) Cox also argues eloquently that the classification at issue in this case

     

    is made in relation to the bare essentials of life, material and spiritual. Public assistance is the last resource of those unable to support themselves…. For those who cannot satisfy the one-year-residence rule, the classification means deprivation of shelter, food, and clothing. When public assistance is withheld, the entire quality of life–sometimes even life itself–is placed in jeopardy. (LBA 68: 92)

     

    In effect, Cox’s argument evokes a common human identity defined this time not by its duties and responsibilities but by its brute material needs. Thus, as he said in oral arguments, the policies in question discriminate against “those who exercise the fundamental liberty of moving to a new residence in pursuit of better opportunities, better life, or what else they consider to be an advantage.” Such a discrimination, he argued strongly, “is invidious in the same sense that discrimination on grounds of race or religion is invidious” (LBA 68: 390). Cox thus tried to associate a discrimination against short-time residents with the kind of racial categories already recognized as “suspect” classifications and therefore requiring a state to have “compelling” reasons in order to employ them.

     

    Such arguments prevailed with the majority of the court. In his decision, Justice William Brennan rejected the communitarian language of insiders and outsiders and, echoing Cox’s language of biological necessity, argued that durational requirements merely created

     

    two classes of needy resident families indistinguishable from each other except that one is composed of residents who have resided a year or more, and the second of residents who have resided less than a year, in the jurisdiction. On the basis of this sole difference, the first class is granted, and the second class is denied, welfare aid upon which may depend the ability of the families to obtain the very means to subsist–food, shelter, and other necessities of life…. [The] appellees’ central contention is that the statutory prohibition of benefits to residents of less than a year creates a classification which constitutes an invidious discrimination denying them equal protection of the laws. We agree. (Shapiro 627)

     

    Citing Korematsu v. United States and the established doctrine of “compelling” state interests, Brennan also argues that when welfare applicants move from state to state, even if they are doing so to seek higher welfare benefits, they are “exercising a constitutional right, and any classification which serves to penalize the exercise of that right, unless shown to be necessary to promote a compelling governmental interest, is unconstitutional” (Shapiro 634). For the majority, none of the several reasons proposed as justifications for the state’s interest in welfare residency requirements–such as protecting state budgets or discouraging immigration by indigents–appeared sufficiently compelling.

     

    Shapiro‘s rejection of durational residency tests for welfare would thus seem to be a significant victory for a relatively inclusive vision of welfare rights. But the logic of this case actually conceals a theoretical limitation, at once broad and particular, on the concept of collective provision.21 As we have seen, Cox’s successful argument for the appellees emphasizes that residency requirements infringe a constitutional right to travel and suggests that welfare is different from other state-provided benefits because it addresses fundamental human needs. In several exchanges during oral arguments, however, Cox and the Court seem to indicate a crucial point at which the provision of even such basic necessities can be limited. This limit is never quite spelled out and yet is shadowed by the very reticence with which Cox and the justices avoid spelling it out. This process begins when Cox is in the process of questioning the various rationales that are being used to explain the state’s alleged interest in durational residency requirements. One such argument is the idea that such requirements provide an objective test of residence.22 Cox suggests that “one has to be very careful” about this concept, because

     

    Residence under the Social Security laws means residence–means presence in the state. Living there. Not for temporary purpose. In other words, without the intention of going somewhere else. (LBA 68: 393)

     

    Here, Cox seems at first to say that residence is no different than simple presence, but then immediately begins to limit such a definition. He concedes that residence must not be for a “temporary purpose” and says there must be no intention to leave; yet he pointedly refrains from the more obvious possible formulation: that residency requires a positive intention to stay.The Court, perhaps understandably, wants to know more about precisely what this means:

     

    THE COURT. Suppose he wanted to stay in Massachusetts six months–live as a resident?
    MR. COX: He would then be a resident.
    THE COURT. And live in Florida six months as a resident?
    MR. COX: Well, it would then be–it’s a little hard for me to think of someone doing that and still qualifying for Aid to Dependent Children, Your Honor. The very money spent going back and forth–
    THE COURT: You can’t laugh that proposition off, because that’s a very common thing in America.
    MR. COX: Well, I suggest it isn’t a common thing in relation to the types of people we’re talking about here. (LBA 68: 393)

     

    Let us mark in passing the rather dark irony that surfaces momentarily here in the acknowledgment that a political freedom to travel is not the same thing as a material ability to travel. In 1956, Supreme Court Justice Felix Frankfurter, in a concurring opinion on another case involving issues of wealth and poverty, had cited Anatole France’s ironic praise of the “majestic equality” of a Law that “forbids the rich as well as the poor to sleep under bridges, to beg in the streets, and to steal bread” (Griffin v. Illinois 351 U.S. 12, 15). The Shapirodecision in effect makes the same point in reverse, by affirming how the law permits both rich and poor to spend six months of the year in Florida if they can afford to get there. At this point, however, the Court still wishes to press Cox on this difficult idea of what it means to “live as a resident” in a state:

     

    THE COURT: But how long must he be a resident?
    MR. COX: Such a person under our position, to answer you squarely, such a person under our position would be entitled to aid six months in Massachusetts and six months in Florida….
    THE COURT: That, Mr. Cox, is subject to the right of each state to take a reasonable time to authenticate the bona fide residence in the state, and the “means test,” and the various other things.
    MR. COX: Oh, yes, quite…. The point that I want to emphasize with respect to this test of residence is that one must ask what is it that you are trying to test? I think that it lurks behind that expression…. We are really asking more permanency than being in the state voluntarily with no intention of leaving. And to the extent that something more lurks there, then our answer is simply that requiring the “something more” is itself an arbitrary and capricious classification. (LBA 68: 393-4)

     

    Something “lurks” behind the demand for residency, Cox suggests–his very image seeming, as it were, to evoke the homeless vagrant lurking in the doorways and back alleys of civil life. Cox rejects whatever “lurks behind” this demand for a so-called “permanency” that in some elusive way transcends mere physical presence in the state. This term, Cox seems to imply, is simply a coded expression for something that, in political discourses of early-modern England and America, might have been called a “settled interest,” a minimum level of income or property (the kind of criteria that used to be required, prior to and sometimes after the American Constitution, even for suffrage itself).23 Cox also rejects the idea argued in the Connecticut brief that permanent residents are those who have made an “investment” in the community, pointing out that AFDC is designed in the first place to aid “dependent children,” who can hardly be said to have yet contributed anything to any community anywhere. Moreover, he says, since it is generally impossible to “measure the matter of ‘contribution’ or ‘investment’ in the community… this is really a euphemistic way of expressing… discrimination against strangers, or outsiders” (LBA 68: 396). But the specific citizens discriminated against in this case (by their exclusion from welfare benefits) are already being considered, at least by Cox, as full-fledged residents. Does one then cease to be a stranger and outsider at the very moment of arrival at a given place, provided only that one has no “intention of going somewhere else”? This question is necessarily pertinent in that this whole exchange follows Cox’s rejection of the idea that requiring a one-year stay would provide the state with an “objective” test to determine whether or not an individual was a genuine, bona fide resident.

     

    But even as Cox systematically rejects all these related ideas of permanency and economic interest as appropriate criteria for welfare eligibility, he still accepts that there is some basic status that can be called residency. In fact, he is constrained to do so, for it is the heart of his argument–as Justice Brennan restates in the passage from the majority decision cited above–that durational welfare requirements do not merely distinguish between insiders and outsiders, residents and nonresidents, but instead between two classes of resident. But this “bona fide residence in a state” that both Cox and the court agree is a legitimate distinction appears to be a deeply problematic status, since it is constituted neither by simply being in the state, nor by a particular duration of time spent there, nor by having a “settled interest” of property and income. A radical indeterminacy seems to be inscribed not only in this all-important concept but also in the parallel idea of travel and migration against which residency must be defined. A few moments later, in fact, the Court draws from Cox another significant qualification:

     

    THE COURT: I haven’t quite understood how all the arguments are going on the assumption that the right to travel from place to place is precisely the same as the right to live where you please.
    MR. COX: Well I think that I have sought to stress the right to live where you please as the basic right. It seems to me that the right to journey, to make a pleasure swing around the country or to go to Europe, raises different problems and is a lesser right, I would think. And my case–Your Honors emphasized a point I should have made more sharply, perhaps. Our case deals with the right to live where you please to seek better opportunities.
    THE COURT: That’s what I think this resolves itself into, instead of the right to “travel.”
    MR. COX: I agree. (LBA 68: 397)

     

    Even though the salient issue of Shapirois repeatedly defined as the right to travel, the case would indeed seem, as Cox concedes here, to be more precisely understood as being about the right to migrate, to “live where you please to seek better opportunities.” This more specific word does briefly appear in the majority decision:

     

    An indigent who desires to migrate, resettle, find a new job, and start a new life will doubtless hesitate if he knows that he must risk making the move without the possibility of falling back on state welfare assistance during his first year of residence, when his need may be most acute. But the purpose of inhibiting migration by needy persons into the State is constitutionally impermissible. (Shapiro 629; emphases added)

     

    In this passage, migration refers to the act of a person who goes somewhere to settle or make a life: the act of the pioneer, the homesteader, or the immigrant, the very dramatis personae of the American dream. In many respects, the appellees’ winning case depends on the ideological force of this image, as against an equally ideological contrast between the homeless vagrant and what the Court calls the “old families” of a well-established community (401). In his majority decision, for example, Brennan argues that residency requirements are grounded in the assumption “that indigents who enter a State with the hope of securing higher welfare benefits are somehow less deserving.” By contrast, Brennan writes,

     

    we do not perceive why a mother who is seeking to make a new life for herself and her children should be regarded as less deserving because she considers, among other factors, the level of a State’s public assistance. Surely such a mother is no less deserving than a mother who moves into a particular State in order to take advantage of its better educational facilities. (Shapiro 631-2)

     

    In such a passage, Brennan in effect displaces the ideological specters of the “welfare queen” and the “lurking” vagrant by imagining the kind of person at issue in this case as a devoted mother moved by a spirit of independence and rational economic calculation to seek out a better life for her family and herself. The force of the image is almost enough to conceal how this description also implicitly accepts the conservative principle that relief should, in any case, go only to what Brennan frankly calls the “deserving” poor.

     

    Nevertheless, the word “migrant” inevitably evokes another meaning that indicates the absolute limit of what might be thinkable by the prevailing logic of welfare. This becomes clear in another exchange a few minutes later:

     

    THE COURT: Mr. Cox, I’ve come across statements to the effect that in some of these states that have fine climates, such as the far Western states, the children of migrants are not allowed into the public schools because they don’t satisfy the residence requirements; and also the same sort of statement with respect to access to state health facilities. Assuming that that’s so, does that present a related conceptual problem?
    MR. COX: Well I would think the genuine migrant presented a different problem, that here we are talking about someone who is not moving from place to place. I don’t mean to suggest, Your Honor, that there isn’t ground for a constitutional attack in those cases, but I do suggest that at least from the standpoint of what we’re dealing with–
    THE COURT: But a negative answer here–would a negative answer here indicate, a fortiori, a negative answer in–
    MR. COX: You mean if we were to lose these cases?
    THE COURT: If you were to lose these cases, would that indicate a negative answer in the case of the migrants who are denied an opportunity to go to school?
    MR. COX: I would think it clearly would even enable Connecticut, say, to say that it would not admit to the schools in Greenwich and other places near New York the children of people who move out from New York to Greenwich because there are better schools there (403).

     

    This striking passage both insists on and yet virtually refuses to name or consider the migrant worker as the limit case at which the whole argument finally arrives. The force of the discourse in the current case tends to exclude the migrant from consideration, by focusing on residents who are said to be equal in status and therefore entitled to “equal protection” under the law. Yet the figure of the migrant worker forces itself into the argument here, much as it did implicitly in Cox’s previous reference above to “strangers” and “outsiders.” The Court seems to ask, though perhaps not very clearly and with a kind of reticence, about the implications of the current case for the much more drastic residency restrictions imposed on migrant workers, who are often, as he mentions, excluded from even the most basic state services such as elementary education because they lack even the intention to stay in the place they happen to be. If the Court should decide in this case to allow states to deny welfare benefits even to immigrants in the positive sense (those who arrive intending to stay), then states will surely believe they can deny services of any kind to the mere migrant. Cox assents to this conclusion, though only in the most indirect of ways: by displacing the already-ghostly figure of the migrant worker with that of the citizen who moves from the city to the suburbs because they have better schools there! One suspects that Cox’s incongruous counterexample is intended to reassure the Court that more is at stake here than the rights of those whom even that tenuous and indefinable status of “resident” eludes. At any rate, one thing is clear about the decision reached in this case. Although it is still commonly argued that “Residency as a factor in determining eligibility for public assistance was declared illegal… in the case of Shapiro v. Thompson (Trattner 21, n. 3), the real fact is, as Edward Sparer summarizes, that “Shapiro bans durational residency tests, but not residency tests.” The decision thus permits the states to “bar the nonresident citizen from receiving welfare benefits,” and “the principal group of persons to whom this distinction applies is the migratory workers who move from state to state for the purpose of working in the field” (76). The migrant worker is thus a kind of absent presence in a case whose specific positive effect–the striking down of durational requirements for AFDC–seems in its whole force and absolute principle to license his exclusion from social welfare in every sense. Even more broadly, this case affirms certain rights and freedoms only by limiting them and extends welfare benefits to newly arrived residents only by excluding the nonresident.

     

    Such conclusions are further confirmed by the obvious observation that the figure of the illegal alien or migrant worker, present in this case only in his nearly total absence, is by contrast central in other discourses about welfare. To cite an almost random example of an all-too-familiar discourse, Senator Strom Thurmond, a few years before the welfare reform bill of 1996, made the argument that such a bill would be necessary

     

    to limit the rising tide of illegal aliens who, attracted by the many advantages of living or working in the United States, flood across our borders and take jobs from American workers. In many cases, those illegal entrants and their families soon become a welfare burden on our society, supported in one way or another by the American taxpayer. (qtd. in Harris 186)

     

    Correspondingly, the “welfare reform” act of 1996 placed explicit new limits on what it also carefully identifies as three different kinds of migrant or immigrant: Americans moving between states, “qualified” (that is, legal) aliens from outside the United States, and illegal aliens. For the first class, the bill authorized any State to “apply to a family the rules (including benefit amounts) of the program… of another State if the family has moved to the State from the other State and has resided in the State for less than 12 months” (United States 20).24 The second class, qualified aliens, were declared “not eligible for any Federal means-tested public benefit for a period of 5 years beginning on the date of the alien’s entry into the United States” (United States 161). And as for the third class, which would, of course, include the majority of migrant workers, the law provides that “an alien who is not a qualified alien… is not eligible for any Federal public benefit” (United States 157). In the debates leading up to and following the passage of the bill, some liberal voices particularly deplored such provisions, and President Clinton promised that “if reelected he would fix a flawed welfare law” (Weaver 336)–though this promise (unlike his famous original promise to “end welfare as we know it”) was at best partially fulfilled by provisions of the 1997 budget, which restored some benefits for disabled immigrants. And in any case, it was merely the restrictions on welfare for legal aliens that were even at issue. Our analysis suggests, by contrast, that limitations on welfare for “strangers and outsiders” are in no sense merely peripheral to the bill’s overall purpose but rather quite central to it. Indeed, the fact that, as most studies suggest, illegal migrant workers pay more into state budgets (via payroll taxes) than they ever receive via welfare also merely confirms, by contrast, that such policies do not really respond to material social problems but emerge, rather, from the kind of enduring habits of thought sketched here.

     

    Early in the year following Shapiro, the Supreme Court issued another decision on welfare that is, by contrast, generally considered a profound defeat for welfare rights. In Dandridge v. Williams (1970), the Court upheld the constitutionality of laws in Maryland (and, by extension, of numerous similar laws in other states) that set a maximum cap on the welfare benefits available to a given family. In Maryland, specific welfare benefits were paid to each needy family under AFDC according to a formula calculating the minimum level of subsistence income necessary per child; yet the state also set a maximum limit of $250 per month per family and thus failed to provide additional benefits for any family with seven or more members–five children with two parents, or six children with one parent. Like Shapiro, this case thus also locates itself at the intersection of common being and the economic calculus. In this case, it is implicitly conceded by both sides that human beings are united by a common level of material and financial need that can be precisely determined by the state. There could have been be no dispute at all if there had not been that initial act of calculation by the state to determine the minimum subsistence level for a family of three, four, or five people, and so forth.

     

    At the simplest level, then, the Court’s decision is a negative one: that is, it rules that a state need not support people according to the state’s own calculation of their needs. Such a conclusion is, moreover, itself made in the name of calculation. As Justice Potter Stewart writes in the majority decision, the Maryland law is justified as an attempt to “reconcile the demands of its needy citizens with the finite resources available to meet those demands” (Dandridge 474). Cutting off the larger families from additional benefits is one reasonable way, the majority argues, of rationing an overall welfare budget that is evidently too small to meet the needs of collective provision in the state. At the end of the majority decision, Justice Stewart once again portrays the Court’s actions in negative terms: as simply a refusal to intervene in matters best left to the wisdom of state lawmakers:

     

    We do not decide today that the Maryland regulation is wise, that it best fulfills the relevant social and economic objectives that Maryland might ideally espouse, or that a more just and humane system could not be devised. Conflicting claims of morality and intelligence are raised by opponents and proponents of almost every measure, certainly including the one before us. But the intractable economic, social, and even philosophical problems presented by public welfare assistance programs are not the business of this Court. (Dandridge 486)

     

    In fact, however, the negative form of the principle affirmed in this decision necessarily entails a positive version of itself, one that indeed has fundamental economic, social, and philosophic consequences. This positive principle might be formulated something like this: the State must calculate a standard of material need for its citizens and yet must not meet that standard. The brief for the appellants frankly acknowledges that the laws at issue here continue to reflect long-standing fears about the “undeserving poor,” citing the conclusions of the British Poor Law Commission of 1835 that the situation of people on relief “shall not be made really or apparently so eligible (desirable) as the situation of the independent laborer of the lowest class” (LBA 69: 60). They also cite Arthur Burns, at the time a counselor to President Nixon on domestic affairs and soon to be Chair of the Federal Reserve bank, who claims that “there are… States in which the welfare payments going to the family are larger than what an unskilled man working at or close to the minimum wage can earn,” which “stimulates some people to leave work and join the welfare population.” To avoid this, Burns argues, the state should set “a maximum on welfare payments so that welfare is not too attractive financially” (cited LBA 69: 87). This argument, which prevailed with a majority of the Court on this occasion, and which we identified above as the quintessential right-wing approach to poverty, here grounds itself in an act of calculation that is always unfinished (that is, the state must calculate the minimum it should give and then must also recalculate how much not to give) and, even more paradoxically, grasps equality itself only in the form of inequality. In its laws, argued the majority decision, “the State maintains some semblance of an equitable balance between families on welfare and those supported by an employed breadwinner” (Dandridge 486). But what the Court means, to speak in coldly practical terms, is that welfare families must have less than the working poor: the “equitable balance” of which he speaks literally exists in the form of a material inequity. To be as clear as possible, in this case, the law devotes itself with its full force and principle not to ending privation, and not even, at least after a certain point, to relieving privation, but instead, quite precisely, to preserving it.

     

    This paradoxical logic only deepens when one considers the appellees’s unsuccessful argument that family caps for welfare infringe on the constitutional doctrine of Equal Protection. The maximum grant regulation, write Joseph A. Matera and Gerald A. Smith in their appellee’s brief, creates “two subclasses of AFDC recipients, those who are members of large families containing seven or more people and those who belong to families of six members or less” (LBA 69: 125). And as for the additional children in large families, Matera suggests in oral argument, “the State computes their needs, and then simply ignores them” (LBA 69: 298). The Court points out, however, that the state formula does not simply provide a particular dollar amount per child but rather employs a sliding scale, giving “$30 a month for the first child, and $25 a month for the second child” and so forth (LBA 69: 300). It would thus seem difficult to make an equal protection argument in terms of individual children within families, as opposed to between families as a whole. To be sure, the state makes its initial calculation on the basis of the number of children in a family. But, as the Court suggests:

     

    THE COURT: …$30 isn’t allocated to A, and $10 to B, or anything like that?
    MR. MATERA: No, sir. It’s dependent upon the number of individuals in the family.
    THE COURT: So, when the State sets a maximum of $250, that money is allocable among all members of the family. It doesn’t mean that the State doesn’t think the seventh child is going to not share at all in the $250.
    MR. MATERA: I would disagree, in this respect, Mr. Justice White, because the State does think that…. Because when they looked at… the number of people in that family, they said that in order to live you need $331–
    THE COURT: Well, I understand that.
    MR. MATERA: …But, of course, the welfare department would believe that the mother would take those funds which already are available, and certainly divide them among the children, because she wouldn’t allow certain children to starve merely because their needs are not recognized, you see. (LBA 69: 305)

     

    And again, similarly, in the final moments of the oral arguments:

     

    THE COURT: …it’s not the fifth, or sixth, or seventh, or eighth child that necessarily suffers. It’s the whole family’s income that is reduced, on a per capita basis.
    MR. MATERA: That would be the practical effect, because a parent would simply not let its child starve. (LBA 69: 310)

     

    At this point, it is hard not to hear a hypothetical rejoinder that Matera’s words seem irresistibly to evoke: that although a parent would simply not let its child starve, a state would. To be precise, however, the Court is simply claiming that because of the possible economies of scale and, even more so, the emotional bonds of the family as such, the “fifth or sixth child in a family” will “eat right along with the rest of them,” so that the law “just means that everybody [in the family] would eat less” (306). As the majority decision puts it, more formally:

     

    Although the appellees argue that the younger and more recently arrived children in such families are totally deprived of aid, a more realistic view is that the lot of the entire family is diminished because of the presence of additional children without any increase in payments. (Dandridge 477)

     

    Thus, as it were, the additional children are not entitled to a claim of equal protection under the law precisely because they belong to a collectivity: they are members of a kind of mini-community within which they will be provided for, if not adequately, then at least equally with all its other members.

     

    Our primary point here is not that this claim about the intrinsic equality of the family is spurious, as a whole range of feminist work on familial relations and domestic abuse has vividly suggested. Nor are we primarily observing that these so-called “family caps” on welfare (which remain central in contemporary debates on the subject) are obviously conditioned by the ideological fantasy of the “welfare queen” who has additional babies in order to get larger welfare checks. Rather, we want to emphasize how this decision grounds itself on the alleged existence of this domain of absolute, unconditional collectivity and equality, the family, which it uses to license or justify a vision of society and the state understood as, by contrast, fundamentally individualistic and unequal. Within this logic, the family is assumed, by some mysterious and nonnegotiable necessity of its own nature, to care for each new member within its preexisting material capabilities, however limited they may be. The whole purpose of the AFDC program from its beginnings, the appellees argue repeatedly in the discourse of this case, is to “make it possible for the child to remain in or return to the custody and care of his parents or relatives who have a natural bond of affection and concern for his well-being” (LBA 69: 45; paraphrasing the Social Security Act, 42 U.S.C.A. 601). Indeed, the appellees observe how the Maryland Code itself declares that the primary goal of AFDC is “the strengthening of family life” (LBA 69: 135, citing Maryland Code Annotated Article 88A, Section 44a [1064]). Only via the achievement of this goal does the program in any sense even attempt to achieve what might otherwise be understood as the broader and more fundamental goal of enabling “the child’s unmet need to be supplied” (LBA 69: 45). The welfare reform bill of 1996 operates with precisely the same logic. This bill amends Title IV of the Social Security Act in a fundamental way: on the one hand, it continues to state that the fundamental purpose of welfare is to “encourage the formation and maintenance of two-parent families,” and on the other hand, it specifically licenses states to enact “family cap” limits on welfare and stipulates that its programs will not “entitle any individual or family to assistance” (42 USCS 601 [2001]). So, one more time, let us be plain: precisely as it strips away any protection against scarcity from almost every space of social life, the law also claims to be fostering a specific domain of irreducible collectivity called “the family” within which, allegedly, our most fundamental needs may somehow always be met.

     

    3. At the Limits of Community

     

    The two figures our readings have discovered at the center of these cases about welfare, the migrant worker and the family, represent as it were the positive and negative limits of common being itself. The migrant worker is excluded from the process of mutual provision in the familiar positive way, because of his race, his national identity, his lack of a settled interest or even a permanent residency in a place. With the family, however–or at least with this hypothetical vision of the family–the very idea of common being encounters something that exceeds it: that is, our national identity as Americans binds us less than this imagined family does. Thus, even as our analysis pointed to a theoretical exclusion of the migrant at the heart of the seemingly inclusive logic of the Shapiro decision, so the brutal language of indifference in Dandridge could also be read as announcing the possibility of something very different: a sphere of limitless, open-ended inclusivity, where all, as the Court suggests, will “eat right along with the rest.” In this imagined collectivity, mutual provision evidently takes place without thought; or, more precisely, takes place via a calculation that, instead of being forever-unfinished, is rather always-already in excess of itself. And to do no more than extend the same hypothetical model in the other direction, every kind of abundance would, one can only assume, be similarly shared without thought or calculation–or, again, more precisely, shared via a process of calculation that undoes itself by being shared.

     

    In this case, indeed, the brute fact that real families do not necessarily embody this model is precisely what allows it to reemerge as a new possibility in theory and in practice. For this is not, of course, to suggest that a state should think of itself as one big happy family, a model long ago contaminated with the worst features of patriarchal oppression. It is, rather, to suggest that at one and the same point where a model of community based on common being reaches its negative limit, one recognizes, by contrast, what Jean-Luc Nancy in The Inoperative Community calls the community of our being-in-common. The various models of mutual provision considered throughout, whether in relatively liberal, communitarian versions, or relatively conservative or libertarian versions, grasp community only as a unity of subjects who have something in common and whose obligation to other members always retains a fatal circularity: each subject is obligated to help create and preserve other subjects who are themselves defined by their capacity and willingness to undertake the same obligation. In such a model, as we have observed, the community does not and cannot end privation or poverty, since the threat of these things constitutes not only what is understood as the necessary goad of survival, but indeed the very glue of the social bond itself. In the community for which we argue, by contrast, singular beings join together on the basis of having nothing in common, that is, they have in common only their own finitude and consequently their exposure to both scarcity and to one another. Here, the inescapable neediness of finite beings is grasped not as their weakness or reproach but as their access to a collective wealth that is, if not infinite, then at least without limit. As against what even progressives tend to suggest is a necessary conservation of altruism (e.g., Solow ix), the community of being-in-common begins in the recognition of what Emmanuel Levinas calls the “plenitude of alterity”: a relation to the Other that is incommensurable and that therefore exceeds all calculation (Levinas 345). This community has no inside or outside and therefore no insiders or outsiders; it is a community (and an economy) of an all that remains forever open, an all thought so radically that this word would no longer even be an appropriate term to calculate it.

     

    Here, similarly, the very idea of “welfare” shifts–rather as T. H. Marshall suggested over thirty years ago but exceeding his suggestion–from its negative to its positive sense, from the ideas of “relief” or “insurance” or “safety net” to the much broader and more basic semantic idea of well-being. Marshall argues that the provision of welfare in this sense to everyone cannot exactly be a legal right as such, precisely because such a right would have to be calculated, quantified, and legislated; instead, he suggests, it can only be provided via what he calls “discretion,” an operation that does not ask, “‘what do the regulations say must be done?’, but ‘What action is most likely to produce the desired result?’” (87-88). And, he goes on, “this notion of discretion as positive, personal and beneficent can only be fully realized in a ‘welfare society’, that is, a society that recognizes its collective responsibility to seek to achieve welfare, and not only to relieve destitution or eradicate penury” (88). Marshall’s own thought unfortunately also illustrates how easy it is for this discretion to simply become calculation by another name.25 Thus one must give a slight additional turn to his schema, understanding this “discretion” as something always performed in the name of what Derrida calls Justice: that which brings forth and yet always escapes and exceeds all notions of law and right. “It is just that there be law,” Derrida argues, but at the same time, “just justice is incalculable, it requires us to calculate with the incalculable” (“Force of Law” 16). And the evident fact that justice “is always in excess with respect to right” does not mean, as some might claim (attempting, in the familiar way, to reduce deconstruction to quietism), that justice is therefore infinitely deferred or simply unattainable. Rather, as Derrida always insists, this “excess” whose name is Justice “presses urgently here and now” (Derrida and Ferraris 23).

     

    It is therefore self-evident to us that just as affirmative action makes sense only in the name of absolute deracialization, so any law addressing something called “welfare” must guarantee income, education, health-care, and the like, to all social subjects; and that the sole criterion of eligibility for such guarantees can only be finite being itself. Therefore: no one who is in any sense there can possibly be excluded from it. This process of mutual provision cannot even be reduced to what has sometimes been called a guaranteed minimum income (a formulation that simply returns to the economic calculus in its most ruinous form).26 Indeed, what some would raise as objections to such a policy–that the level of such guaranteed income could not be determined in advance nor fixed once and for all, that people could and probably would always ask for it to be higher, and that to afford it would collectively require the expenditure without reserve of all economic privilege and individual wealth–are in fact its strengths. For one must understand this worldwide offering or sharing of well-being as, to repeat our formula, a process of calculation intended to undo calculation. Because all being is being-in-common, and because all community takes place, as Nancy argues, at the common limit where finite beings are exposed to one another, therefore those of us who meet at this limit (of) community literally in so doing pro-vide or look out for one another. This is not a (moral) choice, nor the product of ascetic self-denial, nor even something to be built as a Work in the aftermath of a revolution and in the name of some principle like Humanity or Equality; rather, it is the simple, inevitable (practical) condition of our existence, remaining always already to be re-revealed.

     

    Some will perhaps respond, however, that this essay, far from having in any sense begun to solve the problem of the practical, has not yet even begun to address it; that all this remains mere theory, and that none of it is either feasible or realistic. People will simply not go along with it, some will say; indeed, Americans have recently shown, if anything, an increasing resistance to affirmative action and an “increasing reluctance… to support citizens on welfare” (Gutmann ix). But we observe how such objections are always themselves posed as questions of thought and yet never really presented as one’s own thought. In other words, it is not argued that racial or economic justice is somehow materially impossible; rather, it is alleged that there is some ideality, some unspecified absence or vague presence in consciousness that makes it impossible. Similarly, most people never quite say, “I am selfish”; instead, they say, impersonally or abstractly, that altruism is scarce, or that Americans are greedy and individualistic, or that life isn’t fair. The same logic always re-engenders itself: because there might not be enough, we must each grab what we can, producing an aggregate of selfishness that endlessly ensures the repetition of the same scarcity and the same response. But if the impediment itself exists only in ideas and consciousness, then where else but in what Nancy calls “the gravity of thought” could one look for the solution?27 Thus the whole question of the practical necessarily evokes that exhilarating inversion that Marx articulates in perhaps his most famous single utterance–“Philosophers have only interpreted the world, in various ways; the point, however, is to change it” (Marx and Engels 145). We join others in the broad Marxist and post-Marxist tradition in understanding this famous dictum not as a simple opposition of theory and practice, intended to reproach philosophers for interpreting rather than changing the world. Rather, Marx suggests that to reinterpret the world is always, and necessarily, to change it.28 We acknowledge, then, that our project here is unfinished, but this is because the community for which we argue is always “to come” and because the problem of the practical itself therefore always remains (to be) thought.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Derrida, “Racism’s Last Word” (1985), and Derrida and Tlili, eds., For Nelson Mandela (1987).

     

    2. The model of politics and collectivity for which we argue in this essay follows most closely the thought of Jean-Luc Nancy in The Inoperative Community. In addition to the works named in our text, other books that have influenced our thought include Maurice Blanchot’s The Unavowable Community and Giorgio Agamben’s The Coming Community. We also believe the community for which we argue to be broadly consistent with what Derrida calls “the new international” in Specters of Marx. Although Derrida has expressed theoretical reservations about the term “community,” he also acknowledges that he finally has “no qualms” about “Blanchot’s ‘unavowable’ community or Nancy’s ‘inoperative’ one” (Derrida and Ferraris 24). We join Derrida in understanding Nancy, as well as Blanchot, as affirming “a communism where the common is anything but common; it is the placing in common [mise en commun] of that which is no longer of the order of subjectivities, or of intersubjectivity as a relation–however paradoxical–between presences.” It is important to emphasize, therefore, how the thought of any of these writers always seeks to question “community in the classical sense, and intersubjectivity as well” (Derrida and Ferraris 24-25).

     

    3. See the volume co-edited by Guinier and Sturm, and perhaps in particular Claude M. Steele’s contribution, “Understanding the Performance Gap” (60-67), on the problem of what he calls “stereotype threat.” During the period in which this article was written, the head of the University of California school system, Richard C. Atkinson, announced plans to “no longer require that students take the SAT I in order to apply for admission to the University,” in part because “minority perceptions about fairness [of such tests] cannot be… easily dismissed.” Atkinson’s remarks can be found at the following address: <http://www.ucop.edu/ucophome/pres/comments/satspch.html>.

     

    4. The other Justices who side with Powell, it should be noted, assert in their opinion a strict construction of Title VI, for example. The matter of revised or even reversed construction principles over time is interesting, to say the least.

     

    5. Reva B. Siegel’s exemplary analysis of Hopwood argues that “strict scrutiny” doctrines under the Fourteenth Amendment radically restrict the use of race-conscious remedies “in order to protect and preserve real differences among racial groups” (49). See Gotanda and also Kull, who both suggest that U.S. constitutional policy has never been “color blind.”

     

    6. See Personal Justice Denied: The Report of the Commission on Wartime Relocation and Internment of Civilians (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1982). The most salient parts of the document, including the quotation, are on the web at: <http://www.geocities.com/capitolhill/Senate/4417/personaljusticedenied.html>.

     

    7. Statistics in this paragraph are from the University’s official Affirmative Action Reports, issued in October 2000, produced by the Office of the Assistant Provost and Assistant Vice President for Academic Human Resources. The quotation is from the University’s UAAO, Paulette Granberry Russell, from an e-mail, 25 January 2001. The University does provide itself some “wiggle room” on these matters, since it does break down particular minority utilizations/underutilizations separately from the general minority statistic. Nevertheless, every possible category of minority hiring for the Department of English is listed as having a hiring goal of zero, which effectively tells Chairs of Departments that no affirmative action activity is necessary. The concept of “availability” is defined on the University’s Affirmative Action Office website as: “Availability analysis estimates the percentages of minorities and women available for employment in each identified job group. Persons available are those interested and qualified to perform the work at hand during the upcoming Affirmative Action Plan year.” Michigan State University’s policies on affirmative action are contained in two documents called “IDEA” and “IDEA II.” “IDEA II” specifically links University support of affirmative action to “utilization” data: “Academic units that are underrepresented in terms of relevant availability data can work in partnership with the Office of the Provost as needed to arrange transitional funding and/or set up funds necessary to take advantage of targeted hiring opportunities when they arise, or to broaden possible recruitment or retention activities” (emphasis added; <http://web.msu.edu/access/idea2.html#enhanceeffort>).

     

    8. Delgado has written about “role model” theory in telling ways (“Affirmative”). This logic, too, would have proven problematic, had the Supreme Court affirmed it.

     

    9. See the Grutter companion decision, decided 27 March 2001, which overturns the University of Michigan Law School system of affirmative action admissions and explicitly sets up a future collision of Gratz and Grutter on appeal.

     

    10. It is important to acknowledge here and throughout (as general inspiration for the analysis of affirmative action in these pages) the significance of Girardeau A. Spann’s work in this area, and particularly Race Against the Court, which concludes that racial minorities must recognize the Supreme Court as having functioned generally as “an antagonistic political institution rather than as a hospitable benefactor” (170).

     

    11. See, for example, Klinkner and Smith for an elaboration of the limits of twentieth-century racial inequity reformism.

     

    12. We borrow the phrase “exception to the exception” from Donald E. Pease, in his oral response to Michael Hardt at Michigan State University’s “Globalicities” conference, October, 2001.

     

    13. Nancy Fraser and Linda Gordon suggest that “‘dependency’ is the single most crucial term in the current U. S. debate about welfare reform,” in an important essay that historicizes and critiques this term (618).

     

    14. In addition to books otherwise cited, some of the many other outstanding liberal or Left approaches to welfare include Frances Fox Piven and Richard A. Cloward’s Regulating the Poor (1971; 2nd ed. 1993); Michael B. Katz’s The Undeserving Poor (1989); Joel F. Handler’s and Yeheskel Hansenfeld’s The Moral Construction of Poverty (1991) and Handler’s The Poverty of Welfare Reform (1995); Linda Gordon’s Pitied but Not Entitled (1994); Herbert Gans’s The War Against the Poor (1995); and Ruth Sidel’s Keeping Women and Children Last (1996).

     

    15. Mead argues quite specifically that “obligation,” rather than mere quantitative “equality,” is the fundamental issue of all social policy, arguing that “The most vulnerable Americans need obligations, as much as rights” (Mead 17).

     

    16. Senator Jesse Helms on the floor of the Senate on Thursday, 1 August 1996, alleged that “the average welfare recipient stays at the public trough for 13 years.” (Helms’s statistics are, by the way, as excessive as his rhetoric, since, as Wilson documents, most studies of welfare usage conclude that “half of all welfare recipients exited welfare during the first year, and three-quarters departed within two years” (166).

     

    17. Some of the best-known works in this conservative conversation are Martin Anderson’s Welfare (1978), George Gilder’s Wealth and Poverty (1981), Charles Murray’s Losing Ground (1984), Lawrence M. Mead’s Beyond Entitlement (1986), Gertrude Himmelfarb’s The De-Moralization of Society (1995), and Marvin Olasky’s The Tragedy of American Compassion (1996). Concise samples of various writers making the argument summarized here can be found in Mehuron, Points of Light (1990).

     

    18. William Julius Wilson agrees that “a liberal-conservative consensus on welfare reform has recently emerged,” which includes, among other things, the opinion that welfare recipients should be required to work (164).

     

    19. Edward V. Sparer, who at the time of these decisions headed the Columbia University Center on Social Welfare Policy and Law, writes that “the particulars in the Court’s reasoning… gave great hope that Shapiro would have enormous consequences for other welfare rights. By April 1970… the Court–after a significant change in personnel–made it clear that such hope was false” (75).

     

    20. See, e.g., Kurland and Casper, Landmark Briefs and Arguments of the Supreme Court (37, 108, 237). All subsequent citations from the briefs and oral arguments of both Shapiro v. Thompson and Dandridge v. Williams are from this series, henceforth identified parenthetically as LBA, with volume and page number.

     

    21. Although it has different particulars, our argument about Shapiro is complementary to that of Bussiere, who suggests that Justice Brennan put together a majority decision in this case only by grounding it “in the right to interstate travel and… classical liberal values,” thus stripping the case “of its downwardly redistributive policy potential” (107). We also agree generally with Nixon, who argues “that the Supreme Court’s traditional approach to deciding durational residency requirements, while producing a sound moral outcome, is legally flawed and ultimately does more harm than good to strengthen welfare rights” (210-11).

     

    22. In his dissent, Justice Stewart finds plausible, as one “rational basis” for the kind of laws at issue in this case, the idea that “a residence requirement provides an objective and workable means of determining that an applicant intends to remain indefinitely within the jurisdiction” (Shapiro 673).

     

    23. In his dissent to Shapiro, Justice Harlan cites his own previous dissent in Harper v. Virginia Board of Elections 383 U.S. 663 (1966), a well-known case that ruled that poll taxes were unconstitutional. In that earlier case, Harlan had suggested that “it was probably accepted as sound political theory by a large percentage of Americans through most of our history, that people with some property have a deeper stake in community affairs, and are consequently more responsible, more educated, more knowledgeable, more worthy of confidence, than those without means, and that the community and Nation would be better managed if the franchise were restricted to such citizens” (Harper 683).

     

    24. This provision seems, however, to have been declared unconstitutional by the Supreme Court’s 1999 decision, Saenz v. Roe, which reaffirmed Shapiro‘s assertion of the right to travel.

     

    25. In his “Afterthought on ‘The Right to Welfare,’” for example, Marshall discusses how one British welfare agency, the Supplementary Benefits Commission, had adapted a “discretionary” model in the years following his original essay, but that such a policy had been found “to cause conflict, unhappy comparisons between the workless and the working poor and complaints from those who did not believe that they were getting their ‘rights’” (96).

     

    26. This is not the place for a detailed exposition of the enduring tradition of thought concerning a guaranteed social income, or what has recently been dubbed a “universal basic income” or “UBI” (see Parijs). But we very briefly observe how one tradition of this thought, influenced in part by Henry George’s famous idea of a land-value tax, considers the natural environment as a kind of common patrimony whose value should be divided among all citizens–an idea grounded absolutely in the most mechanical kind of economic calculation. The idea of a “negative income tax” or basic minimum income–which has sometimes been advocated even by right-wing thinkers such as Milton Friedman–also tends to fall prey to questions of common being (what are basic needs?) and calculation (how much can society afford to give?). For example, Robert Solow, in his preface to Parijs, suggests “a very low-level UBI would be feasible in economic, even budgetary, terms, especially because it would at least partially replace some current means-tested transfers” (Parijs xiii). In other words, UBI would just be “welfare” or “relief” under another name.

     

    27. For this phrase, see Nancy’s The Gravity of Thought.

     

    28. See, for example, Resnick and Wolff 37.

    Works Cited

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • —. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Anderson, Martin. Welfare: The Political Economy of Welfare Reform in the United States. Palo Alto, CA: Hoover Institution P, 1978.
    • Bennington, Geoff. Legislations: The Politics of Deconstruction. London: Verso, 1994.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Unavowable Community. Trans. Pierre Joris. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill, 1988.
    • Brown v. Board of Education. 347 U.S. Supreme Court 483. 1954.
    • Bussiere, Elizabeth. (Dis)entitling the Poor: The Warren Court, Welfare Rights, and the American Political Tradition. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State UP, 1997.
    • City of Richmond v. J.A. Croson Co. 488 U.S. Supreme Court 469. 1989.
    • Cornell, Drucilla. Beyond Accommodation: Ethical Feminism, Deconstruction, and the Law. 2nd ed. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1999.
    • Dandridge v. Williams. 397 U.S. Supreme Court 471. 1970.
    • Delgado, Richard. “Affirmative Action as a Majoritarian Device: Or, Do You Really Want to Be a Role Model?” Critical Race Theory: The Cutting Edge. Ed. Richard Delgado. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1995. 355-61.
    • —. The Coming Race War? And Other Apocalyptic Tales of America after Affirmative Action and Welfare. New York: New York UP, 1996.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Force of Law: The ‘Mystical Foundation of Authority’.” Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice. Ed. Drucilla Cornell, Michael Rosenfeld, and David Gray Carlson. New York: Routledge, 1992. 3-67.
    • —. “Racism’s Last Word.” Trans. Peggy Kamuf. Critical Inquiry 12 (Autumn 1985): 290-299.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Derrida, Jacques, and Maurizio Ferraris. A Taste for the Secret. Trans. Giacomo Donis. Ed. Giacomo Donis and David Webb. Cambridge, UK: Polity P, 2001.
    • Derrida, Jacques, and Mustapha Tlili, eds. For Nelson Mandela. New York: Seaver, 1987.
    • Dworkin, Ronald. A Matter of Principle. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1985.
    • Fiscus, Ronald J. The Constitutional Logic of Affirmative Action: Making the Case for Quotas. Ed. Stephen L. Wasby. Foreword Stanley Fish. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1992.
    • Flagg, Barbara J. Was Blind But Now I See: White Race Consciousness and the Law. New York and London: New York UP, 1998.
    • Fraser, Nancy, and Linda Gordon. “‘Dependency’ Demystified: Inscriptions of Power in a Keyword of the Welfare State.” Contemporary Political Philosophy: An Anthology. Ed. Robert E. Goodin and Philip Pettit. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, 1997. 618-633.
    • Fullilove v. Klutznick. 448 U.S. Supreme Court 448. 1980.
    • Gans, Herbert. The War Against the Poor: The Underclass and Antipoverty Policy. New York: Basic Books, 1995.
    • Gilder, George. Wealth and Poverty. New York: Basic Books, 1993.
    • Gordon, Linda. Pitied But Not Entitled: Single Mothers and the History of Welfare. New York, Free P, 1994.
    • Gotanda, Neil. “A Critique of ‘Our Constitution Is Color-Blind’.” Stanford Law Review 44.1 (November 1991): 1-68.
    • Gratz v. Bollinger. U.S. Dist. Court, E. Mich., South. Div. 2000. <http://www.mied.uscourts.gov/_opinions/Dugganpdf/PJD97cv75231.pdf>.
    • Griffin v. Illinois 351 U.S. Supreme Court 12. 1956.
    • Grutter v. Bollinger. U.S. Dist. Court, E. Mich., South. Div. 2001. <http://www.mied.uscourts.gov/_opinions/Friedmanpdf/BAF97cv75928.pdf>.
    • Guinier, Lani and Susan Sturm, eds. Who’s Qualified? Boston, MA: Beacon, 2001.
    • Gurin, Patricia. “Empirical Results from the Analyses Conducted for this Litigation.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/empir.html>.
    • —. “The Studies: Method and Measures.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/studies.html>.
    • —. “Theoretical Foundations for the Effect of Diversity.” <http://www.umich.edu/~urel/admissions/legal/expert/theor.html>.
    • Gutmann, Amy. “Introduction.” Solow vii-xv.
    • Handler, Joel F. The Poverty of Welfare Reform. New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1995.
    • Handler, Joel F., and Yeheskel Hansenfeld. The Moral Construction of Poverty: Welfare Reform in America. Newbury Park, CA: Sage, 1991.
    • Hardt, Michael, and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • Harper v. Virginia Board of Elections. 383 U.S. Supreme Court 663. 1966.
    • Harris, Cheryl I. “Whiteness as Property.” Harvard Law Review 106 (1993): 1709-91.
    • Harris, Nigel. The New Untouchables: Immigration and the New World Order. London: I. B. Tauris, 1995.
    • Himmelfarb, Gertrude. The De-Moralization of Society: From Victorian Virtues to Modern Values. New York: Knopf, 1995.
    • Hirabayashi v. United States. 320 U.S. Supreme Court 81. 1942.
    • Hopwood v. Texas. 78 F.3d. 5th U.S. Circuit 932. 1996.
    • Katz, Michael B. In the Shadow of the Poorhouse: A Social History of Welfare in America. Revised ed. New York: Basic Books, 1996.
    • —. The Undeserving Poor: From the War on Poverty to the War on Welfare. Revised ed. New York: Pantheon, 1989.
    • Klinkner, Philip A., with Rogers M. Smith. The Unsteady March: The Rise and Decline of Racial Equality in America. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Korematsu v. United States. 323 U.S. Supreme Court 214. 1944.
    • Kozol, Jonathan. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools. New York: Crown, 1991.
    • Kull, Andrew. The Color-Blind Constitution. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Kurland, Philip B., and Gerhard Casper, eds. Landmark Briefs and Arguments of the Supreme Court of the United States: Constitutional Law. Arlington, VA: U Publications of America, 1975.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. “The Trace of the Other.” Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Deconstruction in Context: Literature and Philosophy. Ed. Mark C. Taylor. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1986.
    • Marable, Manning. How Capitalism Underdeveloped Black America: Problems in Race, Political Economy, and Society. Updated ed. Boston, MA: South End, 2000.
    • Marshall, T. H. The Right to Welfare and Other Essays. New York: Free P, 1981.
    • Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. The Marx-Engels Reader. 2nd ed. Ed. Robert Tucker. New York: Norton, 1978.
    • Mead, Lawrence M. Beyond Entitlement: The Social Obligations of Citizenship. New York: Free P, 1986.
    • Mehuron, Tamar Ann, ed. Points of Light: New Approaches to Ending Welfare Dependency. Washington, DC: Ethics and Public Policy Center, 1990.
    • Michaelsen, Scott. The Limits of Multiculturalism: Interrogating the Origins of American Anthropology. Minneapolis, MN: Minnesota UP, 1999.
    • Mills, Charles W. The Racial Contract. Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 1997.
    • Mouffe, Chantal. The Democratic Paradox. New York: Verso, 2000.
    • Murray, Charles. Losing Ground: American Social Policy, 1950-1980. New York: Basic Books, 1984.
    • —. “Preface.” The Tragedy of American Compassion. Washington, D.C.: Regnery Publishing, 1992.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Gravity of Thought. Trans. François Raffoul and Gregory Recco. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities P, 1997.
    • —. The Inoperative Community. Trans. Peter Connor, et. al. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Nixon, Bryce. “‘Rational Basis with a Bite’: A Retreat from the Constitutional Right to Travel.” Law & Inequality Journal 18 (Winter 2000): 209-242.
    • Oh, Reggie, and Frank Wu. “The Evolution of Race in the Law: The Supreme Court Moves from Approving Internment of Japanese Americans to Disapproving Affirmative Action for African Americans.” Journal of Race and Law (Winter 1996): 165-93.
    • Olasky, Marvin. The Tragedy of American Compassion. Washington, D.C.: Regnery Publishing, 1992.
    • Olasky, Marvin, and George W. Bush. Compassionate Conservatism: What It Is, What It Does, and How It Can Transform America. New York: Free P, 2000.
    • Parijs, Philippe Van. What’s Wrong With a Free Lunch? Ed. Joshua Cohen and Joel Rogers. Forward by Robert M. Solow. Boston, MA: Beacon P, 2001.
    • Piven, Frances Fox, and Richard A. Cloward. Regulating the Poor: The Functions of Public Welfare. New York: Pantheon Books, 1971.
    • Post, Robert. “Introduction: After Bakke.” Post and Rogin 13-27.
    • Post, Robert, and Michael Rogin, eds. Race and Representation: Affirmative Action. New York: Zone, 1998.
    • Regents of U of California v. Bakke. 438 U.S. Supreme Court 265. 1978.
    • Resnick, Stephen A., and Richard D. Wolff. Knowledge and Class: A Marxian Critique of Political Economy. Chicago and London: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • Schmitt, Carl. Political Theology: Four Chapters on the Concept of Sovereignty. 1922. Trans. George Schwab. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1985.
    • Shapiro v. Thompson, 394 U.S. Supreme Court 618. 1969.
    • Shershow, Scott Cutler. “Of Sinking: Marxism and the ‘General’ Economy.” Critical Inquiry 27 (Spring 2001): 468-92.
    • Sidel, Ruth. Keeping Women and Children Last: America’s War on the Poor. New York: Penguin, 1996.
    • Shklar, Judith N. American Citizenship: The Quest for Inclusion. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1991.
    • Siegal, Reva B. “The Racial Rhetorics of Colorblind Constitutionalism: The Case of Hopwood v. Texas.” Post and Rogin 29-72.
    • Solow, Robert M. Work and Welfare. Ed. Amy Gutmann. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1998.
    • Spann, Girardeau A. The Law of Affirmative Action: Twenty-Five Years of Supreme Court Decisions on Race and Remedies. New York and London: New York UP, 2000.
    • —. Race Against the Court: The Supreme Court & Minorities in Contemporary America. New York and London: New York UP, 1993.
    • Sparer, Edward V. “The Right to Welfare.” The Rights of Americans: What They Are–What They Should Be. Ed. Norman Dorsen. New York: Pantheon, 1970. 65-93.
    • Sprinker, Michael, ed. Ghostly Demarcations: A Symposium on Jacques Derrida’s Spectres of Marx. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Sunstein, Cass R. One Case at a Time: Judicial Minimalism on the Supreme Court. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • Trattner, Walter I. From Poor Law to Welfare State: A History of Social Welfare in America. 5th ed. New York: Free P, 1994.
    • Unger, Roberto Mangabeira. Democracy Realized: The Progressive Alternative. London: Verso, 1998.
    • United States. Cong. House. Committee on the Budget. Welfare and Medicaid Reform Act of 1996. HR 3734. Washington: GPO, 1996.
    • Walzer, Michael. Spheres of Justice: A Defense of Pluralism and Equality. New York: Basic Books, 1983.
    • Weaver, R. Kent. Ending Welfare as We Know It. Washington, DC: Brookings Institution P, 2000.
    • Wilson, William Julius. When Work Disappears: The World of the New Urban Poor. New York: Random House, 1996.
    • Wygant v. Jackson Board of Education. 476 U.S. Supreme Court 267. 1986.

     

  • Notices

     

     

     

    Volume 12, Number 3
    May, 2002
    Every issue of Postmodern Culturecarries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.

     


    Publication Announcements

    • Topia
    • Blackbird
    • Year Zero One
    • Organdi Quarterly
    • Beyond Webcams: An Introduction to Online Robots

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • University of South Carolina’s 5th Annual Comparative Literature Conference: The Desire of the Analysts
    • 8th Qualitative Methods Conference: Something for Nothing

    General Announcements

    • Bureau of Public Secrets

     

  • Gursky’s Sublime

    Caroline Levine

    Department of English
    Rutgers University-Camden
    levinec@camden.rutgers.edu

     

    Review of: Andreas Gursky. The Museum of Modern Art, New York. 4 March – 15 May 2001. Exhibition Website

     

    Peter Galassi. Andreas Gursky. New York: The Museum of Modern Art, 2001.

     

    The modernist avant-garde made a gesture of rejecting popular entertainment and the commodification of culture. To be sure, avant-garde artists often employed the best techniques of advertising and marketing, but they did so on the sly, careful always to boast of their isolation and disinterestedness. With Andy Warhol came something new, a suggestion that there was nothing outside of commodification, that we were always already enmeshed in the repetitions of exchange. One definition of postmodernism makes this the central, the characteristic move of our time: don’t try to escape commodity fetishism, we hear, because there’s no way out, no elsewhere, no other.

     

    Jeff Koons gives us this version of postmodernism par excellence. Sneaker advertisements and basketballs, porn stars and kitsch toys, vacuum cleaners and stuffed puppies: Koons appropriates the most mass-produced objects and shines them up, making them glow with appealing prettiness at the same time that their banality appalls. Koons, astute about the marketplace, is a self-proclaimed artist of desire: he plays on the fact that his audience wants these objects, coveting the luminous glossiness of mass-marketed commodities. Shamed though we may feel, Koons seduces us into a longing for those things which appear to transcend their ordinariness, but not by any magic other than commodification itself–the bright, unmistakable sheen of the newly packaged purchase.

     

    At first glance, the photographer Andreas Gursky might seem to fall into the same category as Jeff Koons, a critic-cum-devotee of the global seductions of marketing. His huge glossy photographs offer up rows of athletic shoes, a landscape of Toyota and Toys ‘R’ Us logos, digitally doctored images of hotels and corporate offices in Hong Kong, New York, and Atlanta, floors full of stock traders, and, perhaps best of all, the endless riches of a 99¢ store, where stacks of brightly colored commodities are so radiant that they cast a gorgeous pastel glow on the store ceiling.

     

    But taken together, the photographs that are collected in Gursky’s mid-career retrospective at the Museum of Modern Art in New York hint at something else, something other than the commonplace workings of desire.

     

    It’s not easy to articulate what that something is. Peter Galassi’s richly illustrated catalogue works to do justice to the monumentality of Gursky’s oeuvre, and its large scale does succeed in evoking some sense of the work’s grandeur. Galassi, in a wide-ranging and scholarly introduction, strives to account for Gursky’s striking aesthetic by tracing major influences: his father the commercial photographer, his disciplined training under Bernd and Hilla Becher at the Kunstakademie in Düsseldorf, his references to Minimalist painting, his turn to color, to big print, and to digital techniques. Galassi also labors to differentiate Gursky from his contemporaries, arguing, for example, that although Gursky’s work can seem reminiscent of American photography, his “adherence to a ruling pictorial scheme” distinguishes him from the Americans and marks a crucial debt to the Bechers (Galassi 24). All of these contexts and conclusions are convincing, but somehow the mystery of Gursky’s work–its ability to “knock your socks off,” as Galassi puts it (9)–remains unaccounted for, elusive.

     

    Take “99 Cent” (1999), for example. Here the title and the date begin by pushing us to the brink. We are just under, just short, imminent, incomplete. And yet the image itself is one of repletion, even of excess, as candy bars and bottles of juice, shampoo, and detergent line up in row after row of color, and the products appear to go on forever. Indeed, what Gursky offers us is a tempo of fullness and insufficiency, as blocks of color are punctuated by horizontal white stripes, and the store as a whole is held up by six slender white vertical columns, rhythmically spaced. The ceiling itself repeats the inside of the store, the bright colors reflected into pale versions of themselves, echoing the floor, symmetrically placed in their own ghostly rows. The few shoppers who dot the storescape seem like prowlers hiding in the shelter of the shelves, their heads barely rising above the patterns of packaging. The remarkable effect is that the arrangement of the whole takes over, as the play of whites and colors overwhelms both the single commodity and the lone consumer. The objects are not there to be bought and sold, clutched and consumed, eaten and used. They are there to add their small notes to the vast pulsing rhythm of the spectacle.

     

    Awed, visitors to the show step back.

     

    With Gursky, the grip of consumerist desire is gone. Gone is the impulse to grasp and to own, to finger and to taste. He invites distance–the detachment of wonder.

     

    But how? How do these marvelous, luminous photographs engender a feeling of awed distance? How do they frustrate the attraction of commodification? The answer, I want to suggest, lies in their remarkable formal control–something Gursky took from his training in Düsseldorf. But even more specifically, their wonder emerges from the one formal pattern that recurs in almost all of Andreas Gursky’s work: parallel lines.

     

    Sometimes Gursky’s parallel lines come from familiar scenes of contemporary life, like store shelves and divided highways. Sometimes they are uncanny, as in “Engadine” (1995), where a trail of tiny skiers runs parallel to a vast mountain range, each echoing the other as they stretch from one frame of the photo to the other. Sometimes the lines are constructed and intentional, as in “EM, Arena, Amsterdam I” (2000), which offers up a painted soccer field, or “Untitled XII” (1999), which gives us a vastly magnified image of a leaf from a printed book, where the lines of words trace perfect parallels across the page. But at other times Gursky’s parallels seem eerily found or given, as in “Rhein II” (1999), which shows us a slice of the river running in a single straight path and flanked by green lawns in such perfectly straight lines that nature itself defies belief. Or the brilliant “Salerno” (1990), where a view of a harbor becomes mysteriously ordered and arranged in juxtaposed planes: first rows of colored cars, then rows of packing crates, then rows of houses, and finally rows of mountains and the sky. Nature and industry, sports and government, sneakers and mountain ranges, mundane and transcendent–all resolve into the twinned tracks of the parallel in Gursky’s glossy universe.

     

    For mathematicians, the parallel is defined by lines extending to infinity without intersecting. Gursky invites us to imagine that his lines not only go on forever, but that they are everywhere, underlying not only the disciplined orderings of culture but the unconscious life of nature. His parallels suggest a forever beyond the photograph, a forever of lines extending beyond the frames of each image and, more frighteningly, entirely beyond reason, representation, and calculation. Despite the formal harmonies of these photographs, then, Gursky’s infinitely extending lines evoke the sublime. Thus with their beauty comes a kind of terror.

     

    Of course, postmodernity has encountered and embraced the sublime before, as theorized in what are now its most classic articulations. Jean-François Lyotard famously pits the postmodern sublime against the eclecticism of “anything goes.” A genuine postmodernism, refusing to value art according to its profits, launches an enthusiastic defiance of conventional forms and expectations, the desire to “put forward… the unpresentable in presentation itself” (Lyotard 81). If for Lyotard this sublime can happen in Montaigne as well as in Mille Plateaux, Fredric Jameson argues for a sublime particular to the emergence of the vast, decentered complexity of multinational capitalism. Jameson’s sublime, like Lyotard’s, reveals the limits of figuration, but it results specifically from the attempt to grasp the “impossible totality of the contemporary world system” (38).

     

    While Lyotard’s sublime is evoked by unprofitable novelty and Jameson’s sublime emerges from the endless surfaces of a world overtaken by commodification, Gursky’s parallels seem to offer something older, something more metaphysical. In their extension from frame to frame the lines imply a constant, a depth beneath the surface, an underlying pattern or structure. As if Gursky was a faithful reader of Kant, his work appears to present something like an enactment of the Critique of Judgment: his lines offer a formal harmony and also, in their infinite extension, they rupture that harmony; they frame the world and they also break that frame. Thus unlike Jameson’s bewildering postmodern architecture, which dislocates and disorients, Gursky’s photographs embrace an order that is disordered only by the fact that the same forms eerily spread from one photograph to the next. In his allegiance to a venerable formalism, Gursky also seems to invoke an older philosophical paradigm. Indeed, his loving references to Romantic painters reinforce the notion of a sublime that belongs to the late eighteenth century. We see echoes of Caspar David Friedrich in “Seilbahn, Dolomiten” (1987), and we find J. M. W. Turner’s mysterious and illegible landscapes neatly framed by parallel lines in “Turner Collection” (1995).1

     

    If it is possible to see Gursky as the representative of a tradition that is now centuries old, it is worth remembering that both Lyotard and Jameson also locate their definitions of the sublime in Kant. And we can begin to bring Gursky together with these two theorists of postmodernism by recognizing that all three offer us the Kantian sublime in relation to global capitalism. For Lyotard, the sublime is that which unsettles the easy flow of the market by presenting something so unexpected that it does not lend itself to being bought and sold. For Jameson, the sublime is that which exposes our inability to grasp a world entirely overtaken by the endless surfaces of commodification. And for Gursky, the sublime transforms the banality of commodities into the grandeur of the infinite. For all three, the sublime is that which blocks desire and replaces the covetousness of a rampant materialism with a confounding awe.

     

    Notes

     

    Access to other on-line exhibitions of Andreas Gursky’s work may be gained via artcyclopedia. com.

     

    1. Galassi writes that “Turner Collection” is disappointing, “because the trick of reducing masterpieces of painting to generic objects of reverence has become all too familiar” (35). But surely Gursky’s photograph deserves a richer reading than that: by framing Turner’s wild romanticism inside the neatness of parallel lines–not only the frames of Turner’s own work, but the pristine wood floors and moldings that echo the lines of the frames–Gursky contains one kind of sublime inside another. Turner’s sublime of an overwhelming nature is bordered and enclosed by Gursky’s infinitely extending lines, what Kant called the mathematical sublime.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, or The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.

     

  • Computable Culture and the Closure of the Media Paradigm

    William B. Warner

    Digital Cultures Project
    Department of English
    University of California, Santa Barbara
    warner@english.ucsb.edu

     

    Review of: Lev Manovich, The Language of New Media.Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2000.

     

    Most scholars of modern media now agree that the shift of symbolic representation to a global digital information network is as systemic and pervasive a mutation, and as fraught with consequences for culture, as the shift from manuscript to print. Anyone who wants to think clearly about the cultural implications of the digital mutation should read Lev Manovich’s new book, The Language of New Media. This book offers the most rigorous definition to date of new digital media; it places its object of attention within the most suggestive and broad-ranging media history since Marshall McLuhan’s; finally, by showing how software takes us beyond the constraints of any particular media substrate–paper, screen, tape, film, etc.–this book overcomes the media framework indexed by its own title. The Language of New Media leads its reader to confront what is strange yet familiar, that is, uncanny, about the computable culture we have begun to inhabit.

     

    Before characterizing Manovich in greater detail, it is helpful to say what this book is not. Pragmatically focused upon the present contours of computable media, Lev Manovich is neither a prophet nor a doomsayer, peddling neither a utopian manifesto nor dystopian warnings. Manovich also eschews the conceptual purity of those cultural critics who set out to show how new digital media realize the program of Gilles Deleuze, Jean Baudrillard, Jacques Derrida (insert your favorite theorist). Like many raised in the former Soviet Union, Manovich seems inoculated against any explicit aesthetic, conceptual, or political ideology. Instead, Manovich practices a catholicity founded in negative capability: if an art practice or popular media culture has flourished, it is part of the picture, and the critic and historian of media must find a way to account for it. This helps to explain the remarkable scope of Manovich’s book as it ranges easily from analysis of the software/hardware/network infrastructure that supports new media practice to the synthetic efforts to explain what new media is; from contemporary artistic practice to aesthetic theory; from popular media culture to advanced media theory; in short, from the Frankfurt School and Dziga Vertov to the GUI (Graphical User Interface) and Doom.

     

    Defining New Media

     

    What makes new digital media different from old media? Many early answers–discrete versus continuous information, digital versus analog media–founder upon closer inspection. A host of scholars and critics have approached this question from various vantage points: the history of technical culture (Jay David Bolter), hypertext (George Landow), narrative (Janet Murray), architecture (William J. Mitchell), virtual reality (Michael Heim), theatre (Brenda Laurel), and so on.1 From these books there has emerged a series of general traits ascribed to new media. Here are a few: new computer-based media are described as procedural, participatory, and spatial (Murray); discrete, conventional, finite, and isolated (Bolter); liquid (Mitchell); productive of virtuality (N. Katherine Hayles, Heim) or of cyberspace (William Gibson). While these traits and terms have cogency within particular analyses, the attempt to generalize their use brings diminishing returns. Thus Manovich argues that a favorite term to characterize new media–“interactive”–is simply too broad and vague to be critically useful. It not only fails to account for the variety and specificity of new media, the term also tendentiously implies that old media are fundamentally non-interactive. For example, isn’t it part of the critical point of various kinds of modernism to make its audience “interact” with the art object (56)?

     

    Trying to isolate the essential traits of new media repeatedly courts two complementary problems: one may overplay the novelty and difference of new media by ascribing to it traits in fact found in old media (so, for example, random access to packets of data is as old as the codex); or, by restricting attention to the aesthetic or phenomenological effects of new media products, for example by comparing “e-literature” and print literature as formal artifacts (cf. J. Hillis Miller on “the Digital Blake”), one may fail to come to terms with the difference made by what lies at the heart of new media–a computer running software. The sheer familiarity of the personal computer may have encouraged cultural critics to treat the cultural products of the computer (word processing documents, cinema with digital special effects, hypertext) as nothing more than old media enhanced by the flexibility and transportability of digital code and a global network. Thus, in Cybertext, Espen Aarseth has shown how literary theorists who interpret new media genres like hypertext or computer games have reduced them to conceptual terms–like labyrinth, game, and world–that annul the difference for textuality of a computer operating in the background and doing calculations (8, 75). Manovich’s first response to this dilemma is to develop a list of the five intrinsic principles of new media, a cluster of terms that specify the techniques and operations of a computer running software and suggest how an old media sphere is being “transcoded.”

     

    Here is a rather bald restatement of Manovich’s five intrinsic principles of new media. First, through numerical representation, a new object can be described formally (mathematically) and subject to algorithmic manipulation: “in short, media becomes programmable” (27). Second, new media objects have modularity at the level of representation and at the level of code. Thus, new media objects such as a digital film or a web page are composed from an assemblage of elements–images, sounds, shapes, or behaviors–that sustain their separate identity and can be operated upon separately, without rendering the rest of the assemblage unusable. In an analogous fashion, modular programming speeds the development and maintenance of large-scale software (31). Third, numerical coding and modularity “allow for the automation of many operations involved in media creation, manipulation, and access” (32). From the earliest use of computers to target weapons at high speed, to web pages generated on the fly, to intelligent agents that sift and retrieve information, automation achieves speed that is the fulcrum of computer “power.” Fourth, while old media depended upon an original construction of an object that could then be exactly reproduced (for example, as a printed book or photograph), new media are characterized by variability. Thus, browsers and word processors allow users defined parameters; databases allow selective search-sensitive views; web pages can be customized to the user. The variability of new media allows for branching-type interactivity, periodic updates, and scalability as to size or detail (37-38). Finally, new media find themselves at the center of the “transcoding” between the layers of the computer and the layers of culture (46). In new-media lingo, to “transcode something is to translate it into another format” (47). Manovich makes the strong claim that the “computerization of culture gradually accomplishes similar transcoding in relation to all cultural categories and subjects” (47). By using the term “transcoding,” Manovich acknowledges the distance between computer and culture, even as that distance is often dissimulated. Thus, as Manovich explains, the “cultural layers” of a new media object (like Microsoft’s Encarta) might be as familiar as an encyclopedia, but its “computer layers” are process and packet, sorting and matching, function and variable (46).

     

    These admittedly cumbersome five principles don’t seek to specify the computer/software in itself, nor do they characterize the specific media forms it makes possible (like hypertext, computer games, jpegs, web pages, etc). Instead, these five principles characterize that zone between and across which the transport between computer and culture is happening. These five principles offer a commonsense way to specify the capacities and tendencies of that new “universal media machine,” the computer running software: computers use numerical representation and modularity so as to automate functions and offer variability within the media objects that are produced and sustained by them (69). These four tendencies of computer-based media help to win its broader cultural effect, a “transcoding” between computer and culture, so we begin to inhabit the new forms of a computable culture. These general tendencies of a computer running software are what Manovich explores in the rest of the book, a trajectory of analysis that implicitly offers a second answer to the question “what is new media?” While several influential books have sought to embed the computer in the history of media (Bolter and Grusin’s Remediation, Borgmann’s Holding on to Reality, and Levinson’s The Soft Edge), Manovich insists that if one is to take account of the full scope of the new media, one must take account of their different “levels.” He begins at the most basic level with the “operating system” and the human-computer interface, taking account of the inheritance from print and cinema, the salience of the screen, and the body of the user (chapter 2). Moving up to the level of the software applications, Manovich offers broad cultural interpretations of operations like “selection,” “compositing,” and “teleaction” (chapter 3). At the level of user experience, Manovich turns to the “illusions” created by computer-based image making: “synthetic realism” or virtual reality (chapter 4). At the level of new computable media genres, Manovich reads the “database” and “navigable space” as rivals and alternatives to the previously hegemonic cultural form, “narrative” (chapter 5). And finally, Manovich traces the dislocations worked by new media upon what he calls the dominant medium of the 20th century, cinema (chapter 6).

     

    Manovich’s multi-layered topology of new media does not really claim conceptual comprehensiveness: surely new “layers” could be discerned between his layers. Nor does he attempt completeness at the level of media types; hypertext, which plays a large part of the critical survey of new media told by Landow and Aarseth and others writing out of literary studies, plays a rather small role in this book. Manovich’s book of new media draws its methodological rigor from Russian formalism and from the technique of doing a topology. However, that does not mean we have to accept the empiricist anti-idealist assumptions of that approach. One doesn’t have to take this multi-leveled approach to new media literally–as though Manovich has suddenly taken the blindfold from the eyes of critics groping around the elephant of new media–to appreciate the fruitfulness of this approach. Manovich’s topology of new media is based on a self-conscious analogy to the conventional “levels” of the computer hardware and software (from microprocessor through operating system to high-level application). But this analogy works because it allows him to “touch” upon more of the many constituents of computable media, and thus more of the complexity and plurality of new media, than any other critic I have read. Manovich does this by introducing new terms into the analysis of new media. The “language” of his title suggests that the computer, as the new universal media machine, is producing new discourses and new terms, and thus a new “language” in the strong sense of post-structuralism and Russian formalist theory. Manovich’s book implicitly invites the reader to enter into a language game that will develop a lexicon that can do two things: 1) specify with precision the software technique and underlying technology of new media, and 2) open these techniques and technologies out to the broader cultural practices and unsuspected historical affiliations of new media.

     

    This terminological strategy is on display in his development of the term “interface,” the term used in computer science where there is “a point of interaction or communication between a computer and any other entity” (American Heritage Dictionary). Computer culture has given a rich and diverse elaboration to this term because the interface is habitually the crucial boundary, or zone of articulation and translation, whenever a computer would communicate with devices (such as printers, networks, monitors, machines) or the human user. In Interface Culture, Stephen Johnson demonstrates the unprecedented centrality that computers give to the computer human interface. Manovich takes a different approach: he expands the concept of “interface” backward in time so that it encompasses not just the diverse software interfaces of new media (from the desktop Windows environment to the conventions of computer game design) but also the formal traits and user practices with salient media like the printed word and cinema. Rather than viewing the persistence of the printed word and cinema as the indebtedness of new to the old, perhaps by citing Marshall McLuhan’s well-known dictum that each new medium takes an old medium as its content, Manovich argues that the printed word and cinema should be considered not just as media forms but as “cultural interfaces.” Here is how he describes the crucial components of each: “the printed word” includes “a rectangular page containing one or more columns of text, illustrations or other graphic framed by the text, pages that follow each other sequentially, a table of contexts, and index”; cinema “includes the mobile camera, representations of space, editing techniques, narrative conventions, spectator activity” (71). These formal descriptions of “the printed word” and “cinema” uncouple them from their original media so that Manovich can trace how they migrate into, and become part of, the interfaces of new media. Although the human-computer interface is much newer, Manovich insists it has become “a cultural tradition in its own right” (72) featuring “direct manipulations of objects on the screen, overlapping windows, iconic representation, and dynamic menus” (71) along with operations like copy/paste and search/replace. Manovich puts these three cultural interfaces side by side so that we can see that they are richly different ways of “organizing information, presenting it to the user, correlating space and time, and structuring human experience in the process of accessing information” (72). The subsistence of these cultural interfaces at the moment when the printed word and cinema are being “liberated from their traditional storage media–paper, film, stone, glass, magnetic tape” means that a “digital designer can freely mix pages and virtual cameras, tables of content and screens, bookmarks and points of view” (73).

     

    The concept of “cultural interface” suggests what distinguishes this book from many discussions of digital media: its resolutely historical consciousness. Many critics have argued that the digital mutation, through a kind of (historical) retroaction, is enabling us to see earlier events like the “print revolution” in new ways. (For an influential example, see Landow 20-32.) Manovich carries this perspective much further by offering an archaeology of earlier cultural forms and practices that are flowing into, and receiving distinctive inflection within, new media. Thus Manovich’s discussion of the “screen” of the human computer interface [HCI] distinguishes the static screen of traditional painting from the dynamic screen of the moving image (of cinema and TV), and both of these from the screen of real time (of radar, of video feeds). This comparative perspective allows him to ask questions about how each screen places the user and entails certain costs. He shows, for example, the tension between uses of the computer screen to make it, on the one hand, a real-time control panel, and on the other, the site for an absorptive experience which expands the threshold of the visible but imposes stasis on the body of the spectator.

     

    Manovich’s Analytical Engine

     

    My discussion of Manovich’s redefinition of new media does not come to terms with the critical range of this book. With wit and elegance, Manovich coordinates several different agents: the thoughtful critic of modernism, the accomplished scholar of cinema, the innovative practitioner of new media, and the humanist who wears his vast learning lightly. All are needed to do what this book attempts: to crosscut between the full range of contemporary new media (art and popular culture) and the history of visual and technical culture. The analysis achieves a lot of its rhetorical force from the consistent operation of what I would like to call Manovich’s analytical engine. By using the word “engine,” I am seeking to isolate the recurrent movements in his analysis. I can demonstrate this analytical engine as it sorts the implications of one of the “operations” discussed in the third chapter: selection. Although selection appears as an apparently simple and modest operation in many software programs, Manovich insists upon its broader cultural implications. “While operations [like selection] are embedded in software, they are not tied to it. They are employed not only within the computer but also in the social world outside it. They are not only ways of working within the computer but also in the social world outside it. They are… general ways of working, ways of thinking, ways of existing in the computer age” (118).

     

    To suggest the key rhetorical and conceptual moves of Manovich’s analytical engine, I have put them in bold type.

     

    •Manovich begins his overview by offering several empirical examples of selection: he describes the centrality of selection in programs from Adobe Photoshop 5, Macromedia Director 7, and Apple’s Quicktime 4.

     

    •These programs suggest a basic logic of new media, which is expressed as an opening generalization, provocatively overstated: “New media objects are rarely created from scratch; usually they are assembled from ready-made parts. Put differently, in computer culture, authentic creation has been replaced by selection from a menu” (124).

     

    Archaeological questions that situate selection within the long history of visual culture: “What are the historical origins of this new cultural logic?” (125). Manovich describes the way E. H. Gombrich and Roland Barthes have critiqued the romantic ideal of artistic creation and how industrial production prepares for the artistic experiments around 1910 with montage and photomontage, culminating with their use in Metropolis (1923) and other films, and finally, to Pop artists of the 1960s.

     

    • Manovich, playing the journalistic cultural critic, makes a broad and loose cultural connection: “The process of art has finally caught up… with the rest of modern society, where everything from objects to people’s identities is assembled from ready-made parts. Whether assembling an outfit, decorating an apartment, choosing dishes from a restaurant menu, or choosing which interest group to join, the modern subject proceeds through life by selecting from numerous menus and catalogs of items” (126). After a discussion of the branching menu systems of various software program, Manovich refuses to the software user the “author” function of creating something new (128).

     

    • Manovich then poses a provocative question. How can one resist this rhetoric of endless choice through selection, the obligation to choose as a vehicle for expressing your identity? Perhaps by accepting a computer’s and software program’s bland defaults, one can refuse to choose, and thus wear the software equivalent of jeans and a tee shirt.

     

    • Manovich then invokes a new media example to clinch the case for the centrality of selection: “The WWW takes this process [of selection as more pervasive than invention] to the next level: it encourages the creation of texts that consist entirely of pointers to other texts that are already on the Web” (127), cf. Yahoo, Voice of the Shuttle.

     

    •Manovich makes a a detour into the prehistory of cinema: the Magic Lantern exhibitor was also a selector. Crucial to this practice in film and video has been the modern standardization of formats. These allow the cutting and pasting that enables selection to work.

     

    •Manovich makes a cultural connection to art theory (here postmodernism). The technique of pastiche, the quoting of earlier styles, which is widely associated with postmodernism (by Fredric Jameson and others in the early 80s) is seen by Manovich as finding its fullest realization with software: “In my view, this new cultural condition found its perfect reflection in the emerging computer software of the 1980s that privileged selection from ready-made media elements over creating them from scratch” (131).

     

    • Manovich makes a conceptual extension of the concept of selection to that of filtering, in new as well as older electronic media. It is not just selection that is central to new media, but the fact that we can modify what we select through the use of software programs, for example, through using the filters in Photoshop. But this is not a new phenomenon in the history of media. The telephone, the radio, and television were already based on a technology that made selection–through the modification of an existing signal–crucial. “All electronic media technologies of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries are based on modifying a signal by passing it through various filters. These include technologies for real-time communication such as the telephone, as well as broadcasting technologies used for mass distribution of media products such as radio and television….” (132).

     

    • This leads to a retroactive interpretation of older media in light of new media: “In retrospect, the shift from a material object to a signal accomplished by electronic technologies represents a fundamental conceptual step toward computer media. In contrast to a permanent imprint in some material, a signal can be modified in real time by passing it through a filter or filters… an electronic filter can modify the signal all at once… an electronic signal does not have a singular identity–a particular qualitatively different state from all other possible states” (132). Examples include volume control for a radio receiver and brightness control for an analog TV set. “In contrast to a material object, the electronic signal is essentially mutable.” “This mutability of electronic media is just one step away from the ‘variability’ of new media” (132-33).

     

    •This allows Manovich to make an assessment of the difference effected by digital mutation: Now we can see that the mutability of signals suggests that radio and TV signals are “already new media.” “Put differently, in the progression from material object to electronic signal to computer media, the first shift is more radical than the second” (133). The increase in range of variation in the digital is accounted for by two factors: “modern digital computers separate hardware and software” (so for example, changing volume will be just a software change) and second, “because an object is now represented by numbers, that is, it has become computer data that can be modified by software. In short, a media object becomes ‘soft’–with all the implications contained in this metaphor” (133). The mutability of TV (with hue, brightness, vertical hold, etc.) becomes the much wider range of variability for display of a page in a browser window.

     

    • Manovich closes his analysis through a witty invocation of a new cultural practice: The rise of the DJ is seen as cultural symptom of the centrality of the art of selection. “The essence of the DJ’s art is the ability to mix selected elements in rich and sophisticated ways…. The practice of live electronic music demonstrates that true art lies in the ‘mix’ (135).

     

    Manovich’s analytical engine develops here an ordinary term–selection–with which to think about what living in a computable culture means. By his account, selection does not come from the computer running software. It is something humans–artists, consumers, and users–do and have done in a vast range of contexts, perhaps for as long as there has been human culture. Of course, by expanding the range of selectable commodities, modern industrial production has increased the everyday salience of the act of selection. By changing media objects into media signals, modern electronic media have expanded the powers of selection through modulation (of, for example, a radio signal, its volume, etc.). Manovich’s discussion effectively puts aesthetic theorists, moralists, and artists in dialogue around the subject of selection. Such a perspective on “selection” embeds an argument against media determinism he never makes explicit: computable media do not determine culture. The pleasures of selection help to drive the harnessing of a technology that extends the powers of selection. In this way, new media are a symptom of culture, rather than something that comes from outside it (cf. Bruno Latour on technology). Of course, it is also easy to see how selection in real time is greatly facilitated by the first four principles of new media: numerical representation, modularity, automation, and variability. Thus, by the way computers expand the pervasiveness and varieties of selection, computable media bear their effects into culture. My favorite popular cultural expression of this trend: Amy Heckerling’s film Clueless, where the heroine, Cher, begins the day by using a computer to preview and select the outfit she will wear to Beverly Hills High.

     

    Software Theory as a Theory of a-Media; or, Surpassing McLuhan

     

    Although Manovich’s book takes “new media” as its object, there is much in his book to suggest that computable culture unsettles the media paradigm introduced by Marshall McLuhan in the early 1960s. In The Gutenberg Galaxy: The Making of Typographic Man (1962) and Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man (1964), McLuhan introduced a set of terms and concepts that defined media studies. Like any other paradigm shift, McLuhan’s work helped to ground scholarly monographs in the humanities and social sciences (e.g., Elizabeth L. Eisentein’s The Printing Press as an Agent of Social Change). But McLuhan’s ideas also became part of the common sense about media that circulates in daily conversation and the Sunday supplements. To understand how the computer running software challenges the grounding premises of media theory and media history, I will suggest, very briefly, what these grounding ideas are. McLuhan’s invention of modern media theory depends on three related ideas. First, he focuses on the centrality of the physical medium of communication and insists upon the profound mutual imbrication of the medium (the material substrate of the symbolic expression) and the “message” or meaning (ideas, ideology, plausible genres, etc.) Thus the slogan, “the medium is the message.” Second, by emphasizing the way the physical contours of a medium condition the production, use, and experience of media, McLuhan shifts attention from meaning to practice, from what media do in the mind to the way bodies can dispose themselves while communicating. Thus the transformation of the first slogan into its somatic extension in an artist’s book he published with the artist Quentin Fiore in 1967 under the title “the medium is the massage.” Third, McLuhan’s approach to media encourages a broadly comparative study of media: media as different as speech, manuscript, print, radio, and television, as well as other “media” of communication such as the automobile, the airplane, the human body, etc., can be compared with each other as to their defining traits and across their long histories. Although McLuhan’s approach has been exposed to withering critique–for its central premise that [the] media [environment] determines [human] culture, for its facile anecdotal “probes” of media history, and for its quasi-religious belief that electronic media can restore an earlier time of intuitive, embodied communication, McLuhan’s writings offer a particularly ecstatic and credulous version of what Armand Mattelart calls “the ideology of communication” (xi). Nonetheless, any historian of media who accepts the centrality of the category “media” inherits and extends the three basic ideas I have listed above: the centrality of the media substrate, its implications for embodied practice, and the comparability of media. As we have seen, Manovich is a particularly effective practitioner of this sort of media history and analysis.

     

    In the way it applies this framework to “new media,” The Language of New Media also suggests the limits of the media paradigm. For Lev Manovich allows us to grasp this fundamental fact about new media: while computable cultural forms can be understood, for the sake of historical comparison and in our study of modern media culture, as successors to earlier media forms, a computer running software produces digital code which simply is not a medium. Manovich first broaches this complication in his story when he points to the limitations of the comparative historical approach he uses so well. Understanding new media as old media that are now digitized and thereby changed has fundamental limitations:

     

    [This perspective] cannot address the fundamental quality of new media that has no historical precedent–programmability. Comparing new media to print, photography, or television will never tell us the whole story. For although from one point of view new media is indeed another type of media, from another it is simply a particular type of computer data, something stored in files and databases, retrieved and sorted, run through algorithms and written to the output device. That the data represent pixels and that this device happens to be an output screen is beside the point…. New media may look like media, but this is only the surface. (47-48)

     

    The most casual acquaintance with the history of the computer suggests the relative autonomy of computable information from its media “surface.” Over sixty years of development, computers have communicated information to their users first on paper tape, then on computer cards, then on paper from printer output, then on video display screens, and most recently through a simulated voice. Media are not just used for input and output; the information within the computer is stored on computer cards, magnetic tape, floppy disks and hard-drive media, and on the silicon chip (as RAM, ROM, and bubble memory). Of course, this list of media is far from complete, and, in any case, it is subject to ongoing technological extension.

     

    The mobility of information encoded in digital form makes the objects of media study waver. Thus, although some computer code can be expressed as an image that can be printed on glossy paper (and thus resemble a conventional photograph) and other computer code can be expressed as letters on a monitor screen, the physical surface (whether paper or screen) is not the salient aspect of computable information systems. In fact, one of new media’s crucial traits is the way they elude bondage to any medium. How is one to conceptualize this different system so that we grasp not only how it extends the forms and practices of the long history of media, but also the way it simply is not a medium, but (perhaps) a species of a-media? Soon after the passage quoted above, Manovich seems to realize that his definition of new media challenges the media paradigm he still uses for his analytical framework. He invokes the “revolutionary works” of Harold Innis and Marshall McLuhan and insists that we must turn to computer science to understand new media. Then, in a gesture of surpassing that echoes the manifestoes of modernism and post-structuralism, Manovich calls for a fundamentally different approach to computable media: “From media studies, we move to something that can be called ‘software studies’–from media theory to software theory” (48, emphasis Manovich). That Manovich does not heed his own call to go beyond media study and media theory, that he just begins to explain what “software theory” might look like, does not diminish the importance of his having demonstrated the logic of a movement beyond the media paradigm toward one based on the great underlying fact that software is what is really new about new (a-)media.

     

    A computer and its software are much more intimately and essentially co-implicated with one another than a book and its written content, a television and its program. In fact, a computer scientist would be correct to point out that the phrase I’ve been using–“a computer running software”–is tautological. From the first mathematical theorization of the computer as a “universal machine” by Alan Turing, and Turing’s subsequent realization of an early (base 10) computer, the “Bombe,” built to decipher the code produced by the German Enigma machine in WWII (see Singh and Hodges), to John Von Neumann’s first designs for the computer after the war, computers receive their essential character from the software they do not just run but on which they run. When compared with the earlier analog computing devices used to point weapons and automate machinery during World War II, the flexibility and power of the computer running software comes from the way data and the program are loaded into memory at the same time (Bolter 47-49, Turing 436-42), meaning that the computer, unlike the machine, could be reconfigured by the changes introduced at the level of software. Although the phrase “the computer running software” is redundant, it offers a way to emphasize how a relatively immaterial thing–software–invades and dematerializes its supposedly hard home, what is conventionally called “hardware” but what we sometimes mistakenly identify as “the computer.” This is a mistake, not just because hardware needs software the way, by analogy, the human body needs the communications media of neurons, enzymes, and electric signals as a condition of life. From the beginning of computing, even the hardest components of design–the arrangement of circuits and vacuum tubes, the code embedded on read-only memory, and microprocessors made of silicon–were designed to embed “logic blocks” (like “and,” “or,” “invert”) and algorithms first expressed as software (see Hillis 21-38). In other words, there is a very real sense in which the computer is software all the way down.2

     

    How can we begin to think about the difference for media made by software? Manovich shows how software produces uncanny effects upon the cultural and aesthetic sphere it operates within, for example, by challenging the underlying assumptions of the realist project. The long Western commitment to mimesis as a pathway to truth (see Derrida, Disseminations) has gained expression in the development of visual technologies–from the linear perspective of painting to photography to film–that win visual fidelity for the image. It is hardly surprising that the computer running software has been used to develop new and more powerful forms of realism. For example, algorithms embedded in Adobe Photoshop allow a photographer to correct and enhance a photograph. However, the computer also simplifies the production of simulations of what was never photographed, undermining the indexical function of photography and cinema. Manovich has a vivid way of putting this idea: “Cinema is the art of the index; it is an attempt to make art out of the footprint” (295). Digital special effects technologies have enabled Hollywood films to bring a new level of realism to the visually believable representation of the impossible. For example, in Terminator 2 an ordinary policeman seems to morph into a “metal man.” Manovich notes that digital special effects like “metal man” are made possible by the software algorithms that migrate from computer science journals to software programs. Because images within the computer interface can become bit-mapped control panels, the software at the heart of the digital image disturbs the classical image of the Western aesthetic tradition. There it was assumed that the viewer assumed a detached frontal position before the image so as to compare it with “memories of represented reality to judge its reality effect” (183). The new media image summons a more active user: “The new media image is something the user actively goes into, zooming in or clicking on individual parts with the assumption that they contain hyperlinks (for instance, image-maps in Web sites). Moreover, new media turn most images into image-interfaces and image-instruments” (183, emphasis Manovich).

     

    Images supported by software turn out to be fundamentally different from the traditional images they can simulate. In order to fake photorealism, computer software does not enrich but instead downgrades the synthetic image so that we experience it as a photo: it is given the blur, graininess, and texture of the photographic image. We may think of these computer-generated images as inferior to the photographs, but Manovich notes, “in fact, they are too perfect. But beyond that we can also say that, paradoxically, they are also too real” (202, emphasis Manovich).

     

    The synthetic image is free of the limitations of both human and camera vision. It can have unlimited resolution and an unlimited level of detail. It is free of the depth-of-field effect, this inevitable consequence of the lens, so everything is in focus. It is also free of grain–the layer of noise created by film stock and by human perception. Its colors are more saturated, and its sharp lines follow the economy of geometry. From the point of view of human vision, it is hyperreal. And yet, it is completely realistic. The synthetic is the result of a different, more perfect than human, vision. Whose vision is it? It is the vision of a computer, a cyborg, an automatic missile…. Synthetic computer-generated imagery is not an inferior representation of our reality, but a realistic representation of a different reality. (202)

     

    Manovich here gives a trenchant s/f turn to his argument. If we unmoor what is being done from its arbitrary referent (here photorealism as a functional stand-in for “reality”), we can see the uncanny difference of the new digital image: it can go beyond the constraints of social conventions, aesthetic traditions, and even the human perceptual apparatus. The computer running software can serve the old ideals of visual realism, but it can also overturn that logic of appropriation through visual approximation and proceed to do very different things. Thus in Terminator 2, the fact that the metal man comes from the future offers a narrative rationale for his ability to benefit fully from the “reflection mapping algorithm” operating in the software. That algorithm creates the highly unrealistic special effect of a hyper-reflective body. In this way, the “metal man” of T2provides a visual analog of the uncanny perfection, the infinite plasticity, the soft hardness of the computer-generated image as it seems to leap past the limitations of the film medium itself.

     

    An Ethos for Software Studies?

     

    Software studies can teach us skepticism of what might be called the covert idealism of media theory’s materialism: the notion that if one knows the medium of an act of semiosis, then one grasps its essence or inner logic. There are obvious reasons to be distrustful of the reductive tendencies of this sort of materialism. Thus, if a molecular biologist tells us that all central constituents of life–DNA, RNA and proteins–are composed of “nothing” but carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, we have not learned very much about what life is. For example, the life functions of these molecules–most crucially the capacity to replicate–depend in part upon the way they are folded into 3-dimensional shapes. Similarly, when a cyber critic claims that what distinguishes the computer running software is its use of digital code (bits of 1s and 0s), or that all the algorithms that a computer can perform are combinations of three logical actions: “and,” “or,” and “not,” we have not learned much about the underlying logic of computable culture. However, if software studies gets us to travel too far away from the materialism of media studies, toward a celebration of the “magic” (Bill Gates) and “power” of software code, one soon finds oneself implicated in problematic new fantasies of control and in an idealism based on the immateriality of software.

     

    A glance at the early history of computing suggests that a will to control through the powers of the mind may explain the tendency to go beyond material embodiment. Alan Turing and Norbert Weiner conceived the computer as a machine that could simulate and extend human intelligence, so it could, for example, decipher encrypted enemy messages, target weapons in real time, and perhaps someday rival human intelligence (for example, by beating human chess masters). This project–by emphasizing the distance between the human and the computer–helps to seed the s/f narratives about those robots, artificially intelligent computers, and cyborgs that exceed their assigned functions and return to haunt their human creators. This popular interpretation of the computer as a dangerous “other,” with the diverse techno-gothic scenarios it invites, may have little of the predictive value science fiction craves. Nonetheless, these narratives carry intimations of the uncanny powers of the computer running software. However, by exaggerating the distance between a software technology and the historical and cultural locus of its invention, they also breed popular new ideas of transcendence. For example, in Clarke/Kubrick’s 2001: A Space Odyssey, transcendence takes the form of the final ride where the astronaut morphs into a “star child;” at the end of Gibson’s Neuromancer the mysterious union of the information agents–Wintermute and Neuromancer–leads them to claim that they are now “the matrix” of “the whole show” (269).

     

    Katherine Hayles has developed an analysis that challenges this drift toward transcendence. In her overview of the historical emergence of the concept of information after World War II, she notes that molecular biology helped to popularize the notion that what is crucial to the constitution of human bodies are the patterns of information embedded in genetic code. The hierarchies that quickly creep into these terms breed a new form of idealism. “In the contemporary view, the body is said to ‘express’ information encoded in the genes” (69-70). Hayles shows how in this theory “pattern triumphs over the body’s materiality–a triumph achieved first by distinguishing between pattern and materiality and then by privileging pattern over materiality” (72). By constructing “information as the site of mastery and control over the material world,” this line of thinking suppresses the equally obvious insight that “the efficacy of information depends on a highly articulated material base” (72). In this way, Hayles casts suspicion on the idea that spirit (as code) is superior to matter, an idea she links to Western religious culture and which returns with the ultimate computer fantasy–Han Moravec’s scenario by which humans could achieve immortality by uploading the mind’s information from the brain to a computer (72).

     

    How can we grasp the new powers of software without refusing a necessary embodiment and materiality? The temptations of disembodied transcendence, so prevalent in books on “cyberculture,” make this reader appreciate the way Manovich has balanced the momentum and staying power of traditionally embodied media forms (like the book, cinema, and the screen) with a sustained analysis of what enables the production, networked distribution, and use of “new” media: the computer running software.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The most casual reader of this book will be able to note “where Manovich comes from”–film studies and the history of cinema. But his giving cinema pride of place among twentieth-century cultural production is less an unconscious bias than a conscious strategy. It gives this book on a vast topic (new media) the discursive coherence necessary to reconceptualize new media. Through an irony that obviously pleases Manovich, he is able to show how many of the traits ascribed to new computer-based media can be read off the practice of the Russian 1920s avant-garde filmmaker, Dziga Vertov.

     

    2. Andrew Grove, former CEO of Intel, has conceded the impossibility of making a fundamental categorical distinction between the code embedded in Intel chip designs and the software provided by Microsoft. This became a problem when Intel wanted to embed functions in their chips to prepare them for the use of Java, the open-source programming language developed by Microsoft’s rival, Sun Microsystems. Manovich notes the tendency, over the development of a computer system, to integrate functions first introduced as software into hardware defaults.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • American Heritage Dictionary. Boston: Houghton, 1992.
    • Bolter, J. David. Turing’s Man: Western Culture in the Computer Age. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1984.
    • Bolter, Jay David, and Grusin, Richard. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1999.
    • Borgmann, Albert. Holding on to Reality: The Nature of Information at the Turn of the Millennium. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Disseminations. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • Eisenstein, Elizabeth L. The Printing Press as an Agent of Change: Communications and Cultural Transformations in Early Modern Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1979.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “The Condition of Virtuality.” Lunenfeld 68-94.
    • Heim, Michael. Virtual Realism. New York: Oxford UP, 1998.
    • Hillis, Daniel. The Pattern on the Stone: The Simple Ideas that Make Computers Work. New York: Basic, 1998.
    • Hodges, Andrew. Alan Turing: The Enigma. New York: Simon, 1983.
    • Johnson, Stephen. Interface Culture: How New Technology Transforms the Way We Create and Communicate. New York: Basic, 1997.
    • Landow, George P. Hypertext 2.0. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • Laurel, Brenda. Computers as Theater. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1993, 1991.
    • Levinson, Paul. The Soft Edge: A Natural History and Future of the Information Revolution. New York: Routledge, 1998.
    • Lunenfeld, Peter, ed. The Digital Dialectic. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2000.
    • Mattelart, Armand. The Invention of Communication. Trans. Susan Emanuel. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1996.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. The Gutenberg Galaxy: The Making of Typographic Man. Toronto: U of Toronto P, 1962.
    • —. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1994.
    • Miller, J. Hillis. “Digital Blake.” The Digital Cultures Project. 31 October 2000. <http://dc-mrg.english.ucsb.edu/conference/2000/PANELS/BEssick/jhmiller .html>.
    • Mitchell, William J. “Replacing Place.” Lunenfeld 112-128.
    • Murray, Janet. Hamlet on the Holodeck: The Future of Narrative in Cyberspace. New York: Free, 1997.
    • Singh, Simon. The Code Book: The Secret History of Codes and Code-breaking. London: Fourth Estate, 1999.
    • Turing, Alan. “Computing Machines and Intelligence.” Mind: A Quarterly Review of Psychology and Philosophy 236-60 (October 1950): 436-42.

     

  • Information and the Paradox of Perspicuity

    Samuel Gerald Collins

    Dept. of Sociology, Anthropology and Criminal Justice
    Towson University
    scollins@towson.edu

     

    Review of: Albert Borgmann, Holding On to Reality: The Nature of Information at the Turn of the Millennium. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.

     

    Reacting against the Boasian study of myths for “historical data,” Claude Levi-Strauss urged anthropologists to look behind myths to what they might reveal of cultural and cognitive structures:

     

    The myth is certainly related to given facts, but not a representation of them. The relationship is of a dialectical kind, and the institutions described in the myths can be the very opposite of the real institutions. This conception of the relation of myth to reality no doubt limits the use of the former as a documentary source. But it opens the way for other possibilities; for in abandoning the search for a constantly accurate picture of ethnographic reality in the myth, we gain, on occasions, a means of reading unconscious realities. (172-73)

     

    The twenty-first century finds the myth-making apparatus producing a surfeit of narratives chronicling the emergence of the “information society.” Some of these posit a decisive break with the past, an information society so different from preceding Fordist or Gutenberg eras as to engender entirely new modes of being. Other works locate the information society at the apex (or the aporia) of developments in culture, politics, or library science. In these, the information society is only explicable in light of earlier epochs–a “Gutenberg Galaxy” giving way to more “cool” mediums, the vertical organizations of Fordism giving way to post-Fordist, flexible networks. But all of these formulations remain “emergent”; the information society has proven notoriously resistant to empirical description, and to argue for a summary break with the past or for a selective genealogy is, in these works, ultimately a metaphysical question. Nevertheless, the tremendous outpouring of commentary suggests that information–whatever its status as a bona fide object of social inquiry–is an important site for cultural work. What is at stake here is, I would suggest, nothing less than the shape of the future: the possibilities engendered in the new and the continuities with what has gone before.

     

    Albert Borgmann’s Holding On to Reality is an ultimately mythological narrative outlining a highly selective vision of the past parlayed into a Procrustean manifesto for the future. Uneasily jumping between Dionysian novelty and Apollonian continuity, Borgmann’s work is, finally, conservative and even Arnoldian, recapitulating the moral-redemptive message of his 1993 Crossing the Postmodern Divide. And yet, there is much here that might prove useful to the student of the information society, even if one sometimes works against Borgmann’s text.

     

    Unlike technocratic definitions of information as a thing, value, or signal:noise ratio, Borgmann’s information is relational: “INTELLIGENCE provided, a PERSON is informed by a SIGN about some THING in a certain CONTEXT” (38). That is, given some pre-acquired information literacy, people are able to ascertain something about the world from signs in a particular social or cultural milieu. It’s this phenomenological reading that has changed over the course of millennia, from Edenic beginnings in “natural information” to the contemporary postmodernity of “technological information.” Ultimately, Borgmann’s information is the motor informing both his historical narrative and his moral judgments on the efficacy of information for modern life.

     

    Like the savage for Rousseau, Native Americans function for Borgmann as the architectonic origin of information, the “ancestral computer,” as it were. The Salish, according to Borgmann, lived in a world characterized by natural information: for example, “Snow-capped Lolo Peak was the sign that pointed the Salish toward the salmon on the other side of the Bitterroot divide” (25). People (with proper knowledge) are surrounded by a world of signs and things in the “fullness” of natural contexts. Humans inhabit an inherently perspicuous world. In any paradise, of course, there must be a myth of the Fall. For the Salish (uncomfortably subsumed as “our” ancestors), this means the erection of monumental signs across the landscape, cairns, and “medicine wheels” that while “well-ordered” and “eloquent” nevertheless gesture to things expelled from the garden of presence. And yet, these monumental signs have only a limited capacity for reference:

     

    Since the informational capacity of the cairn is so small, large tasks remain for the people to whom the cairn is significant. Elaborate instruction and careful memorizing are needed if the message of the sign is to survive. Moreover, since the cairn as a sign is occasion-bound as well as place-bound, it normally carries one and only one message. It is not a vessel that can be used to convey different contents on different occasions. (37)

     

    We can see where Borgmann is going here. In this tale of information theodicy, successive forms of information are already immanent in their predecessors, forms that admit technical advantage while gradually surrendering the antediluvian “fullness” of signs, things, and contexts.

     

    The successor to natural information–that is, “cultural information”–is typified by the emergence of writing: “letters and texts, lines and graphs, notes and scores” (57). Its strength lies precisely in its abstraction from reality, the way that three of the five nodes signified in information “drift into the background,” i.e., “intelligence,” “person,” and “context” recede against the ascendance of “sign” and “thing.” “Writing consists of signs that are about some thing, letters that convey meaning. By itself, writing is not bound to a particular person or context, and its possession requires no particular intelligence” (47).

     

    However, by removing information from natural “presence,” cultural information opens up the world to “structure,” by both exposing structure through the study of nature and imposing structure through the elaboration of musical notation and architectural drawing. By foregrounding signs and things, cultural information begs the question of their ratio, ultimately opening the possibility of the perfect concordance of signs and things. Yet, in the wake of Wittgenstein and in the slow demise of generative grammars, this would seem an impossible goal.

     

    Nevertheless, it is cultural information that, for Borgmann, heralds the development of the sciences and humanities, of the great works that he alternately rhapsodizes and elegizes. It is cultural information that balances perspicuity and nature, reality and structure. In a vast, synthetic panorama, Borgmann turns from Euclid’s postulates to the development of writing and reading culture to Thomas Jefferson’s surveying methodologies to, finally, the architecture of Freiburg Minster, the great medieval church that, for Borgmann, is one of the finest exemplars of cultural information, a monumental structure that is also an “open book” filled with signs.

     

    Combining Romanesque and Gothic elements in the context of the mountainous landscape, Freiburg Minster is manifestly perspicuous but also highly engaged with reality, or what Borgmann begins glossing as “contingency”: “contingency, however, is inherently meaningful and so makes significant information possible. Contingency comes to us as misfortune or good luck, as disaster or relief, as misery or grace” (105). For Freiburg Minster, “contingency” means a succession of builders each appending different designs to the church–Romanesque, Gothic, Renaissance. In other words, it is in the frisson of the contending, contingent whole that we apprehend cultural information.

     

    And yet, as wonderfully balanced as cultural information is, “technological information” is already immanent in the cultural. In the search for ultimate structure and the struggle to impose structure on an obstinately contingent world, physics, mathematics, and, later, cybernetics and information science posit fundamental, fungible elements ultimately constitutive of reality; this will-to-structure generates our “digital” world. “Thus physics and mathematics engendered the hope that, once the elementary particles of information had been found, information theory might devise a semantic engine that would bridge the gap between structural and instructive information” (128). Out of the conjectural interstices of physics and the topologies of mathematics comes an “information space” structured “all the way down” to binary “bits” and, therefore, potentially infinitely transparent and infinitely controllable.

     

    However, by developing an information space, reality itself is elided by this self-contained, infinite perspicuity: signs detach from things, completing the alienation from presence that cultural information began. In a somewhat labored and oddly trivial example, Borgmann explains the difference. Your daughter attends a performance of Bach’s Cantata no. 10 and returns home. In answer to your query, she tells you she’s just attended a performance of Bach’s Cantata no. 10. This corresponds to natural information about reality. In the second case, she returns home and presents you with a score for the Cantata. This is an example of cultural information for reality. In the final case, she returns home and gives you a CD. “The compact disc, finally, can be information about and for reality. But the technological information it contains is distinctively information as reality. Information gets more and more detached from reality and in the end is offered as something that rivals and replaces reality” (182). That is, the performance itself is utterly eclipsed by the world of the compact disc. There is no need to go beyond the information space of the CD. It is all there–absolute presence premised on the absolute absence of context.

     

    It is this progressive disengagement from reality that really irks Borgmann, and he summons up touchingly dated evocations of MUDs and MOOs to drive home his point.

     

    At the limit, virtual reality takes up with the contingency of the world by avoiding it altogether. The computer, when it harbors virtual reality, is no longer a machine that helps us cope with the world by making a beneficial difference in reality; it makes all the difference and liberates us from actual reality. (183)

     

     

    Only signs matter in the hermetic, evacuated worlds of technological information. But by refusing the contingency of the world for self-contained information space, technological information risks triviality, a fatal separation from the “eloquence” of reality. The result, Borgmann suggests, is an unsatisfying life riven with postmodern versions of modern alienation: “anomie 2.1.”

     

    Not surprisingly, Borgmann cautions us to attend to the contingency and ambiguity of reality and balance that against the torpor of technological information.

     

    No amount or sophistication of cultural or technological information can compensate for the loss of well-being we would suffer if we let the realm of natural information decay to one of resources, storage, and transportation. Analogously, nothing so concentrates human creativity and discipline as the austerity of cultural information, provided the latter again is of the highest order, consisting of the great literature of fiction, poetry, and music. Our power of realizing information and our competence in enriching the life of the mind and spirit would atrophy if we surrendered the task of realization to information technology. (219-20)

     

    In a foregone conclusion, Borgmann returns to the idyll of the Montana countryside, interspersed with some unexpected paeans to urban living. For him, the “moral eloquence of reality” can only be achieved through admixtures of Virgilian nature and Arnoldian culture, heir to the Emersonian perambulations Leo Marx explores in The Machine in the Garden; indeed, Borgmann reiterates a well-worn American ambivalence towards technological change and social “tradition.”

     

    So what are we supposed to draw from Borgmann’s triptych? Certainly not lessons on historiography. Holding On to Reality is rife with jarring anachronisms and prolepses. We are told that “Theuth discovered the digital nature of letters” (60). And this “digitality,” moreover, would have resulted in “faultless copying were it not for the foibles of scribes” (81).1 The book of Genesis is testament to the fullness of natural information, with God designing to directly manifest to Moses (rather than send an e-mail with a .jpg attachment). “That there should be information of such magnitude seems incredible or incomprehensible to some of the most thoughtful people today” (32). But these examples, however fanciful, are consistent with the spurious teleology of the whole project. We have to give up much in the way of incredulity to see burial cairns as the ancestors of the CD. In anthropology, we certainly have no compelling reason to think of these things as species of proto-computers. To do so is simply to subsume the past into the present, the Other into the Self, constructing far-flung genealogies that echo the Victorian penchant for unilinear, evolutionary schema–first savages, then barbarians, and finally civilized Europeans. An “Assiniboin Medicine Sign,” a medieval church, a Vedic fire altar: we can only consider these varieties of information if we submerge their cultural and historical contexts, building, as it were, our own hermetically sealed, virtual environments where others are consigned to infinitely reflecting the West. There may be, as anthropologists have pointed out since the end of the nineteenth century, a brief thrill in discovering an information society in the Salish, in Euclid, in incunabulum, but that pleasure is bought at the cost of real understanding.

     

    But while Borgmann’s evolutionary account of “our ancestors” is unconvincing, I find his description of contemporary information compelling. “Technological information” is inherently transparent, e.g., Geographical Information Systems (GIS) can “uncover” successive features of geomorphology. Fourteen hundred digital photos of Freiburg Minster taken by a computerized camera mounted on a helicopter render every detail stunningly clear. Yet, the transparency of technological information may not be analogous to the perspicuity of natural or cultural information:

     

    The word transparency, like clarity, has a double meaning. It denotes both absence and presence. We call information transparent when the fog between us and our object of inquiry has been removed and the medium of transmission has become pellucid. But we also call clear or transparent what has become present once the fog has lifted, the objects or structures we are curious about. (176-77)

     

     

    Borgmann’s point–though deeply imbricated in a metaphysics of presence–is that information implies both transparency and occlusion, the foregrounding of some signs and the active suppression of others. Back at the aforementioned Freiburg Minster, site of cultural information’s triumph, another sort of knowledge has been suppressed. Despite heroic portrayals of many Old Testament motifs that “generally reflect the genial and cooperative relations” between Jewish and Christian citizens, Freiburg excelled–for over five hundred years–in brutal anti-Semitism (116). Is this information part of the church, or is this information in spite of the church?

     

    Part of the context in the relationship that enables information must be institutional. Surely, cultural and technological information doesn’t just exist “out there” to be apprehended by monadic intellects. Information is instead produced by governments, universities, and corporations. And it may be in the interest of institutions to suppress information even as they produce it. In the course of my research on the information society at the Library of Congress, I attended a staff introduction to the LC’s National Digital Library. In response to Head Librarian James Billington’s proclamation that the digital collection would concentrate on “American memory,” one of the staffers asked if Latin American or South American materials would be included. Billington angrily retorted that only U.S. materials would be digitized. Was there nothing in Latin or South American histories germane to U.S. history? And what does it mean to distance “U.S. history” from its military and mercantile past in these regions? We may be able to understand Billington’s summary comments, however, in the context of a budget-cutting Congress and the growing importance of corporate sponsorship in which philanthropy is oftentimes synonymous with public relations. This context is vital to the production (and reduction) of information.2

     

    By the 1960s, commentators would complain that we are awash in too much information, that, inundated with “data smog,” we suffer from “information anxiety.” The prescription for this postmodern malaise is the establishment of “limits” and “boundaries.” As Saul Wurman advises in Information Anxiety, “the secret to processing information is narrowing your field of information to that which is relevant to your life, i.e. making careful choices about what kind of information merits your time and attention” (317). This is a formidable task. Any perfunctory internet search opens onto a jumble of widely brachiating topics, each exhibiting considerable variance in relevance and banality. Efforts at limiting information, however, are immensely helped by the shape of technological information itself.

     

    As Borgmann demonstrates in an interesting chapter on Boolean architecture in information processing, technological information is binary–it is “on” or “off,” “yes” or “no.” “Between input and output, however, there is nothing but the pure structure of yeses or noes” (147). Either the file is there, or it is not; either the hyper-links are there, or they aren’t. Technological information may be hyperbolically fecund in a media-saturated, internetworked world, but it is also easier to control, to parse “all the way down.”

     

    As I write this review, the United States is engaged in a military campaign in Afghanistan. It is very much a physical battle, with many Afghani casualties, but it is also a war of information, with the United States battling its “information other,” the flexible, post-Fordist al-Qaida network.3 The United States seeks to expand its information network at all costs–detaining immigrants, seizing bank accounts, renewing a campaign of cloak-and-dagger espionage. At the same time, it tries to limit information output, winning seemingly complete complicity from news corporations in not reporting, underreporting, or misreporting details of U.S. military maneuvers and tactics. Al-Qaida seems equally invested in the occlusion of perspicuity, sundering the binary linkages in its network at the onset of U.S. investigations. On the other hand, deliberate misinformation abounds: the London Sunday Telegraph reported that, in a particularly postmodern subterfuge, Osama bin Laden has as many of 10 doubles of himself in Afghanistan (Hall and Rayment).

     

    In military communications, information is subsumed into C3I (Command, Control, Communications and Information). But, as an organizational form, the information society demands this kind of vigilant surveillance of all institutions: proprietary knowledge and spin control have arisen alongside any putative information explosion. Additionally, insofar as we have all become–à la C. Wright Mills–“organization” people, we have also been interpellated as information managers, separating public from private lives, taking care to control our appearance under the surveillant glare of the corporation and the state. In other words, not enabling information is as important as enabling it; in binary logic, “information” and “no-information” are meaningful values constituting the program of advanced capitalism. To re-work Borgmann’s initial formulation, “INTELLIGENCE provided, a PERSON is informed about a SIGN about some THING and NOT ABOUT some OTHER THING in a certain CONTEXT” (38). Erasing those errant or critical linkages to alternative things, meanings, and identities has been the great defining element in an era of technological information, resulting in an information black hole right alongside the information explosion. Alternatives to capitalism, local struggles, dialectical theorizing–all of these have disappeared into an event horizon even as other information overwhelms the public sensorium.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The “copy” has had a very long history, from Plato’s denunciations in The Republic to Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction” and beyond. Monks copying the Vulgate are doing something rather different than I do when I download MP3 files!

     

    2. This is a serious–and telling–omission in Borgmann’s book. Anthony Giddens, Herbert Schiller and many others have examined political economies of information, while Borgmann considers only IT theorists (cf. Shannon and Weaver).

     

    3. Al-Qaida appears (in the U.S. press, at least) to employ the same sorts of “flexible accumulation” strategies as transnational corporations, making them the perfect foil of advanced capitalism, the ideal enemy in the post-socialist imaginary.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Borgmann, Albert. Crossing the Postmodern Divide. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Giddens, Anthony. The Nation-State and Violence. Cambridge: Polity, 1985.
    • Hall, Macer, and Sean Rayment. “Ring ‘Closing’ on bin Laden.” Sunday Telegraph [London] 18 Nov. 2001.
    • Lévi-Strauss, Claude. Structural Anthropology. Vol. 2. New York: Basic, 1976.
    • Marx, Leo. The Machine in the Garden: Technology and the Pastoral Ideal in America. [1964] New York: Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Schiller, Herbert. Culture, Inc.: The Corporate Takeover of American Expression. New York: Oxford UP, 1989.
    • Schwartz, Hillel. The Culture of the Copy: Striking Likenesses, Unreasonable Facsimiles. New York: Zone, 1996.
    • Shannon, Claude E., and Warren Weaver. The Mathematical Theory of Communication. Urbana, IL: U of Illinois P, 1964.
    • Wurman, Richard Saul. Information Anxiety. New York: Doubleday, 1989.

     

  • Maintaining the Other

    Kelly Pender

    Rhetoric and Composition Program
    English Department
    Purdue University
    penderk@purdue.edu

     

    Review of: Simon Critchley, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity: Essays on Derrida, Levinas, and Contemporary French Thought. London: Verso, 1999.

     

    In his latest collection of essays, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity, Simon Critchley extends and modifies the discussion of deconstruction and ethics that he put forward in his earlier book, The Ethics of Deconstruction. Like that earlier work, Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity examines the nature–or rather, the possibility–of ethics and politics after (or during) deconstruction in relation primarily to the work of Jacques Derrida and Emmanuel Levinas. In contrast to his position in the earlier book, however, Critchley’s reading or assessment of Levinasian ethics in Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity is, as he puts it, “a critical reconstruction” (ix). Specifically, he extends, deepens, and modifies his arguments about the “persuasive force” of Levinasian ethics in regard to deconstruction. One way of reading Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity (a way that Critchley seems to encourage in the preface) is to see the culmination of this consideration of the subject in his affirmation of the political possibilities of deconstruction (chapter 12).

     

    However, because Critchley investigates subjectivity outside the issues of deconstruction and politics, it would be unfortunate to read his essays strictly in terms of such a culmination. For instance, his discussions of subjectivity, ethics, sublimation, and art in “The Original Traumatism: Levinas and Psychoanalysis” (chapter 8) and in “Das Ding: Lacan and Levinas” (chapter 9) provide a reconstruction (or an additional reading) of Levinasian ethics outside of the question of politics. In addition, and more importantly in regard to the aims of this review, Critchley’s careful treatment of subjectivity distinguishes Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity from a number of “postmodern” treatises on the subject. It is, I think, this carefulness (which is enacted as much as it is expressed) that makes the strongest case for the political possibilities of deconstruction.

     

    When I say “postmodern” treatises on the subject, I am referring to the work in a number of fields (e.g., literary theory, rhetoric and composition, and cultural studies) that takes for granted the dissolution of the humanist subject, declares its epiphenomenal status, and then celebrates postmodernism’s victory over the Enlightenment, or homo rhetoricus‘s victory over homo seriosus, often taking for granted the ascendancy of ethics over politics. Often these arguments contend that politics are based on the assumption that humans are free to deliberate on issues, to express opinions, and take collective action. However, since the means of reaching consensus are always already predetermined by hegemonic, capitalistic forces, the political endeavor–as traditionally understood, for example, in terms of various ideologies of the Enlightenment–is a doomed endeavor. It is on this basis that some scholars attempt to distinguish the ethical from the political, and in doing so advocate new modes of subjectivity or post-subjectivity–for instance, following Deleuze and Guattari, the schizophrenic or rhizomatic modes; following Baudrillard, the seductive mode; and following Gorgias, the sophistic mode. In fact, it is the question of subjectivity that seems to drive these arguments; that is, the exigency for their discussion of ethics and politics is the dissolution of the humanist subject. While I do not want to imply that such arguments are simplistic or unwarranted (since Quintilian’s “good man speaking well” is indeed alive and thriving), I do want to suggest that this exigency potentially leads to totalizing conceptions of the subject, or, conversely, of the dissolution of the subject, as well as problematic conceptions of the relationship between ethics and politics.

     

    It is precisely this exigency that Critchley problematizes in his third chapter, “Post-Deconstructive Subjectivity.” By turning Heidegger’s critique of Husserl (and Descartes) back onto Heidegger, Critchley explores the possibility of a conception of the subject outside of metaphysics. Specifically, he argues that the very grounds that distinguish Dasein from a contemplative subject (the openness to the call to Being) can be read metaphysically, which is to say that they can be read as modes of authentic selfhood. “It is Dasein,” he claims, “who calls itself in the phenomenon of conscience, . . . and the voice of the friend that calls Dasein to its most authentic ability to be . . . is a voice that Dasein carries within it” (58). Based on this Heideggerian argument, then, there is no subject outside of metaphysics. From this position, Critchley questions the history and the presuppositions entailed in the idea of a post-metaphysical subject. Among these presuppositions, he contends, is the idea that we have achieved an “epochal break in the continuum of history.” “For reasons that one might call ‘classically’ Derridian,” he continues, “all ideas of exceeding the metaphysical closure should make us highly suspicious, and the seductive illusions of ‘overcoming’, ‘exceeding’, ‘transgressing’, ‘breaking through’, and ‘stepping beyond’ are a series of tropes that demand careful and persistent deconstruction” (59).

     

    Indeed, Critchley finds problematic the very argument that there was a metaphysical res cogitans, a subject of representation, in Descartes’s work–a paradigmatic case and a key starting point in the history of the idea of the unified subject. It is because this unified self has been retrospectively projected onto all conceptions of the subject since Descartes that Critchley sees the history of modern philosophy as (in part) “a series of caricatures or cartoon versions of the history of metaphysics, a series of narratives based upon a greater or lesser misreading of the philosophical tradition” (60). “Has there ever existed a unified conscious subject, a watertight Cartesian ego?” he asks (59).

     

    Although Critchley’s response to the question is “no,” he does not advocate a pre-Heideggerian conception of the subject, the subject that is outside metaphysics. In other words, Critchley argues, following John Llewelyn, that we must seek a conception of the subject that tries to avoid the metaphysics of subjectivity without falling into the metaphysical denial of metaphysics (73). Critchley finds this attempt in Levinasian ethics–in its nuanced account of metaphysics, subjectivity, and the relation between subjective experience and the other. For Critchley, what’s most important in Levinasian ethics is the shift from intentionality to sensing, which is to say the shift from representation to enjoyment. As Critchley puts it, “Levinas’s work offers a material phenomenology of subjective life. . . . The self-conscious, autonomous subject of intentionality is reduced to a living subject that is subject to the conditions of its existence” (63). It is because of this sentience that the I is capable of being called into question by the other. The I, in fact, is more accurately a me in Levinasian ethics and subjectivity in that the subject is subject precisely because it (its freedom) undergoes the call of the other. According to Critchley, then, the (post-) Levinasian conception of the subject does not react conservatively to the poststructuralist or antihumanist critique of subjectivity by trying to rehabilitate the free, autarchic ego (70). Rather, it needs these discourses in order to conceive of the subject as non-identical, overflowed, and dependent on that which is it incapable of knowing. “Levinasian ethics,” Critchley contends, “is a humanism, but it is a humanism of the other human being” (67).

     

    In the final section of the essay, Critchley argues that the Levinasian conception of the sentient, ethical subject is very close to the kind of postdeconstructive subjectivity sought by Derrida. According to Critchley, Derrida has called for a “new determination of the ‘subject’ in terms of responsibility, of an affirmative openness to the other prior to questioning” (71). While Critchley does not suggest that Derrida is referring only or directly to Levinas’s conception of the subject, he does stress the consonance between the subject that is formed by non-comprehensible experience of the other and the postdeconstructive subject alluded to by Derrida. He claims, for instance, that the determination of the Levinasian subject “takes place precisely in the space cleared by the anti-humanist and post-structuralist deconstruction of subjectivity” (73). What’s more, according to Critchley, is that Levinas offers a metaphysical account of ethics and the subject while simultaneously displacing and transforming metaphysical language. For example, in Levinas’s work, “ethics” is transformed to mean “a sensible responsibility to the singular other”; “metaphysics” becomes “the movement of positive desire tending towards infinite alterity,” and “subjectivity” is “pre-conscious, non-identical sentient subjection to the other” (75). As a result of these conceptual shifts, he argues, the Levinasian subject avoids predeconstructive metaphysics, or intentionality, without attempting a Heideggerian denial of metaphysics.

     

    In “Deconstruction and Pragmatism: Is Derrida a Private Ironist or a Public Liberal?” (chapter 4), Critchley moves away from a direct discussion of subjectivity in order to consider the political/public potentialities of deconstruction. Specifically, by taking issue with Richard Rorty’s classification of Derrida as a private ironist, he articulates a connection between Rorty’s conceptions of the public and the liberal ironist and Derrida’s conception of justice and thereby argues for the public value of deconstruction. Critchley begins this argument by problematizing the grounds upon which Rorty’s classification of Derrida depends. For Rorty, Critchley explains, Derrida is a private ironist because his projects have become individualized projects of self-creation or self-overcoming–they have become non-argumentative, oracular discourses that do not address the problems of social justice (95). In Critchley’s view, Rorty’s claim (his developmental thesis) depends upon a reductive periodization of Derrida’s work, as well as a foundational conception of argument or public discourse. Moreover, Critchley argues that what Rorty has observed is not a change in the public significance of Derrida’s work, but rather a shift “from a constative form of theorizing to a performative mode of writing, or, in other terms, from meta-language to language” (96).

     

    What ultimately problematizes Rorty’s classification, however, is the connection that Critchley sees between Rorty’s definition of public liberal and Derrida’s conception of justice. For Rorty, the public is defined as that which is concerned with “‘the suffering of other human beings’, with the attempt to minimize cruelty and work for social justice” (85). According to Critchley, this definition of the public (of liberalism) attempts to ground the criterion for moral obligation in a “sentient disposition that provokes compassion in the face of the other’s suffering” (90). This criterion, he continues to argue, is found in Levinasian ethics–it is the ethical relation to the other that takes place at the level of sensibility. In addition, this criterion is found in Derrida’s conception of justice. As Critchley explains it, “Derrida paradoxically defines justice as an experience of that which we are not able to experience, which is qualified as ‘the mystical’, ‘the impossible’, or ‘aporia’ . . . an ‘experience’ of the undecidable” (99). And for Derrida, it is the experience of justice–of the unknowable–that propels one forward into politics. Critchley is careful not to suggest that Derrida locates justice in politics. To the contrary, Derrida believes that no political decision can embody justice; however, no political should be made without passing through the aporia–the face to face–of justice. Critchley concludes, then, that “what motivates the practice of deconstruction is an ethical conception of justice, that is, by Rorty’s criteria, public and liberal” (102).

     

    While he certainly does not collapse the distinction between ethics and politics in this chapter, Critchley, through his interpretation of Derrida’s conception of justice, does cast doubt upon any kind of ethics/politics polemic. Put another way, I think that by destabilizing Rorty’s private/public distinction, Critchley opens up a space in which notions such as the “post-political” can be examined and possibly understood in light of more nuanced accounts of deconstruction. Moreover, Critchley’s argument for a Levinasian conception of subjectivity as the ethical basis of deconstruction (even if it is a more cautious or reconstructed argument) calls into question the kinds of subjectivity (schizophrenic, sophistic, etc.) that some scholars see as part and parcel of the poststructuralist deconstruction of the subject. Like Critchley, many of these scholars theorize a new kind of politics that comes after the ethical experience, after the deconstructive aporia. Requisite to experiencing this aporia, however, is a kind of Dionysian or Deleuzian subjectivity–an unhinging of desires or an experience of the multiple within the individual. The problem here, and it is a problem well illuminated in chapter 3, is that in the space left by the exiled humanist, metaphysical subject, these kinds of arguments insert yet another metaphysical subject. In other words, this subject, as well as the ethics derived from it, is something we can know and control–something that we can enact or release at the level of language by obfuscating meaning, identity, and representation. As a result, the aporia is playfully characterized as a utopian dimension of discourse–or worse, as an intellectual enterprise in which one can participate through self-reflexive, parodic, paradoxical, and digressive ways of writing. And it is by virtue of this characterization that the subject, it seems, is once again reduced to representation.

     

    Critchley takes up this issue of representation, or thematization, in his discussion of Levinasian ethics and psychoanalysis in chapter 8, “The Original Traumatism: Levinas and Psychoanalysis.” Here Critchley argues that Levinas attempts to articulate the relation to the other in a series of “termes éthiques“: accusation, persecution, obsession, substitution, hostage, and trauma (184). Like Levinas, Critchley points out that this attempt is an attempt to thematize the unthematizable; it is a phenomenology of the unphenomenologizable (184). Quite contrary to Levinas, however, Critchley sees this language as indicative of a psychoanalytic understanding of the unconscious. Of particular interest to Critchley is Levinas’s use of the term “trauma.” He writes, “Levinas tries to thematize the subject that is, according to me, the condition of possibility for the ethical relation with the notion of trauma. He thinks the subject as trauma–ethics is a traumatology” (185).

     

    Critchley’s question to Levinas (a question which he admits is in opposition to Levinas’s intentions) is: “What does it mean to think the subject–the subject of the unconscious–as trauma?” (188). To begin with, according to Critchley, thinking the Levinasian subject as trauma means that the ethical relation “takes place at the level of pre-reflective sensibility and not at the level of reflective consciousness” (188). More specifically, and based on the “Substitution” chapter of Otherwise than Being, Critchley writes that the subject as trauma is a subject utterly responsible for the suffering that it undergoes–it is a subject of persecution, outrage, and suffering. He later describes this original traumatism as a deafening traumatism, as “that towards which I relate in passivity that exceeds representation, i.e. that exceeds the intentional act of consciousness, that cannot be experienced as an object” (190). “In other terms,” he continues, “the subject is constituted–without its knowledge, prior to cognition and recognition–in a relation that exceeds representation, intentionality, symmetry, correspondence, coincidence, equality and reciprocity, that is to say, to any form of ontology, whether phenomenological or dialectical” (190).

     

    Despite Levinas’ resistance to psychoanalytic theory, Critchley believes that his conceptions of the subject and the ethical relation depend on, to put it in Lacanian terms, “a relation to the real, through the non-intentional affect of jouissance, where the original traumatism of the other is the Thing, das Ding” (190). Without this notion or mechanism of trauma, Critchley claims, there would be no ethics in the Levinasian sense of the word (195). Taking this connection further, he writes that “without a relation to trauma, or at least without a relation to that which claims, calls, commands, summons, interrupts or troubles the subject . . . there would no ethics, neither an ethics of phenomenology, nor an ethics of psychoanalysis” (195). Finally, foreshadowing his argument in chapter 12, Critchley contends that without this ethical relation, one could not conceive a politics that would refuse the category of totality. It is the absence of this ethical relation–this passivity towards the other–that seems to limit, if not debilitate, so many other recent discussions of ethics, politics, and subjectivity.

     

    In chapter 12, “The Other’s Decision in Me (What are the Politics of Friendship?),” Critchley focuses primarily on the question of a non-totalizing politics, positioning his previous discussions of subjectivity as a context for his argument. As he explains early in the essay, through a reading of Blanchot’s Friendship, as well as a reading of Derrida’s reading of Blanchot in The Politics of Friendship, Critchley examines this question in regard to Derrida’s recent Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas. By way of this discussion of friendship, and its relation to the public and the private and to politics, Critchley argues that despite the connections between Derrida’s conception of “sur-vivance” (his attempt to think a nontraditional conception of the passive decision of friendship that is linked to mortality) and Levinas’s ethical relation to the other, there is an important distance between Derrida’s work and that of Levinas. Critchley sees this distance as the result of five problems in Levinas: (1) the idea of fraternity, (2) the question of God, (3) his androcentric conception of friendship, (4) the relation of friendship to the “family schema,” and (5) the political fate of Levinasian ethics in regards to the question of Israel (273-74).

     

    With these problems in mind, Critchley goes on to provide a positive reading of Derrida’s position on politics in Adieu. According to Critchley, although Derrida recognizes the gap in Levinas’s work in regard to the path from the ethical to the political, he does not read it as paralysis or resignation. On the contrary, this hiatus, says Critchley, “allows Derrida both to affirm the primacy of an ethics of hospitality, whilst leaving open the sphere of the political as a realm of risk and danger” (275). It is this danger that allows for what Derrida refers to as “political invention”–an invention or creation that arises from “a response to the utter singularity of a particular and inexhaustible context” (276). Critchley then describes this response as both non-foundational and non-arbitrary–which is to say that it is a response that is both unknowable and passive. It is in this respect that Critchley relates political invention to Derrida’s nontraditional conception of friendship, his notion of “the other’s decision is made in me” (277). In summary Critchley writes that “what we seem to have here is a relation between friendship and democracy, or ethics and politics . . . which leaves the decision open for invention whilst acknowledging that the decision comes from the other” (277).

     

    As I have argued throughout this review, it is the acknowledgment of the other that distinguishes Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity from so many other works on subjectivity, ethics, and politics. Without this acknowledgment, that is, without being affected by a consideration of the incomprehensible or unthematizable, these works risk a kind of totality–they risk saying what the subject is (a fragmented stream of desires) and what it isn’t (a unified, coherent self). That they can know undermines their discussions of the other, reducing it at times to a trope. This is not to say that all discussions of subjectivity, ethics, and politics must be Levinasian. However, since they tend to use this term, “other,” in addition to many Derridian terms, in order to wage war on metaphysics, the Enlightenment, and humanism, it seems that closer readings of deconstruction, subjectivity, ethics, and politics are called for. Critchley has begun to answer that call.

     

    Work Cited

     

    • Llewelyn, John. The Middle Voice of Ecological Conscience: A Chiasmic Reading of Responsibility in the Neighborhood of Levinas, Heidegger, and Others. New York: St. Martin’s P, 1991.

     

  • The Deus Ex-Machina

    Juan E. de Castro

    Division of Liberal Arts and International Studies
    Colorado School of Mines
    jdecastr@mines.edu

     

    Review of: Jerry Hoeg, Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative in the Twentieth Century and Beyond.Bethlehem, PA: Lehigh UP, 2000.

     

    During the electoral process of 1990, Alberto Fujimori, a little-known agricultural engineer and academic, stormed the Peruvian political scene. One of the keys to his mass appeal lay in his often-repeated promise to bring “honradez, tecnología y trabajo” (honesty, technology, and jobs) to Peru. This slogan responded directly to the concerns of a country fed up with the demagogy, corruption, and inefficiency of then-President Alan García’s regime. However, while the slogan implies, at least in part, a moral and political critique of García’s failed populism, Fujimori’s reference to tecnología signifies his campaign’s privileging of technology as the solution to the problems of Peru. Thus one can argue that Fujimori’s propagandistic mantra was also implicitly directed against the presidential candidate then leading the polls, the internationally renowned novelist Mario Vargas Llosa.

     

    It is, therefore, possible to see in this election a sign of contemporary Latin American attitudes regarding what C.P. Snow once called “the two cultures” (scientific versus humanistic). Faced with the choice between an engineer and a man of letters, and by implication between technological and humanities-based paradigms for the interpretation of and solution to the country’s problems, the Peruvian population decided in favor of the technocrat.1 At the dawn of the twentieth century, the Uruguayan José Enrique Rodó could, in his classic essay Ariel, argue for the superiority of a supposedly spiritual and artistic Latin America over a more developed, in technological and material terms, United States. But, by the end of the century, the privileging of technology–seen as neutral, apolitical, and necessarily positive–was a tenet held by large sectors of the population of Peru and the region as a whole, as demonstrated in part by the electoral success of Fujimori. While this faith in technological development as the solution to all social problems echoes discourses popular in the “First World” media, it also reflects the desire of Latin America’s population to break the cycle of poverty in which the region has been trapped. However, in one of the great ironies in Peruvian history, Fujimori’s now fortunately defunct regime has left the country mired in corruption, unemployment, poverty, and, of course, technological underdevelopment. Nevertheless, it is doubtful whether Fujimori’s failure has significantly altered Latin American or even Peruvian attitudes toward technology.

     

    This centrality of technology in contemporary Latin American political discourse gives special relevance to Jerry Hoeg’s Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative in the Twentieth Century and Beyond. This book consists of a series of powerful and persuasive interpretations of Latin American texts that emphasize the ideas (both explicit and implicit) regarding technology and science to be found in them. Hoeg’s readings are rooted in a theoretical framework that fuses Martin Heidegger’s and José Ortega y Gasset’s “philosophies of technology,” Cornelius Castoriadis’s notion of the “Social Imaginary,” and concepts originating in communications science, such as “code” and “redundancy.” From Heidegger and Ortega, Hoeg takes the idea that “the essence of our present technological era is nothing technological, but rather the product of a higher level mediation. Heidegger calls this mediation das Ge-stell, while Ortega refers to it as the social construction or definition of bienestar or well-being” (11).

     

    Hoeg sees Ge-stell/bienestar as defining the central code of the West, what Hoeg, following Castoriadis, terms its “Social Imaginary” (18).2 Using the concepts of Ge-stell/bienestar and that of the Social Imaginary, Hoeg deconstructs the traditional opposition between science and the humanities. Rather than presenting them as dichotomous, he believes that both technology and the humanities, especially literature, express in different, occasionally even contradictory, manners the same societal Ge-stell/bienestar. From the point of view of communications science, technology and literature can, therefore, be interpreted as examples of “the redundancy necessary to protect the message against the perturbations of a ‘noisy’ environment. . . . Without this coding or redundancy, a given society must necessarily succumb to the effects predicted by the Second Law of Thermodynamics, that is, it would become more and more entropic over time, until it eventually dissolved into complete disorder” (30). Thus, for Hoeg,

     

    Literature, technology, and science are among the societal messages that help constitute a Western society/communications system built upon a Ge-stell/ bienestar (and Social Imaginary) that has ultimately led not only to “controlling nature” and its side-consequences of ecological degradation, but also to “controlling humanity” and the decomposition of any semblance of social equity. (63)

     

    While the Latin American “cult of technology” is generally linked to the embrace of economic neoliberalism and the celebration of the United States (understood as the Mecca of consumerism and unbridled free markets) as the privileged societal model, Hoeg presents his analysis as oppositional to the current economic, political, and social order.3 In fact, he claims “the ultimate aim of this inquiry is to shed light on the possibility of constructing alternative codes or mediations which will produce sociotechnical messages of empowerment rather than domination” (10). And this desire for a radical change in the current Social Imaginary leads him to speculate on the possibility of a Heideggerian “Turning” from the Ge-stell that has led to our current ecological and social impasses and that would thus bring “a new coding of the relationship between nature, society, and technics [uses of technology]” (22-23). Moreover, based on his vision of society as a communications system, as well as on Ortega’s notion of bienestar as socially constructed, he believes one can assign to literature and literary criticism a central role in this possible “Turning”: “The fact that a given society’s ‘system of necessities’ is constrained and mediated by the Social Imaginary raises the question of the possible influence of literature in reshaping that Social Imaginary” (38). Hoeg not only breaks down the opposition between science/technology and the humanities/literature, he identifies the latter as a possible source of change of the Ge-stell/bienestar and the Social Imaginary.

     

    From this brief and, of necessity, incomplete summary of Hoeg’s complex theoretical framework, it should be clear that Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative is built on a contrary philosophical base that, while not invalidating the study’s importance, is symptomatic of certain characteristic problems faced by criticism in the present political and theoretical conjuncture. But, as we will see, Hoeg’s selection of texts and his interpretation of Latin American reality camouflage the theoretical disjunctions present in this study.

     

    These contradictions are directly linked to Hoeg’s simultaneous reliance on Heidegger and Ortega. Hoeg himself notes that:

     

    A key distinction between the view postulated by Ortega and that adumbrated by Heidegger concerns the role of technics in human socio-cultural activity. For Heidegger, the imposition of a certain metaphysical enframing or Ge-stell–the Social Imaginary–is an essential feature of the Western human condition which leads inevitably to our current technological society. For Ortega, on the other hand, the technics used to realize the creative projects of humanity can also lead to symbolic rather that [sic] imaginary constructions, that is, to cultural messages, such as art or literature, which can produce a society whose relations with the real are not predominantly rationalist or metaphysical. (20)

     

    In other words, the appropriation of Heidegger’s concept of das Ge-stell necessarily leads to a deterministic vision of the development of Western culture. Western civilization–which now includes the whole world–is thus a system that can only develop in the direction pre-programmed by the Ge-stell. True change is precluded. It is, therefore, not surprising that Heidegger sees the “Turning” in mystical, even messianic terms:

     

    But the surmounting of a destining of Being–here and now the surmounting of Enframing–each time comes to pass out of the arrival of another destining that does not allow itself to be either logically or historically predicted or to be metaphysically construed as a sequence belonging to a process of history. (qtd. in Hoeg 22)

     

    Unpredictable and nearly inconceivable, the “Turning” implies the irruption into the closed system of Western civilization of an unknown and unknowable external element capable of making visible the until-then “concealed truth” of the prevailing Ge-stell and, therefore, of presenting an alternative road that can lead to the “surmounting” of the path trodden, according to Heidegger, by our culture since Socrates. But Ortega’s bienestar, at least in Hoeg’s interpretation, includes social change in its definition. As society changes, and as the discourses society produces change, bienestar can change. Bienestar thus not only determines history, but is also historically determined. Beneath the obvious similarities, Ge-stell and bienestar are, therefore, irreconcilable concepts.

     

    This tension between the Heideggerian and Ortegan poles is present throughout Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative. Hoeg’s simultaneous reliance on bienestar and Ge-stell leads him to a contradictory search for possible agents of the “Turning” and a simultaneous dismissal of these same agents. Building on Ortega and communications science, Hoeg proposes literature as a possible source for the “Turning.” In fact, he ends his study by suggesting this possibility: “I would argue that if it [Latin American society] can change its social coding, a precondition of such a change is an awareness of the present coding, and that one source of this awareness can be found in Latin American narrative, if only we would look” (122). While Hoeg identifies what could be categorized as the kernels of a truly emancipating discourse in, for instance, the implicit criticism of the “techno-military-political structure” to be found in Gabriel García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude (33), or in the implied acknowledgment that “technology can be usefully contested only at the level of the code” discernable in Jorge Amado’s Gabriela (38), among other examples, his general evaluation of Latin American narrative and criticism is pessimistic. Hoeg finds that Latin American narrative and criticism, despite their often progressive tinge, are, as one would expect from Heidegger’s analysis, “mediated by the metaphysics of Modernity,” “mediated by a now global Social Imaginary,” and, furthermore, that “what these narratives do is perpetuate that enframing which is the essence of technology” (122). The same texts that are somehow a source for emancipation also help perpetuate the “metaphysics” of Modernity. (Indeed, both evaluations of Latin American literature are made on the same page of Science, Technology and Latin American Narrative.)

     

    Another facet of the aporia present throughout Hoeg’s study can be found in his analysis of cybernetic technology and the concomitant new media as possible “sources” for the “Turning.” Thus, Hoeg entertains the possibility that “the radical differences of electronically mediated communication” could lead to a “new social narrative” (25). Here Hoeg joins hands with other celebrants of the postmodern and even posthuman condition, such as N. Katherine Hayles and Donna Haraway. For instance, Hoeg quotes approvingly Haraway’s vision of the posthuman as overcoming “the tradition of racist male-dominated capitalism; the tradition of progress; the tradition of the appropriation of nature as resource for the productions of culture; the tradition of the reproduction of the self from the reflection of the other” (24). What is ironic is that Hoeg’s (as well as Hayles’s and Haraway’s) celebration of cybernetics and current digital innovations is nothing but the mirror image of the blind faith in technology commonplace in contemporary Latin America. If Fujimori and Latin American neo-liberals propose technology as the solution to the problems raised by the region’s lack of a “modern condition,” Hoeg, like the prophets of the posthuman, finds in current digital technologies the antidote to the “metaphysics of Modernity.”

     

    Needless to say, this belief in technology as leading not only to social change but also to a kind of utopia where all the dichotomies that haunt modernity are sutured into what could be called a “heterogeneous plenitude” contradicts the Heideggerean pole of Hoeg’s arguments. From a Heideggerean perspective, cybernetics and digital technology are nothing but the latest and until now fullest stage in the development of the Ge-stell. Hoeg, however, stops short of the full identification of technological development with the agent for the “Turning.” Despite his celebration of “postmodernity” and the “posthuman,” he remains aware of the fact that “new technologies are routinely heralded as the solution to all problems, only to be coopted shortly thereafter by the ‘system’” and of “the present impossibility of reconciling cyberscience with Third World realities” (26).

     

    It is possible, however, to argue that the contradiction between the Heideggerean Ge-stell and the Ortegan bienestar is not as clear in the case of Latin America as it would be in that of the “First World.” Despite Hoeg’s belief in the need to create a discourse of empowerment that would help generate the conditions necessary for the “Turning,” his analysis implies the impossibility of a willful change in the Ge-stell or the bienestar. After all, according to Hoeg’s version of Ortega’s bienestar, change at this level is rooted in technics. Thus Hoeg’s (as well as Hayles’s and Haraway’s) celebration of the possibilities for social change created by technological change and the new discourses derived from it is fully congruent with the version of Ortega presented in Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative. For Hoeg, change in the Social Imaginary originates in the possibilities created by the new digital and cybernetic technologies and media and not in any type of political or social resistance (although new technologies may give rise to the latter). While bienestar is grounded in history, it is doubtful whether Ortega’s concept can be seen as directly justifying any type of individual or group action. Moreover, since Latin American literature and criticism are described as trapped by the “global Social Imaginary” and without access to the apparently liberating possibilities generated by cybernetic technology and its concomitant media, the region can only depend on a deus ex-machina for its liberation.

     

    Hoeg somewhat unwillingly acknowledges the true consequences of his analysis when he asks, “Can Latin American society change its system of necessities without a wholesale change in the global Social Imaginary, or must it await the arrival of a new global destining in order to surmount its current enframing?” (122). It is this question, rather than the somewhat forced attempt at presenting Latin American literature as leading to “an awareness of the present coding” (122), that comes closest to being the logical conclusion of his study. When it comes to Latin America, both the Ortegan and Heideggerean poles of Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative are reconciled.

     

    Hoeg’s pessimism may, however, be reinforced by what I believe is a mistaken description of attitudes toward technology in Latin America. This misrepresentation is reinforced by his selection of texts. While there is no denying the importance of most of the texts chosen by Hoeg, the nearly exclusive selection of “Magic Realist” novels and other anti-rationalist texts such as Vasconcelos’s La raza cósmica skews his vision of Latin American narrative and culture.4 For instance, based on his analysis of García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude and Isabel Allende’s The House of the Spirits, Hoeg comes to the conclusion that contemporary Latin American fiction and, one can assume, criticism, are characterized by rejecting “technology . . . as imposed foreign domination” and as believing that it “leads inevitably to disastrous consequences” (35). However, as Fujimori’s slogan exemplifies, this is far from being today the only or, I would argue, the hegemonic attitude toward technology. In fact, rather than being possessed by an uncritical technophobia, many Latin Americans have been, to paraphrase the Mexican critic Carlos Monsiváis, “blinded by technology.”5 And this societal technophilia has led to the proliferation of writings on technology. For instance, many of Latin America’s most influential newspapers include weekly sections on technology that while frequently being just another cog in the cyber-industry’s advertising machinery also occasionally incorporate significant reflections on the subject.6

     

    This interest in technology, although clearly boosted by the “digital revolution,” is, moreover, not a new phenomenon. Monsiváis dates it to the post-Second World War and, in particular, to the introduction of television (211-12). Moreover, if, following Hoeg, one looks for literary reflections on technology, one can safely include texts that span much of the twentieth century. Such texts would include Spanish American vanguardista and Brazilian modernista narratives and poems of the 1920s, Roberto Arlt’s El juguete rabioso (1931), Adolfo Bioy Casares’s Morel’s Invention (1940), and, from an indigenista perspective, José María Arguedas’s poem “Oda al jet” (1967).7 And the obvious affinity between Borges’s interest in levels of reality in his stories prefigures contemporary concerns regarding virtual realities and simulacra present in such recent science fiction films as The Matrix, The Thirteenth Floor, and Existenz, or the Spanish Open Your Eyes and its American remake Vanilla Sky.8

     

    Nevertheless, the cultural vein analyzed by Hoeg is still important. The fact is that despite the region’s current obsession with technological development, “Magical Realism” expresses a significant tendency in Latin American culture. It is not accidental that One Hundred Years of Solitude is generally considered to be the most important Latin American novel, or that the works of Isabel Allende and Laura Esquivel are frequently best-sellers in the region. Dissatisfaction with a technological progress that never fully arrives, and distrust of a never-ending process of modernization that seems to exacerbate social inequality and environmental degradation, are the underside of the region’s technophilia.

     

    Thus, despite the contradictions and omissions analyzed above, Science, Technology, and Latin American Narrative is a groundbreaking work. Hoeg’s profound, though problematic, philosophical framework leads him to read the texts selected from a new and topically relevant perspective. After all, technology is at the center of contemporary existence, whether in the so-called “First” or “Third” World, and any attempt at thinking through social change must necessarily deal with the problematics of technology, technics, and science. And the anti-technological (and anti-rational) tradition identified and studied by Hoeg is an important tendency in Latin American culture, though at the present it is far from hegemonic. Hoeg is not alone in his inability to reconcile his desire for social change with his analyses of society and literature. Rather, this simultaneous dissatisfaction with existing social reality and an incapacity to imagine a way to move beyond it is the quandary faced by much postmodern thought. If earlier generations of critics (especially Latin American and Latin Americanist) could find in revolution the deus ex-machina capable of changing reality, it would seem that today one has to be satisfied with finding in technology, discourse, or literature the seeds of a change nearly impossible to imagine.

     

    Notes

     

    1. It is necessary to point out that I am referring to the connotations implicit in Vargas Llosa’s and Fujimori’s professions, rather than to the actual political positions held by both then candidates. Vargas Llosa, as a staunch neo-liberal, is far from being a technophobe and believes that “the internationalization of modern life–of markets, of technology, of capital–permits any country . . . to achieve rapid growth” (45). It must be noted, however, that Fujimori’s campaign played up not only his career–frequently contrasting it with his rival’s profession as a novelist–but also his Japanese background. The Japanese in Peru, as in other countries, are associated with technological prowess, among other traits.

     

    2. Heidegger defines the Ge-stell or “Enframing” as “the gathering together that belongs to that setting-upon man and puts him in position to reveal the real, in the mode of ordering as a standing-reserve,” and notes that “Enframing, as the challenging-forth into ordering, sends into a way of revealing” (24). Ortega y Gasset argues that the concept of bienestar incorporates not only physical necessities but also “the objectively superfluous” considered by a group of people as necessary (294). Thus bienestar determines technology: “technology is a system of actions called forth and directed by these necessities, it likewise is of a Protean nature and ever changing” (294). Castoriadis defines the Social Imaginary as the element “which gives a specific orientation to every institutional system, which overdetermines the choice and the connections of symbolic networks, which is the creation of each historical period, its singular manner of living, of seeing and of conducting its own existence, its world, and its relations with this world” (145). Despite the fact that one can establish differences between the three concepts (Ge-stell and bienestar are presented as defining technology, while the Social Imaginary determines society as a whole; and unlike Ge-stell, bienestar and the Social Imaginary are explicitly presented as historically determined), they all imply the existence of higher-level mediations for technology and/or society. In Hoeg’s study the exact relationship between Ge-stell, bienestar, and the Social Imaginary is, however, not fully theorized. Although Hoeg frequently uses the concepts of Ge-stell and bienestar as synonymous with that of the Social Imaginary–see the quotation in paragraph 7–it is not clear whether they only determine the fields of Western science, modern technology, and “creative production” (18). In other words, Hoeg doesn’t make explicit whether he believes that the code that “overdetermines” science and technology actually determines society as a whole, or that it is simply one of the “ensemble of societal codes that constitute . . . [the] Social Imaginary,” even if the most important (30).

     

    3. Carlos Monsiváis, the astute Mexican cultural critic, describes this attitude in the following terms: “Technology blinds and there is no doubt about the correct strategy: imitate [everything] North American” (212). The translation is mine.

     

    4. The novels studied by Hoeg include such “Magical Realist” texts as Gabriel García Márquez’s One Hundred Years of Solitude, Isabel Allende’s House of the Spirits, and Laura Esquivel’s Like Water for Chocolate. He also analyzes the Brazilian film O Boto that, in its use of regional myths, shows a certain affinity with the Magical Realism of these novels.

     

    5. See note 3.

     

    6. Among the major newspapers that include weekly sections on technology are the Argentinean La Nación and El Clarín, the Mexican La Jornada, the Brazilian O Estado de São Paulo, and the Peruvian El Comercio. Nahif Yehva’s articles on the Internet, software, and hardware for La Jornada can serve as an example of the critical discourse presented in the Latin American mass media.

     

    7. Vicky Unruh, in her account of Spanish American vanguardia and Brazilian modernista poetic movements of the 1920s, Latin American Vanguards: The Art of Contentious Encounters, writes about this interest in technology: “Vanguardist expression reinforced this self-defining image of artists as workers by portraying artistic work with technological or athletic motifs, a poetics of airplanes, automobiles, elevators, bicycles, and trampolines” (80). Flora Süssekind describes the relation of pre-modernista and modernista literature, with technology as “flirtation, friction, or appropriation” (4). In both the cases of Brazil and Spanish America, the attitude of writers toward technology during the first decades of the century cannot be characterized as being exclusively, or even mainly, one of rejection.

     

    8. This interest in simulacra, virtual realities, and technology is precisely the topic of Bioy’s Morel’s Invention, which, as is well known, is based on an idea by Borges.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Castoriadis, Cornelius. The Imaginary Institution of Society. Trans. Kathleen Blamey. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1987.
    • Heidegger, Martin. “The Question Concerning Technology.” The Question Concerning Technology, and Other Essays. Trans. William Lovitt. New York: Garland, 1977. 3-35.
    • Monsiváis, Carlos. Aires de familia: Cultura y sociedad en América Latina. Barcelona: Editorial Anagrama, 2000.
    • Ortega y Gasset, José. “Thoughts on Technology.” Trans. Helene Weyl. Philosophy and Technology: Readings in the Philosophical Problems of Technology. Ed. Carl Mitcham and Robert Mackey. New York: Free, 1972. 290-313.
    • Süssekind, Flora. Cinematograph of Words: Literature, Technique, and Modernization in Brazil. Trans. Paulo Henriques Britto. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Unruh, Vicky. Latin American Vanguards: The Art of Contentious Encounters. Berkeley, CA: U of California P, 1994.
    • Vargas Llosa, Mario. A Fish in the Water: A Memoir. Trans. Helen Lane. New York: Farrar, 1994.

     

  • Demonstration and Democracy

    Arkady Plotnitsky

    Theory and Cultural Studies Program
    Department of English
    Purdue University
    aplotnit@sla.purdue.edu

     

    Review of: Bruno Latour, Pandora’s Hope: Essays on the Reality of Science Studies.Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.

     

    Scientists are becoming more attentive to and are addressing more openly the relationships between politics and science. (Many scientists have of course–at least since Galileo, if not Archimedes or even the pre-Socratics–been aware of and had to confront the complexity of these relationships.) As I am writing this review, I am reading a commentary by Roger A. Pielke Jr., “Science Policy: Policy, Politics, and Perspective,” in the current issue of Nature (28 March 2002), dealing with these relationships in their, I would argue, postmodern specificity, as does Bruno Latour’s Pandora’s Hope. The timing of the Nature article could not be more auspicious for this review, but other examples, articles, and books, technical and popular, are not hard to come by.

     

    It is difficult to say to what degree this increased attention is specifically due to the influence of what is known as science studies or social, or sometimes social-constructivist, studies of science, a controversial field that has emerged during the last several decades and to which Latour’s work largely belongs. It is also not altogether clear how much this attention was influenced by the controversies themselves around science studies, most recently the so-called “Science Wars.” The latter followed the appearance of Paul Gross and Norman Levitt’s book Higher Superstition: The Academic Left and its Quarrels with Science (1994), theoretical physicist Alan Sokal’s hoax article published in the journal Social Text (1995), and Impostures intellectueles (1998), co-authored by Sokal and another theoretical physicist, Jean Bricmont, first published in France, and then in England and the U.S., under the title Fashionable Nonsense: Postmodern Intellectuals’ Abuse of Science (1998). Latour has been a prominent subject of and participant in the Science Wars debates, beginning with Gross and Levitt’s book, and through Latour’s responses to his critics, including those in Pandora’s Hope (some among the essays included in the book have been published earlier). Some of these debates have been conducted in scientific journals, such as Nature and Physics Today, and have involved leading scientists. Accordingly, they may have had an impact (it is, again, difficult to say how large) on the proliferating discussions of the relationships between politics and science in the scientific community. It would be hard, however, to underestimate other factors involved, from increasing competition for funding to the problems of bioethics; these may indeed be the more significant ones.

     

    Be that as it may, Latour’s work and arguments, as presented in the book, could help scientists and others who want to understand the complexity, “the Gordian knot,” as Latour called it in his earlier We Have Never Been Modern, of the postmodern entanglement of politics and science. Indeed, the three problem phenomena invoked by the Nature article just cited, under the fitting heading “Gridlock”–“global climate change,” “nuclear power,” and “biodiversity” (367)–are paradigmatically Latourian, and the first is specifically invoked by him in We Have Never Been Modern. That need not mean that scientists or others must agree with Latour’s analysis (the present author does not always either). But they might do well to engage with it properly, or at least to stay with it for more than a sentence or two, the usual limit of most “science warriors,” which also applies to other postmodernists they “read.” I am not sure how much hope–this may be a kind of Pandora’s hope in turn–one might hold here, and sometimes the Pandora’s-box nature of these works, Latour’s included, complicates their chances. I am not sure that humanists, especially historians, sociologists, and philosophers of science, will always give Latour the chance he deserves either. I hope they will.

     

    Beyond serving as a useful introduction to the current stage of science studies and as a commentary on the Science Wars (and it is, again, worth reading for the sake of these subjects alone), Pandora’s Hope pursues, with many notable successes, at least three ambitious and interconnected tasks. The first is to redefine the concept of reality by using the research undertaken in science studies; the second is to rethink the relationships between science and politics in modern (ultimately extending from Plato) and then postmodern culture; and the third is to redefine political philosophy–indeed, Latour appears to suggest, even to define it meaningfully for the first time. These tasks are interconnected in part because the phenomena in question are, Latour rightly argues, themselves irreducibly interconnected. In particular, there can be no modernity or postmodernity other than scientific, as science was irreducibly involved with setting up what Latour calls, in We Have Never Been Modern, “the modern constitution,” which unequivocally separated nature and politics. Or rather, the moderns only claim (and can only claim) to separate them, since such a separation is, in principle, impossible, as both are ultimately entangled in any phenomena, scientific or political. Hence, Latour’s title, We Have Never Been Modern. Pandora’s Hope builds on and deepens this argument.

     

    The book has some key “postmodern” allies, in particular Michel Serres, Gilles Deleuze (in part via Isabelle Stengers’s work) and Jean-François Lyotard, who, while mentioned only in passing, may be more important for the book than it might appear. Indeed, I would argue that Latour’s work is much more postmodern, at least in Lyotard’s sense, than he is willing to acknowledge. Latour’s argument that “we have never been modern” can be coordinated with Lyotard’s famous maxim that the postmodern precedes the modern, in a pre-logical rather than ontological sense. This sense is defined by a complex underlying (“postmodern”) dynamics that both gives rise to and is suppressed or repressed by the modern, not unlike the way in which the hybrid or the “factish” (combining “fact” and “fetish”) are repressed by the moderns’ unequivocal separations (into nature and politics, into facts and fetishes) in Latour. This kind of postmodernism, that is, the one that is both Lyotardian and Latourian (keeping in mind the differences between Lyotard’s and Latour’s views), helps the richness and effectiveness of Latour’s analysis, rather than misses its arguments, as some postmodernisms, or at least some postmodernists, indeed might. Reciprocally, Latour’s analysis enriches and expands our understanding of postmodern culture and the role of science and technology in it.

     

    The book has nine hefty chapters (and a substantial conclusion). The first, “Do You Believe in Reality?: News from the Trenches of the Science War,” serves as an introduction and a set-up, but it is significant in its own right in giving its title question a necessary complexity and a necessary ambiguity, or in Niels Bohr’s phrase “essential ambiguity,” without which one cannot perhaps refer to any form of ultimate reality. The next four chapters are case studies, vintage Latour and engrossing reading, but with significant philosophical twists. Two of them, Chapters 4 and 5, extend Latour’s justly famous work on Louis Pasteur. Latour’s work is arguably the best that science studies has to offer us, in part given its greater philosopher charge, which contrasts with most other works in this generally more empiricist field. The case studies also ground and prepare the last three, more philosophical, chapters, on which I shall primarily concentrate here. These chapters define the book’s achievement as a contribution to the current state of the debates concerning the relationships between science and culture, politics included. The Science Wars are, Latour argues, a reflection and an effect of this role.

     

    Indeed, as he became arguably the main target of the Science Wars scientific critics, at least as far as science studies are concerned (Lacan, Deleuze, and, overt disclaimers to the contrary, Derrida, are targeted for their “postmodernist” abuses of science), Latour gets hold of some among the deeper underlying forces involved in shaping the confrontation. Reciprocally, however, these forces define the postmodern philosophical, cultural, and political scene. As I said, the grounds for both this insight into the Science Wars and the underlying play of forces in question are prepared in We Have Never Been Modern and, to some degree, already in Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time by Serres and Latour. The workings of these forces are now traced to Plato’s Gorgias (not coincidentally, Lyotard discusses Gorgias, the philosopher, in The Differend as well), in Chapter 7, “The Inventions of the Science War: The Settlement of Socrates and Callicles” and in Chapter 8, “A Politics Freed from Science: The Body Cosmopolitics.”

     

    Stephen Weinberg’s comment in his “Sokal’s Hoax,” parallel to Socrates’s (broader) view of the role of geometry in the world (human and divine) in Gorgias, provides a fitting point of departure: “Our civilization has been powerfully affected by the discovery that nature is strictly governed by impersonal laws….We will need to confirm and strengthen the vision of a rationally understandable world if we are to protect ourselves from the irrational tendencies that still best humanity” (216). Weinberg is not wrong in the first part of this statement, although one could, and Latour does, assess the value and significance of this impact differently. The impact itself may indeed be traced to the Greeks’ invention of mathematics rather than, as in Weinberg’s narrower context, to the invention of modern (mathematical) physics by Galileo and, especially, by Newton. It is Weinberg’s second statement, or rather the conjunction of both statements thus defined, that is Latour’s primary target. Alan Sokal’s “serious” “political,” including his “Marxist,” arguments, may be shown to follow the same “logic” (quotation marks appear obligatory here). To the degree, which is large, that this conjunction defines the Science Wars, one can indeed trace their invention to Plato’s Gorgias, defined by “the strong link…between the respect for impersonal natural laws, on the one hand, and the fight against irrationality, immorality, and political disorder, on the other” (217). More accurately, in Socrates’s case one would speak of the universal laws (of geometry), more those of mind than of nature, and Weinberg, in fairness, does not claim a role for mathematics beyond science, as his immediate context is more narrowly and differently defined. Essentially, however, Latour’s argument stands, given the deeper underpinning of Weinberg’s argument. Indeed Latour’s immediate elaboration nearly makes the case. He writes:

     

    In both quotations the fate of Reason and the fate of Politics are associated in a single destiny. To attack Reason is to render morality and social peace impossible. Right is what protects us against Might; Reason against civil warfare. The common tenet is that we need something “inhuman”–for Weinberg, the natural law no human has constructed; for Socrates, geometry whose demonstrations escape human whim–if we want to be able to fight against “inhumanity.” To sum up: only inhumanity will quash inhumanity. Only a Science that is not made by man will protect a Body Politic that is in constant risk of being made by the mob. Yes, Reason is our rampart, our Great Wall of China, our Maginot Line against the dangerous unruly mob. (217)

     

    What is perhaps most remarkable about this, one might say, naïve view, naïve as concerns both science or mathematics (for example, in applying to nature, including the nature of mind, a human, “all too human,” concept of law) and politics, or the relationships between them, is that it has been so successful. For, as Latour immediately observes, “this line of reasoning, which I will call ‘inhumanity against inhumanity,’ has been attacked ever since it began, from the Sophists, against whom Plato launches his all-out assault, all the way to the motley gang of people accused of ‘postmodernism’ (an accusation, by the way, as vague as the curse of being a ‘sophist’)” (217). Indeed the two accusations are often vaguely combined. There is no simple answer to the question why these counterarguments have more often failed than succeeded, and it would, accordingly, be difficult to blame Latour for not really pursuing the subject in the book. But he could have. This relative lack of success, admittedly, gives the other side of the Science Wars additional ammunition that is philosophically feeble but politically workable. Admittedly, too, many of these counterarguments have been equally deficient, philosophically and politically. Indeed, according to Latour, most (all?) of them have failed in at least one respect, something he aims to remedy: “None of these critiques…has disputed simultaneously the definition of Science and the definition of the Body Politic that it implies. Inhumanity is accepted in both or in at least one of them” (218).

     

    This assessment does not appear to me entirely accurate, even with respect to what Latour sees as “postmodern” critique and specifically to Friedrich Nietzsche, who, perhaps inevitably, enters the scene immediately, first by way of quotation, “human all too human,” and then by name (217). Nietzsche’s argument in On the Genealogy of Morals, invoked throughout the chapter, is not sufficiently explored by Latour, either. Nietzsche’s and Latour’s views are of course not the same, but, especially on this particular point, they share more than Latour appears to think. The philosophical effectiveness of any given argument, however, does not necessarily guarantee and sometimes prevents its success anywhere, among people or philosophers, for example, as indeed both Socrates (including in Gorgias, as Latour observes) and, more deeply, Nietzsche understood so well. Beginning with The Birth of Tragedy, Nietzsche undertook an investigation, unprecedented in profundity and scope alike, of the question why Socrates’s or related and parallel arguments (those shaping the history of Christian morality, for example) have, eventually, succeeded on such an extraordinary scale, including where they initially failed, in Greece.

     

    Similarly, Lyotard’s argument from The Postmodern Condition on goes quite far in understanding the “humanity,” indeed conjoined “humanity” rather than conjoined “inhumanity,” of both science and politics, that is, speaking for the moment in terms Latour uses. Ultimately, to return to the idiom of We Have Never Been Modern, we need a new “constitution,” one that, as against the (unworkable) “modern constitution,” enacts a conjunction rather than a strict separation of nature and politics, and even a certain “parliamentarity” of the human and the nonhuman. In Pandora’s Hope Latour approaches this economy, which is also a political economy, in other terms as well, such as those of the collective (of humans and nonhumans), specifically in Chapter 6, indebted in part to the work of Michel Callon (with whom Latour collaborated earlier), and also in “factish” (“fact-fetish”) in Chapter 9. This view is not far from Lyotard’s, even though Latour himself, again, juxtaposes it to postmodernism. Lyotard’s own concept of “the inhuman,” developed in his The Inhuman: Reflections on Time, could be considered from this viewpoint and used to complement and amplify Latour’s critique. On the other hand, Latour seems to give Lyotard credit, well deserved indeed, for his engagement with the political in his subsequent works, specifically along the lines of Latour’s argument here (232). These works, however, such as Just Gaming and The Differend, extend rather than depart from his argument in The Postmodern Condition. As I said, Latour is much more “postmodernist” than he suspects. Reciprocally, Latour’s argument throws a new light on postmodernism and the debates around it, or within it, for example, concerning the more Lyotardian view of postmodernist epistemology and politics versus more Marxist views, such as those of Fredric Jameson and his followers. In the latter case, a Socratic-like agenda of the governing role of a particular, almost geometrically demonstrable, political theory, often takes over.

     

    It may be noted that even short of a deeper analysis of its human or human-nonhuman nature, one could argue that, at least, modern or “postmodern” (the term has been used even by some scientists) mathematics and science are not as cooperative in the agenda in question as, for example, Weinberg would believe them to be. Even if one accepts Weinberg’s position and views modern mathematics and science in his “inhuman” terms, they appear to tell us something quite different from what Weinberg seems to hear. Indeed more limited as it is, this type of counterargument has a force of its own. The grounds on which the science warriors, from Socrates on, build their edifice are, Latour is right, untenable; but their argument fails, their edifice collapses even on its own ground. Lyotard offers this type of argument as part of his critique of modernity’s ideology of science in The Postmodern Condition (a critique that has often been misunderstood, including by the science warriors). If, he argues, one wants to follow mathematics and science or what they tell us about nature and mind, in the way the Enlightenment follows classical mathematics and physics, one might want to examine first what twentieth-century mathematics and science–relativity, quantum physics, chaos theory, modern molecular biology and genetics, post-Gödelian mathematical logic, and so forth–actually tell us. More accurately, one should speak of a certain version or reading of the Enlightenment, to begin with, since both the Enlightenment and, for that matter, classical mathematics and science tell us a different story and a different history as well.

     

    In any event, what mathematics and science in fact appear to tell us (about nature or themselves) is in conflict with the key premises of the modern (either in Lyotard’s or Latour’s sense) view or ideology of either mathematics and science or nature and politics. Among these premises are reality and causality (concomitantly defined by their mathematical, and specifically continuous, character); the independence of this mathematical, and indeed geometrical, reality of our engagement with nature through observation and measurement; a strictly logical view of mathematical reasoning (i.e., as always decidable as concerns the truth or falsity of any given proposition); and so forth. These premises and their necessity for the practice of mathematics and science have been questioned by some (it is true, not very many) mathematicians and scientists as well, in particular by Bohr, Heisenberg, and other founders of quantum physics, which puts these premises to their arguably most severe test on scientific grounds. The same premises also define the key programs of the Enlightenment and “the modern constitution,” based on the (“inhuman”) way in which mathematics and science, or nature and politics, allegedly work or, in the case of politics, ought to work. It follows, among other things, that contrary to Weinberg’s view or hope, nature may not in fact be subject to immutable, or any, mathematical laws. It goes almost without saying that to question such premises is not the same as simply abandoning them, but instead enables a better understanding of the limits of their applicability, a refinement of their conceptualization and formulations, and so forth. I say “almost” in view of persistent misunderstandings of this and related points, including those made by Latour himself, the misunderstandings that defined and in some ways (there are deeper philosophical and political factors, which is the point here) initiated the Science Wars debates.

     

    Latour amplifies the preceding argument by his powerful and elegant analysis, one of the best in the book, in Chapter 8, “A Politics Freed from Science: The Body Cosmopolitics,” concerning the actual practice of science, which he sees, rightly, as in conflict with the Science Warriors’, the Socrates-Weinberg, view of science. This argument also allows one to

     

    see…how the sciences can be free from the burden of making a type of politics that shortcuts politics. If we now calmly read the Gorgias, we recognize that a certain specialized form of reasoning, epistèmè, was kidnapped for a political purpose it could not possibly fulfill. This has resulted in bad politics but in an even worse science. If we let the kidnapped science escape, then two different meanings of the adjective “scientific” become distinguishable again after being lumped together for so long. (258)

     

     

    The implications of this argument thus reach beyond our understanding of science, although not beyond science, which cannot be dissociated from modern politics–and there is perhaps no other politics, beginning with the Greeks and their invention of demonstration and democracy. As will be seen, for Latour, bringing science and politics, and demonstration and democracy, together so that both they and we could indeed benefit from each other is a task, a formidable “task of today” (265). First, however, we need to consider the two different meanings of “scientific” in question. As Latour writes:

     

    The first meaning is that of Science with a capital S, the ideal of transportation of information without discussion or deformation. This Science, capital S, is not a description of what scientists do. To use an old term, it is an ideology that never had any other use, in the epistemologists’ hands, than to offer a substitute for public discussion. It has always been a political weapon to do away with the constraints of politics. From the beginning, as we saw in the dialogue, it was tailored to this end alone, and it has never stopped, through the ages, being used in this way. Because it was intended as a weapon, this conception of Science, the one Weinberg clings to so forcefully, is usable neither to “make humanity less irrational” nor to make the sciences better. It has only one use: “Keep your mouth shut!”–the “you” designating, interestingly enough, other scientists involved in controversies as much as the people in general. “Substitute Science, capital S, for political rationality” is only a war cry. In that sense, and that sense only, it is useful, as we can witness in these days of the Science Wars. However, this definition of Science No. 1, I am afraid, has no more uses than a Maginot Line, and I take great pleasure in being branded as “antiscientific” if scientific has only this meaning. (258-59)

     

    The actual situation may be somewhat more complex, since Weinberg’s view of science (but not of politics) could be related to what scientists actually do, as Latour acknowledges in his discussion of the second meaning of “scientific,” but to which one might give further attention (259). In this sense, it is indeed the ideology in question that is the main problem here. Paul Feyerabend sees this move–this tremendous and impoverishing, “cold,” reduction of science and, through thus reduced science, of politics or even of life itself–as “the tale of abstraction against the richness of being,” his subtitle of Conquest of Abundance. He traces this move to the pre-Socratics, especially to Democritus’s atomism and Parmenides’s logic of oneness, and, ethically-politically, to Homer (on virtue), and then to the modern view of science, from Newton to Einstein and beyond. (Weinberg’s view would be an example as well.) Keats drives the point home more speedily and effectively in Lamia (with Socrates, and his philosophy, and both Descartes and Newton, and their optics, in mind, and perhaps with Democritus and Boyle as well, all figures crucial to Latour’s argument, here and elsewhere): “… Do not all charms fly/ At the mere touch of cold philosophy? … Philosophy will clip an Angel’s wings/ Conquer all mysteries by rule and line,/ Empty the haunted air …” (Part II, ll. 229-30, 234-35).

     

    At least, a certain philosophy and/as a certain form or ideology of mathematics and science, since the latter views pursued differently (or even also differently) could also create “the richness of being,” even by their rules and lines. “But,” Latour continues, “‘scientific’ has one other meaning, which is much more interesting and is not engaged in doing away with politics, not because it is apolitical or because it is politicized, but because it deals with entirely different questions, a difference that is never respected when Science No. 1 is taken, by its friends as well as by its foes, as all there is to say about science” (259). It is, thus, first of all, not a question of an argument or discourse against science, quite the contrary. Latour’s conception of science (or, and again comcomitantly, of reality or truth)–one of his most important and original in the book–also goes beyond earlier and more rigid forms of social constructivism, such as that of David Bloor and his school (197). This richer and subtler “constructivism” is arrived at in part by reciprocally rethinking the social as well, most especially through the concept of the collective of human and nonhumans, and of their entangled and mutually defining relationships, in Chapter 6. As Latour writes:

     

    The second meaning of the adjective “scientific” is the gaining of access, through experiments and calculations, to entities that at first do not have the same characteristics as humans do. This definition may seem odd, but it is what is alluded to by Weinberg’s own interest in “impersonal laws.” Science No. 2 deals with nonhumans, which in the beginning are foreign to social life, and which are slowly socialized on our midst through the channels of laboratories, expeditions, institutions, and so on, as recent historians of science have so often described. What working scientists want to be sure of is that they do not make up, with their own repertoire of actions, the new entities to which they have access. They want each new nonhuman to enrich their repertoire of action, their ontology. Pasteur, for example, does not [arbitrarily] “construct” his microbes; rather his microbes, and French society, are changed, through their common agency, from a collective [of humans and nonhumans] made up of, say, x entities into one made up of many more entities, including microbes. (259)

     

    This argument may need a more nuanced stratification as concerns the production and circulation in question, as Latour indeed intimates (259). In particular, one might need to consider multiple circulations of and circulations between circulations, within science and between science and culture. It is also clear that these profusions or circulations within circulations are bound to give rise to other meanings of “scientific” as well. Latour adds one himself (260, note 3), but still others, either more limited to science or mathematics or more extended, are conceivable and indeed necessary. Latour’s argument is, however, fundamentally right and momentous in its implications. First of all, it follows that there could be neither a concept of reality nor a meaningful relation to any reality outside such circulations. Accordingly, all “realities” of science studies (such as those defined by various collectives of humans and nonhumans, hybrids, factishes, and so forth) in turn emerge in relation to these circulations. This view also makes “it possible to say, without contradiction,” as Latour does in his analysis of Pasteur, “both ‘Airborne germs were made up in 1984’ and ‘They were there all along’” (173). The same logic applies to several of his similar arguments elsewhere, often equally misunderstood or unread, for example, by science warriors.

     

    Indeed one of the most remarkable capacities of modern science, specifically quantum theory, is to “construct” (using this terms with Latour’s qualification in the above passage in mind) and place in circulation unconstructible entities (such as those known as “elementary particles”). That is, it is capable of constructing and placing in circulation something to which no conceivable notion or property, physical or mathematical, could be rigorously attributed. They are circulated as such both within and outside physics, albeit far from without much resistance to this type of epistemology, either within science (Einstein was one the primary forces of this resistance and inspiration for many others) or outside it. It is not surprising that the idea meets so much resistance since, as I have indicated, it puts on hold the claims, such as Weinberg’s, that “nature” could ultimately be described or governed by mathematics. This is, of course, not to say that one no longer uses mathematics, but only that one uses it differently, including for the purposes of circulating the work concerning such un-objects.

     

    From a Latourian perspective, Weinberg’s or others’ “interests,” grounding (but not identical to) their view of science as Science No. 1, would be part of such circulations, possibly by grounding some among them. But this view must also be understood in relation to other circulations, possible or actual, or of course also to impossibilities of circulation. The same argument would apply to mathematics (so crucial for Weinberg’s or Socrates’s views of the world), to mathematical circulation, and to the circulation of mathematics itself (as a field). Mathematics may well be a special case, including (a special case of its own) specifically geometrical demonstration or proof, and we must account for this specificity, in turn, in a special way. But it is not outside of this picture. Mathematics is not likely to be some special gift from the “heavens” (divine or human), although some mathematicians, scientists, and philosophers may think it is. Instead, like science or philosophy, it may be seen as having arisen and continuing to arise from translating and refining more common experiences and practices, and from circulations they entail or that give rise to them.

     

    As Latour elegantly argues in Chapter 3, “Circulating Reference,” the work of science studies, such as Latour’s own, participates differently from but reciprocally with science itself in these circulations and circulations of circulation (78-79). This circulation is contiguous or metonymic. A remarkable case of a circulation, indeed a circulation between, at least, two circulations, where reciprocity and metonymy are accompanied by metaphoric parallels, is that of Frederic Joliot, considered in Chapter 3, “Science’s Blood Flow: Joliot’s Scientific Intelligence.” Latour’s title is aptly fitting on both counts, in its circulation metaphor and its blood metaphor. Circulation is the life-blood of science, which also needs what exceeds it. (Latour also puns on “intelligence.”) I ought to add, however, that this argument is only a part, a small part, of this superb chapter, which offers a brilliant and complex analysis of a complex case, defined as much by Joliot’s political as by his scientific activities, and by the complex circulations between science and politics. This economy, Latour shows, defines Joliot’s work well before he becomes (after the Second World War) a prominent presence on the political scene in France and beyond.

     

    Now, the analysis of such circulations and circulations between circulations is not easy, either in their historical specificity or (to the degree we can separate them) in terms of the necessary concepts, and Latour’s analysis by and large succeeds on both counts. But he seems to me stronger on the work and abundance of circulations than on “breaks” in circulations or the impossibility of circulation or “construction,” in mathematics and science or elsewhere, which seems to me just as important, in some cases, more important. In general, Latour’s thought is closer to what may be seen as the (more utopian?) philosophy of abundance and continuity, which also defines the thought of Feyerabend and Deleuze, or Whitehead and Bergson, or earlier Leibniz and Spinoza (the last three in turn major inspirations for Deleuze). This philosophy may be contrasted to the philosophy of insufficiency and rupture, extending from Kant’s critical philosophy to Heidegger, Bataille, Levinas, Derrida, and de Man, among others. Descartes, Hegel, and Nietzsche may be seen as the thinkers of both, and it is to be observed that in all these cases it is also a question of relative balance, rather than unequivocal determination. Allegiances to the first and, conversely, distances from the second line of thought are quite apparent in Latour’s views–sometimes, I would argue, at a price, and especially, again, as concerns a more rigorous understanding of heterogeneities and breaks in the circulations in question. On that score, Latour’s analysis could benefit from the ideas of the figures just mentioned, especially Bataille, Derrida, de Man, or, again, Lyotard (specifically on “the inhuman”). Lyotard defines the political as the irreducible heterogeneous, even if interactive–interactively heterogeneous and heterogeneously interactive–and subject to equally irreducible breaks in its circulations. Latour, however, is quite right to insist on the significance of circulation, especially insofar as the relationships between science and politics, or culture, are concerned. His analysis of such circulations, their rhizomatic networks, and circulations between circulations, networks linking networks, is a major contribution, whose significance extends well beyond science studies.

     

    Latour is also right in arguing that “to do justice to this scientific work,” the work defined as Science No. 2, (the ideology of) Science No. 1 is “totally inadequate” (260). He adds a significant observation:

     

    We recognize here, by the way, the two enemy camps between which science studies is trying to gain a foothold: those from the humanities who think we give too much to nonhumans; and those from some quarters of the “hard” sciences who accuse us of giving too much to the humans. This symmetrical accusation triangulates with great precision the place where we in science studies stand: we follow scientists in their daily scientific practice in the No. 2 definition, not in the No. 1 political definition. Reason–meaning Science No. 1–does not describe science better than cynicism describes politics. (260)

     

    This statement, again, makes clear a crucial point. It is not a matter of a discourse against science, any more than against reality or truth, but rather that of refiguring and re-delimiting both and their relationships, in their relationships, naturally, as against, the ideology, ultimately itself non-scientific, although political, of Science No. 1. This is a brilliant reversal with respect to the attacks (such as those by the science warriors) against science studies. It is the science warriors’ view of science that is in fact political and not scientific; the science studies political view of science will be shown to be more scientific.

     

    Nor is this all, as we now begin to perceive Latour’s ultimate, and quite elegant, logic more clearly. First of all, it is worth reiterating yet another more obvious and more easily apparent reversal. The “politics” of science warriors, let’s call it Politics or, with Latour, the Social No. 1, is not really political or social, any more than their science, Science No. 1, is scientific. Science No. 2 is more political as well, along with being scientific. It is, however, by combining both reversals that Latour’s logic reaches its ultimate conclusions. The form, the formal logic, as it were, of Socrates’s argument is in fact repeated. Science is indeed crucial to and defines politics, which might, finally (might!) enable us “to benefit from the Greeks’ two inventions, demonstration and democracy” (265). But how different is the substance of both politics and science, and of their relationships, and, hence, how different is the political philosophy one now needs to pursue! For, thanks in large measure to what Science No. 2 could do for politics, this new constitution entails a very different social, or in Serres’s terms, natural or social-natural contract and a new collectivity and, in the language of We Have Never Been Modern, a new “parliamentarity” of both humans and nonhumans. Latour writes:

     

    Far from taking us away from the agora, Science No. 2–one clearly separated from the impossible agenda of Science, capital S–redefines political order as that which brings together stars, prions, cows, heavens, and people, the task being to turn this collective into a “cosmos” instead of “unruly shambles” [as invoked by Socrates]. For scientists such an endeavor seems much more lively, much more interesting, much more adapted to their skills and genius, than the boring repetitive chore of beating the poor undisciplined demos with the big stick of “impersonal laws.” This new settlement is not the one Socrates and Callicles agreed on [in Gorgias ]–“appealing to one form of inhumanity to avoid inhuman social behavior”–but something that could be defined as “collectively making sure that the collective formed by ever vaster numbers of humans and nonhumans becomes a cosmos.” (261)

     

    Naturally, this new politics is not easy to put into practice. (But then it took Socratic politics, defined by Science No. 1, a while to take a hold, indeed a grip, upon the world.) For, as Latour says,

     

    For this other possible task, however, we not only need scientists who will abandon the older privileges of Science No. 1 and at last take up a science (No. 2) freed from politics [Politics No. 1, defined by Science No. 1], we also need a symmetrical transformation of politics. I confess that this is much more difficult, because, in practice, very few scientists are happy in the artificial straitjacket that Socrates’s position imposes on them, and they would be very happy to deal with what they are good at, Science No. 2. But what about politics? To convince Socrates is one things, but what about Callicles? To free science from politics [Politics No. 1] is easy, but how can we free politics from science [No. 1]? (261)

     

    Latour may be too optimistic about scientists. He is right, however, to see politics as a more difficult problem here. Latour makes few suggestions in this direction, in this and in the following chapter. In the end, however, we, Latour and myself included, end with a question:

     

    How can we mix Science No. 2, which brings an ever greater number of nonhumans into the agora, with Social No. 2, which deals with the very specific conditions of felicity that cannot be content with transporting forces or truth without deformation? I don’t know, but I am sure of one thing: no shortcuts are possible, no short-circuits, and no acceleration. Half of our knowledge may be in the hands of scientists, but the other, missing half is alive only in those most despised of all people, the politicians, who are risking their lives and ours in scientifico-political controversies that nowadays make up most of our daily bread. To deal with these controversies, a “double circulation” has to flow effortlessly again in the Body Politics: the one of science (No. 2) free from politics, and the other of politics freed from science (No. 1). The task of today may be summed up in the following odd sentence: Can we learn to like scientists as much as politicians so that at last we can benefit from the Greeks’ two inventions, demonstration and democracy? (265)

     

    Latour, it is true, does not end here, observing that, while he “seem[s] to have accomplished [his] task, to have dismantled the old settlement that held sway over us,” “it is still as if [he has] achieved nothing” (266). Accordingly, he proceeds to his final chapter, Chapter 9, “The Slight Surprise of Action: Facts, Fetishes, Factishes,” more constructive and more constructivist, but, again, beyond (merely) “social constructivism,” which he contends (I think, rightly) he never really subscribed to (197). We, as the book’s readers, can indeed be only slightly surprised here, since Latour’s analysis is well prepared and anticipated, and partly accomplished in an earlier chapter, but is now given a more rigorous conceptual architecture.

     

    And yet the questions return and even bring a war with them, “a world war, even–at least a metaphysical one,” but also the Science Wars, now as “a respectable intellectual issue, not a pathetic dispute over funding fueled by campus journalists.” It is a war between the two views of reality and two settlements in opposition, the modernist one (with the reality of the world out there and Science No. 1 and Politics No. 1) and the settlement defined by the view of reality, science, and politics that is defined by Science No. 2. In this war, however, one might be sure, or “pretty sure,”

     

    we will be without weapons, dressed in civilian clothes, since the task of inventing the collective [of humans and nonhumans] is so formidable that it renders all wars puny by comparison–including, of course, the Science Wars. In this [twentieth] century, which fortunately is coming to a close, we seem to have exhausted the evils that emerged from the open box of the clumsy Pandora. Though it was here unrestrained curiosity that made the artificial maiden open the box, there is no reason to stop being curious about what was left inside. To retrieve the Hope that is lodged there, at the bottom, we need a new and rather convoluted contrivance. I have had a go at it. Maybe we will succeed with the next attempt. (300)

     

    Maybe we will. Latour thus ends (this is his last sentence) with an implicit question mark, for the new century perhaps. He begins the book with a warning to the reader. “This,” he says,

     

    is not a book about new facts, nor is it exactly a book of philosophy. In it, using only very rudimentary tools, I simply try to present, in the space left empty by the dichotomy between subject and object, a conceptual scenography for the pair human and nonhuman. I agree that powerful arguments and detailed empirical studies would be better, but, as sometimes happens in detective stories, a somewhat weaker, more solitary, and more adventurous strategy may succeed against the kidnapping of scientific disciplines by science warriors where others have failed. (viii)

     

    The book does achieve this success and, as I have argued, it offers much more in the way of both “powerful arguments” and, especially, “empirical studies” than Latour here suggests. Accordingly, a deeper conceptual and, thus, more deeply philosophical scenography of the scenes in question is not impossible. It is perhaps permissible to view the book as setting the stage for a deeper philosophical exploration in spaces more closed than, as Latour suggests, left empty by so many dichotomies and pairs, from subject and object to, not inconceivably, human and nonhuman.

    Works Cited

     

    • Feyerabend, Paul. Conquest of Abundance: A Tale of Abstraction Versus the Richness of Being. Ed. Bert Terpstra. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Gross, Paul, and Norman Levitt. Higher Superstition: The Academic Left and its Quarrels with Science. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1994.
    • Latour, Bruno. We Have Never Been Modern. Trans. Catherine Porter. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Differend: Phrases in Dispute. Trans. Georges Van Den Abbeele. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —. The Inhuman: Reflections on Time. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Rachel Bowlby. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1991.
    • —. The Postmodern Condition. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François, and Jean-Loup Thêbaud. Just Gaming. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Pielke, Roger A. Jr. “Science Policy: Policy, Politics, and Perspective.” Nature 416 (2002): 367-68.
    • Serres, Michel (with Bruno Latour). Conversations on Science, Culture, and Time. Trans. Roxanne Lapidus. Ann Arbor, MI: U of Michigan P, 1995.
    • Sokal, Alan, and Jean Bricmont. Fashionable Nonsense: Postmodern Intellectuals’ Abuse of Science. New York: Picador, 1998.

     

  • Radiohead’s Antivideos: Works of Art in the Age of Electronic Reproduction

    Joseph Tate

    Department of English
    University of Washington
    jtate@u.washington.edu

    I. Introduction: Test Specimens

    Figure 1

     

    The blinking icon you see above is called a “test specimen.” Wide-eyed bears with murderous grins, drawn alternately as symmetrical, disembodied heads or frantically sketched, stiff-limbed figures, they punctuate the art of the music group Radiohead, from CD packaging and packing slips to web site images and promotional stickers.

     

    Although directly analogous to easily recognizable character-mascots used to establish a product’s unique brand identity, the bears function like painter Philip Guston’s hooded men, with a difference (see Guston’s “City Limits”). While Guston’s figures, versions of Ku Klux Klansmen, gave a disturbingly organic shape to American civil unrest and racial injustice in the late 1960s and early ’70s, Radiohead’s test specimens are protagonists in a self-referential aesthetic that pastiches the band’s commodification and the operation of capital at large.1

     

    In what follows, I explore the bears’ appearances in QuickTime computer-animated music video shorts released concurrently with Kid A, the band’s critically anticipated fourth album.2 Titled “antivideos,” or “blips,” the short videos (10-30 seconds in duration) were released only on the internet, a virtually inexhaustible distribution channel. Via this medium, the antivideos provide a useful plateau from which to consider popular art’s current state and future potential in the age of electronic reproduction.

     

    II. Commodified Culture, Culturalized Commodification

     

    In The Fragile Absolute, or Why is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For?, Slavoj Zizek observes that “today’s artistic scene” consists of two opposed movements. The first is the “much-deplored commodification of culture (art objects produced for the market),” while the second, and “less noted but perhaps more crucial opposite movement,” is “the growing ‘culturalization’ of the market economy itself.” He elaborates:

     

    With the shift towards the tertiary economy (services, cultural goods), culture is less and less a specific sphere exempted from the market, and more and more not just one of the spheres of the market, but its central component (from the software amusement industry to other media productions). (25)3

     

    We can add to this latter list the music industry. The paired phenomena of commodified culture and a culturalized market are nowhere more evident than in the music business, and it is these movements of commodification and culturalization that Radiohead’s antivideos thematize.

     

    Originally released on the band’s web site (<http://www.more-radiohead.com/alps .html>) several weeks before the 2 October 2000 release of Kid A, the antivideos jettison the standard hierarchy between song and music video as elaborated by media critic Jody Berland. According to Berland, “the 3-minute musical single” is a music video’s

     

    unalterable foundation, its one unconditional ingredient. A single can exist (technically, at least) without the video, but the reverse is not the case. As if in evidence of this, music videos, almost without exception, do not make so much as a single incision in the sound or structure of the song. However bizarre or disruptive videos appear, they never challenge or emancipate themselves from their musical foundation, without which their charismatic indulgences would never reach our eyes. (25)

     

    As if in direct response to Berland’s phonocentrism, the antivideos do exactly what music videos do not and/or should not: make radical incisions and changes to the sound and structure of the songs they promote.

     

    The web site’s title introduces the antivideos bluntly as “brief films used as promotional material.” Immediately, visitors are alerted to the antivideo’s situation within a matrix of capitalist exchange, an unusual acknowledgment in an industry that regularly denounces any discernible trace of commercialization. As music critic Lawrence Grossberg has noted, “Rock fans have always constructed a difference between authentic and co-opted rock. And it is this which is often interpreted as rock’s inextricable tie to resistance, refusal, alienation, marginality, etc.” (Grossberg 202). Authentic rock has as its ideal a “collective, spontaneous creativity,” in the words of Kalefa Sanneh, critic for the New York Times, that is unfettered by the crass demands of capital. Co-opted rock, however, is an example of what Zizek calls the “much-deplored commodification of culture (art objects produced for the market)”; co-opted rock is commercially successful music with an international distribution that fails to hide adequately its commodification, thus opening itself up for censure. Radiohead’s music, videos, cover art, and packaging, however, expose its commodification and culturalize it.

     

    As one example, the CD packaging for Kid A foregrounds its own commodification. A limited number of CDs contained a supplementary text hidden beneath the jewel case’s polystyrene tray. The untitled booklet by Stanley Donwood, the band’s artist, and Tchock, a pseudonym for Thom Yorke, the band’s lead singer, comprises fragmentary phrases juxtaposed against images of test specimens posed as either cartoonishly violent corporate sycophants or traumatized victims of surveillance. Rarely are listeners asked to disassemble the object that distills a performer’s presence for uniform portable consumption, only to find a text that decries consumption. Radiohead’s antivideos work similarly as agents of disassembly, leading consumers into a labyrinthine network of hyperbolic images that pastiche commodification.

     

    III. Flying Bears

     

    The first antivideo on the Radiohead site is titled “Flying Bears,” a nineteen-second movie that imagines limitless reproduction with a twist of surreal horror. The scene opens on two figures, both of which stare up in horror at a murky sky crowded with flying test specimen bears (see Figure 2).

     

    Figure 2

     

    The movie then fades into an exclusive focus on the flying bears, the brand icons for Radiohead, while the antivideo’s soundtrack plays an excerpt from the song “In Limbo.” Yorke’s voice unhurriedly croons the refrain, “You’re living in a fantasy / You’re living in a fantasy” (see Figure 3).

     

    Figure 3

     

    Finally, our view shifts to a close-up of a frightened onlooker, eyes fixed upward and mouth opened in muted fear. Furiously he clutches a mobile phone, a device that may be his last connection to the world: a connection enabled and mediated by an electronic communication network (see Figure 4).

     

    Figure 4

     

    The fantasy, then, of which the lyrics speak and that the onlookers inhabit is not a pleasant one, as the alarmed facial expressions evince. Instead, it is the ultimate fantasy of the capitalist/Communist dyad: “unbridled productivity” (Zizek 18). As Zizek notes, it is no accident that capitalism and Communism rose simultaneously: “Marx’s notion of Communist society is itself the inherent capitalist fantasy–a fantasmatic scenario for resolving the capitalist antagonism he so aptly described” (Zizek 19). The bears metaphorize the boundless commodification that modern technologies facilitate. Radiohead’s symbols threaten to overcome the onlooker. In this way, the antivideo critiques its own medium–the internet, a technology that allows endless and nearly effortless production. Once an antivideo reaches the internet, it can be accessed indefinitely by multiple viewers simultaneously.

     

    The limitless reproducibility of visual and aural art objects that the internet enables is the apogee of simulation, as it is defined by Jean Baudrillard. Via digital technologies, “The real is produced from miniaturized cells, matrices, and memory banks, models of control–and it can be reproduced an indefinite number of times from these” (Baudrillard 2). The real or the authentic ceases to matter, an inevitability that Radiohead’s music and art incorporate.

     

    Nevertheless, the real is what audiences, music critics and fans alike, desire. Critic David Fricke commented in Rolling Stone that despite the experimental sounds of Radiohead’s electronic music, what you actually hear is “real rock singing and chops, altered beyond easy recognition” (Fricke 48). What Fricke fails to grasp is that Radiohead’s aesthetic undermines the real that he attempts to recuperate on the band’s behalf. This misreading of Radiohead’s music by Fricke and others has a venerable antecedent: Walter Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.”

     

    Fricke would agree with Benjamin that mass reproduction corrupts the art object’s authenticity, an essential, if intangible, element of art: “that which withers in the age of mechanical reproduction is the aura of the work of art” (Benjamin 221). But, unlike Benjamin, Fricke and the sum of music industry rhetoric stops there. Benjamin’s anxiety gains a dimension as he considers the possibility that the real may cease to exist at all. As he explains in the case of photography, the question of authenticity “makes no sense” when one can make innumerable prints from a photographic negative (Benjamin 224). Similarly, the internet acts as a spectral production line, an immense factory, open to all comers, that has transcended production’s physical limitations.

     

    A fear that authenticity will lose significance animates Benjamin’s essay but does not explain Fricke’s naïve praise for a hidden, real rock music underlying Radiohead’s experimentation. The band’s music, I argue, is not a distortion of real rock, but an uncovering of its absence, its phantasmic structure. Fricke assumes that the real continues to bloom when, as Baudrillard told us and as Benjamin knew would happen, it has long since been a desert.

     

    Benjamin’s anxiety is the emotion that animates the onlookers’ faces in “Flying Bears.” The antivideo’s countless test specimens are the epitomic image of electronic reproduction, specifically, the internet’s realization of the fundamental capitalist fantasy of unimpeded production. But here the capitalist dream is refigured as a nightmarish scenario of flying bears looming over frightened mobile phone users. However, the precession of simulation, to use Baudrillard’s phrase, is that capital desires its own undoing, as I argue in the following section.

     

    IV. “I’m not here / This isn’t happening”

     

    The fourth song on Kid A is titled “How to Disappear Completely.” The lyrics, while supposedly based on a dream, eerily narrate the singer’s subject position as experienced by the listener: “I’m not here / This isn’t happening.” The point is so simple as to go unnoticed: when I hear Radiohead’s music the band is not here, where I am at the moment of listening; and the performance is not happening, and may have, in fact, never happened. Like Miles Davis’s Bitches Brew, an achievement not of instrumental virtuosity but of production technique ahead of its time, Kid A is the record of a performance never performed, an electronically constructed collage of disparate studio recordings, found sounds, drum loops, samples, and other forms of noise.

     

    While Kid A challenges authenticity, the antivideo “Screaming Bears” pastiches it. “Screaming Bears” casts the test specimens as performers furnishing what spectators crave–an authentic performance. Gradually, five agitated bears (notably, Radiohead has five band members) appear from stage-left on a flat, desolate landscape (see Figure 5) populated randomly by pyramids, resembling Cy Twombly’s Anabasis. The performance is blatantly pointless: the bears enter, the bears leave.

     

    Figure 5

     

    Nevertheless, the bears’ performance is more compelling than what the performers of Radiohead offer. In “Morning Bell,” Thom Yorke plays a piano, face averted from the camera and downcast, in a lonely, possibly domestic setting. We are given an authentic band member, but the authentic person, compared to the screaming and dancing test specimens, is far less thrilling. It is the simulation that captures our attention, not the authentic. The intimate, if artificially staged, mood of “Morning Bell,” signaled by the black and white film and overhead film angle–the common position of surveillance cameras–is more akin to voyeurism than to spectatorship (see Figure 6).

     

    Figure 6

     

    Whatever authenticity “Morning Bell” lays claim to is dissolved by “Yeti,” another antivideo that calls attention to the band’s role as victims of surveillance and status as objects, or rather of an institutionalized gaze so well given voice by David Fricke, above. To return to Fricke’s assessment, Radiohead’s music is “real rock singing and chops” (48). Fricke’s desire to establish the band’s music as real rock is a near-death symptom of capitalism. Capitalism, especially its embodiment in the music industry, frequently reminds us of “its foundations in real people and their relations” (Zizek 16). Underneath the mysterious celebrity-identity there is a real person, which the hunched-over Yorke of “Morning Bell” perfectly signifies. Another example proves instructive: on 8 August 2001, fans had the chance to chat online with Jonny Greenwood, the band’s lead guitarist and keyboardist. An event hosted by the Yahoo! web site, such a promotional move is not unlike another that Zizek describes: “Visitors to the London Stock Exchange are given a free leaflet which explains to them that the stock market is not about some mysterious fluctuations, but about real people and their products–this is ideology at its purest” (16). Being able to chat with Jonny Greenwood in real time: this, too, is ideology at its purest.4

     

    But this reassertion of the real, Baudrillard argues, is capital’s attempt to calm its characteristic powers of “abstraction, disconnection, deterritorialization” (22), the very powers that now threaten it. To confront the oceanic elision of difference it inaugurated, capital re-injects the real, but to no avail:

     

    as soon as [capital] wishes to combat this disastrous spiral by secreting a last glimmer of reality, on which to establish a last glimmer of power, it does nothing but multiply the signs and accelerate the play of simulation. (22)

     

    It is this reassertion of the real that “Yeti,” the next antivideo, pastiches.

     

    In “Yeti,” a test specimen bear is caught on camera, much in the same way the appearances of supposedly mystical monsters, such as Bigfoot and the Loch Ness Monster, are captured on videotape. To reinforce the antivideo’s relation to surveillance footage, the movie begins with and is interrupted by moments of static (see Figure 7). Most often a nuisance, the camera’s disruption of images, its intrusion as creator of artifice into a reality that would ideally otherwise remain unaltered, here signals reality. Between these staged disruptions, the camera slowly pans across an empty snow field (see Figure 8) and eventually locates a test specimen (see Figure 9) who flees upon realizing that he has been discovered.

     

    Figure 7
    Figure 8
    Figure 9

     

    Like Sartre at the keyhole, hearing footsteps approaching from behind, the test specimen turns in shock: “Someone is looking at me!” (Sartre 349). Presumably, the test specimen escapes into the forest; the antivideo ends before the bear is captured. We are left with a noisy image of the bear running away (see Figure 10).

     

    Figure 10

     

    Surveillance video, the electronic gaze with which authorities establish incontrovertible fact, is used frivolously–to follow a cartoon bear. Comparatively, this antivideo renders the ostensibly authentic scene of “Morning Bell” artificial and thus simultaneously lampoons authenticity more generally, exposing capital’s covert insistence that commodified celebrities are real people.

     

    V. Is a Music Video Without Music a Music Video?

     

    Slavoj Zizek tells an interesting personal story in The Fragile Absolute worth quoting at length. During a trip to Berlin he

     

    noticed along and above all the main streets numerous large blue tubes and pipes, as if the intricate cobweb of water, phone, electricity, and so on, was no longer hidden beneath the earth, but displayed in public. My reaction was, of course, that this was probably another of those postmodern art performances whose aim was, this time, to reveal the intestines of the town, its hidden inner machinery, in a kind of equivalent to displaying on the video the palpitation of our stomach or lungs–I was soon proved wrong, however, when friends pointed out to me that what I saw was merely part of the standard maintenance and repair of the city’s underground service network. (n. 13, 162)

     

    Before recounting the story of what he terms a blunder, Zizek contextualizes his confusion, citing the example of a recent art performance in Potzdamerplatz in Berlin, where the movements of several gigantic cranes were orchestrated for an art performance. A similar performance, he fails to note, happened in Helsinki in the early 1980s.

     

    In this context, Zizek’s confusion in Berlin is understandable, and, I argue, symptomatic of the postmodern era. What begins to emerge is that postmodernism cannot be regarded merely as a set of objective attributes for which objects can be tested, but might instead be considered a perspective, a condition of the subject as well as objects. Not a radical thesis, by any means, but an important one that marks the difference between Jean-François Lyotard and Fredric Jameson: the former promoting distrust of metanarratives, a subjective state, as distinctive of postmodernism (Lyotard xxiv), the latter elaborating a stylistic description with architecture serving as the “privileged aesthetic language” (Postmodernism 37).

     

    Another example of confusion symptomatic of postmodernism is my own. Thirteen of sixteen antivideos released in June 2001 in support of the band’s fifth album, Amnesiac, are musicless. These latest antivideos, to reuse Jody Berland’s vocabulary quoted above, emancipate themselves from their musical foundation so thoroughly that the foundation is abandoned altogether. My initial response to these musicless antivideos was to declare myself in the presence of a postmodern pastiche of John Cage’s revolutionary 4’33”.

     

    At 8:15 p.m. on 29 August 1952, an audience gathered at the Maverick Concert Hall in Woodstock, New York to hear the pianist David Tudor perform John Cage’s latest composition. They heard nothing, a nothing entitled 4’33”. Inspired by Robert Rauschenberg’s three-paneled White Painting of 1951, Cage’s handwritten score indicated a silence of three movements. Music without music: is it still music? Cage, of course, thought it was. Cage’s modernist aesthetic was heavily influenced by Eastern philosophy. The point of the performance of 4’33” was to force the listener to listen closely, to close read his or her immediate sonic environment. The common reference to 4’33” as Cage’s “silent piece” is, from the composer’s standpoint, a mistake. For one aim of the piece is to underscore Cage’s belief that silence does not in fact exist (Cage 8).5

     

    Radiohead’s aesthetic, then, in this instance, was Cage’s impulse turned against the commercialization of music through the relentless promotion of music videos. Music videos are promotional materials, but without music, what can they promote? Nothing, and by promoting nothing they become advertising simply for advertising’s sake. Further, the resulting affect isn’t modernist shock (what have I endured!?), but what Jameson termed the postmodern sublime: a panic-boredom (I have to endure this for how long!?) (37-8).6

     

    My theory of the antivideos along these lines was disturbed, however, by information I received from the primary artist responsible for Radiohead’s antivideos, Chris Bran, one of the self-titled Vapour Brothers. In July of 2001 I interviewed Bran via email. Responding to a question regarding how and when the Amnesiac antivideos were created, Bran wrote that they were “just out takes, left overs, works in progress. they were all created for the current radiohead project I am doing. we just decided to put these online and try to build up a gallery of video ideas” [sic]. When asked specifically why a majority of the shorts do not use music, Bran referred to his earlier response: “as i said these are all works in progress, unfinished ideas or out takes.” The last comment Bran added was, “check out radiohead.com in the next few weeks.” What was to come was the release of “I Might Be Wrong” (available at <http://www.radiohead.com/009.html& gt;), an internet only, traditional music video constructed from the various musicless antivideos and created entirely on a laptop computer.

     

    What Bran’s comments required of me was to erase the earlier response, or at least to rewrite that response, in this way: the soundless antivideos are not the postmodern descendents of John Cage’s famous silence; they are, instead, waste, leftovers–in a word, excrement. While Bran’s comments frustrate the genealogical connection to John Cage, his they open up a new set of theoretical problems. Waste, in its various forms, is now routinely handled by critical theory and theorists.

     

    Zizek, leaning on the work of his former mentor and analyst Jacques-Alain Miller (the son-in-law of Jacques Lacan), offers a compelling description of what material condition is historically particular to postmodernism: waste. Late capitalism, Zizek writes, has “introduce[d] a breathtaking dynamics of obsolescence” (40) that generates massive mounds of waste. I quote Zizek quoting Miller:

     

    The main production of the modern and postmodern capitalist industry is precisely waste. We are postmodern beings because we realize that all our aesthetically appealing consumption artifacts will eventually end as leftover, to the point that it will transform the earth into a vast waste land. (qtd. in Zizek 40)

     

    Along these lines Zizek notes that

     

    in today’s art, the gap that separates the sacred space of sublime beauty from the excremental space of trash (leftover) is gradually narrowing, up to the paradoxical identity of opposites: are not modern art objects more and more excremental objects, trash (often in a quite literal sense: faeces, rotting corpses…) displayed in–made to occupy, to fill in–the sacred place of the Thing? (25-26)

     

    Perhaps the most famous example of this is Chris Ofili’s 1996 painting “The Holy Virgin Mary,” a portrait of the religious icon as a black woman decorated with elephant dung. The painting was featured in the 1999 Museum of Modern Art exhibit “Sensation: Young British Artists from the Saatchi Collection,” an exhibit former Mayor of New York Rudolph Giuliani called “sick stuff.”

     

    Back in Berlin, the aesthetic wonder Zizek felt at seeing the innards of the city exposed need not necessarily be considered a blunder. The actual circumstances of any situation, the ultimately phantasmic Real, is, as Lacan instructs us, only a fantasy that has yet to be unveiled. Instead, what we witness in Zizek’s confusion (which was, interestingly, submerged in a footnote–the semi-exposed innards of the book, the book’s waste products) and in my own is the epitome of the postmodern condition–the subject thrust into a state of perpetual awareness, never knowing where art will come from next.

     

    VI. In Place of a Conclusion: A Myth

     

    With the release in June 2001 of Amnesiac, the band’s fifth album, the test specimen bears of Kid A have been replaced by crying minotaurs. While the bears were adaptable to various situations, the minotaurs are unambiguously and consistently modeled as victims. In one interactive portion of the Radiohead web site <http://www. waste-game.com/hogger/numeeja/minotaur.html>, visitors can participate in “Experiment #6: Torturing the Minotaur” where they have a chance to inflict pain upon a crying minotaur using a small trident. The game, if it can rightly be called a game, is in the tradition of Stanley Milgram’s psychological experiments conducted from 1961 to 1962. A somewhat milder version of the same experiment is available at Capitol Records’ Radiohead site, <http://hollywoodandvine.com/ radiohead/>, a separate site not directly maintained by the band. At the top of the main page, one click will cause a minotaur to weep while a continuously depressed mouse button intensifies the minotaur’s sorrow, prompting him to ruefully rub his tearful eyes as he shakes his head.

     

    Unlike Milgram’s experiments, however, these opportunities to torture a minotaur test not our willingness to obey, but the limits of curiosity–our desire for knowledge. However, like Milgram’s experiments, and more significantly, “Experiment #6” is a simulation. We torture nothing. We instead simulate a torture, a process far more dangerous according to Baudrillard. Comparing a simulated and a real hold-up, he writes:

     

    the latter does nothing but disturb the order of things, the right to property, whereas the former attacks the reality principle itself. Transgression and violence are less serious because they only contest the distribution of the real. Simulation is infinitely more dangerous because it always leaves open to supposition that, above and beyond its object, law and order themselves might be nothing but simulation. (20)

     

    Capital attempts to stabilize its power through the maintenance of reality. This, to reiterate Zizek, “is ideology at its purest” (16). Simulation resists this stabilizing influence.

     

    However, the band’s reflexive aesthetic effectively disrupts naïve consumption, confronting the listener with music and art that adhere to opacity versus authenticity as a guiding principal. As the novelist Nick Hornby wrote in a New Yorker review deriding Radiohead:

     

    You have to work at albums like Kid A. You have to sit at home night after night and give yourself over to its paranoid millennial atmosphere as you try to decipher elliptical snatches of lyrics and puzzle out how the titles (‘Treefingers,’ ‘The National Anthem,’ and so on) might refer to the songs. … Kid A demands the patience of the devoted …. (qtd. in Dettmar)

     

     

    That a listener would be given pause by a mass-produced art object troubles Hornby, who prefers not to enter Radiohead’s maze of possible meaning.

     

    Thus, explicitly evoking the myth of the minotaur with Amnesiac, Radiohead has found an icon more fitting than the test specimens. A limited-edition CD of the album is packaged in a cloth-bound book. Inside we find the following disclaimers: “This book is to be hidden. Labyrinthine structures are entered at the reader’s own risk. Nosuch Library and Lending Service cannot be held responsible for Misuse.” Radiohead’s music and art are, finally, as Hornby acknowledges, a labyrinthine structure that, once entered, baffles with its mesmerizing difficulty.

     

    While Radiohead’s music and art together sustain a significant critique of capitalist ideology, the band has no pretension of saving the world single-handedly. Instead, their web site at <http://www.radiohead.com/00.html> recommends links to alternative news and information sites with similarly worthy, if unattainable, goals: to revise the relationship between consumer and commodity. The goal of both Kid A and Amnesiac, however, is far more modest: to revise our relationship to popular music and forms of popular culture more generally, a goal that Radiohead, I argue, achieves.

     

    Notes

     

    1. I follow Fredric Jameson’s assertion that, in postmodernism, pastiche eclipses parody. His definition is useful: “Pastiche is, like parody, the imitation of a peculiar or unique style, the wearing of a stylistic mask, speech in a dead language: but it is a neutral practice of such mimicry, without parody’s ulterior motive, without the satirical impulse, without laughter, without that still latent feeling that there exists something normal compared with which what is being imitated is rather comic” (Cultural Turn 5).

     

    2. Kid A, which received a Grammy Award for Best Alternative Album in 2000, was highly anticipated due to the success of OK Computer, the band’s 1997 album which was among the top-ten highest selling albums in Great Britain. In 1998, OK Computer received a Grammy Award for Best Alternative Album (Hale 127) and the band was nominated for four MTV awards (133). Comprehensive indexes of the band’s album reviews and awards are available in both Jonathan Hale’s Radiohead: From a Great Height and Martin Clarke’s Radiohead: Hysterical and Useless.

     

    3. This echoes Jameson’s claim that “aesthetic production today has become integrated into commodity production generally” (Postmodernism 4).

     

    4. Discussants’ questions remained superficial throughout the chat. At one point, Greenwood comments, “Apparently 90% of your questions are about hair.”

     

    5. A now-famous anecdote tells of Cage visiting NASA’s soundproof room at Harvard University. Expecting absolute silence, he instead heard two sounds: “one high and one low” (8). The first, he was told, was his nervous system, the second his circulatory system. Even silence could not be silent.

     

    6. One antivideo, “minotauralley,” makes an excellent case for Jameson’s postmodern sublime. For 46 seconds the viewer watches a cartoon minotaur weeping with inexplicable calm in a deserted, wet alleyway.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Baudrillard, Jean. Simulacra and Simulation. Trans. Sheila Faria Glaser. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Illuminations. Ed. Hannah Arendt. Trans. Harry Zohn. New York: Schocken, 1968. 217-251.
    • Berland, Jody. “Sound, Image and Social Space: Music Video and Media Reconstruction.” Frith et al. 25-43.
    • Bran, Chris. “Re: questions.” Email to the author. 15 July 2001.
    • Cage, John. Silence: Lectures and Writings by John Cage. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1973.
    • Clarke, Martin. Radiohead: Hysterical and Useless. London: Plexus, 2000.
    • Dettmar, Kevin. “Is Rock ‘n’ Roll Dead? Only if You Aren’t Listening.” The Chronicle of Higher Education. 11 May 2001 <http://chronicle.com/ free/v47/i35/35b01001.htm>.
    • Fricke, David. “Radiohead: Making Music That Matters.” Rolling Stone. 2 August 2001. 42-48, 73.
    • Frith, Simon, Andrew Goodwin, and Lawrence Grossberg, eds. Sound and Vision: The Music Video Reader. London and New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • Greenwood, Jonny. Online chat. 8 August 2001. < http://hollywoodandvine.com/radiohead/rha_primary_frame.html?chat>.
    • Grossberg, Lawrence. “The Media Economy of Rock Culture: Cinema, Post-Modernity and Authenticity.” Frith et al. 185-209.
    • Hale, Jonathan. Radiohead: From a Great Height. Toronto: ECW, 1999.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Cultural Turn: Selected Writings on the Postmodern, 1983-1998. New York: Verso, 1998.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Saneh, Kalefa. “Rock Groups that No Longer Rock.” New York Times on the Web. 1 July 2001 <http://www.nytimes.com/ 2001/07/01/arts/01SANN.html>.
    • Sartre, Jean-Paul. Being and Nothingness. 1943. Trans. Hazel E. Barnes. NY: Washington Square, 1992.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Fragile Absolute, or Why Is the Christian Legacy Worth Fighting For? London: Verso, 2000.

     

  • Cannibalism and the Chinese Body Politic: Hermeneutics and Violence in Cross-Cultural Perception

    Carlos Rojas

    Department of African and Asian Languages and Literatures
    University of Florida
    crojas@ufl.edu

     

    One question that always stymies us–that is, why cannot people eat people?

     

    Zhu Yu

     

    Rumors of cannibalism began to circulate over the internet during the early months of last year (2001), typically accompanied by graphic photos of a Chinese man calmly chewing on what appears to be a dismembered human fetus (see Figure 1), together with sensational commentary along the lines of:

     

    What u are going to witness here is a fact, don’t get scared !” It’s Taiwan’s hottest food…” In Taiwan, dead babies or fetuses could be bought at $50 to $70 from hospitals to meet the high demand for grilled and barbecued babies … What a sad state of affairs!! (“Fetus”)

     

    These internet rumors began to achieve a modicum of legitimacy in mid-March, when the small Malaysian tabloid Warta Perdana fed a growing international controversy in reporting that a certain Taiwanese restaurant was serving a dish consisting of the baked flesh of human fetuses. The story eventually precipitated such an uproar that the CIA and Scotland Yard ultimately got involved to try to sort things out.

     

    While these allegations of cannibalism were, at a literal level, apocryphal, they are nevertheless quite instructive. The rumors themselves, together with the morbid transnational fascination that fed them and allowed them to grow, are interesting for two reasons. First, these rumors did not spring up in a vacuum, but rather they are implicitly in dialogue with a rich and multifaceted discursive tradition of cannibalism in modern, and premodern, China. And, second, cannibalism itself occupies a rather curious position in our own (Western) cultural imagination, and the challenge of how to read cannibalism cross-culturally has important implications for the broader question of what is at stake, and at risk, in cross-cultural reading and criticism in general.

     

    Cannibalism is a curious thing. In modern Western culture, cannibalism enjoys a virtually unparalleled hold on the popular imagination as an act of primal social violence. It is frequently held up as an almost unthinkable transgression of the social and moral codes which make us who we are.1 At the same time, however, this nearly unthinkable act has consistently, and somewhat paradoxically, proved to be all-too-thinkable, as evidenced both by the abundance of cultural representations of cannibalism which exist in our “own” culture, together with the voyeuristic fascination occasioned by the prospect of cannibalistic practice among primitives, deviants, etc., in “other” cultures.2 Discourses and fantasies of cannibalism, therefore, occupy a crucial liminal space where the presumptive limits of human society are simultaneously challenged and implicitly reaffirmed.3

     

    Taking the Taiwan restaurant rumors as my starting point, in this essay I will elaborate a selective discursive genealogy of representations of cannibalism in twentieth-century Chinese culture. Specifically, I will consider four such cases, together with the cultural and social contexts in which they are embedded. In this survey, my intention is not to focus on the literal, physical act of cannibalism, but rather to use the discursive tradition of cannibalism as a prism through which to reflect on the processes of identification and differentiation by which not only the Self but also an array of social collectivities are constituted. Rather than being derived from explicit, manifest criteria, these psychic, social, and epistemological constructs are, instead, the result of complex flows of equivalence and alterity, and often it is, ironically, precisely at the closest points of identification that the most systematic patterns of social rupture are produced.

     

    My discussion of cannibalism will be conducted at two levels. On the one hand, I will seek to consider the significance of each instance of discursive cannibalism in its respective context, noting the way in which each elaboration builds, in part, on a shared discourse of cannibalistic allusions. On the other hand, I will seek to generalize from these specific instances of cannibalism and encorporation and use them as an abstract model for the reading process itself. Finally, at the end of the essay, I will seek to bring these two dimensions of cannibalism (contextualized specificity and abstract model, respectively) together, to consider the hermeneutic ethics of the act of reading cannibalism itself in a cross-cultural context. In particular, I will suggest that these actual discourses of cannibalism constitute an important challenge to how we approach the possibility of cross-cultural reading and perception, even as the abstract trope of cannibalism may itself provide a useful model for better understanding the hermeneutic ethics of cross-cultural reading and perception itself.

     

    Zhu Yu

     

    The human corporal body is, perhaps, a mere signifier. After this signifier has been developed [xianying] and fixed [dingying] on a roll of Kodak film, it becomes dark shadows [heiying]. On a sheet of wove paper that has been exposed to sunlight, it becomes a cluster of lights and shadows, with washes of ink and color added to lines and curves.

    Wuming Shi, “Reflections on the Body”

    Figure 1

     

    The Taiwanese restaurant cited in the Malaysian tabloid article had not, it turns out, done anything out of the ordinary, though the images which accompanied the article were themselves not without a basis in reality. Specifically, the photos were taken as part of a performance entitled “Eating People” (or “Man-Eater”) [shiren] performed on 17 October 2000 in Shanghai by the 30-year-old avant-garde performance artist Zhu Yu (see Figure 1). One widely publicized report quotes Zhu as saying that “to create Man-eater, he said he cooked the corpses of babies that had been stolen from a medical school. Zhu admitted that the meat obtained from the bodies tasted bad, and said he had vomited several times while eating it. However, he said, he had to do it ‘for art’s sake’” (“Baby-Eating”).

     

    In public comments he made at the time of the performance, Zhu Yu sought to address the significance of the scandalous nature of the his act, while at the same time attempting to relativize the social and cultural assumptions which make it appear scandalous in the first place:

     

    One question that always stymies us–that is, why cannot people eat people?

     

    Is there a commandment in man’s religion in which it is written that we cannot eat people? In what country is there a law against eating people? It’s simply morality. But, what is morality? Isn’t morality simply something that man whimsically changes from time to time based on his/her own so-called needs of human being in the course of human progress.

     

    From this we might thus conclude:

     

    So long as it can be done in a way that does not commit a crime, eating people is not forbidden by any of man or societies laws or religions; I herewith announce my intention and my aim to eat people as a protest against mankind’s moral idea that he/she cannot eat people. (qtd. in Hua 192)

     

    Here, Zhu Yu draws attention to cannibalism’s peculiar position at the center of contemporary society’s own self-conception, while also foregrounding its status as being effectively outside the purview of secular authority. Like the proverbial incest taboo, cannibalism is often viewed as a foundational prohibition on which the social order is grounded, but which, at the same time, derives significance precisely through its own potential transgression. The prohibitions against incest and cannibalism are both examples of socio-cultural taboos which, by their very ostensible universality, bring into question the ontological status of the categories of cultural identity within which they are imbedded. Furthermore, it is not coincidental that both prohibitions are explicitly concerned with negotiations of identity and contestations of equivalence. René Girard, for instance, includes both incest and cannibalism under the master category of sacrificial violence, speculating that “We are perhaps more distracted by incest than by cannibalism, but only because cannibalism has not yet found its Freud and been promoted to the status of a major contemporary myth” (276-77).

     

    Despite the universalizing tenor of Zhu Yu’s own remarks, his “Man-Eater” performance quickly became mired in a rather mundane debate over cultural and social differences. For instance, by mid-July of 2001, the R.O.C. [Taiwan] Government Information Office [GIO] had sprung into action, repeating the explanation that the story and the photographs were actually derived from Mainlander Zhu Yu’s October performance the preceding year, rather than from any culinary malfeasance on the part of the Taiwanese restaurant, and concluded cheerfully that “the GIO wishes to emphasize that no event of this kind has ever taken place in Taiwan, and that the serving or eating of such a dish would break an ROC law against the defiling of human corpses” (Republic). With this rhetorical flourish, the GIO report succeeded in taking a debate which might have appeared to center on cultural universals concerning the sanctity of the human body and adeptly translated it into a rather more provincial debate over regional mores and secular authority.4

     

    In this way, the debate provides a prism into how various Chinese communities attempt to portray themselves and each other under the eyes of a globalized public. Aihwa Ong has proposed the notion of “flexible citizenship” to describe the processes by which “refugees and business migrants” (in her study, specifically Sino-Asian ones) negotiate affiliations and loyalties to multiple nation-states (often investing and working in one or more countries, while keeping their families in another). She argues that these forces of transnational migration have had the effect not only of encouraging these migrant businessmen to rethink their symbolic location within an increasingly complex web of ethnic and national alliances and rivalries (she cites, for instance, the example of how a “triumphant ‘Chinese capitalism’ has induced long-assimilated Thai and Indonesian subjects to reclaim their ‘ethnic-Chinese’ status” [7]), but also, at the same time, producing important “mutations in the ways in which localized political and social organizations set the terms and are constitutive of a domain of social existence” (215). Speaking metaphorically, therefore, we might conclude that what each of these interventions (by Zhu Yu himself, the Malaysian newspaper, the Taiwan GIO, the overseas Chinese e-mail communities, etc.) have in common is that they each ironically take the same alleged act of cannibalism and use it is as a pretext to begin cannibalistically feeding on each other on a global stage, as they try to negotiate the competing imperatives of a localized, “national” locus of identity on the one hand and of an increasingly fluid, transnational network of ethnic alliances and identifications on the other.

     

    Though unquestionably shocking in and of itself, Zhu Yu’s October 17th, 2000 performance was by no means an anomaly when viewed in the context of his own recent corpus of work or that of the larger community of iconoclastic young artists with whom he is frequently associated. To understand the social and cultural context in which these artists were working, however, it is necessary to backtrack briefly. During the first couple of decades following the establishment of the People’s Republic of China in 1949, and particularly during the Cultural Revolution (1966-76), cultural production in Mainland China was tightly controlled. After the death of Chairman Mao and the official end of the Cultural Revolution in 1976, Chinese artists began to have a somewhat freer rein to express themselves, and some chose to develop in an experimental, avant-garde direction. These trends in experimental art have became increasingly pronounced during the 1990s, following the 1989 Tiananmen “democracy” protests and the subsequent military crackdown.

     

    Art historian Wu Hung has identified four general historical phases or “generations” in post-Cultural Revolution experimental art, beginning with the initial emergence of Chinese experimental art between 1979 and 1984: the “’85 Art New Wave Movement” (1985-1989); the internationalization of experimental art (1990-93); and the “domestic turn–art as social and political critique” (1994-present) (Transience 16). Within each of these broad generational groupings, however, the artists and their works generally span the spectrum from committed political protest to a cynical cultivation of foreign capital (and of the attendant Western fetishization of Oriental exotica). While initially much of this experimental art was primarily a response to the historical trauma of the Cultural Revolution, an important theme which began to emerge in the mid-1980s was that of a response to, and commentary on, the rapid economic development under Deng Xiaoping. The ideological vacuum created in the wake of the death of Mao and the end of the Cultural Revolution, combined with the widespread interest in getting rich, led to a brief period of “Nietzsche fever” in the late 1980s, with his motto “god is dead” being perceived as having particular relevance to China’s current condition.5

     

    Having mostly emerged onto the art scene in the mid- to late 1990s, Zhu Yu and his colleagues could generally be placed in this fourth generation. No longer responding directly to the Cultural Revolution (as was initially the case with many of their older colleagues), they see themselves as trying to push the envelope of artistic acceptability, while at the same time remaining keenly aware of the interest taken in their work by foreign academics and curators. Many of the artists in Zhu Yu’s immediate circle are best known for what can be seen as a combination of installment and performance art, often using their own bodies as well as human and animal flesh in elaborately choreographed performances. They tend to work on the margins of official permissibility, with their “closed-door” performances generally well-publicized (though often at the last minute), but usually not “officially” open to the public.

     

    Zhu Yu’s “Eating People” performance itself was reportedly part of a series of exhibitions entitled “Obsession with Injury” [dui shanghai de milian].6 Part of a larger phenomenon of “shock-art” in contemporary China, this provocative series of avant-garde performances used not only animal and human corpses, but also the bodies of the artists themselves, in order to challenge conventional assumptions about the limits of both human and social mortality. As the artists themselves describe their project: “We have always wanted to explore fundamental problems concerning the existence and death of human beings, as well as the transformative process of spirit into material” (Wu, Exhibiting 207).

     

    For instance, the second, closed-door installment of the “Obsession with Injury” series, held on 22 April 2000, featured a performance in which Zhu Yu himself “had cut a piece of skin from his own body and sewn it onto a large piece of pork. A photo on the wall showed him in the middle of surgery; a videotape showed the process of the operation” (Hua 190-91; Wu, Exhibiting 206). In another performance, the artists Sun Yuan and Peng Yu sat in adjacent chairs as nurses transfused their own blood into the preserved corpses of a pair of infant Siamese twins (Hua 98; Wu, Exhibiting 204). Peng Yu also participated in another performance which consisted of “dropping oil extracted from human fat into the mouth of a medical specimen of a child’s corpse,” with this latter performance also incorporating a video of the oil-extraction. All three of these performances shared a common concern with challenging conventional boundaries between human and animal, between living flesh and preserved corpses, as well as the boundaries between reality and electronic simulation (in their integration of live performances and videotaped reproductions).

     

    The performances in this “Obsession with Injury” exhibition, and others like it, collectively sought to bring a fresh perspective to conventional assumptions about the status of human corporality. While it has become commonplace, within the experimental trends in Chinese literature and art, to feature representations of acts of extreme violence being performed on the human body (consider, for instance, Tang Yuanbao’s act of peeling off the skin of his own face at the end of Wang Shuo’s novel Please Don’t Call Me Human), what is remarkable about the “Obsession” performances is their use of actual human flesh (both from the artists’ own bodies, as well as that of preserved human corpses).

     

    The use of human and animal flesh was clearly a striking component of these sorts of exhibits, to the point that contemporary critics speak in general terms of the fascination with “meat art” in contemporary Chinese avant-garde art. At the same time, however, the artists, in their discussions of their work, repeatedly tried to downplay the significance of their use of this “meat.” For instance, at one point they explain that,

     

    First of all, we did not use corpses in a conventional sense, because all of the human bodies we employed were specimens that had been medically treated. Their cells had been conditioned by formaldehyde and could no longer rot or be infected by germs. These so-called bodies are germ-free and had already been turned into chemical substances. (Wu, Exhibiting 206)

     

    These comments are almost as startling as the performances to which they refer. While on the surface appearing to undercut the transgressive implications of their performances which appear to center around the deliberate desecration of human bodies (claiming, in effect, that they are not actual human bodies which they are using), these comments actually raise a host of potentially even more problematic questions concerning the limits of “human” mortality and human corporeality. Particularly interesting is the implication that infectious “germs,” typically viewed as contaminants, are actually part of what makes the bodies “human” in the first place.

     

    Furthermore, even as these “shock-artists” were capitalizing on the referential presence of their subject matter (be it actually “human” or otherwise), they were at the same time struggling to get beyond the purely material dimension of their performances. As Zhu Yu explained in a later interview:

     

    Our intention was not to use these materials to say something. We want our works to say something. But right now, the audience doesn’t have the ability to accept something like this is. People haven’t seen this kind of an exhibition before, where real things are used. The audience is reacting to the materials. After seeing it more times, then maybe they will be able to see what’s inside of these works. […] The result is already pre-determined because these materials, from a certain perspective[,] are concepts in themselves. So it’s easy for the audience to think purely about the materials when they see these works. From another perspective, the materials are an obstacle for us. (Wang, “Sadistic”)

     

    These comments take one of the central issues of the later cannibalism debate and turn it back upon itself. That is to say, one of the key themes in the various discussions of the cannibalism allegations was one of reference or denotation: to what extent did the photographs constitute mere visual simulacra, or to what extent could they be taken as a standing in an indexical relationship with an outer reality?

     

    Moreover, even after it was revealed that the controversial photographs were actually derived from Zhu Yu’s performance in Shanghai, questions still remained for some viewers over what precisely that performance consisted of: was it actual cannibalism, or not? Was it a cannibalistic act that was being presented as a work of art, or was it instead an elaborate mock-up intended to mimic an act of consuming actual human flesh? Similarly, in the “Obsession with Injury” performances, the question ultimately becomes not simply that of the reliability of the various visual reproductions being used, but also, and even more importantly, that of the referential status of the human body itself. The human body is, in a sense, being subjected here to a chiasmatic conjunction of mutually opposed hermeneutic imperatives. On the one hand, the medical specimens are being effectively evacuated of their conventional connotations, becoming essentially empty shells of their former selves. At the same time, however, these newly sterilized bodies are then remobilized as potent cultural signifiers, connoting the bodily fragility to which their own transformation itself stands as an eloquent testament.

     

    Zhu Yu’s and his colleagues’ “shock art” appears to challenge conventions of human morality and propriety, even as it pushes the envelope of acceptable artistic expression. Building, in part, on contemporary Chinese youths’ perception that they lack an effective public forum in which to express their views and concerns, these sorts of sensational performances effectively transform the human body into a textually inscribable medium. Living in a post-Maoist social ethos commonly described as lacking a coherent moral center, these young artists rely on the deliberate transgression of some of society’s most deeply ingrained cultural prohibitions in order to make socially meaningful statements.

     

    Eat thy Neighbor

     

    Since it is possible to “exchange sons to eat,” then anything can be exchanged, anyone can be eaten.

     

    Lu Xun, “Diary of a Madman”

     

    As iconoclastic as it might seem at first glance, Zhu Yu’s cannibalistic performance was also implicitly in dialogue with a variety of other contemporary and historical discourses of cannibalism in Chinese culture. Some of the most recent such examples include Scarlet Memorial: Tales of Cannibalism in Modern China, Zheng Yi’s exposé on the cannibalism practiced during the Cultural Revolution (1966-76), as well as Yu Hua’s provocative 1980s short story “Classical Love,” in which an errant wanderer falls in love with a beautiful maiden at a remote inn, who is ultimately killed and dismembered for her meat. More abstract, but equally graphic, is the Hong Kong director Siu-Tung Ching’s popular 1988 film, A Chinese Ghost Story, which revolves around a graphic theme of vampiric cannibalism, with the hermaphroditic tree-spirit “Laolao’s” preposterously oversized tongue snaking through the half-real/half-fantasy space of this epistemological hinterland.

     

    Probably the more famous evocation of cannibalism in modern Chinese literature, however, is Lu Xun’s celebrated 1918 short story, “Diary of a Madman,” in which a Gogolesque paranoiac becomes convinced that his neighbors, and even his immediate relatives, are all scheming to eat his flesh. The story concludes with the narrator’s conviction that he, too, has unwittingly consumed human flesh, and as a result will himself become a cannibal, yet still holds out hope that “the children” may somehow be saved from this vicious cycle of self-consumption: “Perhaps there are still children who have not yet eaten men. Save the children….” (18).

     

    Lu Xun’s story is typically read as an allegorical excoriation of the “cannibalistic” society which China had become–one in which people feed off of each other’s weaknesses, rather than rallying together to a common cause. The work itself is also generally held up as marking the symbolic birth of a Chinese literary modernism, in that it not only constitutes an allegorical critique of the old society, but furthermore is itself one of the earliest works to be written in the modern vernacular.

     

    Lu Xun himself is generally recognized as one of the leading figures of the reformist May Fourth Movement of the late 1910s and 1920s. Following on the heels of the 1911 fall of China’s last official dynasty, the Qing, the May Fourth Movement was generally concerned with attempting to strengthen the Chinese nation by both introducing into China a variety of foreign (primarily Western) social ideas, scientific paradigms, and aesthetic trends, as well as identifying and critiquing those “traditional” tendencies in Chinese society which were perceived as being responsible for its weakness and inability to “modernize” effectively. Historian Lin Yü-sheng identifies the May Fourth Movement’s general attitude as being one of “totalistic anti-traditionalism”: an ostensible wholesale rejection of the social and ideological legacies of the past, which at the same time has the ironic effect of partially obscuring the degree to which the reformists were themselves building pre-existing models of literati involvement and social critique.

     

    “Diary of a Madman” is the first of the socially motivated stories which Lu Xun wrote during this May Fourth period, but its metaphor of cannibalism is one to which he would return in several of his subsequent writings (as, for instance, with the blood-soaked mantou bun which is presented, in his story “Medicine,” as an unsuccessful cure for tuberculosis), and which many other authors would later pick up on and develop in their own right. At the same time, however, the signifier of cannibalism in Lu Xun’s work is a richly overdetermined one, in the sense that it inevitably exceeds the straightforward allegorical reading outlined above. Cannibalism is an abstract symbol in the story, but is also a symbol which builds in part on allusions to actual historical accounts of cannibalism. Part of the narrator’s horror is precipitated by his gradual realization that many of the references to cannibalism in familiar historical texts, ranging from the fourth-century B. C. E. Warring States period to the sixteenth-century Ming dynasty, might actually be literal references, rather than mere rhetorical expressions. Therefore, the subtext of the story becomes not only one of critiquing contemporary societal conditions, but also one of distinguishing between empty signifiers and actual historical referents. In short, it becomes a question of how to read, how to make sense of the literal or figurative dimensions of familiar historical texts.

     

    At another point in the story, Lu Xun relates how the narrator stayed up late one night rereading the canonical dynastic histories, which were filled on every page with allusions to the Confucian ideals of “Virtue and Morality.” The madman is then described as having an epiphany, whereby he suddenly becomes able to read through the surface meaning of the texts and discern their implicit, underlying meaning:

     

    Everything requires careful consideration if one is to understand it. In ancient times, as I recollect, people often ate human beings, but I am rather hazy about it. I tried to look this up, but my history has no chronology, and scrawled all over each page are the words: “Virtue and Morality.” Since I could not sleep anyway, I read intently half the night until I began to see the words between the lines. The whole book was filled with the two words–“Eat people.” (10)

     

     

    “Cannibalism,” here, becomes not only a trope for a kind of clarity of social vision, an ability to perceive the involutive and self-destructive tendencies of contemporary Chinese society, but also a figure for a certain kind of hermeneutics, an ability to read a (historical) text against itself. What is at stake is not merely a simple dialectics between surface visibility and hidden meaning, but rather the ability to recognize the (potential) meaning in what was (always) already “visible” in the first place.

     

    Lu Xun died somewhat prematurely in 1936, at the age of 55. Although he was actively involved with the League of Left-Wing Writers during the last decade or so of his life, he made a point of never formally joining the Chinese Communist Party. Chairman Mao Zedong nevertheless subsequently lauded Lu Xun as “the major leader in the Chinese cultural revolution. He was not only a great writer, but also a great thinker and a great revolutionary” (372). In spite of this unconditional accolade, it nevertheless remains very questionable to what extent the acerbically critical Lu Xun would have approved of the subsequent Maoist regime. Nevertheless, under the P.R.C. Lu Xun was elevated to the pinnacle of the Chinese literary canon (thanks, in no small part, to Mao’s own unreserved endorsement of Lu Xun’s revolutionary credentials). Speaking metaphorically, therefore, we could say that his writings and legacy were subsequently consumed and incorporated by the Maoist socio-political orthodoxy, as, for instance, in the case of his celebrated condemnation of the “human-eating old society,” which ultimately became monumentalized within the post-1949 ideological rhetoric of the Chinese Communist Party. At the same time, this rhetorical incorporation on the part of the Party also involves an important process of misreading, an attempt cannibalistically to make a part of itself a position of ideological critique which, otherwise, might have potentially constituted one of its strongest challenges.

     

    I would take this conclusion and carry it a step further, arguing that the problematic posed by cannibalism (under this latter, more abstract understanding of the concept) is not only one of reading history, or of reading historically, but rather it is one of “reading” in general. The physical act of cannibalism is only meaningful when positioned at the interstices of identity and alterity (in that it is an act of consuming the non-Self with whom one has strong, categorical ties), and is grounded on the ways in which we make sense of the complex social tapestry which the cannibalistic act itself simultaneously negates and reaffirms. Furthermore, the act of cannibalism is itself grounded on a complex hermeneutics of identity, of how we understand and imagine our relationship with a variety of social Others. In the following section, I will pursue this reading to its logical conclusion, looking not at the consumption, but rather at the constitution of human flesh, and the way in which the human body itself has been imagined as a complex mass of incommensurable elements, lacking a preconceived identity, and instead actively constituted through the immune system’s continual hermeneutic process of “reading” patterns of identity and alterity.

     

    Devouring Oneself from Within

     

    Pre-eminently a twentieth-century object, the immune system is a map drawn to guide recognition and misrecognition of self and other in the dialectics of Western biopolitics.

     

    Donna Haraway, Simians, Cyborgs, and Women

     

    Lu Xun’s allegorical encounters with cannibalism mark an important turning point in his own intellectual development. It is well known that Lu Xun initially studied medicine in Japan, and that he later claimed that it was the perceived need to get to the root of the spiritual and social ills which afflicted contemporary China which led him to abandon his medical studies and instead devote himself to healing not the bodies of his compatriots but rather their spirits. His critical description of China as a cannibalistic society in “Diary of a Madman” became one of the rallying points of his generation and has continued to echo throughout the twentieth century. At the same time, even as his earlier interest in corporal healing was effectively sublimated, that same medicinal orientation was making an uncanny return in many of his later writings, as well as those of his contemporaries.

     

    For instance, in an essay entitled “Random Thoughts #38” and published under Lu Xun’s name in 1918,7 the same year of “Diary of a Madman,” there is an explicit parallel drawn between the contagion of the human bloodstream by syphilis bacteria and the ideological “confusion” of the social corpus resulting from the influence of “Confucians, Taoists, and Buddhist monks”: “Even though we might now want to become real people, it is uncertain whether or not we will [be able to avoid being] confounded by the dark and confused elements in our blood-stream” (389). The essay expresses concern, furthermore, that this ideological disease not reach the nadir of syphilis and concludes with the hope that science may discover some magic cultural/ideological panacea, a so-called “707,” based on the recently discovered treatment for syphilis (arsphenamine, conventionally known at the time as “606”). The image of harmful reactionary ideological elements flowing through society’s bloodstream is evocative in and of itself, but the specific allusion to syphilis makes the metaphor even more compelling, in that the tissue damage from syphilis results, at least in part, from white blood cells’ attacking previously healthy tissue. The result is a cannibalistic extravaganza ironically reminiscent of “The Diary of a Madman” from a few months earlier.

     

    While the connection between the immune system and “cannibalism” is admittedly somewhat indirect in this 1918 essay, it is nevertheless developed much more explicitly in several other reformist essays published during the same general period. In the following discussion, I will consider three of these essays, all of which were published between 1915 and 1918 in the same journal, New Youth, which also published not only “Diary of a Madman” but also the 1918 “Random Thoughts” essay as well. In particular, I will focus on the ways in which each of these essays develops an increasingly elaborate double metaphor, whereby the metaphoric “cannibalism” on the part of the immune system’s white blood cells itself becomes a model for the ways in which different elements within Chinese society feed upon each other.

     

    The first of these essays appeared in the 1915 inaugural issue of New Youth. There, the editor of the journal, Chen Duxiu, published an influential article entitled “Call to Youth,” where he explicitly elaborates a metaphorical correspondence between individuals in society and cells in the human body:

     

    Youth have the same relationship to society that the new and lively cells have with respect to the human body. In the metabolic process, the old and rotten cells are constantly being weeded out, and openings are thus created which are promptly filled with fresh and lively cells. If this metabolic process functions correctly, the organism will be healthy; but if the old and rotten cells are allowed to accumulate, however, the organism will die. If this metabolic process functions properly at a social level, society will flourish; but if the old and corrupt elements are allowed to accumulate, society will be destroyed. (Chen 1)

     

    In this essay, the references to metabolic processes and cell replenishment represent an interesting synthesis of Western medical metaphors, on the one hand, and of the longstanding tradition, in Chinese writings, of elaborating metaphorical parallels between the human body and the social “body politic,” on the other.8

     

    The biomedical underpinning of the corporal metaphor is elaborated in more detail in “The Thought of Two Modern Scientists,” an essay Chen Duxiu wrote the following year, on the occasion of the death of Russian biologist Elie Metchnikoff (1843[5?]-1916). In the second section of this essay, Chen addresses Metchnikoff’s work and its relevance to human longevity.9 In particular, he stresses Metchnikoff’s discovery of the significance of white blood cells in the immune system, and specifically their ability to engulf and absorb harmful microbes. To describe these white blood cells, Metchnikoff coined the term “phagocyte,” derived from Greek terms “phago” (“to eat”) and “kyto” (“tool”), and which Chen translated into Chinese as “shijun xibao,” or “bacterium-eating cell.” The obvious question to ask next, Chen writes, is whether the white blood cells can be seen as acting out of a sense of duty to the larger body, or whether they are simply pursuing a narrow course of individual self-interest. The answer is clear, he writes in response to his own rhetorical question: they are simply acting in their own self-interest, to feed themselves. This explains the apparent paradox which Metchnikoff observes, whereby as the body ages and loses its vigor, the white blood cells, by contrast, may become overly active, attacking elements of the body itself (from the nervous system to the cells responsible for hair pigment), “mistakenly” regarding them as foreign pathogens. After a further discussion of the role played by intestinal bacteria in the aging process, Chen concludes that once a way is found to control (or even eliminate) these “cannibalistic” white blood cells, it may be possible to extend human longevitty by a century or more (49).

     

    More than the specifically medical implications of Metchnikoff’s model, Chen was apparently fascinated by the question of the social implications which this model of phagocytes and their relationship to the larger body (politic), and of how they might enable us to rethink the relationship between “altruism” and “individualism.” Chen concludes the essay by applying some of these same questions of altruism vs. individualism to his Metchnikoff himself:

     

    Although Metchnikoff advocates individualism, nonetheless the principles by which he lived out his life were definitely not ones of absolute individualism. Although he did not take benevolence and altruism to be ultimate ends, his actions were nonetheless compatible with these general principles (51).

     

    What we see here, therefore, is Chen’s attempt to use biological metaphors to provide a model for a position of constructive social criticism, one which avoids the dual dangers of self-effacing conformism and “altruism,” on the one hand, as well as that of “absolute individualism” (e.g., the white blood cells which destroy the body itself), on the other.

     

    In 1918 fellow reformist Hu Shi developed this same immune system metaphor in the lead article of a New Youth special issue on Ibsen. Hu Shi concludes the article with a medical metaphor inspired by the figure of Dr. Stockman in Ibsen’s play, “Enemy of the People”:

     

    It is as if [Ibsen] were saying, “People’s bodies all rely on the innumerable white blood cells in their bloodstream to be perpetually battling the harmful microbes that enter the body, and to make certain that they are all completely eliminated. Only then can the body be healthy and the spirit complete.” The health of the society and of the nation depend completely on these white blood cells, which are never satisfied, never content, and at every moment are battling the evil and the filthy elements in society, and only then can there be hope for social improvement and advancement. (Hu 20)

     

    When we read this essay in conjunction with Chen’s original 1915 one, we realize that what is implied is that the “evil and filthy elements in society” are actually not foreign pathogens, but rather they are none other than the same “old and rotten” cells from the body itself. Therefore, in this essay–almost precisely contemporaneous with Lu Xun’s identification, in “Diary of a Madman,” of cannibalism as the metaphorical condition from which society must attempt to extricate itself–we here have instead an implicit argument in support of figurative cannibalism, a call for social “white blood cells” to seek out and consume “the evil and filthy elements in society.” An act of collective self-awakening, therefore, implies a process of self-alienation, a systematic identification and excision of unprogressive elements.

     

    While Lu Xun, Hu Shi, and Chen Duxiu were all leading members of the May Fourth Movement, they nevertheless all occupied quite distinct positions within Chinese ideology and politics. Chen Duxiu was one of the founders of the Chinese Communist Party, while Lu Xun made a point of never joining the party, though he worked closely with several Party leaders during the 1920s and 1930s. Hu Shi, meanwhile, ended up siding with the Kuomingtang and consequently has been generally reviled in much Mainland historiography.10 Despite these manifest differences in their political and aesthetic orientations, it is nevertheless striking that they have each come together on this same medico-political metaphor of the cannibalistic white blood cells. Somewhat independently of the meaning which they each originally might have intended the metaphor to convey, this metaphor itself can nevertheless be read deconstructively, suggesting a body at war with itself, but the underlying implication being that this condition is, in fact, part of the status quo. Young and lively cells must, for the benefit of the whole, seek to eliminate and replace old and tired ones. The boundary between productive regeneration and cannibalistic self-consumption, therefore, is an exceedingly tenuous one, largely contingent on the speaker’s relationship with the elements which are doing the “consuming.”

     

    The irony inherent in these various white blood cell metaphors is that while Metchnikoff originally suggested that the elimination of these cells would, in effect, forestall the aging process, in the metaphorical formulations of many of these May Fourth reformers, the white blood cells’ ability to feed on ossified portions of the social Self becomes an asset, rather than a liability. Hu Shi and company are, in effect, arguing that we must combat social cannibalism with cannibalism, devouring those reactionary elements of society before they can succeed in devouring us.

     

    These sorts of physiological metaphors represent a chiasmatic intersection of objectivity and fantasy. They draw on an increasingly detailed medical understanding of the structure and function of the human immune system, while at the same time reducing the imaginary space of the nation to a highly metaphoric plane. The increased precision with which the function and behavior of these white blood cells is described goes hand-in-hand with an increased degree of abstraction in the description of human behavior.

     

    Furthermore, it is highly appropriate that it was specifically the immune system which provided the May-Fourth-period reformers with one of their favorite models in this struggle to define themselves through the mediated gaze of the other, appropriate in that the immune system is itself essentially a machine of self-recognition and self-reproduction, one which functions by reducing processes of identification to the barest heuristic strategies. In fact, the immune system can even be seen as a quintessential sublimation of the process of self-identification, whereby the process of “identification” operates essentially independently of the “self” which it ostensibly presupposes. Accordingly, the immune-system metaphor provides an ironically apt model of a “pure” form of cannibalism, as well as an illustration of its theoretical limits. In the case of the immune system, relations of identity and alterity are explicitly created in the process of recognition itself.

     

    The coherence of the organism, therefore, is itself premised on a continual struggle of identity politics at the cellular level. Phagocytotic consumption on the part of white blood cells represents a conceptual limit-point for our understanding of cannibalism–it is, in a sense, not “true” cannibalism, because the cells only devour that which they recognize as “Other.” At the same time, however, the functioning of these cells illustrates the degree to which these categories of Self and Other are never a priori givens, but rather are themselves the product of metaphorical processes of reading itself.

     

    In a critical overview of more recent Western medical models of the immune system, feminist theorist Donna Haraway suggests that these models come to assume a notion of “identity” as merely an amorphous, decentered play of difference:

     

    Does the immune system–the fluid, dispersed, networking techno-organic-textual-mythic system that ties together the more stodgy and localized centers of the body through its acts of recognition–represent the ultimate sign of altruistic evolution towards wholeness, in the form of the means of co-ordination of a coherent self? (219)

     

    “In a word, no,” she writes, in reply to her own rhetorical question. The notions of “self” presupposed by these immune system models are, instead, continually contested and always already “under erasure.” While Haraway posits that this deconstructive turn in immune system models represents a specifically “post-modern,” late-twentieth-century development, my reading of these May-Fourth-period texts suggests that many of these deconstructive implications were latently present in the model all along.

     

    The “Western” medical and hygienic perspectives being introduced into China during the May Fourth era contributed to a number of radical shifts in the understanding of the constitution of not only the human body itself, but also the social communities and societies which these bodies inhabit. One of the more prominent examples of Chinese incorporation of Western medical knowledge is that of these immunological models of social organization. Ironically, however, one of the implications of these immunological models, as they were developed in the May Fourth era, involves precisely a recognition of the inherent contingency of the processes by which corporal or social bodies are differentiated from “foreign” elements. That is to say, the act of incorporating “Other” (Western) models ironically resulted in an implicit rethinking of the conceptual basis upon which the boundaries between “Self” and “Other” are constructed in the first place.

     

    Journeys into the Interior

     

    Mo Yan Sir Mo Yan Sir what’s wrong please wake up This guy wrote Red Sorghum but he’s a fledgling with alcohol can’t hold his liquor but comes to Liquorland to stir up trouble take him to the hospital bring a car over first give him some carp broth to sober him up carp promotes lactation don’t tell me he just had a baby a meat boy set it in a big gilded platter […]

     

    Mo Yan, The Republic of Wine

     

    The preceding May Fourth-era explorations into “cannibalistic” practices deep within the human body are ironically mirrored by the allegorical investigation of cannibalistic allegations deep within China’s own geographic interior in the 1993 novel The Republic of Wine by one of contemporary China’s most pre-eminent writers, Mo Yan. Born into a peasant family in 1955 and raised in rural Northern China, Mo Yan began publishing short stories and novels in the mid-1980s. Though he is sometimes grouped with the experimental writers who came of age in the 1980s (including figures such as Yu Hua, Ge Fei, Can Xue, etc.), Mo Yan’s early fiction tends to emphasize conventional storytelling and rural subject matter more than these other authors, and as such would be more accurately categorized as a “native soil” author. The events associated with the 4 June 1989 protests in Tiananmen Square appear to have had a significant influence on him, and it was in the latter part of that year that Mo Yan began writing The Republic of Wine, which perhaps still stands as his most innovative and unconventional work to date–whereby the social violence of the Tiananmen military crackdown would almost appear to have been displaced onto the narrative structure of the novel itself.

     

    Mo Yan is probably best known for his 1986 novel Red Sorghum, on which the renowned fifth-generation director Zhang Yimou based his directorial debut the following year. The earlier work opens with the evocative epigraph, “[…] As your unfilial son, I am prepared to carve out my heart, marinate it in sauce, have it minced and placed in three bowls, and lay it out as an offering in a field of sorghum”; and acts of symbolic cannibalism similarly lie at the heart of the work itself. For example, the secret recipe of the novel’s trademark wine is that it is fermented with human urine. Furthermore, later in the novel, there is an extended description of how, during the Chinese civil war, previously domesticated dogs gone wild feed on the decaying flesh of the human corpses which litter the landscape, and how the protagonists themselves have no other recourse but to feed on this dog flesh, flesh which is only one step away from their own. In this way, the canine-mediated cannibalism becomes a powerful metaphor for the internecine warfare in which China found itself in the 1940s following the withdrawal of the Japanese troops.

     

    The Republic of Wine, which Mo Yan began to write roughly three years later, builds quite directly on the thematic precedent set by Red Sorghum–literalizing Red Sorghum‘s attention to bacchanalian excess and cannibalistic transgression, even as it transposes the earlier novel’s concerns onto a more self-consciously fictional plane. The Republic of Wine constitutes not only a journey into the fictional space of China’s interior hinterland, but furthermore can also be seen as a figurative journey back into China’s own literary history of cannibalistic metaphors. For instance, it tropes quite explicitly on one of China’s greatest travel narratives: the fifteenth-century novel Journey to the West, whose own assorted allusions to cannibalistic practice constitute part of the cultural background of Mo Yan’s development of the topic.11 Furthermore, The Republic of Wine‘s attention to the theme of child cannibalism inevitably finds itself in dialogue with Lu Xun’s own classic short story on the topic, with Mo Yan’s novel alluding repeatedly to Lu Xun as an ironic avatar of literary canonicity.

     

    The basic premise of the main The Republic of Wine narrative concerns a hapless government investigator by the name of Ding Gou’er, who has been sent to a fictional province deep in the Chinese interior to investigate allegations of cannibalism, and specifically the consumption of human infants. When he finally arrives at this “Liquorland,” his hosts treat him to a decadent banquet, the pièce-de-résistance of which is a dish consisting of a human boy prepared whole and roasted to a deep shade of brown:

     

    The boy sat cross-legged in the middle of the gilded platter, golden brown and oozing sweet-smelling oil, a giddy smile frozen on his face. Lovely, naïve. Around him was spread a garland of green vegetable leaves and bright red radish blossoms. The stupefied investigator swallowed back the juices that rumbled up from his stomach as he gawked at the boy. A pair of limpid eyes gazed back at him, steam puffed out of the boy’s nostrils, and the lips quivered as if he were about to speak. (75)

     

    Upon seeing this culinary confirmation of his darkest suspicions, Ding Gou’er–who, by this point, is rather drunk–immediately attempts to arrest his hosts for practicing cannibalism. His hosts, however, patiently explain to him that it has all been a misunderstanding, and that the dish in question is actually merely an elaborate culinary simulacrum, carefully designed to mimic the shape and texture of a human infant, while in fact consisting only of mundane comestibles:

     

    “Old Ding, good old Ding, you’re a fine comrade with a strong humanistic bent, for which I respect you,” Diamond Jin said. “But you’re wrong. You’ve made a subjective error. Look closely. Is that a little boy?” His words had the desired effect on Ding Gou’er, who turned to look at the boy on the platter. He was still smiling, his lips parted slightly, as if he were about to speak. “He’s incredibly lifelike!” Ding Gou’er said loudly. “Right, lifelike,” Diamond Jin repeated. “And why is this fake child so lifelike? Because the chefs here in Liquorland are extraordinarily talented, uncanny masters.” The Party Secretary and Mine Director echoed his praise: “And this isn’t the best that we have to offer! A professor at the Culinary Academy can make them so that even the eyelashes flutter. No one dares let his chopsticks touch one of hers.” (77)

     

    What began as a scandal of cannibalism thus becomes, instead, a postmodern scandal of representation and reference; and as the novel progresses, it remains ambiguous (and ultimately irrelevant) whether that which the inebriated Ding Gou’er witnessed was an actual human infant, or merely a culinary facsimile of one. Furthermore, this radical skepticism towards the boundary between reality and representation, referent and simulacrum, in turn comes to feed parasitically on the plot of the actual novel itself, causing it to fold back upon itself, as a spectral apparition of the author himself ends up falling into the fictional abyss of the novel that he is attempting to write. To understand what is meant by this, however, it will be necessary to return briefly to a description of the structure and contents of the novel.

     

    The core The Republic of Wine narrative, as summarized above, is embedded within an outer narrative frame, in which a fictional “Mo Yan” (appearing as a character within his own novel) is portrayed as trying to complete the Republic manuscript. A central premise of this outer narrative frame is that the fictional “Mo Yan” finds himself in the position of being a reluctant cultural icon idolized by enthusiastic fans of Red Sorghum, and in particular by a certain Li Yidou, a Ph.D. candidate in liquor studies at the Brewer’s College in Liquorland, whose passion for wine is rivaled only by his morbid fascination with cannibalism and other dark recesses of the human soul. In this outer frame of the novel, the fictional “Mo Yan” is in the process of writing the The Republic of Wine narrative itself, even as he finds himself in epistolary dialogue with Li Yidou, who asks “Mo Yan” to use his institutional connections to help him gain a foothold within the publishing industry. Accordingly, Li Yidou sends “Mo Yan” a series of short stories, each more outlandish than the last, several of which center around discussions of children being raised with the express purpose of later being sold to the slaughterhouse. The fictional “Mo Yan” finds himself in a conundrum over how to continue to be encouraging in the face of what he increasingly perceives to be an onslaught of literary drivel, a conundrum which is reinforced by his growing ambivalence towards his own fiction.

     

    About two thirds of the way through the novel, however, this boundary between the outer and inner narrative frames begins to dissolve, as “Mo Yan” ultimately succumbs to writer’s block and abandons the The Republic of Wine narrative, deciding instead to travel to “Liquorland” himself to pay Li Yidou a visit. In doing so, he effectively abandons his presumptive authorial authority and steps into the same fictional space that he has already condemned to incompleteness, becoming an ironic Pirandellian character fleeing from his own authorship.

     

    In The Republic of Wine, the act of cannibalism constitutes an aporia of signification, on the basis of which the rest of the novel’s plot is structured. The figure cannibalism similarly provides a bridge between Lu Xun’s arch-canonical 1918 short story and Li Yidou’s own anti-canonical literary rantings. Understood more metaphorically, the figure of cannibalism could be seen as a pivot around which regimes of cultural and literary orthodoxy revolve, whereby the orthodox canon and more “popular” or marginalized culture are seen as actually being symbiotically dependent on each other, feeding parasitically on the textual remains which the other has left behind. That is to say, just as cannibalism represents a challenge to the conventional boundaries between Self and Other, individual and collective, similarly Mo Yan’s novel as a whole interrogates the boundaries between literary orthodoxy and the popular or transgressive genres against which it defines itself, together with the more ontological boundary between literary representation and the outer reality which literature seeks to denote.

     

    Afterimages of the Flesh

     

    The eyes of the fish were white and hard, and its mouth was open just like those people who want to eat human beings.

    Lu Xun, “Diary of a Madman”

    When you eat a fish, you must start with the eyes.

    Xu Shunying, Gushing Out

     

    Chinese society and culture have long been haunted by the specter of cannibalism.12 This uncanny apparition not only represents a profound challenge to the presumed sanctity of the human body (and, in the case of “survival” cannibalism, marking moments at which the very bonds of human society dissolve in the face of extreme adversity), but also, ironically, at the same time potentially standing as an ultimate gesture of social unity and filial devotion (as in the case of Chinese “endophagy,” in which children are said to feed their ailing parents with flesh taken from their own bodies). Throughout the twentieth century, a variety of authors, artists, and political reformers have repeatedly used the figure of cannibalism to reflect on a range of issues relating to the constitution of social collectives and corporal subjects, while in the process effectively deconstructing the metaphoricity of the trope of cannibalism itself. While the four cases of Chinese “discursive cannibalism” which I have considered in this essay each date from different periods and involve diverse social groups and representational media, a common characteristic which they all share is that they are each located in a volatile liminal space in which a variety of social and epistemological boundaries may be problematized and rethought.

     

    To recapitulate briefly, the Zhu Yu controversy foregrounds the way in which the specter of cannibalism has been, and continues to be, used to reinforce perceived differences between different ethnic, national, or transnational social groups. Furthermore, even as the subsequent debates bring attention to issues of social signification, they also problematize issues of signification in general. That is to say, a recurrent theme throughout many of the debates has been one of the limits of reference: to what extent do the photographs actually denote a tangible reality? And, how does this outer “reality” signified by these texts (be it “actual” cannibalism, a performative act of cannibalism, or a performative mimicry of a cannibalistic act, etc.) ultimately impact our understanding of the implications of the subsequent debates? In the case of Lu Xun’s story, one of the central issues was the boundary between “history” and “narrative”: what is the relationship between narrative schemata and the historical “realities” which they seek to describe? How are we to understand the ultimate “truth value” of what appear to be metaphorical figures?

     

    With the May Fourth immunological metaphors, a central issue was that of how to understand the boundaries between “bodies” (either corporal or social bodies) and the heterogeneous elements (pathogens or contaminants) against which they define themselves. Finally, Mo Yan’s recent novel The Republic of Wine brings us back to some key issues concerning the truth-value of (“literary”) textual production, while at the same time encouraging a rethinking of the conventional boundaries between orthodox canonicity and the heterogeneous array of more “popular” or “marginal” discourses against which it seeks to define itself. Also central to the novel was another version of the semiotic quandary which we observed in the Zhu Yu debates–namely, the figure of the “perfect” simulacrum, which stymies attempts to draw meaningful distinctions between signifier and referent (which is paralleled in the Zhu Yu case by an ambiguity between signifiers with referents and those without).

     

    I will conclude here by returning to the Zhu Yu performance with which I began. An intriguing detail which none of the published commentaries on the performance has (to my knowledge) hitherto remarked upon is that, in each of the endlessly reproduced images of Zhu Yu eating the human infant, he is always positioned in front of, and below, a large poster containing a representation of what appears to be an anatomy textbook (see Figure 2). The book is open to a page containing four dissected views of a human eye. Easily overlooked by viewers drawn, in horrified fascination, to the cannibalistic drama unfolding below it, these ocular images actually provide crucial insight into some of the issues involved in the production, circulation, and visual consumption of the cannibalistic images themselves.

     

    Figure 2

     

    These images of the human eye provide an alternate focal point for this photograph, graphically illustrating the degree to which the primal scene it depicts gains significance precisely through its process of being exchanged and viewed by others. Furthermore, these defamiliarizing views of the human eye constitute a useful reminder that our understanding of the human body, even our own body, is never “pure” and direct, but rather is necessarily mediated through different pre-existing orders of knowledge, vision, and experience.

     

    The implications of this autonomous, disembodied gaze for our understanding of the scene as a whole are multiple. First of all, the human visual system is dissected and subjected to the cold, disinterested gaze of medical science. The resulting medical gaze, in turn, provides an ironic counterpoint to the sensationalistic, morbid gaze which the photographs inevitably elicit. As a result, these scandalous and endlessly reproduced images are not as transparently intelligible as one might think and are actually located at the site of multiply fractured gazes: spectacular, medical, anthropological, political, and epistemological. My intention in this essay has been to provide additional perspectives to each of these components of the gaze, and in the process to suggest that the figure of cannibalism may itself be seen as pointing to a crucial border region wherein conventional categorical distinctions between Self and Other, us and them, reality and representation are deconstructed and put on display.

     

    More generally speaking, last year’s cannibalism “scandal” presents us with a problem of perception and perspective. On the one hand, a recurrent theme in most of the ensuing discussions of Zhu Yu’s performance emphasized a sense of cultural distance, of voyeuristically looking into a cultural space (Asian, Chinese, Taiwanese, etc.) which is perceived as being either subtly or radically distant from the socio-political location of the perceiver. On the other hand, many of the discussions implicitly held this cannibalism up to “their own” culturally specific standards, and indeed used the transgressive implications of Zhu Yu’s performance rhetorically to reinforce their own assumptions about the universality of certain cultural prohibitions.13

     

    Under the reading I have outlined above, the figure of cannibalism itself involves a paradoxical combination of identification and alterity, of violence and desire. The act of incorporating into oneself flesh of an Other with whom one shares a categorical identification, implicitly breaks down relations of alterity, even as it retrospectively reinforces them. Accordingly, this transcultural perception of cannibalism can itself provide a useful metaphor for the act of transcultural perception itself. In perceiving “other” cultures, we seek to understand, to internalize part of their inherent distance, even if only to reaffirm their inherent distance from “our” own.

     

    This “scandal” of cannibalism, therefore, encapsulates a compelling problem from the perspective of cross-cultural perception. On the one hand, many viewers are inclined to view cannibalism in absolute, universal terms which transcend specific cultural difference. It is simply unthinkable, according to this common view, that any human society would knowingly and willing practice cannibalism. On the other hand, to the extent that anthropologists recognize the possibility that some societies might practice (or might have previously practiced) cannibalism, they often proceed to attempt to contextualize these acts of cannibalism by reducing them entirely to the cultural level–suggesting that even actual acts of “actual” cannibalism are themselves metaphors for an underlying symbolic meaning. The question of cannibalism thus emblematizes, in a particularly graphic way, a problem which plagues all cross-cultural hermeneutics–namely, how to negotiate the competing impulses to view cultural alterity by one’s own standards, on the one hand, or to bracket it as radically “Other,” on the other.

     

    At the same time, I would suggest that the trope of cannibalism also presents a potential model for how to rethink the possibility of cross-cultural perception itself. Speaking in abstract terms, cross-cultural perception frequently contains a dimension of epistemic violence, functioning as an act of symbolic incorporation which, at the same time, retrospectively constructs and reaffirms the imaginary boundaries between Self and Other which make such reading meaningful in the first place. Like the figurative act of cannibalism itself, cross-cultural perception is typically grounded on a uneasy combination of epistemic violence and hermeneutic fusion, though the relative weightings of each of these components will naturally differ according to the specific circumstances involved. Just as the errant May Fourth white blood cells literally (re)shaped their own corporal environment through incorporative acts of “reading” alterity, I would propose a model of cross-cultural perception which is similarly grounded on acts of scopically and/or intellectually “ingesting” socio-cultural “alterity,” so as to reinforce, or restructure, the perceiver’s understanding of epistemic networks by which that notion of “alterity” is produced in the first place.

     

    Notes

     

    I would like to thank Eric Hayot and an anonymous reader for their suggestions. Research for this essay was supported by a University of Florida Humanities Enhancement Grant.

     

    1. In Lacanian terms, cannibalism can be seen as a figurative “stain” or “quilting point,” a point which is radically outside a certain symbolic system while at the same time providing the necessary which gives that system form in the first place. Similarly, Slavoj Zizek, in a related context, speaks of the “asystematic” points of radical alterity which are a necessary component of any system.

     

    2. Here and throughout this essay these sorts of generalizations about “our” and “other” cultures are being used strategically, or are “under erasure” (to borrow Derrida’s useful term); and, indeed, one of my arguments is precisely concerned with the re-evaluation of these accepted notions themselves.

     

    3. In 1979 the anthropologist William Arens published a highly polemical book in which he argues that there is no conclusive material evidence that cannibalism has ever existed as a systematic social practice anywhere in the world at any point in history, arguing instead that all apparent instances of cannibalism are merely the result of optimistic over-readings of either textual rhetoric or fundamentally ambiguous material evidence (see The Man-eating Myth: Anthropology and Anthropophagy). Arens’ book provided a lightning rod of contention and was useful to the extent that it brought critical attention to the latent ethnocentrism implicit in Western anthropology’s longstanding fascination with cannibalism. At the same time, however, Arens’ position, with its emphatic and almost messianic opposition to the very possibility of human cannibalism, can actually be seen as itself stemming from a parallel ethnocentrism, insofar as he is unwilling to confront the implications such cannibalism would have for our perception of the cannibals as anthropological subjects (see Gardner 27-50).

     

    4. In this respect, the 2000/2001 round of cannibalism allegations can be seen as a ironic reprise of a similar series of allegations only five years earlier, on the occasion of the 1995 International Conference on Women’s Rights in Beijing. At that time, foreign tabloids, Christian organizations, and even U.S. Representative Frank Wolf of Virginia were taken in by spurious claims that human fetuses were considered a rare delicacy by many Chinese gourmands. The politicians, in particular, used the story rhetorically to support their opposition to granting China Most-Favored-Nation status, but saw little need to pursue the actual allegations any further (see Dixon; this article was apparently first published in early October of 2000, shortly before Zhu Yu’s performance, but may have been revised as recently as 5 June 2001 [judging by the dates of the file and its folder in the web site’s publicly readable directory]).

     

    5. On “Nietzsche fever” in China in the mid-1980s, see Wang and Cheng.

     

    6. According to the Taiwan GIO report, Zhu Yu admitted in a telephone interview that the performance was part of the April 12 “Obsession with Injury” performances (that is, the second installment of the “Obsession” series), which does not correlate with the November 13 date cited in most other sources. It is unclear at this point, therefore, whether the repeated identification, in many Chinese reports, of the performance with the “Obsession” exhibit is in reference to a subsequent installment of the “Obsession” series, or merely an unwitting perpetuation of an original error. The question is left somewhat ambiguous in the Fuck Off catalogue, where the images are only identified by the title “Eating People” and the date, 13 November 2000 (though other images, in the same catalog, from Zhu Yu’s April 13 “Obsession with Injury” performances in Beijing are clearly identified as such).

     

    7. Lin Yü-sheng notes that there is some evidence that this piece was written not by Lu Xun himself, but rather by his brother Zhou Zuoren (who was also an accomplished and well-recognized literary figure in his own right; the “evidence” which Lin cites is that Zhou himself claimed authorship in a subsequent letter to Cao Juren). However, as Lin also notes, Zhou did not actually deny that the views he had expressed were shared by Lu Xun, but only that there were minor stylistic differences in the essay which distinguished it from Lu Xun’s own work, differences which so far had gone unnoticed by the general readership. Furthermore, the essay continues to be included in Lu Xun’s collected works under his own name (Lin 116).

     

    8. For instance, the classical medical text Simple Questions of the Yellow Emperor (probably dating from the first century B.C.E.) states that “the heart functions as the prince and governs through the soul; the lungs are liaison officers who promulgate rules and regulations; the liver is a general and devises strategies.” Similarly, the Tang dynasty Taoist master Sima Chengzhen (eighth century C.E.) elaborates, “The country is like the body: follow the nature of things, don’t let your mind harbor any partiality, and the whole world will be governed” (qtd. in Schipper 102).

     

    9. Chen is drawing here primarily on Metchnikoff’s monograph. The subject of this essay, and of Metchnikoff’s original book, is particularly poignant in that the essay was written in the year of Metchnikoff’s death.

     

    Metchnikoff’s claims to fame include his discovery of the phagocytotic role of white blood cells in the immune system as well his being the younger brother of Ivan Ilyitch, immortalized by Tolstoy in his story “The Death of Ivan Ilyitch.”

     

    10. Lin Yü-sheng contrasts these three figures as follows:

     

    Chen Duxiu, who eventually became a Marxist and the first leader of the Chinese Communist Party, was known as a man of intense moral passion, combative in temperament and fearlessly individualistic. His mind was more forceful than subtle; he was not greatly concerned with the nuances of meaning or the complexities involved in social and cultural issues. Hu Shi, on the other hand, was a Deweyan liberal and eventually became an ambivalent supporter of the Guomindang. He was a well-rounded and self-content personality, affable and urbane, and not without a touch of vanity. He possessed an alert mind, and was superficially lucid in his manner of expression, but he did not involve himself in social and cultural issues at their most difficult levels and never probed deeply into the problems with which he was concerned. Lu Xun, by contrast, was an extremely complex person, with a sharp wit and a sensitive, subtle, and creative mind. He was known for his sardonic humor and mordant sarcasm. Outwardly, he was distant and cold; inwardly, deeply pessimistic and melancholy–but with a genuine warmth and moral passion which enabled him to express the agony of China’s cultural crisis with great eloquence. Politically, he was highly sympathetic to the Communists in his later years, but he eschewed formal party ties and firm ideological commitments. (9)

     

    11. For a more detailed discussion of the relationship between these two texts, see Yang.

     

    12. For an interesting, though thoroughly uncritical, survey of discourses of cannibalism from throughout Chinese history, see Chong.

     

    13. On one web site discussion, for instance, the author confidently asserts that “the taboos against eating one’s own are universal, and rumors about violations of these taboos are used to vilify members of competing cultures” (“Fetus”)(emphasis added).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Arens, William. The Man-eating Myth: Anthropology and Anthropophagy. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1979.
    • “Baby-Eating Photos Are Part of Chinese Artist’s Performance.” Taipei Times. 23 Mar. 2001 < http://www.taipeitimes.com/news/2001/03/23/story/0000078704>.
    • Chen Duxiu. “Call to Youth” [jinggao qingnian]. New Youth [Qingnian zazhi]. 1.1 (Sept. 1915): 1-6.
    • —. “The Thought of Two Modern Scientists” [Dangdai er da kexuejia zhi sixiang]. Duxiu wenji. Anhui: Anhui renmin chubanshe, 1986. 46-69.
    • Cheng Fang. Ni Cai zai Zhongguo [Nietzsche in China]. Nanjing: Nanjing chubanshe, 1993.
    • Ching, Siu-tung. A Chinese Ghost Story [Qian nu youhun]. Hong Kong: Star TV Filmed Entertainment, 1987.
    • Chong, Key Ray. Cannibalism in China. Wakefield, NH: Longwood Academic, 1990.
    • Dixon, Poppy. “Eating Fetuses: The Lurid Christian Fantasy Of Godless Chinese Eating ‘Unborn Children.’” Adult Christianity. 2 Oct. 2000 < http://www.jesus21.com/poppydixon/sex/chinese_eating_fetuses.html>.
    • “Fetus Feast.” Urban Legends Reference Page. Ed. Barbara Mikkelson. 19 Jun. 2001 <http://www.snopes2.com/horrors/cannibal/fetus.htm>.
    • Gardner, Don. “Anthropophagy, Myth, and the Subtle Ways of Ethnocentrism.” The Anthropology of Cannibalism. Ed. Laurence Goldman. Westport, CT: Bergin, 1999. 27-50.
    • Girard, René. Violence and the Sacred. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1979.
    • Haraway, Donna. Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature. New York: Routledge, 1991.
    • Hu Shi. “Ibsenology” [yibusheng zhuyi]. Hu Shi zuopinji. Vol. 6 Taipei: Yuanliu chubanshe, 1986. 9-28.
    • Hua Tianxue, Ai Weiwei, and Feng Boyi, eds. Fuck Off [Bu hezuo de fangshi, which literally means “an uncooperative approach”]. Shanghai: Eastlink Gallery, 2000.
    • Lin Yü-sheng. The Crisis of Chinese Consciousness: Radical Antitraditionalism in the May Fourth Era. Madison: U of Wisconsin P, 1979.
    • Lu Xun. “Diary of a Madman.” Lu Hsun: Selected Stories. Trans. Yang Hsien-yi and Gladys Yang. New York: Norton, 1977. 7-18.
    • —. “Random Thoughts #38.” New Youth [Qingnian zazhi]. 1918.
    • Mao Zedong. “On New Democracy.” Selected Works of Mao Tse-Tung. Vol. 2. Beijing: Foreign Language, 1965. 339-384.
    • Metchnikoff, Elie. The Prolongation of Life: Optimistic Studies. New York: Putnam’s, 1910.
    • Mo Yan. The Republic of Wine New York: Arcade, 2000.
    • Ong, Aihwa. Flexible Citizenship: The Cultural Logics of Transnationality. Durham: Duke UP, 1999.
    • Republic of China. Government Information Office. “Rumors of Fetus Eating in Taiwan Traced to Mainland Performing Artist”. 18 Jul. 2001. < http://www.taipei.org/official/rumors/rumors.htm>.
    • Schipper, Kristofer. The Taoist Body. Berkeley: U of California P, 1993. 102.
    • Wang, Jing. High Culture Fever: Politics, Aesthetics, and Ideology in Deng’s China. Berkeley: U of California P, 1996.
    • Wang Shuo. Please Don’t Call Me Human. Trans. Howard Goldblatt. New York: Hyperion, 2000.
    • Wang, Val. “Sadistic Art? A Roundtable with Performance Artists.” ChineseArt.com 3:2 (2000) < http://www.chinese-art.com/artists/openstudio.htm>.
    • Wu Hung. Exhibiting Experimental Art in China. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001.
    • —. Transcience: Chinese Experimental Art at the End of the Twentieth Century. Chicago: U of Chicago Museum of Art, 1999.
    • Wuming Shi. “Reflections on the Body” [Dongti ningsi]. Expressing Emotion of Mist and Clouds [Shuqing yanyu]. Taipei: Wenshizhi chubanshe, 1998.
    • Xu Shunying. Gushing Out [Daliang liuchu]. Taipei: Hongse wenhua chubanshe, 2000.
    • Yang, Xiaobin. “The Republic of Wine: An Extravaganza of Decline.” positions 6.1 (1998): 6-32.
    • Yu Hua. “Classical Love.” The Past and the Punishments. Trans. Andrew Jones. Honolulu: U of Hawaii P, 1996. 12-61.
    • Zheng Yi. Scarlet Memorial: Tales of Cannibalism in Modern China. Trans. and ed. T.P. Sym. Westview: Boulder, CO., 1996.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Sublime Figure of Ideology. London: Verso, 1997.

     

  • Grand Theory/Grand Tour: Negotiating Samuel Huntington in the Grey Zone of Europe

    Dorothy Barenscott

    Department of Art History, Visual Art, and Theory
    University of British Columbia
    bridot@shaw.ca

     

    In conflicts between civilizations, the question is “What are you?” That is a given that cannot be changed. And as we know, from Bosnia to the Caucasus to the Sudan, the wrong answer to that question can mean a bullet in the head.

     

    –Samuel Huntington, The Clash of Civilizations (1996)

     

    If the search for difference is widely presented as a tourist attraction, it is obvious that cultural differences are being negated. The new types of difference that emerge are hard to identify and require too much time to decode.

     

    —Chris Rojek, Touring Cultures (1997)

     

    In 1996, the Russian based photo-conceptualist group AES (made up of artists Tatyana Arzamasova, Lev Evzovitch, and Evgeny Svyatsky) launched its “Travel Agency to the Future” with the Islamic Project. Promoting a set of fictitious Grand Tours which would set out in the year 2006 into a radically changed and dystopic landscape, AES drew inspiration from Samuel Huntington’s popular political paradigm of the mid 1990s, which anticipated the time when Islamic and Western cultures would come violently into collision. Well before the events of September 11th and well before George W. Bush’s “crusade against terror,” AES prepared clients for travel to the future through advertising and promotional material that featured fantastic projections of what the new world order would bring. More specifically, AES produced a series of digitally altered images, in the form of postcards, depicting the monuments and spaces of familiar tourist destinations (such as those found in Paris, Rome, Berlin, and New York) invaded, occupied, and altered by Islamic civilization. Not surprisingly, AES images were scattered among the many “ground zero” photographs widely circulated on the Internet in the days and weeks following the attack on the World Trade Center–a specific moment when a “Western” public was made to confront its own fears of an “Islamic” Other (see Figure 1).1

     

    Figure 1: New Freedom (2006)
    Copyright © AES & GRAF d’SIGN 1996

     

    Over the past five years, AES, the agency, and its promotional material have been set in a variety of locations and spaces each with its own set of complexities, be they the spaces of the gallery, the spaces of the street, or the virtual spaces of its agency website on the World Wide Web.2 Central to the Islamic Project is the constructed tension between “East” and “West,” a monolithic paradigm and theoretical concept that works strategically at many levels, be they geographic, economic, cultural, or political.

     

    The unique position of AES, as a group of Russian artists, to begin exploring, problematizing, and articulating what is at stake in the construction of an East/West split emerges out of its own status as postcommunist citizens in what Piotr Piotrowski terms the “grey zone of Europe” (37). Therein, the processes and rhetoric of globalization and multiculturalism have played out on the terrain of a hotly divided and increasingly nationalistic social body where geographic tensions have undermined the West’s call for a harmonizing of all divisions–a united Europe. We can begin to unpack AES’s use of the conventions and identity of a travel agency and the circulation of postcards and other tourist objects as a productive way to explore, question, and problematize both the tourist gaze and the gaze of the global consumer–forces which activate and reinforce the East/West divide on many levels. As such, AES’s images operate at progressive degrees and within multiple layers of desire, beyond the broader desire to travel and to consume. They are entangled with the intellectual crisis of a post-Soviet world coming to grips with issues of national and individual identity, the changing dynamic of cultural representation, and the removal of borders (physical, theoretical, cultural, and economic) in everyday life. Therefore, AES’s Islamic Project can be read in relationship to a range of issues stemming from the articulation of difference through the guise of tourism and the ways in which the East/West divide is capitalized upon and upheld, and to what ends. These issues relate directly to AES’s use of the manipulated image as a medium of cultural exchange, the spaces in which AES operates and proliferates its messages, and the kinds of monuments and places that are digitally altered and reconfigured within AES’s artistic practice.

     

    The impetus behind the project’s conception was the emerging body of political theory in the mid-1990s that forecast new directions for American foreign policy and global relations. In the post-Cold War era, political scientists and government strategists began to formulate new theories about the state of future global affairs. Francis Fukuyama was among the most infamous for his announcement in 1992 of the “end of history” and the triumph of liberal democracy. But beginning shortly after the Gulf War when America and its Western partners faced combat with a new Eastern enemy, Fukuyama’s grand theory was quickly eclipsed by that of Samuel Huntington, Harvard Professor and Chairman of the Harvard Academy for International and Area Studies. In a 1993 article for Foreign Affairs titled “The Clash of Civilizations?,” Huntington sketched out what would become arguably the most influential and highly controversial political theory governing American foreign relations in the late twentieth and early twenty-first century. In the opening passage of the article, Huntington declares a radical reconceptualization of politics (indeed for the discipline of political science itself). He states:

     

    World politics is entering a new phase, and intellectuals have not hesitated to proliferate visions of what it will be–the end of history, the return of traditional rivalries between nation states, and the decline of the nation state from the conflicting pulls of tribalism and globalism, among others. Each of these visions catches aspects of the emerging reality. Yet they all miss a crucial, indeed a central, aspect of what global politics is likely to be in the coming years.

     

    It is my hypothesis that the fundamental source of conflict in this new world will not be primarily ideological or primarily economic. The great divisions among humankind and the dominating source of conflict will be cultural. Nation states will remain the most powerful actors in world affairs, but the principal conflicts of global politics will occur between nations and groups of different civilizations. The clash of civilizations will dominate global politics. The fault lines between civilizations will be the battle lines of the future. (22)

     

    Huntington goes on to count a number of civilization “identities,” which by the time of his 1996 book-length treatment of the original article (The Clash of Civilizations and the Remaking of World Order) numbers nine: Western (by which he means Christian and liberal-capitalistic); Latin American; African; Islamic (where he includes Indonesia as well as the Middle East and the northern half of Africa); Sinic (including China and cultures descended from it, e.g., Korea and Vietnam); Hindu; Slavic-Orthodox (i.e., Catholicism as localized in Russia in the late Middle Ages); Buddhist; and Japanese. With strong claims that conflicts will emerge as alignments of the “West against the Rest,” and especially the West against Islam, Huntington appeals to Western civilizations to join against the common enemy. He sets out a number of goals, including the incorporation of Eastern Europe and Latin America into the West, the pursuit of cooperative relations with Russia and Japan, and the strengthening of international institutions that reflect and legitimate Western interests and values. Moreover, Huntington lists a number of “fault lines” of the world, relying heavily on examples from conflicts in the former Yugoslavia, to illustrate and support his overall argument that “as people define” their civilization-consciousness, “they…likely…see an ‘us’ versus ‘them’ relation existing between themselves and people of different ethnicity or religion” (25).

     

    Indeed, what Huntington constructs through the various permutations of his argument is a paradigm–one that posits culture in all its subjective ambiguity as the distinguishing trait of political struggle. But perhaps more problematically, Huntington leaves open the question of whether his clash thesis places civilizational conflicts beyond the power and means of mediation through political partnership (e.g., the United Nations or NATO) and/or diplomacy. He therefore appears to suggest that all civilizations should live in peace with one another at the same time as claiming their inability to reach mutual compromise. In the end, Huntington’s paradigm leaves the onus of successfully disavowing his theory upon those who can formulate a better hypothesis. Borrowing from Thomas Kuhn’s discourse on scientific revolutions, Huntington establishes a highly convincing master system built upon a monolithic set of predetermined “truths.”3 However, as critics have noted, these “truths” actively distort the vastly complex issue of globalization. Within the United States, much of the debate since 1993 has been limited to certain aspects of the clash thesis, seldom broaching the fundamental question of whether Huntington’s views are in fact dangerous and even racist.4 Therefore, the most vocal and sustained opposition to Huntington has emerged from non-Western scholars, none of whom has exerted anywhere near the kind of influence that Huntington has in American foreign policy circles. Publishing in lesser-known journals or small collaborative collections such as “The Clash of Civilizations?” Asian Responses (published in 1997 in Karachi, Pakistan through Oxford University Press), these scholars established the discourse for the earliest critiques of the clash thesis, underscoring the very real consequences that such a paradigm holds and drawing out the weaknesses and potential danger inherent to adapting Huntington’s model to transglobal relations. As Salim Rashid notes in the introduction to The Clash of Civilizations?: Asian Responses,

     

    In the long sweep of history, Europe has continually looked with trepidation upon Asia. Whether it be the attacks of the Persians upon the Hellenes, or the Moors who long ruled Spain or the Ottomans at the gates of Vienna or the Mongols sweeping through Poland and Hungary, it is Asia that has continually threatened Europe with destruction. While three hundred years of European dominance have dimmed these memories, Samuel Huntington has succeeded in a charming revival of a long historical tradition. In an article entitled, “The Clash of Civilisations” one is struck first by the definite article in the title–not “A Clash” but “The Clash.” (i)

     

    This insistence upon empiricism in Huntington’s arguments, the claim to describing the reality of the world, is at the core of critics’ concerns since these claims revive a tradition of viewing the East, the Other, in highly mythologized and problematic ways. Therefore, if critics charge Huntington with escapism, reductivism, isolationist politics, racism, and fear-mongering, what lies at the heart of these concerns is the way Huntington mobilizes and trades in cultural myths to support his thesis.

     

    In this connection, it is useful to recall Roland Barthes’s analysis of myth in the section of Mythologies called “The Form and the Concept.” “In myth,” Barthes writes, “the concept can spread over a very large expanse of signifier. For instance, a whole book may be the signifier of a single concept; and conversely, a minute form (a word, a gesture, even incidental, so long as it is noticed) can serve as signifier to a concept filled with a very rich history” (120). Here Barthes stresses the uneven nature of mythic constructs. What’s more, he describes these concepts as lacking fixity so that “they can come into being, alter, disintegrate, [and] disappear completely” (120). Barthes positions the distinguishing character of the mythical concept as something that is appropriated and recycled. In this way, what remains “invested in the [mythical] concept is less reality than a certain knowledge of reality” (119)–one that is often ahistorical and contingent upon shifting power relations. As Barthes goes on to state: “In actual fact, the knowledge contained in a mythical concept is confused, made of yielding, shapeless associations” (119). These aspects further situate the myth-making process as an act of deliberate distancing without clear fixity or return to origins, an ephemeral power of disconnection.

     

    But more importantly, Barthes’ analysis points to the inherent instability of the uneven processes through which cultural differences are most often communicated and internalized. And while the staging of AES’s critique has manifested far beyond the original concerns of the non-Western critics, as we shall see, it is arguable that the first step to unpacking AES’s engagement with Huntington circulates around this Barthesian sense of the mobilization of myths. Indeed, embedded in the very sign system of culture are a myriad of such myths that make Westerners feel secure when images of Islamic men shaving off their beards or Muslim women applying make-up signals the triumph of the West in its “war on terror.” These cultural differences and the way they are signified, experienced, and circulated through media projections, fantasy scenarios, and manufactured myths of all kinds form a key construct of AES’s Islamic Project.

     

    Chris Rojek, in his provocative article “Indexing, Dragging and the Social Construction of Tourist Sights,” describes the position of the “extraordinary place” as a social category in these very terms–places that “spontaneously invit[e] speculation, reverie, mind-voyaging, and a variety of other acts of imagination” (52).5 What is undoubtedly immediate in the AES images is that each depicts a spatial location already richly embedded with the aura of the extraordinary, holding a powerful draw to the average tourist–places such as the Statue of Liberty, Notre Dame Cathedral, Disney World, Sydney Harbor, Red Square, etc. Yet, as Rojek points out, these sites also abound in a “discursive level of densely embroidered false impressions, exaggerated claims and tall stories.” It thus becomes “difficult… to disentangle” the “tradition of deliberate fabrications from our ordinary perceptions of sights” (52). Therefore, in order to make these sites legible, the tourist must draw on a whole range of conflicting signs to construct what is being seen. This process involves activating the tourist’s familiarity with and relationship to the place through a configuration of these signs. And while this “activation” remains largely an abstract endeavor, often facilitated through media imagery, it does implicate very material spaces and contexts.

     

    Rojek’s specific discussion of indexing and dragging provides a fertile stopping point in this analysis. Here, Rojek appears to invoke the practice of clicking and dragging a computer’s mouse to help explain the process through which tourists apprehend the “extraordinary” or the “different.” In this model, indexing refers to a kind of inventory-taking of all the visual, textual, and symbolic representations to the original object (e.g., in Los Angeles, one might think of the Hollywood sign, the L.A. riots, the L.A. of Beverly Hills Cop, the TV show Melrose Place, palm trees, and Marilyn Monroe–not a uniform procedure by any means). Importantly, Rojek stresses that indexing takes account of metaphorical, allegorical, and false information resources, “interpenetrat[ing] factual and fictional elements” in order to “frame the sight” (53). The term “dragging” is thus evoked as both an abstract and a corporeal experience that illuminates the complex feelings one encounters as a tourist. Specifically, “dragging refers to the combining of elements from separate files [or indices] of representation to create a new value” (53). As Rojek explains, dragging is often facilitated “through tourist marketing, advertising, cinematic use of key sights and travellers tales” (54). The result is that a superficial/surface relationship emerges in relationship to the place, creating one extraordinary site after another in a laundry list of sites to explore and engendering a kind of blasé attitude toward the places of travel as well as a constant state of distraction:

     

    The desire to keep moving on and the feeling of restlessness that frequently accompanies tourist activity derive from the cult of distraction. Pure movement is appealing in societies where our sense of place has decomposed and where place itself approximates to nothing more than a temporary configuration of signs. (71)

     

    Notions of the touristic quest for authenticity as outlined by Dean MacCannell in The Tourist: A New Theory of the Leisure Class (1989) are thus problematized specifically because the process of indexing and dragging precludes any attempt to experience any “real” place. As such, the restless nature of tourism is precisely envisioned by Rojek as the process of quickly moving from sight/site to sight/site, drawing on Virilio’s emphasis that velocity, as a “potent source of attraction in contemporary culture,” outstrips any temporally prolonged engagement with any one place (71). Importantly, Rojek distinguishes and continually stresses the important place of myth in all travel and tourist sites. This link emerges as a result of the physical remoteness of most tourist sights to the traveler and the accompanying speculation of the unknown, including the “fantasy about the nature of what one might find and how our ordinary assumptions and practices regarding everyday life may be limited” (53). Therefore, myths can come into play as a way to apprehend the unknown, to fill in the patches of what cannot be understood or ascertained.

     

    Within AES’s Islamic Project, these elements of re-presentation, tourism, and myth are strongly punctuated. First, in relationship to indexing, AES provides the photograph, index par excellence, and loads its images with a veritable file of indices (the effect of montaging multiple photographs) of both the West and of Islam. Importantly, distinctions are kept firmly within a binary of re-presentation. The West is most often signified in the images through its institutions, technology, and modernity, while Islam is pictured as traditional, religious, aggressive, and ubiquitous (I am thinking here specifically of the many Muslim bodies filling several of the images, tapping into Western anxieties and stereotypes about immigration and the fear of being outnumbered–see Figure 2).

     

    Figure 2: Rome, (2006)
    Copyright © AES 1996

     

    Second, it is important to note that each of the digital photographs is created with existing imagery (appearing to fulfill the appropriating function highlighted by Barthes) and thus represents a kind of assemblage produced by indexing and dragging. This lends the images a feeling of familiarity, making them seem safe, yet still fantastical. Third, the familiarity of the images is further evoked through their seriality. The tourist can anticipate where some of the stops will be and begin the process of quickly looking from one image to the next, anticipating the next place, distracted from engaging with any one image. This sparks the process of movement, acceleration, and distraction in an attempt to apprehend the entirety of what is being presented and to collect or check off each site/sight visited. Fixity is further removed with the proliferation and flow of multiple objects in multiple forms (postcards, t-shirts, mugs, posters), objects that provide evidence of the visit while constructing new indices and contexts for re-presentation. And adding still further to the familiarity and seriality of the images is the distinctive green logo mark referencing Benetton’s “United Colors of the World” campaign (see Figure 3)6, raising another aspect of Rojek’s argument, the rise of “neo-tribes” or new virtual collectives in which social identity is expressed and recognized in conditions of anonymity and disembodiedness (61-62).

     

    Figure 3: Northern Germany, (2006)
    Copyright © AES 1996

     

    This is a “controlled approach of disassociation” where interaction with others is ostensibly treated as a symbolic matter:

     

    …the attachments are basically superficial and have the propensity to be reconfigured in response to the opportunities of contingency. In consuming this experience neo-tribes recognise that their attachments can be pulped and reconstituted to form other temporary attachments elsewhere. Mobility rather than continuity is the hallmark of this psychological attitude, and restlessness rather than anxiety defines this emotional outlook. (61)

     

    In this way, the logo, itself a complex sign, signals the consuming aspects of tourism supported by a global economy and travel industry penetrating every corner of the globe. And, as Mika Hannula argues in his short essay “The World According to Mr. Huntington,” the problematic success of the clash thesis emerges in a world where consumer behavior demands convenience:

     

    There was the demand and voilà, before you could stutter ch-ch-ch-cheeseburger, there also was the supply. There was a huge demand for an answer, a schema that would explain the world in these chaotic, insecure post Wall times. There was fear, and there was uneasiness in the face of a pluralist, multicultural world awash with contingency. The fear was fuelled by images of rebels from far-off lands, and with hard-to-spell names, bluntly labelled Islamic fundamentalists’ [sic] and, quite obviously, terrorists…. On the face of it, these claims do in general have strong argumentative force. They support deeply rooted prejudices, and help explain the world order, or disorder, and all the threats you feel when watching the evening news presented in a compact, consumable, comprehensible way. (4)

     

    Hannula touches here upon two key concepts worked through the Islamic Project.7 First, Hannula underscores the relationship between consumer culture and the mass media in shaping ideas about cultural difference. Second, there is a suggestion of interactivity and contingency pointing to the type of virtual mobility that today’s consumer can access through ever increasing and complex means. In turn, both dynamics relate to ideas around exchange and travel. And since it is through the theoretical and conceptual spaces of travel and tourism that most cultural differences can be and often are marked out, AES’s choice to take up the identity of a travel agency, one which trades in images of difference, comes into clearer focus.

     

    Reading AES’s images in this context points to a number of important implications relating not only to the use of manipulated photographs and their relation to the social construction of touristic space, but also to the emerging cultural milieu of postcommunist Europe where newly opened borders allow for travel (both physical and imaginary) in both directions. In the context of these connections, we can ask what is the significance of an altered image, how is it conceived, and what does its relationship to the production and signification of difference mean? Moreover, we can explore how the circulation of that image, or a series of related images, calls up the mobilization of a tourist gaze and sensibility, and to what ends. As a mock travel agency, AES is able to stage the elements of tourism both inside the gallery and on its interactive website. In the gallery, the images are shown in postcard stands and on consumable items such as t-shirts and mugs (which can be purchased, becoming souvenirs of the exhibit). The artists, dressed as travel agents, mill around, passing out questionnaires (see Figures 4 and 5).

     

    Figures 4 & 5:
    Photographs from inside
    the 1997 Installation of Islamic Project in Graz, Austria.

    Copyright © AES 1997

     

    Providing a nondescript corporate name, AES does not register the agency’s Russian identity or artist identity any more than the promotional material or questionnaires (all of them in English) do. The corporate identity, streamlined office space, and glossy promotional materials create an environment of familiarity and comfort for the largely Western audience of gallery goers and tourists, new not only to the clash thesis but to postcommunist art as well.

     

    This performance has the effect of distancing both the cultural identity of the artists and the subject matter of the individual images. In this way, the agency’s visitors are initially distracted from the political undertones of the work and made to feel as consumers. To be sure, the exhibit as a whole becomes one of a number of sights that a gallery visitor sees. In Budapest, where AES installed their agency at the After the Wall show of “Art and Culture in Post-Communist Europe” in 2000, the irony of consuming and touring cultures was played out when gallery employees gave perfume samples of Warhol perfume to gallery goers visiting the Andy Warhol show upstairs from After the Wall. AES and other postcommunist artists surely noted the irony of having its work upstaged and out-marketed by the American cultural export.8

     

    On the Islamic Project website, the visitor encounters the touring and consuming dynamic somewhat differently when asked the question “Where do you want us to take you?,” an appropriation of Microsoft’s “Where do you want to go today?” trademark. Once inside, the visitor is presented with a map of the world. Prompted to click on geographic regions, the viewer is presented with a series of images and links, creating the effect of quickly moving from site/sight to site/sight. While on the home page, the visitor is confronted with a whole range of fictional and factual information that has been dragged into one frame, none of which is easy to discern (critical essay of Huntington, pictures of Muslim individuals, accounts of AES activities, order forms for AES merchandise, contact information that does not work, and the agency questionnaire).9 The very language of travel is elucidated through and embedded in the medium of the World Wide Web at successive levels with notions of discovery, exploring sites, surfing, bookmarking places, sending messages, e-cards, etc.

     

    Returning to Huntington’s paradigm, it is clear that cultural difference explored through the rhetoric, gestures, and construction of such a tourist gaze facilitates a mode of political engagement far removed from the specificity of place or history. The role of nation and civilization myths are therefore central to any analysis of cultural difference dependent on the model I’ve sketched out. This is a crucial aspect of Huntington’s hypothesis since it allows stereotypes and oversimplified binary divisions to mask the complexities of the global age in which we live. This in itself is an important political strategy, one all too familiar to a postcommunist public shifting between political ideologies. As such, problematizing and exposing another aspect of AES’s project, that of the fault lines between Eastern and Western Europe, links AES’s more abstract critique of Huntington with a wider geo-political conflict emerging in Europe. Piotr Piotrowski’s description of Central and Eastern Europe as the “grey zone” is apt and telling in this regard. After the collapse of the Berlin Wall, any uniting ideological structures were not only abandoned in Eastern Europe but also made suspect to a high degree. For this reason, the urgent endeavors of the liberal democratic “West” to fold in the “East” have often been met with resistance and hostility. As Piotrowski writes, “the historico-geographical coordinates of Central Europe are in a state of flux… we are between two different times, between two different spatial shapes” (36). This state of affairs, in all of its complexity, is often too much to register. In interviews with a Ukrainian e-journal, AES likened Russia to a “porridge,” a confusing muddle of interests that “you cannot make…out” (“AES Today”). Moreover, AES taps into the psychological minefield of the Chechen War through its montaged imagery portraying a civil conflict riddled with ambiguity and paradox, leaving individuals to grapple with who the enemy really is:

     

    Chechnya is a unique phenomenon that is not considered by the civilized society from conventional aspects. Because Russia does not understand itself what Chechnya is–minority or terrorists. Even the Russian authorities do not have such ideas. What can we say, then, about intellectuals who are absent as such in Russia now? Now…they are just silent. (“AES Today”)

     

    What remains then is a deep intellectual crisis–a crisis where the notion of reality is what is most at stake. This crisis registers in AES’s images in a number of striking ways, not surprisingly when the tourist gaze is momentarily suspended and the images critically interrogated to consider the importance of place. First, it is notable that when mapped out, the most violent, confrontational images converge precisely in the grey zone of the East/West split, what Huntington terms the “fault lines” of Europe. Notably, the Moscow (see Figure 6), Belgrade (see Figure 7), and Tel Aviv (see Figure 8) series illustrates the most violent conflicts, where the viewer is made to experience the clash of civilizations in a very direct and bodily way.

     

    Figure 6: Moscow, Red Square, (2006)
    Copyright © AES 1996
    Figure 7: Belgrade, Serbia, (2006)
    Copyright © AES 1998
    Figure 8: Tel-Aviv, (2006)
    Copyright © AES 1996

     

    Here, the hacked-off hands of enemies, advancing tanks, and children astride canons underscore the local and specific bloody conflicts seen in the wake of postcommunism. The images are generally zoomed-in, with figures confronting the camera. The most confrontational gaze is strategically placed in Moscow, where one is made to consider on which side the Muslim Chechen-like fighters belong–East or West. Moving geographically outward, the images tend toward progressive abstraction as people appear more distant and then finally removed altogether at the sites furthest from the fault lines (see Figures 9 and 10).

    Figures 9 & 10:
    New York (2006) and Sydney (2006)

    Copyright © AES 1996

     

    Here we are left with images that register an excess of signs, punctuated in the New Freedom 2006 image (recall Figure 1), where gender, religion, ideology, and culture are conflated into one penultimate, monolithic mega-sign of the clash between West and East. It is notable that AES took its travel agency to the streets of Belgrade and the Austrian city of Graz (see Figures 11 and 12), two cities signifying the imaginary dividing line between Eastern and Western Europe, while choosing to show only in the conceptual spaces of the gallery in America and Western Europe.

     

    Figures 13 & 14:
    Photographs of the Travel Agencies
    in Belgrade (1998) and Graz (1997)

    Copyright © AES 1998 and 1997

     

    AES engages with a clash of cultures to this end through its depiction of the Pompidou Center in Paris and the Guggenheim Museum in New York (see Figures 13 and 14).

     

    Figures 13 & 14:
    Gugenheim [sic] Museum, NYC, (2006)
    and Paris, Beabourg [sic], (2006)

    Copyright © AES 1996

     

    Here, AES presents powerful stereotypes that suggest both the ghettoizing of Eastern European art and the guerilla tactics artists must employ to fight the myths of their identity. This tension emerges in relation to the Benetton logo with the significant 2006 date, the projected deadline for final European Union acceptance of several Eastern European nations.10 The appropriated logo also references the many forged name-brand goods produced and marketed in the “East” on the black market–the monies with which many operative groups fund their “terrorist” activities.11

     

    In the final analysis, there is a peculiar ambivalence that emerges in the Islamic Project precisely because of the struggle AES encounters in its role as a group of Russian artists trying to find a place for critique. Emerging from the underground, from a time when art was made to fight crippling ideology, AES saw something familiar in the work of an American political scientist wishing to postulate a new paradigm to replace Cold War rivalries. Victor Tupitsyn, in an evaluation of the “Soviet mythologizing machine” reminds us of the process of Stalinist-era derealization as eerily familiar to our own world where, awash in images and sound bytes, we often stand dumbfounded:

     

    the ‘victory’ over reality belonged to those who, firstly, controlled its representation and secondly, neutralized suspicions of the existence of its Other (i.e., the other of representation). Such suspicion was ‘cured’ and is still being ‘cured’ by hypnotizing us through the magic of repetition inherent in mass printing and by our inferiority complex in the face of huge numbers, large scales, and long distances, which manifests itself in the inability to distinguish between much and all. (82)

     

    For Edward Said, it is precisely the reckless disregard for criticality that he fears in Huntington’s work. He argues that the “Clash of Civilizations,” like a bad take-off of Orson Welles’s “The War of the Worlds,” is “better for reinforcing defensive self-pride than for critical understanding of the bewildering inter-dependence of our times” (“Clash of Ignorance”).

     

    For AES, it seems that the place for criticality may indeed be receding, as its work circulates in ways and in contexts that it cannot control. Removed from the spaces of its mock travel agency, AES’s images travel precariously and within the same uneven process of indexing and dragging that it seeks to question. And indeed, with the events of September 11th, the issues taken up through AES’s Islamic Project have found a particular currency, positing its work as somewhat prophetic if not completely disturbing. To be sure, AES has been and will continue to be made to answer for their art. In a recent statement posted on the website of the Sollertis Gallery in Toulouse, France, AES attempts to make sense of its predicament:

     

    When horrible terror broke out in America our artistic phantasm grotesque of 1996 seemed real and Mr. Huntington appeared to be right, we could feel as artists that [we] became prophets. But now all of us understand that revenge for the events in America would not be the last link in the chain, but the start of the 21st century history when mankind has to solve the problems of coexistence in [a] global world of poor and rich, religious and consumer societies. The project is neither anti-Islamic nor anti-Western, but tries to function as a psychoanalytical therapy in which phobias from both Western and Eastern society are uncovered and work[ed] through. In “Islamic project: AES–The Witnesses of the Future” we tried to reveal the contradictial [sic] ethics and aesthetics of our times. We believe that contemporary art does not solve the problems, but it can raise the major questions. (AES)

     

    Notes

     

    1. Immediately following the events of September 11th, a wide and diverse number of e-cards, amateur, professional, and media photographs, and existing images related to the sites of the attacks circulated as e-mail attachments and links to impromptu memorial websites worldwide. Unaccredited AES images, often surfacing as satirical e-cards or mixed in with a stream of actual photographs, were among those circulating as a part of this phenomenon. I immediately recognized the images as the work of AES because of a trip I had made to Budapest in July 2000, where I first viewed the digital photographs displayed in the travelling exhibition After the Wall: Art and Culture in Postcomunist Europe. However, most people who received these images in their e-mail or ran across them on these memorial sites were not aware of the intended conceptual nature of the images, nor of their specific context in relation to AES’s Islamic Project. The AES image I found most widely circulating was New Freedom 2006 (see Figure 1). Yet it is precisely the ephemeral and shifting nature of the World Wide Web with its various image search engines and endless e-card links that prevents me today from tracking down and tracing the sources and current locations of these e-cards and remote websites where I first came across the AES images. I credit and would like to thank Dr. John O’Brian for encouraging me to write this essay as a way to think through the intersection of photography, tourism, and the spaces of travel.

     

    2. The AES website can be found at <http://aes.zhurnal.ru/>.

     

    3. There are many indications of Huntington’s connection to Kuhn, short of their real-life friendship. For a careful critique and analysis of Huntington’s use of Kuhn’s model, see Hammond.

     

    4. The popularity of Samuel Huntington’s thesis only continues to grow in the aftermath of the terrorist attacks on New York City and Washington D.C., and with today’s escalating crisis in the Middle East.

     

    5. Here, Rojek too is thinking of a Barthesian understanding of myth. Rojek writes, “Mention of the mythical is unavoidable in discussions of travel and tourism. Without doubt the social construction of sights always, to some degree, involves the mobilisation of myth (Barthes 1957)” (52).

     

    6. I have seen AES postcards presented with and without the logo. I have provided an example of one that does have the distinctive green striping.

     

    7. A copy of Hannula’s article is reproduced on the AES website.

     

    8. The Andy Warhol Museum in Pittsburgh, PA, in partnership with the U.S. Department of State’s Bureau of Educational and Cultural Affairs, organized Andy Warhol, the comprehensive retrospective exhibit of Warhol’s work, which began its international touring life in January 2000 and continues through spring 2002. The exhibition began at the Pushkin State Museum of Fine Arts in Moscow, Russia, before moving on to venues in Turkey, Croatia, Slovenia, Hungary, and the Czech Republic. For the full State Department press release, complete with dates and an explanation of the initiative, see <http://secretary.state.gov/www/briefings/statements/2000/ps000118.html>.

     

    9. When I began writing this essay, I attempted to contact AES for an interview. I quickly realized that the various contact information and e-mail addresses posted on the Islamic Project website were not operative. Likewise, if you attempt to fill out and submit the online questionnaire, the program refuses to fill in the fields.

     

    10. This date, of course, continues to change, and the specific context may not be as clear-cut as I suggest. However, I think it significant since many Central European nations focus so much of their media attention on the future of EU inclusion and on the importance of that end date. In 1996, when AES conceived the Islamic Project, the projection was for ten years into the future with some anticipation of a larger and more powerful European Union.

     

    11. This black-market trade in “fakes” exposes further complexities of the East/West construction. Naomi Klein, writing in The Guardian only a month after September 11th, explains:

     

    Maybe a little complexity isn’t so bad. Part of the disorientation many Americans now face has to do with the inflated and oversimplified place consumerism plays in the American narrative. To buy is to be. To buy is to love. To buy is to vote. People outside the U.S. who want Nikes–even counterfeit Nikes–must want to be American, love America, must in some way be voting for everything America stands for.

     
    This has been the fairy tale since 1989, when the same media companies that are bringing us America’s war on terrorism proclaimed that their TV satellites would topple dictatorships. Consumers would lead, inevitably, to freedom. But authoritarianism co-exists with consumerism, and desire for American products is mixed with rage at inequality.

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • AES. “Islamic Project: AES Witnesses of the Future.” Artist Statement. Galerie Sollertis Online November 2001: 1 par. <http://www.sollertis.com/ AESWitnesses.htm>.
    • —. “AES Today.” Interview. Boiler Online 3-4 (1999) <http://www.boiler.odessa.net /english/34/>.
    • Barthes, Roland. Mythologies. Trans. Annette Lavers. New York: Hill, 1957.
    • Hammond, Paul Y. “Culture Versus Civilization: A Critique of Huntington.” The Clash of Civilizations?: Asian Responses. Ed. Salim Rashid. Karachi, Pakistan: Oxford UP, 1997. 127-149.
    • Hannula, Mika. “The World According to Mr. Huntington.” SIKSI The Nordic Art Review 12 (1997) <http://aes.zhurnal.ru/isartic.htm>
    • Huntington, Samuel. “The Clash of Civilizations?” Foreign Affairs 72.3 (1993): 22-49.
    • —. The Clash of Civilizations and the Remaking of World Order. New York: Simon, 1996.
    • Klein, Naomi. “McWorld and Jihad.” The Guardian 5 Oct. 2001: 13 pars. < http://www.guardian.co.uk/waronterror/story/0,1361,563579,00.html>.
    • Piotrowski, Piotr. “The Grey Zone of Europe.” After the Wall: Art and Post-Communist Europe. Eds. Bojana Pejic and David Elliott. Stockholm: Moderna Museet Modern Museum, 1999. 37-41.
    • Rashid, Salim. “Introduction.” The Clash of Civilizations?: Asian Responses. Ed. Salim Rashid. Karachi, Pakistan: Oxford UP, 1997. i-iv.
    • Rojek, Chris. “Indexing, Dragging and the Social Construction of Tourist Sights.” Touring Cultures: Transformations of Travel and Theory. Eds. Chris Rojek and John Urry. London: Routledge, 1997. 52-74.
    • Said, Edward. “The Clash of Ignorance.” The Nation 22 Oct. 2001: 15 pars. <http://www. thenation.com/doc.mhtml?i=20011022&c=1&s=said>.
    • Tupitsyn, Victor. “The Sun Without a Muzzle.” Art Journal 53.2 (1994): 80-84.

     

  • Blanchot, Narration, and the Event

     

    Lars Iyer

    Philosophical Studies
    Centre for Knowledge, Science and Society
    University of Newcastle upon Tyne
    lars.iyer@ncl.ac.uk

     

    Trust the tale, not the teller–but what if the identity of the teller is given in the articulation of the tale? What if there would be not only no tale without a teller, but no teller without a tale? What if tale and teller were bound up in an interdependence that is far more complex than hitherto supposed? The “narrative turn” in the humanities is born of an insistence that there are modes of experience that cannot be captured by a theory that would transcend the historicity of experience.1 It calls for a new concretion, a new plunge into existence through the examination of the way in which experiences are meaningfully interconnected as elements in a sequence. In this sense, as David Carr argues in an admirable book, narrative is not a later imposition on pre-narrative experience but constitutes experience itself.2To posit the real as something that is experienced and only thereafter narrated is to misunderstand the way in which human behavior is directed toward the achievement of projected ends.

     

    The turn in question might appear to strike a great blow for the freedom of human beings to determine their existence for themselves. Likewise, the appeal to a new understanding of the role of narrativity seems to permit communities to redefine their place in the world.3 But communities themselves are vulnerable to powerful reactionary forces, and individuals, as narrativists show, are never to be considered in isolation from the communities that shape and inform their values.4 It is always possible for certain fundamentalist elements to invoke a hidden but originary orthodoxy, regulating the lives of “insiders” and governing their attitude to “outsiders.” But what is it that permits communities to, as it were, fold in upon themselves, submitting themselves to the enforcement of programmable, carefully regulated behavior?

     

    No doubt the drive to unify, to relate everything back to a point of origin, is a liability inherent to all forms of narration. In this sense, it might be possible to invoke a grand narrative that unifies all other narratives, a broader, deeper story that always aims to perpetuate a reassuring order, regulating the relationship between members of a community and between that community and others. In The Postmodern Condition, Lyotard tells us that the age of the grand récit has passed, but perhaps the grandest tale of them all–the tale that is told in the elaboration of any tale–still exerts its dominion. In this way, the narrative turn risks granting dignity to a debilitating and demobilizing story of the dominance of hegemonies and elites. It becomes necessary, therefore, as part of this turn to rethink narration, treating it, as Linda Singer recommends of community, not as “a referential sign” but as “a call or appeal” (125). The turn in question calls for provocative responses, for attempts to resist the prevailing determination of meaning and value.

     

    Maurice Blanchot, I will suggest, shows us how we might respond to an appeal inherent in the desire to narrate that would permit us to articulate a different relationship to the dominating narratives of our time. In some of his most vehement and programmatic pages, he argues that there is a desire indissociable from Western civilization (indeed, it could be said to constitute civilization itself) to recount its history and its experience, recapturing and thereby determining its past. Blanchot retraces this desire to the monotheisms that inaugurate “the civilization of the book” (Infinite 425). As he argues, the exigencies that are realized by the Book are reaffirmed over the course of history through a certain determination of the humanitas of the human being, implying notions of subjectivity, community, and historicity.

     

    In one sense, it is necessary for disciplines and genres, for philosophy, scientific discourse, and historiography, to reinforce a certain conception of the human being. But while the human being can be treated as a physiological specimen, as a collection of chemicals or as a physically extended body among other bodies, this does not mean that this is all the human being is. Anatomy presupposes a corpse, but are there practices that would allow us to attest to experience as it is shaped in human existence? Would literary narratives provide the model for the narrative structures that constitute our experience? It might seem the narrativist has a great deal to learn from literary criticism. As Lewis and Sandra Hinchman observe, the narrativists “have assimilated the idiom of literary criticism in which narrative has always played a very big part” (xiii). But as David Carr argues, literary critics often depend on a contrast between narration and the real that threatens to make literature merely a practice of representation.5 Narrative, he insists, does not simply attribute a structure to our experience after the fact, but has always already shaped that experience.

     

    Thus, although the great novel might seem to represent the human being in the midst of the world, setting events back into their time and place, into the concreteness one might think the narrativist seeks, there is another kind of literary writing and another kind of literary criticism. Blanchot shows us that there is a drive in a certain literary practice to realize a non-representational work, a thing of pure language, an object that is made of language in the same way that the image on the painter’s canvas is made from colors.6 Moreover, Blanchot also shows that this drive is at work in the most worldly novel: even the novel, he argues, is linked to a certain writing that attests to another kind of narration. The writing he affirms challenges many of the preconceptions about language and the human being that other literary critics (and perhaps other thinkers associated with the narrative turn) maintain.

     

    I will focus in this essay on one of his stagings of the play of writing in the Book that he ironically recasts canonical accounts of self-determination.7 In his retelling of a section of Homer’s Odyssey that opens Le Livre à venir, Blanchot relates a story about the way literature bears witness to an experience of historicity, memory, and community that indicates another way we might relate ourselves to the Book. Homer relates the story of two half-bird and half-woman Sirens who sang so beautifully that they enticed sailors to wreck their ships on the rocky shores of their island. Ulysses wanted to hear their song and, on Circe’s advice, stopped the ears of his crew with wax and had himself lashed to the mast of his ship, bidding them to pay no heed to whatever he said as the ship drew near the Sirens’ island. In “The Sirens’ Song,” Blanchot collapses the figures of Ulysses and Homer into one, imagining that the Odyssey was written by a Ulysses who had, after his long and risky journey, safely returned home. The composite figure Ulysses-Homer stands in for the novelist who merely confirms the conception of the human being that belongs to the Book. The composition of the Odyssey becomes the figure for any act of recounting that confirms the underlying identity of the human being without taking into account an experience that Blanchot links to writing. For Blanchot, the novel can be counterposed with another literary form, the récit.8 The Blanchotian novel is bound by the same covenant that binds our civilization to itself; the Blanchotian récit, however, indicates the call that draws writing out of the Book. As I will explain, the latter is not to be regarded as a separate genre from the novel, but as an event that bestows the possibility of narration even as it is dissimulated in its movement.

     

    I

     

    Zoon logon echon: for the Greeks, it is the ability to talk discursively, to speak, that marks out the human being as the human being.9 But for the human being, language is not a tool but a condition: one speaks not with a language but from it. We inhabit language–or rather language inhabits us. Language is not a tool that would offer itself to be used, but a field that opens through us and opens the world to us, determining what it is possible for us to say and not to say. But it is, for this reason, never the “object” of our awareness. It dissimulates itself, except at those moments when the capacity to express oneself comes to crisis. Language opens like the day itself, granting a world to the human being–but furled in this opening and opening with it is the dim awareness that something has come between the human being and the rest of nature.

     

    As soon as Adam steps onto the scene, Blanchot claims in his retelling of the story of Genesis, everything is born again to the human being whose humanitas resides in his ability to speak. In Blanchot’s words, “God created living things, but man had to annihilate them. Not until then did they take on meaning for him, and he in turn created them out of the death into which they had disappeared” (Work 323). Adam, naming the animals, has first of all negated each of the animals in its particularity. The animal cannot talk discursively; the human being, who is defined by this faculty, is granted thereby a mastery over the world. The world is named and thereby possessed, but this possession, which issues from the very humanitas of the human being as the animal that speaks, depends upon the distance that opens between real and ideal existence: between the thing named and the abstract generality of the name.

     

    In this sense, language might be said to depend on a preliminary annihilation. Death is the condition of possibility of the human being as the animal who speaks. But this means in turn that there can be no return to life before language. As Blanchot writes, “man was condemned not to be able to approach anything or experience anything except through the meaning he had to create” (Fire 323). But this means that the animal that speaks bears an essential relation to negation, to death, since it is only through negation, through death, that language means. Language, in this sense, always alludes to the possibility of this destruction; without it, as he writes, “everything would sink into absurdity and nothingness” (Work 324).

     

    But the power that reaffirms the humanitas of the human being turns on the speaker. The capacity to speak depends on the annihilation of the speaker in the here and now; as Blanchot writes, “I say my name, and it is as though I were chanting my own dirge”; I can only speak by interrupting the order to which I belong as a human being. I say “I” and negate the “I”; the impersonal presence of this word affirms itself in my place (Work 324). There remains only the ideal existence of a word that could exist without me. Language depends upon this trembling enunciation, upon the void that opens even as it appears possible for the human being to speak of everything. This means that the mastery of the human being comes at a price: Adam’s act of naming begins a more general idealization of everything that exists, but it simultaneously encloses the human being within a certain order of being. This enclosure permits the great acts of the literary imagination: the epic, the Bible, the medieval Summa, but finally, as I will show, the novel: books that would say everything. But the mastery over speech presumes a weakness or susceptibility. The human being remains receptive to another experience of language which no longer permits the opening of a field of power and possibility.

     

    Blanchot figures this double experience of language in terms of Ulysses’ encounter with the Sirens. The Odyssey is the story of a homecoming, recounting Ulysses’ long journey home from Troy. Although he saw “many cities of men… and learned their minds” (I.4), Homer tells us, Ulysses was at all times “fighting to save his life and bring his comrades home” (I.6). Although Ulysses appears capable of everything (he is heroic and wily), his adventures are episodes on a journey home, they are contained within the broader story of a return. The Odyssey is a figure for a movement that is ultimately conservative, in which the heterogeneous experience is ultimately determined by the law (nomos) of an underlying homogeneity. In this case, Ulysses can be said to be at home (oikos) insofar as he remains confident in his powers and is not challenged by a heterogeneity that might turn him from himself.

     

    For Blanchot (but also for Levinas10), the Ulysses of The Odyssey can be said to enjoy an economic existence insofar as okio-nomia is understood to refer to the ever-renewed attempt to secure his self-identity. Ulysses’ journey home stands in for the subject for whom everything that exists is opened and unfolded as to a unitary point of convergence, the ego. Like the Ulysses of The Odyssey, the task of the subject is to trace a circular itinerary through what is unknown, experiencing it, undergoing it, to what is known. The reaffirmation of the “I” as the “I” means that I can never encounter anything new–it is as if everything I meet came from me since the heterogeneity of the thing is always and already subordinated to language. There is no possibility of heterogeneity, of anything that could occur that would outstrip its circular journey. It is this self-identification that lies at the root of both the solitary subject and language itself.

     

    Both representation and the determination of narrative are economic notions of this kind. So, too, is the conception of the novel that I indicated. But a certain literary writing attests to an aneconomic experience, an experience of a genuine heterogeneity. It refers to an interruption of the most human capacity of the animal who speaks, that is, the bestowal of meaning, nomination. Everyday language uses the name to identify the thing, idealizing it, taking it into the universal. But this is to lose the thing in its real existence. The living thing and its name are not identical; the word can only encounter the thing as an instance of a universal, as a particular that awaited idealization. The literary writing in question, by contrast, understands that the negation of the word gives the thing a new, ideal existence as a word. As Blanchot puts it, “it observes that the word ‘cat’ is not only the nonexistence of the cat but a nonexistence made word, that is, a completely determined and objective reality” (Work 325). This sort of literary language would become thing-like, transposing the singularity of the thing into language. It realizes that in listening to a single word, one can hear nothingness “struggling and toiling away, it digs tirelessly, doing its utmost to find a way out, nullifying what encloses it–it is infinite disquiet, formless and nameless vigilance” (Work 326). Thus the work of literature realizes something unreal and non-representational, letting non-existence exist as a kind of “primal absence,” not as the sign of absent things but as a thing itself, as an object made of words (Work 72).

     

    In the literary work, language would thus exist in the manner of a thing, as something that has no meaning beyond its own opacity. It would rid language of everything it would name by allowing it to achieve a physicality of its own. Words emerge from the dictionary and from language, drawing attention to their own weight, the presence of what appeared previously to be an absence, the being of what was once nothingness. To write, as Blanchot observes of Mallarmé, “is not to evoke a thing but an absence of thing… words vanish from the scene to make the thing enter, but since this thing is itself no more than an absence, that which is shown in the theater, it is an absence of words and an absence of thing, a simultaneous emptiness, nothing supported by nothing” (Work 49). And yet, words must mean if literature is to be readable. And indeed, the poem, made of language, cannot become a thing. The literary work must allow itself to become a cultural object, available and accessible. Likewise, the literary writer may always become a great writer whose work evidences a mastery of narrative modes, of incident and characterization, who is lauded because his or her work can reflect back the glories of the world. It is this tendency in the literary work that Blanchot captures when he invokes the novel. The work of literature becomes the novel when it fails to become an autonomous thing unto itself. In so doing, it becomes impure and non-absolute because it depends on the world it mirrors: “Willing to represent imaginary lives, a story or a society that it proposes to us as real, it depends on this reality of which it is the reproduction or equivalent”; it is always in collusion with a certain mimetologism (Work 191).11 In this sense, literature hovers at the crossroads of verisimilitude and the creation of an autonomous thing. It is never a pure thing nor a pure representation; it comprises both movements and cannot do without them. Literary language depends on a paradox, on an irresolvable contradiction.

     

    Blanchot figures this contradiction by retelling Ulysses’ encounter with the Sirens, the secret search to join language with the language of the thing, to attend to nothingness digging in the word. One can detect the same insistence that literary language is joined to ordinary language in the claim that the Sirens’ song is neither extraordinary nor inhuman; it is simple and everyday; it possesses an extraordinary power, to be sure, but it is a power that lurks within ordinary singing (“Sirens’” 443). Nevertheless, to be lured by the Sirens is to be attracted by that which is extraordinary in the most human of capacities. It is to discover another voice at the heart of the human one–a song that cannot be possessed by a singer. It is to find out that human singing is ultimately inhuman, that to sing is always to sing “with” the song of the Sirens–to join one’s voice to theirs, but in doing so, to relinquish one’s voice. From the first, the song is polyphonous; but this does not mean it is a duet–to sing, rather, is to be joined by an inhuman voice.

     

    This is why the voice in question dissimulates itself. The ultimate object of literary aspiration is not one of which its author or its reader need be aware. What is “marvelous” about the song of the Sirens is that “it actually existed, it was ordinary and at the same time secret” (“Sirens’” 443). The song was heard, and in such a way that it allowed more discerning hearers to heed a secret strangeness within ordinary singing. It stands in for the literary text, which, like the encounter with the Sirens, belongs to “strange powers,” to “the abyss” (“Sirens’” 443). To hear the abyssal song of the Sirens is to realize that an abyss has opened in every utterance; and that any utterance, even the indexical “I,” is enough to entice those who heard it to disappear into an abyss. But just as the literary writer is unable to realize the impossible “object,” to allow the poem to become a thing, the sailor cannot reach the source of the song.

     

    It is for this reason that the Sirens’ song can never be said to be never actually present. Rather, it only implies the direction of the true sources of the song; the song of the Sirens is “only a song still to come,” a song that would lead its listener toward “that space where the singing would really begin” (“Sirens’” 443). The Sirens seduce because of the remoteness of their song; their song is only the attraction of a song to come. Likewise, the unattainable ideal of the literary “object” is seductive because of its very unattainability. Those sailors, who are led toward the source by the Sirens’ song, steer their ships onto the rocks that surround the Sirens’ isle; finding that in reaching the ostensible source of the song, there is nothing but death, they “disappear.” The negation that the literary author would address implicates the author, who is unable to undertake the task he or she sets himself or herself in the first person. Likewise, the sailors discover in this region that music itself is absent, that the goal is unattainable; there is no attainable literary “object,” no possibility of making the literary work into a thing. From this perspective, the writer is too early because the goal recedes, because the work is unrealizable, because she can never wait long enough. The sailor has always weighed anchor too soon; the source of the song is always infinitely distant; they die broken-hearted because they have failed not once but many times. But the writer is also too late; the goal has been overshot, the writer is originarily unfaithful to his impossible goal.

     

    Ultimately, the search for the “essence” of the song, its source and its wellspring, disappoints. And yet, though the Sirens’ song seems to promise a marvelous beyond to which it can never deliver us, we should not regard it as a lie. The song to come will never make itself present, yet it exists as the “hither side” of essentialization. And the search for the “object” of literature remains an admirable one. Blanchot unfolds this analysis through the example of Ulysses. But his Ulysses is not Homer’s. For Blanchot, Ulysses becomes Homer himself, becomes the writer of his own Odyssey: not only a traveler whose journey secretly figures an authorial itinerary, but a literary author himself, who has set out to write a novel.

     

    II

     

    Now it is true, Blanchot concedes, Ulysses did overcome the Sirens in a certain way. Indeed, he has himself bound to the mast, his wrists and ankles tied, in order to observe them, to pass through what no other human being had endured. He endures the song; his crew, ears plugged, admire his mastery. Ulysses appears all the more impressive for the way his response to the song of Sirens allows him and the sailors he commands to regain a mastery that was challenged or had been lost: the mastery over song itself. Indeed, Ulysses’ apparent courage allows the sailors to regain their grip on the human activity of singing; they are no longer daunted by the inhumanity of the Sirens’ song. Moreover, Ulysses’ actions cause the Sirens, who figure for the lost, sought-after “object” of literature, to understand that the song is nothing special: it is merely a human song that sounds inhuman, and the Sirens are merely animals with the appearance of beautiful women. The Sirens can no longer delude themselves that they bear a privileged relationship with the song they thought was in their power. They recognize themselves in the sailors over whom they once had power, for they are fated to remain as far away from what they seek as the sailors. In an extraordinary turn, this knowledge turns the Sirens into real women; they become human because they belong, with the sailors, on the hither side of the origin they too would seek.12

     

    It would appear, then, that the literary object is, in the end, just a special kind of language, an imitative echo of the song that men have always sung to themselves. The literary work that would strive to be something more than another cultural artifact, more than a novel that would reflect the world back to itself, must be content with this modest role. Just as the Sirens become real women, the unattainable literary object becomes a mere goal among other goals; the literary writer is a human being like other human beings. Indeed, we might even condemn the writer for holding out such a ridiculous dream.

     

    But the story is more complex. Blanchot suggests that although the author might appear to want to strike out and make a thing of words, the literary writer is held back by cowardice. Blanchot condemns Ulysses because he exposes the Sirens’ song for what it is without exposing himself to the risk of seeking its source. The apparent bravery of his self-exposure to the Sirens belies a certain cowardice, for Ulysses will not confront the greater mystery here: that of the relation between human and more-than-human that is at stake in singing itself. While the sailors might believe Ulysses is heroic, Blanchot knows that Ulysses does not want to succumb to the desire that would lead him toward the source of the Song. Ulysses is reluctant to “fall,” wanting to maintain his mastery. He cannot let himself “disappear,” but would endure and save for posterity the experience that is granted to him because of his uncanny “privilege.” The writer conceals a similar reluctance, simultaneously heeding the abyss in every utterance and refusing to heed it, refusing to hear what would cause him to disappear and would overcome his powers. Like Ulysses, who would endure the Sirens’ song without letting himself be seduced by it, the writer merely feigns adventurousness.

     

    However, Ulysses’ cunning ploy to stop the ears of his crew with wax and have himself bound to the mast of his ship cannot preserve him from the Sirens. The novelist, in the same way, cannot withhold himself from the effects of the language he employs. Unbeknownst to Ulysses, and, indeed, unbeknownst to the sailors who watch him grimace in ecstasy, he does indeed succumb to the enchantment of the Sirens. Ulysses is not free of the Sirens; his technical mastery does not prevent them from enticing him into the other voyage which is, he explains, the voyage of the récit–of a song that has been recounted and, for this reason, is made to seem harmless, “an ode which has turned into an episode” (“Sirens’” 445). Ulysses’ ruses do not prevent his “fall.” Although it appears that Ulysses emerges from his encounter with the Sirens unscathed, returning to Ithaca to reclaim his wife, his son, and his domestic hearth, he drowns just as others have fallen before him. Ulysses is ensorcelled by the Sirens and “dies”; he has embarked on another voyage.

     

    Likewise, the literary writer appears able to navigate successfully through the process of literary creation and is able to accomplish the literary work. Readers admire the fact that books are produced, that literature remains important, reading, perhaps, the biography of the writer who wrote the novels on their shelves, or of the vicissitudes of their composition. This is the novelist who has exhibited a mastery of language and whose language, upon closer examination, reveals what is extraordinary about all language. But the novelist is the virtuoso who re-invents our world and enriches our language. However, the novelist, unbeknownst to himself or herself, reveals a caesura at the heart of the process of literary creativity that is the condition of the possibility of literature. Blanchot writes of an experience whose inscription in the novel escapes author and reader, but that nevertheless makes the novel possible. He writes of a secret struggle at the heart of Ulysses’ encounter with the Sirens that is, he claims, the very struggle that marks the birth of the novel.

     

    How might one explain this “other” voyage? Now Blanchot is not on the trail of a secret intention that, beneath the conscious will of the novelist, would lead the commentator toward a reserve that remains undiscovered by literary critics or psychologists. As he writes, “No one can sail away with the deliberate intention of reaching the Isle of Capri”; the other voyage is marked by “silence, discretion, forgetfulness” (“Sirens’” 445-6). It cannot be undertaken as just another task to be accomplished. Silence, discretion, and forgetfulness dissimulate the voyage from the narrative of the novel–this is why, indeed, the author does not know of the fascination that rules over what he takes to be “his” creation.

     

    Yes, Ulysses is a cowardly figure who seeks to preserve himself against his disappearance, but he really does “fall” or “disappear” nonetheless; the encounter with the Sirens overcomes his mastery. Although we can imagine Ulysses regaling Penelope and Telemachus with stories of his exploits, there is one tale he would be unable to recount. If Ulysses were to begin one day on a book of reminiscences, if he were, as Blanchot suggests, to become Homer himself and tell the story of his exploits by narrating the first story, an entire dimension of the encounter with the Sirens would hold itself in reserve. But it is this encounter with the Sirens that allows the author to assume the power to write. Ulysses-Homer could not begin his book without having undertaken the journey as Ulysses.

     

    It follows that for every Homer, every novelist, there is, for Blanchot, always and already a drowned Ulysses. The novelist will have already undertaken an Odyssey, albeit one whose memory conceals itself from him. In order to write an account of his adventures, Ulysses-Homer will draw on his memories of the real journey; but he will also, unbeknownst to him, have undertaken his encounter with the Sirens in another dimension. In asking us to entertain the notion that Ulysses and Homer were one and the same person, Blanchot separates out the moments of the composition of the novel in accordance with the two versions of the story of Ulysses’ encounter that he recounts.

     

    One might imagine Ulysses-Homer sitting down in peace to begin his memoirs. Telemachus and Penelope are close by; he writes under the protection of his home, his Kingdom, and is confident in the powers that accrue to him as a novelist. But even as he picks up his pen to write, Ulysses-Homer undergoes a peculiar transformation: this novelist is no longer the real Ulysses who cleverly defeated the Sirens, but the “other” Ulysses, one who is stirred by the dream that he could follow the song to its source. This Ulysses sets himself the impossible goal of laying bare the power of song itself, and as such, must be defeated in this aim, which demands, as its toll, that he, Ulysses, disappear as Ulysses. Likewise, no novelist as a novelist can endure this disappearance. The source of writing does not reveal itself to him. In refusing to allow itself to be measured by the wiliness and native cunning of Ulysses, the source envelops Ulysses himself, drowning him as it drowned the Sirens when they became real women. The Odyssey–and this name stands in for any novel–is the tombstone not only of the Sirens, but of Ulysses the sea-captain, the adventurer. The fact that the real Ulysses survived his encounter with the Sirens does not mean that the other Ulysses can secure his grasp upon the source, the power of writing itself. That power is denied him because he can never reach it as Ulysses. He falls, he must fall (and he even wants to fall) because he cannot seize upon that which he would seek.

     

    There is thus another voice and another order of the event; there is a Ulysses who is the shadow of the first who does not return to Ithaca, completing the circle and thereafter settling down to write his memoirs. The novel that Ulysses-Homer writes likewise depends upon his drowned double, who lies at the bottom of the ocean. The human time in which Ulysses-Homer sets himself the task of writing the novel called The Odyssey and, indeed, accomplishes it, depends upon the other time–the inordinate instant when he embarks on another journey. The birth of the novel cannot be understood without reference to the aneconomic movement of Ulysses. The psychologist of creativity will never grasp the relationship between the power of creativity and the other voyage to the end of the possible. Nor can the philosopher broach the question of the temporality of time without taking this inordinate instant into account. It is only the critical commentator who could attend to the hidden vicissitudes of the birth of the novel, who is privy to the instant that has secretly inscribed itself in the novel. Blanchot tells us that the novel tells another tale, one unbeknownst to its teller and to an entire industry of cultural reception. I will try to make sense of his claim that the composition of the novel implies a récit, with reference to Breton’s Nadja.

     

    III

     

    The récit, a history of French literature might tell us, names a literary form of which Breton’s Nadja, Duras’s The Malady of Death, and Blanchot’s own Death Sentence and When the Time Comes are examples: short, novella- or novelette-length fictions that are focused around some central occurrence. As Blanchot writes in “The Sirens’ Song,” although “the récit seems to fulfill its ordinary vocation as a narrative,” it nevertheless bears upon “one single episode” in a way that does not strive to narrate “what is believable and familiar” in the manner of the novelist (446).

     

    In Breton’s récit, this episode is the series of meetings with the young woman who bears its name. In one sense, Breton is aware of the singularity of the récit. He insistently rejects conventional genres; Nadja, unlike the novel, is not keen to pass for fiction. It does not draw attention to its artifice, keen to present itself as a form of entertainment, as a diverting series of episodes. Breton’s récit narrates an encounter that is extraordinary not only because the young women its narrator meets is exceptional but also because this encounter transforms the world. For Clark, Nadja “enact[s] an unprecedented mode of writing whose provenance is a new experience of the streets as a space of inspiration and mediation to the unknown” (213). As Clark observes, it is neither simply a fictional work nor an autobiography; it does not relate anecdotes from afar, but indicates its own relation to the events: “the actual writing of the text is affirmed as part of the writer’s own exploration of the events he is living” (214). It does not merely imitate Breton’s experience but is part of the articulation of an event that escapes the measure of the experiencing “I.” The very narration of the encounter with Nadja transgresses the ordinary conceptions of the ego, consciousness, the will, and freedom. Breton is not, like the Blanchotian novelist, the creator-God who freely and sovereignly sustains his creation–a God for whom anything is possible in the field of his creation. His récit would interrupt both the assurance of the novelist who creates and preserves a world and also the assurance of the reader, for whom the world the novel imitates is the same world he or she inhabits.

     

    Breton’s récit narrates an extraordinary event; but, for Blanchot, it also names the unattainable “object” of literary fascination, the source of the Sirens’ song. He insists that the récit does not recall or re-stage the event, but brings it about:

     

    The récit is not the narration of an event, but that event itself, the approach to the place where that event is made to happen [le lieu où celui-ci est appélé à s’produire]–an event which is yet to come and through whose power of attraction the tale can hope to come into being, too. (“Sirens’” 447)

     

    How should we understand this apparently self-contradictory claim? It might appear that Breton seeks to write about his encounter with Nadja, but his récit hides another and more fundamental encounter, one that is the condition of possibility of any narration. The event that Breton would narrate is joined in his récit by another narration and another event: that of the interruption of his capacities as an author, the figure for which, in Blanchot, is the song of the Sirens. Breton, in short, has forgotten what he set out to remember; he has lost what he sought to find.

     

    How might one understand this claim? To recall: the sailors were too impatient and dropped anchor because they thought they had reached what they sought. But the only way to “find” the source of song was, Blanchot said, to undergo an involuntary “disappearance.” Just as it is impossible to endure this disappearance in “human” or ordinate time, it would also be impossible for anyone or anything, the récit included, to endure the event. Ulysses is condemned only to approach the event until he “disappears.” Likewise, the author of a récit can do no more than approach until he too “disappears.” The very notion of a “patient” approach to the source of the song of the Sirens is that of a relinquishment of will; the author cannot simply choose to become “patient,” to “disappear,” or to “fall,” but passively undergoes “disappearance,” and in so doing is caught up in what happens as the récit.

     

    In writing of Nadja, in attempting to re-experience his encounter with her at what appears to be one remove from the “real” event, Breton the writer undergoes a “disappearance.” Is this what Breton understands when he asks, in the last lines of his book, “Who goes here? Is it you, Nadja? … Is it only me? Is it myself?” (144). These lines, responding like an echo to the first words of Nadja, “Who am I?” mean for Blanchot “that the whole narrative is but the redoubling of the same question maintained in its spectral difference” (Infinite 420). Both questions put the authorial identity under question. Was it Breton who wrote Nadja, or did he vacate his position, allowing the encounter with Nadja to have, as it were, written itself?

     

    In writing of Nadja, thereby granting her an ideal existence, Breton allows us to hear nothingness digging tirelessly in the name that is the name of his book. But who, then, is Breton the writer? For Blanchot, Breton’s récit testifies in an extraordinary way to the encounter with the Sirens that redoubles his enigmatic encounter with Nadja. True, Breton met Nadja and was intrigued by her. He set out to write a book without genre, a work that related this encounter and this fascination. But in writing Nadja, in recasting his adventure on an ideal plane, apparently subordinating words and sentences in order to tell his tale, Breton removes himself yet further from her. Writing of Nadja, he loses her anew and has to make do with a papery Nadja, made of words. But the redoubled loss of Nadja demands another loss, for Breton yields himself up as a writer, that is, as the one who freely, sovereignly, would sign his name to the book that is ostensibly his. Breton does not do so voluntarily, nor, afterwards, is it given to him to remember, at least in a straightforward and unambiguous way, the vicissitudes of literary creation. Nevertheless, the attempt to write about a marvelous moment itself requires his “disappearance” as an author. It is as if the act of narrating set a trap for him. To take up writing, to narrate an encounter, is to give oneself up as a lure to the trap that threatens to snap shut. That the author escapes it, recovering in order to finish a work, is not a tribute to his ingenuity. To be sure, Breton finishes Nadja, but his narrative depends upon the other journey he was compelled to undertake as soon as he took up his pen. He is lost, as Blanchot writes, “in a preliminary Narrative,” in an event that begins when he starts to write (Infinite 414).

     

    Homer’s Odyssey traces the journey of Ulysses to his homeland, but it does not bear upon those intermittences and discontinuities that would expose the economy of the journey to a troubling event. The Ulysses of the novel is always safe; even when he risks himself, he does so assured of his survival. He is always the man who undergoes adventures without risking a profound self-alteration: his ruses allow him to accomplish deeds that appear brilliant, but are actually hollow. This Ulysses seems to have mastered the song itself, to have mastered this power and to be able to recall the vicissitudes of his encounter at leisure, writing safely beside Penelope and Telemachus. But the watery death of the other Ulysses, for whom The Odyssey is a tomb, is testament to the fact that the contrivance of Ulysses could never allow him to endure what he cannot endure in the first person.

     

    The novelist believes, like Ulysses-Homer, that he is in command of that which he would narrate, but Blanchot argues otherwise. He is, on Blanchot’s account, like the wily Ulysses; he can only become a novelist by refusing to relinquish himself to the call that solicits him. If he is able to write books, it is only because he is cut off from the original source of his “inspiration” by his own ruses and machinations. But his work attests to an inhuman effort to heed what the novelist cannot endure: another narration, a récit. The Blanchotian récit marks the memory of the experience that the novel leaves behind in order to become a novel. The struggle at the birth of the novel is therefore the struggle to do away with the event to which the récit bears witness, that is, to leave the “dead” or “disappeared” Ulysses in the water, to abandon death in favor of the deathless life of the whole, discontinuity in favor of absence, the absence of work for the work that gathers everything together. In leaving behind the récit, the novel also leaves the event itself behind. The novel is, for all its riches, only a narration of that which it has already lost. Yes, it dazzles; the novel reproduces the richness and detail of the world. The Blanchotian novelist dreams of Unity, where discontinuity would be merely a sign of the failure of the understanding, a mark of our finitude. In this way, the novel exerts, in advance, a grasp of the whole, of the time and space in which everything unfolds. The Blanchotian novel does not accomplish an absolute invention, creating something ungoverned by pre-existing rules. But in another sense, it is the Blanchotian récit that marks itself into the opening of the novel as the novel is marked as an inventive event. It is only the critical commentator who can attend to the happening of an event that itself reinvents the notion of invention and the inventor, for it no longer refers to the contrivance of an ingenious person. The novelty of this event is not that of a new art, instrument, or process. The invention that the récit “is” (beyond the intentions of the author of the novel) happens each time singularly and without precedent, cutting across what offers itself too readily to appropriation, identification, and subjectivation.

     

    Blanchot’s account of the “other” voyage of Ulysses stages the joining of the inhuman voice of the récit to that of the novelist. The journey of this Ulysses is not circular. The primordial relation through which he would constitute himself as a self-centered and hedonistic subject is interrupted by a call that contests his self-realization. The closed circuit of his interiority is opened; Ulysses no longer experiences himself as an “I can” who can pass unhindered through the finite order of being. The song of the Sirens is unintegratably foreign. Ulysses can only give himself over in response to this call and, thus summoned, is prevented from recoiling or turning back upon himself. The infinite resistance of the song to Ulysses’ powers cannot be understood in terms of a clash of contrary wills, because Ulysses is precisely no longer “there.” Ulysses cannot exist with, or alongside, the song. Ulysses’ “disappearance” means that he is henceforward unable to unfold his potentialities in a realm in which willed action is possible. No higher synthesis will allow him to mediate the song of the Sirens and integrate it into his own endeavors. Rather, he is co-constituted by the call; his selfhood is simultaneously economic and aneconomic. He is defined by the wiliness and the cleverness that attest to the auto-affirmative strength and vitality that permit his boundless curiosity; but he is also governed by a lethal susceptibility to the call of the Sirens. At once, Ulysses is driven toward what satisfies the circular demand that would permit his economic return to himself and toward the aneconomic “experience” that denies this return. It is precisely this irresolvable play of economy and aneconomy that allows Ulysses to stand in for both the writer of the novel and the récit. It is this play that determines the relationship between novel and récit, preventing their resolution into a higher synthesis, that is, the incorporation of the récit as an episode in a novel. But the récit does not name a literary genre that is separable from the novel, just as the Blanchotian event would involve beings not separable from a certain order of civilization. Novel and récit are moments of the same movement of invention. The dissension between novel and récit in Blanchot’s writings can be found in any act. As such, all synthesizing, economic movements are provisional.

     

    One can read “The Sirens’ Song” in terms of a struggle in a certain narrative recounting, concluding that the relationship between novel and récit bears upon a deeper struggle that has shaped our civilization, since the kind of narrative recounting one discovers in the novel is the sort of story–the story of stories, the narration that gathers up all other stories as such–that Western civilization has told to itself. There is no doubt that the narratorial voice of the novel is that of the Ulyssean subject who would recount episodes in a certain sequence. But the possibility of narration is predicated upon a recollection that is already determined by a certain conception of time. “The Sirens’ Song” bears upon the condition of possibility of narration.

     

    What is it that permits this incredible recollection of an event that is said to escape all memory? How does Blanchot explain the relationship he describes between the “other” voyage, in which Ulysses drowns and is lost, and the voyage of the novel, in which this drowned Ulysses is forgotten and the living Ulysses–the one who, miraculously, survives his own death (understood as his disappearance qua Ulysses)–sails back to his homeland, to his wife and his son, to the okios, the family hearth?

     

    In order to address this question (the way in which I choose to present the question of the condition of possibility in Blanchot’s theoretical writings in general), I will supplement Blanchot’s story of the two voyages of Ulysses with my own story of a third Ulysses. This is the Ulysses-Blanchot who has followed the others and watched them rise from the bottom of the sea, and, furthermore, who still remembers his fall (and the fall of the Sirens). This Ulysses-Blanchot is the writer of the story at the beginning of Le Livre à Venir.

     

    IV

     

    In Blanchot’s retelling of the encounter with the Sirens, The Odyssey becomes a memoir: it is the story Ulysses tells of his return, of the completion of the circle. Ulysses not only undergoes his encounter with the Sirens, but he relates this encounter himself. Nothing happens to him that he cannot relate: his is the memory that can recall everything, lifting it out of oblivion and recounting it in turn. Ulysses becomes Homer, the virtuoso of memory, the adventurer who, after his adventures, can tell his own story to entertain others. Ulysses-Homer writes, in the narratorial voice, of his triumph and his return.

     

    Yes, Ulysses returns to his family, to his kingdom, and sets right all wrongs. But the Ulysses who returns to Ithaca, to the family hearth, to settle down and write, is followed by another Ulysses. Blanchot, in the guise of a sea-traveler, has followed Ulysses on both his voyages, remembering what Ulysses does not and disclosing this gap in Ulysses-Homer’s memory in “The Sirens’ Song.” Who would recognize this worn and threadbare Ulysses who returns to his home in order to remember what outstrips the memory of his homeland? And yet it is this other, hypermnestic “memory” that will allow him to write of the journey at the heart of the novel and the récit. This Ulysses, ineluctably marked by death, has been vouchsafed a secret that cost him his intimate relationship with his and any homeland, rendering his Odyssey infinite. This Blanchotian Ulysses drowns; and at the same time, he is able to bring us, his readers, tidings of the voyages that the literary writer has undertaken.

     

    It is this Blanchotian Ulysses who waits at the elbow of the Ulysses-Homer, composer of The Odyssey. This Blanchotian Ulysses remembers the other story, the exile or the wandering of Ulysses. As the critical commentator who follows Ulysses to lose and then rediscover him, Blanchot triumphs because he alone can retrace this journey. Blanchot is capable of remembering what Ulysses forgets; moreover, since he, too, has written récits and novels, he can also remember what he had to forget as a literary author. His is the power to bear witness to the extraordinary happening of the récit but, as such, is a mastery of that which cannot be mastered–a tale of an event which will not allow itself to be recounted.

     

    How are we to understand the adventures of this Blanchotian Ulysses? Blanchot is not the adept who has had an experience and would teach others about it; he does not keep a secret. Rather, he remains vigilant, on the look-out, waiting for the chance for his writing to be seized by an unknown current. He relinquishes his grip and allows his mastery to be taken from him, but this is what allows him to escape the trap, to recover himself from the preliminary récit. Blanchot is thus open to what the author of Nadja is not. He writes, with “The Sirens’ Song,” a récit of the récit, a text dense with beginnings, a text that belongs alongside every literary-critical essay he has written and every work of literature. This is why his writing is able to invent, why it says the true, why the accomplishment it would realize is much more decisive than the production of an aesthetics. For the récit of the récit would reveal the historicity of history in the shining out of events like the light that sparkles up from waves of water. Beginning and rebeginning, flashing up and into nothing, it is of the aleatory, of the event, of the instant without program and without project of which Blanchot would write. He shows us that Ithaca is traversed by waves, that there is no place of safety to which Ulysses, each of us, any of us, might return.

    Notes

     

    1. Lewis and Sandra Hinchman’s edited collection Memory, Identity, Community makes a convincing case for such a turn, showing how the human sciences are moving toward models of explanation of human behavior drawing on narrative models rather than nomological models.

     

    2. Carr’s Time, Narrative, and History presents a powerful account of narrative as the temporal structure of human existence.

     

    3. As Lewis and Sandra Hinchman argue, “a community’s stories offer members a set of canonical symbols, plots, and characters through which they can interpret reality and negotiate–or even create–their world. The culture ‘speaks to itself’ as members replicate these canonical forms in their own lives” (235). Likewise, Alistair Macintyre and Charles Taylor have argued that our understanding of the world as individuals depends upon an intelligibility granted by communal life.

     

    4. As Georges Van Den Abbeele reminds us, “to the left’s investment in ‘community activism’ as a strategic retreat designed to reconstruct and build anew a base of popular support in the wake of severe electoral defeats by the right in England and the United States, corresponds the Thatcherite and Reaganite discourse on the return of juridical and managerial responsibilities to the level of ‘local communities,’ a cynical euphemism for the dismantling of the welfare state at the hands of so-called private enterprise” (xi). The essays in the volume he introduces provide a valuable attempt from various perspectives to reinvest community with a new sense.

     

    5. For example, he shows us how Kermode’s The Sense of an Ending depends on the separability of the sense of the real and reality itself that Carr convincingly overturns (9). Likewise, he claims that Barthes demarcates art and life, depending once again on a model of representation as the imposition of a structure on the “real” world (9).

     

    6. As Blanchot shows in The Work of Fire, it is not in order to represent the world that Lautréamont gave The Chants of Maldoror the body of a monumental thing, always pushing it toward impenetrability despite the coherence and the eloquence of his language. Maldoror strives to suffice to itself, to exist as a monad of words that reflects nothing but words. The sonority and rhythmic mobility of the poem is a sign of the attempt to render itself sovereign, to conquer its own space, literature’s space, and remain there. Literature, as Blanchot argues in dozens of essays, attends to an experience of language itself that escapes all kinds of narrativization (see Work 162-175).

     

    7. See the retelling of Orpheus’ descent into Hades to rescue Eurydice in The Space of Literature (171-176) and the meetings between Theseus and the Sphinx in The Infinite Conversation (17-20) and Narcissus and Eurydice in The Writing of the Disaster (125-128). For a commentary on “Orpheus’s Gaze,” see my “The Paradoxes of Fidelity.” For a commentary on the passages on Theseus and the Sphinx, see my “The Sphinx’s Gaze.”

     

    8. Timothy Clark has some marvellous pages on Blanchot’s notion of the récit in Derrida, Heidegger, Blanchot. Derrida has written at length on Blanchot’s notion of the récit in Parages.

     

    9. Logos, as Heidegger remarks, means more than language simply understood as a collection of words: “it means the fundamental faculty of being able to talk discursively, and, accordingly, to speak” (305). The human being can use language in a way the animal cannot since, according to Heidegger, “the animal lacks the ability to apprehend as a being whatever it is open for” (306). It is the way in which the human being comports itself to beings that separates it from human beings.

     

    10. In Totality and Infinity, Levinas argues that we are all–all of us, philosophers and non-philosophers–mediators or relays of a certain totality whether we assume, disavow, or transform its movement. Today, in the West, Levinas asks us to renew philosophy and with it to renew our civilization in response to a call that has gone unheard–the call of infinity, the infinite. This call resounds within the totality itself: we hear it, whether we know it or not–whether we respond to it or deny its unbridled force. Levinas asks us to overturn the “egology” or “economics” upon which what he calls totality is predicated by hearkening to this call. Ulysses, the voyager of Homer’s Odyssey, is the authentic figure of this egology; his travels are, in turn, a perfect figure for an economic return upon the ego. As Levinas remarks: “the itinerary of philosophy remains that of Ulysses, whose adventure in the world was only a return to his native island–a complacency in the Same, an unrecognition of the Other (48). See, for an examination of the relationship between Blanchot and Levinas, my “The Sphinx’s Gaze” and William Large’s “Impersonal Existence.”

     

    11. On the other hand, there are authors for whom the novel must attain the status of an object sufficient unto itself. Can Sarraute’s Tropisms or Beckett’s The Unnameable be regarded as novels? It would be here that the novel unravels itself or approaches the condition of what Blanchot might call the “poem-thing.” One might admit that there are novels that are non-representational (Blanchot’s own Thomas the Obscure would be an example, or indeed The Chants of Maldoror [see note 6 above]), but the roman of “The Sirens’ Song” refers to the hegemonic notion of the novel. Furthermore, the novel cannot separate itself from the practice Blanchot calls writing. As I will make clear, roman and récit are bound up with one another in a complex economy.

     

    12. Almost as soon as the Sirens become women, Blanchot tells us, they die. But Blanchot tells us nothing of the fabulous animals who are turned into women and undergo their own deaths (and perhaps their own resurrection). He writes of Ulysses’ death and resurrection, but Blanchot does not consider the fate of the Sirens after their deaths. Does he, in this silence, speak for them, and, thereby in the place of the women who, when their secret is revealed, die at the bottom of the ocean? In a sense, they have died before they have even begun–before they have been given the chance to begin, before any such chance has been envisaged to explore the source of the song that resounds in the speech they would speak as human women. Crucially, the Sirens die as soon as they become human women, preventing them from uprooting themselves, journeying according to other imperatives and exploring their own form of existence. Deprived of autonomy, determination, or identity, these dead women are more comforting than women who are still alive because they can serve as the screen without depth onto which Ulysses-Blanchot can project his fantasies. Does he exclude the possibility of their return or resurrection, of the story that they might tell about their adventure or their death? “The Sirens’ Song” is, perhaps, more complex than this reading would allow since Ulysses, Blanchot tells us, recognizes himself in the Sirens just as the Sirens recognize themselves in the sailors. The non-human females become human and Ulysses recognizes that he, too is in some sense non- or inhuman: he, too, is female or animal. Ulysses, part-Siren, is claimed by the feminine in a way that he does not realize, just as the Sirens are implicated in the masculine. There is a redistribution of the terms femininity and masculinity beyond a simple polarization of gender here. The scene of tutelage I invoked could be understood in terms of a hetero-affection, an affection that interrupts the economy of the masculine just as it disrupts the economy of the feminine. In this sense, “The Sirens’ Song” would attest to a certain feminization of the masculine that has always and already occurred–a feminization that does not happen from outside the masculine but is co-implicated with it, collaborating with and contaminating any notion of a pure masculinity–and, likewise, to a masculinization of the feminine that would co-determine and co-constitute what in the classical sense is taken to be the rigid opposite of masculinity. For a feminist interpretation of Blanchot’s writings, see Cixous’s Readings.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Beckett, Samuel. Trilogy: Molloy, Malone Dies, The Unnameable. London: Calder Publications, 1995.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. Le Livre a Venir. Paris: Gallimard, 1959.
    • —. The Infinite Conversation. Trans. Susan Hanson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • —. “The Sirens’ Song.” Trans. Lydia Davis. The Station Hill Blanchot Reader. New York: Station Hill, 1998. 443-450.
    • —. The Space of Literature. Trans. Ann Smock. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1982.
    • —. Thomas the Obscure. Trans. Robert Lamberton. New York: D. Lewis, 1973.
    • —. The Work of Fire. Trans. Charlotte Mandell. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • —. The Writing of the Disaster. Trans. Ann Smock. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1986.
    • Breton, André. Nadja. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Grove, 1960.
    • Carr, David. Time, Narrative, and History. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 1986.
    • Cixous, Hélène. Readings: The Poetics of Blanchot, Joyce, Kafka, Kleist, Lispector, and Tsvetayeva. Trans. Verena Conley. New York: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1992.
    • Clark, Timothy. Derrida, Heidegger, Blanchot: Sources of Derrida’s Notion and Practice of Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992.
    • —. The Theory of Inspiration: Composition as a Crisis of Subjectivity in Romantic and post-Romantic Writing. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1997.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Parages. Paris: Galilée, 1986.
    • —. The Politics of Friendship. Trans. George Collins. London: Verso, 1997.
    • Gill, Carolyn Bailey, ed. Maurice Blanchot. The Demand of Writing. London: Routledge, 1996.
    • Heidegger, Martin. The Fundamental Concepts of Metaphysics, World, Finitude, Solitude. Trans. William McNeill and Nicholas Walker. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 1995.
    • Hinchman, Lewis and Sandra, eds. Memory, Identity, Community: The Idea of Narrative in the Human Sciences. New York: State U of New York P, 1997.
    • Homer. Odyssey. Trans. Robert Fagles. London and NY: Penguin, 1996.
    • Iyer, Lars. “The Birth of Philosophy in Poetry: Blanchot, Char, Heraclitus.” Janus Head, Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies in Continental Philosophy, Literature, Phenomenological Psychology and the Arts 4. 2 (2001): 358-383.
    • —. “Cave Paintings and Wall Writings. Blanchot’s Signature.” Angelaki, Journal of the Theoretical Humanities 6.3 (2001): 31-43.
    • —. “The Impossibility of Loving: Blanchot, Sexual Difference, Community.” Cultural Values (forthcoming).
    • —. “The Paradoxes of Fidelity: Blanchot, Philosophy and Critical Commentary.” Symposium, Journal of the Canadian Society for Hermeneutics and Postmodern Thought 4. 2 (2000): 189-208.
    • —. “The Sphinx’s Gaze. Art, Friendship and the Philosophical in Blanchot and Levinas.” Southern Journal of Philosophy 39. 2 (2001): 189-206.
    • —. “The Temple of Night. Reflections on the Origin of the Work of Art in Blanchot and Heidegger.” Asociación de Estudios Filosóficos. Revista de Filosofma (forthcoming).
    • Large, Will. “Impersonal Existence: A Conceptual Genealogy of the There Is from Heidegger to Blanchot and Levinas.” Angelaki, Journal of the Theoretical Humanities 7.3 (forthcoming).
    • Lautréamont. Maldoror and Poems. Trans. Paul Knight. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1988.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Basic Philosophical Writings. Ed. and trans. Adriaan Peperzaak et. al. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 1996.
    • —. Totality and Infinity. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1984
    • Macintyre, Alistair. After Virtue. Notre Dame: U of Notre Dame P, 1981.
    • Miami Theory Collective, eds. Community at Loose Ends. U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Inoperative Community. Trans. Peter Connor et. al. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Sarraute, Nathalie. Tropisms. London: John Calder, 1964.
    • Singer, Linda. “Recalling a Community at Loose Ends.” Community at Loose Ends. 121-30.
    • Taylor, Charles. Sources of the Self. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1989.
    • Van Den Abbeele, Georges. Introduction. Community at Loose Ends. ix-xxvi.

     

  • Benjamin in Bombay? An Extrapolation

    Rajeev S. Patke

    Department of English Language and Literature
    National University of Singapore
    ellpatke@nus.edu.sg

     

    "I searched around those ruins in vain and all I found was a face engraved on a potsherd and a fragment of a frieze. That is what my poems will be in a thousand years--shards, fragments, the detritus of a world buried for all eternity. What remains of a city is the detached gaze with which a half-drunk poet looked at it."

     

    — Amin Maalouf, Samarkhand

    The Profane Aura of the City

     

    This essay brings together two seemingly unrelated bodies of writing: Walter Benjamin’s work on the cities of European modernity, and literary discourse emanating from the Indian metropolis of Bombay treated as an instance of Asia’s post-colonial induction into modernity. These apparently unrelated discourses are brought together with three aims in mind: first, to show the usefulness of Benjamin in recognizing affinities between geographically diverse manifestations of metropolitan experience; second, to suggest reasons why such affinities and resemblances should be seen as other than random coincidence (in other words, to show that they bespeak the divergent developments of identical processes); and third, to identify some of the ways in which an interaction between these two types of discourse invites a revaluation of both.

     

    Benjamin analyzed the effects of commodification on urban culture and consciousness within the confines of a Europe that still retained its colonial empires. In teasing out the relation between the materialism of culture and the culture of materialism, his work continues to offer a suggestive critique of the nexus between societal modernity and urbanism. Benjamin’s interests may have been confined to Europe, but the processes he studied became asymmetrically global, especially after the “new” nations of Asia had made their urban centers the focus for the belated pursuit of a modernity denied them by colonialism. This asymmetry makes it possible to expand upon his work in Asian contexts shaped first by European colonialism and then by local nationalisms inspired by the Enlightenment rationality that accompanied colonialism. While Benjaminian lenses bring aspects of metropolitan Asian cultures into focus, these cultures have undergone belated metamorphoses from the colonial towards a kind of postmodern modernity for which there are no adequate terms of reference in Benjamin. In that sense, the European lenses he provides require an adjustment of focal length, and an immersion of Benjaminian discourse in the writing from the vastly different world of an Asian metropolis like Bombay provides a partial correction of his inadvertant Eurocentrism. In the pursuit of its triple aim, this essay will proceed through a series of thematic elaborations in which successive aspects of Benjamin’s approach to the culture of cities will be refracted through literary writing from and about Bombay.

     

    The City as Palimpsest

     

    The first such constellation involves the metaphor of the city as text: a text from and about Bombay, which I here juxtapose with Benjamin’s own work on cities as composite texts. In Midnight’s Children, Salman Rushdie invokes Bombay as an originary island transformed over three centuries, by the marriage of imperialism and capitalism, into today’s whirlpool of over twelve million. Once it was a sleepy fishing-village, where people worshipped a local deity called Mumba-bai; the Portuguese, who loved its harbour, named it Bom Bahia (Dwivedi 8). The city is thus a layered site excavated in language through the force of collective memory. “Bombay” becomes one among many names for the movement of peoples, commodities, exchanges, conflicts, aspirations, and values through time.

     

    Benjamin not only read cities as if they were texts, he also collected texts as if they were cities he had visited–layered and seemingly random accretions burdened with the possibility of their own erasure. His reading of cities, like his citing of texts, is overshadowed by a presentiment of ruins. He was born in Berlin but became infatuated with Paris, where he read Baudelaire, translated Proust, welcomed the Surrealists from a distance, and concocted an urban mythology out of walking the streets, alone among crowds. The excited apprehension of his gaze consumed “the occult world of business and traders” (Selected II 619) with a voluptuousness of intent that had to keep reminding itself not to be melancholic that we live in a time indemnified for humanity by a future married to technology. His travels east, however, only took him as far as Moscow, where he spent two months in the winter of 1926-27. He concluded that “a new optics is the most undoubted gain from a stay in Moscow” (Selected II 22).

     

    For Benjamin, the city becomes a performative text whenever we realize our experience of it in and as language: “language has unmistakably made plain that memory is not an instrument for exploring the past, but rather a medium” (Selected II 576). The city circumscribes a series of fragmentary impressions that resist totalization, and are interpreted by memory as collage, in which “He who has once begun to open the fan of memory never comes to the end of its segments” (Selected II 597). Benjamin can name them only through metaphor, as the veil, the corridor, the passageway, the maze, and the labyrinth. Their cognitive function is subsidized by the visual metaphor of the gaze. To the gaze, experience is an exteriority whose meaning depends on whether objects return, or “withstand,” the gaze (Reflections 144). This peculiar idea recurs throughout Benjamin’s writings. In it, the gaze renders the city purely in terms of space, in which the materiality of objects is always experienced as an aspect of visual experience. The commodification of objects also gets mediated in space. Even persons are liable to get assimilated as objects in space. Sometimes they disappear altogether, as when Benjamin cannot remember anything about the aunt who used to live with his grandmother, but “a good deal about the room that she occupied in her mother’s apartment” (Selected II 621). Objects and persons get constellated through their interactions within the magnetic field of space, which tells us “what kind of regimen cities keep over the imagination, and why the city …indemnifies itself in memory, and why the veil it has covertly woven out of our lives shows images of people less often than those of the sites of our encounters with others or ourselves” (Selected II 614).

     

    The City as Rune

     

    The Asian city is a text that can be read in Benjaminian terms. It presents an inscrutable aspect which resonates with Benjamin’s treatment of urban experience as rune or hieroglyph. As space, a city is emblematic; in time, it is an allegory (Origins 176). One way of recognizing how the city transmutes time into space is to consider the consequences of metropolitan transport systems as they pull and drag traffic through the packed overground and underground densities of civic space. Benjamin elaborates on an observation made by Georg Simmel, that the city creates a new kind of uneasiness because the experience typical of public transport systems is that they split the visual field from the auditory field. People are constantly placed “in a position of having to look at one another for long minutes or even hours without speaking to one another” (Baudelaire 38). In Bombay this experience is aggravated by the city’s elongated geography and the arterial role played by local trains that ferry a workforce of several millions between home and the workplace every day. Life becomes a piecing together, and what is pieced together by memory in such situations are moments measured as space, because while “autobiography has to do with time, with sequence and what makes up the continuous flow of life,…here, I am talking of space, of moments and discontinuities” (Selected II 612).

     

    Figure 1: Waiting for a Train in Bombay
    Copyright © Mumbai Central.

     

    The Asian experience of the urban affirms a second Benjaminian recognition of discontinuity regarding the names we attach to civic spaces. Political exigencies bring about frequent changes of name that might leave a place unchanged, but unsettle associations and dislocate memory. This is true of every city, and never more true than of Bombay–now called Mumbai. Here are two members of the city’s Parsi minority–from Rohinton Mistry’s Such a Long Journey –reacting to a right-wing municipal administration intent on erasing familiar street names because they trace the city’s colonial past.

     

    “Why change the names? Saala sisterfuckers! Hutatma Chowk!” He spat out the words disgustedly. “What is wrong with Flora Fountain?”

     

    “Why worry about it? I say, if it keeps the Marathas happy, give them a few roads to rename. Keep them occupied. What’s in a name?”

     

    “No, Gustad.” Dinshawji was very serious. “You are wrong. Names are so important. I grew up on Lamington Road. But it has disappeared, in its place is Dadasaheb Bhadkhamkar Marg. My school was on Carnac Road. Now suddenly it’s on Lokmanya Tilak Marg. I live at Sleater Road. Soon that will also disappear. My whole life I have come to work at Flora Fountain. And one fine day the name changes. So what happens to the life I have lived? Was I living the wrong life, with all the wrong names? Will I get a second chance to live it all again, with these new names?” (73-74)

     

    Figure 2:
    A Landmark, Once Known as “Flora Fountain,” Now Called “Hutatma Chowk”

    Copyright © Mumbai Central.

     

    Mistry’s novel renders an unsettling experience in the register of comic indignation. Benjamin offers a very different perspective. His early writings are rooted in the quasi-theological belief that “The absolute relation of name to knowledge exists only in God” (Selected I 71). If that notion is transposed to the civic travails represented in the Mistry novel, the succession of namings in the political history of a city like Bombay would have to be seen as a sardonic procession of false Gods, leaving any idea of an absolute concord between place and name an ever more opaque and hopeless mystery. The alternative to the Benjaminian hope of a divine resolution is to abandon the idea of any such conjunction of the secular and the prophetic, and to accept the city as a figure for the historicity of the struggle over names in a contestation for mere civic power, including the power over knowledge as personal memory.

     

    The City as Trace

     

    Dislocation implies the erasure of connections and relations. Benjamin is useful in bringing out another aspect of metropolitan experience–the estrangement of its urban bourgeoisie. Estrangement can be seen to cut both ways in the modern city: one can have a home where one is not at home, and one can feel at home where one has no home. One can also be turned out-of-doors by disgust at the cozy fetishism of bourgeois interiors. In Benjamin’s materialist terms, the very idea of home is transfigured by the city into interiors where the owner leaves traces that create habits out of habitats. In the Asian metropolis, estrangement is intensified. It provides a series of startling variants to how material traces can get deposited as signs of inhabitancy. In the Asian metropolis, the Benjaminian notion of the trace is rendered into the grotesque. From the fundamental deposit of feces (because the city lacks latrines), to the forest of television antennae that festoons the meanest hutment colony (because people must have entertainment), the city is proof of how the trace makes strange (and estranging) habits out of habitats. Bombay confirms Benjamin’s description as apt. It also obliges one to reconsider what it means to have the disconcerting interpenetration of habits and habitats separated by the most gaping differences. Here–from Anita Desai’s novel of that name–is poor Baumgartner in Bombay:

     

    Even when he had parted these curtains, entered the house, mounted the stairs, careful not to step on the beggars and lepers and prostitutes who inhabited every landing, and at last achieved the small cell that was his room, he had no sense of being walled away from the outer world…. (Desai 175)

     

    The interiority of space always threatens to get turned inside out. If we cannot wall ourselves in, we can yet mark a place as ours through the silt of our deposits. Moving upmarket in “One-Way Street” (1928), Benjamin has nothing but scorn for “the soulless luxury of the furnishings” captured accurately in the genre of nineteenth-century detective fiction: “On this sofa the aunt cannot but be murdered” (Selected I 447)! “Erase the traces” was Brecht’s refrain precisely because

     

    here, in the bourgeois room the opposite behavior has become an ethos in the strictest sense–that is to say, a habit. Indeed, leaving traces is not just a habit, but the primal phenomenon of all the habits that are involved in inhabiting a place. (Selected II 472)

     

    The material cause that defines the modernity of urban inhabitancy is the post-Bauhaus preference for glass and metal as the building materials of our era (Selected II 473). Benjamin’s stance is characteristically ambivalent between welcoming them as mimetic images of the urban transparency of a classless apocalypse, and regretting the loss of individualism entailed in this metal-and-glass Utopia.1 One would have to add cement and concrete to glass and metal to describe Bombay’s architecture; the ghastly dullness of this material lends its aura of drabness to whatever is immured within its walls. It becomes the veritable substance from which modern cities are made because of the ease with which it sinks into the souls of its inhabitants. It also encourages the reproducibility of housing conditions on the most massive scale of homogenizing anonymity, thus making the struggle for individuation more tragic.

     

    What gets forgotten, or repressed, in the efficient deployment of such materials is the recognition that “technology is the mastery of not nature but of the relation between nature and man” (Selected I 487). If Bombay represents a relatively unplanned variant of this development, we can glance briefly at another Indian city, Chandigarh, for a more planned version of homogenizing anonymity. When, shortly after gaining independence from British rule, the Indian government invited Le Corbusier to devise an ideal city for the new republic, the best he could come up with reduced the urban idea of Utopia to the most boring trace of bourgeois idealism.

     

    Figure 3:
    Le Corbusier, Holding a Map of the Indian City of Chandigarh

    Copyright © Fondation Le Corbusier

     

    Benjamin took a different tack. In a fragment from 1930-31, he asks the critic to practice “deconstruction [Abmontieren]” with reference to Adorno’s “theory of shrinkage [Schrumpfung],” and his own “theory of packaging [Verpackung],” and “the theory of the ruins created by time” (Selected II 415). Shrinkage and packaging are metaphors whose application to urban housing is self-evident. The application of “deconstruction” to housing can be said to have been accomplished, in the specific case of the city slums and hutment colonies that mark Bombay, by the tragic-ironic relation they set up between their own manifest existence as urban ruins on the slope of time and the repression of their cheek-by-jowl coexistence by up-market equivalents.

     

    The City as Kitsch

     

    Another dimension in which Benjamin and Bombay can be made to offer mutual illumination is in how they point up the role of kitsch in modern urban experience. It is almost a surprise to recollect that Bombay is not entirely constituted of slums and government housing. It is also the city of kitsch–for instance, in the eclecticism of its architecture, and the energetic vulgarity of its entertainment industry. V.S. Naipaul captures the public visage of the city quite accurately for the 1970s:

     

    The Indian-Victorian-Gothic city with its inherited British public buildings and institutions–the Gymkhana with its wide veranda and spacious cricket ground, the London-style leather-chaired Ripon Club for elderly Parsi gentlemen…the city was not built for the poor, the millions. But a glance at the city map shows that there was a time when they were invited in. (59)

    Figure 4: Rajabhai Tower, Bombay
    Copyright © Mumbai Central.

     

    In a gloss on Surrealism, Benjamin defined kitsch as “The side which things turn toward the dream” (Selected II 3). In Bombay, the dream is constituted by the ahistoricity of anachronism and the randomness of miscellany. The public landmarks–e.g. the Victoria Railway Terminus, the Rajabhai clock tower, the Gateway of India, the Haji Ali Temple, Flora Fountain, etc.–can appear striking so long as one is willing to ignore the clash in styles, and one takes each on its own terms. When taken together, as the city forces one to do in its synchronicity, they constitute a medley of accretions accidentally thrown together in a form of tropical Surrealism, with a dream’s capacity to sustain vividness independent of a context of stylistic tradition that is either indigenous or coherent. The mere fact that they happen to have been piled up in a particular arrangement becomes the “logic” of their occurrence in space and time. Benjamin described the Surrealist quest as a search for “the totemic tree of objects within the thicket of primal history” (Selected II 4). In Bombay, not only does the surreal imagination come up against totemic objects within plural histories, it also gets the opportunity to hunt for the tree of history amidst a thicket of totemic objects. Of each such excrescence, one may well echo his remark, “It is the last mask of the banal, the one with which we adorn ourselves, in dream and conversation, so as to take in the energies of an outlived world of things” (Selected II 4).

     

    The second form of kitsch unique to Bombay–its khichadi (local word for a kind of dry porridge)–is the entertainment industry, which gladly recognizes itself as India’s Bollywood, its equivalent to the U.S. movie industry in an age of rapidly globalizing markets and consumer interests. Its grossness is as deep as its popularity is wide. Here, the capacity to reach a mass audience is the perfect evocation of Benjamin’s hope that mechanical reproducibility would disseminate the auratic more widely. What Bombay shows is that this dream can indeed be realized, but only as the most tasteless of nightmares. The Bombay film industry combines fantasy and stereotypes with cheerful cynicism into what it supplies to the masses as the auratic. In being disseminated as a socially permitted drug and anodyne, the auratic is not diluted, but contaminated. Anyone who has been even a little appalled or embarrassed by the average Hindi movie will also have wondered at the economic sustenance that keeps the industry churning out more films than Hollywood, while basing them, decade after decade, on the same jaded formulas. Benjamin wanted the aura to lose its elitism, and spread to the masses. But there was no reason to suppose that the auratic would be made an historical exception to the law of consumption, which dictates that the consumers get what they think they want, which is cliché, not critique. The sociologist Ashis Nandy observes, “most Indian movie-goers prefer even an unrealistic defence of the right values to a realistic refusal to take notice of them” (223).

     

    Figure 5: Poster for Mani Rathnam’s Bombay (1995)

    The City as Labyrinth

     

    If we return to Benjamin’s cities at the level of the street, we enter the labyrinth or maze (Selected II 614) as Ariadne (Selected II 595, 598, 677). The personification enables the development of a mythology surrounding the condition of being lost, fearful, or anxious that a city can induce even in those who may not be inept at finding their way, or themselves. In Benjamin’s case, he confesses that he had “a very poor sense of direction” (Selected II 596). It is amusing to see how this handicap–unpropitious and yet apt for someone who would one day fancy himself as an Odysseus of cities–converts the banality of “Not to find one’s way in a city” into the art of knowing how “to lose oneself in a city,” although it took him most of a lifetime before he could claim that “Paris taught me this art of straying” (Selected II 598), whereas in Berlin, “my legs had become entangled in the ribbons of the streets” (Selected II 612). Benjamin would have been appalled at Chandigarh–Le Corbusier’s ambiguous gift to India, a city in which it is nearly impossible either to stray or to get properly lost.

     

    Figure 6: Grid Map of the city of Chandigarh
    Copyright © Chandigarh Administration
    Click for a larger image

     

    Both maze and labyrinth suggest that knowledge is not to be accessed directly in a city. The figure also implies that walking, rather than a mechanical means of transport, is the pace at which to take in a city. It requires no traversal to be complete. However, the metaphor also implies that there might be a center to the labyrinth. Benjamin’s practice acts as dissuasion to any such notion. His idealization derives from Baudelaire’s Parisian flâneur, who is “A passionate lover of crowds and incognitos” (Baudelaire 5). There is an entire frame of mind to which the urban jungle is not merely acceptable, but welcome. Benjamin uses Baudelaire’s reading of Edgar Allan Poe’s “The Man in the Crowd” to identify the city dweller as “someone who does not feel comfortable in his own company…. He refuses to be alone. He is the man of the crowd” (Baudelaire 48). The choice converts the defensive into the opportunistic, as in Bertolt Brecht’s sardonic presentation, “Of Poor B.B.”:

     

    In the asphalt city I’m at home. From the very start
    Provided with every last sacrament:
    With newspapers. And tobacco. And brandy
    To the end mistrustful, lazy and content.

     

    I’m polite and friendly to people. I put on
    A hard hat because that’s what they do.
    I say: they are animals with a quite peculiar smell.
    And I say: does it matter? I am too. (107)

     

    Benjamin’s temperament prefers a less hard-nosed attitude, more preoccupied with solitariness than abrasion. He regards the flâneur as someone “who goes botanizing on the asphalt” (Baudelaire 36).2 The characterization is both attractive and fanciful. The flâneur becomes a dialectical image that evades resolution, though it provides amelioration (N 50). The tension between its panache and its defensiveness is balanced on a cusp. Benjamin has to invoke Bergson, Freud, Proust, and Valéry to interject the mémoire involontaire between the capacity of metropolitan experience to induce “a poetics of shock” and the psychological mechanisms evolved for the purpose of dealing with it (Baudelaire 111-16). The flâneur becomes a figure for the resistance offered to what is found irresistible–the city as a medium for realizing the self. He will eventually lose himself to it, so he makes a concession by appearing to join the crowd, but only as a stroller, someone uniquely individual, and therefore no part of its homogenizing impulse (cf. Baudelaire 170). Benjamin wrote about Kafka, “Strangeness–his own strangeness–has gained control over him” (Selected II 806). One has only to replace “strangeness” with “estrangement” to give us a wider application for which Kafka, Benjamin, and Baudelaire serve as emblems.

     

    This poetry is no local folklore; the allegorist’s gaze which falls upon the city is rather the gaze of alienated man. It is the gaze of the flâneur, whose way of living still bestowed a conciliatory gleam over the growing destitution of men in the great city. (Baudelaire 170)

     

    What is the source of the conciliatory in the gleam bestowed by the poet on the destitution of the city? Benjamin answers, “He is for art what the dandy is for fashion” (Baudelaire 172). Likewise, he notes that Baron Haussmann’s “urbanistic ideal was one of views in perspective down long street-vistas.” For Benjamin, this represents “the tendency to ennoble technical exigencies with artistic aims” (Baudelaire 173). This may well have been the antidote to Fascism’s introduction of aesthetics into politics (“Work” 241). However, one might just as well call it autism dissembled as art. It does not cope with the dehumanization produced by urbanization; it layers it over with the gleaming patina of the aesthetic. This tendency–to retain objects vividly in memory while completely losing sight of the human figures for whom they are supposed to be the context–has an odd kind of counterpart in Benjamin’s remark that “Kafka’s entire work constitutes a code of gestures which surely had no definite symbolic meaning for the author from the outset” (Selected II 801). Benjamin becomes the locus for the problem encountered by the aesthetic impulse to recuperate from the shock of the urban, also wanting to ameliorate the impact of technological change on the quality of individual experience while remaining profoundly unconvinced of the equivalence between change and progress.

     

    A Poetics of Shock

     

    Benjamin was never at home even in the Berlin of his birth, where his mother used to take him for walks. Little Walter always kept two steps behind her, appearing more näive than he felt he was, just as later he was to appear more knowing than he felt himself to be, always capable of getting lost, whether out of choice or necessity (Selected II 596). In his last years, in Paris, he acknowledged that the condition of aloneness had to be accepted, since he would neither mix with the German émigrés, nor could he bring himself to join the Jewish exiles, nor did he hope to find acceptance among the local French. His solitude was thus involuntary and wretched. What is remarkable is that the desolating aspect of the predicament almost became a method. He taught himself to prefer streets to houses, suburbs to the city center, the amble of the stroller to the diligence of the tourist, and “the architectonic function of wares” (II 25) in markets to the interiors of museums or the exteriors of architectural monuments. He even insisted that only the foreign eye saw about a city what escaped native recognition (II 142, 262).

     

    His recollections of Berlin are particularly revealing about the enabling as well as the disabling powers of the flâneur as figuration.

     

    Berlin had provided meager opportunities for “The child’s first excursion into the exotic world of abject poverty.” (Selected II 600)

     

    I never slept on the street in Berlin. I saw sunset and dawn, but between the two I found myself a shelter. Only those for whom poverty or vice turns the city into a landscape in which they stray from dark till sunrise know it in a way denied to me. (Selected II 612)

     

    If we jump from Berlin to Bombay, no one who has walked the pavements of Bombay would use the word “exotic” to refer to “abject poverty.” Well over half the twelve million inhabitants of Bombay meet every sunset and dawn on the pavement, and not by choice. In Paris, Benjamin could afford to poeticize bazaars and arcades:

     

    I am pursuing the origin and construction of the Paris arcades from their rise to their fall, and laying hold of their origin through economic fact. These facts … construed as causes … allow the whole series of the arcade’s concrete historical forms to emerge, like a leaf unfolding forth from itself the entire wealth of the empirical plant kingdom. (N 50)

     

    The Crawford Market in Rohinton Mistry’s Such a Long Journey, however, is a bazaar seen from the other end of the telescope. When economic facts are treated as effect instead of cause, they become a slippery floor, “and smelly air abuzz with bold and bellicose flies” (21). Benjamin’s flâneur is not taken in by the commodification of value symbolized in the bazaar, though he consumes it avidly with his eyes. In being the remote ancestor to today’s addicted window-shopper, he remains a disinterested student in the temple of consumerism. He resists the commodity as fetish only by consuming it as an object of study. Goods need not be bought for their availability to the gaze to become a good in itself.

     

    The bazaar is the last hangout of the flâneur. If in the beginning the street had become an intérieur for him, now this intérieur turned into a street, and he roamed through the labyrinth of merchandise as he had once roamed through the labyrinth of the city. (Baudelaire 54)

     

    Exact equivalents to such arcades and bazaars are easy to find in the Fort area of Bombay. There, the poetry of the commodity and the poetics of abject poverty jostle each other rudely. For the majority of inhabitants–if a squatter can be said to inhabit what he infests–the pavement is interiority pulled inside out with a literalness that places Benjamin’s figure in a harder, clearer light. The flanneries of Bombay are as convoluted as those of any European city, but a stroll there is more reliably fraught with unpleasant discovery, as in Gieve Patel’s “City Landscape.”

     

    I pick my way
    Step by ginger step between
    Muck, rags, dogs,
    Women bathing squealing
    Children in sewer water,
    Unexpected chickens,
    And miles of dusty yellow
    Gravel straight
    From the centre of some planet
    Sucked dry by the sun… (Patel and Thorner 143)

     

    The point need not be labored: cities like Bombay show the limits beyond which the Baudelairean figure can stroll only with extreme discomfort to the figuration. The limitation separates the Asian from the European metropolis. Radical economic asymmetry, when combined with the close contiguities in space that are enforced by a city, distort human experience to a point where the imagination has to access the violence of the surreal, as an energy from within, if it is to resist the violence from without represented by the city.

     

    The Surreal City

     

    The surreal is never far from the metropolitan. Benjamin saw this as tonic, but Bombay provides an obverse experience of the surreal as discomfiting. The migration of rural populations to the metropolis is an aspect of societal modernity of which Bombay serves as one gross index. The influx from the agrarian hinterland has been poorly matched by land reclamation, which has only augmented the city’s problems and its politicians’ pockets. In this context, the feature that characterizes Bombay, the way scars disfigure a face, is its beggars. To beg is to have shed self-respect as the least price paid to appease need in the sharp form of hunger. But the Bombay variety of begging is something else altogether: the number, the deformities, and the persistence of its beggars add up to a surreal experience because all their deprivations are part of a gruesome economic organization. Benjamin, for the most part, internalizes the notion of poverty as a form of inward lack. In Moscow, however, he notes, “Begging is not aggressive as in southern climes, where the importunity of the ragamuffin still betrays some remnants of vitality. Here it is a corporation of the dying” (Selected II 27). Begging, he recognizes, is more effective when it preys upon “the bad social conscience” of the bourgeoisie (Selected II 28) than when it solicits pity. The same recognition animated Brecht’s adaptation of John Gay, and it should come as no surprise that when the Marathi author P.L. Deshpande adapted the Three-Penny Opera to a musical satire featuring a Bombay Beggars’ Union (Teen Paishyacha Tamasha), the burlesque proved even more savagely funny when transposed from eighteenth century London via 1920s Germany to 1970s Bombay. Thus Benjamin’s observation–“They have developed begging to a high art, with a hundred schematisms and variations” (Selected II 28)–applies equally well to any city in which the Surreal comes into play in collating penury and crime as a form of the metropolitan macabre. The Dalit poet Namdeo Dhasal remarks,

     

    Who hadn’t thought that fees could be claimed
    for singing songs of hunger. (Dangle 42)

     

    In Benjamin, the figure of the beggar transposes into yet another economic transposition–the ragpicker–who fascinates his epoch, creates a cottage-industry out of destitution, and invites identification from the littérateur, the conspirator, and the bohème (Baudelaire 19-20). Thus we can show that Benjamin was aware of the economic potential to the city’s exploitation of poverty, but for the private economy of those who meet their sunsets on the pavement, he would have to turn to lines like these from a Marathi poem by B. Rangarao:

     

    … sleep quarrels with my eyes
    then sits apart sulking in corners…. (Dangle 46)

     

    As for the dawn in Bombay, this is Nissim Ezekiel, in “A Morning Walk”:

     

    Barbaric city slick with slums,
    Deprived of seasons, blessed with rains,
    Its hawkers, beggars, iron-lunged,
    Processions led by frantic drums,
    A million purgatorial lanes,
    And child-like masses, many-tongued,
    Whose wages are in words and crumbs. (Patel and Thorner 129)

     

    This ironic and repulsed voice is still that of the poet as citizen who will walk home to his four walls. The Marathi poet Narayan Surve speaks from a blind corner, from where

     

    We know only two roads one which leads to the factory
    And the other,
    Which leads to the Crematorium. (Patel and Thorner 149)

     

    The plight understood by Benjamin is dull and sordid. That evoked by the Dalit has the edge of desperation, as in Namdeo Dhasal’s Marathi poem “Hunger”:

     

    Hunger, if we cannot mate you
    cannot impregnate you
    our tribe will have to kill itself
    Hunger we have all the aces
    Why talk of the songs of the half-sexed jacks? (Dangle 44)

     

    Bombay requires that the flâneur not walk the road, but become the road, as in the urban ballad of the Gujarati poet Suresh Dalal:

     

    I am a road
    Neither sleeping nor awaking,
    And a collapsed hand-cart
    I am beer and whisky
    And country liquor
    I am, yet nobody:
    I am an extinguished lantern.
    Living in Bombay
    I am a terribly tired person.
    I am a newspaper and a phone
    And a telex and a rumour
    I am a radio, T.V., Airport
    And a slum…. or I am an alternative.
    I am an actor without a drama
    And I am an impotent heir.
    Living in Bombay
    I am a terribly tired person. (Patel and Thorner 158)

     

    In brief, the individual living in an age of metropolitan pressure becomes the subject of a massive displacement.

     

    We now approach that aspect of metropolitan experience, as refracted by an Asian metropolis, to which Benjamin may be said to be an Horatio. Moving from the divisions enforced by economic lack to those imposed by society, we note, in passing, that the class structure in Moscow reminded Benjamin of the caste system in India: “Russia is today not only a class but also a caste system” (Selected II 35). He linked class to caste because both bring “terrible social ostracism” to their victims. Benjamin’s analogy has a counterpart in Max Weber’s equation, made in 1922, between the Jew and the Indian “untouchable” (184-85). Weber claimed that ostracism built up caste solidarity. In this context, it is ironic that Benjamin suffered the fate of a Jew though he did not think of himself as defined by his Jewishness. There is an interesting correspondence between the views of Benjamin and B.R. Ambedkar, the principal theorist of the Dalit cause. Benjamin described the angel of history as one who would make that which had been smashed whole, except that the catastrophe called progress kept blowing it backwards into the future (“Theses” 257-58). Ambedkar hoped, at about the same time, that the European angel of equality would heal an India split into fragments by caste (170).3 In the event, he found that the splinters of self-division riddled the wound of history, and a catastrophe called communalism kept blowing the nation backwards into the future.

     

    Figure 7: Paul Klee, Angelus Novus (1920)
    Source: The Israel Museum, Jerusalem

     

    Since stigma, like beauty, also resides in the eye of the beholder, Ambedkar asked for an education of the mind. He argued that to educate the ostracized would not suffice until those who did the ostracizing had been educated out of their prejudice. If the contemporary Dalit writer from Bombay has cause for anger, it is because that dream of Enlightenment gets ruined in the city of modernity. The Dalit acts as the social conscience, which demands that the city as a modern polity deliver its promise of freedom and equality.4 His aim shares a common cause with the Marxist ideal of a proletariat revolution, to which Benjamin lends some support. But the Dalit call for justice is redemptive, whereas Benjamin’s hope mixes the redemptive with the utopian. The Dalit frustration with redemptive justice brings their political struggle close to the despair of Benjamin’s theological preoccupations, in which history partakes of the decadence inherent to material nature, where even criticism is only the “mortification of the works” (Origin 182), and the aspiration to harmony and closure is appropriate only in the new Jerusalem.

     

    The City of Violence

     

    Benjamin’s allegorical treatment of the materiality of experience sharpens our sense of metropolitan experience as fragmented and discontinuous. But he also retains a vision of the coherence that ought to be gathered from its splinters. He does not know how this is to be done. To him, it is an intimation that does not deliver the promised disclosure. The lesson Bombay has to offer is that the one specific way adopted in recent history of realizing the city and its citizens as a totality has caused the vision of the city as a polity to suffer a brutal denudation. In the Bombay riots of December 1992 and January 1993, more than 700 people were killed by their fellow citizens, mostly by arson. Millions of dollars’ worth of property was destroyed. The economic productivity of the city was brought to a standstill. More than 60% of those killed were Muslims. They had either been victimized, or induced into counter-violence, by a right-wing Hindu party known as the Shiv Sena (Shivaji’s–or, the Lord Shiva’s–army). The police remained passive. The central government did not dare intervene.5

     

    Figure 8: Cartoon by Laxman
    (rpt. Padgaonkar 173)

     

    The city was appropriated on behalf of a narrow vision of recovered wholeness by the militant essentialism of Bombay’s Brown Shirts. The party was founded in 1966 by a man called Bal Thackeray, who had had a reasonably mediocre career until then as a cartoonist.

     

    Figure 9: A Victim of the Bombay Riots, December 1992
    Copyright © Times Relief Fund

     

    Bombay as a city has always been ethnically diverse, comprising, among the mercantile class, Gujaratis, Parsis, and Muslims, whereas the economically less productive middle-class has always been Marathi-speaking. It was the most industrialized city of India from as far back as the middle of the nineteenth century. It had metamorphosed from a textile-manufacturing center to a vastly diversified manufacturing economy, in which the incentive of economic benefit had acted as a disincentive for communal and religious friction.6 The Shiv Sena sought to control the hybridized entrepreneurial behavior of the city under the invocation of communalism. The 1960s had seen an influx from the southern states. That gave the Shiv Sena its first agenda: recover Bombay for the Marathi-speaking Maharashtrians. More recently, in the aftermath of Hindu-Muslim riots in the north of India, the Shiv Sena turned its attention towards the Muslims, who comprise about 15% of the city population. Benjamin had wished for a recuperation that was centered on the individual in a perspective that treated all experience, and especially metropolitan experience, as postlapsarian. The ideal served a function by showing a horizon beyond the limit of what is realizable in time or space. The recent history of violence in Bombay shows what happens when this dream of recuperation is dragged across that limit–it is realized as xenophobic intolerance. In his “Critique of Violence” (1920-21), Benjamin had said, “If justice is the criterion of ends, legality is that of means” (Selected I 237).

     

    Figure 10: Counting the Dead, Bombay (Worli), December 1992
    Copyright © Times Relief Fund

     

    The Shiv Sena has shown how illegal means applied to unjust ends can yet dissemble justification as justice by legitimizing force through communal sanctions. Its policies represent a form of aggressive retreat from the egalitarianism of opportunity practiced by capitalism, of which an industrial city like Bombay has been the primary conduit for the national economy. The logic of capitalist expansion had de-territorialized the city; the Shiv Sena re-territorialized it on sectarian principles, turning its back on the logic of industrial capital. Richard G. Fox adapts a Frankfurt School thesis–that the idea of progress has had a bittersweet history of disenchantment with modernity–in order to develop a multiple analogy for communalism based on the notion of “hyperenchantment,” which bears the same relation to modernity that hyperconsumption has to greed, and hypermanagement to bureaucracy.

     

    Communalism is the hyperenchantment of religion, racism is the hyperenchantment of biology, sexism is the hyperenchantment of gender, and ethnic prejudice is the hyperenchantment of culture. Each of these builds new forms of identity, allegiance, and loyalty that are formally inconsistent with modernity, but that are, in fact, its own creations. Each of…them creates social boundaries based on ascription rather than achievement, yet each of them sustains social orders (the family, the community) and occurs in institutional settings (the state, the workplace) ostensibly based on modernity. (239)

     

    Each of these generalizations has a double validity: for the forces at work in a city like Bombay, and for the Europe that was to disenchant Benjamin’s treatment of it as a civil society. In his death he acknowledged that he had written for a community that had failed to materialize. In its place arose an ashen phoenix. The same is true of Bombay. The city of India’s belated modernity showed how it could readily become the site of self-divisive violence. The political right appropriated the city for an aestheticised politics (Illuminations 241). The correspondences between Fascism and Asian varieties of fundamentalism are numerous, and all of them are ominous. If the conjunction between Benjamin and Bombay has any validity, it is in the troubled ambivalence with which each mediates this modernity. In each, the depredations and the opportunities of modernity are delicately poised between despair and hope, with nothing to alleviate the angel of history in its backward trajectory–into the future called progress–except the vigilance of critique.

     

    Notes

     

    1. For a reading that sees Benjamin in an altogether more sanguine spirit about Utopia and materials like glass and iron, see Heynen 95-118.

     

    2. “The crowd is his element, as the air is that of birds and water of fishes. His passion and his profession are to become one flesh with the crowd. For the perfect flâneur, for the passionate spectator, it is an immense joy to set up house in the heart of the multitude, amid the ebb and flow of movement, in the midst of the fugitive and the infinite. To be away from home and yet to feel oneself everywhere at home….” (Baudelaire 9).

     

    3. Cf. Ambedkar’s comments in his speech at Mahad in 1938: “If European nations enjoy peace and prosperity today, it is for one reason: the revolutionary French National Assembly convened in 1789 set new principles for the organization of society before the disorganized and decadent French nation of its time, and the same principles have been accepted and followed by Europe…. The road it marked out for the development of the French nation, the road that all progressed nations have followed, ought to be the road adopted for the development of Hindu society….” (qtd. in Dangle 225, 227).

     

    4. In an interview from 1984, Foucault has an interesting comment on the failure of nationalisms to deliver on the promise of modernity:

     

    When a colonized people attempts to liberate itself from its colonizers, this is indeed a practice of liberation in the strict sense. But we know very well, and moreover in this specific case, that this practice of liberation is not in itself sufficient to define the practices of freedom that will still be needed if this people, this society, and these individuals are to be able to define admissible and acceptable forms of existence or political society. (282-83)

     

    5 Cf. Padgaonkar 1 and passim.

     

    6 Cf. Chandavarkar 58.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Ambedkar, B.R. What Congress and Gandhi Have Done to the Untouchables. Bombay: Thacker, 1945.
    • Baudelaire, Charles. The Painter of Modern Life and Other Essays. Trans. Jonathan Mayne. New York: Phaidon, 1964.
    • Benjamin, Walter. Charles Baudelaire: A Lyric Poet in the Era of High Capitalism. Trans. Harry Zohn. London and New York: Verso, 1973.
    • —. Illuminations: Essays and Reflections. Ed. Hannah Arendt. Trans. Harry Zohn. New York: Schocken, 1968.
    • —.”N [Re the Theory of Knowledge, Theory of Progress].” Trans. Leigh Hafrey and Richard Sieburth. Benjamin: Philosophy, History, Aesthetics. Ed. Gary Smith. Chicago and London: U of Chicago P, 1983. pp?
    • —. The Origin of German Tragic Drama. Trans. John Osborne. London: Verso, 1977.
    • —. Reflections: Essays, Aphorisms, and Autobiographical Wntings. Ed. Peter Demetz. Trans. Edmund Jephcott. New York & London: Harcourt, 1978.
    • —. Selected Writings. Ed. Michael W. Jennings, Marcus Bullock, Howard Eiland, and Gary Smith. Trans. Rodney Livingstone. 2 vols. Cambridge: Belknap P of Harvard UP, 1997-99.
    • —. “Theses on the Philosophy of History.” Benjamin, Illuminations 253-64.
    • —. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Benjamin, Illuminations 217-51.
    • Brecht, Bertolt. Poems Part One 1913-1928. Ed. John Willett and Ralph Manheim. London: Eyre Methuen, 1976.
    • Chandavarkar, Rajnarayan. The Origins of Industrial Capitalism in India: Business Strategies and the Working Classes in Bombay, 1900-1940. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1994.
    • Dangle, Arjun, ed. Poisoned Bread: Translations from Modern Marathi Dalit Literature. Bombay: Orient Longman, 1992.
    • Desai, Anita. Baumgartner’s Bombay. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1989.
    • Dwivedi, Sharada, and Rahul Mehrotra. Bombay: The Cities Within. Bombay: India Book House, 1995.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Ethics, Subjectivity and Truth.” The Essential Works of Michel Foucault, 1954-1984. Trans. Robert Hurley et al. Ed. Paul Rabinov. Vol. 2. New York: New Press, 1997.
    • Fox, Richard G. “Communalism and Modernity.” Contesting the Nation: Religion, Community, and the Politics of Democracy in India. Ed. David Ludden. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1996. 235-49.
    • Heynen, Hilde. Architecture and Modernity: A Critique. Cambridge, MA., and London: MIT P, 1999.
    • Mistry, Rohinton. Such a Long Journey. Calcutta: Rupa, 1991.
    • Naipaul, V.S. India: A Wounded Civilization. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1979.
    • Nandy, Ashis. “An Intelligent Critic’s Guide to Indian Cinema.” The Savage Freud and Other Essays on Possible and Retrievable Selves. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1995. 196-236.
    • Padgaonkar, Dileep, ed. When Bombay Burned. New Delhi: UBS Publishers’ Distributors, 1993.
    • Patel, Sujata, and Alice Thorner, eds. Bombay: Mosaic of Modern Culture. New Delhi: Oxford UP, 1995.
    • Weber, Max. Selections in Translation. Ed. W.G. Runciman. Trans. Eric Matthews. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1978.

     

  • On Joseph Tate’s “Radiohead’s Antivideos: Works of Art in the Age of Electronic Reproduction,” Postmodern Culture 13.1.

     

     

     

    Volume 13, Number 1
    September, 2002


     

    The following responses were submitted by PMC readers using regular e-mail or the PMC Reader’s Report form. Not all letters received are published, and published letters may have been edited.

     

    Copyright (c) 2002 by the authors, all rights reserved. This text may be used and shared in accordance with the fair-use provisions of U.S. copyright law, and it may be archived and redistributed in electronic form, provided that the editors are notified and no fee is charged for access. Archiving, redistribution, or republication of this text on other terms, in any medium, requires the consent of the authors and the notification of the publisher, the Johns Hopkins University Press.

     


     

    Reader’s Report on Joseph Tate’s “Radiohead’s Antivideos: Works of Art in the Age of Electronic Reproduction” (PMC 12.3):

     

    These comments are from: Jeremy Arnold

     

    There is perhaps no greater sign of the decadence of Postmodern Culture (the journal and the phenomenon) than Joseph Tate’s interpretation of Radiohead’s anti-videos. My goal is not to combat his interpretation of the videos with my own, but to argue against the assumptions of the text itself. And in the spirit of postmodern disclosure, I will admit that this response is being subversively written from my cubicle in San Francisco, which will explain the absence of page references and direct quotes.

     

    Rather than detail every point of disagreement I have, I will simply mark out a few points of difference.

     

    The use of unquestioned theoretical constructs to explain, rather than understand (in the sense of the Germanic distinction most often associated with Heidegger) a given cultural product seems as unhelpful as deconstructive readings of comic books. I love Baudrillard as much as the next guy, but the fact is even he doubts his own credibility, as evidenced by his infamous comment that he is an anti-prophet, in that everything he says isn’t (or doesn’t become) true. In that sense, I would argue that Baudrillard, perhaps in line with Zizek, wants a return to the Real, that for all the talk of hyperreality and the procession of simulacra, metaphorics of emptiness and deserts, there is a politically motivated “desire” for the Real. A desert may be devoid of water, but it is not pure form; it is its own kind of Real, where survival is, perhaps, more at stake than in the comfy confines of PoMo suburbanity.Under my reading then, Radiohead’s music, despite its pastiche and the utter futility in locating a single event of performance, is also not designed to play out the VR [virtual reality] fantasy; there is, both lyrically and musically, a reality in the songs. Yorke’s constant references to scenes of material, technologically produced destruction (“Lucky,” “Airbag” on OK Computer), politics (“You and Whose Army,” on Amnesiac) and existential moments of doubt (just about every damn song they ever wrote) refer us not to a dematerialized sphere of virtuality, but through the hyper-consciousness of the technological mediation of our experience of reality these days, sends us back to the real human emotions (or the difficulty in feeling those emotions) involved in any situation.

     
    Musically speaking, Tate seems way off the mark, perhaps as a result of his simple appropriation of PoMo theory, which prevents him from listening to the music instead of finding out its status as an object. (Frankly, I wouldn’t mind that analysis if there wasn’t an equation made between the economic and the aesthetic, a leap that is given no argumentative support.) This is most evidenced by his misguided assertion that Bitches Brew is not as much a product of instrumental virtuosity as it is a product of Ted Macero and Miles Davis’s production chops (we will return to the word “chops” in a moment). The simple fact of the matter is that Bitches Brew, while a collage of improvised pieces of music pasted together by a brilliant team of musicians and engineers, is an achievement because of the musical ground it broke. It breaks down the harmonic elements of jazz to their most basic structures, removing standard progressions and improvisation over changes (a project begun in Davis’s earlier modal music, most notably on Kind of Blue) while introducing a significant amount of rhythmic diversity that was predicated less on swing and more on pulse (a pulse inspired by rock, perhaps, but in no way reducible to it).Radiohead has performed its own kind of revision of the canon of rock, not by revealing its “phantasmic” structure (hasn’t rock always been, more than any art, aware of its own phantasmic existence? what else could explain the existence and appeal of hair metal bands in the 80s?) but by radically investigating the implicit possibilities that rock music, as an historical process (has Tate forgotten history in all of this?), offers. Radiohead is not the first to use electronics instead of instruments (Brian Eno, Can, etc.) or odd time signatures (although they have often said they hate progressive rock, odd time has been a feature of the genre since its inception) or to deal with PoMo culture (the Talking Heads, whose song “Radiohead” gave Radiohead its name, brilliantly assessed the PoMo world on Remain in Light, which I feel is one of the greatest albums in rock history).What Radiohead has done, in my opinion, is to insert a strong melodic sensibility that rock often lacks. What always brings the music back to a real human situation is the power of the melody, even in the fragmented songs on Kid A. The melody forces us back to the Real and ultimately forces us to listen again and again because there is something “there.” It is the relationship between a powerful melody (and the harmonic background, which is often quite traditional) and the complex and disjunctive rhythm that makes Radiohead an incredible band. They do have chops (unlike most rock musicians, all of Radiohead’s members except Yorke read music), evident in the complexity of the arrangements, the odd time, and the execution of the songs (nothing ever seems like a mistake in Radiohead; it all seems intended, even if it’s not). This IS a distortion of rock, in that it is GOOD, which is why musicians from other genres (classical and jazz) are beginning to work on Radiohead’s music.

     
    My final point concerns one of the keywords used in the article, “ideology.” I would argue that the article itself is a classic example of a certain ideology, grounded in the aforementioned unquestioned use of theory to explain art. Tate reveals his prediliction for theory in the autobiographical account of his first interpretation of the Amnesiac antivideos. His first impulse was to find a postmodernist revelation of pure advertising, buttressed by a reading of the allusion (finally some history) to Cage’s 4’33”.Radiohead is doing theory! But then, he learned that the reason there was no music in the videos was that they were works in progress; they were not works at all, at that point. I think in that situation I might just laugh off the whole thing as an exuberant but premature attempt to think myself into the band Radiohead (something I’ve thought about before, to be honest). But, Tate’s reading is merely “disturbed,” so he looks for an alternate reading, one that moves toward an instantiation of the “history of shit.” But is this the correct reading? It is one thing to argue that capitalism has a “shitty” aspect to it, and that the question of waste is important both ecologically and as an approach to the cultural aesthetic of postmodernity. But is that what the artist, Cris Bran, said? He said, ultimately, that Radiohead was attempting to make a gallery of ideas, in other words, a gallery of possibilities, future plans for action. The videos don’t expose the waste products of manic production; they expose the artistic process as a dialectic between potentiality and actuality, the flux between becoming and being. And what could possibly be extraneous about that?All this talk of becoming, incontinence, etc. reminds me of Nietzsche. Tate’s critique sounds more and more like a classic example of ressentiment.The critic, while open to the labrynthine maze of an art work, can’t stop at mere understanding; the critic has to capture it in one or another theoretical construct. Ultimately, the work, as evidenced in the failure to read the antivideo as “Baudrillardian,” resists the attempts to capture it, as Wallace Stevens said, “almost successfully.”In other words, the work is allegorically read back into the critic, into an established framework of interpretation. The best art, theory, and philosophy, the work of Baudrillard, Heidegger, Zizek, Radiohead, Joyce, Stevens (the list goes on), is intended to make strange and unfamiliar what was presupposed. If Radiohead is merely a cultural manifestation of PoMo theory, then why listen to Radiohead? I don’t need Thom Yorke to tell me that we live in a technological world, nor do I need him to understand capitalism’s dirty little remainder. What I do need Radiohead for is the aesthetic brilliance, the originality, the possibility that they provide; I in fact need them because they opened up a whole new world (that is, possibility) of art and life to me that I never would have known had I never heard their music. To that end they do deserve intense listening, criticism, and thought, and they do deserve to be placed in the same sentence with Zizek, Lacan, and Baudrillard, not as an affirmation of the latter’s brilliance, but as an affirmation of their own.

     

    Joseph Tate replies:

     

    In replying to Jeremy Arnold’s reader mail, I want to begin where Arnold ends. He concludes by writing: “I don’t need Thom Yorke to tell me that we live in a technological world, nor do I need him to understand capitalism[‘]s dirty little remainder. What I do need Radiohead for is the aesthetic brilliance, the originality, the possibility that they provide.” The aesthetic brilliance to which Arnold alludes–presumably an objective quality of the work and/or band members–is undoubtedly linked to what he mentions earlier, that Radiohead’s music does not refer us “to a dematerialized sphere of virtuality,” but rather “sends us back to the real human emotions (or the difficulty in feeling those emotions) involved in any situation.” The songs send the listener, or put differently, they transport the listener back to real emotions. Though what each variant of “real” is meant to connote (“real,” “the Real,” and “reality” are used interchangeably) is unclear, Arnold’s “real human emotions” in this instance are likely shorthand for what might be called phenomenological presence, a presence reachable via Radiohead’s music. Thus, objective aesthetic brilliance induces a “real” emotional state, and it is this my essay fails to address–an arguably fair reframing of Arnold’s thesis.

     

    My essay does not touch on this phenomenon largely because Radiohead’s entire project can be read, almost successfully, as an argument against this very sort of listener experience. I appropriate Arnold’s use of Wallace Stevens’s phrase “almost successfully” because Stevens’s poem, “Man Carrying Thing,” is indeed instructive: “The poem must resist the intelligence, / Almost successfully” (lines 1-2, 350). The poem, or in this case the music of Radiohead, must and does resist intelligence almost successfully, that is, not quite successfully: art does resist critical understanding, but never does it remain completely inarticulate or inscrutable. We can and should, I think, as Stevens says in closing his poem, “endure our thoughts all night, until / The bright obvious stands motionless in cold” (lines 13-14, 351). The bright obvious here is that Radiohead’s music doesn’t return us to “a reality,” to use Arnold’s phrase, or “real human emotions” at all. Instead, with systematic clarity, their work asks for anything but the aesthetic transport of the listener.

     

    Parenthetically, had I but world enough and time, I would undertake a more extended argument against Arnold’s “real human emotions.” Presumably, “real” here means something akin to “actual” or “immediate” in the literal sense of unmediated. That emotions felt in response to fictions like Radiohead’s music can ever be real has been debated for centuries, but the most extensive debate among current scholars of emotion began in 1978 with Kendall Walton’s essay “Fearing Fictions” and continues into 1997 with Eva Dadlez’s What’s Hecuba to Him? Fictional Events and Actual Emotions. Also, for a cogent theorization of emotions as mediated, social constructs, Katherine Lutz’s Unnatural Emotions: Everyday Sentiments on a Micronesian Atoll and Their Challenge to Western Theory is enlightening. The argument of Lutz’s book in a nutshell is that “emotional meaning is fundamentally structured by particular cultural systems and particular social and material environments” (5). Another more recent book on the cofunctioning of affect and langauge that deserves wider attention is Brian Massumi’s Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation.

     

    Reading the band’s work as self-reflexive, the lyrics of the title track to Kid A represent aesthetic response, or musical ecstasy to be exact, as an experience with potentially horrifying results. As the song ends, Yorke’s barely decipherable, computer-manipulated voice sings: “The rats and children follow me out of town / The rats and children follow me out of their homes / Come on kids.”[1] Via overt reference to the Pied Piper story, a narrative of child-abduction that is perhaps especially horrifying to the contemporary American imagination given the recent prominence of abductions in the popular media, Radiohead’s exaggeration of their music’s power to sway listeners would seem, like the Pied Piper story itself, to be a cautionary tale.[2]

     

    If children in this song and others are read as signs of emotional sincerity, then the band’s lyrics have an anxiety-ridden perspective on affective honesty. The 2001 b-side song “Fog” figures the perpetual presence of a child as a fast-growing, subterranean baby alligator familiar from urban mythology:

     

    There’s a little child
    Running round this house
    And he never leaves
    He will never leave
    And the fog comes up from the sewers
    And glows in the dark

     

    Baby alligators in the sewers grow up fast
    Grow up fast

     

    Similarly, amid the OK Computer song “Fitter Happier” and its catalogue-like litany of mundane self-help advice, there intervenes a chilling line meant to have a conventional cinematic visual layering effect: “(shot of baby strapped in back seat).” The speaker of Kid A track “Morning Bell,” thrice intones the imperative, “Cut the kids in half,” and the title of a new unreleased song first performed this summer by the band is “We Suck Young Blood.”

     

    Likewise, instead of sincerely asking listeners to follow them childlike out of town, the band warns in “Dollars and Cents” from Amnesiac that:

     

    we are the DOLLARS & CENTS
    and the PoUNDS and Pence
    the MARK and the YEN
    we are going to crack your little souls
    we are going to crack your little souls

     

    The we of these lines is not literally autobiographical, but is metaphorically Radiohead, a product we buy with pounds and pence that will crack (open up or break down?) the listeners’ supposedly diminutive souls.

     

    In this way, any pleasure listeners experience with Radiohead’s music is mired in the foregrounded trappings of its marketplace consumption: the “aesthetic brilliance” cannot be arrived at without first paying for it with dollars and cents, pounds and pence. The music cannot be readily liberated from the production-line logic and mass marketing by which it comes to listeners, and Radiohead, as I argue here and in my essay, does not want listeners to forget the product they are listening to is just that: a product.

     

    At this point it is worth clarifying that citing the band’s lyrics as I have above by no means establishes an authoritative reading. Nevertheless, I do think there is a strong case for the assertion that the band’s project time and again calls emotional legitimacy, immediacy, aesthetic response, and the tangled web they weave into question.[3]

     

    To close, one song and its music video provide a useful corrective to both my perspective and that suggested by Arnold’s letter. In the music video for “Pyramid Song,” a featureless, computer-rendered avatar with whom viewers explore a submerged, underwater city is always connected to the surface via a lifeline, an instrument not as important in-itself as what it facilitates: a return, one indirectly confirmed by the lyrics’ consistent past-tense.[4] Though the visual story does not neatly narrate the lyrics or vice versa, the two elements of sound and vision share this common thematic of going-to and coming-back. Lyrically, the speaker has been, seen, and is come back to tell:

     

    I jumped in the river what did I see?
    blackeeyedangelsswamwithme.
    a moonful of stars and astral cars.
    and all the figures i used to see.
    all my lovers were there with me.
    all my past and futures.
    and we all went to heaven in a little row boat. [sic]

     

    Visually, however, as the video ends and the camera’s perspective rises to the surface, the avatar stays below. Physiological limits dictate that humans cannot stay underwater for long, even with breathing apparatuses, but given that the avatar is not human, is a digital creation, it accomplishes what we can only imagine: it settles into a chair in an empty house. Ultimately, the audience is here given a choice: to remain submerged in the music’s ocean of nostalgic beauty with “nothing to fear and nothing to doubt,” as the lyrics claim, or to trace the lifeline out of emotional depths and return to the fluxing contours of Radiohead’s refractive surface. Problems and possibilities attend either decision, I argue (and I think Arnold would agree), in equal portions.

    Notes

     

    1. Except for songs on Amnesiac, all lyrics are taken from Jonathan Percy’s online archive: <http://www.greenplastic.com/lyrics>. Lyrics for Amnesiac are available on Radiohead’s own web site here: <http://www.waste-game.com/hogger/numeeja/lyrics/packtframe.html>. Macromedia’s free Flash Player is required to view this page.

     

    2. In another instance, Radiohead critiques aesthetic rapture: the beloved in “Creep” from Pablo Honey, is said to “float like a feather in a beautiful world,” but the speaker ultimately admits his inadequacy in the face of such beauty: “I’m a creep.” Confronting something beautiful, or something perceived as beautiful, repeatedly causes problems for the protagonists in Radiohead’s music.

     

    3. This suspicion is linked to, but not synonymous with, what Fredric Jameson calls “the waning of affect in postmodern culture” (10). The linkage is a topic for another essay.

     

    4. The video is available online here in Windows Media Player format: <http://hollywoodandvine.com/radiohead/rha_primary_frame.html>. Be warned that this web site is not user- or bandwidth-friendly. Choosing “Video” in the page’s topmost menu will take you to another page where you can then select the video you would like to see.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Dadlez, E. M. What’s Hecuba to Him? Fictional Events and Actual Emotions. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania UP, 1997.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Lutz, Catherine. Unnatural Emotions: Everyday Sentiments on a Micronesian Atoll and Their Challenge to Western Theory. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1988.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, and Sensation. Durham, NC and London: Duke UP, 2002.
    • Meeting People is Easy. Dir. Grant Gee. Capitol Records, 1998.
    • Pyramid Song. Dir. Shynola. Capitol Records, 2001.
    • Stevens, Wallace. “Man Carrying Thing.” The Collected Poems of Wallace Stevens. 1954. New York: Knopf, 1997. 350-51.
    • Radiohead. “Creep.” Pablo Honey. Capitol Records, 1993.
    • —. “Fitter, Happier.” OK Computer. Capitol Records, 1997.
    • —. “Fog.” Knives Out, Part Two. Capitol Records, 2001.
    • —. “High and Dry.” The Bends. Capitol Records, 1995.
    • —. “Knives Out.” Amnesiac. Capitol Records, 2001.
    • —. “Packt like Sardines in a Crusht Tin Box.” Amnesiac. Capitol Records, 2001.
    • —. “Pyramid Song.” Amnesiac. Capitol Records, 2001.
    • —. “The Bends.” The Bends. Capitol Records, 1995.
    • —. “We Suck Young Blood.” Unreleased, 2002.
    • Walton, Kendall. “Fearing Fictions.” Journal of Philosophy 75 (1978): 5-27.

     

  • Photo-Performance in Cyberspace: The CD-ROMs of Hugo Glendinning and Tim Etchells with Forced Entertainment

    Andrew Kimbrough

    Guangdong University of Foreign Studies
    andrewmkimbrough@yahoo.com

     

    Frozen Palaces. CD-ROM by Hugo Glendinning and Tim Etchells with Forced Entertainment. Collected on artintact 5, produced by Zentrum für Kunst und Medientechnologie Karlsruhe (ZKM), 1999. Buchhandelsausgabe/Trade Edition;

     

    and

     

    Nightwalks. CD-ROM by Hugo Glendinning and Tim Etchells with Forced Entertainment. Sheffield, UK: Forced Entertainment, 1998.

     

    Both CD-ROMs are available through Forced Entertainment via their website, <http://www.forced.co.uk>.

     

    Using as a springboard Marshall McLuhan’s observation that different media in the twentieth century recuperated sensory operations denied by writing, media theorist Paul Levinson postulates that the computer best provides an interactive medium wherein the faculties of hearing, speech, sight, and touch may be employed in immediate communication, hence duplicating the experience of the live. Whereas the dislocation of space and time in such media as the video and telephone interrupts the experience of direct physical presence, Levinson argues, the computer fosters a tangible immediacy through the involvement of many senses. I am attracted to Levinson’s theorizing, but I think it incomplete in explaining the magnetic attraction of cyberspace. For as any online gamer knows, more than simply attempting to duplicate the live, interactive computer technology offers a heightened and very different experience, one that the live cannot provide. As theorist Matthew Causey attests, with a nod to Heidegger, something “uncanny” erupts in the performative experience of technology. Such uncanniness may be experienced in the interactive use of the CD-ROMs produced by the British theatre company known as Forced Entertainment.

     

    Since 1984, the dozen actors and designers who comprise Forced Entertainment under the artistic direction of Tim Etchells have been exploring the boundaries of theatre and performance in a manner slightly reminiscent of Elizabeth LeCompte and the Wooster Group in New York. However, rather than challenging the traditional reception of the (classical) theatre text–a practice that distinguishes LeCompte’s pieces–Forced Entertainment work from improvisations and Etchells’ written texts, and their experiments have taken them from their own small warehouse theatre in Sheffield, England to found spaces, live and videated gallery installations, film, and even CD-ROM. With several new works produced annually, and past shows kept in repertoire, Forced Entertainment maintains steady touring schedules in the UK and Europe, with occasional trips to the US. (I first encountered them at the Walker Arts Center in Minneapolis in March of 1999, where they performed their compelling Speak Bitterness, the text of which is included in Etchells’s 1999 publication Certain Fragments.) Critics have hailed the group’s work as definitively postmodern for its break with theatrical convention, its obsession with the inadequacy of language, its seemingly fragmented nature, and its penchant for the appropriation and undermining of pop sensibility. (Videos of past productions are also available through Forced Entertainment’s website, < http://www.forced.co.uk>.) But with its forays into CD-ROM, Forced Entertainment also confirms the noted relationship of the postmodern with the technological. With CD-ROM, Forced Entertainment explores a new performative dimension located in the multimedia intersections of photography, the theatrical, and computer technology.

     

    Both Nightwalks and Frozen Palaces defied my previous experiences with CD-ROM. Neither unfolds in linear fashion like the digital film with alternate scenarios and endings, nor are they goal-oriented like the interactive game. Rather, the CD-ROMs seem to play upon the type of audience reception found within the art gallery. Both employ the same format, presenting Hugo Glendinning’s striking color photographs of locations peopled with members of Forced Entertainment and accompanied by minimalist soundscapes scored by John Avery. Digital technology, however, allows the photographs to be viewed in a novel way: as 360-degree panoramas. On-screen, the photographs are designed to be shifted and manipulated by use of the control and shift keys in tandem with the mouse: the user may zoom in and out of the image, and scroll left or right in circular fashion. By means of a small pointer icon that appears on-screen over two or three detailed images within a photograph, the user may also access other photographs that in turn open into a seemingly limitless maze of images, visual associations, and aural meanderings. Such associations are fostered not by a story line that may be read into (or out of) the photographs, but by a disjointed continuity established by the locations and hints of “character” suggested by the static poses and expressions of the actors, who may appear in more than one photograph. For indeed a strength of Forced Entertainment lies in the unique physical presence of the performers themselves, a presence that seeps through digital reproduction and offers the user-observer some kind of connection with the human and the live/real.

     

    Figure 1: Image from Nightwalks.
    Photograph by Hugo Glendinning.

     

     

     

     

    The liner notes for Nightwalks claim that Glendinning’s deserted, nighttime London cityscapes resemble “a catalogue of forgotten locations for an imaginary film.” The metaphor (added for marketing purposes?) is unfortunate for its simplifying reduction of the vast interpretive potential the images hold. Granted, the locations feel out of the way and untravelled, and they are well suited for the film noir genre. But by means of Glendinning’s and Etchell’s judicious placement of people–sometimes posed, sometimes active, in various states of undress, alone or coupled–the locations start to breathe on their own and hint at scenarios that defy the generic confines of the movies (or even the comic book). The notes correctly encourage the audience to “explore,” since the design compels the user to seek out connections and follow tangents. Some locations are shot from various angles; some characters appear in more than one image; pointer icons sometimes return the user to a previously encountered image and beckon a fresh departure. Yet, the surface realism of the industrial London locations clashes with the beguiling and fantasmic intimations evoked by the presence of the performed body. Who is that naked man in the metallic corridor? Why does that woman wear angel wings? Nightwalkscreates intrigue not by supplying answers but by defying them. Details offer evidence without explanation. The photographs invite the user’s gaze, but deny the modernist quest for meaning.

     

    Figure 1: Image from Frozen Palaces.
    Photograph by Hugo Glendinning.

     

     

     

     

    Frozen Palaces engages the user in similar fashion as Nightwalks, but here Glendinning and Etchells’s manipulation of location provides a much denser field of exploration. The first image reveals the parlor of a house after a party, clued by the torn wrapping paper, half-eaten cake, and deflating balloons. The maze of images available, however, suggests three or four more separate interior locations, without clarifying whether they are all in the same house or not. The party imagery permeates one floor; a séance takes place on another; a man lies dead in a bathtub while a woman scrubs a bloody knife; scenes of erotic encounters shuffle within a bedroom; and a body lies on the bare earth of a cellar. Again, Glendinning and Etchells establish a familiar realism within the surroundings, but the situations and expressions of the “characters” evade explanation, and Avery’s eerie repetitive tones complement the sense of disorientation evoked. More palpable connections seem to exist between the characters than in Nightwalks, but the relationships are never made clear. As the images resist clear readings, the experience of the posed actors shifts: they are no longer objects of inquiry; rather, their inscrutability returns the user-audience’s gaze as if to query the incessant need to know.

     

    Nightwalks and Frozen Palaces can be seen to operate on three levels. On one, the user witnesses the artistry of the collaboration between Glendinning and Forced Entertainment. The photographs are vivid, rich in color, and dense in visual information. As the CD-ROMs mimic the gallery viewing experience, the viewer may move closer to or away from each visual display, and one can decide how much time to spend with individual images. Additionally, the 360-degree design reminds me of an inverted sculpture–since the user, not the piece, occupies the center–and I must travel around it in order to take in its totality. On another level, the compulsion to move interactively and traverse the imagery subsumes the aforementioned appreciation of artistry. Indeed, the need to explore and solve soon replaces the fascination with individual images. The sensation resembles playing an elaborate board or card game, wherein the players need to keep abreast of information as it is revealed piecemeal. If anything, a weakness of the design lies in the circuit of repetition in which one eventually finds oneself. The images by necessity must repeat themselves, and I found myself impatient to move faster through familiar territory in order to find the quickly diminishing unfamiliar. Since there is no sense of completion, given the lack of a narrative, one must at some point simply decide to stop. Given the alternating poles of experience, the first sensation of mystery gives way to a closing sensation of exhaustion and ill-ease. Precisely in this discomfiture, however, a third experience surfaces: that of the photographs betraying another ontological dimension which becomes manifest only after the user exhausts habitual modes of inquiry and understanding. As the viewer’s ego is not rewarded but rather stifled and displaced, the photographs must be regarded differently, and from other, non-linguistic sensibilities.

     

    Nightwalks and Frozen Palaces succeed as unique performative experiences, but not simply because of their interactive dimension or their undoubted artistry. Through their deft and aggressive exploitation of media, they offer an encounter with both performance and photography that one cannot find in a gallery, book, or theatre. There is no pretense of duplicating an experience found elsewhere, particularly within the “live,” since Glendinning, Etchells, and the members of Forced Entertainment have devised a project that, with an idiosyncratic virtuosity, negotiates the parameters and possibilities of the CD-ROM. In light of McLuhan and Levinson’s theorizing, the online performances of Forced Entertainment indeed recuperate senses and faculties that the one-dimensional photograph cannot engage. With the CD-ROMs, the user looks, listens, moves, feels, remembers, and anticipates, as well as appreciates. Since Glendinning and Etchells avoid storytelling, the sense is in the experience. In this regard, their work lends support to McLuhan and Walter Ong’s oft-neglected alternative definition of the postmodern, found in their recognition that technology allows us to think, feel, and communicate in unfamiliar and uncanny ways, ways we have only been able to realize in the last half of the twentieth century. The experience of Nightwalks and Frozen Palaces thereby approximates Heidegger’s view of art and language as a nonrepresentational revealing of what lurks on the outskirts of consciousness. As Forced Entertainment demonstrates, performance in technology helps to push us further into those unfamiliar and uncharted spaces.

    Works Cited

     

    • Causey, Matthew. “The Screen Test of the Double: The Uncanny Performer in the Space of Technology.” Theatre Journal 51.4 (December 1999): 383-94.
    • Etchells, Tim. Certain Fragments: Contemporary Performance and Forced Entertainment. London and New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • Levinson, Paul. Digital McLuhan: A Guide to the Information Millennium. London and New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. 2nd ed. New York: Signet, 1964.
    • McLuhan, Marshall, and Bruce R. Powers. The Global Village: Transformations in World Life and Media in the 21st Century. New York and Oxford: Oxford UP, 1989.
    • Ong, Walter J., S.J. Interfaces of the Word: Studies in the Evolution of Consciousness and Culture. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977.
    • —. Orality and Literacy: The Technologizing of the Word. London: Methuen, 1982.

     

  • What is Postanarchism “Post”?

    Jesse Cohn

    English Department
    Purdue University North Central
    jcohn@purduenc.edu

     

    Saul Newman, From Bakunin to Lacan: Anti-Authoritarianism and the Dislocation of Power. Lanham, MD: Lexington, 2001.

     
    Newly resurgent anarchist movements, shaking the streets from Seattle to Genoa, are caught in a field of tension between two magnetic poles: Eugene, Oregon, and Plainfield, Vermont. Eugene is the home of John Zerzan, author of Future Primitive (1994), who has pushed anarchist theory in the direction of an all-encompassing negation of “civilization.” At the Institute for Social Ecology in Plainfield in 1995, Murray Bookchin issued his much debated challenge to the “anti-civilizational” anarchists, Social Anarchism or Lifestyle Anarchism: An Unbridgeable Chasm. Bookchin’s “social anarchism” is in the tradition of the anarcho-communism theorized by Peter Kropotkin, calling for the replacement of nations and markets with a decentralized federation of self-managing communities. Zerzan’s “primitivism” calls for the destruction of the “totality,” including the abolition of technology, language, and history itself, in favor of a wild, primordial freedom (Future Primitive 129).1 The “chasm” between Eugene and Plainfield is wide, certainly. Zerzan and Bookchin agree on one thing, however: both hate postmodernism.

     

    Bookchin calls it a form of “nihilism” tailored to “yuppie” tastes (19). “Postmodernism leaves us hopeless in an unending mall,” Zerzan complains, “without a living critique; nowhere” (134). For Bookchin, theorists such as Foucault and Derrida simulate a kind of individualistic rebellion while vitiating social anarchist commitments to reason, realism, and ethical universals (9-10). For Zerzan, on the contrary, they bolster the reigning order by liquidating any notion of the autonomous individual: “the postmodern subject, what is presumably left of subject-hood, seems to be mainly the personality constructed by and for technological capital” (110).

     

    This dispute is one of the significant contexts in which Saul Newman’s From Bakunin to Lacan: Anti-Authoritarianism and the Dislocation of Power arrives. Another is the rediscovery by the academy of the anarchist theoretical tradition, where until recently anarchism had endured an official oblivion even longer and deeper than its erasure from public memory. The rediscovery of anarchist theory is a timely gift for theorists such as Todd May (The Political Philosophy of Poststructuralist Anarchism, 1994), who are eager to politicize poststructuralism but leery of bolting their concepts onto ready-made Marxist frameworks. Both May and Newman see Marxism, in all its varieties, as an ineluctably “strategic” philosophy (to use May’s term), perpetually drawn to the postulate of a “center” from which power must emanate (May 7; 10).

     

    “In contrast to Marxism,” writes Newman, “anarchism was revolutionary in analyzing power in its own right, and exposing the place of power in Marxism itself–its potential to reaffirm state authority” (6). Mikhail Bakunin and Karl Marx tore the First International asunder in 1872 over the question of the State: was it a mere instrument of ruling-class power, as Marx thought, in which case it could be seized and used by the proletariat, or was it an “autonomous and independent institution with its own logic of domination,” as Bakunin argued, in which case any “transitional” State would merely constitute a new reigning regime (Newman 21)? History has given a poignant weight to Bakunin’s premonitions of a “red bureaucracy,” of course, but for a poststructuralist rereading, his importance lies in his challenge to Marx’s method–the “strategic thinking” for which “all problems can be reduced to the basic one” (May 10). Anarchist critique undermines the confident assumption that power is merely an “epiphenomenon of the capitalist economy or class relations,” which in turn opens the way to a post-Foucauldian apprehension of the ubiquity of power relations–the “dispersed, decentered” power which comes from everywhere (Newman 2; 78).

     

    At the same time, Newman and May concur, classical anarchism ditches its own best insight: “anarchism itself falls into the trap of the place of power” (Newman 6). Both Bakunin and Kropotkin found resistance on a certain notion of human nature as an “outside” to power–a pure origin of resistance. Power, as incarnated in the State, represses and distorts the goodness of humanity; once it is eradicated by the revolution, “human essence will flourish” and power will disappear (Newman 13). For Newman, however, power is ineradicable, and any essentialist notion of “human nature” is the basis for a new domination.

     

    From the diagnosis, the prescription: for anarchism to become meaningful once again, it must be detached from its investment in essentialist conceptions of power and human identity, made to face the reality that power is everywhere. But how to do so while avoiding the gloomy conclusion that because power is everywhere, resistance is nowhere? If “resistance to power cannot be conceptualized without thinking in terms of an outside to power,” how can this “outside” be thought without resorting to yet another equally foundationalist theory of “the place of power” (97)? Overcoming this “logical impasse” is the task Newman sets for himself in the following chapters, as he scours the resources of poststructuralism for “a non-essentialist notion of the Outside” (6).

     

    But what does Newman mean by “power” when he seeks its “Outside”? It’s not always clear what Newman means by this key term. Throughout the book, he seems to engage in a certain code-switching–sometimes conscious and clearly marked, sometimes surreptitious or unconscious–alternating between at least two senses of the word. In the first chapter, Newman alerts us to the possibility of confusion; while thus far he has used “power,” “domination,” and “authority” as synonyms, “by the time we get to Foucault, ‘power’ and ‘domination’ have somewhat different meanings,” and often Newman seems to follow Foucault in defining “power” as “inevitable in any society,” while characterizing “domination” as “something to be resisted,” At other times, he retains the definition of “power” as “domination” (12). Leaving this ambiguity open weakens the argument that follows.

     

    A second weakness stems from a misreading of classical anarchist theory. Newman’s argument is premised, in the first place, on his reading of Bakunin and Kropotkin as wedded to the notion that the human subject is naturally opposed to “power.” He then notes that they also have recourse to a characterization of this human subject as fatally prone to “a ‘natural’ desire for power.” From this, he draws the conclusion that classical anarchism is riven by a fundamental inconsistency, a “hidden contradiction” (48-9). The unstated assumption which warrants this move from premise to conclusion is that these two representations of the human subject are mutually exclusive–that Bakunin and Kropotkin cannot possibly intend both.

     

    This assumption should raise the question: why not? A close reading of Bakunin and Kropotkin would more strongly support a different conclusion–that for both of these thinkers, the human subject itself, and not their representation of the subject, is the site of what Kropotkin calls a “fundamental contradiction” between “two sets of diametrically opposed feelings which exist in man” (22). In other words, as Dave Morland has explained, these thinkers’ “conception of human nature” is not statically unified, but dialectically “double-barreled”: human beings are possessed of equal potentials for “sociability” and “egoism” (12). Since neither of these potentials is necessarily more likely to be expressed than the other, ceteris paribus, neither constitutes a species destiny: “history is autonomous” (21).

     

    The (arguably mistaken) discovery of a “hidden contradiction” at the core of anarchist discourse prompts Newman’s fear that classical anarchism is dangerously open to the potential for domination, which in turn forms the rationale for the rest of his project. Errors propagate through this system, as the logic of an undertheorized “anti-essentialism” prompts him to ask the wrong questions and get the wrong answers, or to ask the right questions without looking for answers at all. If “humans have an essential desire for power,” Newman argues, “then how can one be sure that a revolution aimed at destroying power will not turn into a revolution aimed at capturing power? How can one be sure, in other words, that an anarchist revolution will be any different from a Marxist vanguard revolution?” (49).

     

    There are a number of problems with this question. First of all, depending on which version of “power” Newman is referring to, the question may depend on a false assumption. If “power” as an endless play of mutual influence, action, and reaction is distinguished from “domination,” then neither Bakunin nor Kropotkin have any pretensions about “destroying power” per se. Indeed, to a surprising extent, both are aware of the ubiquity of “social power,” which no revolution can (nor should) abolish; both understand that it is a “natural” product of human subjects, rather than an artificial imposition from outside; and both distinguish it from force, coercion, or domination, while acknowledging its potential to generate these effects, particularly when it is allowed to accrete (Bakunin, God and the State 43n).

     

    Apart from its problematic premise, however, Newman’s question is also needlessly framed as merely rhetorical or unanswerable, when it really does admit of an answer in political practice. Anarchist practices, conditioned by a theoretical emphasis on the immanence of ends within means, are distinguished from those of “a Marxist vanguard revolution” by the insistence that the immediate form of revolution (direct action, direct democracy, egalitarian self-management, the leaderless group, etc.) be its future content. Thus the anarcho-syndicalist Industrial Workers of the World union named as their project “forming the structure of the new society within the shell of the old” (Renshaw, frontispiece).

     

    Newman, however, focuses more on theory than on practice. And this is why he fails to ask the following question: if classical anarchist theory is so wedded to this notion of the natural harmony of human subjects in society, why is it so deeply preoccupied with questions of action and organization? Why bother to organize, to intervene, unless something is in need of this intervention, i.e. unless it is disorganized? In fact, these theorists do not regard anarchy as something merely spontaneous, natural, biological, given, but as something that had to be evoked, elicited, created, made from the materials of history and biology. What “every individual inherits at birth,” according to Bakunin, is “not ideas and innate sentiments, as the idealists claim, but only the capacity to feel, to will, to think, and to speak”–a set of “rudimentary faculties without any content”; this content must be supplied by the social milieu (Bakunin 240-41). Nature is a set of potentials, not a telos; social construction is the determining factor. In this sense, classical anarchist theory goes beyond the binary opposition of essentialism/non-essentialism.

     

    Rather than dwelling on the ostensible limitations of anarchism as articulated by its most influential theorists, Newman turns his attention to what he sees as the untapped potential of a relatively marginal figure in anarchist history: Max Stirner, the fellow “Young Hegelian” whom Marx so viciously assails in The German Ideology. In his 1845 Der Einzige und sein Eigentum (variously translated as “The Ego and His Own” or “The Unique One and Its Property”), Stirner uses the stick of nominalism to beat every philosophy built on abstract ideals or categories, including not only the religious submission to God but also the fetishization of “Man” in liberalism and communism: “no concept expresses me, nothing that is designated as my essence exhausts me; they are only names” (490). The self in Stirner is a subject to which all “predicates” are merely properties, so that it cannot be said to have an identity or essence (450)–leaving, as Newman sees it, ‘a radical opening which the individual can use to create his own subjectivity,” unhampered by essentialisms.

     

    This proto-Nietzschean insight excites Newman: “The importance of Stirner’s notion of becoming for politics, particularly poststructuralist politics, is great indeed: he has shown that resistance to power will never succeed if it remains trapped within fixed, essential identities” (68). Ultimately, Stirner provides Newman with a non-essentialist account of how the self, rather than encountering a power which is imposed upon it, actually produces the power to which it submits by binding itself to “fixed ideas” (ideologies and essentialist identities) and annuls this power by dissolving these abstract chains through analysis (Newman 64).

     

    Newman does consider the charge, leveled at Stirner by numerous anarchist critics, that Stirner’s “unique one,” abstracted from all history, disembedded from every relationship, and detached from all context, simply constitutes a new “essentialist identity” (and a mystified one at that) but he does not really spell out why this critique is mistaken (71). Not only does the Einzige closely resemble Sartre’s classless, genderless, cultureless, ahistorical cogito a little too closely–it also bears some resemblance to the protagonist of laissez-faire marketplace economics, the Rational Actor, whose infinite desire and arbitrary caprice (i.e. “selfishness”) are likewise purported to be the very measure of freedom.

     

    None of this prevents Newman from moving forward with his project–the reconstruction of anarchist theory within a poststructuralist framework. Four chapters provide a creative, suggestive, and relatively accessible rereading of work by Foucault, Deleuze, Guattari, Derrida, and Lacan as Newman searches for a “non-essentialist notion of the Outside.” Foucauldian genealogy and Deleuzo-Guattarian schizoanalysis extend Stirner’s insight into the abstract nature of the State, “whose formidable omnipresence exists mostly in our minds and in our subconscious desire to be dominated,” by demonstrating that “the individual represses himself,” and that “we subordinate ourselves to signifying regimes all around us” (79; 83; 100). Derridean deconstruction adds a “strategy” for “undermining the metaphysical authority of various political and philosophical discourses,” releasing action from its obligation to any “founding principle” or arché (130). In the end, Newman stakes his money on Lacan as presenting the most persuasive “non-essentialist figure of resistance” (111).

     

    Here, I suspect, will lie one of the primary points of interest for readers of poststructuralist theory, as Newman draws on Lacan’s account of how “the subject is constituted through its fundamental inability to recognize itself in the symbolic order” to explain how this apparently omnipresent and omnipotent order creates its own other–its own utopia, actually: a non-originary origin or “nonplace” (ou-topos) of resistance, blossoming in the heart of power itself (139). This nonplace is the “leftover” which is continually and necessarily generated by the operation of “the Law,” which “produces its own transgression” (140; 144). In effect, Newman uses Lacan to clarify what Foucault seemed to have left mysterious–the logic whereby power never appears without resistance appearing as well.

     

    But wait–isn’t this a little too close to Bakunin’s declaration, which Newman cites as evidence of his “essentialism,” that “there is something in the nature of the state which provokes rebellion” (qtd. in Newman 48)? If Newman argues that these two antagonists, the “state” which provokes and the “subject” who rebels, could not “exist without each other” (48), how can he avoid concluding that this goes double for the Lacanian struggle between the constitutive “Law” and the “transgression” it produces? Moreover, one might ask what it has meant to discover this “concept” or “figure” if what anarchism opposes is not “power” but “domination.” Was the quest in vain? Has all of this culminated in yet another insurgent subject which just can’t seem to do without the power that dominates it?

     

    These important questions remain unresolved. More important for anarchist readers, however, is the question of what practical consequences might ensue from the “postanarchism” which Newman formulates in his final chapter (157). How can a politics, which presupposes cooperation and joint action, found itself on Stirner’s notion that my unique ego has literally nothing in common with yours? Newman calls attention to Stirner’s proposal for a “union of egoists,” a merely voluntary and instrumental association between individuals, as opposed to a “community” which one is “forced” to participate in (70), but this amounts to a universalization of the instrumentalist logic of capitalism: “For me,” Stirner writes, “no one is a person to be respected, not even the fellow-man, but solely, like other beings, an object in which I take an interest or else do not, an interesting or uninteresting object, a usable or unusable person” (414-15). Indeed, for Stirner, “we have only one relation to each other, that of usableness, of utility, of use”; everything else is ideology (394). While Newman wants to read Stirner as “not necessarily against the notion of community itself” (70), it is hard to avoid the conclusion that Stirner himself flatly declares: “community . . . is impossible” (414). This is precisely the hyper-individualism that placed Stirner outside the mainstream of the anarchist movement, which remained committed to community and collective practice, constituting itself as “social anarchism” rather than mere individualism. “Needless to say,” Newman admits in a footnote, “some modern anarchists do not exactly embrace this postmodern logic of uncertainty and dislocation” (175 n7).

     

    In any case, it’s a relief to find someone willing to think seriously about the political outside of the confines of Marxism, rather than continually fiddling around with Marxist texts in yet another attempt to take Marx beyond Marx (as Antonio Negri has put it) or else completely scrapping that urge to “change the world” in favor of some ironic or nihilistic embrace of the world as it is (the Baudrillard solution). Post-Marxist theorists have stripped away one key concept after another (historical stages, centrality of class conflict, “progressive” colonial/ecocidal teleology, productivism, materiality/ideality binary, ideology, alienation, totality, etc.), peeling away the layers of the onion, driving Marxism further and further in the direction of its old repressed Other, anarchism–protesting all the while that “we are not anarchists” (Hardt and Negri 350).

     

    As refreshing as it is to step outside this endless Marxist monster movie, with its perennial Frankfurtian pronunciations of death, periodic Frankensteinian re-animations, and perpetual “spectres,” I would argue that anarchism has more to offer poststructuralism than Newman and May seem to recognize, and that poststructuralism affords other and better resources for the development of anarchist theory than their example would imply. In fact, it could do much to redress the damage done to the core ethos of social anarchism, as cataloged by Bookchin, by post-1960s theoretical tendencies which regard all structure, organization, and coherence as repressive. It offers a weapon for the Plainfield social anarchists against the politically and intellectually sterile primitivism of Eugene.

     

    Foucault’s demonstration of the poverty of the “repressive hypothesis” and of the positive potential of self-structuring askesis could be used to neutralize the influence of left-Freudian theories of liberation as antisocial “de-repression” (Benello 63). The wisdom of Derrida’s “there is nothing outside the text”–as Zerzan is well aware (116-17)–could be marshaled against the primitivist quest for a pure pre-social origin. Even Lacanian psychoanalysis, with its narrative of the construction of the self in and through the Symbolic, could reinforce Bookchin’s distinction between “individual autonomy” and “social freedom” (4).

     

    From Bakunin to Lacan is overly eager to get from Bakunin to Lacan–a perhaps too uncritical teleological trajectory–but at least it inquires about the way from one point to the other, which is a siginificant contribution in itself. As anarchist movements, roused from their long slumber, attempt to orient themselves in a world of globalizing capitalism, sporadic ethno-religious violence, and growing ecological crisis, they will find themselves in need of more such contributions.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Zerzan’s Elements of Refusal, particularly chapters 1-5, for the full extent of his “anti-civilizational” project.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bakunin, Mikhail. Bakunin on Anarchy: Selected Works by the Activist-Founder of World Anarchism. Ed. and trans. Sam Dolgoff. New York: Knopf, 1972.
    • —. God and the State. New York: Dover, 1970.
    • Benello, C. George. From The Ground Up: Essays on Grassroots and Workplace Democracy. Boston: South End, 1992.
    • Bookchin, Murray. Social Anarchism or Lifestyle Anarchism: An Unbridgeable Chasm. Edinburgh, Scotland: AK, 1995.
    • Hardt, Michael, and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • Kropotkin, Peter. Ethics: Origin and Development. Trans. Louis S. Friedland and Joseph R. Piroshnikoff. Dorset: Prism, 1924.
    • May, Todd. The Political Philosophy of Poststructuralist Anarchism. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State UP, 1994.
    • Morland, Dave. “Anarchism, Human Nature and History: Lessons for the Future.” Twenty-First Century Anarchism. Ed. Jon Purkis and James Bowen. London: Cassell, 1997. 8-23.
    • Renshaw, Patrick. The Wobblies: The Story of Syndicalism in the United States. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1967.
    • Stirner, Max. The Ego and His Own. Trans. Steven T. Byington. New York: Benj. R. Tucker, 1907. May 18, 2002. <http://flag.blackened.net/daver/anarchism/stirner/theego0.html>
    • Zerzan, John. Elements of Refusal. Seattle: Left Bank, 1988.
    • —. Future Primitive and Other Essays. Brooklyn, NY: Autonomedia, 1994.

     

  • Hip Librarians, Dweeb Chic: Romances of the Archive

    Suzanne Keen. Romances of the Archive in Contemporary British Fiction. Toronto: U of Toronto P, 2001.

     

     

     

     

    1.      “Understanding, which separates men from brutes,” writes Suzanne Keen of Edmund Spenser’s The Faerie Queene, “amounts to an enumeration of debts” (69). This statement asserts that in Spenser’s narrative world, comprehension of a state of social reality is possible through something called “understanding”; that such understanding results from uniquely human processes of ratiocination; and that this understanding can be produced only through a comprehensive training of the intellect that includes the study of history, defined as knowledge of the wisdom and ethical questing of previous human generations who have shaped the present. Examining the importance of historical knowledge to Spenser’s work is hardly shocking in the context of Early Modern studies, but encountering a critic who takes Spenser’s position as a starting point for a study of the post-imperial moment in British fiction gives one whiplash. Keen’s Romances of the Archive in Contemporary British Fiction does just this: it asserts that Spenser’s romance begins a tradition that, despite postmodernist countercurrents, remains vigorous and has even gained cultural force in the novels of the last few decades.

       

       

    2.      This is a (sub)genre study: the genre is the novel, the subgenre is detective fiction (with traces of the historical novel), and the sub-subgenre is the “romance of the archive.” Keen defines seven characteristics of the romance of the archive: it contains character-researchers, endowed with the corporeality and round psychology of the realistic novel; romance adventure stories, in which research features as a kernel plot action, resulting in strong closure, with climactic discoveries and rewards; discomforts and inconveniences suffered in the service of knowledge; sex and physical pleasure gained as a result of questing; settings and locations containing collections of papers; material traces of the past revealing the truth; and evocation of history, looking back from a post-imperial context (63).

       

       

    3.      The book’s thesis is that there has been a resurgence of interest in sleuthing in contemporary British fiction, but that this sleuthing has taken a special form: academic and non-professional researchers (“questers”) are main characters of novels, and the goal of these characters is to investigate the past through archival research. Their objective is to arrive at some truth about the past, and more often than not, after doing investigative research in libraries or private collections, they do indeed find this previously hidden truth. These “romances of the archive” thus are a traditionalist narrative rejoinder to the proliferation of mid- and late twentieth-century postmodernist experimental fiction. Keen complicates this thesis by arguing that these books form a conservative sub-genre that reflects the need to assert British heritage in the face of England’s traumatic loss of imperial and colonialist status in the late twentieth century. The romance of these novels–their construction of the researcher as “questor” and their frequent assertion through plot construction that it is possible to “seek and find solid facts, incontrovertible evidence, and well-preserved memories of times past”–is what links them to the Spenserian tradition of romance, as well as to detective fiction, gothic fiction, and conspiracy thrillers (à la John Le Carré).

       

       

    4.      Keen approves of these novels; it is clear throughout the study that she is not sympathetic with postmodernism’s insistent interrogation of cultural metanarratives. She is also distrustful of much recent “theory”: this is not a book participating in the (increasingly self-referential) theoretical conversation about postcolonialism and globalization. In this book, Keen does not feel compelled to make sweeping claims about British culture or global capitalism. She focuses her analysis on specific novels, and while working out the whys and wherefores of this fiction, she keeps theoretical musings to a minimum. The book is tightly focused on literature itself, making claims about literary history and using historical context to reveal rationales for literary construction.

       

       

    5.      However, Keen avoids being hermetically sealed within a formalist method, for she historicizes this British fiction in the context of post-Suez and post-Falklands political anxiety, debates about the teaching of history in British schools, and the real-world attitudes of contemporary British writers toward their homeland, toward history, and toward narrative. In her analysis of Peter Ackroyd’s work, she quotes from his papers, housed at the Beinecke Library at Yale University; when making claims about British history as an area study today, she quotes from documents relating contemporary controversies in England concerning the National Curriculum for History. Her twenty-one page bibliography attests to her fastidious research. Clearly, Keen has the kind of archival sensibility that she identifies in her subject. Romances of the Archive is itself a “romance of the archive” in many ways, a tour de force of literary criticism that assumes that answers can be found through the practice of rational critical investigation.

       

       

    6.      Keen recognizes that “even the fluffiest romances of the archive” are freighted with “political visions of contemporary Britain and its relation to its past” (60). While novels such as Barry Unsworth’s Sugar and Rum and Sacred Hunger complicate and criticize the British past, novels such as Peter Ackroyd’s Chatterton reveal “a fundamental romanticism” about history that values connections between the present and the past. At the other side of the continuum, a novel such as A.S. Byatt’s Possession defends British heritage against a postmodern attack on history. Thus these romances of the archive run the gamut from postmodernist critique to neo-conservative assertion of nationalist history. These

       

      romances of the archive...show fictional characters endeavouring to come to terms with a British past unexpurgated of its rough patches. Gravitating to the gaps in school history, revisiting glorious episodes with a critical eye, and attempting to recuperate heritage sensations from periods rendered inert or shameful by academicians, romancers of the archive enact and criticize their culture's fascination with the uses of the past. (109)

       

       

    7.      Yet in the final analysis, Keen asserts, many of these contemporary British novels are epistemologically traditionalist, overtly supporting modern humanist values and repudiating the supposed “crisis in history”: “they unabashedly interpret the past through its material traces; they build on a foundation of ‘documentarism,’ answering the postmodern critique of history with invented records full of hard facts” (3). In addition, these novels often are politically conservative, reviving a Whig interpretation of history and rebuilding a nationalist pride in Britishness. While she has sympathy with their support of modern rationalism, Keen is much more skeptical and critical of these novels’ defensiveness about the British national past. With touches of acerbic wit, she often points out their ideological contradictions. For example, when discussing Byatt’s Possession, which pits theory-sodden and status-seeking American academics against English amateur researchers in a race to find valuable historical documents, she notes that Byatt writes as if British heritage were at stake: the amateur British sleuths represent pure, disinterested research that will serve as the basis of true British history and autonomy, both threatened by American materialism and cultural imperialism. Byatt therefore “plays the heritage card in defence of literary history. When she invokes the competing literature of American and postcolonial writers, Byatt places Britain and British writing in the sympathetic role of underdog. The fact that British libraries and museums still contain treasure troves gathered from around the world lies concealed, for Byatt does not invite closer scrutiny of the imperial history of collecting and acquisition” (60).

       

       

    8.      Keen is right to note that the Right’s attitudes toward the “postmodernists” closely resemble those found in romances of the archive: that is, they construct a new arena for the ancients vs. the moderns debate, pitting postmodernism against the keepers of the culture (what Keen would call the heritage preservationists). While in the 1980s this conservative contingent railed against secular humanists in the academy, in the 1990s and later they tended to decry the ascendancy of the “postmoderns,” who strip secular humanism of its utopian social action agendas and even of its basic assumptions about human agency, reality, truth, and meaning.

       

       

    9.      What Keen doesn’t consider as deeply is that these novels critique and re-present not just a politically conservative need to assert British heritage over academic history, but also the turn toward history and archival research in academic theory since the 1970s. Great Britain played a large role in the genesis of this trend. Fueled by the events of 1968, the turn to history was indebted to an influx of ideas from outlets such as the New Left Review; the growth of cultural studies at the Birmingham Center for Contemporary Cultural Studies (founded in 1964) under the influence of, first, social science inquiry and then, later, the Marxist work of Louis Althusser and the cultural studies work of Stuart Hall; and the cultural materialist work of Raymond Williams. Combined with the development of New Historicism and neo-Marxist (or poststructuralist Marxist) theories in the U.S. and the general “crisis in history” perceived in all disciplines but especially in history, the post-1960s academy on both sides of the Atlantic has fueled ferocious debates about history and repeatedly advocated that we return to it as the wellspring of understanding. In its poststructuralist forms, this theoretical return to history has implied that we can get some “truth” about history from our archival research, even if that truth is the truth about historical contingency. For Marxist theorists, this is not an implication but an imperative: Fredric Jameson’s injunction to “Always historicize!” asserts that there is a point to historical research, that digging in the archives leads to some real revelation about the past that is provisional only in the sense that it may be incomplete. Keen is justifiably skeptical about the ultimate significance of what transpires in the arcane world of academic theory. But this turn to history in influential British academic centers such as the Birmingham Center clearly needs to be credited with a certain real impact, not only in Britain but in universities throughout the world. And it needs, as well, to be differentiated from the “postmodernist perspectives on history” that Keen constructs as the antithesis of archival romance.

       

       

    10.      As the notion of an acting self was increasingly attacked by the notion of the constructed subject in post-1960s linguistic and Foucauldian theories, Marxist and other social justice theories scrambled to find a way to repudiate or modify the idea of social determinism of the psyche without relinquishing the idea of the economic and/or cultural determinism of lived experience. As the century drew to a close, even the more linguistic or seemingly formalistic strains of poststructuralism had turned back to the problem of self and ethics, worrying the paradox of (historically situated) ethical action in the face of subject construction. The Left was turning to history with a vengeance and puzzling out its own theoretical self-contradictions as a result. The confusing result was often that both the Left and the Right attacked postmodernism as the bogeyman of history and social justice (the Left calling it fascist and the Right calling it nihilist). Postmodernist theory became the Other to both sides of the political spectrum in the “theory wars.” The relationships among the turn to a traditional belief in history in romances of the archive, the coterminous return to a belief in historical research in academic Leftist theory, and the demand for a return to history by the conservative Right on both sides of the Atlantic could be elucidated a good deal more clearly in this study.

       

       

    11.      Keen’s book, however, not only gives useful readings of specific works of fiction but also posits a social significance for the rise of this particular subgenre at this particular moment in British history. Keen discusses fiction by Julian Barnes, A.S. Byatt, Penelope Lively, Barry Unsworth, Peter Ackroyd, Kingsley Amis, Lindsay Clarke, Lawrence Norfolk, Nigel Williams, P.D. James, Robert Harris, Peter Dickinson, Margaret Drabble, Alan Hollinghurst, Adam Mars-Jones, Robert Goddard, Stevie Davies, Derek Walcott, Keri Hulme, Amitav Ghosh, and Bharati Mukherjee. A dual focus on technique and thematic subject leads her to interesting linkages. For example, she links detective fiction to romance through their shared “questing for truth,” a claim that runs counter to many studies of detective fiction that regard it as the genre most aligned with realism and modernity, particularly in its assumptions that deductive logic and humanist values can solve the puzzles of the universe. The romance of the archive incorporates detective fiction’s rationalist questing but adds to it romance’s “theological, political, and personal frames of reference for making moral and ethical judgments about human behaviour” (157). For example, in her chapter “Envisioning the Past,” Keen discusses novels that scrutinize the archival past to re-evaluate expectations of gender roles and sexual orientation and concludes that these novels tend toward the uncanny and a libidinal narrative experimentation. In the last chapter, “Postcolonial Rejoinders,” she unflinchingly discusses how English writers often display a “nostalgia, defensiveness, and anxiety” about British colonial history that includes “regret about Britain’s decline in global status and annoyance at the complaints of postcolonial subjects” (215). These writers, she believes, attempt to manage the anxieties of the post-Falklands decades by offering a “reassertion of British glory” (230).

       

       

    12.      Keeping her focus tightly trained on realist literature and British literary history, Keen observes the psychology of contemporary British writers often ignored by critics trained on avant-garde or postcolonial fiction. Keen offers a study of the British realist novel in a post-imperial age, a discussion of the mainstream center rather than the postcolonial border. Her book is written clearly (this is a critical study that undergraduate students could actually read and understand) and could be used as the basis for a special topics course on contemporary British fiction, particularly in this subgenre. Romances of the Archive is a nuanced account of contemporary British fiction that analyzes the way that romances of the archive are indeed romances, incorporating presentism, antiquarianism, and humanist (even theological) values. What Keen’s own archival and critical quest has revealed–essentially, a new mode of literary nationalism–certainly deserves our further attention.

      Department of English
      University of Tennessee
      aelias2@utk.edu

  • The Victorian Postmodern

    Jason Camlot

    English Department
    Concordia University
    camlot@vax2.concordia.ca

     

    John Kucich and Dianne F. Sadoff, eds., Victorian Afterlife: Postmodern Culture Rewrites the Nineteenth Century. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2000.

     

    Consider the following “true” story as an exemplum for approaching the idea of the Victorian postmodern: in the mid-1990s, artist and critic Todd Alden asked 400 art collectors to deliver to him canned samples of their feces for an art show. The idea for the show, as explained in the letter he sent to the collectors, was to represent “a historical rethinking of the Italian artist Piero Manzoni’s epoch-making work, Merda d’artista,” in which Manzoni “produced, conserved, and tinned ninety cans of his own feces, which he sold by the ounce, based on that day’s price of gold” (Alden 23). Alden noted that cans of Manzoni’s shit, which found few buyers back in 1961 when the work was first “made,” were “now being sold for as much as $75,000”; he proposed to make some of the cans he collected available for sale, and, further, “as a courtesy, each collector/producer [would] be offered the option to retain one of his/her ‘own’ cans at an amount that is one half of the initial offering price” (24). In May 1996, Alden’s display featuring eighty-one such cans was scheduled to open in Manhattan, but the New York Observer revealed Alden’s claim to be a hoax since only one collector had actually contributed as instructed. Now, the briefest consideration of Victorian art critic John Ruskin’s notion that “consumption absolute is the end, crown, and perfection of production” (217) in relation to Todd Alden’s proposal for Collector’s Shit will reveal how distant a postmodern notion of critique is from that of the nineteenth-century critic of culture and especially from the life-centered conceptions of culture and value promoted by the likes of Ruskin and William Morris.

     

    Ruskin continues, in the passage cited above, to say that “wise consumption is a far more difficult art than wise production” (217), and the Ruskinian question that arises in relation to Alden’s art proposal is how does one best consume it (in Ruskin’s sense, meaning use it, employ it, live with it–promote life with it)? The initial answer is that the act of purchasing it is the sole means of consumption available in this particular transaction. Subsequently one can only own it, have it, but not live with it in any other way. Admittedly such passive ownership does represent a means of action, for the “collectors” (with their single bargain-tins) and especially the artist/owner himself, in owning the tins, are actually “sitting on them” as investments that they hope will rise in monetary value over a period of time. Value here depends almost exclusively upon the second of the two conditions that John Stuart Mill deemed necessary for a thing to have any value in exchange, that is, the “difficulty in its attainment” (544), and it is upon this principle that the limited edition, the autographed novel, or the signed can of feces will bring its monetary return, or so the collector hopes. I say that the cans’ value depends upon this condition almost exclusively because, although the first of Mill’s two conditions for a thing to have value in exchange (“it must be of some use”) may seem glaringly absent from such an object, the counterargument may be made that the tins (hoax or not) are responsible for a valuable chain of critical thoughts about art, value, utility, culture, and history. The apparent uselessness of the tins of feces is arguably useful in that it leads one to consider the relationship between use value and exchange value, and in doing so it brings us to one of the key conundrums arising in an attempt to theorize the relationship between a Victorian past and a postmodern present. That is, it is often the distinction between an artifact’s inherent value (of which shit, no matter whose it is, has little to none now, although it was worth something in the time of Henry Mayhew’s “pure”-finders and mudlarks [142; 155]) and its marginal or institutional value (of which canned shit can have enormous value) that we are grappling with when we try to understand how the Victorian period (which is already a vexed formulation) continues to live in the present.

     

    An exploration of how we live with culture now as compared to how Victorians lived with culture in the nineteenth century, and how we can best pursue “a historical rethinking” of the Victorians in our present cultural endeavors, is the primary focus of the articles collected under the title Victorian Afterlife. John Kucich and Dianne F. Sadoff state in their editors’ introduction that the contributors of the fifteen essays in this collection “construct a history of the present by writing about rewritings of the Victorian past” (xiv), but this collection does not really construct a history of now so much as provide a diverse sampling of some kinds of historical knowledge that are deemed possible or warranted in contemporary cultural studies. I am not suggesting by this distinction that the latter project is less valuable than the former. It is perhaps more valuable and certainly is more tenable. Besides, by the end of this introductory essay, Kucich and Sadoff relinquish the idea that their volume constructs a history of the present and say that they “hope to provide instead multiple ways to measure the ideological motives and effects of a postmodern history that inevitably ‘forgets’ the past, or remembers it by trying to imagine it as present, or fashions its past by retelling the history of its present” (xxviii). They see the debate that structures their anthology “as an opening for the profoundly important analysis of the conditions of postmodern historicity and of postmodernism itself as a reflection on historical knowledge” (xxviii). I think this is a fair assessment of many of the essays in the collection, although some of them focus on how postmodern culture rewrites or has rewritten the nineteenth century without really theorizing the ideas of historicism or periodization that inform their methods of reading. Nor does a strong sense of the meaning of the term “postmodern” emerge from this collection, in which we find nothing like the barrage of attempts to develop a working framework for this concept that we experienced in the mid-1980s. The subtitle of the collection is “Postmodern Culture Rewrites the Nineteenth Century,” and probably it should come as no surprise that “culture” is a more comfortably handled term than “postmodernism” in this collection, since about two-thirds of the book is authored by scholars who specialize in the nineteenth century.

     

    Again, as the subtitle of the book suggests, many of the essays in the collection consider rewritings either of key Victorian texts or figures by contemporary authors, artists, and filmmakers, such as, for example, the cinematic afterlife of Dracula; contemporary representations of Oscar Wilde, Jane Austen and Lewis Carroll’s Alice; and A.S. Byatt’s “ghostwriting” of the Victorian realist novel. Tracing specific intertexts across a century, these essays at their best suggest hypotheses about the significance of how Victorian texts have been rewritten (Hilary Schor’s essay on A.S. Byatt is a case in point). At their weakest, they fall into the genre of the catalogue, listing the various instances of rewriting without truly developing a thesis about the implications of the various contemporary manifestations of Victorian figures they have compiled.

     

    Jonathan Culler has remarked that “intertextuality is the general discursive space that makes a text intelligible,” which ultimately “leads the critic who wishes to work with it to concentrate on cases that put in question the general theory” one brings to the table in the act of interpretation (106-7). Hilary M. Schor’s essay, “Sorting, Morphing, and Mourning: A.S. Byatt Ghostwrites Victorian Fiction,” is one of the stronger instances of the more specifically analogical essays in Victorian Afterlife because she approaches the idea of intertextuality as something that provides a frame of meaning requiring analysis and not as a predetermined assumption. She poses from the outset a large and valuable question about the status of realism in contemporary fiction and then explains that Byatt is less a “postmodernist” than a “post-realist,” in that she “invents a contemporary version of realism that can reanimate the complicated literary genres of the past” by approaching the novel as “a ‘literary’ device for giving forms form” (237). The specific strategies that Schor finds in Byatt–those of “sorting, morphing, and mourning”–are strategies borrowed both from the Victorians and from contemporary technologies, from Victorian science fiction and sociology, “to our computer-generated fascination with morphing and transformation, to cinematic and other technological ways of drawing attention to form itself” (239). In identifying this diverse range of strategies used by Byatt to generate her own version of realist narrative, Schor establishes a truly useful means of considering how a Victorian mode of inquiry (Darwin’s naturalism, in this case) can find a strange sort of afterlife via the nature shows on television (to which Byatt attributes the genesis of her novella Morpho Eugenia) and in contemporary fiction.

     

    Again from Culler, we get a sense of what is most important in approaching a work as a rewriting of a previous one, the main problem of interpreting a text according to such a framework becoming “that of deciding what attitude the [text] takes to the prior discourse which it designates as presupposed” (114). Schor’s essay does a good job of showing how Byatt grapples with the implications of Victorian realism as a seemingly transparent mode of organizing experience–by her use of the “sorting” mechanisms of other nineteenth-century genres and of twentieth-century media–and thus spells out the Victorian novel that Byatt presupposes in composing her own novella. Some of the essays in this collection do not spend as much time on this question of the attitude of a contemporary text toward its Victorian analog and subsequently fall into cataloguing shared themes, figures, and forms without developing enough of an argument about the significance of the similarities and coincidences that are being traced. So, while Shelton Waldrep’s “The Uses and Misuses of Oscar Wilde” and Kali Israel’s “Asking Alice: Victorian and Other Alices in Contemporary Culture” offer many, many examples of Wilde and Alice reincarnated on the contemporary screen, stage, and page, we end up with something more like a pile of specifically described instances than an attempt to analyze the combined meaning of these instances. And when we do get such attempts, for example, when Waldrep concludes that “Wilde’s current popularity has much to do with his proto-postmodernism,” or that “our nostalgia is for him, but our representations of him betray our own anxieties about our origins and structures for knowing ourselves” (62), they are not very satisfying.

     

    Other essays tracing specific intertexts offer more in the way of theses about why we in the 1990s seemed so fascinated by the cultural artifacts of the 1890s and earlier. Mary A. Favret’s “Being True to Jane Austen” shifts effectively between a close textual analysis of Austen’s novels Persuasion and Sense and Sensibility and film versions of these novels by Roger Michell and Ang Lee, respectively, which Favret says “are uncannily attentive to the sorts of fidelity currently demanded of Austen’s faithful” (64). Favret’s reading sketches out the connection between an ethos of sexual fidelity in Austen’s novels an the fidelity of the film to its source text and argues that “at the heart of these films is the question, made redundant by the plot of each novel, of whether or not being true is an animating or mortifying process” (64). Favret concludes that the intimation of death characteristic of the film versions of these novels represents a sense of the ultimate inaccessibility of the past and of “our own postmodern inability to conceive in any substantial way of immortality–even for Jane Austen” (80). Ronald R. Thomas develops an interesting thesis about the “irrepressible haunting of contemporary visual culture by the specters of nineteenth-century novel culture,” arguing that the nostalgia and anxiety informing films based on Bram Stoker’s novel Dracula come from the sense that we have “lost a nineteenth-century conception” of autonomous “character” and “the modern belief that the forces of the past drain the life from the present even as they sustain it” (289). This last part of Thomas’s thesis is enlarged into a truly interesting reading of Dracula as cipher for the nexus of new media and subjectivity. Thomas’s reading of Dracula could be seen to interestingly augment that of Friedrich Kittler (see, for example, Kittler’s “Dracula’s Legacy”) but there is no reference to Kittler in Thomas’s essay.

     

    Not surprisingly, many of the essays in this collection focus on the theme of technology. Jennifer Green-Lewis’s “At Home in the Nineteenth Century: Photography, Nostalgia, and the Will to Authenticity” considers Victorian photography in order to explain the particular kind of nostalgia that we have for the period. She argues that “the Victorians are visually real to us because they have a documentary assertiveness unavailable to persons living before the age of the camera” (31). Green-Lewis goes on to assess the kind of Victorian things we give visibility to and want to see, noting the popularity of pastoral over urban photographs, and pictures of Victorians “pretending to be something other than themselves” (39), dressed in costumes of an earlier era, and thus replicating our present desire to find ourselves in these figures of the past. Both Judith Roof’s “Display Cases” and Jay Clayton’s “Hacking the Nineteenth Century” draw connections between computers and Victorian systems of knowledge, although the trajectories of their arguments move in opposite directions. Roof compares present-day computer graphics and layout to the typological tactics of Victorian print culture and the organizing techniques of Victorian museums, arguing (more by analogy than from a historically grounded genealogy) that “Victoriana links new technology to an older tradition, making it seem safe and familiar” to us (101). She smartly suggests that the Victorian exhibit and the modern computer are both representative of “the development of a technology of display designed to attract visitors to a vision of mastery and national wealth” (104). Again, despite her reading of the Macintosh “trash can” as a metaphor that transforms “metonymic computer logic into [a] trite, vaguely humorous, familiar” metaphor (113), Roof does not engage Kittler’s work on how the material particularities of “sound and image, voice and text” inherent in specific Victorian technologies “are reduced to surface effects, known to consumers as interface” (Kittler, Gramophone, Film, Typewriter 1). Clayton examines William Gibson and Bruce Sterling’s historical sci-fi novel The Difference Engine, its interest in how Victorian technologies (such as Charles Babbage’s Analytical Engine) troubled the human/machine binary way back in the 1830s, and the possible disjunctions between technological advance and ethical advance. He argues that “to hack the nineteenth century in a literary work means altering the temporal order of events, deliberately creating anachronisms in a representational world” (195) and then shows us, through an interesting reading of The Difference Engine with respect to Benjamin Disraeli’s Conservative condition-of-England novel Sybil, that the climax of Gibson and Sterling’s novel is an anachronistic “throwback to the days when English engineering and empire reigned supreme, when few challenged the marriage of technology and the police, and when masculine power and the erotics of vulnerable femininity were widely approved norms” (198). His general argument suggests that the two main ideological assertions of postmodern fiction’s fascination with Victorian technology are “escapism” and the articulation of “a politics of the future” that challenges the present with the past.

     

    Other essays engaging explicitly with Victorian politics and their afterlife are Ian Baucom’s “Found Drowned: The Irish Atlantic,” which considers how Paul Muldoon’s poetry invokes traumatic Victorian events (like the Irish famine) to rethink present-day Irish political identity, and Simon Gikandi’s “The Embarrassment of Victorianism: Colonial Subjects and the Lure of Englishness,” which begins by wondering how native anti-colonialists could promote dominant colonialist values, and then demonstrates that the seeds of colonial liberation existed in the most traditional of Victorian moral codes. Together, Laurie Langbauer’s essay “Queen Victoria and Me,” which draws parallels between the political scripts of female power performed by Queen Victoria and the public roles that contemporary feminist academics must assume, and Susan Lurie’s reading of Jane Campion’s rewriting of Henry James’s desexualized Victorian heroines, in terms of the relative political worth of the unconventional Victorian sexualities revived by postmodernism, represent an interesting meditation upon feminism’s Victorian origins.

     

    Finally, the two essays in the collection that most explicitly engage in thinking about what the “Victorian Postmodern” means as a critical concept are John McGowan’s “Modernity and Culture, the Victorians and Cultural Studies” and Nancy Armstrong’s “Postscript: Contemporary Culturalism: How Victorian Is It?” These two essays frame the book as a whole; McGowan’s text opens the discussion and Armstrong’s closes it, and together they may represent the most valuable line of thinking that the book has to offer. When, in 1985, Jean-François Lyotard curated an “art and technology extravaganza” at the Georges Pompidou Center in an attempt to chart “the new order of our postmodern condition”–this from a flyer distributed at the exhibit–Lyotard had the visitors work their way through a labyrinth of electronic gadgetry, “old” art juxtaposed with “new” art juxtaposed with “non” art, all the while donning headphones and listening to “great” modernist writers reading from their works (Rajchman 111). Lyotard’s exhibit, titled “Les Immatiriaux,” forwarded the curatorial argument that the very idea of postmodernism has emerged from and continues to play itself out according to the soundtrack of modernism. McGowan and Armstrong’s essays articulate the general insistence of Victorian Afterlife upon a version of the present that thinks its way out of that early and powerful version of the postmodern. McGowan does this by acknowledging that the concepts of periodization, Zeitgeist (the idea that ages have spirits or conditions), and our proclivity to situate ourselves and to characterize eras are inherited from “a group of German-influenced English writers who were the first literary (or artistic) intellectuals cum social critics,” people like Mill, Carlyle, Ruskin, Arnold, Harriet Martineau and William Morris (3). His essay first connects the idea of “Zeitgeist” to concepts of “the modern” and “culture,” then sketches out how all of our categories of political orientation are derived from these three terms, and finally tries to “speculate on what the critical enterprise would look like if we somehow managed to dispense with the ‘modern’ and ‘culture’ as signposts” (4). As it turns out, the critical enterprise under this dispensation looks a lot like a Nietzschean will to consider “what elements of the past can mean in relation to our purposes in the present” (24). McGowan articulates the results of such a conditional line of thinking: “Instead of viewing things that appear as indices of who they (the Victorians) were and/or who we (postmoderns?) are . . . we would see in stories of the past images of being in the world that tell us there are multiple ways to be human and that we are engaged in the project of living out some of those ways” (24).

     

    Similarly, Nancy Armstrong argues that the critical work of Victorian Afterlife renders “obsolete the whole question of whether postmodernism represents a break from modernism or just another version of it” (313), and suggests instead that “postmodernism is a consequence and acknowledgment of the Victorian redefinition of the nation” (312) and of the nineteenth-century sense of acculturation as a praxis of decorum. The main connection she draws between then and now has to do with the status of the idea of “the real” or of authenticity as a defining aspect of identity. She says, “postmodernism asks, what if the most oft-repeated and banal aspects of our culture . . . are the only basis for our selves” and “just another cultural formation that we happen to consider most primary and real?” (319). In asking this question in relation to a notion of Victorian culture that was already aware of this, Armstrong suggests that, “in this respect, postmodernism is perhaps more Victorian than even the Victorians were,” and its focus on the details informing genres of action represents “an extension of the Austen principle that decorum–which for the novelist was the accumulation of rather small but absolutely appropriate details–is what we really are” (319).

     

    So the afterlife of the Victorians exists, according to the postscript of this collection, in the realist’s attention to minute details that ultimately provide a script for behavior and an actual sense of being. Armstrong’s account of the Victorian qualities inherent in our postmodern present seems to take Carlyle’s key sign of the time–the assumption of his age “that to the inward world (if there be any) our only conceivable road is through the outward” (70)–and presents it, not as the symptom of the “mechanical” malady, but as the status quo of our postmodern condition. Going back to the nineteenth century, Armstrong remarks, “commodity culture created a world in which virtually anything spontaneous and natural about . . . life could be bought up and resold in a predictable commercial package that would in turn elicit only canned responses” (315). The Victorian sense of “the real” that emerged from this commodity culture has now moved so far in the direction of a commercially packaged and canned experience, Armstrong says, “that how people are represented may well be who they are” (323). Viable cultural criticism, then, must approach the canned world as the real one “if the material conditions in which people live and die are going to improve” (323). This idea is not so distant from Carlyle’s definition of cultural criticism back in 1829 as that which critiques “our own unwise mode of viewing Nature” (83). “Because our [Victorian] forebears were so successful in establishing their picture of the world as the world itself,” Armstrong tells us, “cultural theory is not just a legacy they bequeathed to us, but one of the most effective means of intervening in the reproduction of that picture” (323-24). This confidence in the transforming potential of cultural theory is probably the most Victorian thing about this collection of essays as a whole, and it is an intimation worthy of a long and healthy afterlife.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Alden, Todd. Letter. “Rear-Action Avant-Garde.” Harper’s Magazine 286 (May 1993): 23-4.
    • Carlyle, Thomas. Selected Writings. New York: Penguin Books, 1980.
    • Culler, Jonathan. The Pursuit of Signs: Semiotics, Literature, Deconstruction. Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 1981.
    • Kittler, Friedrich A. “Dracula’s Legacy.” Trans. William Stephen Davis. Stanford Humanities Review 1.1 (1989): 143-73.
    • —. Gramophone, Film, Typewriter. Trans. Geoffrey Winthrop-Young and Michael Wutz. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • Mayhew, Henry. London Labour and the London Poor. Vol. 2. New York: Dover, 1968.
    • Mill, John Stuart. Principles of Political Economy. Ed. W. J. Ashley. London: Longmans, Green and Co., 1909.
    • Rajchman, John. “The Postmodern Museum.” Art in America 73 (Oct. 1985): 110-17.
    • Ruskin, John. Unto This Last and Other Writings. New York: Penguin, 1985.

     

  • Saussure and the Grounds of Interpretation

     

    David Herman

    Department of English
    North Carolina State University
    dherman@unity.ncsu.edu

     

    Roy Harris, Saussure and His Interpreters. New York: New York UP, 2001.

     

    The author of a 1983 English translation of Ferdinand de Saussure’s Cours de linguistique générale, as well as two previous books centering on Saussure’s theories of language (Reading Saussure and Language, Saussure, and Wittgenstein), Roy Harris brings a wealth of expertise to his new book on Saussure. More than this, as is amply borne out in the early chapters of Saussure and His Interpreters, Harris is deeply familiar with the various manuscript sources (i.e., students’ notebooks) on which Charles Bally and Albert Sechehaye relied in producing/editing what became the Course in General Linguistics, the first edition of which was published in 1916. 1 Added to these other qualifications is Harris’s stature as an expert in the field of linguistic theory more generally. 2 From all of these achievements emerges the profile of a commentator uniquely positioned to interpret–to understand as well as adjudicate between–previous interpretations of Saussure.

     

    To be sure, Harris’s background and research accomplishments–his knowledge of the origins, details, and larger framework of Saussurean language theory–are unimpeachable. 3 But while Harris’s credentials are unimpeachable, there remains the question of whether those credentials have equipped him to take the true measure of Saussure’s interpreters, i.e., those who claim (or for that matter disavow) a Saussurean basis for their work. This question, prompted by the tone as well as the technique of a book cast as an exposé of nearly a century’s worth of “misreadings” of Saussure, is itself part of a broader issue exceeding the scope of the author’s study. The broader issue concerns the exact nature of the relation between ideas developed by specialists in particular fields of study and the form assumed by those ideas as interpreted (and eo ipso adapted) by non-specialists working in other, more or less proximate fields. Also at issue are the nature and source of the standards that could (in principle) be used to adjudicate between better and worse interpretations of source ideas imported into diverse target disciplines–that is, into domains of study in which, internally speaking, distinct methods and objects of interpretation already hold sway. Indeed, even within the same discipline in which the ideas in question had their source, interpretations can vary widely–as suggested by Harris’s chapters on linguists who in his view misunderstand or misappropriate Saussure (the list includes such major figures as Leonard Bloomfield, Louis Hjelmslev, Roman Jakobson, and Noam Chomsky). Although these deep issues sometimes surface during Harris’s exposition, they do not receive the more sustained treatment they deserve. The result is a study marked, on the one hand, by its technical brilliance in outlining the “Rezeptiongeschichte” of Saussurean theory, but on the other hand by its avoidance of other, foundational questions pertaining to the possibilities and limits of interpretation itself. The salience of those questions derives, in part, from the transdisciplinary legacy of Saussure’s own work.

     

    It is worth underscoring at the outset that Harris’s account of Saussure and his interpreters is not merely a descriptive one. Granted, the author carefully traces the transformation and recontextualization of Saussurean ideas as they were propagated within the field of linguistics and later (or in some cases simultaneously) migrated from linguistics into neighboring areas of inquiry. 4 But Harris does not rest content with pointing out where an intra- or interdisciplinary adaptation differs from what (in his interpretation) is being adapted. Persistently, in every chapter of the book, and sometimes in quite vituperative terms, Harris construes this adaptive process as one involving distortion, i.e., a failure to get Saussure right. 5 I discuss Harris’s specific claims in more detail below. For the moment, I wish to stress how this prescriptive, evaluative dimension of the author’s approach is at odds with what he emphasizes at the beginning of his study–namely, the status of Saussure’s text as itself a construct, a constellation of interpretive decisions made by those who sought to record and, in the case of his editors, promulgate Saussure’s ideas.

     

    Indeed, Harris’s meticulous analysis of the textual history of the Course invites one further turn of the Saussurean screw: if the very text on which all subsequent interpretations have been built is itself the product of students’ and editors’ interpretations, then who, precisely, is in a position to interpret Saussure’s interpreters? Or rather, where is the ground on which one might stand to distinguish between the wheat of productive adaptations and the chaff of non- or counter-productive misappropriations, whether these borrowings are made within or across the boundaries of linguistic study? 6 In this connection, there is a sense in which Harris seeks to have his cake and eat it, too. The author advances the claim that, in the case of Saussure’s text, interpretation goes all the way down, meaning that no feature of the Course is not already an interpretation by Saussure’s contemporaries. But he also advances the claim that at some point (is it to be stipulated by all concerned parties?) interpretation stops and the ground or bedrock of textual evidence begins (2), such that those of Saussure’s successors who engaged in particular strategies or styles of interpretation can be deemed guilty of error, of violating the spirit (if not the letter) of Saussure’s work.

     

    As demonstrated by the early chapters of Saussure and His Interpreters, no writer is more aware than Harris that the book often viewed as the foundational document of (European) structuralism was in fact a composite creation, a portmanteau assemblage of more-or-less-worked-out hypotheses by Saussure himself, re-calibrated for the purposes of undergraduate instruction; notes taken by students not always consistent in their reports of what Saussure actually said in class; conjectures, surmises, extrapolations, and outright interpolations by the editors of the Course; and, later, interpretations of Saussure by linguists, anthropologists, semioticians, and others–interpretations because of which later generations of readers came to “find” things in Saussure’s text that would not necessarily have been discoverable when the book first appeared. As Harris puts it in chapter 1, “Interpreting the Interpreters,” “the majority of Saussure’s most original contributions to linguistic thought have passed through one or more filters of interpretation” (2). As Harris’s discussion proceeds, the emphasis on Saussure’s ideas as inevitably interpretively filtered gives way to a series of attempts to dissociate Saussure’s theories from a group of filters that seem to be qualitatively different from those falling into the initial group (i.e., students and editors). Harris distinguishes between the two sets of filters by dividing them into contemporaries and successors (3-4), although by Harris’s own account neither group can be exempted from the process by which Saussure’s ideas were actively constructed rather than passively and neutrally conveyed. Given that (as Harris discusses in chapter 3) Saussure’s editors took the liberty of writing portions of the Course without any supporting documents, it is not altogether clear why the parameters of distance in time and intellectual inheritance (4) are sufficient to capture what distinguishes a successor’s from a contemporary’s interpretations. An editorial interpolation is arguably just as radically interpretive as any post-Saussurean commentator’s extrapolation. In any case, in interpreting Saussure, neither contemporaries nor successors have stood on firm ground, whatever their degree of separation in time and tradition from the flesh-and-blood “author” of the Course.7

     

    Indeed, Harris’s concern early on is with the difficulty or rather impossibility of getting back to the solid ground of Saussure’s “true”–unfiltered–ideas. In chapter 2, “The Students’ Saussure,” the author remarks that two separate questions must be addressed in considering the students’ notebooks as evidence concerning Saussure’s ideas: on the one hand, whether the students understood their teacher’s points; on the other hand, whether what Saussure said in class always reliably indicated his considered position on a given topic (17). With respect to the latter question, Saussure may have sometimes been unclear, and he also may have sometimes oversimplified his views for pedagogical reasons. The challenge of reconstructing the Saussurean framework on the basis of student notes is therefore considerable. Moreover, Saussure’s decisions about what to include in his lectures were in some cases dictated by the established curriculum of his time, rather than by priorities specific to his approach to language and linguistic study. Assuming as much, Saussure’s editors expunged from the published version of the Course the survey of Indo-European languages that he presented in his actual lectures (18-23), to mention just one example.

     

    As for the editors themselves, Harris discusses their role in chapter 3. The author notes that, in statements about the Course written after the publication of the first edition, Bally and Sechehaye came to quote their own words as if they were Saussure’s (32). The publication of Robert Godel’s Les Sources manuscrites du Cours de linguistique générale de F. de Saussure in 1957, however, revealed that many of the editors’ formulations lacked any manuscript authority whatsoever. They were imputations by Bally and Sechehaye rather than, in any nontrivial sense, reconstructions of the student notebooks. Also, in selecting which Saussurean materials to include in the Course and in making decisions about which ideas should be given pride of place in the exposition, the editors were inevitably biased by their own linguistic training and theories. The editors’ biases came into play in their choices about how to present such key distinctions as those between signification and value, synchrony and diachrony, and “la langue” and “la parole.”

     

    In chapters 4-10, Harris’s focus shifts from contemporaries to successors, with chapter 11 attempting to take stock of “History’s Saussure.” As the first group of interpretive filters, Saussure’s contemporaries already impose a layer of mediation between the linguist’s theories and modern-day readers’ efforts to know what those theories were. But the second group of filters imposes what often comes across as an even thicker–and somehow more reprehensible–layer of intervening (mis)interpretations on top of the layer already there because of the contemporaries’ (mis)interpretations. Thus, the chapters in question portray a process by which a series of filters get stacked one by one on top of Saussure’s already-filtered ideas, according to the following recursive procedure:

     

    Filter 1 (Saussure's ideas filtered through students and editors)
    Filter 2 (Filter 1(Saussure's ideas filtered through students and editors))
    Filter 3 (Filter 2(Filter1(Saussure's ideas filtered through students and editors)))
    etc.

     

    As each successive filter gets pushed onto the stack, Saussure’s ideas (at least as they were interpreted by his contemporaries rather than his successors) recede farther in historical memory. Even worse, the filters continually being loaded on the stack are the handiwork of commentators guilty of carelessness (Chomsky), incomprehension (Bloomfield, Jakobson, Claude Lévi-Strauss), confusion (Roland Barthes), or even meretricious slander (Jacques Derrida), as the case may be.

     

    Again, though, this compilation of misreadings seems strangely at odds with Harris’s earlier emphasis on the instability of the Course as itself an assemblage (one might even say stack) of more or less plausible interpretations. Does Harris mean to imply that, in shifting from contemporaries to successors, the interpretations of the former become “evidence” on which the latter must base their own, later interpretations? If so, by what mechanism (and at what point on the continuum linking contemporaries and successors) does an interpretation or set of interpretations achieve evidential status? Though centrally important to Harris’s study, these questions about validity in interpretation are never explicitly posed (let alone addressed) by the author.

     

    To take the linguists first, Harris identifies a host of misinterpretations of Saussure on the part of scholars who, as specialists in Saussure’s field of study, apparently should have known better. None of the linguists included in the author’s scathing series of exposés emerges in very good shape. In “Bloomfield’s Saussure,” Harris suggests that the famous American linguist misunderstood the distinction between synchronic and diachronic linguistics, the Saussurean conception of the sign, and, more generally, the relationship between Saussure’s theoretical position and his own. “Hjelmslev’s Saussure” characterizes the Danish linguist’s theory of glossematics as one that claims to be the logical distillation of Saussurean structuralism but ends up looking more like a “reductio ad absurdum” of Saussure’s ideas: “Glossematics shows us what happens in linguistics when the concept of la langue is idealized to the point where it is assumed to exist independently of any specific materialization whatever” (90), and thus stripped of the social aspects with which Saussure himself invested the concept (93). 8 In “Jakobson’s Saussure,” Harris notes that whereas Jakobson presented himself as a Saussurean, the Russian linguist rejected a number of Saussure’s key tenets, including the crucial principles of linearity and arbitrariness (96-101). More than this, Harris rather uncharitably discerns a careerist motive for the fluctuations in Jakobson’s estimates of Saussure’s importance over the course of his (Jakobson’s) career. Harris’s argument is that while Jakobson was still in Europe, he felt obliged to pay tribute to Saussure; but when Jakobson emigrated to the U.S. and tried to establish himself as a linguist during a time when anti-mentalist, behaviorist doctrines were the rule, he shifted to an attack mode.

     

    Even harsher than his comments on Jakobson, however, are the remarks found in Harris’s chapter on “Chomsky’s Saussure.” In the author’s view, “far from seeing himself as a Saussurean, from the outset Chomsky was more concerned to see Saussure as a possible Chomskyan” (153). But though Chomsky tried to map the distinction between “la langue” and “la parole” into his own contrast between competence and performance, and also to conscript Saussure’s mentalist approach into his campaign against then-dominant behaviorism,

     

    Saussure's apparent indifference to recursivity showed that being a "mentalist" did not automatically make one a generativist, while at the same time Saussure's view of parole raised the whole question of how much could safely be assigned to the rule-system alone and how much to the individual. Thus Saussure's patronage brought along with it certain problems for Chomsky. (155)

     

    In criticizing Chomsky’s attempts to extricate himself from these problems, Harris seems to abandon constructive debate in favor of sniping: “Chomsky’s much-lauded ‘insight’ concerning the non-finite nature of syntax turns out to coincide–unsurprisingly–with his poor eyesight in reading Saussure” (166). This barb reveals a degree of animus not wholly explained by even the worst interpretive slip-up vis-à-vis Saussure. Why is it that Bloomfield’s incomprehension of Saussurean ideas merits a far less severe reprimand than what appears to be a careless misappropriation of Saussure on Chomsky’s part? Again, the criterion for determining degrees of fit between interpretations and Saussure’s theories–the ground from which better and worse interpretations might be held side-by-side and adjudicated–is never explicitly identified in Harris’s study. Hence it remains unclear why Chomsky should be subjected to much rougher treatment than Bloomfield, since both theorists are (according to the author) guilty of misjudging the relation between Saussure’s ideas and their own. 9

     

    The chapters devoted to nonspecialist interpreters of the Course–i.e., scholars working outside the field of linguistics–raise other questions pertaining to Saussure and the grounds of interpretation. At issue is whether a commentator based in the host discipline from which a descriptive nomenclature, set of concepts, or method of analysis originates has the license or even the intellectual obligation to point out where others not based in that discipline have gone wrong in adapting the nomenclature, concepts, or methods under dispute. At issue, too, is just what “going wrong” might mean in the context of such inter-disciplinary adaptations. I submit that such considerations, barely or not at all broached in Harris’s account, in fact need to be at the center of any account of Saussure and his interpreters.

     

    Chapter 7 is devoted to “Lévi-Strauss’s Saussure”; chapter 8 and chapter 10 concern “Barthes’s Saussure” and “Derrida’s Saussure,” respectively. Already in 1945 Lévi-Strauss had begun to characterize linguistics as the “pilot-science” on which the fledgling science of anthropology should model itself, but it was not until 1949, in Lévi-Strauss’s article on “Histoire et ethnologie,” that Saussure’s Course was celebrated as marking the advent of structural linguistics (112). As Harris points out, however, although both Lévi-Strauss and Lacan regarded the development of the concept of the phoneme as the crucial breakthrough made by modern linguistics, Saussure cannot be given credit for this idea (117). Lévi-Strauss for one placed great emphasis on the phoneme as a kind of paradigm concept, famously adapting it to create the notion of the “mytheme” (or smallest meaningful unit of the discourse of a myth) (Lévi-Strauss, “Structural”). The problems with this particular recontextualization have been well documented (see Pavel); Harris subsumes those problems under a more general “anthropological misappropriation of the vocabulary of structuralism” (126). Lévi-Strauss’s misappropriation encompasses not only the idea of phonemes but also Saussure’s opposition between synchronic and diachronic and the very notion of system or structure. Thus, “although [Lévi-Strauss] constantly appeals to the Saussurean opposition between synchronic and diachronic, he is manifestly reluctant to accept Saussure’s version of that crucial distinction” (126). More broadly, whereas “both [Saussure and Lévi-Strauss] use terms such as langage, société, and communication, their basic assumptions with respect to language, society and communication differ widely. For Saussure, it seems fair to say, Lévi-Strauss would be a theorist who not only shirks the definition of crucial terms but constantly speaks and argues in metaphors in order to evade it” (130-31).

     

    In conformity with the stacking procedure described in paragraph 8 above, the sometimes “wooly thinking” of which Harris accuses Lévi-Strauss (131) becomes a deep, abiding, and unredeemable confusion by the time Barthes embarks on his own neo-Saussurean program for research. (Sure enough, although Lévi-Strauss’s misinterpretations looked bad in chapter 7, in chapter 8 [140, 142] they come across as less pernicious than Barthes’s.) Commenting on Barthes’s proposal for a translinguistics, which actually assumed several forms over the years (135) and which Barthes seems to have based on Hjelmslev’s suggestion that a “broad” conception of linguistics would accommodate all semiotic systems with a structure comparable to natural languages (134), Harris notes that for the French semiotician Saussurean linguistics stood “at the centre of a whole range of interdisciplinary enterprises in virtue of providing a basic theory of the sign and signification” (134). Yet because Barthes (b. 1915) probably did not read Saussure until 1956, his interpretation of the Saussurean framework “was an interpretation already shaped from the beginning by the glosses provided by such linguists as Jakobson, Benveniste and Martinet and, outside linguistics, by Lévi-Strauss and Lacan” (136). The implication here is that Barthes’s subsequent willingness to “tinker” with the structuralist model (e.g., in the “simplified version” of the Saussurean framework offered in Éléments de sémiologie [1964]) resulted from Barthes’s relatively high position on the stack of interpretive filters and his proportional distance from the historical Saussure. More than this, Harris suggests that Barthes adopted the label of “trans-linguistique” for self-serving reasons: to block criticism from bonafide linguists, and to present Barthes’s approach as being in advance of contemporary linguistics (146). But from Harris’s perspective, in a work such as Éléments Barthes only succeeds in “demonstrat[ing] his own failure to realize that the ‘basic concepts’ he ends up expounding are, at best, lowest common denominators drawn from quite diverse linguistic enterprises, and at worst incoherent muddles” (148).

     

    Harris’s greatest scorn, however, is reserved for Derrida, whose position among the non-linguist interpreters is parallel with (or even worse than) that of Chomsky among the linguists. Focusing on De la grammatologie and beginning with Derrida’s efforts to link Saussure’s with Aristotle’s conception of the sign, Harris affiliates Derrida’s expositional technique with what as known is the “smear” in political journalism:

     

    Rather than actually demonstrate a connexion between person A and person B, the journalist implies connexion by means of lexical association. This technique is all the more effective when the lexical association can be based on terms that either A or B actually uses. This dispenses with any need to argue a case; or, if any case is argued, its conclusion is already tacitly anticipated in the terms used to present it. (173)

     

     

    But the dominant metaphor deployed by Harris in this chapter is that of Derrida as unscrupulous prosecutor and Saussure as hapless plaintiff, whose words and ideas are taken out of context and used against him, but for whom it is physically impossible to mount a proper defense.

     

    After critiquing Saussure indirectly on the basis of his philosophical and other “associates,” Derrida, says Harris, finally puts “the accused himself…in the witness box,” with “some twenty pages of Heidegger-and-Hegel” intervening between the insinuations concerning Saussure’s Aristotelianism and Derrida’s direct examination of the linguist himself (176). It is not just that Derrida gratuitously blames Saussure for the concentration on phonology found in the work of his successors (177). Further, when faced with statements from the Course suggesting that sound plays no intrinsic role in “la langue,” “Derrida attempts to present them as symptomatic of a conceptual muddle” (178). What are we to make of the alleged contradictions, the supposed “web of incoherence,” that Derrida purports to discover in Saussure’s text?

     

    As regards the web, it unravels as soon as one begins to examine how Derrida has woven it. The [Course], as commentators have pointed out, proceeds--in the manner one might expect from an undergraduate course--from fairly broad general statements at the beginning to progressively more sophisticated formulations. In the course of this development, the terminology changes. Qualifications to earlier statements are added. By ignoring this well-crafted progression, Derrida finds it relatively easy to pick out and juxtapose observations that at first sight jar with one another. (179)

     

    Much of the remainder of this chapter (183-87) is devoted to an account of how Derrida quotes “selected snippets” of Saussure’s book out of context, in order “to make Saussure appear to say in the witness box exactly what Derrida wanted him to say” (183). When, four years later, Derrida denied that he had ever accused Saussure’s project of being logocentric or phonocentric, Harris calls this claim an “astonishing display of Humpty-Dumptyism” (187) and a confirmation that “Derrida’s interpretation of Saussure is academically worthless” (188).

     

    Harris himself reveals a strong prosecutorial flair in his account of the nonspecialist adaptations of Saussure, impugning Lévi-Strauss’s anthropological misappropriations, Barthes’s incoherent muddles, and Derrida’s academically worthless interpretations. These are strong words, and they invite questions about the interpretive criteria or canon on the basis of which Harris’s charges might be justified. Harris waits until his concluding chapter on “History’s Saussure” to sketch some of the elements of the canon that has, up to this point, implicitly guided his analysis of the specialist as well as nonspecialist interpretations. Remarking that he does not share Godel’s confidence in being able to discern “la vraie pensée de Saussure” (the true thought of Saussure), the author does think it possible to recognize when a given interpretation of Saussure is “in various respects inaccurate or mistaken. If there is no ‘right’ way of reading Saussure there are nevertheless plenty of wrong ways” (189-90). Whereas the first part of this claim (there is no right way of reading Saussure) squares with some versions of relativism, the second part of the claim (there are in fact wrong ways of reading Saussure) is a corollary of Harris’s avowedly anti-relativistic stance. For the author, “relativism has made such inroads into historical thinking that it is nowadays difficult to pass judgment on interpretations of Saussure (or any other important thinker) without immediately inviting a kind of criticism which relies on the assumption that all interpretations are equally valid (in their own terms, of course–an escape clause which reflects the academic paranoia that prompted it)” (190). By contrast, “Saussure himself… did not belong to a generation accustomed to taking refuge behind relativist whitewash”–i.e., “a generation who supposed that any old interpretation is as good as another” (190).

     

    Readers familiar with the work of Stanley Fish, for example, will recognize here a caricature of the relativist’s actual position. Relativism is not, except in Harris’s straw-person argument, tantamount to the view that any interpretation goes. Rather, it suggests that some interpretations should and do win out over others because of the way they “gear into” more or less widely agreed-upon standards of argumentation and proof procedures. What therefore need to be spelled out, in a relativistic as well as a non-relativistic model, are the criteria by which some interpretations can be evaluated as less correct or less useful than others. In the present case, one possible criterion, i.e., degree of faithfulness to Saussure’s actual formulations in the Course, is ruled out by Harris’s own account of how the text was saturated with extra- or at least para-Saussurean interpretations before it ever made it into print. But as I have already emphasized, the author advances (in explicit terms at least) no other criterion or set of criteria for successful or useful interpretation in this context. 10

     

    At this juncture, I am brought back to another of the deep questions that needs to be explored in any study of Saussure’s reception history, but that is not considered by Harris: do the criteria for successful or useful interpretation (whatever they might be) remain the same for both intra- and inter-disciplinary adaptations of Saussure’s descriptive nomenclature, operative concepts, and methods of analysis? This question is a necessary one because Saussure’s work actually has had two contexts of reception, two historical series of interpretive adaptations, which have sometimes converged, intersected, and even been braided into one another, but which should be kept distinct for analytical purposes in a study such as Harris’s. That is to say, Harris’s chronological arrangement of his chapters, by intermixing specialist and nonspecialist interpretations of Saussure, obscures another, arguably more important pattern subtending the reception of Saussurean theory over the past one hundred years. This pattern, rare in modern intellectual history, is the result of the peculiarly dual status of Saussure’s discourse–a status that the account of “transdiscursive” authors developed by Michel Foucault in “What Is an Author?” can help illuminate.

     

    Recall that, for Foucault, the so-called “founders of discursivity” need to be distinguished from the founders of a particular area of scientific study (113-17). Like scientific founders, the initiators of a discourse are not just authors of their own works, but also produce the possibilities and the rules for the formation of other texts–texts that relate by way of differences as well as analogies to the founder’s initiatory work. However, in the case of scientific founders, their founding act “is on an equal footing with its future transformations; this act becomes in some respects part of the set of modifications that it makes possible” (115). Thus, “the founding act of a science can always be reintroduced within the machinery of those transformations that derive from it” (115). Newton’s theory of mechanics, for example, is in some sense continuous with any experiments I might perform (e.g., using wooden blocks and inclined planes) to test the explanatory limits of that theory. By “contrast,” argues Foucault, “the initiation of a discursive practice is heterogeneous to its subsequent transformations” (115). To expand a type of discursivity is not to imbue it with greater formal generality or internal consistency, as is the case with refinement of scientific theories through experimentation, “but rather to open it up to a certain number of possible applications” (116). In this Foucauldian framework, clearly, a successful or useful interpretation will not be the same thing across the two domains at issue–i.e., types of discursivity and types of scientific practice.

     

    Saussure, I suggest, was a Janus-faced founder. He was the initiator of scientific (specifically, linguistic) discourse on the nature of signification and value within synchronic systems of signs, on the study of “la langue” versus “la parole,” and on the concept of the linguistic sign itself, among other areas within the study of language. Successful linguistic interpretations of Saussure’s ideas about these topics, it can be argued, will adhere to a particular set of interpretive protocols (which I have suggested remain underspecified in Harris’s account). But Saussure was also the founder of a type of discursivity that came to be known as structuralism, whose practitioners across several disciplines made constant returns to Saussure in their attempts to test the limits of applicability of his theories. This sort of return, as Foucault notes, is part of the discursive field itself, and never stops modifying it: “The return is not a historical supplement which would be added to the discursivity, or merely an ornament; on the contrary, it constitutes an effective and necessary task of transforming the discursive practice itself” (116). Accordingly, interpretations of Saussure viewed as a founder of discursivity, and in particular as the initiator of structuralist discourse, can be deemed successful if they bring within the scope of structuralist theory phenomena that were heterogeneous to that discourse at the time of its founding. Thanks to the efforts of the nonspecialists “returning” to Saussure, myths, narratives more generally, fashion systems, and other phenomena were brought under the structuralist purview. Again, however, this is not tantamount to saying that any interpretation of Saussure as the founder of structuralist discourse will be as good as any other. The goodness-of-fit of such an interpretation will depend on a complex assortment of factors, including its internal coherence, its relation to previous attempts at broadening the applicability of the discourse, and its productivity in terms of generating still other interpretations.

     

    For his part, Harris develops what might be termed a contextualist explanation of “why, outside the domain of linguistics, Saussure’s synchronic system was such an attractive idea” (194). Specifically, the author argues that “synchronic linguistics was eminently suited to be the ‘new’ linguistics for an era that wanted to forget the past” (195), especially the barbarity of the first world war and its negation of “virtually every Enlightenment idea and ideal of human conduct” (195). In other words, Saussure’s synchronic approach could be construed as a “validation of modernity” (196), “for the values built into and maintained by the synchronic system are invariably and necessarily current values: they are not, and cannot be, the values of earlier systems” (195). Harris thus selects historical context as a ground for interpreting Saussure’s nonspecialist interpreters, at least.

     

    Although this contextualist explanation perhaps identifies historical conditions that necessarily had to be in place for the Saussurean revolution to have taken hold, it does not suffice to account for how Saussure’s ideas (and not those of others similarly positioned in history) have functioned as a magnet for (re)interpretations anchored in such a wide range of disciplinary fields. It is just possible that the rare, synergistic interplay of Saussure’s “scientific” and “discursive” foundings were required to generate the extraordinary level of interpretive activity directly and indirectly associated with the Course. More than this, Saussure’s dual status as a scientific and a transdiscursive author have arguably led to a rethinking of the very concept of interpretation–a rethinking that should be a major focus of any study of Saussure and his interpreters. If claims about the ideas of one and the same author must be judged in accordance with different interpretive protocols, depending on the context in which the claims were formulated, then validity in interpretation becomes a matter locally determined within particular domains. To put the same point another way, in the still-unfolding Saussurean revolution, the necessity to interpret becomes the constant, whereas the grounds for interpretation vary.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Harris himself edited for publication the notebooks of one of the students who attended Saussure’s Third Course (see de Saussure, Saussure’s).

     

    2. In particular, Harris is a proponent of “integrational linguistics,” an approach to language-in-context that seeks to overcome the limitations of both structuralist and generativist models. See Harris, Introduction, Harris and Wolf, and also Toolan.

     

    3. Jonathan Culler’s Ferdinand de Saussure provides an excellent introductory overview of Saussure’s main ideas, a familiarity with which Harris’s study presupposes.

     

    4. Harris is careful to distinguish the term Saussurean idea from the term idea attributable to Saussure, construing the latter term as narrower in meaning than the former. I do not make this distinction here, particularly since, as Harris himself shows so effectively, it is not altogether clear which ideas are attributable to Saussure and which ideas are the product of interpretations by the students and editors. Harris’s third chapter portrays this interpretive filtering of Saussurean doctrine as ineliminable, i.e., built into the very process by which readers try to make sense of Saussure’s Course. Hence, by Harris’s own account, the distinction in question, although valid in principle, is one that proves difficult to maintain in practice.

     

    5. Harris’s remarks concerning a passage about Saussure in Fredric Jameson’s The Prison-House of Language are not unrepresentative of the tone adopted by the author in some of his more biting critiques: “This gives the impression of having been written by someone who had many years ago attended an undergraduate course in linguistics, but sat in the back row and whiled away most of the time doing crossword puzzles instead of taking notes” (10-11).

     

    6. For accounts of the porousness (i.e., historical variability) of the boundaries of linguistic inquiry vis-à-vis other fields of study, see Herman, “Sciences” and Universal.

     

    7. As Harris points out (3), even apart from his ideas about language, the name Saussure denotes three different entities, sometimes conflated by scholars and critics: “the putative author of the [Course], even though [a]ttributing a certain view to the Saussure of the [Course] is in effect little more than saying that this view appears in, or can be inferred from, the text… as posthumously produced by the editors… (2) the lecturer who actually gave the courses of lectures at [the University of] Geneva on which the [Course] was based… (3) the putative theorist behind the… lectures [themselves]… trying out [his] ideas [in] a form that would be accessible and useful to his students” (3). As his study unfolds, however, many other Saussures come to populate Harris’s universe of discourse: Oswald Ducrot’s Saussure (2, 5-7), René Wellek’s and Robert Penn Warren’s Saussure (8-9), F. W. Bateson’s Saussure (9-10), Antoine Meillet’s Saussure (54-58), Bloomfield’s Saussure, Barthes’s Saussure, etc.

     

    8. Interestingly, as Harris points out (90), it was Hjelmslev who coined the term paradigmatic relations as a substitute for Saussure’s “rapports associatifs.” Part of his attempt at an overall formalization of Saussure’s ideas, Hjelmslev’s coinage was designed to replace a focus on mental associations with a focus on definable linguistic units and their relations. Later, in his famous essay on “Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances,” Jakobson used Hjelmslev’s terminology, mistaking it for Saussure’s (95).

     

    9. Internal evidence (cf. 106-7, 169-70) suggests that Harris objects to the early version of Chomsky’s transformational generative paradigm mainly because of its postulate that language can be treated, for descriptive and explanatory purposes, as a univocal code shared by an idealized speaker and hearer, viewed in abstraction from their status as social beings deploying a socially constituted and enacted language system. If this conjecture is warranted, then in turn an implicit criterion or ground for judging interpretations of Saussure seems to emerge from Harris’s account: given two or more candidate interpretations of Saussure’s approach, then ceteris paribus the interpretation that most closely adheres to Saussure’s insight that “la langue” is a social fact will be the best, most appropriate, or most correct of those interpretations. My point is that, because his book centers on the practice of intra- as well as inter-disciplinary interpretation, Harris is obliged to engage in argumentation along these lines–i.e., to make explicit the protocols for his own interpretive practice.

     

    10. The “justification of the method” offered in the final chapter does not in fact articulate Harris’s criteria for successful interpretation of Saussure’s ideas, but rather explains why the author draws together in one book a set of interpretations that he deems erroneous: “questionable or flawed interpretations, precisely because they are questionable or flawed, can be important as historical evidence. Particularly if, as in the cases that have been considered here, what emerges from studying and comparing them is that they were not the products of random error or personal idiosyncrasy, but are related in a coherent pattern” (190-91).

    Works Cited

     

    • Culler, Jonathan. Ferdinand de Saussure. Revised edition. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1986.
    • de Saussure, Ferdinand. Course in General Linguistics. Ed. Charles Bally and Albert Sechehaye, in collaboration with Albert Riedlinger. Trans. Wade Baskin. New York: Philosophical Library, 1959.
    • —. Course in General Linguistics. Ed. Charles Bally and Albert Sechehaye, in collaboration with Albert Riedlinger. Translated and annotated by Roy Harris. London: Duckworth, 1983.
    • —. Saussure’s Third Course of Lectures on General Linguistics (1910-1911), from the Notebooks of Emile Constantin / Troisième cours de linguistique générale (1910-1911) d’après les cahiers d’Émile Constantin. Ed. and trans. Eisuke Komatsu and Roy Harris. Oxford: Pergamon, 1993.
    • Fish, Stanley. Is There a Text in This Class?: The Authority of Interpretive Communities. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1980.
    • Foucault, Michel. “What Is an Author?” The Foucault Reader. Ed. Paul Rabinow. Trans. Josué V. Harari. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 101-20.
    • Godel, Robert. Les Sources manuscrites du Cours de linguistique générale de F. de Saussure. Geneva and Paris: Droz, 1957.
    • Harris, Roy. Introduction to Integrational Linguistics. Oxford: Pergamon, 1998.
    • —. Language, Saussure, and Wittgenstein: How to Play Games with Words. London: Routledge, 1990.
    • —. Reading Saussure. London: Duckworth, 1987.
    • Harris, Roy, and George Wolf, eds. Integrational Linguistics: A First Reader. Oxford: Pergamon, 1998.
    • Herman, David. “Sciences of the Text.” Postmodern Culture 11.3 (May 2001) <http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.501/11.3herman.txt>.
    • —. Universal Grammar and Narrative Form. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Jakobson, Roman. “Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances.” Fundamentals of Language. Ed. Roman Jakobson and Morris Halle. The Hague: Mouton, 1956. 52-82.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Prison-House of Language: A Critical Account of Structuralism and Russian Formalism. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1972.
    • Lévi-Strauss, Claude. “Histoire et ethnologie.” Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale 54 (1949): 363-91.
    • —. “The Structural Study of Myth.” Critical Theory Since 1968. Ed. Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle. Tallahassee: UP of Florida. 809-22.
    • Pavel, Thomas G. The Feud of Language: The History of Structuralist Thought. Trans. Linda Jordan and Thomas G. Pavel. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989.
    • Toolan, Michael. Total Speech: An Integrational Linguistics Approach to Language. Durham: Duke UP, 1996

     

  • Documentary Prison Films and the Production of Disciplinary Institutional “Truth”

     

    Janet Holtman

    Department of English
    Pennsylvania State University
    jmh403@psu.edu

     

    Power "produces reality" before it represses. Equally it produces truth before it ideologizes, abstracts or masks.

    –Gilles Deleuze, Foucault

     

    In The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act, Fredric Jameson distinguishes between a “properly Marxian notion of an all-embracing and all-structuring mode of production…and non-Marxist visions of a ‘total system’ in which the various elements or levels of social life are programmed in some increasingly constricting way” (90), thus setting his own totalizing theory apart from the “monolithic models” of the social body which, he claims, do not allow for an effective “oppositional or even merely ‘critical practice’ and resistance” but rather “reintegrate” such resistances “back into the system as the latter’s mere inversion” (91). One of the primary targets of this apparent criticism is, of course, the theory of Michel Foucault, whose “image” of the social “gridwork,” according to Jameson, provides for an “ever more pervasive ‘political technology of the body’” (90). 1 Of course, one of Jameson’s goals is to show how such theories may be subsumed under the umbrella of his own Marxist discourse in order to reopen pathways for such “resistance;” thus Jameson points out Foucault’s totalization but then is able to include his theory in an overall plan that manages to account for such “disturbing synchronic frameworks” (91). That Jameson’s theories and perspective have been enormously influential hardly needs to be (re)stated, but I would like to point out the fact that Jameson’s reading of Foucault has perhaps colored the reception, perception and manipulation of Foucault’s theories, particularly in terms of how the technologies of Discipline, often figured by the panopticon, have become a sort of metaphor of the “total system” that seems to shut down a useful deployment of Foucault’s theories of social force while enabling their subsumption within discussions that deploy very different theories.

     

    My interest in bringing up this influence, and in touching upon some current appropriations of Foucauldian theory tinged by it, is to provide a foundation from which to offer an alternative conceptualization through an extended example of the application of Foucauldian theory to a type of discourse, one that might be expected to be particularly rife with possibilities for such an analysis: the documentary prison film. While it is, of course, not possible or useful to trace out completely the Jamesonian influence on contemporary cultural studies, one may at least note certain uses of Foucauldian theory that bear a strong resemblance to Jameson’s incorporation of Foucault, or at least seem to owe a debt to Jameson’s conceptualization of disciplinary power as a progression of ever more oppressive technologies of the body that call for a Marxist dialectical framework to free it from a sort of political “grid”lock. Mark Poster’s Foucault, Marxism and History immediately comes to mind as employing a similar strategy if a somewhat different reading of Foucault. 2 And in film criticism, one sees occasional conscriptions of Foucault into the theoretical service of cultural studies analyses that are to a greater or lesser degree inharmonious with his poststructuralism due to their primary grounding in Marxist discourses. This is perhaps done best by such able critics as Toby Miller, whose discussion of Frederick Wiseman’s Titicut Follies in Technologies of Truth, while informed by a notion of Foucauldian discipline, nonetheless seems to rely upon fairly traditional cultural studies strategies of interpretation and ideology critique. It is done worst by those critics whose references to, for instance, the panopticon as a central figure for all of Foucault’s theories are fatuous at best.

     

    But regardless of their level of rigor, the few film studies that do take up Foucauldian theory seem to make use of it primarily in terms of thematic operations, a use that subsumes the Foucauldian question “what does it do?” into the ideology critique question “what does it mean?” In his essay “Disciplinary Identities; or, Why Is Walter Neff Telling This Story,” David Shumway, for instance, employs a Foucauldian notion of disciplinarity in order to read Double Indemnity as a text exemplifying the manner in which discipline shapes subjectivities, particularly the subjectivities of those positioned within an institutional apparatus, such as academics. Shumway’s discussion, relying as it does upon the idea of hegemony and the “internalization” of discipline by the subject, is firmly rooted in the assumptions as well as the methods of ideology critique. But I do not set out here to advocate a sort of postmodernist purism nor to offer a corrective to the strategies of past and recent contemporary film criticism; rather, I merely offer another way to think Foucault with filmic discourse, one that may answer the familiar (and still pervasive) Jamesonian criticism of the “total system” while offering an alternative use for Foucauldian theory in discussions of filmic discourses that still, in spite of some worthwhile postmodern counterdiscourses, tend to be dominated by treatments based on notions of ideology and representation.

     

    Before proceeding, however, it seems necessary to clarify the theoretical platform from which this discussion will proceed and which parts of Foucault’s discussion of discipline as a complex and fluid set of forces provide the most relevant grounding. In Discipline and Punish, Foucault provides a detailed definition of “discipline” as it arose in the nineteenth (and early twentieth) century: It is “a modality for [power’s] exercise, comprising a whole set of instruments, techniques, procedures, levels of application, targets; it is a ‘physics’ or an ‘anatomy’ of power, a technology” (215). It is important to note that discipline cannot be reduced to any one of its techniques or instruments, but rather describes any number of social forces, including various techniques for gathering and producing knowledge. Foucault’s later description of the disciplinary society helps to make this clear, in addition to stating his revolutionary theory about the productive nature of power:

     

    "the circuits of communication are the supports of an accumulation and a centralization of knowledge; the play of signs defines the anchorages of power; it is not that the beautiful totality of the individual is amputated, repressed, altered by our social order, it is rather that the individual is carefully fabricated in it, according to a whole technique of forces and bodies." (217)

     

    Discourse and forms of knowledge, then, according to Foucault, do not form anything like a repressive ideological structure, as some Marxist cultural studies critics have understood and suggested–in spite of the forbidding words “discipline” and “power” that Foucault uses to describe the ways in which social force shapes institutions and individuals. Rather, knowledge and the play of signs are involved in productive processes within society; they are involved in the formation of subjects. In a later chapter, Foucault makes clear that the production of subject positions, such as “the delinquent” (the criminal defined not by his actions but by his life history and position within the socius), came about through the flow of various forces of power within the social body. Popular discourses comprised a portion of these forces, of course, from the newspapers that reinforced the partitioning of society by juridical power to the crime novels and other media that served to place, define, and popularize “the delinquent” as a special form of identity (286). Foucault does not spend much time discussing the role of such popular discourses, choosing, rather, to make them secondary to his discussion of prominent humanist social scientific discourses such as psychoanalysis and criminology. But he does make clear that popular discourses also enact social force and that they derive much of their content and direction from dominant modes of humanist thought.

     

    Of course, if the late twentieth and early twenty-first century social organization is a refinement or intensification3 of Foucault’s disciplinary society, a social body that produces and controls subjects according to the dispersion and interaction of a myriad of forces, then popular discourses such as film and television documentaries necessarily continue to take part in the production of subject positions within the social body. This is the case in spite of the fact that the forms of the popular media today differ from those of the nineteenth century, not only in that they are more numerous and specialized but also in that they are dispersed throughout a higher percentage of society and occupy a place of greater importance socially. Even so, Foucault’s brief, localized discussion of the newspapers and crime novels of the nineteenth-century can still offer us some possible directions for speculation about how power works through certain modern media productions today. For if the nineteenth century newspapers engaged with and distributed questions and responses to criminality that derived from, and, in turn, took part in humanist discourse, how much more effective might modern media productions be at the dissemination of similar kinds of force?

     

    As mentioned above, and for perhaps obvious reasons, the documentary prison film is a type of discourse that seems to offer particularly interesting possibilities for analysis in terms of Foucault’s theories. It is perhaps here that one might look to find a discursive formation whose effects are clearly recognizable on Foucauldian terms; an analysis of this particular cultural production as a type of truth-production may evidence the ways in which filmic discourses perpetuate humanist values such as the movement toward prison reform, the continuation of the social construction of subjectivities such as “the delinquent,” and the normalization and implementation of some of the social scientific technologies of discipline that Foucault describes, such as the examination and the case study. A key question here, in other words, is “what do documentary prison films do?”

     

    We can begin to answer this question by recognizing, first of all, that cinematic presentations of prison life coincide with, perpetuate and intensify the types of discourses that, according to Foucault, have proliferated since imprisonment became the primary form of punishment for crime: “Prison ‘reform’ is virtually contemporary with the prison itself…. In becoming a legal punishment, [imprisonment] weighted the old juridico-political question of the right to punish with all the problems, all the agitations that have surrounded the corrective technologies of the individual” (Discipline 234-235). Discourses and political movements that sought to reform prisons and the subjects they housed did not arise, then, from a recognition of the failure of the prison, or from an impetus to move, eventually, beyond imprisonment to a better means of punishing crime; rather, they arose as an integral part of the institution itself (234). According to Foucault, such humanist discourses go hand-in-hand with the disciplinary institutional apparatus; disciplinary power seeks to improve itself by becoming both more efficient and more humane. Therefore, it is not surprising that prison environments are usually presented in filmic discourses as throwbacks to earlier forms of power, to the inefficient forms that acted directly on bodies and did not know how to create subjects who discipline and monitor themselves: such presentations serve the humanist reformatory project which is integral to disciplinary power.

     

    But in what ways do such narratives support disciplinary power, and how do they contribute to the social perception of institutions and the construction of subjects? One way that they accomplish these effects is by reproducing and distributing, in a mass register, the “official” discourses that have become imbedded within the social grid. Social scientific discourses like psychoanalysis, sociology, and criminology, as well as various systems of humanist ethics, are all interwoven and reproduced in the prison narrative. Consequently, these films may be read on several different “levels,” and with varying interpretations, by cultural critics who may see them as either perpetuating ideology or as calling for subversion, while still enacting much the same social force throughout society through their connection with these “higher” discourses. Just as the newspapers and crime novels of nineteenth-century France circulated various definitions of the delinquent but nevertheless assumed (and furthered the notion) that there was such a subject who needed to be defined, so do documentary prison films, which are shaped by and redistribute various definitions and conceptions of “the criminal,” “the prisoner,” and “the disciplinary institution.”

     

    At this point, though, it becomes necessary to provide a basis for clarifying the ways in which documentary prison films produce sets of intensities at a different pitch from those of more mainstream Hollywood productions. The production of truth by documentary films should not be set up in opposition, then, to the truth-production of mainstream Hollywood films. They both, in fact, rely upon similar strategies. A Deleuzian notion of intensities, then, as in “there are no negative or opposite intensities” (A Thousand Plateaus 153), is a more productive concept here because it will allow for a more thorough understanding of the fashioning of truth by each without relying upon a false binary. It also allows for a good deal more precision in accounting for the various processes involved, especially as it allows us to build upon the understanding of the operations of cinematic discourse established by postmodernist thinkers like Steven Shaviro, whose use of certain Deleuzian concepts in discussing the simultaneously bodily and textual stresses of cinema can offer an important bridge from film to Foucault.

     

    But in order to understand better the distinction between mainstream films and documentaries, one must first understand the documentary form, its discursive mode, its reliance upon social scientific discourse, and its reception by audiences. Documentaries are historical records, and as such, they attempt to produce certain types of knowledge. In The Archaeology of Knowledge, Foucault distinguishes between “history, in its traditional form” which “undertook to ‘memorize’ the monuments of the past, transform them into documents, and lend speech to those traces which, in themselves, are often not verbal” and archaeology, which is “a discipline devoted to silent monuments, inert traces, objects without context, and things left by the past” (7). “In our time,” Foucault says, “history aspires to the condition of archaeology, to the intrinsic description of the monument” (7). This distinction is important in terms of the effects produced by each version of historical inquiry. Traditional history produces meanings, is interested in interminable commentary, transforming the monumental into that which can be interpreted, especially in terms of some larger worldview. Mainstream prison films utilize much the same type of significatory narrative force, situating the subject within a larger framework of humanist meaning. But archaeological history produces discontinuous, dispersed studies, serial and specific, incompatible with a transcendent signification. And documentary films aspire to this second type of history; they attempt to be asignificatory recording projects: “Whatever else viewers expect from a documentary, they consider that one of its most important tasks is to tell us something about the workings of the socio-historical world–the sights, sounds and events in the external world before they are transposed into a representational form” (Kilborn and Izod 4).

     

    In drawing this crucial distinction, however, it is important to note that mainstream films do not operate in a merely textual manner. In The Cinematic Body, Steven Shaviro discusses the popular cinematic apparatus as a “technolog[y] of power” (21), in the Foucauldian sense, which acts directly on the body: “The flesh is intrinsic to the cinematic apparatus” (255). Audiences’ reactions to film, according to his theory, are largely visceral and involve a complex interaction of sensation and meaning. Shaviro does not deny that films are, to some degree, textual, but he insists that film viewing is not a strictly intellectual and symbolic process. 4 Cinematic images are, rather, “events” that involve a simultaneous effacement of the viewer’s own subjectivity as s/he is acted upon immediately and physically by the film and a possibility for “self-assertion and self-validation” that can be a form of resistance to the insubstantial flickerings of “meaning” presented on the screen (Shaviro 23-27). The bodily nature of film viewing is that which, for Shaviro, enables the hybrid process by which the truth of a film is produced through the interaction of film and viewer(s). These theories fly in the face of both film theory’s distinctly psychoanalytic roots (the “truth” of psychoanalytic discourses having been called into question by Foucault in the The History of Sexuality) and Neo-Marxist cultural studies’ insistence upon the ideological role of cinema.

     

    According to Shaviro’s theories, a film does not merely deposit ideology into the brains of passive individual viewers; rather, it negotiates “truth” with viewing subjects through their bodies. It presents, through emotion-laden images that act directly on these bodies, popular discourses that may resonate with their own subjectivity. We can fairly easily see such a process at work in a popular prison film such as The Shawshank Redemption, in which the incarcerated hero undergoes a physical and emotional trial by fire and finally effects his own inspirational escape from prison by literally carving out a space within its walls. Film critic Brian Webster summarizes a typical audience response to the film: “When the film’s conclusion starts to unfold, you suddenly realize that this is one of the more inspiring films you’ve seen in a long time–yet you don’t feel the least bit manipulated.” Of course, Shaviro posits a Foucauldian variety of resistance within such a process: “[The] body is a necessary condition and support of the cinematic process: it makes that process possible, but also continually interrupts it, unlacing its sutures and swallowing up its meanings” (257). This notion complicates and perhaps redefines the production of “truth” by cinema, but it does not eliminate or deny it. Certain reinforcements of social assumptions, definitions, and meanings, such as the necessity for prison reform and “the delinquent,” respectively, are still enacted by film texts, through the very pleasure of bodies that Shaviro discusses.

     

    Contrary to what one might think at first glance, however, documentary films rely on the body in ways somewhat similar to those of mainstream film, but they usually do so at a lower level of physical intensity (for instance, viewers are often warned in advance at the approach of a graphic scene, which serves to control their physical response by way of a mediating authority). Viewers’ expectations of the documentary involve, instead, a greater reliance upon the fact-value of the filmic text and the authenticity of its authority. In his essay on documentary and subjectivity, Michael Renov notes, “few have ever trusted the cinema without reservation. If ever they did, it was the documentary that most inspired that trust” (84). Renov locates the impetus for such public trust of the documentary in its involvement with, or derivation from, scientific discourse: “It is the domain of nonfiction that has most explicitly articulated this scientistic yearning; it is here also that the debates around evidence, objectivity, and knowledge have been centered. I would argue, then, that nonfiction film and the scientific project are historically linked” (85). Evidence of such a linkage between scientific discourse, especially social scientific discourse, and documentary film may be seen in some of the cinematic techniques of documentary filmmaking.

     

    One of the most frequently utilized is the “documentary interview,” which presents to the audience a focus on certain individual subjects not unlike that which we find in psychoanalytic case studies. In documentary prison films such as Liz Garbus’ The Farm: Angola USA, viewers hear several inmates relate their stories as well as their fears and hopes. Thus, the prison film interview resembles the psychiatric/criminologic interview, which is, as Foucault has shown, a form of the confession, which “governs the production” of true discourse, and the examination, which allows a body of individualizing knowledge: “The examination that places individuals in a field of surveillance also situates them in a network of writing; it engages them in a whole mass of documents that capture and fix them” (Discipline 189). The documentary interview, then, fulfills the audience’s expectation of a subject-centered presentation, but it also fulfills the expectation of a sort of social scientific authenticity by relying on the interview/examination so familiar and useful in social scientific discourse. Consistent with this observation is the fact that the documentary, unlike mainstream popular films, often allows the filmmaker’s voice to be heard off-camera asking questions. This goes far in establishing both a scientific authenticity and a sort of self-referential realism. Such documentary techniques call attention to the fact that the film is not a mere representation but a “real case,” and the camera is an acknowledged part of it. Of course, the ostensible purpose of such a case is to inform and to teach. And it is the didactic quality of documentary films, run by the engine of social scientific discourse, which causes their failure in terms of the work of archaeology–they end up working a lot like regular, entertainment-driven films, producing meaning in similar ways, reducing a monument to a document.

     

    It is perhaps not surprising, then, that conventional documentary films such as The Farm, while portraying some of the harsh realities of prison life are, nonetheless, welcomed by prison officials and social administrators: “The Farm has been roundly praised by both Louisiana prison officials–who want to use it for guard-training programs–and the governor’s office” (Lewis). Filmmakers like Liz Garbus, who may believe that their films are transgressive due to their sympathetic portrayal of rehabilitated-yet-still-imprisoned inmates, are puzzled by such reactions of acceptance by administrators: “‘Now that really surprised us; I won’t even try to explain it,’ says Garbus. ‘I suppose that everyone takes what they want into a film’” (Lewis). But it is not difficult to see how these significatory documentaries are easily compatible with, and appreciated by, a bureaucracy and a society5 that places value on the reform of delinquents and the accumulation of individualized knowledge about them, the same values and technologies of discipline that have, according to Foucault, been emphasized since the rise of the prison. Thus, by attempting to subvert the institution of the prison by enacting its own discourse of reform and employing the disciplinary tactics of information-production, Garbus’s film merely acts as another social scientific node by which the disciplinary power of the prison functions. Of course, here one might pause and ask a rather Jamesonian question: doesn’t this example demonstrate the manner in which Foucault’s theory constitutes a vision by which attempted resistance is “reintegrated” into a total system? On the contrary, this example simply demonstrates the manner in which Foucault can provide a cautionary strategy that enables a clearer perception of the way in which projects of humanist “resistance” such as Garbus’s documentary cannot act as levers against disciplinary power, situated as they are within it, and clearly cannot make progress in terms of the subversion of dominant discourses, reproducing as they do those very discourses.

     

    Documentary films, then, rely upon authentic technologies and discourses as well as upon bodies. The audience’s expectation is to be informed, taught, and possibly moved and motivated. Documentaries, usually through their production of images, impact bodies, and the audience is anticipating a process of truth-production, one that relies upon both the scientific objectivity of the documentary filmmaker as a sort of authentic popular social scientist and the documentary itself as a significatory text. Can such expectations, and the frustration of those very expectations, be a possible explanation for the extreme negative reaction by social scientists and officials to a film like Frederick Wiseman’s Titicut Follies? What is the relationship of Wiseman’s film to other films, both mainstream and documentary? How does his film produce not a document of disciplinary institutional truth but a monument that refuses not only such truths but also the processes by which they are produced?

     

    Titicut Follies

     

     

    The film product which Wiseman made [Titicut Follies]...constitutes a most flagrant abuse of the privilege he was given to make a film.... There is a new theme--crudities, nudities and obscenities.... It is a crass piece of commercialism--a contrived scenario--designed by its new title and by its content to titillate the general public and lure them to the box office.

     

    –from the ruling by Judge Harry Kalus in Commonwealth v. Wiseman, 1968 (Anderson and Benson 97)

     

    In their detailed narration of the events that arose around the filming and banning of Titicut Follies, Carolyn Anderson and Thomas Benson explain that Frederick Wiseman was given permission to shoot a film at the Massachusetts Correctional Institution at Bridgewater because the facility’s administrators assumed that his film would enact the usual sort of documentary social force:

     

    Superintendent Gaughan was particularly eager to educate the citizenry about the variety of services at Bridgewater and the difficulties the staff encountered in providing those services adequately. At that time, both Wiseman and Gaughan assumed that heightened public awareness would improve conditions; both subscribed to the Griersonian notion that a documentary film could be a direct agent of change. Both saw opportunities in the documentary tradition of social indignation. (Anderson and Benson 11)

     

    This notion that Wiseman’s film might contribute to reformation of the institution is further revealed by Wiseman’s testimony that the superintendent had claimed “that there was no film [he] could make…that could hurt Bridgewater” (qtd in Anderson and Benson 11). Obviously, the assumption that even a film that depicted the grim conditions at the Bridgewater facility could only be beneficial to the institution is deeply rooted in the humanist disciplinary discourses that assume the ultimately beneficent possibilities of the rehabilitative institution and the continual need to reform it. But something went wrong. Wiseman’s film failed to live up to the expectations of the social scientists, prison administrators, etc. who had hoped that the film would further the process of reform. Shortly after its limited release, they rushed to have it banned. Perhaps the reason for this turn of events is that, instead of taking part in familiar social scientific discourses, Wiseman’s film seemed to disrupt them. Instead of providing the hope for institutional reform so commensurate with a humanist progress narrative, Wiseman’s film seems to call the facility’s various forms of institutional discipline and rehabilitation, and even the “truths” upon which they are based (such as the possibility of, and need for, “rehabilitation” itself), into question.

     

    One of the first things that one notices upon viewing the film is the absence of narratorial voice, which some viewers find immediately disconcerting. French documentary filmmaker Jean Rouch has said: “I would like [Wiseman] to say something, say what his thesis is…. In Titicut Follies there isn’t any [commentary or ‘guiding hand’], it’s a certified report, which could perhaps be interpreted as a cynical and sadomasochistic report” (qtd in Anderson and Benson 39). Wiseman foregoes the usual directorial voice (removing from the film the disciplinary quality of a “certified report”) and the documentary interview, dismantling the documentary film’s role as a technology of individualizing knowledge, a social scientific documentation of, definition of, “the external frontier of the abnormal” (Discipline and Punish 183). Rather than utilizing such techniques as the interview/examination, Wiseman’s film simply presents them as the institution employs them. Hence, in one shot, we see a traditional Freudian psychiatrist grilling an inmate about his past sexual experiences, asking him how many times a day he masturbates and whether he has had any homosexual experiences, carefully noting the information. Later, we see confrontations between a patient and his doctors, as the patient doggedly and lucidly argues for his own sanity and for the fact that the facility is actually “harming” him. Wiseman captures the smug, clinical condescension of the doctors along with a sense of the absurdity of their attempts to “rehabilitate” the patient through the use of strict discipline, drugs, and psychoanalysis.

     

    Wiseman also rejects any pretence to scientific objectivity, editing the film in such a way that the prison’s disturbingly comic musical “follies” frame the film, creating a sense of parodic disjunction with the film’s primary content. Regarding the role of the documentary as a scientifically impartial text, Wiseman says:

     

    Any documentary, mine or anyone else's, made in no matter what style, is arbitrary, biased, prejudiced, compressed and subjective. Like any of its sisterly or brotherly fictional forms it is born in choice--choice of subject matter, place, people, camera angles, duration of shooting, sequences to be shot or omitted, transitional material and cutaways. (qtd in Miller 225)

     

    Wiseman doesn’t even refer to his films as documentaries, preferring, instead, to call them “reality fictions,” apparently as a sort of “parody” of the documentary form (Anderson and Benson 2). Instead of reinforcing documentary’s aspirations to social science by categorizing and recording individuals, Wiseman’s film creates disjunctions by utilizing some of the conventions associated with the most mainstream cinema. For instance, he uses cutaways for ironic effect and portrays bodies in such a way as to create intense discomfort for the viewer, as when the film cuts away from the view of Mr. Malinowski being force-fed to Mr. Malinowski’s corpse being shaved and groomed for burial. The body in its relationship to the restraining, training, and marking by institutional power is one of the primary foci of the film; the nude, abject bodies of the prisoners provoke uncomfortable sensations in the audience in scene after scene.

     

    Such a use of bodies, those of the film’s subjects and those of the audience, recall Shaviro’s conceptualization of the production of cinematic truth as a negotiation between discourse and subjectivity through the mediation of the physical sensations brought about by images. Toby Miller quotes Christopher Ricks as saying that “‘Wiseman’s art constitutes an invasion of privacy,’ the privacy of the viewers, their right to be left undisturbed” (222). Of course, Miller is primarily interested in a more traditional critique of the film that involves the ways in which Wiseman’s art re-positions or challenges the gaze of the spectator (227). He says, “Titicut Follies provokes an uncomfortable gaze at the self by the spectator” (227). But such a view sets up a relationship between audience and film that relies upon notions of the subject and social awareness that do not seem particularly useful in an analysis of this film. Titicut Follies does not so much provoke social awareness as it disrupts it as a concept. Shaviro’s theories may prove a more effective tool for analyzing Wiseman’s film and the reactions to it. It may be the bodily element of Wiseman’s filmmaking, for instance, that provoked the somewhat bewildering criticism by Judge Kalus during Commonwealth v. Wiseman that the film was titillating and obscene, “excessively preoccupied with nudity” and “a crass piece of commercialism” (Anderson and Benson 97).

     

    That Titicut Follies could in any way appeal to the prurient interests of its audience is, of course, the height of absurdity, but Judge Kalus’ comments are, perhaps, revelatory of his perception that the film does utilize some of the physically oriented techniques and stresses of mainstream cinema, but without the reassuring signification which normally accompanies them. Kalus’ outrage, then, and the outrage of the social scientists, administrators, and guards who opposed the film’s release was largely a response to the fact that the film did not enact the type of social force that it was supposed to do. Instead, it combined “authentic” documentary with the audience-based methods of truth-production of mainstream cinema, subjective presentation, and physical provocation. In other words, by rearranging the intensities of mainstream cinema and documentary and by reneging on its “promise” of social scientific objectivity, Titicut Follies actually accomplished the (usually unaccomplished) work of the documentary film project by creating an asignificatory monument.

     

    What is perhaps most interesting about the response that Titicut Follies provoked is the fact that juridical power was actually called in by the purveyors of social scientific discourse to prohibit the distribution of this monument, except (after a number of legal appeals) to those who possessed the proper training and subjectivity to view the film: “Titicut Follies could be shown in Massachusetts to qualified therapists. Screenings had to be accompanied by a statement that Bridgewater had been reformed” (Miller 224). That the screenings were accompanied by the statement of reform demonstrates clearly the manner in which the film was re-situated as a significatory social scientific project. Judicial authority specified the audience (one that had been extensively trained to perceive the film in the proper manner) and thus redefined the discursive mode of the film. If it could not change who was speaking, or perhaps, the fact that no one was speaking, it could use the audience as a substitute speaker, bringing the film in line with the sort of authoritative enunciative modality that Foucault discusses in the Archaeology of Knowledge:

     

    Who is speaking? Who, among the totality of speaking individuals, is accorded the right to use this sort of language (langage)? Who is qualified to do so? Who derives from it his own special quality, his prestige, and from whom, in return, does he receive if not the assurance, at least the presumption that what he says is true? What is the status of the individuals who - alone - have the right, sanctioned by law or tradition, juridically defined or spontaneously accepted, to proffer such a discourse? (50)

     

    In other words, and put simply, it was an attempt to turn the “monumentary” Titicut Follies into a document, one that was to be written and read by authorized viewers. 6 Interestingly, many scholars and critics continue to refer to the film as “subversive” (Anderson and Benson 38), in much the way that Garbus’s The Farm: Angola USA is “subversive,” in a similar mode of documentary critique, one that makes claims for the film’s significatory value. These attempts to interpret the film as a project of social critique are perhaps not surprising given the sort of juridical response that the film provoked. But it is interesting that critical responses to Titicut Follies seem to have focused on precisely what is not most relevant to an understanding of what the film does. And it is doubtless worthwhile to note that the initial audience response, which might be described as a somewhat halting inability to speak in the face of the monument, or at least as a bewildered struggle to find a relevant point of signification from which to begin an interpretation, eventually transmuted (in the hands of institutionally sanctioned cultural critics) into later broad claims for the film’s subversive meaning.

     

    Of course, it is clear from Foucault’s work that it is never a question of subverting ideology but merely a question of producing a counterdiscourse to a discourse, a force to oppose another force. This is something that Wiseman’s film certainly does by “investigat[ing] how discourses and institutions produce and oversee identity” as Toby Miller claims (225). On the Museum of Television and Radio’s Documentary Films of Frederick Wiseman A to Z videotape (1993), Wiseman remarks that “the real subject of documentary filmmaking is normalcy,” a comment followed by the force-feeding sequence [in Titicut Follies] (Miller 225). This notion is more than a little reminiscent of Foucault’s assertion that “to find out what our society means by sanity, perhaps we should investigate what is happening in the field of insanity. And what we mean by legality in the field of illegality” (“Afterword” 211). But if Wiseman’s film produces a monument that differs substantially from the documents produced by mainstream feature films and social documentaries, it is not because he produces a different version of “truth,” but because he, like Foucault, “strips society to the relationships of forces” (Wexler qtd. in Miller 225).

     

    For Foucault, the production of “truth” involves the various mechanisms by which discourses define and organize our social world; some discourses become dominant or accepted versions of reality and others become marginalized, according to the interactions of power. In both Discipline and Punish and The History of Sexuality, Foucault enumerates the ways in which humanistic, social scientific discourses are imbricated within the web of power relations, the social grid. Psychoanalysis and criminology constitute forms of social scientific discursive “truth” that are still dispersed in various forms throughout the social body. Today, the mass media, including the film industry, are perhaps the most extensive set of apparatuses for the distribution of definitions and concepts perpetuated by social science. And one of the most “authentic” discursive forms within this industry is the documentary film. But as a film like Titicut Follies demonstrates, documentary film is also one of a number of points of resistance within power which “play the role of adversary, target, support, or handle in power relations” (Sexuality 95). Documentary films such as Wiseman’s darkly absurd “reality fiction” may not be subversive or transgressive in a Marxist sense, but they may number among the many “odd term[s] in relations of power…inscribed in the latter as an irreducible opposite” (Sexuality 96).

     

    Notes

     

    I would like to thank Jeffrey T. Nealon for his encouragement and insightful commentary during the revision of this essay.

     

    1. Jameson also points out Foucault’s “totalizing dynamic” in Postmodernism, or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (5). It should probably be noted here once again, though it has doubtless been noted before, that Jameson’s reading of Foucault’s discussion of disciplinary power’s various technologies in Discipline and Punish does not attempt to account for the localized specificity of the techniques of power in question, tending, instead, to use the umbrella term “technologies of the body” to stand in for a number of forces and specific developments in the rise of disciplinary power.

     

    2. In what I would call a more careful and rigorous reading, Poster reads Foucault’s “technologies” as “technologies of power” which, he says, “suggests that discourses and practices are intertwined in articulated formations,” an observation that he follows up with the somewhat baffling claim that this notion is “not fully conceptualized in the works of Foucault” (52).

     

    3. See Deleuze, “Postscript.”

     

    4. Shaviro uses Deleuze’s conception of the “double articulation” to clarify this apparent duality between the bodily and the intellectual. For Deleuze, the double articulation operates as a double doubling that involves “intermediate states between” through which “exchanges” pass (A Thousand Plateaus 44).

     

    5.The Farm: Angola USA won a National Society of Film Critics Award and was nominated for an Oscar for Feature Documentary in 1999.

     

    6. In recent years, of course, much of Wiseman’s work, including Titicut Follies, may be viewed in limited exhibition at major art galleries or museums in urban centers such as Boston or Washington, D.C. Always difficult to situate as a social scientific text, the film now seems to have been placed with a view toward establishing artistic and “high cultural” merit, a suitably amorphous signification, and one that is likely to be accepted by the audiences high in cultural capital and educational training who would constitute the primary audience for a documentary in such a venue. For more on educational level, cultural capital and film viewing, particularly in urban areas, see Bourdieu’s Distinction: A Social Critique of the Judgement of Taste. Of particular relevance here is Bourdieu’s assertion that “any legitimate work tends in fact to impose the norms of its own perception and tacitly defines as the only legitimate mode of perception the one which brings into play a certain disposition and a certain competence” (28).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Anderson, Carolyn, and Thomas W. Benson. Documentary Dilemmas: Frederick Wiseman’s Titicut Follies. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 1991.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Distinction: A Social Critique of the Judgement of Taste. Trans. Richard Nice. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1984.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Foucault. Trans. Sean Hand. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986.
    • —. “Postscript on Control Societies.” Negotiations. New York: Columbia UP, 1995. 177-82.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • The Farm: Angola USA. Dir. Liz Garbus and Jonathan Stack. Co-dir. Wilbert Rideau. Narr. Bernard Addison. Firecracker Films; Gabriel Films, 1998.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Afterword: The Subject and Power.” Michel Foucault: Beyond Structuralism and Hermeneutics. Ed. Hubert Dreyfus and Paul Rabinow. 2nd ed. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1983. 208-226.
    • —. The Archaeology of Knowledge. 1969. Trans. A. M. Sheridan Smith. New York: Pantheon, 1972.
    • —. Discipline and Punish: The Birth of the Prison. 1977. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Vintage, 1995.
    • —. The History of Sexuality: Volume I, An Introduction. 1978. Trans. Robert Hurley. NewYork: Vintage, 1990.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1981.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Kilborn, Richard, and John Izod. An Introduction to Television Documentary: Confronting Reality. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1997.
    • Lewis, Anne S. “The Farm.” The Austin Chronicle 9 Nov. 1998. 23 Apr. 2000. Online. <http://desert.net/filmvault/austin/f/farmthe1.html>.
    • Miller, Toby. Technologies of Truth: Cultural Citizenship and the Popular Media. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1998.
    • Poster, Mark. Foucault, Marxism & History: Mode of Production versus Mode of Information. Cambridge: Polity, 1984.
    • Renov, Michael. “New Subjectivities: Documentary and Self-Representation.” Feminism and Documentary. Ed. Diane Waldman and Janet Walker. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999. 84-94.
    • Shumway, David. “Disciplinary Identities; or, Why Is Walter Neff Telling This Story?” symploke 7.1-2 (1999): 97-107.
    • Shaviro, Steven. The Cinematic Body: Theory Out of Bounds, Vol. II. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Titicut Follies. Dir. and prod. Frederick Wiseman. Wiseman, 1967.
    • Webster, Brian. “Apollo Leisure Guide’s Review of The Shawshank Redemption.” 1998-2000. 23 Apr. 2000. Online. <http://apolloguide.com/mov_fullrev.asp?CID=1866>.

     

  • “You Have Unleashed a Horde of Barbarians!”: Fighting Indians, Playing Games, Forming Disciplines

    Christopher Douglas

    Department of English
    Furman University
    christopher.douglas@furman.edu

     

    We are about four or five years into the formation of a new discipline, digital game studies. Though by one account computer games have been around for more than four decades (Aarseth), and by another computer and video game sales in the United States are rivaling movie box office sales (Frauenfelder), academic attention to the medium has come relatively recently. At this early stage, digital game studies is necessarily and self-consciously concerned with its own formation, and is heavily engaged with an argument about whether this new phenomenon is to be swallowed by already existing disciplines, or whether it needs to and could develop into a discipline of its own, with a coherent object of study and institutional support. 2001 was an interesting year in this regard. Espen Aarseth, whose Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature aims to unseat “hypertext” as the paradigm for studying electronic literature, editorializes in the inaugural issue of the new online journal Game Studies that “2001 can be seen as the Year One of Computer Game Studies as an emerging, viable, international, academic field.” As editor of Game Studies, Aarseth notes “the very early stage we are still in, where the struggle of controlling and shaping the theoretical paradigms has just started.” His editorial both invites and warns, however, as he cautions against the “colonizing attempts” of other disciplines: “Making room for a new field usually means reducing the resources of the existing ones, and the existing fields will also often respond by trying to contain the new area as a subfield. Games are not a kind of cinema, or literature, but colonizing attempts from both these fields have already happened, and no doubt will happen again.” The problem, Aarseth argues, is the kind of methodological blindnesses that would be imported into digital game studies along with other baggage. While “we all enter this field from somewhere else, from anthropology, sociology, narratology, semiotics, film studies, etc., and the political and ideological baggage we bring from our old field inevitably determines and motivates our approaches,” Aarseth envisions “an independent academic structure” (of which Game Studieswould surely stand as one institution) as the only viable way for digital game studies to avoid obscuring its object through inappropriate lenses borrowed from other fields.

     

    Also in 2001, the October issue of PMLA contained an article on the “new media” by influential cinema studies critic D. N. Rodowick. Rodowick argues that, for reasons of an “aesthetic inferiority complex” and a sustained debate about both the medium-object and a “concept or technique” that might ground film studies, this discipline “has never congealed into a discipline in the same way as English literature or art history” (1400). While the “great paradox of cinema, with respect to the conceptual categories of eighteenth- and nineteenth-century aesthetics, is that it is both a temporal and a spatial medium” (1401), Rodowick argues that “the new digital culture” is not emerging in the same “theoretical vacuum” that film did; rather, that good digital culture studies, including the study of games, already

     

    recirculates and renovates key concepts and problems of film theory: how movement and temporality affect emerging forms of image; the shifting status of photographic realism as a cultural construct; how questions of signification are transformed by the narrative organization of time-based spatial media; and the relation of technology to art, not only in the production and dissemination of images but also in the technological delimitation and organization of the spatiality and temporality of spectatorial experience and desire. (1403)

     

    While seeing film studies as having grappled for a half-century with spatial-temporal images, thus providing us with the beginnings of a vocabulary with which to approach digital gaming, Rodowick nonetheless notes gaming’s different status, saying that “interactive media promote a form of participatory spectatorship relatively unknown in other time-based spatial media” (1402).1

     

    One can see the gap here between Rodowick’s optimism at the prospect of refitting existing conceptual categories for the study of new digital media, including computer and video (console) games, and Aarseth’s pessimistic assessment of how such moves amount to a sort of hostile takeover of what might have been a theoretically and institutionally independent new field. These positions seem to me to characterize the current state of digital game studies. (And we might, following both Rodowick’s and Aarseth’s attention to institutions and power, wonder if it’s not coincidental that the optimistic position is articulated by an influential–perhaps even powerful–chair of film studies at King’s College, London in a prestigious print journal–itself a disciplinary emblem 116 years old–while that of the pessimists is articulated by the author of the iconoclastic Cybertext in an online journal in its infancy.) While it is likely that much of the actual work getting done in digital game studies falls somewhere between Rodowick’s ideal of adaptability and Aarseth’s nightmare of ignorant misapplication, I hope in this paper to show what a broadly conceived literary studies might offer the new digital game studies, and so highlight both Aarseth’s warning and Rodowick’s invitation. Games are not, as Aarseth says, literature, but they can sometimes be productively approached with conceptual categories borrowed from literary studies. Indeed, it may be that what we find most useful in approaching this new cultural phenomenon is the disciplinary baggage accumulated along the way.

     

    Aarseth’s concerns are articulated a little more fully in the same inaugural issue of Game Studies in an article by the journal’s co-editor Markku Eskelinen.2 In “The Gaming Situation,” Eskelinen, using Aarseth’s image of colonization, also mourns the way conceptual categories improperly imported from other fields are misused to study digital games: “if and when games and especially computer games are studied and theorized they are almost without exception colonised from the fields of literary, theatre, drama and film studies. Games are seen as interactive narratives, procedural stories or remediated cinema.” Eskelinen’s answer to the methodological problem that he and Aarseth delineate is to begin the “necessary formalistic phase that computer game studies have to enter” by developing a complex though introductory taxonomy of the different possible gaming situations. This taxonomy confronts “the bare essentials of the gaming situation: the manipulation or the configuration of temporal, spatial, causal and functional relations and properties in different registers.” In the preliminary taxonomy that follows, Eskelinen develops a system for understanding games as “configurative practices” rather than interpretive ones, and draws extensively on the narratology advanced by those such as Gerald Prince and Seymour Chatman. Insofar as it goes, and keeping in mind Eskelinen’s own admission that he is initiating a “necessar y formalistic phase” in order to name the parts of a new phenomenon, Eskelinen’s approach is a useful hermeneutic grid by which we can categorize and understand the real and potential forms that games take. Though one might not always agree with some of Eskelinen’s preliminary thoughts on the gaming experience–his taxonomy seems to overemphasize the movement from start to finish, ignoring the ludic pleasures of side-plots or repetitive play–this style of formal functionalism will help us get a grasp of the variety of digital gaming experience.

     

    That said, what becomes apparent in Eskelinen’s critique of other disciplines’ colonizing moves is the danger attending any transdisciplinary academic enterprise: the tendency to misconstrue what other disciplines do, or to regard them as monolithic, neglecting their many internal debates and divisions. For example, Eskelinen condemns literary studies for seeing games as “interactive” stories or for misapplying “outdated literary theory.” While both of these missteps are certainly possible, they don’t exhaust the possibilities for a literary studies approach to computer games (as even Eskelinen’s own use of narratology shows). I will use two examples here to illustrate my point. First, it is the lack of a story that provides a useful way into the player’s experience of first-person shooters such as Half-Life or countless others; Eskelinen’s useful narratological tools notwithstanding, it is the very repetition of the same sequence and the experience of storied intention that might be worth noting from a literary studies point of view. Second, with other games in the tradition of Sid Meier’s Civilization series, literary studies’ methodologies (as well as its baggage) can help us grasp the way games come into being as repetitions of traditional cultural-semiotic formations.

     

    In Joystick Nation, J. C. Herz makes a distinction between a game’s “two stories superimposed. One is the sequence of events that happened in the past, which you can’t change but is a very good story. The other is the sequence of events that happens in the present (e.g., you are wandering around trying to solve puzzles), which is a lousy story but is highly interactive” (150). But this split–a good background story that you can’t affect and a poor excuse for a plot that you perform as you interact in gaming space–is rarely true for first-person shooters. In typical shooters such as the Quake or Duke Nukem series, there is no interesting background story. Typically, aliens have invaded or monsters have sprung up and you need to shoot ’em. That’s it. Half-Life develops this theme a bit by having the player’s avatar be a dorky, spectacled, theoretical physicist who inadvertently aids the accidental opening of a dimensional rift that allows all kind of baddies through to our world, but even this is still a rather rudimentary and clichéd background story.

     

    On Herz’s other level, however, there’s even less “story,” and in this sense, shooter games make very poor interactive narratives. Things move, you shoot them. Try to find the right door and make the right jump. There are some more things–shoot them too. This episodic series of encounters does not make an interesting tale, and here one would have to agree with Eskelinen that interpreting computer games of this genre (at this stage of development) as “interactive fiction” would be woefully misguided and wouldn’t tell us a whole lot about the game or the experience of playing it. Or, rather, testing narrative against Half-Life reveals an interesting lack. Peter Brooks formulates his inquiry into plot as the “seeking in the unfolding of the narrative a line of intention and a portent of design that hold the promise of progress toward meaning” (xiii). What’s interesting in many games is the combination of, first, a plot rarely interesting enough to create in the player a narrative desire for meaning, and, second, a sense nonetheless of design in the world, design that promises absolute meaning. If Half-Life does not enplot me as the character-operator in an interesting way, it is nonetheless existentially soothing in that shooter games (and other genres) encode a kind of narrative of design that is created in part through repetition. That is, I can replay scenes endlessly for a better outcome. Most shooter and adventure games in particular contain several or even many such scenes that necessitate this, such as a particularly difficult jump or a sudden ambush–I must play it several times before I even know what tactic will get me out of a situation into which I am “thrown,” and then several more times before I get it right. This might sound like cheating, but it isn’t. This is the experience structured into the gaming process–the multiple tries at the same space-time moment. Like Superman after Lois Lane dies, we can in a sense turn back the clock and replay the challenge, to a better end.

     

    In view of this systemic repetition or déjà vu built into a game, one might remember Albert Camus’s attraction to the figure of Sisyphus, doomed in hell to eternally roll a heavy stone up a hill, despite knowing that it will tumble back down again. Sisyphus’s repetitive act has no resolution to it–he’s doing the same thing, but won’t be able to figure out a way to do it “properly” eventually, so that the rock will stay put at the top of the hill. In the game world, this would be known as a programming error–I can’t make the big stone stay at the top of the hill so I can get to the next level–and the software maker would promptly send out a patch to fix the bug. In other words, it’s a flaw in the game world’s design. But what attracted Camus to Sisyphus’s situation was its resonance with the essential structure of human experience–absurdity. “Sisyphus is the absurd hero” (89), Camus reports. What is absurd is that, against our desire for order and meaning in the universe, the universe meets us as blank, a fact that does not, however, destroy our desire. Camus defines the absurd human situation this way:

     

    I said that the world is absurd, but I was too hasty. This world in itself is not reasonable, that is all that can be said. But what is absurd is the confrontation of this irrational and the wild longing for clarity whose call echoes in the human heart. The absurd depends as much on man as on the world. (16)

     

    Our world is not reasonable, as Camus says, because it is without design–it carries no mark of having been made with us in mind. By itself, this designless, random, irrational world is not absurd. The absurd’s structure, Camus repeatedly notes, is always double and relational: the world is absurd only by virtue of being perceived by our minds, which desire order and design in it.

     

    In the face of this absurd realization, humans create constructs that help us escape it–which is where narrative comes in, not only in the narratological sense, but in the sense of creating plots, designs, intentions in our world. We look for something that might assure us of design and intention, which is what religion does, but it’s also what games do. Games therefore do not threaten film’s status so much as they threaten religion, because they perform the same existentially soothing task as religion. They proffer a world of meaning, in which we not only have a task to perform, but a world that is made with us in mind. And, indeed, the game world is made with us, or at least our avatar, in mind. As Lara Croft’s creator puts it, “The whole Tomb Raider world is utterly dependent on Lara’s size and animations. The distance she can jump, reach, run forward and fall are set variables. In this way, her world is designed for her to exist in” (qtd in Poole 212). This is true of the gaming world, not just in virtual-physical measurements but also in terms of the lack of autonomy of everything within the world. In the game world there is random chance in the form of computer-generated virtual dice-rolls, but no contingency: I might play a game for 80 hours and arrive at a place where a broken box hides a passage that has been prepared–just for me. Or I might find at the beginning of a game a key, and pocket it with the certainty that after tens of hours of play (sometimes years in game time) the key will be absolutely necessary to open a door I’ve just found. Of course, I might find and pocket a key in this bug-ridden piece of software we call “reality” as well, but it almost certainly will not end up opening a door for me. Such keys represent sheer potentiality. In my life, many millions of such potentialities are never realized–I’ll never know what door this key opens–whereas in the game, most of them are. They come to me by design, not by chance; they are oriented toward my success and enjoyment. Computer games, particularly those with worlds prepared for our exploration like shooters, adventure, and role-playing games, thus existentially soothe us amid the terror that we otherwise feel.3

     

    In these ways, literary studies’ experience with reading designed worlds (fiction) might help us understand how digital games situate their operators, and give us a view onto the pleasurable work that they do. To “read for the plot,” as Peter Brooks puts it, is thus not to see games as stories–even interactive ones that purportedly involve the “reader” more directly than traditional tales or films–but to see the player’s experience as one of unraveling the design inherent in the game world.4 This kind of investigation may, however, differ from what Eskelinen calls “traditional literary studies” which is “based on literary objects that are static, intransient, determinate, impersonal, random access, solely interpretive and without links” (“Cybertext”). Eskelinen foresees a productive “combinatory and dialogic interplay” between literary studies’ interpretive practices and that taxonomic formalism that he advocates, and he’s probably right–though this Anatomy of Criticism for the playing of digital games remains to be written. In briefly investigating a second genre, that of the turn-based strategy games of Sid Meier’s famous Civilization series, I want to show how our interpretive practices are useful in opening up the cultural semiotics of the game. But, just as importantly, it’s the very disciplinary baggage coming with old methodologies, which Eskelinen and Aarseth fear will obfuscate the new object, that turns out to be the source of insight into the medium, not only as a text to be read but as the normative historical rules within which the operator works, and which, in turn, work on the operator.

     

    Civilization III, the latest iteration of Sid Meier’s influential series,5 was published in 2001 to much critical acclaim. It is a turn-based strategy game in which the player-operator plays the role of the (fortunately ageless) ruler of a nascent civilization, from 4000 B.C. to 2020 A.D. As ruler, the player governs the developing civilization throughout six millennia by exploring the world, sending out settlers to found new cities, developing existing cities by building city improvements, coming into contact with other, and eventually rival, computer-controlled civilizations, and setting tax policy (how much of a civilization’s wealth should be devoted to citizen’s consumption, technological research, or to the governor’s coffers). Beyond expanding the territory of one’s civilization, whether through settling, warfare, cultural influence or espionage, one of the most important aspects of the game is researching new technologies. The game involves 82 “technological” advances which are military, governmental, financial, theological, scientific, and theoretical in nature. New technological breakthroughs allow cities to build city improvements, to build new military units, or to embark on what’s called a “Wonder of the World.”

     

    Unlike Civilization II, in which Wonders of the World are unique projects (that is, in any game a Wonder can only be built by one city on the planet) with empire-wide beneficial effects, Civilization III has Great Wonders, which follow the above rule, and Small Wonders, which can be built once by each rival civilization. For example, in both games the discovery of Literature (called Literacy in Civilization II) allows a city to build the Great Library, which in turn bestows upon its owner any technological advance already known to two other civilizations. With the discovery of Electronics, on the other hand, a civilization is allowed to build the Hoover Dam, which puts a hydroelectric plant in each of the continent’s cities (thus improving production). Typically, a civilization further up what is termed in the strategy game genre the “technology tree” has a competitive edge–social, economic, and military–over its rivals.

     

    The bulk of the game’s play in Civilization III occurs around and in the cities. The map of the world is divided into a diagonal grid on which cities are built and over which units move. Once built, cities extend a zone of control two squares in every direction. A city’s population works this area, extracting food, production materials, and trade goods. Cities are the sites of industry, commerce, and research for each civilization, and their relative health is an index to the strength of the civilization as a whole. The game accordingly inscribes an expansionist narrative, whereby one wins only by settling new cities or conquering those of one’s opponents.

     

    Figure 1: A City on a Hill

     

     

     

    When the game begins, the world is shrouded in unexplored darkness, the player has no diplomatic contact with the rival civilizations, and the opening message announces that “Your ancestors were nomads. But over the generations your people have learned the secrets of farming, road-building, and irrigation, and they are ready to settle down.” The first goal is to found a capital city, from which the empire will proceed to grow (Figure 1). There are two phases to this process of expansion: the exploration of nearby terrain, during which the darkness recedes, and the settling of that terrain by settler units, who found new cities. Eventually, the expanding empire comes into contact with rival civilizations, at which time diplomacy begins.

     

    Figure 2: The Virgin Land
    Figure 3: Full of Wild Beasts and Wild Men

     

     

     

     

    What is interesting for the purpose of this paper is the way in which the land appears empty of inhabitants until one runs into the rival civilizations (Figure 2). Once the terrain is revealed, there is no presence other than one’s civilization and its rivals. However, placed at random intervals over the map are village icons (which are not cities; see Figure 3) representing the existence of a “minor tribe”–populations which, according to Civilization III‘s manual, “are too isolated, not organized enough, or too migratory to develop into major civilizations” (Manual 67). In terms of Civilization‘s gameplay, however, these are known as “goody huts” in that exploring them often confers benefits upon the explorer, such as a technological advance, a sum of money, a military unit, or even a new city that joins the player’s civilization. But frequently one encounters a hostile reception when entering a hut square, during which, as Civilization II‘s manual puts it, “a random number of barbarian units comes boiling out of the terrain squares that adjoin the village” (83; see Figure 4). Or, as the game screen expresses it, “you have unleashed a horde of barbarians!” In any event, the village disappears, and the land once again is clear for settlement–provided, of course, you can dispatch the barbarians.6

     

    Figure 4: You Have Unleashed a Horde of Barbarians!

     

     

     

    Civilization III and its predecessors thus posit the land as both inhabited and not inhabited by populations that seem to be on the land yet somehow, paradoxically, don’t occupy it. The Civilization III manual’s explanation of such minor tribes as being “too isolated, not organized enough, or too migratory to develop into major civilizations” must be discounted as the game’s first ideological ruse: no village is any more “isolated” at the start of the game than the player is; the tribes are not “migratory” because they remain fixed on a single terrain square; and since such tribes can offer the occasional technological advance, they obviously are not too “unorganized” to develop into a civilization. In fact, these games posit a fundamental opposition between a tribe’s mere squatting on the land, taking up space, and the civilization’s real tenancy on the land. And here one meets the first paradox of the American national symbolic staged by the game. American mythology has it that the Americas were essentially empty of inhabitants prior to colonization by European powers. What the Civilization series stages is the contradiction between this comforting “national fantasy” (Berlant 1) of the virgin land and the reality of the complex aboriginal societies all over the Americas. In the Civilization series, the barbarians appear to emerge from the land as a kind of terrestrial effect. This effect comes about not only by the exploration of the villages, but from random appearances of several barbarian units in land that has been explored but not settled. This dynamic inevitably takes place on the frontier of the player’s civilization–that liminal place where one’s smallest cities are located, between the center of one’s empire (and its bigger and better-defended metropoli) and the seemingly empty wilderness beyond. It is primarily on this frontier that the logic of civilization finds itself through a meeting with its opposite, the frontier being, as Frederick Jackson Turner imagined it, “the meeting point between savagery and civilization” (qtd in Drinnon xiii). This dynamic, of what the game calls the “boiling out” of symbolic Indians, is enough to strike terror into the heart of the civilization ruler, a terror akin to that American terror of the new world. Our early records of settler conceptualizations of their Indian neighbors give evidence of this terror; early Puritan separatist William Bradford, in Of Plymouth Plantation, wrote in the 1620s of “a hideous and desolate wilderness, full of wild beasts and wild men” (62). For Bradford, “the whole country, full of woods and thickets, represented a wild and savage hue” (62).

     

    The best defense against barbarian-Indians is to “settle” the land by extending one’s cities. In Civilization II, if all squares of what Bradford called the “hideous and desolate wilderness” come within city radii, the “wild men” he referred to never emerge. In other words, the game imagines the indigenous presence as a kind of wildness in the land that simply disappears when the land has been domesticated. In this way, these games arrive at an ideological solution that echoes the one achieved by early Christian settlers of America. The problem is this: how can the pagan Indian presence be accounted for in this land that is understood to have been given by God’s grace to his Christian people? This problem and its resolution are nicely articulated in another early Christian record of settlement, Mary Rowlandson’s 1682 account of her capture, enslavement, and eventual ransoming from the Wampanoag nation in what is today Massachusetts. When Rowlandson is captured during a raid on the settler town of Lancaster, she has to try to make sense of her Indian captor’s presence and agency in terms of the mythology that was currently governing the northeast colonies. In this “the vast and desolate wilderness,” as she calls it (122-23), echoing Bradford, the Indian presence is seen, ultimately, to be a method whereby God tests his people. Why, for Rowlandson, has God seemed to leave His people to themselves? After all, God could annihilate the heathens but chooses not to. The answer Rowlandson comes to is that the Wampanoag are the means by which God teaches His people moral lessons (158-59). This answer takes the agency away from the Indians–it’s not their own knowledge about how to feed themselves during a particularly brutal New England winter that gets them through it (they’ve been there for centuries, after all), but God’s will. As Rowlandson puts it, “I can but stand in admiration to see the wonderful power of God, in providing for such a vast number of our Enemies in the Wilderness, where there was nothing to be seen, but from hand to mouth” (160). The Civilization games pursue a parallel logic–the Indian presence is understood to be a kind of obstacle, the overcoming of which is the register of the civilization’s vitality and superiority. The Indians exist not as a civilization in their own right, but as an obstacle to be surmounted by civilization; in the game, as in Rowlandson’s account, the enemy Indian Other is imagined as being the mechanism whereby the nascent American self is tested and found to be powerful.7

     

    Figure 5: Pink, Pillaging Barbarians

     

     

     

     

    Civilization III transforms this symbolic content and, displaying the result, thereby conceals its ideological commitments. It offers, in other words, a series of interpretive ruses, such as the manual’s explanation of the nature of the minor tribes, to distract our attention. Among the other ruses are the fact that, while the “barbarians” cannot become a rival civilization, the game allows you to play as the Iroquois or Aztecs (or Mayans, Aztecs and Sioux in Civilization II). And indeed there are other ruses as well–such as the visibly pinkish skin of the barbarians that emerge from the land in Civilization II‘s and Civilization III‘s iconography (see Figure 5). It was the iteration in 2000 of Civilization: Call to Power (one of several sequels to Civilization II) that accidentally literalized the symbolic content in its iconography, having the barbarian units (and the player’s early warrior units) replete with headdress (Figure 6).

     

    Figure 6: Blood Shall Run!

     

     

     

    The barbarian units also respond to a player’s commands with the phrase “blood shall run,” spoken in the Hollywood Indian’s characteristic monotone. Sid Meier’s Alpha Centauricame perilously close to literalizing the symbolic when it routinely announced a player’s encounter with the aboriginal fauna using the ominous words, “indigenous life-forms,” the very postcolonial diction of which raises such intertextual, historical echoes.

     

    Figure 7: Culture Tames the Wilderness

     

     

     

    Civilization III adds a new component to this ideological framework, that of national “culture.” In Civilization II, the player’s civilization does not have a border as such: or, rather, its border is in a sense a series of city states whose collective territory is only the map squares that the cities work. Sid Meier’s Alpha Centauri adds a territorial border to the game that exceeds by several squares the immediate land that is worked by one’s cities; this is useful because another civilization can’t then place dozens of troops almost at one’s city gates just before declaring war, since it would have to trespass across the territorial border first. Civilization III adds a logic to this border, and makes it integral to the experience of the game when it introduces the new concept of national culture. In Civilization III, cities can create improvements like temples, cathedrals, libraries, palaces, universities, or Wonders that generate “culture points” every turn; when enough have accumulated, a visible line representing a civilization’s cultural borders extends further outward from the city, beyond the squares that the city can work directly. When each contiguous city’s cultural borders touch together, a national culture is created, represented on the map by a visible line that demarcates one’s territory from that of another civilization (Figure 7). The game also represents the national borders of rival civilizations; in fact, a small city with little culture of its own on the border of a rival civilization with a powerful culture can be swayed to depose its governor and convert to the rival civilization. What’s interesting here too, however, is the role that culture plays vis-à-vis the Indians: first, Indian villages don’t generate culture, and second, they won’t emerge from “empty” land that is within your cultural borders but beyond the reach of your cities. As the manual puts it,

     

    though you might conquer the active tribes in your immediate area, new ones arise in areas that are outside your cultural borders, in areas that are not currently seen. . . . Thus, expanding your network of cities over a continent eventually removes the threat of active tribes, because the entire area has become more or less civilized by your urban presence. (67)

     

     

    In other words, again repeating traditional American mythology, the Natives don’t have culture (because their “villages” don’t generate it like your “cities” do), but they can be tamed by it. Or, to put it yet another way, the absence of Native title to the land they squatted on is betrayed by their lack of real cultural formations that might confer tenancy.

    Figure 8: Barbarians Inside the Gates
    Figure 9: Barbarians Outside the Gates

     

     

     

     

     

    In these games, the fact that the Indians are understood not to occupy the land is linked fundamentally to the Native inability to develop technology. That is, they propose that indigenous populations improperly take up space in the empty land precisely because they don’t develop technology and therefore aren’t nascent civilizations. Conversely, these populations don’t develop technology because they don’t have a meaningful presence on the land–when they are in their “goody huts” they don’t, that is, work the land (as agriculture, mining, trade) as a resource in order to advance along a teleological model of technical progress. Even when the barbarians manage to take over a player’s civilized city (Figure 8), which happens from time to time in Civilization II but which feature has been excised from Civilization III, they work the land in the city’s radius but don’t improve the land (through irrigation or creating mines), they can’t make city improvements (like a granary to store grain or barracks to train troops), and they can’t collect taxes or research new technology (see Figure 9 in contrast). In this way, Civilization II and III construct the indigenous population as another obstacle of the landscape–and one which, like the others, needs to be settled and disciplined. Eradicating the minor tribes and the land’s erupting barbarians is not an unfortunate side effect to the march of progress–it is actually constitutive of one’s civilization.

     

    Thus far I have argued that the Civilization series is infused with an American ideology that is comforting insofar as it justifies genocidal practices and the stealing of land by positing an empty virgin continent that is paradoxically populated by what the game manual calls “minor tribes” that can’t improve the land and tame the wilderness. Literary studies’ strengths in reading semiotic codes, in seeing historical parallels, and in reading for the gaps and fissures, knowing that “what the work cannot say is important” (Macherey 87), are as important as any narratological contribution it might make to digital game studies. But, in this instance at least, it is precisely the disciplinary-institutional baggage of American literary studies that helps bring into focus the problematics through which the Civilization series works without explicitly naming them. In the last twenty or so years, American literary studies has begun to recognize its own historical and ongoing evasion of the United States’s practices of empire and colonization. “The land was ours before we were the land’s,” intoned Robert Frost in the land’s eastern capital in 1961; as his inaugural poem describes America’s spiritual “surrender” to the land, “we gave ourselves outright . . . / To the land vaguely realizing westward, / But still unstoried, artless, unenhanced” (467). Five years before, in his well-known preface to his Errand Into the Wilderness, the influential historian Perry Miller retrospectively discerned the coherence in his work to be, as he put it, “the massive narrative of the movement of European culture into the vacant wilderness of America” (vii). Both Frost and Miller articulate a central tenet of one American mythology: that the United States was founded upon an empty land devoid of inhabitants. As Amy Kaplan puts this problem:

     

    United States continental expansion is often treated as an entirely separate phenomenon from European colonialism of the nineteenth century, rather than as an interrelated form of imperial expansion. The divorce between these two histories mirrors the American historiographical tradition of viewing empire as a twentieth-century aberration, rather than as part of an expansionist continuum. (17)

     

    Though much recent and some older work in American studies has begun to unravel this strand of American ideology,8 the comforting notion of the “vacant wilderness” awaiting European settlement remains essential to this culture’s symbolic self-understanding, even as repressed reminders of the historically vast aboriginal presence in the land continually rise to challenge the empty land hypothesis. In this case, it’s the initial blindness to American empire and colonization in American literary studies–and then a corrective movement, represented by such important works as Kaplan and Pease’s Cultures of United States Imperialism (1993) and Rowe’s Literary Culture and U.S. Imperialism (2000), not to mention the new areas of inquiry opened by postcolonial theory and Chicano and Native American studies–that constitutes the “baggage” literary studies can helpfully introduce to digital game studies. Like the Civilization series, other games might pursue similar strategies of transformation, display, and concealment: strategies now retroactively recognizable within the institutional, disciplinary history of American literary studies. While this baggage is useful, however, the kind of reading of ideology it allows is no different from that which might be performed on Mary Rowlandson, William Bradford, Robert Frost, or Perry Miller, to use my emblematic examples above. But when we turn our attention to the generic status of these texts registering this American ideology, we begin to see how an old style of ideology critique fails to take into account what I have called the “staging” of the ideology in this computer game. By this term I mean not the way the game creates a kind of panoramic representation of a peculiar set of political or social ideals, something that a reader of a book might (more or less) passively receive. Rather, if we, following Eskelinen’s lead, borrow Aarseth’s terminology and see games as configurative (in addition to interpretive) practices, the peculiar status of the computer game is to actually incorporate the player, making us into actors within the ideological staging: we also produce the ideological effects that the game registers each time we play the game.

     

    In this view, computer games could be understood to set the rules of play wherein the human player navigates through particular ideological or social contradictions; as rules, importantly, they naturalize certain historical and cultural contingencies. A game’s rules thus permit a select set of (re)solutions to the conflicts in the national symbolic which the game stages. Among other ideological effects, Civilization III makes inevitable, natural, and universal several Western-centered ideas of technological progress, the use of the land, and the opposition between “civilization” and “savagery.” In this way, historical specificity is forgotten, and the game reinforces the sense that those who have been displaced were only ever natural obstacles erupting randomly from the wilderness to block (American) civilization’s advance. Because these ideas are coded into the game rules they appear as inevitable historical rules. The game places the player in the position of guiding America’s development (even if the name of the civilization we play is different); we reenact the historical-territorial drama. The rules are the natural and naturalized logic of development within which that drama is played out (to a certain end).9 This process goes beyond the audience reacting to an ideological image or representation; instead, the player participates in producing an ideological effect that is not totally explicit anywhere, and that she or he may not fully comprehend. But of course, full comprehension is not the goal of the national symbolic, or of ideology.

     

    Players also learn to literally “play by the rules” in the game, which helps incorporate us into a society in which there will also be rules to be followed. What some games accomplish at an early age is to establish the idea of rules as something that are given, a status akin to that of a natural law. But Civilization III‘s typically adult players10 are taught again that success or failure happens within the rules that create a “level playing field” as the current cliché has it. In board games or computer games, however, players actually do start out in relative equality (although there are some chance elements as well, depending on the game), whereas in real life, so many characteristics of one’s life are already determined before birth, including social and economic standing, political freedom, skin color, gender, etc. What games accomplish is the instilling of the ideology of equality, which postulates that we are born equal and that differences emerge later on; the primary difference to be explained in this way is that of economic disparity, and games help explain that difference as the result of, in America, hard work and effort vs. laziness. Thus gaming helps inculcate the ideology that covers over the fact that, with the exception of the information technology bubble, most of those who are wealthy in the United States were born that way.11 Beyond this narrow ideological function, the game helps create subjects that accept the inevitability of rules as things that are given and must be “played” within–or else there is no game. This process is not total or ever complete, as the current gaming discourse complaining about the rules shows; here, players critique a game’s rules in view of a conventionalized notion of how “reality” works, or, less often, how a game’s playability is compromised by rules that are too “realistic.”12

     

    I would further venture that the game helps rehearse this ideology of equal opportunity not only on the individual level, but also on a national-cultural one. Civilization III posits a similar “level playing field” for different cultures at the dawn of human history. But a recent synthesis of work in several scientific and humanist disciplines suggests that the field was anything but level. In Guns, Germs, and Steel: The Fates of Human Societies, Jared Diamond advances a biological and geographical study of human history. In probing the ultimate and proximate reasons for why Europeans since the fifteenth century have been able to dominate other peoples in the Americas, Australasia and Africa–why, as he frames the problem in short hand, the forces of King Charles I of Spain were able to subdue the Incan capital of Cajamarca in 1532 instead of the forces of Incan emperor Atahuallpa subduing Madrid that same year (68)–Diamond explicitly and politically frames his work as an answer to the “racist explanations privately or subconsciously” (19) held by many Westerners. Resisting this genetic, and therefore racial, explanation for the fates of human societies, Diamond instead traces the influences of environment on their evolution. To briefly and inadequately summarize Diamond’s thesis, the east-west axis of the Eurasian continent allowed for the spread of wild plant and animal species and resultant biodiversity to a much greater extent than the predominantly north-south axes of the Americas and of Africa. The greater range of wild plant and animal species in the Eurasian/north African continent than in the Americas–with, for example, 33 species of wild large-seed grasses and 13 domesticable large mammals in the former, as opposed to 11 species of wild large-seed grasses and one large mammal in the Americas (140, 162)–meant that more human populations on the Eurasian land mass could become farming communities. Farming societies, as opposed to largely hunter-gatherer ones, tended to produce food surpluses and food storage techniques, allowing for the development of “large, dense, sedentary, [and] stratified societies” (87). These populations selected for resistance to several important epidemic diseases whose origins are ultimately in domesticated animal populations in a way that, obviously, societies without those same domesticated animals were never able to (with catastrophic results for those without the disease resistances). The larger and stratified societies tended to produce hierarchical political systems that were interested in territorial gain, writing, and technological developments that would eventually include oceangoing ships, guns, and steel. In summary, Diamond’s interpretation of the evidence is that European imperial domination of the Americas, south Asia and Australasia, and Africa was based not on a kind of genetic superiority, but on ultimate factors that Europeans had little control over or knowledge of–geographical and environmental traits.

     

    One can see from this inadequate summary that the kind of narrative Diamond is engaging in is similar to the one addressed by the Civilization games and others like them. By bringing these two texts into contact, I am not intending a critique of the games’ failings to accurately represent the dynamics of the growth of and conflicts between civilizations.13 Indeed, such a critique might be anachronistic, at least for the iterations of the series prior to Civilization III, as Diamond claims that his 1999 book is a new synthesis of old and new data, requiring knowledge of

     

    genetics, molecular biology, and biogeography as applied to crops and their wild ancestors; the same disciplines plus behavioral ecology, as applied to domestic animals and their wild ancestors; molecular biology of human germs and related germs of animals; epidemiology of human diseases; human genetics; linguistics; archaeological studies on all continents and major islands; and studies of the histories of technology, writing, and political organization.14 (26)

     

    Rather, the contrasts between the game’s narrative and Diamond’s narrative are interesting in that they highlight the ideologically productive ideas at work in the game’s code. That is, the gaps between these narratives suggest spaces where culturally useful–and ideological–ideas get worked out. This game’s designers did not invent these ideas; rather, they transcribed them from the larger culture into the interactive medium of the Civilization series.

     

    One might argue that Civilization III (and its predecessors) have subversive potential to challenge notions of Western supremacy. The game enables the simulation of alternative histories, recognizable as still being historical because their referents come from real things–names of actual nations and cities and people, and the real things that happen, such as trade, war, peace, exploration. In one sense, these alternative histories can be imagined and simulated, and different historical narratives explored. A player playing the Iroquois nation, or India, for example, might dominate the game, crushing opponents such as the Americans and the British and the Chinese, and win by either defeating everyone else or by sending a colony ship to Alpha Centauri (Civilization II‘s and III‘s other “winning condition”). In a lovely moment of irony and anachronism, a player playing Mohandas Gandhi (the game’s suggested ruler name for one playing as India, whose robed portrait appears during the diplomacy screens), might face down and conquer Elizabeth I of England, Catherine the Great of Russia, and others. What would be revealed in such a narrative is the contingency of human history: that things might have turned out differently to the extent that those nations understood to have been the losers in twentieth-century history (because the “Iroquois” and the “Indians” beat up on other peoples before the “Americans” and the “British” came along) could have in fact been the dominant society. Or, to put this in Diamond’s terms, Atahuallpa’s general might have arrived in Spain in the sixteenth century and sacked Madrid. But though some might find the game’s recognition of historical contingency progressive and liberating, I would argue that its ultimate effect is to reinforce the pattern of interaction between the colonizing power and the aboriginal. That pattern is reinforced not only by the necessary enactment of imperialism’s need to master the native land and its inhabitants, as I have argued above. Rather, a second kind of ideological work this performs is produced precisely because of the possible alternative histories. Things might have turned out differently because the game constructs history as a level playing field. So why didn’t the Iroquois conquer the Americans? Why weren’t the Indians able to colonize London and its outlying areas? Because those colonized peoples didn’t work as hard as–or didn’t have the noble spirit of–we Europeans. The game has abstract radical potential, but it is circumscribed by how things really turned out. That radical potential thus works ideologically to reinforce the notion of cultural and maybe racial supremacy. That things might have turned out differently need not produce existential-national anxiety in Western players, in light of the imaginable histories that include the subjugation of those players on an alternative, virtual earth. Rather, the actual story becomes explicable, when faced with the endlessly replayable historical simulations of civilization, only through reference to a kind of spiritual or cultural rightness of European civilization.

     

    These last observations suggest that computer and video games are indeed “configurative practices” rather than merely interpretive ones, as Eskelinen suggests; however, exceeding his taxonomy, the games are not the only thing configured. In fact, games may work on their operators to configure our expectations of the real, our sense of history, national identity, race and gender, or economic justice, not just in terms of representation, but in the way that rules teach universal laws and routine behavior. This is true not just in the way that the FBI and police agencies recognize when they use shooter-type games to train for shoot/no-shoot responses (see the somewhat hysterical Grossman 312-16), or the way in which the U.S. Army and Marines have teamed up with commercial game publishers to develop squad-based games to train officers and others how to “leverage human resources and information” (“Army”; Riddell). Nor is it only the pleasure of forming what Ted Friedman calls a “cybernetic circuit” or feedback loop with the computer, “in which the line demarcating the end of the player’s consciousness and the beginning of the computer’s world blurs” (137). Even in highly-reflective play, as is intensely the case in fan discourse on games, the ideological procedures of the games may not come to light. On the other hand, the hacker communities and digital game scenario sites suggest that the awareness of game rules–and the urge to rewrite them–often subverts the games’ standing rules governing the way a game can be configured, but they also exceed the rules’ ability to configure the operator’s paths of thought. Such discourse includes discussion of the aesthetic qualities of the rules themselves: why some rules and algorithms are downright beautiful–like the one that recently had a polite, smiling, cooperative Gandhi send an army of 40 or so Indian units across a continent (and many years) and over my peacetime border to launch a Pearl Harbor-like attack on my innocent Persian civilization. This is the two-way process of configuration–operator on game, game on operator–that digital game studies will have to address in the years ahead. We will need all our collective powers.

     

    Notes

     

    I thank Cort Haldeman for his technical help in rendering some of the audiovisual material quoted in this essay.

     

    1. Rodowick’s essay was a preview of his Reading the Figural, or, Philosophy After the New Media, published that same year. As if in example of the “recirculation” of cinematic concepts in new media studies was Lev Manovich’s The Language of New Media, also in 2001. Manovich’s book is fascinating as it traces the history of the screen in the West, suggesting both that the classical cinematic screen has its formal genealogy in Renaissance painting’s frame (80), and that the computer screen (and thus games) have their more proximate lineage not directly in cinema, but in radar screens that presented information in real time (99). The Language of New Media engages the new media, which include “a digital still, digitally composited film, virtual 3-D environment, computer game, self-contained hypermedia DVD, hypermedia Web site, or the Web as a whole” (14), through a history of visual media, primarily cinema and photography. This breadth is of course its strength–as it relates contemporary computer use to the history of visual form–and its weakness for game studies. Manovich, for instance, spends little time discussing actual games; Doom and Myst (both released in 1993) stand in for computer games in much of his discussion, and when he does refer to other games, they are mostly within the subcategory of action games (that is, wherein the user is the “camera” in a first-person perspective). So, for instance, when Manovich discusses 1990s computer games’ debt to the cinematic interface, he argues that “Regardless of a game’s genre, it came to rely on cinematography techniques borrowed from traditional cinema, including the expressive use of camera angles and depth of field, and dramatic lighting of 3-D computer-generated sets to create mood and atmosphere” (83). This is certainly true of many computer and video games (the latter of which Manovich, for an unexplained reason, does not mention in his book), but it is not true “regardless of a game’s genre.” Here, at least, Markku Eskelinen’s warning (and he refers specifically to Manovich’s book) against the colonizing attempts of other disciplines rings true, as the scope of Manovich’s claim about digital games’ lineage in cinema needs important qualifications. For example, Civilization III, discussed below, has its genealogy in board games, while Magic Online has its genealogy in the still-popular fantasy trading card game Magic: The Gathering, and though these two computer games emerged in 2001 and 2002, they both existed in previous iterations in the 1990s. Almost all of Manovich’s examples are first-person perspective action, exploration, or racing games, and when he does refer to real-time strategy games (such as the Warcraft series), one has to wonder how they make use of cinematic perspectives rather than, with Civilization III and other strategy games (sometimes called together “god-games” because of their omniscient visual perspective and the vast power they extend to players), previous board games or tabletop model wargames. Though these facts qualify Manovich’s expansive claims–others are made later when he states that games are experienced as narratives (221-22; always? what about Tetris?), and that “Structuring the game as a navigation through space is common to games across all genres” (248; but what of Tetris and Magic Online?)–they don’t negate the future necessity for game studies to attend in detail to the history of film (and other visual arts) and a cinema-derived analytical repertoire.

     

    2. Indeed, much of the first issue of Game Studies can be seen as a sustained assault against the notion that literary or film studies provide adequate tools for the new phenomenon. Jesper Juul’s “Games Telling Stories?” also uses narratology to refute three arguments that digital games can be considered kinds of narratives. That Aarseth, Eskelinen and Juul question the practice of unproblematically applying literary or film concepts to digital games, as Henry Jenkins also did seven years ago, shows how slowly this new discipline is forming. In the now-famous “Nintendo® and New World Travel Writing: A Dialogue,” Jenkins notes that two earlier books erroneously “presuppose that traditional narrative theory (be it literary or film theory) can account for our experience of Nintendo® in terms of plots and characters” (60), and offers instead a model of narrative for games as movement through space rather than in terms of characters and plots.

     

    3. Furthermore, the player alone has real agency in the game world. There do seem to be other people existing in the world, but they don’t do anything except wait for you and respond to your requests and actions. That is, nothing really happens in the game except through you. The newer games (Half-Life and Baldur’s Gate II) are increasing their use of scripted events, which simulate actions and events independent of you, and which you trigger by walking into a certain area of the game world. In these instances, the game simulates the idea that you come across lives in medias res. But in most of these scripted events, your actions and decisions are why they are there in the first place–they’re meant to give you a clue; or, your own action (which side will you help?) proves decisive in determining the outcome of the event. This is, of course, not the case in massively multiplayer online games, in which thousands or tens of thousands of players simultaneously interact in a persistent online world.

     

    4. And Brooks points to this connection as well, suggesting that “the enormous narrative production of the nineteenth century may suggest an anxiety at the loss of providential plots: the plotting of the individual or social or institutional life story takes on new urgency when one no longer can look to a sacred masterplot that organizes and explains the world” (6).

     

    5. The series has a rich and varied genealogy. Civilization was introduced as a computer game by Sid Meier in 1990, though it was inspired by a board game by Avalon Hill. It was followed up by Colonization for Windows 3.1/95 in 1995, which was a game focused more narrowly on the various European powers colonizing North America, and by CivNet, an online multiplayer version of Civilization for Windows 95 released by Microprose in 1995. Civilization II (for Windows 95) was released in 1996. Since then there have been several different sequels to Civilization II: these include Microprose’s Civilization II: Test of Time (1999), Activision’s Civilization: Call to Power (1999), and, after legal wrangling over the Civilization franchise, a sequel by Activision called only Call to Power II (2000). Another kind of sequel to Civilization II is Sid Meier’s Alpha Centauri (1999), a science-fiction themed game of the same genre designed by Sid Meier which begins where Civilization II ended, with the colonization of a planet around Alpha Centauri; this can be considered an heir to Civilization II in that its gameplay remains essentially the same–even to the point of including barbarians. The “true” sequel is regarded as Civilization III.

     

    6. Thus the Civilization series shares with some Nintendo games the mapping of space, but here, as opposed to the Nintendo games that Henry Jenkins and Mary Fuller analyze in “Nintendo® and New World Travel Writing: A Dialogue,” the colonization is literal and not merely metaphoric, as it is in their assertion that “Nintendo® takes children and their own needs to master their social space and turns them into virtual colonists driven by a desire to master and control digital space” (71). Touring through and thereby “mastering” a game’s digital space is not the same as the simulation of the settlement of land and territory and destroying native inhabitants along the way, as in the Civilization games.

     

    7. Most strategy games center around gathering resources from the land in order to construct units, build base improvements, or research technology (e.g. the Age of Empires series, the Warcraft series, the Command and Conquer/Red Alert series); all these games imply a similar model of the relation between humans and the land. What I have in mind in this essay is perhaps a sub-genre that imagines a role for the “native” life-form: whether the “barbarians” in Civilization II and its sequels Civilization: Call to Power, Civilization: Test of Time and Civilization III; the “natives” in Master of Orion II; or the “mind-worms” of Sid Meier’s Alpha Centauri. In all these cases, these forms that threaten civilization can be tamed and put to work or, untamable, must be destroyed.

     

    8. See, for instance, Kaplan and Pease, including Kaplan’s and Pease’s introductions and the essays therein. Kaplan names William Appleman Williams’s 1955 The Tragedy of American Diplomacy as an early critic of the American exceptionalism thesis, that America alone among the modern powers never developed an empire.

     

    9. When Friedman remarks that “the fact that more than one strategy will work–that there’s no one ‘right’ way to win the game–demonstrates the impressive flexibility of Civilization II,” he is referring to the two possible “winning conditions” of the game–eliminating all other rival civilizations, or sending a spaceship to colonize Alpha Centauri. My point is that though the game permits these two strategies to win the game, one bloody and one peaceful, both depend on the extensive development and mastery of the land by one’s civilization. Only by such mastery can the player achieve the infrastructure necessary for warfare or for the space race to Alpha Centauri. And what the mastery of the land means, as I have argued, is mastery over its barbarian inhabitants as well. This is true even in Alpha Centauri and in Civilization III, where players can pursue diplomatic, scientific, and economic victory paths, although the scientific victory path in Alpha Centauri produces an interesting coda to this paper in that it involves the almost-too-late recognition of the sentience of, and transcendental unity through, the equivalent of the Indians in the game, the “native” life-forms.

     

    10. Demographically, computer game players tend to be older than video (console) game players. Other demographic distinctions can be made according to game genre, by which turn-based strategy games tend to attract older players.

     

    11. In this sense, the Civilization series betrays a specifically American ideology that goes beyond an association with other settler colonies like Canada, Australia, or South Africa, all of which model civilization-savagery binaries. The games also carry the mark of the American Dream–that success corresponds to hard work and effort, not outside determining factors like heredity and geography. Since Crèvecoeur, this idea of America as a place where hard work, not privilege, is rewarded has been part of the national mythology.

     

    12. One example of this “fan” discourse was the demand before its release that the game designers of Civilization III create the more difficult levels of play through a variegated “AI” (or Artificial Intelligence, the optimistic name given to the set of algorithms that manage the computer-controlled rival civilization’s moves in the game), and not merely that the computer-controlled civilizations “cheat” by being able to build city improvements and units for a fraction of the cost of human players. Players recognizing this still play the game, but seem disturbed by the violation of the ideology of equality that the game promotes. It’s challenging to play as the underdog, with the field tilted against you, but we still understand this to be in some way “unfair.”

     

    13. Say, for example, the historical inaccuracy of having every game civilization begin with the technologies of farming, road-building, and irrigation, despite the actual lack of domesticable plant and animal species in many parts of the world. As Ronald Wright remarks, “Ancient America was criticized for lacking things that Europe had–things deemed epitomes of human progress. The plow and the wheel were favorites; another was writing. It never occurred to Eurocentric historians that plows and wheels are not much use without draft animals such as oxen or horses, neither of which existed in the Americas before Columbus” (6). Native Mexicans did invent the wheel–but, lacking draft animals, used them for toys (Diamond 248).

     

    14. But interestingly, the demand for realism and accuracy–whether visual or in games’ models of economics, physics, diplomacy, strategy, tactics, etc.–plays a large role in the reception of computer games. This requirement that virtual worlds be faithful in some sense to real worlds mirrors similar demands on cinema and literature, and can be seen in both printed and online reviews of games, and in the discourse of player websites devoted to particular games. One interesting example of this is a number of projects sponsored by Apolyton.net (a semi-official site catering to the Civilization series and games like them) devoted to the creation of open-source games like the Civilization series. One such project, called none other than “Guns, Germs, and Steel,” aimed for increased accuracy and realism in modeling the development of civilizations, and the debate among the game’s designers centered on ways they might implement some of the specific ideas in Diamond’s book. Though this particular project appears moribund, others continue.

    Works Cited

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. “Computer Game Studies, Year One.” Game Studies: The International Journal Of Computer Game Research 1.1 (2001) <http://www.gamestudies.org/0101/editorial.html>.
    • Activision. Civilization: Call to Power. CD-ROM. Activision, 1999.
    • “Army to Fund Video Games for Aspiring Commanders.” New York Times, October 25, 2001.
    • Berlant, Lauren. The Anatomy of National Fantasy: Hawthorne, Utopia, and Everyday Life. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991.
    • Bradford, William. Of Plymouth Plantation, 1620-1647. 1856. Ed. Samuel Eliot Morison. New York: Knopf, 1952.
    • Brooks, Peter. Reading for the Plot: Design and Intention in Narrative. New York: Vintage, 1985.
    • Camus, Albert. The Myth of Sisyphus and Other Essays. Trans. Justin O’Brien. New York: Vintage, 1955.
    • Diamond, Jared. Guns, Germs, and Steel: The Fates of Human Societies. New York: Norton, 1999.
    • Drinnon, Richard. Facing West: The Metaphysics of Indian-Hating and Empire-Building. 1980. Norman, OK: of Oklahoma P, 1997.
    • Eskelinen, Markku. “Cybertext Theory and Literary Studies, A User’s Manual.” electronic book review 12 (2001) <http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr12/eskel.htm>.
    • —. “The Gaming Situation.” Game Studies: The International Journal of Computer Game Research 1.1 (2001) <http://www.gamestudies.org/0101/eskelinen/>>.
    • Firaxis Games. Sid Meier’s Alpha Centauri. CD-ROM. Infogrames, 1999.
    • —. Sid Meier’s Civilization III. CD-ROM. New York: Infogrames, 2001.
    • —. Sid Meier’s Civilization III. Instruction Manual. New York: Infogrames, 2001.
    • Frauenfelder, Mark. “Death Match: Your Guide to the Box Wars.” Wired Magazine 9.05 (2001). 7 June 2001 <http://www.wired.com/wired/archive/9.05/deathmatch.html>.
    • Friedman, Ted. “Civilization and Its Discontents: Simulation, Subjectivity, and Space.” On a Silver Platter: CD-ROMs and the Promises of a New Technology. Ed. Greg M. Smith. New York: New York UP, 1999. 132-50.
    • Frost, Robert. “The Gift Outright.” Complete Poems of Robert Frost. New York: Holt, 1949. 467.
    • Fuller, Mary, and Henry Jenkins. “Nintendo® and New World Travel Writing: A Dialogue.” CyberSociety: Computer-Mediated Communication and Community. Ed. Steven G. Jones. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 1995. 57-72.
    • Grossman, Dave, Lt. Col. On Killing: The Psychological Cost of Learning to Kill in War and Society. Boston: Little, Brown, 1995.
    • Herz, J.C. Joystick Nation. Boston: Little, Brown, 1997.
    • Juul, Jesper. “Games Telling Stories?” Game Studies: The International Journal Of Computer Game Research 1.1 (2001) <http://www.gamestudies.org/0101/juul-gts/>.
    • Kaplan, Amy. “‘Left Alone with America’: The Absence of Empire in the Study of American Culture.” Kaplan and Pease 3-21.
    • Kaplan, Amy and Donald E. Pease, eds. Cultures of United States Imperialism. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1993.
    • Macherey, Pierre. A Theory of Literary Production. Trans. Geoffrey Wall. London: Routledge, 1978.
    • Manovich, Lev. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2001.
    • Microprose. Civilization II. CD-ROM. Microprose, 1996.
    • —. Civilization II: Test of Time. CD-ROM. Microprose, 1999.
    • —. Civnet. CD-ROM. Microprose, 1995.
    • Miller, Perry. Preface. Errand Into the Wilderness. Cambridge, MA: Belknap P of Harvard UP, 1956. vii-x.
    • Poole, Steven. Trigger Happy: Videogames and the Entertainment Revolution. New York: Arcade, 2000.
    • Riddell, Rob. “Doom Goes to War.” Wired Magazine 5.04 (1997). http://www.wired.com/wired/archive/5.04/ff_doom.html>
    • Rodowick, D. N. “Dr. Strange Media; or, How I Learned to Stop Worrying and Love Film Theory.” PMLA 116 (October 2001): 1396-1404.
    • —. Reading the Figural, or, Philosophy after the New Media. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2001.
    • Rowe, John Carlos. Literary Culture and U.S. Imperialism: From the Revolution to World War II. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Rowlandson, Mary. “Narrative of the Captivity of Mrs. Mary Rowlandson, 1682.” Narratives of the Indian Wars, 1675-1699. Ed. Charles H. Lincoln. New York: Scribner, 1913. 112-67.
    • Wright, Ronald. Stolen Continents: The “New World” Through Indian Eyes. Toronto: Penguin, 1993.

     

  • Reading Gravity’s Rainbow After September Eleventh: An Anecdotal Approach

    David Rando

    Department of English
    Cornell University
    dpr27@cornell.edu

     

    Since the September Eleventh airplane attacks on the World Trade Center, it is difficult to imagine American readers responding to the opening sentences of Thomas Pynchon’s Gravity’s Rainbowin quite the same ways as they had previously. “A screaming comes across the sky. It has happened before, but there is nothing to compare it to now” (3). Suddenly these famous words are thrust into new contexts, and yet, I would like to argue that the idea of “comparison” still pervades our ways of understanding. Who can forget the horrifying doubling and déjà vu of the images of the second airplane crashing into the second tower? That scene of doubled impact and destruction at once creates the desire for and, with its sense of radical singularity, denies bases of comparison. Pynchon recognizes that in the face of traumatic or devastating events we seek refuge in the comfort of comparison, in our sense that what bears similarity offers solace.

     

    Indeed, the events of September Eleventh were first brought into sense through frames of comparison, or metaphor. Immediately, evocations of the attack on Pearl Harbor shot through the media. That the movie Pearl Harbor enjoyed recent success at the box-office only helped to prime the American imagination for that easy parallel of surprise attack. Among other functions, the Pearl Harbor comparison helped to locate September Eleventh within an archetypal American loss-of-innocence story. But Pearl Harbor did not offer a metaphor for thinking about the vulnerability of a major metropolis, terms that newly pressed themselves upon the imagination. For this reason, it is fitting that New York Mayor Rudolph Giuliani was the first person to invite comparisons between New York and London during the Battle of Britain. “I think people should read about the Battle of Britain and how the people of London lived through the constant daily bombardment by the Nazis,” Mayor Giuliani told Barbara Walters in an interview that aired on September nineteenth. “They took terrible casualties, terrible losses. They never gave up. They never gave up their spirit and they figured out how to go about their lives and they prevailed. There’s nothing wrong with being afraid, but you don’t give in to it.” Mayor Giuliani probably does not have Gravity’s Rainbow in mind when he urges New Yorkers to read about London during World War Two. What Mayor Giuliani’s interview reinforces, however, is how tenaciously the mechanism of comparison occurs to us in the light of contemporary events and how transparently we appeal to the relations between events, texts, and contexts.

     

    In the wake of September Eleventh, the questions that literary criticism has asked about the precise nature of the relationship between text and context, events and history, and narrative and culture take on a new kind of urgency. In this essay, I would like to take seriously Mayor Giuliani’s suggestion that we turn to texts and history in order to make sense of current events. Specifically, I want to set the discourse of childhood and innocence in Gravity’s Rainbow in dialogue with the proliferation of post-September Eleventh anecdotes about children who selflessly break their piggy banks to contribute to relief funds. It seems as though each news organization and each local newspaper has its own version of this familiar kind of story. What is the relationship between these anecdotes of innocence and charity, the devastation at the World Trade Center site, and the United States’ present military campaign in Afghanistan? How are anecdotes such as these poised in an important position at the nexus of event, narrative, and history? How can understanding these recent anecdotes help us to understand Pynchon’s sexualized depiction of children in Gravity’s Rainbow? Conversely, what can Pynchon’s discourse of innocence in that novel teach us about how the recent piggy-bank anecdotes do cultural work in our current war? Finally, how might a new understanding of the function of anecdotes in general contribute to broad efforts in literary criticism to comprehend the connections between texts and history? In the process of addressing such questions, I mean to develop a space within anecdotes and the anecdotal where texts and history can have demonstrable and substantial connections in literary criticism through specific metonymical and metaphorical devices, where other historicist methodologies only project metaphorical connections.1 Anecdotes, which form at the very skin between history and narrative, may illuminate such connections by points of contact as well as by comparison.

     

    The status of children in Gravity’s Rainbow continues to be a problem for critics. How do we account for Pynchon’s graphic sexualization of children such as Bianca, Geli Tripping, or Ilse Pökler? Take, for example, these sentences from Slothrop’s sexual encounter with Bianca on the Anubis:

     

    Her eyes glitter through fern lashes, baby rodent hands race his body unbuttoning, caressing. Such a slender child: her throat swallowing, strummed to a moan as he grabs her hair, twists it...she has him all figured out. (469)

     

    Though this is not one of the more pornographic sites in this passage, these sentences are otherwise typical of Pynchon’s manipulation of childhood and sexuality in this and other scenes. “Baby” and “slender child” function as constant reminders amid sexual depictions that Bianca is a small ten- or eleven-year-old girl. Set off by the word “glitter,” the doubling of consonants in the words “unbuttoning,” “caressing,” “swallowing,” and “strummed” sustain both a sensuous prolonging of sounds and induce a miniaturizing effect through doublings that work similarly to the “-ette” suffix. “Fern” and “rodent” align Bianca first with flora, then with fauna, while the particularization of “lashes,” “hands,” “throat,” and “hair” disperses the subject into diffuse objects in an erotic field.

     

    The second sentence is especially resistant to grounding in sense. Pynchon seems to signal a fundamental violence in the representation of Bianca through the apposition of “strumming” and “twist.” Have we gentle effects (“moans”) from a violent cause (“twisting”), or rather, is the moan a moan of pain? If it is pain, how does the gentle sense of “strum” find expression in the passage? In one sense, at the level of trope, twisting and strumming are irreconcilable images. The strings of an instrument, mapped as hair, cannot be strummed when grabbed in a fist. The gap left in this trope, I suggest, is symptomatic of the scene’s resistance to becoming settled or brought into sense within either discourses of sex or of childhood. Most vexing of all is the final phrase, “she has him all figured out.” This is startling considering that Slothrop seems more the actor or agent as he grabs and twists Bianca’s hair; the switch within the same sentence of Bianca from acted upon to orchestrator prolongs the passage’s unsettled representations. Of course, it matters greatly through whom this final phrase is focalized. Is this Slothrop’s sexual projection onto the little girl or does it express Bianca’s machination and complicity? I believe that the shifting narrative positions and the self-destructing tropes purposefully leave this question unanswered. Pynchon is very careful not to polarize Bianca as either innocent or experienced, victim or seductress, subject or object, though it is not immediately clear why this strategic destabilizing of oppositions is structurally important to Gravity’s Rainbow.

     

    From local scenes like the one between Bianca and Slothrop, it is important to move out and consider the various contexts that frame them. What are the narrative contexts to which we might relate such scenes? One way to answer this question is to place these sexualizations within Pynchon’s larger project of producing a taxonomy of sexual alternatives with which Gravity’s Rainbow is rife. While the episodes with Geli and Bianca share qualities with other sexually deviant scenes in the novel, however, I would like to cordon the children off from this order temporarily and try to understand them in the context of Zwölfkinder. Zwölfkinder, where “Ilse” brings Franz Pökler during her visits, is the state-sponsored construction site of childhood and innocence in Gravity’s Rainbow.

     

    In a corporate State, a place must be made for innocence, and its many uses. In developing an official version of innocence, the culture of childhood has proven invaluable. Games, fairy-tales, legends from history, all the paraphernalia of make-believe can be adapted and even embodied in a physical place, such as at Zwölfkinder. Over the years it had become a children's resort, almost a spa. If you were an adult, you couldn't get inside the city limits without a child escort. There was a child mayor, a child city council of twelve. Children picked up the papers, fruit peelings and bottles you left in the street, children gave you guided tours through the Tierpark, the Hoard of the Nibelungen, cautioning you to silence during the impressive re-enactment of Bismarck's elevation, at the spring equinox of 1871, to prince and imperial chancellor...child police reprimanded you if you were caught alone, without your child accompanying. Whoever carried on the real business of the town--it could not have been children--they were well hidden. (419)

     

    Zwölfkinder becomes a matrix from and to which all of Pynchon’s descriptions of children issue and must return. The “official version of innocence” is both state created and state sustaining. Zwölfkinder resembles a factory where the state generates its innocence, a palpable, deployable cultural construct that may be put to “invaluable” uses. Pynchon does not offer in expository form an explanation of what uses these may be or the mechanism by which constructed innocence serves the state. We may infer, however, from the cultural and historical miniaturization and re-enacting, that Zwölfkinder is the state’s laundering service for its history and its actions. Just as illegal money may be laundered by channeling it through legitimate enterprises, so can the state launder itself innocent by re-enacting itself through the medium of children. The children of Zwölfkinder do not just play “mayor” or “city council.” They do not quaintly copy the institutions of the state. Through the children’s performance of these roles, “mayor” and “city” are actually brought into being, constituted as innocent. Pynchon shows us that the innocence of the state relies upon what only looks like the cultural and historical repetition and secondariness of Zwölfkinder. In fact, the centrality of state and corporate institutions to the function of Zwölfkinder is signaled by emphasis upon the “child city council of twelve,” hence the “Twelve children” of the city’s name.

     

    On some level, Pynchon represents Zwölfkinder as though it were consciously and unproblematically established by the state in order for it to invest itself with an official innocence. Verbs such as “making,” “developing,” “adapted,” and “embodied” seem to attach to unseen agents, a paradigmatic “Whoever” that clenches its fist unseen. On another level, however, Pynchon recognizes that Zwölfkinder can only generate innocence to the extent that it mediates between two different desires, not only the desire of the state but that of the public as well. The public’s desire and pleasure are figured in the recreational and resort-like dimension of Zwölfkinder, crucial both to its function in the fiction and to the efficacy of Pynchon’s figure in the narrative. The public agrees to bear witness to the performative production of innocence because its desires are fulfilled in turn. The accompanying adult visitors enjoy the leisure of a theme park and a reprieve from the all-consuming World War waging outside of the cordoned-off Zwölfkinder. It is a place where state and public desires can meet across a single object, their children. Not to be discounted is the public’s own desire to see its state’s roles and its history laundered in the children’s performances of them at the very moment that the state prosecutes its war. In the children the state sees everything it desires its public to be. In the children the public sees everything it desires the truth about its state to be. The very coincidence of state and public desire establishes a context in which the children’s performances can be contracted as performatives. Without this contract the children’s acts would be mere reenactment or mimicry. Zwölfkinder, like the anecdotes I discuss below, must serve desire at both ends and at every point in between in order to have the generative power that Pynchon insists upon.

     

    It is no wonder that Zwölfkinder serves as the setting where Franz Pökler nearly acts upon his frustration and anger about being used by the state in an act of “incest,” with “Ilse,” who may be his real daughter, or who may just be another invention of the state. In fact, through the state’s appropriation of the innocence produced when children enact the state, in a sense, both the imposter Ilse and the real Ilse are functions of the state. Which is to say that innocence is punctuated with state structures manufactured by Zwölfkinder while the state is riddled with innocence. In Gravity’s Rainbow the two can seldom be disentangled. The complicity of innocence with the state underwrites Pökler’s fantasy of rebellion, dooming it:

     

    He hit her upside the head with his open hand, a loud and terrible blow. That took care of his anger. Then, before she could cry or speak, he had dragged her up on the bed next to him, her dazed little hands already at the buttons of his trousers, her white frock already pulled above her waist. She had been wearing nothing at all underneath, nothing all day...how I've wanted you, she whispered as paternal plow found its way into filial furrow...and after hours of amazing incest they dressed in silence, and crept out into the leading edge of faintest flesh dawn, everything they would ever need packed inside her flowered bag, past sleeping children doomed to the end of summer, past monitors and railway guards, down at last to the water and the fishing boats, to a fatherly old sea-dog in a braided captain's hat, who welcomed them aboard and stashed them below decks, where she snuggled down in the bunk as they got under way and sucked him for hours while the engine pounded, till the Captain called, "Come on up, and take a look at your new home!" Gray and green, through the mist, it was Denmark. "Yes, they're a free people here. Good luck to both of you!" The three of them, there on deck, stood hugging....

     

    No. (420-421)

     

    The startling negotiation of sexuality and childhood in this passage bears remarkable similarity to the scene on the Anubisbetween Slothrop and Bianca. Here again we observe physical violence, miniaturization, and dazed complicity. More remarkable, perhaps, is how Pökler’s supposed route to freedom, Ilse’s body, might be said to compose nothing save figures of enclosure, masquerading in human name and shape. First, Ilse “takes care of,” or contains Pökler’s anger. Then she encloses him as a “furrow.” Next, everything needed for his survival gets “packed” in Ilse’s bag. “Stashed” below the decks of the ship, Ilse “snuggles” Pökler further yet, until, with the vista of freedom finally in sight, Ilse “hugs” Pökler on the deck. Pökler’s fantasy of incest and escape, then, is bound to fail. The more he resorts to violating innocence, the more firmly he is bound in his servitude to the state. Ilse can facilitate neither transgression nor rebellion. It is merely the vulnerable-looking construction of her innocence that makes her appear to Pökler as though she can. In violently rending the innocent mirage “They” have created of his daughter, Pökler fantasizes a route of escape. Realistically, Pökler’s maneuver can never constitute more than a repetition of the innocence-to-experience story, a tale already thoroughly written by the state, both backwards and forwards. Pökler’s desire for rebellion through a temporal movement that passes chronologically from innocence to experience can never hope to elude the state’s spatial sense of the narrative relations of its own story. The resounding “no” that dislodges Pökler’s day-dream is an acknowledgment that the premises of his fantasy–that Ilse is his daughter and that innocence/experience stories indeed exist, with the state’s children in starring roles–are from the beginning illusions cultivated by the state. The character in the dream cannot outdream the dreamer. Pökler’s day-dream cannot function as a source of wish-fulfillment because neither the wish nor its subject are stable or tangible materials. We remember, of course, Slothrop’s second Proverb for Paranoids: “The innocence of the creatures is in inverse proportion to the immorality of the Master” (241). The greater a role innocence plays, the more experienced those who “carry on the real business of the town.”

     

    If it is true that the state produces and consumes stories of innocence and experience, the transgressive hypothesis about such sexualized children in Gravity’s Rainbow begins to unravel. If innocence is already complicit with the state, we are bound to learn as Pökler does that its violation is already a familiar subplot in the state’s narrative structure. In order to understand more fully Pynchon’s sexualization of children, then, it is necessary to examine sites similar to Zwölfkinder, places where innocence is actually produced, in order to establish a narrative context against which to read Pynchon’s scenes.

     

    I would like to suggest that the narrative form most uniquely suited and situated for examining the instantiation of innocence in the state context is the anecdote. Easily mistaken for a miniature or an innocent itself, the anecdote renders the private, gossipy, or hidden in the process of becoming narrative and public as it fills the vacant spaces in more esteemed public histories. The anecdote, though typically imagined as representational and primarily metaphorical, is also composed of a metonymical narrative field where we can read constellations of contiguity as they settle into narrative logic.

     

    Do anecdotes gain currency in times of war? Gravity’s Rainbow argues that they do when Pynchon suggests that “the true war is a celebration of markets” (105) and “information [has] come to be the only real medium of exchange” (258). In the following, I would like to imagine these concepts in both their literal and figurative senses to show that there indeed exists an information market which uses innocence for its currency in the United States since September Eleventh. Like all markets, this market is an instrument that registers the ebb and flow of desire. After September Eleventh, anecdotes about innocent children gained measurable value, beginning immediately with the piggy-bank anecdotes. As a market, multifarious desires drive the stock of children higher, yet each piggy-bank anecdote functions as a miniature Zwölfkinder where innocence is produced around state exigency. Like Zwölfkinder, these anecdotes are mediated by various desires that coalesce around the children that star in them. Though they serve the state’s desire for an innocence that would let it wage war with impunity, these anecdotes are of course not state-issued, nor do they directly serve the state’s interests. Rather, the stories are more directly mediated by various public, institutional, and journalistic desires that can all take their pleasures in the same nexus of childhood and innocence, as the wildly diverse interests of Chaucer’s pilgrims once found fulfillment in the same pilgrimage. The journalists that press the acts of specific children into a predictable form do so because there already exists a public market for patriotism, sentiment, stability, and perhaps even for a willful blindness to the actions of its state. Organizations such as the Red Cross have something to gain in the market as well. These institutions take their pleasure on the anecdotal dimensions of charity while the journalists take theirs in the consumption of the stories. Once again, the public and the state invest their various desires for stability in the object of their children. State and public look up lovingly over the shoulders of their children and their gazes meet, though their fantasies are different. Part of what Zwölfkinder teaches is that the proliferation of certain stories after September Eleventh is neither unique nor unpredictable. As a result of this predictability, however, we can read our own historical condition in the characteristics of this common form that do seem unique or in the formal peculiarities that could not have been predicted. It is precisely because the discourse of childhood that follows September Eleventh is really no exception at all that our close attention to it and its variant in Gravity’s Rainbow can uncover what is peculiar in both.

     

    Although they exhibit important variations, all of the anecdotes of innocence presented here are structurally similar. Typically, a small child between four and eight years old is deeply affected by the disaster and, in what he or she sees as an act of patriotism, contributes his or her savings to relief funds for World Trade Center victims. These stories often demonstrate communal effects in which adult members of the community are inspired by the innocent children’s donations and are thus strengthened in their own patriotic and nationalistic resolve. While these anecdotes were profuse immediately following September Eleventh, I will also try to demonstrate that this structure of anecdote has a history and may be said to constitute a transnational and, to some extent, a transhistorical genre of its own. I treat these little newspaper narratives as anecdotes because each is a private story made public that fills a gap in the “official” narrative of history. They answer to anecdote’s Greek sense of “things unpublished” and the French root of “to give out” or “publish.” As these two nearly contrary senses emphasize, “anecdote” is a word that tends toward and finally subsumes its own opposite meaning in regard to the hidden or the revealed. The anecdote is never wholly free from the pull of either its private or its public pole but oscillates instead suspended between the two. In its form there is always something public about the secret anecdote as there is something that remains private in the form of the published anecdote. Journalism often takes the anecdotal form because of its position between current events and narrative, thus “the secret, private, or hitherto unpublished narratives or details of history” (OED), and because it serves public desire for the kinds of narratives it wants to consume.

     

    By exploring these anecdotes of innocence in the context of state exigency, I hope to demonstrate that the manipulation of children in Gravity’s Rainbow should be read as a means of resisting the state’s long history of appropriating the innocence of its children for its prosecution of war. Certainly, Pynchon entertains no illusions that sexually violating the innocence of children can be a means of eluding or subverting state power (as demonstrated in Pökler’s failure to escape and in his utter servitude). Instead, his insistence on representing children as already startlingly experienced blocks the state’s Zwölfkinder-type production and use of innocence, which is especially useful to the state when it attempts to justify military action. Pynchon’s achievement with respect to this discourse is to have rendered the state’s and the public’s mutual desire for innocence visible by making the representation of that desire literal and sexual. He underscores the investments that the public and the state make in the innocence of children by confronting us with the sexual dimension of desire and by forcing us to acknowledge its resemblance. The discourse of innocent children, though mediated in multiple ways, plays a role in producing favorable circumstances for war whose violence is just as palpable as Pynchon’s discourse of sexual violence. While the latter discourse elicits shock and disgust, the violent aspect of the former discourse remains concealed. The invisibility of violence depends upon the perception that there is indeed an essential difference between sexual and non-sexual desire, a denial of the fact that every desire is shot through with other structures of desire. Pynchon enables us to perceive the violence in both categories of childhood representation through a kind of commutative law that lets the discourses cross at the object of desire. His overturning of sexual innocence provides a means for rethinking the easy stories of innocence in which various interests take their pleasure, finally, by a commutation of our responses to the two discourses. Pynchon challenges us to read the following stories of innocence alongside our shocked and disgusted response to his own experienced children. How do we bring such divergent stories into sense when juxtaposed? What will become evident is how the post-September Eleventh anecdotes constitute and do not merely represent innocence in the first instance. In other words, while I do not doubt that the particular instances reported in these anecdotes actually occurred in some manner or another, I wish to emphasize instead how they already conform to well-established literary and anecdotal forms. Further, there never was a time when the opposite was true, that such anecdotes became structured by events that were unmarked by or innocent of this narrative structure.

     

    The most basic form of these anecdotes of innocence may be expressed in the following four examples:

     

     

    1. John DeCristoforo, in charge of fundraising at the New York chapter [of the Red Cross], said he’ll never forget one of the first visitors to his donation booth.”A 4-year-old girl walked up and opened her Pokemon backpack. She pulled out a matching Pokemon wallet, which she unzipped and dumped on the table,” DeCristoforo recalled. “She donated $4.37 in quarters, dimes, nickels, and pennies to the disaster relief fund. We saw many young people make sacrifices like this, but that little girl was one of the first, and one of the youngest.” (Ward)
    2. Katelyn Riant is broke.Her mother couldn’t be more proud.The 4-year-old Decatur resident carried her piggy bank to the Decatur Fire and Rescue headquarters at Flint and dumped her life savings–$22.30–into a shoebox. She handed it, along with a hand-drawn picture, to a firefighter. (Huggins) 
    3. Flowers and notes left by well-wishers have become impromptu shrines to the World Trade Center victims at area fire stations. Last week, an angel piggy bank was left outside a National City fire station. A child’s note was attached:”My name is AnnaLuz Montano. I am 8 years old. I am very sorry for what happened to New York City. So I’m donating my savings to help the family [sic] that went through so much tragedy. God bless America. I will be praying for all the family [sic] and to the firefighter.” [sic]Inside her bank was $53.17.Touched by her generosity, eight members of National City’s Firefighters Association visited AnnaLuz in her third-grade classroom at Lincoln Acres Elementary Thursday. They introduced themselves, gave her a commendation and proclaimed her a firefighter for the day. She gave them each a hug–and there were tears all around. (Bell)

       

    4. Sami Faqih, an 8-year-old McKinley Elementary School student of Palestinian descent, turned his sadness over the terrorist attacks into action on behalf of the relief effort.On Saturday, Sami went to the Corona Fire Department station of McKinley Street with his father and donated his piggy-bank–filled with $40 to $50 worth of coins–to the New York City firefighters’ relief fund. Sami also gave a firefighter a crayon drawing depicting a frowning sun and a row of tombstones with the inscription: “I wish you can com [sic] back Please.”Sami’s father, Wael Faqih, who emigrated to the United States in 1990 from Palestine, said his son was deeply moved by the terrorist attacks and felt compelled to help.”That’s our civic duty, isn’t it?” Faqih said. “He had a lot of emotions. He wanted to help America.” (Press Enterprise)

       

     

    Anecdote one begins with the adult frame of the story, which is central to this genre of innocence anecdote. The fundraiser occupies a knowing, experienced position with respect to the child. This relationship is requisite if the child’s gesture of patriotic charity is to move him or to spill over into the adult world, as all of these anecdotes are situated to do. They must be so situated because there is a public market that desires this effect, which precedes their service to newspaper, charitable organization, or state. The child must leave an indelible impression upon an adult. There is usually great detail about the child’s precise age, about the dollar amount of the contribution (often about the denomination [1, 2, 3], nearly always some mention of coins [4]), and also about the money container. Citation of age, instead of simply evoking “children,” functions as naturalistic detail and also deploys a specific category of the four or the eight year old that is already marked as small and innocent in our culture. It is provocative to think that Pynchon’s nearly categorical refusal to mark his children with precise ages somehow works to disrupt our recourse to this cultural association. The Pokemon backpack and wallet may be said to function as similar naturalistic and categorical markers, but its naming, like the naming of the piggy banks in the other anecdotes, alerts us to the importance of the actual money container. It is vital that the currency the children donate be as innocent as they are. It must not have previously circulated in markets of exchange, but have grown penny by penny in the cordoned-off space of the piggy bank. As the children at Zwölfkinder launder history, so do these children launder currency by storing it in a non-circulating or innocent space. The precision of dollar amounts, besides affording us unprecedented knowledge about our nation’s piggy banks, reinforces the innocence of both the child and the transaction. The uneven denominations both signal a child giver (adults are more liable to give even, calculated amounts) and tell us that every last penny has been sacrificed. The emphasis on coins, it almost goes without saying, lends a miniaturizing effect to the donation and the child. The focus in the first anecdote on the physical act of “unzipping” and the “dumping” of “quarters, dimes, nickels, and pennies” further establishes the innocence in the child’s unrefined mode of transaction.

     

    The second anecdote exhibits many of the above features but has some interesting variations. For one, while the first child donated in Manhattan, this precisely named child donates in a Decatur, Illinois fire department, reinforcing the idea that the attacks of September Eleventh were a national and not simply a local tragedy. The donation to the Decatur Fire Department assumes a unified civil or state service with national connections, although fire departments are usually thought of in the most local or municipal of terms. That a donation can be made to a universal fire department strengthens the idea of a large state structure that the child can make her innocent contact with. The hand-drawn picture, which also appears in anecdote four, compounds the sense that the children give more than money. The drawing lends a certain emotionality or expressiveness to the dollar amount to create an effect that the money could not accomplish alone. None of these anecdotes, nor any that I found, features solely creative drawings or notes without money, however.

     

    Anecdote three puts extra emphasis on the community impact of the donation when it stages the resultant visit of the firefighters and their conferral of an honorary “firefightership” upon the child. Also of note is the inclusion of the text of the child’s letter, which links to the inscription in anecdote four. In anecdote three, the grammatical mistakes of the letter tend to singularize plural and diffuse entities. The many families of the victims and the many firefighters become a single family and a single firefighter. This note, then, is remarkably articulate, if unwitting, about the general unifying function that these anecdotes perform.

     

    Anecdote four shows the potential in this form for adaptation and for variations upon a theme. Like anecdote three, the ungrammatical note produces real affect, especially when coupled with the disturbing depiction of the “frowning sun” and the “row of tombstones.” It is unclear whether the inscription, “I wish you can com back Please,” appears inscribed on the tombstones, or appears as a caption for the drawing. In either case, the inscription plays on categories of innocence, both in the misspelling of “come” and in the innocent conception of death. The inscription conveys a perfectly adult, or experienced sentiment until the capitalized “Please” suggests that the dead possess the agency to return. Though it is possible to read this inscription with religious emphasis or in innumerable other contexts, in the newspaper sphere the inscription is formulated to produce an affect of innocence.

     

    What seems most striking about anecdote four, however, is that unlike the three previous examples, the child in this case is of Palestinian descent. This anecdote performs many of the moves that the others do, but its improvisation with the form makes it exemplary of the uses to which the form may be put. In the context of the war and other exigencies of national interest, the other anecdotes perform an important unifying and innocence-generating function. Here, the form varies such that it performs very specific work in a specific context while the general effects become peripheral. Before the military campaign in Afghanistan even began, the Bush Administration took every opportunity to reiterate the fact that they were not at war with all Arab people or with Islam. This rhetoric was vital for American and foreign support for the war, regardless of how the Administration may have thought of its goals. The anecdote of the Palestinian child maps innocence onto race and performs the idea that the category of “American” supersedes more refined categories of identity and identification. “Civic duty” cuts across the child’s Palestinian origins (and perhaps his Muslim faith, which I believe we are meant to identify in the form, whether or not this particular Palestinian family is Muslim). Perhaps more disturbing than the fact that this anecdote enacts or performs the rhetoric of the state is that it so transparently situates itself in relation to the rhetoric of metonymy between Arab and terrorist. This anecdote enacts what it supposes is a necessary intervention in this rhetoric by appealing twice to the “terrorist attacks,” each time in opposition to “Palestine” or “Palestinian.”

     

    In order to demonstrate the longevity of the anecdotal form that I have discussed above, I would like to examine the following anecdote of an innocent Silesian peasant girl from an anonymous 1815 book review, which appeared in the Quarterly Review, of Gentz’s On the Fall of Prussia. It is instructive for its marked structural similarity to the above anecdotes and because it wears more plainly the mechanisms of metaphor and metonymy implicit in the World Trade Center charity anecdotes:

     

    An anecdote of a Silesian peasant girl deserves to be recorded, as it shews the general feeling which pervaded the country. Whilst her neighbours and family were contributing in different ways to the expenses of the war, she for some time was in the greatest distress at her inability to manifest her patriotism, as she possessed nothing which she could dispose of for that purpose. At length the idea struck her, that her hair, which was of great beauty, and the pride of her parents, might be of some value, and she accordingly set off one morning privately for Breslau, and disposed of her beautiful tresses for a couple of dollars. The hair-dresser, however, with whom she had negociated the bargain, being touched with the girl's conduct, reserved his purchase for the manufacture of bracelets and other ornaments; and as the story became public, he in the end sold so many, that he was enabled, by this fair maiden's locks alone, to subscribe a hundred dollars to the exigencies of the state. (436n)

     

    I like this anecdote in particular because the first sentence explicitly recognizes the way literary, specifically metonymical, reasoning stands between the representative anecdote and the general “feeling” of Silesia. The anonymous critic divulges the metonymical mediation between the anecdote and the real. It is worth trying to sort out how different discourses and powers exert themselves in complex configurations on the Silesian girl. “Parents” and “neighbors” converge in the second sentence amid a rather elaborate metonymical logic. The familial discourse about the girl’s relationship to her parents slides into apposition with “neighbors” until her relationship to her neighbors can substitute for familial relationships. This is a familiar way of thinking about how the idea of the nation as an extended family gets figured. On the other hand, we have the contiguity of “war” and “expense,” which are cemented to the neighbor and the family through the discourse of “contributing” and “patriotism.” Patriotism is constituted as contributing to the war effort, from within an economic scale of “possessing” and “dispossessing.” “At length the idea struck her,” suggests that the truthfulness of these relations must be arrived at by careful consideration and, conversely, that careful reasoning ensures, rather than interrogates, these metonymies. “Pride” abuts beautiful hair until, under the parental/national value system, the hair becomes currency that can be contributed to the war effort. The hairdresser, a neighbor, completes the metonymy of hair/ornament/capital, perhaps motivated by the same powers that moved the girl, but more probably moved by discursive principles that the girl herself brought into being for him.

     

    As was vital to the function of the post-September Eleventh anecdotes, the child’s innocent patriotism, constructed by the form itself, spills over in the adult world in which a hundred dollars are generated for “the exigencies of the state.” The previous anecdotes do not cite so openly their state affiliations, nor do they so easily lend themselves to obvious analysis. This is so because in the fully modernized present the anecdotes must accommodate greater varieties of desire. They cannot simply direct themselves toward the “exigencies of the state” because, while these exigencies are their cumulative object, the anecdotes must first act as ringbolts for more local desires as diverse as those for sentiment, patriotism, political insulation, financial profit, notoriety, stability, and so on. While this form might be said to recur as a kind of ideological response to war, its formal attributes are deeply historical in character and suit themselves to their own peculiar historical climate. This would account for the distortions of the form in the current anecdotes relative to the Silesian peasant anecdote, which in turn is itself a historical distortion of a prior form. For instance, to take just one example, it seems significant that the Silesian girl’s hair is translated quite causally into money through the economic inventiveness of the hairdresser. This is markedly different from the insistent emphasis that the new anecdotes place upon the child’s direct issuing of funds, innocent and uncirculated in character. This emphasis is perhaps the point in each anecdote marked by the specific historical conditions of our present war in which economic interests and motivations have and likely will continue to be questioned. Perhaps the fact that the September Eleventh disaster occurred quite pointedly at the financial center of the United States also contributes to the necessity for representations of economic fortitude and economic innocence. Still, long before this local detail contributes to the state, it serves the purposes of an organization like the Red Cross that has more uses for money than it does for locks of hair. Further, these stories are less likely to elicit subscriptions of money directly to the state, as in the Silesian peasant’s story, than they are to profit the news media. If these piggy-bank anecdotes do not cite as openly their state affiliations, then, this is because their affiliations are much more numerous and fractured than those of the 1815 anecdote. Anecdotes like these are necessary because local desires and the global desires of the state do not merely line up, one behind the other. They come from multiple angles, directions, and interests so various that it is imperative they all cross at least once at a common point. A stable society becomes adept at finding such points of common desire, and children are perhaps most commonly desired above all.

     

    Despite its historical differences, however, the anecdote of the Silesian peasant girl is very much at work all around us today, and the modes of innocence production remain structurally unchanged. Anecdotes do indeed gain (and become) currency in times of war, especially if we follow Pynchon in imagining war as a celebration of (especially information) markets. Such anecdotes direct our attention to the important line where power leaves its mark on children, whose little lives are pressed into the shape of discourse. Pynchon gives us means for sustaining dialogue with the categories performed and produced at this line with his refusal to ground his children in either innocence or experience. Near the end of Gravity’s Rainbow, the return of the child Ludwig, whom Slothrop found searching for his “lost lemming Ursula,” is representative of Pynchon’s deliberate destabilizing of children’s categories:

     

    It is fat Ludwig and his lost lemming Ursula--he has found her at last and after all and despite everything. For a week they have been drifting alongside the trek, just past visibility, pacing the Africans day by day...among trees at the tops of escarpments, at the fires' edges at night Ludwig is there, watching...accumulating evidence, or terms of an equation...a boy and his lemming out to see the Zone. Mostly what he's seen is a lot of chewing gum and a lot of foreign cock. How else does a foot-loose kid get by in the Zone these days? Ursula is preserved. Ludwig has fallen into a fate worse than death and found it's negotiable. So not all lemmings go over the cliff, and not all children are preserved against snuggling into the sin of profit. To expect any more, or less, of the Zone is to disagree with the terms of the Creation. (729)

     

    Like Slothrop when he finds the long-lost harmonica that he pursued down the toilet years earlier, Ludwig finds Ursula for another unexpected reunion. Even the category of return, however, refuses to stabilize without irony. For Slothrop, the reunion is only another moment of misrecognition: “It happens to be the same one he lost in 1938 or -9 down the toilet at the Roseland Ballroom, but that’s too long ago for him to remember” (622-23). Ludwig’s discovery of Ursula, however, might reify the idea that everything eventually returns (an innocent faith), though from the beginning Pynchon’s string of story-book formulas such as “at last,” “after all,” and “despite everything” cautions against such a reading. In displaying literary formulas that are related to children’s discourse and its various productions of innocence, Pynchon brings them to the fore of our cultural associative consciousness precisely so that the remainder of Ludwig’s story can be read against them.

     

    What has the boy who found his lemming been doing since we last saw him? He has been following Enzian and the Zone Hereros, “watching…accumulating evidence, or terms of an equation…a boy and his lemming, out to see the Zone.” We do not know why or for whom Ludwig accumulates evidence or terms for an equation, but such calculated and precise behavior seems at odds with the last part of the sentence. “A boy and his lemming, out to see the Zone,” plays upon the formulaic “boy and his dog, out to see the world.” This locution connotes carefree wonder and openness, which at once ironizes and is ironized by the calculation of “evidence” or “equations.” The substitution of “lemming” for “dog” enacts similar categorical transgressions and keeps the tone of the passage unstable, allowing neither the clichéd structures of childhood nor the defiance of these structures to dominate it. The syllepsis of “seeing” “a lot of chewing gum” and “a lot of foreign cock” also defies structures and values in both directions. The possibility that the chewing gum may have been Ludwig’s payment for sex acts with men further complicates the assignment of category and value by suggesting that modes of exchange exist between the two dissimilar “markets” of chewing gum and sex. The innocent market overlaps the experienced one. Further, children do not usually “negotiate,” especially not with “fates worse than death.”

     

    All of these suspensions and reversals culminate in the moral of Ludwig’s tale: “So not all lemmings go over the cliff, and not all children are preserved against snuggling into the sin of profit.” The myth of sexual and financial innocence is comparable to the myth of lemming suicide; neither is true, but both are powerful and therefore enduring. Pynchon’s attention to the Zone context in the final sentence of this passage is of great importance. The war created the Zone where the innocence of children like Ludwig is demythologized. As the post-September Eleventh anecdotes and the Zwölfkinder show us, however, the state relies for its very prosecution of war on the production of innocence through its children, though it does so as the cumulative result of diverse and often disparate desires along the way. Pynchon draws this paradox out in his children’s sexual figurations and in the disfigurations of children in the Zone. Thus, by shuttling between fiction, piggy-bank anecdotes, and historical events, we can make the middle term exfoliate and name connections between the former and the latter term. We can allow Gravity’s Rainbow and September Eleventh to call to one another across a narrative and historical divide, over their common points of contact, in the unassuming assembly hall of the anecdote (where plenty of work gets done).

     

    Notes

     

    1. I think specifically of the charge against New Historicism that the untheorized spaces between texts and contexts are bridged by various metaphorical maneuvers. Alan Liu expresses this best:

     

    A New Historicist paradigm holds up to view a historical context on one side, a literary text on the other, and, in between, a connection of pure nothing. Or rather, what now substitutes for history of ideas between context and text is the fantastic interdisciplinary nothingness of metaphor.... What is merely "convenient" in a resemblance between context and text...soon seems an emulation; emulation is compounded in analogy; and, before we know it, analogy seems magical "sympathy": a quasi-magical action of resemblance between text and context.... (Liu 743)

    Works Cited

     

     

  • The Baudrillardian Symbolic, 9/11, and the War of Good and Evil

    Bradley Butterfield

    Department of English
    University of Wisconsin, La Crosse
    butterfi.brad@uwlax.edu

     

    In the end it was they who did it but we who wished it. If we do not take this into account, the event loses all symbolic dimension; it becomes a purely arbitrary act. . . . (A)nd in their strategic symbolism the terrorists knew they could count on this unconfessable complicity.

     

    Terrorism is the act that restores an irreducible singularity to the heart of a generalized system of exchange.

     

    The globe itself is resistant to globalization.

     

    –Jean Baudrillard1

     

    From Princess Diana to 9/11, Jean Baudrillard has been the prophet of the postmodern media spectacle, the hyperreal event. In the 1970s and 80s, our collective fascination with things like car crashes, dead celebrities, terrorists and hostages was a major theme in Baudrillard’s work on the symbolic and symbolic exchange, and in his post-9/11 “L’Esprit du Terrorisme,” he has taken it upon himself to decipher terrorism’s symbolic message. He does so in the wake of such scathing critiques as Douglas Kellner’s Jean Baudrillard: From Marxism to Postmodernism and Beyond (1989), which attacked Baudrillard’s theory as “an imaginary construct which tries to seduce the world to become as theory wants it to be, to follow the scenario scripted in the theory” (178). Did Baudrillard seduce 9/11 into being–is he terrorism’s theoretical guru?–or did he merely anticipate and describe in advance the event’s profound seductiveness?

     

    To Kellner and other critics, Baudrillard’s theory of postmodernity is a political as well as an intellectual failure:

     

    Losing critical energy and growing apathetic himself, he ascribes apathy and inertia to the universe. Imploding into entropy, Baudrillard attributes implosion and entropy to the experience of (post) modernity. (180)

     

    To be sure, Baudrillard’s scripts and scenarios have always been concerned with the implosion of the global capitalist system. But while Baudrillard’s tone at the end of “L’Esprit du Terrorisme” can certainly be called apathetic–“there is no solution to this extreme situation–certainly not war”–he does not suggest that there are no forces in the universe capable of mounting at least a challenge to the system and its sponsors (18).

     

    As in Symbolic Exchange and Death (1976) and Simulacra and Simulations (1981), Baudrillard again suggests that terrorism is one such force, and that it functions according to the rule of symbolic exchange. Terrorism can be carried out in theoretical/aesthetic terms, the terms Baudrillard would obviously prefer, or in real terms, that is, involving the real deaths of real people, a misfortune Baudrillard warns against.2 Though he states clearly “I am a terrorist and nihilist in theory as the others are with their weapons,” he is characteristically ambivalent in relation to “real” terrorism, since the real is always in question, and perhaps also because ambivalence is Baudrillard’s own brand of theoretical terrorism (Simulacra 163). One moment of his thought is the utopian dream of radicality and reversal, a revolution of symbolic exchange against the system, and the other moment is one of profound pessimism: “The system…has the power to pour everything, including what denies it, into indifference.”

     

    In Simulacra and Simulations (1981), Baudrillard wrote that systemic nihilism and the mass media are to blame for the postmodern human condition, which he describes as a combination of “fascination,” “melancholy,” and “indifference.” Against the system and its passive nihilism, Baudrillard proffers his own brand of what might be termed active nihilism, a praxis that includes theoretical and aesthetic “terrorism,” but not, in the end, the bloody acts of actual violence his theory accounts for. The terrorist acts of 9/11, as his theory predicted, were destined to be absorbed by the system’s own narrative, neutralized by the very mass media they sought to exploit.

     

    In “L’Esprit,” Baudrillard nevertheless attempts to explain again the logic, the spirit, of terrorism and to account for its power. Two of the three letters written to Harper’s Magazine after its February 2002 printing of “L’Esprit” would, predictably, take Baudrillard to be an apologist for the terrorists’ means and ends. Edward B. Schlesinger and Sarah A. Wersan of Santa Barbara, California, write:

     

    Embedded in Jean Baudrillard's almost incomprehensible prose is the shocking assertion that terrorism is justifiable, that the threat of globalization, as visualized by Baudrillard, justified the World Trade Center attack. (Kelly et al. 4)

     

    Average Harper’s readers may be spared blame for not comprehending Baudrillard’s theoretical prose, but the point of “L’Esprit” is not that 9/11 was justifiable in any moral sense, but that, as Nietzsche held, true justice must end in its “self-overcoming” (Genealogy 73). Baudrillard explicitly states that “if we hope to understand anything we will need to get beyond Good and Evil” (“L’Esprit” 15). In light of his past writings, I suggest that his unspoken stand on the issue of justice concerning 9/11 would have to be what Nietzsche’s would have been: that there is no justice, only forgiveness, and only the strong can forgive. But Baudrillard does not explicitly state this claim, which I see as an implicit conclusion to his thought. Instead he plays the provocateur by laying claim to the terrorists’ logic, which was their greatest weapon. If, as Kellner would have it, Baudrillard wants to seduce us into following his script, we must be sure to understand the script well so we can decide how to act on it. The fact that 9/11 was arguably the most potent symbolic event since the crucifixion of Christ has inspired Baudrillard to dress up his old ideas about the symbolic and symbolic exchange. To understand what he means by “symbolic dimension” and “strategic symbolism” in the quotation from “L’Esprit” above, let us consult the origins and uses of the concept of the symbolic in his earlier work.

     

    Baudrillard’s Symbolic and Death

     

    Baudrillard’s theory of the symbolic serves as a response to what he saw as the metaphysical underpinnings of the Marxist, Freudian and structuralist traditions. All three, he claims, uphold the fetishization of the “law of value,” a bifurcating, metaphysical projection of the mind which allows us to measure the worth of things. The law of value effectively produces “reality” in each system as both its effect and its alibi. For Marx this reality, this metaphysical claim, was found in the concept of use value, for Freud it was the unconscious, and for Saussure it was the signified (and ultimately the referent). According to Baudrillard, any critical theory in the name of such projected “real” values ultimately reinforces the fetishized relations it criticizes. He therefore relocates the law of value within his own Nietzsche-styled history of the “image”–a term used as a stand-in for all that the words representation, reproduction, and simulation have in common. In “How the ‘True’ World Finally Became a Fable: The History of an Error,” Nietzsche outlines in six concise steps the decline of western metaphysics and its belief in a “True world” of essences, beyond the Imaginary world of appearances (Portable 485). Baudrillard’s four-part history of the image (commonly referred to as his four orders of simulation) closely mirrors Nietzsche’s history of the “‘True’ World”:

     

    1. it [the image] is the reflection of a profound reality;
    2. it masks and denatures a profound reality;
    3. it masks the absence of a profound reality;
    4. it has no relation to any reality whatsoever; it is its own pure simulacrum. (Simulacra 6)

     

    Marx, Freud and Saussure were stuck in the second order, where the critique of appearances was thought to yield a glimpse of a deeper reality. We have since turned from the critique of appearances to the critique of meaning and of reality itself (the third order), and from here can only enter into the fourth order, the hyperreal. This is because we live in profoundly mediated environments, wherein coded images are produced and exchanged far more than material goods, and the more these codes are exchanged throughout the culture, the more erratically their values fluctuate, until at last they can no longer be traced to their origins. Hyperreality thus describes the extreme limit of fetishization, wherein re-presentation eclipses reality. Here the spectacle continues to fascinate, but indifference is the attitude du jour (indifference having long been associated with the postmodern). But Baudrillard’s history, it seems, has one more step to take before it completes its circle. Baudrillard imagines that from within the fourth order, where all metaphysical distinctions of value have disappeared, there will emerge a type of postmodern primitivism (I propose to call it), which he outlines in his conceptions of the symbolic and symbolic exchange.

     

    Baudrillard’s symbolic derives loosely from Mauss’s analysis of the Potlatch, Bataille’s theory of expenditure, and a deconstruction of Lacan’s symbolic/real/imaginary triad. For Lacan, the symbolic marks the adult world of discourse, wherein the subject comes fully into being as it leaves the narcissistic fantasies of the imaginary order to recognize, and be recognized by, the other. Entry into the symbolic, however, also severs the subject from “the real” or material “given,” which always remains beyond the reach of signification. The symbolic for Lacan plays a balancing act between the demands of a lost imaginary and a lost real, while for Baudrillard “the effect of the real is only ever . . . the structural effect of the disjunction between two terms” (Symbolic 133). The real and the imaginary are not lost causes, but rather lost effects of consciousness, and the symbolic is that within a social exchange which is irreducible to the real/imaginary dichotomy:

     

    The symbolic is neither a concept, an agency, a category, nor a "structure," but an act of exchange and a social relation which puts an end to the real, which resolves the real, and, at the same time, puts an end to the opposition between the real and the imaginary. (133)

     

    When we enter the Baudrillardian symbolic dimension, the biased distinctions of Western metaphysics–Cause/Effect, Being/Nothingness, Real/Imaginary, Normal/Abnormal, Good/Evil–are to be considered deconstructed, over-come in the French Nietzschean tradition of the aesthetic turn. The symbolic is Baudrillard’s trope for the revaluation of all values, jenseits von Gut und Bose, a revolutionary theory for the age of digital reproduction and the generalized aesthetic sphere. In the Baudrillardian symbolic, one hears the echo of Nietzsche’s merriment at the end of metaphysics: “pandemonium of all free spirits” (Portable 486). The “death drive” in Baudrillard is therefore not a matter of a repressed instinct (Freud), nor even yet of a universal force within language (Lacan), but of an incipient implosion of “the code,” which stands for all terms and forces valued in opposition within the system. In the wake of his implosionary vision Baudrillard hopes will arise, at least in theory, a liberated and continuously creative new set of relations, governed not by semiotic or economic codes, but by the principle of symbolic exchange.

     

    In For a Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign, Baudrillard harkens back to the “primitive” notion of the symbol as transparent, binding, and potentially brutal in its demands (he does not qualify the term primitive, and after all it is the model that is important to him, whether his generalizations are accurate or a projection of desire3). This would-be dark side of Baudrillard’s symbolic stems from what he himself calls a dangerous allusion to primitive societies in Mauss’s illustrations of the Kula and the Potlatch (Critique 30). Mauss describes the primitive practice of Potlatch as involving an agonistic exchange of gifts between two chieftains in which each one seeks to gain standing for himself and his clan through gift exchange (Mauss 6). Baudrillard clarifies that

     

    the gift is unique, specified by the people exchanging and the unique moment of the exchange. It is arbitrary [in that it matters little what object is involved], and yet absolutely singular. As distinct from language, whose material can be disassociated from the subjects speaking it, the material of symbolic exchange, the objects given, are not autonomous, hence not codifiable as signs. (Critique 64-65)

     

    The symbolic value of a gift or of any gesture depends upon the involuntary consciousness of the fact that the consciousness of the other poses a singular challenge to our own. And we cannot not respond to this challenge, once we have received it, because even ignoring someone or something is a way of responding. The gift represents a qualitative measurement of honor or disgrace between two parties and in that sense is symbolic, but it is also symbolic in Baudrillard’s other sense, that is, as standing only for itself, as a unique and ineluctable challenge to counter give. It takes a certain amount of Orwellian doublethink to ignore the challenge represented by the other once we have grasped the reciprocal nature of our fates. For Baudrillard’s and Mauss’s “primitives,” events such as the Potlatch involve conspicuous consumption and expenditure, a sumptuous wasting of goods that turns out in the end to be essentially usurious and sumptuary (see Critique 30, Mauss 6).

     

    Baudrillard formulates the term “prestation” with regard to Mauss to signify that within our social exchanges which makes us feel obligated to “an irrational code of social behavior,” namely the law of symbolic exchange (Critique 30, n. 4). This mechanism of social prestation, says Baudrillard, adheres to every exchange and is fraught with ambivalence, for in it lies “the value . . . of rivalry and, at the limit, of class discriminants” (Critique 31). Symbolic exchange, at some level, always involves an agonistic struggle for domination and status. Baudrillard does not issue a moral judgment on the matter of social domination, but rather suggests that symbolic exchange will continue to haunt our political economies:

     

    Behind all the superstructures of purchase, market, and private property, there is always the mechanism of social prestation which must be recognized in our choice, our accumulation, our manipulation and our consumption of objects. This mechanism of discrimination and prestige is at the very basis of the system of values and of integration into the hierarchical order of society. The Kula and the Potlatch have disappeared, but not their principle. (30)

     

    The symbolic value of commodities–the connotations of wearing a certain brand of basketball shoe or driving a certain car–are seen here as barbaric in the social relations they imply. And so Baudrillard warns in an interview:

     

    If we take to dreaming once more--particularly today--of a world where signs are certain, of a strong "symbolic order," let's be under no illusions. For this order has existed, and it was a brutal hierarchy, since the sign's transparency is indissociably also its cruelty. (Baudrillard Live 50)

     

    One nevertheless senses in this disavowal of the primitive symbolic order, where signs were singular and binding, a hint of admiration, echoing Nietzsche’s musings on the cruel but proud days when power was signified outright, and not behind the guises of morality.4

     

    Despite this transparent warning, in Symbolic Exchange and Death (1976) Baudrillard went on to sketch several examples of symbolic exchange in relation to death in today’s political economy. The anagram in Saussure, the Witz in Freud, graffiti in New York, the Accident in the media are all treated by Baudrillard as symbolic events wherein death, denied and repressed, poses a challenge to life. From the standpoint of 9/11, his theory of death in primitive and modern cultures is most pertinent. Like Foucault, Baudrillard sees the history of Western culture in terms of a genealogy of discrimination and exclusion:

     

    At the very core of the "rationality" of our culture, however, is an exclusion that precedes every other, more radical than the exclusion of madmen, children or inferior races, an exclusion preceding all these and serving as their model: the exclusion of the dead and of death. (Symbolic 126)

     

    According to Baudrillard, the dead in primitive societies played integral roles in the lives of the living by serving as partners in symbolic exchange. A gift to the dead was believed to yield a return, and by exchanging with the dead through ritual sacrifices, celebrations and feasts, they managed to absorb the rupturing energy of death back into the group. But

     

    there is an irreversible evolution from savage societies to our own: little by little, the dead cease to exist. They are thrown out of the group's symbolic circulation. They are no longer beings with a full role to play, worthy partners in exchange....Today it is not normal to be dead, and this is new. . . . Death is a delinquency, and an incurable deviancy. (126)

     

    Modern Western cultures have largely ceased to exchange with the dead collectively, partly because we no longer believe in their continued existence, and partly because we no longer value that which cannot be accumulated or consumed. The dead have no value by our measurements. We give them nothing and expect nothing from them in return, and yet they remain with us, in our memories, obligating our recognition and response. How do we respond to the symbolic challenge of death and the dead, the challenge they pose to our conscious experience? This is the question of 9/11.

     

    The primitives, Baudrillard maintains, responded to this challenge collectively through symbolic exchanges with their dead and deities. Their belief in the sign’s transparency, its symbolic singularity, can be seen in animistic practices such as voodoo, where the enemy’s hair is thought to contain his or her spirit. If the dead are only humans of a different nature, and if the sign is what it stands for, then a symbolic sacrifice to a dead person is every bit as binding as a gift to a living person. The obligation to return is placed upon the dead, and they reciprocate by somehow honoring or benefiting the living. Most Christians believe in and employ this same mechanism when they pray to the resurrected Christ, but even they do not believe that their symbolic gestures are anything but metaphors. We no longer believe in the one to one correspondence of signifier and signified, and we know the loved one is not really contained in the lock of hair. Americans will doubtless commemorate the deaths of those killed on 9/11 as long as our nation exists, but we know that our gifts to the dead are only symbolic, which for us means imaginary.

     

    Baudrillard’s postmodern-primitive symbolic, on the other hand, aimed to obliterate the difference in value between the imaginary and the real, the signifier and the signified, and to expose the metaphysical prejudice at the heart of all such valuations. His wager was that this would be done through aesthetic violence and not real violence, but having erased the difference between the two, there was never any guarantee that others wouldn’t take such theoretical “violence” to its literal ends. Graffiti art, scarification and tattooing are just the benign counterparts of true terrorism, which takes ritual sacrifice and initiation to their extremes. Literalists and extremists, fundamentalists of all sorts, find their logic foretold in Baudrillard’s references to the primitives. What the terrorists enacted on 9/11 was what Baudrillard would call a symbolic event of the first order, and they were undeniably primitive in their belief that God, the dead, and the living would somehow honor and benefit them in the afterlife. Unable to defeat the U.S. in economic or military terms, they employ the rule of prestation in symbolic exchange with the gift of their own deaths. But Americans are not “primitives”–we do not value death symbolically, but rather only as a subtraction from life. Capitalism’s implicit promise, in every ad campaign and marketing strategy, is that to consume is to live. We score up life against death as gain against loss, as if through accumulation we achieve mastery over the qualitative presence of death that haunts life. Our official holidays honoring the dead serve no other function than to encourage consumption.

     

    When it comes to actually dealing with death and the dead, even in public, we do so in private. As Baudrillard points out, “This entails a considerable difference in enjoyment: we trade with our dead in a kind of melancholy, while the primitives live with their dead under the auspices of the ritual and the feast” (134-35). Because we devalue death and thereby the dead, we view them only as a dreaded caste of unfortunates, and not as continuing partners in exchange. Ultimately, however, it is not so much the dead but our own deaths, our negative doubles, that we insult by denying their value. When we posit death as the negation of life, we bifurcate our identities and begin a process of mourning over our own eventual deaths, a process which lasts our whole lives. The more we devalue our death-imagoes, that is, the greater they become, until they haunt our every moment, as in Don DeLillo’s darkest comedy, White Noise. This leads us, according to Baudrillard, to an obsession with death that can be felt in the media fascination with catastrophes like 9/11. Death “becomes the object of a perverse desire. Desire invests the very separation of life and death” (147). Political economy’s inability to absorb the rupturing energy of death is thus compensated by the symbolic yield of the media catastrophe. In these events we experience an artificial death which fascinates us, bored as we are by the routine order of the system and the “natural” death it prescribes for us. Natural death represents an unnegotiable negation of life and the tedious certainty of an unwanted end. It therefore inspires insurrection, until “reason itself is pursued by the hope of a universal revolt against its own norms and privileges” (162). The terrorist spectacle is an example of such a revolt, in which death gains symbolic distinction and becomes more than simply “natural.” We may not think we identify with the terrorists’ superstitions about honor in the next life, but in events like 9/11, Baudrillard would suggest, we nevertheless identify despite ourselves with both with the terrorists and their victims:

     

    We are all hostages, and that's the secret of hostage-taking, and we are all dreaming, instead of dying stupidly working oneself to the ground, of receiving death and of giving death. Giving and receiving constitute one symbolic act (the symbolic act par excellence), which rids death of all the indifferent negativity it holds for us in the "natural" order of capital. (166)

     

    Violent, artificial death is a symbolic event witnessed collectively. “Technical, non natural and therefore willed (ultimately by the victim him- or herself), death becomes interesting once again since willed death has a meaning” (165). Was 9/11 willed by the victims? Obviously not, and yet, Baudrillard would suggest, in our identification with both the killers and those who died, we ourselves are not so innocent.

     

    Nihilism and Terrorism

     

    Implosion of meaning in the media. Implosion of the social in the masses. Infinite growth of the masses as a function of the acceleration of the system. Energetic impasse. Point of inertia.

    –Baudrillard (Simulacra 161)

    Baudrillard’s most prescient statements regarding terrorism and the spirit that motivates it were issued in the 1981 essay “On Nihilism,” which falls at the end of Simulacra and Simulations. Here he distinguishes the first two great manifestations of nihilism by placing them parallel to his second and third orders of simulation. Recall:

     

    1. it [the image] is the reflection of a profound reality;
    2. it masks and denatures a profound reality;
    3. it masks the absence of a profound reality;
    4. it has no relation to any reality whatsoever; it is its own pure simulacrum. (6)

     

    The first wave of nihilism occurs in the second order of simulation, and corresponds with the Enlightenment and Romantic revolutions against the order of appearances, “the disenchantment of the world and its abandonment to the violence of interpretation and of history” (Simulacra 160). Nihilism is thus first and foremost, for Baudrillard, the signature of the post-metaphysical philosopher. He thus places Nietzsche’s statement that “God is dead” at the center of all modernity, but adds that once the critique of metaphysics has run its course, a new type of nihilism is ushered in. “When God died, there was still Nietzsche to say so,” i.e., after God there is Nietzsche, after Nietzsche, only simulation (159). “God is not dead, he has become hyperreal.”

     

    This second wave of nihilism occurs in the twentieth century and spans the third and fourth orders of simulation, beginning with “surrealism, dada, the absurd, and political nihilism” (159), which sought to reveal the absence of a profound metaphysical reality behind our representations, and ending in

     

    postmodernity, which is the immense process of the destruction of meaning, equal to the earlier destruction of appearances. He who strikes with meaning is killed by meaning. (161)

     

    After discovering the absence of a profound meaning behind the world of appearances, those who seek the true meaning of things end up impaled on the truth that there is no true meaning to be had. Nietzsche’s dilemma. And so Baudrillard boldly declares: “I am a nihilist,” and swears himself to the destruction of both appearance and meaning, the first two waves, but also to the destruction of the appearance/meaning dichotomy altogether, the postmodern phase of the second wave. If western culture can now be characterized by Baudrillard’s notion of a fourth order simulation society, where simulacra dominate our lives and the faith in a “profound reality” has turned radically agnostic, it is here that one must plant one’s (post-) philosophical flag. Rather than take the reactionary approach of a return to metaphysics, Baudrillard affects a nihilistic version of Nietzschean amor fati, accepting the system’s melancholy and pushing to its limit the “mode of disappearance” it effects in everything it touches (162). The melancholy in Adorno and Benjamin, holds Baudrillard, already stems from this recognition that dis-enchantment, dis-appearance, the critique of reason itself are all inherent to the system’s functionality. But their “dialectic” was already “nostalgic,” their melancholy the last healthy pulse of “ressentiment” against the systemization of death, a third order phenomenon. Melancholia today, says Baudrillard, is no longer a matter of disenchantment and demystification: “It is simply disappearance.” No longer an affect one can deploy in a critique of the system, it is now the affect of “the brutal disaffection that characterizes our saturated systems.”

     

    Though Baudrillard does not deny melancholia as our appropriate Zeitgeist, his implicit suggestion in the essay, which Kellner neglects, is that the passive nihilism (inertia, entropy, implosion) produced by the implicitly nihilistic system is the philosophical enemy, which he means to challenge by means of his own brand of active nihilism: “What then remains of a possible nihilism in theory? What new scene can unfold, where nothing and death could be replayed as a challenge, as a stake?” (159). The system has effectively absorbed the first two waves of active, critical nihilism into its own nihilism, and induces a state of stupefied, melancholic indifference in the “receivers” (we are no longer spectators) of its mass mediations. Baudrillard’s strategy, then, is to push the system faster (“revenge of speed on inertia”), to the point of its implosion, by writing theory that is the equivalent of intellectual terrorism (161). All other theory at this point only “assists in the freezing over of meaning, it assists in the precession of simulacra and of indifferent forms. The desert grows” (161). In the desert of the real, no amount of analysis can “resolve the imperious necessity of checking the system in broad daylight. This, only terrorism can do” (163). Terrorism, writes Baudrillard,

     

    is the trait of reversion that effaces the remainder, just as a single ironic smile effaces a whole discourse, just as a single flash of denial in a slave effaces all the power and pleasure of the master. The more hegemonic the system, the more the imagination is struck by the smallest of its reversals. The challenge, even infinitesimal, is the image of a chain failure. Only this reversibility without a counterpart is an event today, on the nihilistic and disaffected stage of the political. Only it mobilizes the imaginary.

     

    This is of course what happened on 9/11, as Baudrillard has since pointed out, but Kellner would also likely point out that Baudrillard, having himself wished for 9/11, begins “L’Esprit” by projecting this wish onto the rest of us (180). Our collective complicity in the wish is of course impossible to gauge, but in “On Nihilism” Baudrillard had already confessed his own complicity with nihilistic terrorism in the most carefully calibrated terms:

     

    If being a nihilist, is carrying, to the unbearable limit of hegemonic systems, this radical trait of derision and of violence, this challenge that the system is summoned to answer through its own death, then I am a terrorist and nihilist in theory as the others are with their weapons. Theoretical violence, not truth, is the only recourse left us. But such a sentiment is utopian. Because it would be beautiful to be a nihilist, if there were still a radicality--as it would be nice to be a terrorist, if death, including that of the terrorist, still had meaning.

     

    Baudrillard gives up on the idea of a radicality in theory, a position of negativity relative to the system, Adorno’s position. But he is at his negative dialectical best in this passage, which is a statement of complicity with the utopianism of the terrorist’s challenge, as well as a statement of the utmost pessimism regarding the subject’s ability to effect a change in the system, which in the end neutralizes every event, no matter how deadly:

     

    The dead are annulled by indifference, that is where terrorism is the involuntary accomplice of the whole system, not politically, but in the accelerated form of indifference that it contributes to imposing. Death no longer has a stage, neither phantasmatic nor political, on which to represent itself, to play itself out, either a ceremonial or a violent one. And this is the victory of the other nihilism, of the other terrorism, that of the system. (Simulacra 163-164)

     

    Did death have a stage on September 11th? Have the dead since been annulled by indifference, caught up in the media’s mode of disappearance? Despite the terrorists’ successful attempt to put death back on stage in a symbolic exchange with “the system,” the majority of Americans have by now assimilated its violence into the broader narrative of a war against terrorism and Evil, one of the many things on TV.

     

    The 9/11 attacks have succeeded, as Baudrillard says, in turning the U.S. into a vengeful police state and in accelerating its attempts to dominate the world through military force, and this in turn has likely accelerated the mood of passive nihilism (with its fascination, melancholy, and indifference). No one can claim that any sort of progressive politics were served by the terrorists’ actions. Baudrillard certainly does not. And the terrorists weren’t even nihilists, they were fundamentalists, a far cry from Baudrillard’s romantic ideal of the philosopher-terrorist. In “On Nihilism,” Baudrillard, like Adorno in the end, prefers theory as praxis to actual praxis. He concludes not on a note of cynicism and melancholy, as Kellner reads him, but on a note of paradoxical idealism:

     

    There is no more hope for meaning. And without a doubt this is a good thing: meaning is mortal. But that on which it has imposed its ephemeral reign, what it hoped to liquidate in order to impose the reign of the Enlightenment, that is, appearances, they are immortal, invulnerable to the nihilism of meaning or of non-meaning itself. This is where seduction begins. (163-164)

     

    Rather than respond with apathy and indifference to the disappearance of meaning now under way, Baudrillard resurrects the once banished realm of appearances, the aesthetic, in a move beyond the nihilism of meaning/nihilism of non-meaning dichotomy. As Kellner writes: “Like Nietzsche, he wants to derive value from the order of appearances without appeal to a supernatural world, a hinterwelt or a deep reality” (120). Kellner, who apparently thinks a more Nietzschean joyfulness, as opposed to Baudrillard’s melancholy, is still preferable at the end of the twentieth century, nevertheless holds to the metaphysics of morality against the aestheticism of the French Nietzscheans. For those who no longer acknowledge a “hinterwelt,” however, the idea that we exist in a world of appearances which are irreducible to true essences (like Good and Evil), is not so far fetched. One thus takes the Nietzschean turn, toward the aesthetic, and this, Baudrillard tells us, “is where seduction begins.” His later work on this concept in On Seduction need not be elaborated here, but we should note that Rex Butler has shown the concept of seduction in Baudrillard to be an elaboration on the concept of symbolic exchange (71-118). “Symbolic exchange,” according to Butler,

     

    is not simply the negation of economic value but rather its limit. It is the thinking of that loss, that relationship to the other, which at once allows exchange, opens it up, and means that it is never complete, never able to account for itself. (81-82)

     

    If seduction is what rules the chasm left by a symbolic exchange between the challenger and the system, what was the direction of the seduction created by 9/11? Were we seduced? Was Baudrillard? Are we being seduced by Baudrillard? Having revisited his perspective on terrorism prior to 9/11–terrorism as the ultimate metaphor, but naïve in its utopianism—let us consider his perspective après le spectacle.

     

    9/11: Morning of the Living Dead

     

    The spectacle of terrorism forces upon us the terrorism of the spectacle.

    — Jean Baudrillard (“L’Esprit” 15)

     

    In “L’Esprit du Terrorisme,” Baudrillard maintains that the U.S. as lone Superpower conjures its own Other; by dominating the globe it creates global resistance. Baudrillard’s opening gambit–“In the end, it was they who did it but we who wished it”–means to implicate us all in a symbolic exchange with 9/11:

     

    It goes well beyond the hatred that the desolate and the exploited--those who ended up on the wrong side of the new world order--feel toward the dominant global power. This malicious desire resides in the hearts of even those who have shared in the spoils. The allergy to absolute order, to absolute power, is universal, and the two towers of the World Trade Center were, precisely because of their identicality, the perfect incarnation of this absolute order. ("L'Esprit" 13)

     

    The twin towers, like the twin political parties in the U.S., represent a balance of power, two forces locked in opposition. But like the Democrats and the Republicans, both towers are virtually identical, and their dualistic logic leaves no room for remainders. People rebel, either secretly or openly, against an airtight system, two towers of power representing the same people in charge, the illusion of difference. Finally someone throws a monkey wrench into the works in the form of four jet airplanes, aimed not only at the symbols of American power, but at the American mass media, which serve to broadcast the terror and violence worldwide. By way of our simulation technologies, the terrorists were able to issue a singular challenge to each American, and it is in this way that the event is properly symbolic in the Baudrillardian sense, as a gift demanding return. This is a common motif in Baudrillard, this moment where simulation society is somehow reversed or revolutionized by the symbolic. By insisting on our unconfessable complicity, the assumption that we all have a soft spot for the underdog and a sore spot for the overdog, especially when the latter is on the brink of dominating the global playpen, Baudrillard further challenges us to answer the challenge of 9/11, to enter the debate at the level of a singular exchange. As individuals, our ability to influence what is done in the name of the U.S. is limited, but as intellectuals, we must ask ourselves: what is the symbolic meaning and effect of the event? An essay exam for the whole nation. The twin towers symbolize corporate globalization, the Pentagon the American military, and both together stand for what Baudrillard calls “the system.” The numbers 9-1-1 signal Emergency, and the date marks a number of historical events: the 1989 massacre in Haiti which ousted Aristide; the 1973 overthrow of Allende in Chile; and the 1683 battle of Vienna, where Islam was ultimately defeated by Poland, the beginning of the end of the Ottoman Empire.5 But for Baudrillard the symbolic meaning of the event lies not only in its reducibility to such referents, but in its irreducible, singular, and irrevocable challenge to each and every imagination. Doubtless most Americans would deny any complicity with the terrorists on 9/11, but few would deny that it was the most fascinating day of the century, and this fascination, the product of the system, was what the terrorists counted on.

     

    Baudrillard demonstrates in this essay that what the terrorists carried out is indeed one version–the most literal version–of what he has meant all along by a symbolic death exchange with the system, thus implicating his own theories as those which explain, and in this sense further fortify, the symbolic power of terrorism. His instruction manual continues:

     

    Never attack the system in terms of the balance of power. The balance of power is an imaginary (revolutionary) construct imposed by the system itself, a construct that exists in order to force those who attack it to fight on the battlefield of reality, the system's own terrain. Instead, move the struggle into the symbolic sphere, where defiance, reversion, and one-upmanship are the rule, so that the only way to respond to death is with an equivalent or even greater death. Defy the system with a gift to which it cannot reply except with its own death and its own downfall. . . . You have to make the enemy lose face. And you'll never achieve that through brute force, by merely eliminating the Other. (16)

     

    Certainly the terrorists’ attack on the battlefield of reality was devastating on its own, but their attack on the symbolic battlefield, Baudrillard maintains, was far more devastating in terms of achieving their global aspirations. According to the system’s logic, the Other loses when they only kill one of your soldiers and you kill all of theirs, but according to the symbolic logic of the terrorists, the greater the sacrifice, the greater the symbolic honor. “In dealing all the cards to itself, the system forced the Other to change the rules of the game,” and under the new rules, the strongest power in the world violently decimating one of the weakest powers at the cost of a single life is not honorable, it is only efficient (14). Baudrillard, scandalous as ever, hands the symbolic victory of the war on terror to the terrorists, all but crediting them with recent economic, political, and psychological “recessions” in the West, and with the fact that “deregulation has ended in maximum security, in a level of restriction and constraint equivalent to that found in fundamentalist societies” (18).

     

    Since they cannot not report and sensationalize the event, the media are enlisted in a symbolic exchange that only amplifies the terrorist’s power to terrorize: “The media are part of the event, they’re part of the terror,” and so “this terrorist violence is not ‘real’ at all. It’s worse, in a sense: it’s symbolic” (18). The “real” violence here is thus conducted through the technologies of simulation, which the terrorists have hijacked for their symbolic ends. Baudrillard’s claim that the symbolic violence was worse and hence more “real” than the real violence of 9/11 is typically provocative, and another letter to Harper’s takes him on on this score. 6 The argument over which violence was worse, however, is a dead end, for the question of “the spirit of terrorism” is what is at stake. What the terrorists count on is that

     

    at the level of images and information, it is impossible to distinguish between the spectacular and the symbolic, impossible to distinguish between crime and repression. And it is this uncontrollable outburst of reversibility that is the veritable victory of terrorism. (18)

     

    Here again this motif in Baudrillard, where simulation society (the society of the spectacle) is somehow reversed by the symbolic. The reversibility of crime and repression depends upon the media’s being seduced into working for the criminals, and in effecting this reversal, the terrorists set off a symbolic-atomic bomb. Their physical violence was aimed at the lives of thousands of American taxpayers, but their symbolic violence was aimed at the symbols of corporate globalization, the American military and perhaps all of Christendom. The agencies of the latter are thus forced into the symbolic arena, and must choose how to respond, what appearances to deploy.

     

    In one of the letters to Harper’s, Matthew Kelly writes that “the attack’s symbolic wallop is obvious to a toddler,” but it is not just about recognizing that the twin towers and the Pentagon stand for. Baudrillard means for us also to recognize the primitive symbolic challenge, the sacrifice, the gift of their own deaths, which demands our response if we are to save face. One wonders how many Americans would be willing to sacrifice their lives as a show of support for what the twin towers and Pentagon symbolize. Baudrillard’s point about primitive symbolism is that the symbol represents a unique and binding challenge, a gift that must somehow be returned by everyone it affects. How are we, if we are the U.S., to respond? Our first priority in formulating a response should be to pose the question the U.S. news media have deemed too sensitive to ask, namely: why did they do it? On October 7, 2002, however, Osama bin Laden issued his statement on a videotaped message:

     

    What America is tasting now is something insignificant compared to what we have tasted for scores of years. Our Nation (the Islamic world) has been tasting this humiliation and degradation for more than 80 years. Its sons are killed, its blood is shed, its sanctuaries are attacked and no one hears and no one heeds. Millions of innocent children are being killed as I speak. They are being killed in Iraq without committing any sins. . . . To America, I say only a few words to it and its people. I swear to God, who has elevated the skies without pillars, neither America nor the people who live in it will dream of security before we live it here in Palestine and not before all the infidel armies leave the land of Muhammad peace be upon him. (Andreas 29)

     

    The challenge represented in the gift is clear: “you will not know peace until your military leaves us in peace.” This implies a direct question: why is the U.S. military in Arab countries? The answer, of course, is that the U.S. military is there to protect U.S. economic interests, in accordance with its long-held notions of manifest destiny. But U.S. officials do not respond to this implicit question, their response is no response, which of course is a response in itself in symbolic terms. The terrorists count on the likelihood that the U.S. will make a move the world will view as symbolically dishonorable and aesthetically ugly, in relation to their act of defiance, that the harder it strikes back, the worse it will look, and the greater the global resistance. The U.S. can only win on the aesthetico-symbolic plane, where prestation rules, by staying its hand, for there is no courage or beauty in brute force.7

     

    So does Baudrillard really support terrorism? Do we? Once again playing the devil’s hand, he seduces us to play the avenging angel by taking a moral stand. But suppose we take the Nietzschean turn, with Baudrillard, and view the issue in aesthetic terms: can moral goodness not still succeed in being beautiful if it avoids making metaphysical claims? When morality is conceived in aesthetic terms, it loses its guarantee of universality, but not its symbolic force. And yet by forcing Good on the world, the U.S. only forces Evil to gain strength. “Terrorism,” Baudrillard tells us, “is immoral,” but it is a

     

    response to globalization, which is itself immoral. We are therefore immoral ourselves, so if we hope to understand anything we will need to get beyond Good and Evil. . . . In the end, Good cannot vanquish Evil except by declining to be Good, since, in monopolizing global power, it entails a backfire of proportional violence. (Simulacra 15)

     

    The U.S., if it wishes to be Good, can only win, in symbolic terms, by refusing to play, by refusing to be Good. Baudrillard certainly does not proffer war, which he concludes is simply “a continuation of the absence of politics by other means” (18). What he recommends, without naming it, is the forgiveness of debt, the redemption of “Evil.”

     

    Compare this, then, to Nietzsche’s advice, which might have been directed at a future world power such as the U.S.:

     

    It is not unthinkable that a society might attain such a consciousness of power that it could allow itself the noblest luxury possible to it--letting those who harm it go unpunished. "What are my parasites to me?:" it might say. "May they live and prosper: I am strong enough for that!" The justice which began with, "everything is dischargeable, everything must be discharged," ends by winking and letting those incapable of discharging their debt go free: it ends, as does every good thing on earth, by overcoming itself. This self-overcoming of justice: one knows the beautiful name it has given itself--mercy; it goes without saying that mercy remains the privilege of the most powerful man, or better, his--beyond the law. (Genealogy 72-73)

     

    The triumph of justice, according to Nietzsche, is its self-overcoming; the most moral is the extra-moral, beyond the war of Good and Evil. If the U.S. had gone with its first name for its new war effort–“Operation Infinite Justice”–would Americans have become more readily aware of the ironic fact that their country had in many ways served injustice in the Middle East for a great many years? Would some have been quicker to see that “infinite justice” can only amount to infinite forgiveness? In this passage, Nietzsche taunts America’s wealth and dignity, seducing us with an image of ourselves more befitting our vanity than the image of a vengeful America. Vengeance, ressentiment, always claims morality as its cause, but forgiveness does not have to, because it is a washing away of guilt/debt, because it is a gift. Rather than make claims, it gives them away, which nevertheless poses a challenge to the other to counter-give with a symbolic response. This is for Nietzsche, as for Baudrillard, one would gather, the most beautiful aesthetic/symbolic gesture, an extra-moral gesture, beyond Good and Evil. It is also the only means to peace short of the total annihilation of a virtually invisible enemy. Would a Nietzschean-style forgiveness of debt not entail gestures like the removal of U.S. military bases from the Middle East, the nationalization of Arab oil assets, the discontinuation of all support for dictatorships in the area and around the world, and the promotion of a Palestinian nation? And if such tokens of “forgiveness” were offered, does anyone doubt that a more livable peace would soon be at hand, and that the U.S. would incur its greatest possible symbolic honor?

     

    If we assume, with Baudrillard, that there is a rule of reciprocity between conscious beings, wherein their symbolic standing vis à vis one another depends on what they give in exchange, and if we assume that the recognition of this rule of value runs deeper in humans everywhere than does the recognition of the rule of value imposed by capitalism, and if we assume that the terrorists have appealed to this rule before the world, do we choose to play by the rule, or to ignore it? So far the U.S. has ignored it by refusing to answer the implicit questions: Why do they hate us? Why is our military there? By what right do we exploit their resources, overthrow their elected leaders, and drop bombs on their people? But no response is still a response, symbolically speaking, and the world is listening. What the system did in response to 9/11, or instead of responding to it, was to re-absorb its symbolic violence back into the never ending flow of anesthetized simulation, i.e., it has attempted “to replace a truly formidable event, unique and unforseen, with a pseudo-event that is as repetitive as it is familiar” (Harper’s 18). This is exactly what Baudrillard predicted would happen in “On Nihilism,” this neutralizing of the terrorist event by the system. In “L’Esprit,” he notes that:

     

    In the terrorist attack the event eclipsed all of our interpretive models, whereas in this mindlessly military and technological war we see the opposite: the interpretive model eclipsing the event. (18)

     

    Baudrillard would have us recognize that the attack on 9/11 succeeded in poking a hole in the U.S.’s mighty shield, thus opening a space “where seduction begins,” and in provoking a murderous response. The terrorists therefore succeeded (are succeeding) in making the U.S. look bad on the symbolic battlefield, and in pushing the system further toward its limit and its implosion, a goal Baudrillard expressly favors. It seems most reasonable to conclude, however, that such violent, physical provocations serve no one, not even Baudrillard, and need not be equated with the kind of theoretical terrorism and aesthetic violence advocated by him (though one can always accuse him of being the first to blur the lines between the real and the imaginary). Given his cynicism about the system’s ability to neutralize every opposition, however, Baudrillard sees such dramatic gestures (as 9/11) as naïve in their utopianism. And yet he too has his utopianism, which can be found in the silent evocation of the only decent, beautiful solution to the challenge of 9/11. Unlike naïve terrorists and secondary critics, however, Baudrillard will not speak his utopia,8which in this case is the possibility of forgiveness as a world-historical symbolic event. This utopian moment in Baudrillard, this idea that the U.S. might forgive its debtors, is obviously unrealistic as yet, but every challenge opens up a new space in the universe. This is where seduction begins.

     

    As for death, it is still un-American. We live mostly, as Ernest Becker claimed, in denial of death, which our marketing specialists have yet to fully package. We live in ignorance of the death and misery caused by our military and its industry. No one knows how many lives, or anything about the individuals killed. We see only TV spectacles. We do not see the real, or know the real, but we are a culture fascinated by its simulacrum. Approximately 3,000 more people joined the ranks of the dead on 9/11 and for most of us they were only abstractions, but the fascination we felt, the release, is something everyone is now anticipating, every false alarm a tease. Whether we see it in Baudrillardian or Freudian terms, this is the death drive. The most recent Gallup poll shows 53% of Americans in favor of the U.S. invading Iraq alone. Toward the end of Symbolic Exchange and Death, Baudrillard states what he believes is on all of our minds:

     

    Death itself demands to be experienced immediately, in total blindness and total ambivalence. But is it revolutionary? If political economy is the most rigorous attempt to put an end to death, it is clear that only death can put an end to political economy. (86-87)

     

    Forget waiting for it, let’s have another spectacle; let’s demand death now! Is Baudrillard being sinister when he tempts us with our desire for more death? Is he death’s seducer? Not if we allow for his caveat about the term “death” found in the book’s second footnote: “death ought never to be understood as the real event that affects a subject or a body, but as a form in which the determinacy of the subject and of value is lost” (5, n. 2). Baudrillard uses the term death to signify “the real event” throughout Symbolic Exchange and Death, and only sometimes uses it as a conceptual figure like this, but if he is not talking here about real death, where some subject and some value are certainly lost, what is he talking about? Death, in Baudrillard’s specialized sense, signifies the end of “bound energies in stable oppositions,” but since the system itself is also capable of imposing such deaths, he clarifies that the death of the system can only be achieved by way of its strategic reversal:

     

    For the system is master: like God it can bind or unbind energies; what it is incapable of (and what it can no longer avoid) is reversibility. Reversibility alone therefore, rather than unbinding or drifting, is fatal to it. This is exactly what the term symbolic "exchange" means.

     

    Baudrillard contends that the system cannot reverse itself, but that one might cause it to enact “death” as the form of an exchange in which its values no longer apply, in which its determinations become indeterminate. One does this by giving it a gift it cannot respond to without killing itself in this way, without undermining its own authority. This can be done effectively with words and/or pictures:

     

    Figure 1: The Selling of Joy9
    © Thomas Antel
    Used with permission of photographer

     

    but it can also be done with jet airplanes:

     

    Figure 2

     

    53% of our baser instincts may demand that real death, the “real event that affects a subject or a body” (whether in Baghdad or Manhattan) be experienced now, but Baudrillard does not. Baudrillard is far more nihilistic than most terrorists and warmongers. The capitalist system, he says, will sooner or later reclaim all such “freed energies.” Whether or not we share his pessimism, his conception of the symbolic affords us a view of human relations that is based on recognition and reciprocity, instead of ignorance and domination, which is about what America needs right now. As for his remarks on terrorism and death, however, let us hope Baudrillard does not suffer Nietzsche’s fate and wind up the misread philosopher of murderous thugs.

     

    Notes

     

    1. From “L’Esprit du Terrorisme” (13, 14, 18).

     

    2. See Symbolic Exchange and Death (5, n. 2), which I discuss in the final section of this essay.

     

    3. It is likely that Baudrillard’s theory of the primitive and his whole theory of the symbolic (as gift) derive more from a history of colonial projection than from the truth about the colonized. In The Potlatch Papers: A Colonial Case History, Christopher Bracken argues that the potlatch in twentieth-century European anthropology and philosophy is the invention of a nineteenth-century Canadian law meant to outlaw it. Bracken does not mention Baudrillard, but Lyotard does along these same lines: “How is it that he does not see that the whole problematic of the gift, of symbolic exchange, such as he receives it from Mauss…belongs in its entirety to Western racism and imperialism–that it is still ethnology’s good savage, slightly libidinalized, which he inherits with the concept?” (106). No longer believing in true origins, however, Baudrillard would like to be free of the distinction between the real and the imaginary savage so as to focus on the concept of symbolic exchange, a concept containing a compelling, if understated, ethic: that one must respond, and is responsible, to the other; that one’s honor depends on what one gives; and that the value of the gift is not quantifiable but is symbolic. One will get nowhere trying to verify his speculations about the “real primitives,” and I could not speak for indigenous people as to whether they should value his “gift” to them as a compliment or an insult. See Piper for discussion of Baudrillard’s place in the new primitivist counter-culture, “the drop-out culture of the sixties redefined as both indigenous and postmodern” (177).

     

    4. See for instance “Homer’s Contest” (Portable 32-39).

     

    5. See Stille and Alden.

     

    6. Matthew Kelly of Brooklyn writes “I choked on the quotation marks buffeting the word ‘real’ . . . which, in his view, the September 11 violence was not” (86).

     

    7. As I write, President Bush has declared a new, “preventive” unilateralism in U.S. military policy, and the Senate has authorized the President to proceed with an invasion of Iraq at his own discretion, regardless of international opinion. This current push toward global domination by force must strike all but the most authoritarian Americans as deeply ignoble. After all, it flies in the face of our TV and Hollywood upbringing, which teaches us that it’s only bad guys who want to rule the world and that nobody should end up as “lord of the rings.” Indeed, the contradiction between image and reality is becoming so apparent that, in keeping with the Orwellian nature of the Bush administration, we might almost expect revisionist remakes to start replacing the standard Hollywood movies. We’ll find that Austin Powers and Dr. Evil have somehow changed roles, and that we’re cheering for good guys who rule the world with an iron hand while egalitarian villains plot against them.

     

    8. In The Illusion of the End, Baudrillard cites Adorno to this effect: “Every ecstasy ultimately prefers to take the path of renunciation rather than sin against its own concept by realizing itself” (104).

     

    9. There’s a powerful narrative implied in this photo; an annoyed resident of the so-called “third world” holds a box of Joy for the camera, and suddenly we don’t feel so happy about Joy. When we are made conscious of the implicit, metaphysical insult of a class-based global village, we are made aware of the symbolic standing between the first world and the third. The anti-commercial is a symbolic challenge to the real commercial, posing one image against another, demanding a response. Baudrillardian symbolic exchange is based on this principle of reversal and seduction, and so has much in common with Guy Debord’s and the Situationists’ concept of “detournement” and with what Kalle Lasn and Adbusters call “culture jamming” (see Lasn 103-109).

    Works Cited

     

    • Alden, Dianne. “History is the Root Cause of Everything.” NewsMax.com 11 Oct. 2002. 29 Aug. 2002. <http://www.tysknews.com/Depts/terrorism/root_cause.htm>.
    • Andreas, Joel. Addicted to War: Why the U.S. Can’t Kick Militarism. Oakland: AK, 2002.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. Baudrillard Live: Selected Interviews. Ed. Mike Gane. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. For a Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign. Trans. Charles Levin. St. Louis, MO: Telos, 1981.
    • —. The Illusion of the End. Trans. Chris Turner. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994.
    • —. “L’Esprit du Terrorisme.” Trans. Donovan Hohn. Harper’s Magazine (February 2002): 13-18.
    • —. Simulacra and Simulation. Trans. Sheila Faria Glaser. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994.
    • —. Symbolic Exchange and Death. Trans. Iain Hamilton Grant. London: Sage, 1993.
    • Bracken, Christopher. The Potlatch Papers: A Colonial Case History. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1997.
    • Butler, Rex. Jean Baudrillard: The Defense of the Real. London: Sage, 1999.
    • Kellner, Douglas. Jean Baudrillard: From Marxism to Postmodernism and Beyond. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1989.
    • Kelly, Mathew; Schlesinger, Edward B.; Wersan, Sarah A. “Letters to the Editor.” Harper’s Magazine (May 2002): 4.
    • Lasn, Kalle. Culture Jam: The Uncooling of America™. New York: Eagle Brook, 1999.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. Libidinal Economy. Trans. Iain Hamilton Grant. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Mauss, Marcel. The Gift: the Form and Reason for Exchange in Archaic Societies. Trans. W.D. Halls. New York: Norton, 1990.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Genealogy of Morals. Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Vintage, 1967.
    • —. The Portable Nietzsche. Ed. and Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Penguin, 1954.
    • Piper, Karen. Cartographic Fictions: Maps, Race, and Identity. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers UP, 2002.
    • Stille, Alexander. “The Many Meanings of 9/11.” Council on Foreign Relations. (2001). 29 Aug. 2002. <http://www.cfr.org/Public/publications/xStille.html>.

     

  • Notices

     

     

     

    Volume 13, Number 2
    January, 2003
    Every issue of Postmodern Culturecarries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.

     


    Publication Announcements

    • Prefiguring Cyberculture: An Intellectual History
    • Hypermedia Joyce Studies
    • Variant
    • PixelPapers 22

     

  • Good Place and No Place

    Susan Laxton

    Art History and Archaeology
    Columbia University
    Sjl16@columbia.edu

     

    Review of: Catherine de Zegher and Mark Wigley, eds., The Activist Drawing: Retracing Situationist Architectures from Constant’s New Babylon to Beyond. New York: The Drawing Center, and Cambridge, Mass.: MIT P, 2001.

     
    How can a drawing be activist?

     
    Can a graphic mark constitute direct, vigorous, oppositional action? Graffiti, at its gouging best, comes to mind. But then, that’s writing. Drawing, traditionally conceived, withdraws from the public sphere, a fugitive trace, mute consort to the creative process. And even considering the historical shifts in drawing’s significance–from its function as ideational armature in the Renaissance to a model of spontaneity and expression in the early twentieth century to recent revaluations based in lability, erasure, and obsolescence–to advance its physical presence as an intervention capable of effecting political change is to take up the question of the efficacy of art in general.

     

    Specifically, it is to ask the dreadful question, “Does art matter?” and to consider further the implications of what it might mean “to matter.” This is the daunting project launched in The Activist Drawing: Retracing Situationist Architectures from Constant’s New Babylon to Beyond, co-edited by Catherine de Zegher, director of The Drawing Center in New York, and architectural historian Mark Wigley. While its authors would not claim to have found conclusive answers (they cannot seem to agree on a common enemy), opening discussion of the Great Unspoken of art historical discourse gives the book its contemporary urgency. Through their examination of architectural drawing as a hinge between the immateriality of representation and the materiality of lived experience, the authors probe the outcome of nearly a century’s effort toward a positive breakdown between art and life, and they address the possibilities of drawing in general as a conduit for revising lived experience. What emerges is a productive examination of the medium itself: drawing’s historical construction and theoretical participation in the vagaries of artistic practice, and the suggestion that the very characteristics of banality, flexibility, and disposability that have produced drawing as marginal to the arts are the grounds for its historical consideration as a site of resistance.

     
    The book is an expanded record of a symposium organized by Wigley and art historian Thomas McDonough; its title, The Activist Drawing, reflects a shift in emphasis from the more monographically named exhibition at the Drawing Center from which it derived–“Another City for Another Life: Constant’s New Babylon” (2 November to 30 December 1999). Rather than merely documenting the “visionary architecture” of the Dutch artist Constant Nieuwyenhuys as it is projected in the drawings and multimedia presentations of his imagined city New Babylon (1956-1974), the participants–Benjamin Buchloh, Rosalyn Deutsche, Elizabeth Diller, Martha Rosler, Bernard Tschumi, and Anthony Vidler, in addition to Wigley and McDonough–subject Constant’s project to a scrutiny that takes seriously the ideological implications of architectural projections, with their dimensionally driven aura of “realizability,” and the historical imperatives that might call for their revision. The critical dimension of the book, which stands out in opposition to the laudatory conventions of the typical exhibition catalogue, is underscored by de Zegher’s focus on New Babylon’s own idealism. In her introduction, she draws attention to the book’s emergence “in the context of a citywide celebration of ‘utopia’” driven by the New York Public Library’s exhibition “Utopia: The Search for the Ideal Society in the Western World” (14 October 2000 to 27 January 2001). New Babylon, as a fully automated city whose inhabitants, freed from labor, “play” by endlessly reconfiguring their environment to suit their individual and collective desires, is recast in this context as a plan for an experimental lifestyle which in retrospect seems to land somewhere between Fourier and Disney.

     
    The Drawing Center’s exhibition and symposium took place a year in advance of the “Utopia” show, so there is no direct reference to the materials or theories made available there. But founding a theoretical critical practice such as Constant’s, in which the inhabitant of New Babylon “will not have to make art, for he can be creative in the practice of his daily life” (qtd. in Constant 9), and establishing that practice as dependent on yet enacted outside of technological support, is a utopian notion which in academic circles today is widely regarded as suspect. The difficulty of attributing an unqualified materialist activism to Constant’s work is first communicated in Buchloh’s introductory conversation with him at the symposium. After Constant’s early assertion regarding his involvement with the COBRA group–“We didn’t consider ourselves avant-garde. The word is never used in COBRA1“(16)–Buchloh leads him, not without resistance, through a succession of encounters with apparently contradictory models of vanguard influence: DeStijl, Giacometti, the Soviet avant-garde. Through an unflinching examination of the problems implied by what de Zegher calls “the dynamic intersection of drawing, utopianism, and activism in a multimedia era” (9), this book emerges as an exploration of the eclipse of avant-garde artistic practice as it is understood from its original, that is, political definition, as Constant and his project are interrogated for foreknowledge of the obstacles to such practices today.

     
    With irony worthy of the postmodern, Thomas More named “Utopia” to signify both “good place” and “no place.” As the symposium participants focus on the problem of how to receive both the virtuality and the technological utopianism of Constant’s project as relevant to the contemporary situation in which, as de Zegher admits, “the imagined homo ludens . . . has not brought about a daily life of invention and action but of leisure and consumption,” the faint outlines of a prognosis for goodness materialize (10). Recasting Constant’s utopian project as artistic practice–a mediated, semiotic intervention rather than a program with ambitions for material realization–shifts the question into the field of representation, where drawing, the point of intersection between the materiality of architecture and the idealism of artistic practice, is advanced as a space of resistance. Yet in a postmodern culture in which the master of détournement turns out to be capitalism itself, it is the “no place” of graphic utopia of which we are made acutely aware: the disappearance in turn of paper support, the analog mark, practical accountability, and political activism.

     
    Mark Wigley takes on the challenge of reconciling the mechanical and the creative by arguing for their ontological presence in drawing itself. In his essay, “Paper, Scissors, Blur,” Wigley establishes drawing as the very ground of architecture’s acceptance as a fine art in the Renaissance, and drawing’s own emergence as “origin” and site of authenticity as having been established only through the sacrifice of paper: a disappearance of the ground in the presence of the graphic mark. This deconstructive observation alone, of an origin based in absence, places drawing at the center of the current theoretical fray over virtuality, simulacra, and digital processes as they relate to representation. But Wigley goes further, to establish the historical “rise” of drawing as utterly coextensive with the mass production of paper and the widespread use of the printing press, that is, as dependent on early modern technological innovation and the appearance of a “cult of reproduction.” For Wigley, drawing at its inception is at once essential and dependent, ideational and expressive, somatic index and symbol of the utterly rational. As he traces drawing historically through the pressures of modernism to the prevailing ideologies of Constant’s postwar context, what emerges is an image of drawing’s inner plurality, of a medium constituted by complementary differences. He writes,

     

    The project turns on the fragility of the line between originality and reproduction, unique unpredictable events and mechanization, spontaneous play and automated machinery. In the very techniques of drawing, Constant encounters the logic of the project that he is trying to represent. As the drawings of New Babylon slide from “mechanical” to “expressive,” the relentless smoothness of the slide, the extremely minor variations from drawing to drawing, and the repetition of the same images in different media, effectively undermine the standard oppositions. A sense of reproduction is embedded in a string of originals and thereby conveys the organizing principle of the project. The effect of a hundred unique works on paper is that vast mechanical structures assume an atmospheric immateriality and expressive flashes assume a structural physical presence. The collapse of the distinction between mechanization and spontaneous originality that is meant to be enacted by New Babylon is first enacted on paper. (41-2)

     

    New Babylon’s political potential is here located in an indeterminacy and play of meaning that finds its ideal medium in drawing. This ideology of infinite flow is identified as a founding principle of the Situationists, the overtly political movement of the 1960s with which Constant was associated at New Babylon’s inception. The Situationist critique of commodity-driven spectacle centered on an idealist revision of urban experience (and the architecture that determines it) through the practice of experimental counter-behaviors such as dérive, aimless wandering in a city designed for productive use. Thomas McDonough’s contribution, “Fluid Spaces: Constant and the Situationist Critique of Architecture,” identifies what he calls a “fundamental misrecognition” at the heart of the project: that the endless mobility and dynamism of New Babylon, set in opposition to instrumental reason, could also strike a blow against capitalism–a movement which is itself dependent on fluidity and incessant change. In its ambition to set in motion the salutary demise of drawing and art in general, New Babylon “forgets” the divisiveness and alienation that results from the vagaries of individual desire (an outcome of which Constant became convinced after the events of May 1968, resulting in a protracted autocritique that produced considerably darker versions of the project in the 1970s). And while Constant’s détournement of architecture–his use of architectural means to critique its static conventions–is meant as an attack on functional space, it ends up paradoxically prefiguring the dystopia of present-day public spaces. This is the theme taken up by Martha Rosler’s untitled presentation of her Airport Series, photographs of the anonymous spaces that characterize the architecture of postmodern transit and mobility. Mobility in the grip of commerce, she argues, relinquishes its activist potential along with its humanist aspirations:

     

    …the closely controlled empty spaces of transit, the terminals and lounges, promised (and symbolized) safety from the urban transients and the threats of disorder they represented . . . . The minimalism of such spaces, which appear to answer to the disjunct needs of modern transit and commerce, mutely promise the giant empty room that Adorno and others used as the presiding metaphor of the modern surveillance society–the society of total administration. (128)

     

    Rosler’s project asserts that global technology and industrialization, which promise unlimited freedoms and the fulfillment of every desire, actually subordinate social relations to quantifiable units of exchange to the extent that they deliver only freedom’s effect. The critique of Constant’s project is never made explicit, but it is clear: New Babylon’s premise of infinite traversal, far from presenting a model for resistance, is the perfect vehicle for the confidence game of pure exchange. Rosler’s position implies that where a century of political action has failed to refract the trajectory of extreme regulation, to consider that drawing, with its overtones of ideational purity and rarefied audience, could possibly succeed in doing so is laughable. Yet in her unflinching account of the unfolding postmodern condition, Rosler insists on drawing as a kind of creative humanist recourse set against the mechanization and homogenization that are equated with technological rationalism.

     
    By contrast, Anthony Vidler finds qualified potential for activism in Constant’s project precisely in its generation from the most mechanical of drawings. In “Diagrams of Utopia,” Vidler examines the New Babylon drawings through the conceit of the “diagram,” theorized here as a drawing with a mandate to action–directions, as it were, for the achievement of a plan. The diagram’s performative, machine-like function, if administered politically, serves not only to alter the internal conventions of architecture, but also to galvanize social change. While Rosler’s and Vidler’s respective positions could be seen as representative of the rift between the pragmatic and the theoretical within intellectual discourse (and consonant with radically divergent notions of line enclosed in the definition of drawing, that is, line as bodily expression and as pure abstraction), Vidler’s characterization of the diagram as the trace of process aligns it with action, effectively breaking down the separation of the practical and the conceptual to produce a third, transgressive category that is essential to the notion of any representation’s political efficacy. Rosalind Deutsche extends this abstraction into the material field in her essay “Breaking and Entering: Drawing, Situationism, Activism” by insisting on the urgency of critical responsibility in artistic practices. Deutsche invokes the urban theories of Henri Lefebvre to demonstrate the importance of critical practices at the formal level in the work of Gordon Matta Clark (who called his “building cuts” drawings)–an instance in which drawing broke with its paper ground to physically assert itself against the homogenization of the city.

     
    At apparent loggerheads with the material activism of Rosler and Deutsche, the essays by architects Elizabeth Diller and Bernard Tschumi present two different facets of theorizing architectural drawing into the “beyond” of the book’s title–the time/space matrix made available by the advent of digital processes. Diller’s “Autobiographical Notes” step off from the moment in the 1970s when architectural drawing became freed from practice, and drawing for its own sake was widely pursued. Diller’s own conceptual projects, reproduced in her essay, are the natural extension of this replacement of the tectonic with the graphic, a trajectory that inevitably resulted in “the denaturalization of building to emulate the abstraction of drawing” (131). That this abstraction, in its withdrawal from material imperatives, would slide easily into the virtual world of digital processes with consequences for social relations that might not have been entirely salutary is suggested in her projects, but never overtly stated. Rather, Diller celebrates the “uncanny disembodiment” marked by the shift from analog to digital drawing as a “new [way] of rethinking the relation between drawing and space” (133). As a result of her neutral delivery, activism seems out of the question in media in which pragmatic realization is eliminated as a possibility.

     
    This is not the case for Tschumi, who also delivers a detached analysis in “Operative Drawing,” yet insists that all of the strategies described in his overview of drawing are deployed in the service of function and utility. While his codification of architectural practices is generated out of a cybernetic matrix that Tschumi seems to take for granted, it is also made clear that he means to subordinate digital processes to an end result that will enter, and alter, the built environment as a functioning structure in the traditional sense. That is, Tschumi’s drawings are ultimately meant to be realized as buildings; drawing for him is a useful means to a higher end. The question of whether buildings generated from a digital medium can escape the imperatives of technological control to the extent that they could critique, rather than reproduce and reinforce them, is not addressed by Tschumi, although it seems clear from the premises of the symposium that it should be. Particularly questionable in this context would be the last of Tschumi’s four drawing strategies, the terrifyingly opaque “interchangeable scalar drawing” (136), described as a universally applicable unit of expression that transforms polar opposites (such as solid and void) into a heterogeneous whole.

     
    Such transcendent expressions of the sublime skate far afield from the populist strategies posited by the other contributors, which tend to preserve difference and happenstance as fields of resistance against the hegemony of standardization. The advantage of the symposium form from which The Activist Drawing is derived is that it stimulates a multivalent, critical dialogue on its subject, generating spontaneous and unexpected exchanges and responses. This sense of the fortuitous is the special potential of collaborative work: the “lucky find,” at the intersection of widely divergent, often unconceivable ranges of experience. Faced with increasing uniformity in the lived environment, the unknowability of the subject emerges as a last recourse to human engagement, if humanity is the figure that is to be set against technology. Likewise, drawing’s value to the arts, as well as its value to activism, lies in its own predisposition to the aleatory, what Henri Michaux has appraised as drawing’s bias toward the unanticipated: “Could it be that I draw because I see so clearly this thing or that thing? Not at all. Quite the contrary. I do it to be perplexed again. And I am delighted that there are traps. I look for surprises.” The aberrant mark, the false start, the doodle or marginalia, the incomplete erasure, all serve the unpredictable, and all are lost to digital processes. This revelation is the trouvaille of The Activist Drawing.

     

    Notes

     

    1. COBRA, the expressionist art group named from the first letters of the three capital cities of the countries of its founders, Asger Jorn (Copenhagen), Corneille (Brussels), and Karel Appel (Amsterdam), was founded in 1948 and disbanded by 1952. Constant was associated with the group in Amsterdam at around the same time that he began to assimilate the tenets of architecture through the work of the radically opposite De Stijl movement.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Michaux, Henri. Henri Michaux. Trans. John Ashbery. London: Robert Fraser Gallery, 1963.

     

     

  • Accelerating Beyond the Horizon

    Rekha Rosha

    Department of English and American Literature
    Brandeis University
    rosha@brandeis.edu

     

    Paul Virilio, A Landscape of Events. Trans. Julie Rose. Cambridge: MIT P, 2000.

     

    Architect, political theorist, and cultural critic, Paul Virilio is best known for his phenomenological critique of technology and militarism. In this work, as in his other writings, Virilio contends that recent developments in technoculture can best be understood by studying changes in military and political transportation and information transmission. “Dromology,” his term for this study, emphasizes the impact of speed on the organization of territory and culture.

     

    Originally published in French in 1996 under the title Un paysage d’événements, A Landscape of Events continues Virilio’s study of “dromocratic culture” and “the disastrous effects of speed on the interpretation of events” (31). Virilio’s major premise in this book is that space has been replaced by time; the Kantian argument for absolute space as the first principle of human experience is no longer applicable because space has imploded. In Kant’s discussions, the coherent visual field in which the multitude of appearances is organized is a consequence of spatiality, which is given a priori to our experience. Today, Virilio argues, what we see is not spatially organized: it is a swarm of fragmented images beamed at us at ever more furious speeds. Cyberspace is not a physical space–there are no coordinates of length, height, or depth; it exists only in time. The Internet is only one example of how space has drifted away from time. Virilio takes as his starting point mathematician Hermann Minkowski’s claim that only a union between space and time will preserve an independent reality and then works through various causes for the implosion of space.

     

    Perhaps it is because Virilio so strenuously advocates for the redemption of space that his book begins in the least redeemed space of all–metropolitan cities. The sun never sets on the urban empires of New York, Paris, and London. Electric lights blaze 24/7; people move through the city at night as if it were daylight, and this gives him pause. In the book’s first chapter, “The Big Night,” Virilio argues that the constant flicker of urban light has prevented our bodies from producing melatonin, a chemical related in the body’s nocturnal phase. Melatonin tells our bodies that night has fallen and we should go to sleep. The increase in the number of prescriptions for melatonin suggests not only that our bodies’ ability to produce necessary chemicals and biological agents on its own is in jeopardy, but also that our bodies can no longer distinguish the difference between night and day. Our twenty-four-hour clock never winds down; we are speeding up, we are always on. The loss of this chemical, Virilio contends, indicates that our adaptation is no longer to our natural surroundings, but to our urban ones.

     

    While our bodies are becoming synchronized with our man-made surroundings, these very spaces are undergoing similarly significant transformations. In Virilio’s view, space is dwindling into time not because of increased urbanization, but because of the increasing importance placed on information–the intangible data, facts, perceptions, interpretations, and propositions that obtain in different cases at different times. In an interview with Andreas Ruby (“Architecture,” 180), Virilio explains this process using the example of a mountain. In this case, the mass and energy of a mountain is linked to a fixed source or foundation: the density of the mountain. By contrast, information is not linked to a fixed source or foundation; it evolves constantly. The mountain’s name, its national location, climate, mineral composition, and topography are all relative to a particular point in time. In this sense the mountain is shaped and formed by technological advances in politics (the nation could change and thus the national location of the mountain could change, too), meteorology, geology, and cartography. Given the real impact of political events and technological developments, the information about the mountain matters more than the matter that composes the mountain.

     

    One could easily insist that the density of a mountain matters less than its name, be it Mount Everest, Mont Blanc, or Kilimanjaro. Privileging the discourse produced about the mountain over its physical reality effectively removes matter from considerations about the mountain’s “meaning.” For Virilio, this demotion of matter signals its disappearance, which he in turn reads as a new mode of appearance. The fluidity of information releases the mountain from any fixed relationship to space. Its only relationship, or reality, is to information. The object (Mount Everest, Mont Blanc, Kilimanjaro) is perceived through information about its location, size, and so on. This dematerialization occurs in multiple ways: “In some way, you can read the importance given today to glass and transparency as a metaphor of the disappearance of matter” (“Architecture” 181). Just as information is used to turn mountains into bits of ephemeral data, and the military turns countries and the people who inhabit them into fly-over space, contemporary architects and artists use transparent materials to construct a world that appears as if it isn’t there. This transparency, what Virilio calls the “aesthetics of disappearance” (Landscape 35), is a mutation of a militarized mode of representation in which matter is untethered from its physical dimension.

     

    This examination of multiple efforts to reduce perceived objects to information, or to seeming nothingness, reiterates Virilio’s long-held interests in war, speed, and perception, and remains at the forefront of his thinking throughout A Landscape of Events. He continues to add provocative examples to his argument regarding the catastrophic effects of technology. In the chapter “The Avant-Garde of Forgetting,” Virilio argues that the small size of the TV screen diminishes the enormity of events. Four-dimensional events are compressed into three–“the temptation of the West is the small format” (26). The TV image thus becomes the format of violence; television provides the formal design and structures the tragic images of military destruction it broadcasts. Television reduces human misery and trauma to a scale far out of proportion to its reality. Re-broadcast documentaries and newsreel footage of historic events such as D-Day transform seismic events into tightly edited, condensed versions of reality. And if this truncated version becomes the official document, tagged and archived, what will become of the war? Once the cinematic version of the event becomes the only trace, when all the participants, victims, agents, and witnesses are gone, what can we know of that event? Like the mountains and glass buildings in the earlier examples, wars and history are also subject to the aesthetics of disappearance. The image, particularly the television image, facilitates the forgetting of events; it does nothing, in Virilio’s terms, to promote the memory of events. This reductio ad absurdum is practiced at an even more insidious level in the military.

     

    Virilio offers a fairly convincing argument that there is no qualitative difference between a beneficent application of technology and a sinister application; technological developments, as well as aesthetic ones, never remain contained or restricted to the purposes for which they were designed. Yet, in spite of such compelling claims, Virilio is really at his best making wildly provocative connections rather than offering persuasive arguments based on proof. While Virilio’s work connects various strands of thinking in a breathtaking intellectual performance, such an approach can sometimes backfire, particularly in his discussion of the triumph of Nietzschean man and the death of God in his chapter “The Near-Death Experience.”

     

    He starts with the claim that in the absence of Judaic etiological stories, science posits its own account of the origins of species. Darwin’s theory of evolution, which assigned to the ape all materials that evolve into man, is similar to current attempts to create androids with artificial intelligence. Virilio argues that the ape, the Ur-human, is later replaced with machines, the über-human: “And so we went from the metempsychosis of the evolutionary monkey to the embodiment of a human mind in an android; why not move on after that to those evolving machines whose rituals could be jolted into action by their own energy potential” (35). The problem is not evolution or artificial intelligence, but that these concepts are routinely used to diminish human agency. So much so, in fact, that Raymond A. Moody’s book Life after Life, which encouraged people to simulate clinical death as a way of achieving spiritual insight, sold 10 million copies (99). Virilio, who cites this book as the reason for the near-death experience movement, takes this fact as an index of something much larger; the quickening of artificial life marks the slowing down and near immobilization of human life.

     

    What is difficult to accept in this account of a comatose human agency is that it identifies the removal of a God-centered account of humankind as its cause:

     

    If one eliminates God and if, soon after, it becomes fashionable to declare Him dead, it is only normal that through successive shifts, one ends up getting a little anxious about the origins of this ‘man’ who, once removed from the Judeo-Christian Genesis, suddenly finds himself robbed of his inheritance, deprived of identity. (34)

     

    Though Virilio implicitly accepts that the biblical narrative provides a template for scientific narratives–he calls it “a substitute faith” (33)–he doesn’t explore the role the prior narrative plays in shaping the succeeding one. To call science a poor reflection of Christianity seems insufficient. (It is unclear why he links two vastly different religions together in the hybrid term Judeo-Christian that functionally dissolves that difference.) More to the point, Virilio doesn’t explain how the theory of evolution supports an agenda similar to that offered in Christianity’s version of human origins. So why does it appear to be the villain here? Perhaps Virilio wants to retain Christian rhetoric as a kind of counter-Enlightenment narrative, but he doesn’t delineate this idea clearly enough to succeed in the task.

     

    Certainly Virilio’s harrowing visions of humans in suspended animation waiting out the end times, of mountains crumbling into data, of buildings without substance, and of wars without trace have apocalyptic overtones that urge the reader to question the influences on his argument. While technology requires sustained, careful critiques, if for no other reason than its mammoth presence in contemporary life, it is unclear what Virilio intends to gain by attaching this sort of millenialism to his critique. Which is also to say: things end badly in this book. Virilio offers no suggestions as to how we might intervene in the processes he describes, or how we might stave off the horrific end he sees for us. In the final sentences of A Landscape, he explains that in fact no intervention is possible: “The countdown has in fact begun. In a few months, a few years at most, there will no longer be time to intervene; real time will have imploded” (96). While the dire tone of this prediction might be meant to galvanize the reader into action, it unnecessarily closes down the efficacy of that action–for what kind of intervention can be accomplished in a few months, a few years? This prompts a second, more cynical question: If the world has become so hostile to humans to the extent that we are barely animate with only months to live, why bother sounding the alarm at all?

     

    Indeed, there seem to be few, if any, means to re-appropriate, re-direct, sabotage, or poach the mechanisms of disappearance that Virilio critiques. Apparently, no subject, neither man nor woman, Westerner nor Easterner, rich nor poor, black nor white can find new ways to connect with one another under the given conditions. While other theorists–Deleuze and Guattari come immediately to mind–have suggested that possibilities for resistance remain even amidst the most limiting of circumstances, Virilio seems unconvinced. At times he seems so committed to his own apocalyptic vision that he does not pursue the possibilities his own arguments make available–that is, if information can dismantle matter, it might also be able reconstitute matter in perhaps radical and useful ways. With the increased, though exaggerated, emphasis on information, bodies disconnected from space might be free to renegotiate certain limitations. Yet in Virilio’s critique, there is apparently no exit.

     

    Virilio’s strength is in identifying overlooked relationships and patterns among disparate domains of contemporary life, such as the military organization of space, human perception, and architecture. In spite of his bleak outlook, he draws important connections that need to be pursued. By jumping from one small consequence of technology (the loss of melatonin, for example) to vast claims (the growing inability to respond to our natural environments), Virilio uncovers unanticipated links between our current condition and its cause. Yet the way he switches from biology, to architecture, then to history, to pop culture and fashion, and back to technology is a little like channel surfing. As a result, the book is both fascinating and unfocused–as dizzying as the landscape he describes. Even so, Virilio demonstrates a fascinating mode of intellectual engagement with the contemporary moment; he places urgent injunctions alongside wordplay and puts serious content into a playful structure. And as for the book’s bleak conclusion: at worst, it is hopelessly discouraging; at best it is a call for a more rigorous explanation of–and intervention in–the relationship between speed and space.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Virilio, Paul. A Landscape of Events. Trans. Julie Rose. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2000.
    • —. “Architecture in the Age of Its Virtual Disappearance: An Interview with Paul Virilio by Andreas Ruby.” The Virtual Dimension: Architecture, Representation, and Crash Culture. Ed. John Beckmann. New York: Princeton Architectural P, 1998. 178-87.

     

  • Zizek’s Second Coming

    Char Roone Miller

    Department of Public and International Affairs
    George Mason University
    cmillerd@gmu.edu

     

    Review of: Slavoj Zizek, On Belief. London and New York: Routledge, 2001.

     

    “God is dead,” proclaimed Nietzsche’s madman. Many readers, particularly undergraduate students, have been surprised by the passing of God; Nietzsche’s implication that God once lived does not comfortably fit their sense of Nietzsche as an atheist. More than a century later, Slavoj Zizek surprises readers with his suggestion that God is still alive and kicking in a post-Hegelian/post-Marxist/post-modern world. Zizek’s project shares many elements with Nietzsche’s, in spite of its opposite account of God’s health, including, most importantly, the interest they share in liberating people from their infatuation with the Other that dominates their lives–most significantly for Zizek, from the Big Other that governs the ideological systems of meaning in which our “choices” occur. Zizek, Senior Researcher at the Institute for Social Sciences, University of Ljubljana, Slovenia, and amazingly popular critical theorist, attempts in On Belief to bring Christ back as the herald of a politics by which the choice, the real choice (as well as the choice of the real), of meaning can be faced.

     

    The support for this argument is not easy to follow: Zizek’s language is brisk, lively, and smart, but it is not clearly structured. Nor does his style of writing in pithy aphoristic paragraphs lend itself to broad summary (much like Nietzsche’s style). But this book is clearly an attempt by Zizek to reposition the social meaning and power of Christianity in order to dispose of a range of social hierarchies (race, nation, sex, and class, at least); it is difficult to think of a more challenging yet rewarding political project. Zizek is unwilling to leave the territory of Christianity to the ostensibly Christian institutions and interpretations currently acting to maintain the liberal-capitalist empire. In a way similar to the destruction that Pauline Christianity wrought on the Roman Empire, Zizek wants to use a reconfigured Christianity to ease the grip of liberal-capitalist hegemony. “What Christianity did with regard to the Roman Empire, this global ‘multiculturalist’ polity,” he confides, “we should do with regard to today’s Empire” (5).

     

    This re-imagined Christianity, Zizek claims, is the suppressed truth of Christianity, the liberating power of love for the imperfections of the Other: “the ultimate secret of the Christian love is, perhaps, the loving attachment to the Other’s imperfection” (147). Affection for the sins and weaknesses of others is coupled with the erasure of a final judgment, in part because our attachment to the gap in the perfection of others is exactly what God loves about us. Furthermore, this gap is the way in which humans are created in the image of God. “When I, a human being, experience myself as cut off from God, at that very moment of the utmost abjection, I am absolutely close to God, since I find myself in the position of the abandoned Christ,” explains Zizek (146). Because Christ is like us, an abandoned and imperfect sinner, he is loved by God and by us. “And it is only within this horizon that the properly Christian Love can emerge, a Love beyond Mercy. Love is always love for the Other insofar as he is lacking–we love the Other BECAUSE of his limitation, helplessness, ordinariness even” (146-7). Thus Zizek’s Christianity subverts the idealization we feel toward the Other by filling this connection with not our desire so much as our affection for the empty desire of the Other.

     

    Zizek’s version of Christianity is, he claims, a way to will the return of the repressed as a symbolic act.

     

    The symbolic act is best conceived of as the purely formal, self-referential, gesture of the self-assertion of one's subjective position. Let us take a situation of the political defeat of some working-class initiative; what one should accomplish at this moment to reassert one's identity is precisely the symbolic act: stage a common event in which some shared ritual (song or whatsoever) is performed, an event which contains no positive political program--its message is only the purely performative assertion: "We are still here, faithful to our mission, the space is still open for our activity to come!" (84-5)

     

     

    Zizek wants to keep this space open for positive political action. He is the symbolic voice for the “truth” of Christianity.

     

    Following the logic through, as Zizek attempts (with Hegel and Nietzsche on his team), allows him to expect the return of the repressed within Christianity–or at least to exploit the miraculous return of freedom and choice in a world where it has been crushed and exploited by international corporate power. Hegel’s dialectic allows the suppressed to return in defeat as the significant real. Nietzsche’s debt to Christianity is very similar to Zizek’s program, in that Nietzsche often found himself and his truth-telling about God to be the fulfillment of Christianity. Zizek believes that Christianity can undercut the liberal-capitalist empire in the same way, by demanding that the truth be told. This is in resistance to the great temptation of the postmodern world: that in the way we flit from identity to identity and desire to desire, we will flit from one logic to another. The truth should be told. “Thought,” Zizek writes, “is more than ever exposed to the temptation of ‘losing its nerve,’ of precociously abandoning the old conceptual coordinates” (32). Christianity can provide the coordinates by which the ways we understand good/evil, right/wrong, and valuable/insignificant can be re-coordinated. In this redeployment of Christianity, through the pursuit of the conclusion of its logic, Zizek attempts to make the death of Christ stand for the death of the envy of the Other’s jouissance. From this claim Zizek works out a seemingly endless range of insights and thoughtful observations on culture, society, and politics.

     

    One of the remarkable twists to Zizekian Christianity is its defense and romanticization of sex by filling that romance not with fate but with accidents and fortune. Zizek inquires at one point: “What if sexual difference is not simply a biological fact, but the Real of an antagonism that defines humanity, so that once sexual difference is abolished, a human being effectively becomes indistinguishable from a machine?” (43). Sex and sexuality become absolutely necessary to the continuance of human subjectivity as we know it–a subjectivity that Zizek does attempt to maintain–not because sexual difference and desire provide a firm, “natural” foundation but because they constitute the negative trauma around which human symbolization spins.

     

    The passage from animal copulation to properly human sexuality affects the human animal in such a way that it causes the human animal's radical self-withdrawal, so that the zero-level of human sexuality is not the "straight" sexual intercourse, but the solitary act of masturbation sustained by fantasizing--the passage from this self-immersion to involvement with an Other, to finding pleasure in the Other's body, is by no means "natural," it involves a series of traumatic cuts, leaps and inventive improvisations. (24)

     

     

    There is no given to the human condition, human relations, or human subject. All of what we take to be naturally given to us and naturally ours–tastes, desires, sex, and loves–are the product of a haphazard yet skillful “tarrying with the negative.” Humanity, like Christ, is not at home in this world and will never recover her authentic self, natural desires, or proper place. Our success is our displacement.

     

    On Belief raises many questions: what, for example, is the function of the Others that dominate this text, Hegel and Lacan? In a text that ostensibly attempts to renegotiate the machinery by which others determine our choices, Zizek spends a lot of time defending and deferring his insights to Lacan. I’m highly sympathetic to his defense of Lacan against those who would classify Lacan as overly obscure, willfully obfuscating, ahistorical, and ham-fistedly structuralist, but I’m not sure how it fits within the larger project of Zizek’s writings or his attempts to reduce the authority of the Other.

     

    Additionally, the selection of friends and foes seems rather random and chaotic. Why, for example, the apparently willful disavowal of ideas that Zizek could easily appropriate, such as Gnosticism? Perhaps this is the inverse of the previous question or a way to suggest that there are people missing from this book who could provide useful aides and foils for Zizek, particularly Elaine Pagels (see The Gnostic Gospels). Zizek ridicules Gnosticism without dealing with Pagel’s work, work that in many ways is very similar to his, particularly through its emphasis on the absence of a final judgment.

     

    Finally, what are the stakes in asserting a monotheism instead of a polytheism, or more broadly, how are Zizek’s decisions concerning the true Christianity and its corruptions being made? This reading feels like Freud’s Moses and Monotheism, in which Freud admits that in order to make his point concerning the creation of racial and national identities he is forced to construct an edifice that any fool could knock over. These sorts of choices and assertions seem to be part of the attempt to willfully articulate a new position and organization for the things that give life meaning, a process that would be more effective if made less tentative.

     

    Admittedly, to ask Zizek to play by these rules, by which his choices are fully explained, is to expect more of him than anyone else can give, and probably to miss the point that accounts of the meaning of Christianity really do not have a point of closure. It’s that lack of a point of closure, or determinative point, that makes counter-hegemonic political action possible.

     

    Zizek knows a thing or two about political action; for example, he ran for president of the Republic of Slovenia in 1990. More significantly, as a member of the Committee for the Protection of the Human Rights of the Four Accused in Slovenia in 1988, Zizek worked to free four journalists arrested and brought to trial by the Yugoslav Army in Slovenia and in doing so struggled for the liberation of Slovenia. The strategy was pursued by articulating a demand to change the conditions under which the journalists were arrested, which meant a change in socialism; by pursuing the literal meaning of the commission, Zizek helped to bring down the socialist government. He is working in a similar vein here–by pursuing a literal meaning of Christianity, he hopes to change the ruling linguistic and intellectual co-ordinances of the fictional rules that govern our lives. By asserting the “true” value of Christianity, Zizek and Nietzsche seem like the two most Christian madmen since the one who died on the cross.
     

  • A Poem Is a Machine to Think With: Digital Poetry and the Paradox of Innovation

    Sandy Baldwin

    The Center for Literary Computing
    West Virginia University
    charles.baldwin@mail.wvu.edu

     

    Review of: Loss Pequeño Glazier, Digital Poetics: The Making of E-Poetries. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 2002

     

     A poem is a small (or large)
    Machine made of words.

    –William Carlos Williams

     

    The odd thing about innovative literature is that no literature is innovative. The familiar but unsolvable paradox of Ezra Pound’s rallying cry to “Make it new!” (147) was exactly what made modernist aesthetics so persuasive and productive for the last century of literature. Pound’s statement is paradoxical from the first: he seems to call for new forms and subjects for literature, for a rejection of tradition, all the while using a quote from the tradition-bound world of Confucius. Of course, the critical problem involved is nothing new. In the simplest sense, the “new”-ness of literary innovation occurs against the background of a tradition that novelty ends up reinforcing. Any literary work will be innovative in purely conventional ways, readable for its experimentation and for its relation to a stable tradition of experiment. On the other hand, the deep thrill of the new remains in its claim on the future, where each innovation opens a temporal difference within the continuities of literary history. Making it new seems to enliven the present with the future. Innovation is always possible, for the odd thing about innovative literature is that all literature is innovative. It is hard to see literary history without Pound’s axiom. Or, better: at once novelty and tradition, surprise and repetition, the paradox of innovation–and the degree to which we resolve or displace it–explains something of the role of literature today.

     

    If we are to take Niklas Luhmann seriously, the paradox of innovation underlies “art as a social system” (199-201). The systematicity of literature, as an institution, is built on this paradox of an innovation that is never more than a repetition. Literary innovation and the modern identification of literature as innovation allow for the observation of processes of historical novelty. This is not the place for an extended exposition of Luhmann’s general social theory, but literary innovation plays a fundamental though paradoxical role in his understanding of modernity as a system of interlocking subsystems.1 The functional differentiation of each closed, self-maintaining subsystem means that theory can only offer partial accounts of system functioning.2 Each theoretical account is focused on the subsystem’s particular mode of differentiation. For systems to differentiate themselves, they must internally copy and reflect the distinction between system and environment. The system of artworks differentiates itself through its concern with innovation. The focus on novelty is the form of self-reference unique to artworks in the social systems of modernity. Moreover, the particularity of the written medium codifies and universalizes the self-referential, auto-telic function of artworks (284-5). As a result, all modern artworks tend toward the medium of writing. Meanwhile, if innovation is central to the self-production (autopoeisis) of all systems, then the specific role of literature is the observation of this self-production “itself” (Roberts 33-5). Literature is how modernity describes the kinetics of its own historical evolution. “Making it new” is a dynamic maintaining the openness of sub-systems to the environment. One implication is that the language-focus of contemporary poetries is less a response to a postmodern loss of reference than a self-referential code within a language increasingly employed as an instrumental tool for exchange and commerce. This is evident in the popular role of literature: it must produce results that are declared to be important but are not taken seriously.

     

    The first-order theories of cybernetics and informatics that underlie Luhmann’s theories already presupposed a concept of literature as information density. While Luhmann’s concern is with observation and differentiation between systems, these “first order” theories approached “control and communication in the animal and the machine”–in the words of Norbert Wiener’s subtitle to Cybernetics–as a matter of coding and transmitting messages within a given information system. For example, Claude E. Shannon’s crucial Mathematical Theory of Communication argued that information was unrelated to meaning (31). The problems of information theory were instead a matter of efficient coding and transmission of messages. For Shannon, the more complex and difficult the encoding of a message, the more information it contained. Inversely, information-dense messages contained little redundancy, that is, little of the message could be lost without compromising the communication involved. Now, the novelty of literature was Shannon’s singular example of information density (56). Literature consistently supplied the limit concept of a message with little or no redundancy. Since information theory addresses systems of coding and transmission, literature remains necessary to the definition of information while lying outside its space of application. Literature is the medium of information “itself.”

     

    From a systems-theory point of view, innovative literature is a meta-code ensuring the stability of the systems through pure self-reference. “Innovation” is the doubleness of a paradox that literature thematizes. The proximity of literature to the root association of poetry as poeisis or “making” suggests a more dynamic role than internal self-maintenance. No doubt Luhmann’s description is accurate enough, though it does little to explain why literary innovation remains so compelling despite all paradoxes. That is, it works well as a description of “art as a social system” but less well as an account of literature “itself.” The insistence on systematicity does not solve but merely displaces the paradox of innovative literature. Rather than take this as a failure of Luhmann’s rather grandiose theory, it should be seen as pointing out the asystematicity of literary innovation. Luhmann’s theory offers a displaced version of literary aesthetics within the rigorous sociological rubric of systems theory. Literature becomes a provisional closure, the institutional site for the introduction and assimilation of innovation. The poetic point of systems theory is that innovative literature–as making, poeisis–rather than simply thematizing the integration of newness into the system, is what creates the dynamism of the system in the first place. So-called digital literature only underlines the point, since it automates processes defined by and identified with modernist innovation: instant surrealism or Burroughsian cut-ups via text generators; instant seriality and collaboration via email or IRC; instant concrete and animated poetry via Photoshop or Flash; instant procedural and concept poetry via hypertext or HTML forms; and so on.

     

    It is exciting, then, to read the persuasive call for “electronic space as a space of poeisis” (5) in Loss Pequeño Glazier’s Digital Poetics: The Making of E-Poetries. Invoking poetry as making or poeisis both broadens the scope of poetic innovation and raises the question of “What are we making here?” (the title of the final section of Glazier’s book). Opening the field while raising the stakes is typical of Glazier’s approach. This is a challenging, sometimes frustrating, but always important book. Digital Poetics fascinates as a reflection of its subject matter, as an attempt to grasp the textuality of e-poetry in the antique textuality of the book.

     

    At first glance, one finds in Digital Poetics an assemblage of diverse essays reflecting disparate occasions and sources, but unified by a singular insistence that innovative poetry practice informs how we might explore digital media. This first reading finds in Glazier a kind of policeman of innovative writing, laying down the law declaring who is in, who is out. As one might expect, such maneuvers produce a reaction. Brandon Barr’s review in Electronic Book Review argues that Glazier’s “prescriptions and descriptions seem to narrowly define precisely where he wants […] expansion to occur.” Other early responses have similarly focused on these efforts to fix and monumentalize a canon and criteria for innovative literature. These critiques confuse particular moments in Glazier’s argument with crippling errors.3 Suspiciously, such readings find Glazier’s book too easily repeating the modernist paradoxes of the new and innovative, too explicitly positing the oxymoron of normative innovation. Let it be said that Glazier is fundamentally committed to an inclusive poetics, open to diverse technologies, forms, and modes of authoring–as his pioneering work as creator and Director of the Electronic Poetry Center (<www.epc.buffalo.edu>) makes clear. In fact, the book is much more subtle in staging the processes of innovation within institutional thematizations of the new. If there is a performative contradiction here, between Glazier’s commitment to innovation and his insistence on distinguishing the innovative from the non-innovative, it reflects the tight, reflexive relation of poeisis to conceptualization. Innovation will be institutionalized, will become part of the dynamics of the system of literary history. Glazier recognizes his book as part of this process: he insists on the radical openness of innovative practice while insisting on its particularity to certain modes and traditions. Glazier’s criticism is as much a result of as an interpretation of its object.

     

    Make no mistake: Digital Poetries is a paradoxical book. Read this book against the grain, but the grain is multiple and branching. Glazier offers an appropriate description of e-text: “Because much or all of your text may not be received, you must, to be successful, create a text that is somehow suspended between various possibilities of reading.” He continues that such a text is “provisional, conditional, and characterized by its multiple renderings,” or better: it is a “program” (15). Glazier’s book is a kind of “program.” Like the web-based poetries Glazier uses as examples, the book oscillates between display and markup, a “dance between possibilities of representation” (15). The skeleton key to understanding innovative literature is not this or that innovative literature but literary innovation itself, and it is this poetic principle with which Glazier dances. Innovation or poeisis occurs. The result is a kind of model of how to read poetry, focused on a background of innovation against which all making occurs. Glazier’s central claim bears close attention: through the over-reaching of poetry as the exemplification of digital media, particularly within the current interest in programmable poetry and codework as literature, innovation shines through as a cultural process within and against literary tradition. Still, Glazier’s exclusionary moves in establishing criteria and a canon for innovative digital poetry are what first get the reader’s attention. These moves amount to three major claims.

     

    First claim: prose and prose concepts dominate discussions of digital literature. This means that the primary examples of digital literature are in prose form and are situated in the prose tradition. A simple reading of the major scholarly works on digital writing shows this claim to be non-controversial. More interestingly, Glazier shows how discussions of digital writing continually adopt prose concepts and terms as paradigms. Prose, with its narrative trajectory and linearity, swallows all other forms of literature when it comes to the digital. Glazier’s alternative is no surprise: innovative poetry.

     

    Second claim: the emergent canon of thinkers and practitioners of digital literature excludes other possible writing practices. These figures largely overlap with the dominance of prose: they are the writers whose work circulates in discussion of digital literature, the texts taught in universities, cited in the press, and so on. The configuration is something like Moulthrop/Joyce/Landow/Bolter. Glazier’s response is to suggest that equally important work emanates from the field of digital poetries. He presents an alternative configuration something like Cayley/Kac/Rosenberg and Glazier himself.

     

    Final claim: innovative writing can be distinguished from non-innovative writing. Glazier argues that innovative writing is marked by two central concerns: 1) it “offers the perspective of the multiple ‘I’” and, 2) it “recognizes the importance of the materials of writing to writing itself, an engagement with its medium” (22). He goes on to identify the non-innovative with specific features: “narrative, plot, anecdotal re-telling of human experiences, logical descriptions, chronological sequences of events, a reliance on factual information, a view of language as a transparent (or at most, tinted) bearer of meaning, and an attachment to a Modernist aesthetic” (47). The innovative lines up very clearly with the poetic, and with a very particular line of poetic tradition.

     

    What are we to make of these three claims? Glazier is persuasive in showing the exclusive focus on digital narratives, and there is no doubt that this focus limits the field of literature and enforces a concern with rules, ordering, and territories. Just as certainly, nothing is gained by replacing one canon with another and one set of rules with another. The point-counterpoint quality of aligning constellations of names must be understood as a tactical maneuver rather than as the absolute declaration of a new canon: it is not that Cayley/Kac/Rosenberg/Glazier must now be read to the exclusion of all others, but that they open the field of digital poetries circumscribed by Moulthrop/Joyce/Landow/Bolter. No doubt, none of the figures on these lists (including Glazier himself) is committed to a single and monumental view of digital literature. Glazier’s targets are instead our easy institutionalization of “major figures” and the almost subterranean assimilation of exemplary works to models for all work.

     

    The criteria distinguishing the innovative from the non-innovative are somewhat more complex. At first they seem easy to dismiss, since any writing can be shown to exhibit Glazier’s criteria for innovation. Adorno’s assertion that “even demystified artworks are more than is literally the case” (45) applies: even the most non-reflexive writing shows, in its resistance to reflection, a concern with its medium and its mode of authorship. The criteria of innovation can be generalized into meaninglessness. Furthermore, there is an arbitrariness to his list of non-innovative features. A “Modernist aesthetic” would describe many of the writers Glazier valorizes as precursors to electronic poetry: Pound, Williams, Stein; who could be more Modernist? Moreover, Modernism is typically seen as challenging the other items in the list (narrative, plot, linearity, etc.). As a tactical approach to reading poetry rather than as an empirical feature of poems, however, “the perspective of the multiple ‘I’” offers insight into writing that emphasizes the conditions enabling voice, the polyphonous messages crossing even the most transparent communication, and the agency of various informational nodes and programs (47-54). Again, looking past the prescriptive rhetoric, Glazier’s criteria function less as restrictions on how to write than as a pedagogy applying equally to the reading of innovative poetry and digital media.

     

    Glazier’s connection between innovative writing and a recognition of “the importance of the materials of writing to writing itself, an engagement with its medium” is complicated by a conceptual slippage. Is the point the materials or the medium? The distinction is not trivial, implying the difference between a focus on the tools of making and the way these tools are reflected in the object. Glazier’s use of “materiality” derives from Jerome McGann’s work on textual “conditions,” situating the poem “within specific conditions of textuality” (20). Glazier further elaborates McGann’s point in terms of the “licensing” of textual experimentation by “the cultural scene” in which it moves. These conditions “not only inform, but facilitate the emergence of specific types of writing” (55).4 The slippage from material to medium is stabilized in the notion of informing “conditions.” Here literature is roughly an example of historically contingent conditions of text production, a mimetic reflex to the cultural scene. In terms of digital media, literary writing remains of interest as a reflexive example of digital media. Poetry works like the doubleness of code (as something to be read and something to be performed). In the background is a rhetorical schema binding the immateriality of digital information and the materiality of particular instantiations. That is, we read digital media, and we do so because they are like innovative literature. The consistency of this reassuring schema rests on the critical gamble of a mimetic likeness between literature and digital media. The slippage between medium and material is indicative of this mimetic relation.

     

    The crucial point–the crux of Glazier’s argument–is the nature of the exemplification involved. Is the poem simply a repetition of the conditions that license it? Does an emphasis on materiality dissolve the poem into its medium? Or can we speak of engagement with the medium as a more complex negotiation? Similarly, does an emphasis on materiality, both in innovative writing and in digital media, materialize poetic innovation? Can innovation be grasped in this way? Is the status of the material in fact a concealed concern with the reception of novelty, that is, with the reading of innovation?5 Curiously, though he invokes McGann and other theorists of textual materiality, close attention to Glazier’s argument reveals a difference between Glazier’s theory of the material and the materialities that he examines. In fact, Glazier’s use of materiality rescues an explicitly poetic materiality, closer to Robert Duncan’s “first permission” (7) than to McGann’s “licensing.” Glazier balances an awareness of the ideological frameworks in which poetry occurs with the material conditions created through acts of poeisis.

     

    The best instance of this conditional making is the work of Jim Rosenberg, invoked by Glazier as “one of the most valuable investigations currently underway” in digital poetry (137). There is as yet no adequate critical discussion of Rosenberg’s poetry–which is as much rooted in mathematics, music, and philosophy as in poetic tradition–but Glazier provides an excellent opening, and with good reason: Rosenberg offers a poetic practice rooted in poeisis or innovation prior to any particular material instantiation. At first this seems paradoxical, given Rosenberg’s tight identification with digital poetry (and his place in Glazier’s alternative canon). In fact, Rosenberg challenges the digital orthodoxy by defining hypertext in the abstract, as a way of representing a network that could represented by “other means than using a computer–on paper, for instance.” At the same time, Rosenberg takes hypertext as a way of thinking not yet possible in any given technology. That is, hypertext is in no way a function of technology but rather a particular approach to writing practice. This resulting provisionality of the poem situates poetic innovation in the reader and not the material text.

     

    Rosenberg’s diverse works share an interest in simultaneity. While we are familiar with simultaneous musical notes or simultaneous visual figures in painting, writing is largely understood as a linear, sequential medium. As Rosenberg is at pains to point out, even such a purportedly multilinear form as hypertext–at least in the dominant link-node model–is intrinsically rooted in the line. While structurally there might seem to be many possible choices for the reader, reading or navigation is a disjunctive process of choice and elimination. The link-node follows a logic of “or.” There are other possibilities. Just as category theory offers divergent forms of mathematical inclusion and exclusion, Rosenberg proposes that the disjunctive link-node is only one of a multiplicity of hypertexts. His work seeks a logic of “and,” rooted in conjunction or gathering.

     

    Rosenberg’s poetic simultaneities are piles of words, stacked clusters of word “skeins,” following his insight in “The Interactive Diagram Sentence” that such juxtaposition is “the most basic structural act.” Mousing over “opens” the simultaneity to reveal an individual skein, a scatter of words and phrases, with “vertical” relations indicated by changes in font. The simultaneity is a poem that emits readable texts. Each text is the outcome of the user’s mouse interactions with Rosenberg’s programmed relations between skeins. Appearances are conditioned by the user’s attention via the structure perception-mouseover-poem. The poem is an opening.

     

    While it is possible to speak of particular textual conditions enabling Rosenberg’s work–the tradition of Mac Low’s simultaneities, the availability of easily programmable Hypercard stacks, and so on–none of these adequately accounts for what happens as individual skeins appear and disappear. The simultaneity remains in a kind of quasi-space and -time prior to the text. Mousing over is the real time of the poem. The resulting words are not inscriptions but transcriptions of the user’s movement and attention. Following Rosenberg’s definition in “The Interactive Diagram Sentence”: the simultaneity is a “fundamental micromaneuver at the heart of all abstraction,” producing a minimal possible world, a phenomenology of momentary objects.

     

    Rosenberg argues that we should think of hypertext as “a medium in which one thinks ‘natively.’” The paradoxical task is to think of the technology that would be adequate to “an individual thought” that “is entirely hypertext.” Rosenberg writes a poem for technology not yet available. In this disjunction of grand conceptual apparatus with its instantiation in digital media, Rosenberg’s work is innovative by means of its own failure. These poems mark the structural relation between a poem and itself as an act of innovation. The poem is innovation’s “mode of disappearance,” as Jean Baudrillard puts it (213).6

     

    The recent convergence of code and writing offers an extended test ground for the notion of provisional materiality developed in Glazier’s and Rosenberg’s work. Glazier’s argument for the structural similarity of poem and code (164) and the assimilation of the poet to programmer (176) comes in the context of emergent writing practices such as Alan Sondheim’s “codework” and MEZ’s “net.wurk.”7 In much of this work, code is invoked as a mode of citation, distortion, and linguistic play; in some cases, the work itself is the outcome of executable code. This “uneasy combination of contents and structures” (Sondheim) would seem to fulfill Glazier’s claims that innovative poetry will inform how we might explore digital media. What makes these works is their thematization of the coupling between code as an artificial language instructing and interacting with a microprocessor, and code as something to be read.

     

    Literary innovation continues to provide the model for what is new about new media. The poem does not exemplify the work of digital media, but we understand digital media through literary writing. Our experience of innovative writing provides the particular, reflexive experience we seek in digital media. In the end, code is a kind of extra or “ternary” sign added to text. To call this sign “materiality” is to acknowledge the conditional, procedural, and rhetorical quality of the material.8 “Code” metaphorizes poetic invention, and it is this metaphor that makes codework so fascinating today. Innovative writing practice makes digital media new.

     

    The value of Digital Poetics is its identification of the systematic relation between innovative poetry and digital media. Digital poetry reflects on processes of organization and development in the systems of communication and media we live in today. Glazier starts his book with the observation that “we have not arrived at a place but at an awareness of the conditions of texts” (1), and in this respect his book seems to mime its object, offering less of a conclusion than a sustained reflection on its own conditions of possiblity. The prescriptive veneer of Glazier’s argument is a reaction to a rigorous attention to literary innovation. The text integrates Glazier’s own poetry with critical reflection and reverie, and further adopts and adapts terminology from UNIX and other computer environments, dissolving the distinction between acts of programming and poetry writing. If this book frustrates, it is in part because it is written through William Carlos Williams’s attitude toward the poem and the program–toward the program-poem–as “active,” where the poem is itself “an instrument of thought” (6). The paradoxical self-reflexivity involved is obvious: the poet “thinks through the poem” (6) to discover the very poem being thought through. Glazier convincingly shows that digital media is a site of just such poetical activity today.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Rasch on Luhmann as “modernity’s most meticulous theorist” (10).

     

    2. Lyotard’s critique of Habermas, directed at the desire for an “organic whole,” hardly applies to Luhmann. Luhmann’s modernity offers not so much a lack of unity but a unity composed of functions and relations that cannot be surveyed from outside. See Rasch 29-52.

     

    3. See, for example, Weishaus’ review in Rain Taxi and the debates in the archive of the venerable POETICS listserv. Compare Hartley’s review, with its emphasis on poeisis paralleling my own.

     

    4. Compare the influential “media materialism” of Friedrich Kittler where the conditions of information processing are defined as material for a given cultural moment.

     

    5. N. Katherine Hayles’s influential How We Became Posthuman is a parallel example of this presupposition that literary texts provide insight into the material structures of digital media.

     

    6. This concluding chapter of Baudrillard’s Symbolic Exchange and Death is a valuable contribution to the analysis of poetry, often overlooked for his better-known essays on simulation.

     

    7. See Sondheim and MEZ.

     

    8. A useful comparison is Michel Foucault’s analysis of the “enunciative function” that requires a “repeatable materiality” (102) in order to organize those institutions that facilitate possibilities of reinscription and transcription (103).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Adorno, Theodor W. Aesthetic Theory. Trans. Robert Hullot-Kentor. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1997.
    • Barr, Brandon. “Intersection and Struggle: Poetry in a New Landscape.” Electronic Book Review. E-Poetry, 3-24-02. <http://www.electronicbookreview.com/v3/servlet/ebr?command=view_essay&essay_id=barele>. Accessed September 10, 2002.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. Symbolic Exchange and Death. Trans. Iain Hamilton Grant. London: Sage Publications, 1993.
    • Duncan, Robert. The Opening of the Field. New York: New Directions, 1960.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Archeology of Knowledge. Trans. A. M. Sheridan Smith. New York: Pantheon Books, 1972.
    • Hartley, George. “Innovative Programmers of the World Unite!” nmediac: The Journal of New Media and Culture. Winter 2002. <http://www.ibiblio.org/nmediac/winter2002/lossrev1.html>. Accessed September 10, 2002.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago, IL: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Kittler, Friedrich. Discourse Networks 1800/1900. Trans. Michael Metteer, with Chris Cullens. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1990.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. Art as a Social System. Trans. Eva M. Knott. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • MEZ [Mary-Anne Breeze]. “Net & Codeworkers Inc[ubation].” trAce Online Writing Centre. <http://trace.ntu.ac.uk/incubation/gallery.cfm>. Accessed July 10, 2002
    • POETICS listserv archive. SUNY Buffalo. <http://listserv.acsu.buffalo.edu/archives/poetics.html>.
    • Pound, Ezra. “Canto LIII.” Selected Poems. New York: New Directions, 1957. 262-74.
    • Rasch, William. Niklas Luhmann’s Modernity: The Paradoxes of Differentiation. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Roberts, David. “Self-Reference in Literature.” In The Problems of Form. Ed. Dirk Baecker. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • Rosenberg, Jim. “The Interactive Diagram Sentence: Hypertext as a Medium of Thought.” Originally printed in Visible Language. 30:2. <http://www.well.com/user/jer/VL.html>. Accessed July 10, 2002.
    • Shannon, Claude E. and Warren Weaver. The Mathematical Theory of Communication. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1963.
    • Sondheim, Alan. “Introduction: Codework.” ABR 22.6 (Sept/Oct 2001): 1.
    • Wiener, Norbert. Cybernetics: Or, Control and Communication in the Animal and the Machine. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1991.
    • Weishaus, Joel. “Review of Digital Poetics.” Rain Taxi Online Edition. Summer 2002. <http://www.raintaxi.com/online/2002summer/glazier.shtml>. Accessed July 10, 2002.

     

  • Modernism Old or New?

    Piotr Gwiazda

    Department of English
    University of Maryland, Baltimore County
    gwiazda@umbc.edu

     

    Review of: Marjorie Perloff, 21st-Century Modernism: The “New” Poetics. Malden: Blackwell, 2002.

     

    The title of Marjorie Perloff’s new book seems, at first, a little confusing. Does she mean 21st-century postmodernism? No. Then perhaps she means the idea of modernism in the twenty-first century–our continuing obsession with the series of artistic and literary revolutions that took place almost a hundred years ago mainly in Europe? But why is the book publicized as a manifesto (specifically, as a part of the Blackwell Manifestos series)? Manifestos usually look toward the future, not the past, so what does modernism have to do with today’s (or tomorrow’s) poetic theory and practice? Apparently a lot, judging by Perloff’s subtitle: The “New” Poetics. The book’s final chapter is entitled “Modernism” at the Millennium–the quotation marks again hinting at something both forward- and backward-looking in Perloff’s provocative reappraisal of modernism and its significance for contemporary writing.

     

    Some of these questions are answered for us in the book’s preface. Here Perloff suggests that we jettison “the tired dichotomy that has governed our discussion of twentieth-century poetics for much too long: that between modernism and postmodernism” (1-2). What we normally think of as postmodern poetry–the Projectivists, Beats, San Francisco poets, confessional poets, New York School, and “deep image” school–now appears less revolutionary than it did in the late fifties and early sixties; these poetic schools and movements were “indeed a breath of fresh air” (2), but only so far as they redefined the terms of opposition to the high modernism of Yeats, Frost, Stevens, Moore, later Eliot, and the New Critical orthodoxy that dominated the American poetry scene in the years immediately after World War II. In Perloff’s view, it is the avant-garde modernism of the early twentieth-century that, following a “curious poetic lag” (10), now emerges as a vital precursor to what she considers the most ambitious and adventurous writing of today. “Indeed,” Perloff observes,

     

    what strikes us when we reread the poetries of the early twentieth century is that the real fate of first-stage modernism was one of deferral, its radical and utopian aspirations being cut off by the catastrophe, first of the Great War, and then of the series of crises produced by the two great totalitarianisms that dominated the first half of the century and culminated in World War II and the subsequent Cold War. (3)

     

    Perloff envisages her book as a sort of paradigm shift, a reconsideration of the standard narrative of modernism with four chapters devoted to the poetic praxis of the early T.S. Eliot, Gertrude Stein, Marcel Duchamp, and Velimir Khlebnikov, and the final chapter discussing the importance of these avant-garde modernists to the work of Susan Howe, Charles Bernstein, Lyn Hejinian, and Steve McCaffery. These, and presumably other poets and artists associated with the Language writing movement (broadly conceived), take up the challenge of experimental modernism; it is through their work, rather than the work of, say, Charles Olson or Allen Ginsberg, that the spirit of modernism lives again. As Perloff says in the concluding sentence of the book, “ours may well be the moment when the lessons of early modernism are finally being learned” (200).

     

    Perloff begins her revision of twentieth-century poetics with a fresh look at the early work of T.S. Eliot. In a gesture of critical bravado, she links Eliot’s early poetry (not The Waste Land, it is worth noting, but “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock” and other poems from Prufrock and Other Observations) to the main emphasis of Language writing aesthetic: language as the object, rather than the tool, of representation. Perloff suggests a parallel between Eliot’s idea of “impersonality” (with its implied separation of writing and experience) and Charles Bernstein’s call for indirection, artifice, and impermeability featured in his own manifesto “Artifice of Absorption” (published in A Poetics). Both Eliot in the first decades of the twentieth century and Bernstein in the last ones reject the notion of sincerity and explore the idea of language as the site of meaning-making. Eliot’s theory of a poet as a “medium” that fuses together particular impressions and experiences can be said to anticipate, in some ways, the contemporary notion of poetry as a construction, rather than a reconstruction, of experience.

     

    In her discussion of Eliot’s early poetry, Perloff is especially interested in demonstrating how the poet’s Flaubertian quest for le mot juste, or simply his technique, enhances the idea of materiality of language. In her close reading of “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock,” she notes Eliot’s penchant for producing “aural excitement” (21); thus, at the start of the poem, the monosyllabic line “Let us go then, you and I” creates, she says, a note of torpor; in the line “half-deserted streets,” she continues, “the s’s and t’s coalesce in what seems to be a whispered proposition coming from a doorway: ssstt!” (20). The point Perloff is trying to make is this: for the early Eliot, sound pretty much equaled subject matter. Accordingly, his work from the period reveals an ongoing preoccupation with the constructedness of poetic language (Prufrock himself being a composite of various sensibilities). This preoccupation can be seen not only in his effective use of sound effects, but also in the abrupt tense and mood shifts, tenuously interconnected syntactical units, juxtapositions of formal and informal idiom, and borrowings from foreign languages. These strategies, Perloff continues, “relate ‘Prufrock’ to Constructivist notions of ‘laying bare the device,’ of using material form–in this case, language–as an active compositional agent, impelling the reader to participate in the process of construction” (26).

     

    In her attempt to paint two pictures of T.S. Eliot–one before World War I and one afterward–Perloff doesn’t rely on textual demonstration only. Looking at the poet’s correspondence from the prewar period, she describes him as a youthful, carefree student living in Paris, at one point sharing quarters with his close friend Jean Verdenal, and writing some of the most imaginative and experimental verse of the day. The outbreak of the war put a stop to Eliot’s idyllic lifestyle; the correspondence from the war years reveals him as a perpetually worried man living in a “curious form of exile” in London (33), and longing to return to Paris in order to be able to write poetry again. It was in London that the news of Jean Verdenal’s death at the Dardanelles reached him in 1915 (his friend would become the dedicatee of Prufrock and Other Observations, published two years later). In the period following the war, Eliot seemed a changed person. He no longer yearned to return to Paris, and his poetry no longer featured the same propensity for Laforguean playfulness, inventive use of syntax, and explorations of the semantic possibilities of sound. At this point, perhaps in anticipation of potential criticism of her characterization, Perloff says: “I do not want to suggest anything as vulgar or simplistic as that Eliot’s own avant-garde writing died in Gallipoli with Jean Verdenal [. . . .] I am merely suggesting that between Eliot’s radical poetry of the avant guerre and its postwar reincarnation, a decisive change had taken place” (39). A change did indeed take place in Eliot’s poetry, and the chapter by and large succeeds in revealing how “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock” and, by implication, the other poems from the period pave the way for, rather than merely precede, the radical parataxis, multivocality, and fragmentariness of The Waste Land.

     

    In the chapters that follow, Perloff offers an extended reading of Stein, Duchamp, and Khlebnikov (all of whom she has discussed in her previous books) as major precursors to late twentieth- and early twenty-first century avant-garde writing. Looking mainly at Tender Buttons, she notes Stein’s preoccupation with the verbal, visual, and aural properties of language, especially her pre-Cubist strategy of rearranging the syntactic parts of a sentence (nouns, pronouns, conjunctions, etc.) so that each equally contributes to the whole. Stein’s endless syntactic permutations emerge as the result of her attraction to Cezanne’s all-inclusive treatment of the canvas surface, but also to Flaubert’s economy of form and subordination of subject matter to style. Perloff continues with a well-informed discussion of some of Duchamp’s readymades (including With Hidden Noise and Fresh Widow), as well as some of his boîtes en valise and verbal objects she calls “texticles,” all of which underscore his conceptual perspective: the constant examination of the medium, the incessant interrogation of the function of art itself. Duchamp’s contribution to twenty-first century poetics lies also in his ability to transform our understanding of visual and verbal language–and of their purported incompatibility. The focus of Perloff’s next chapter is the Russian avant-garde poet Velimir Khlebnikov, specifically his exploration of the graphic and phonic aspects of language. Khlebnikov’s poems reveal his lifelong fascination with word origins and, in a larger sense, his utopian pursuit of what he called the “magic touchstone of all Slavic words”–the first step toward formulating a universal, etymology-based language of beyond-reason or zaum (in Russian “za” means beyond, “um” means reason or mind). Khlebnikov’s fascination with sound-effects, puns, neologisms, and etymologies accounts for his inventive merging of sonic, visual, and semantic characteristics of language. By violating established linguistic norms, Khlebnikov pushes the limits of verbal possibility in a programmatic refusal to treat words merely as names.

     

    A similar position with regard to the transparency of language, and to the long-discredited assumption that language conveys meaning rather than constructs it, informs the poetics of twenty-first century Language writing. In her final chapter, Perloff applies the experimental methods of the four early modernists to four contemporary Language writers, seeing evidence of the early Eliot’s verbal density in Susan Howe’s Thorow, of Lyn Hejinian’s debt to Khlebnikov and Stein in Happily, and of Charles Bernstein’s and Steve McCaffery’s active engagement with Duchamp’s legacy in the former’s dysraphism and the latter’s inventive mixing of the verbal and the visual. These sections are rather brief, spanning only a few pages each, as though in a determination not to steal the spotlight from the real focus of the book–the experimental phase of modernism initiated in the early twentieth century and only now entering into a kind of “special relationship” with contemporary writing (164). Hence Perloff’s use of quotation marks in her subtitle: the “new” poetics is really the return of an older poetics, a millennial extension of the modernism of Eliot, Stein, Duchamp, and Khlebnikov.

     

    Perloff has without question played a key role in shaping our attitudes toward the complex and often contradictory nature of modernism; more than any other critic she has helped to bring avant-garde poetics to the center of today’s academic discourse. In her previous books, starting with The Poetics of Indeterminacy in 1981, Perloff formulated a distinction between two strands of modernism: the post-Symbolist mode initiated by Baudelaire and sustained in the last century by Stevens, the later Eliot, Lowell, Bishop, etc., and the anti-Symbolist mode, originating with Rimbaud and continuing with Pound, Stein, Williams, and their post-World War II descendants (vii). The distinction quickly became a kind of critical dogma, so much so that her astute question “Pound/Stevens: whose era?” (the title of her essay in The Dance of the Intellect) still resonates as a compelling inquiry and elicits new commentaries. A recent issue of The Wallace Stevens Journal, for example, is entirely devoted to a reappraisal of Perloff’s essay, with new perspectives by Perloff herself, Charles Altieri, Alan Filreis, Rachel Blau DuPlessis, and Leon Surette, among others. It is interesting to see how Perloff gives another turn of the screw, so to speak, to her ongoing revision of twentieth-century poetics by separating what she considers the genuine avant-garde impulse of the early modernism, now vigorously resuscitated by Language writers, from the legacy of the postmodern “breakthrough,” which merely questioned the assumptions of high modernism and New Criticism. The final result is an enlightening and extremely thought-provoking book. Paying equal attention to texts and their contexts, her study is historically well-informed and intellectually stimulating. On occasion Perloff makes comments that appear overly dismissive and polarizing, as when she writes about “the unfulfilled promise of the revolutionary poetic impulse in so much of what passes for poetry today–a poetry singularly unambitious in its attitude to the materiality of the text” (5-6). Such statements may be inevitable, considering the oppositional nature of the texts she examines as a critic (and this is, after all, Perloff’s “manifesto”), but eventually they do more harm than good to her book. Here is why.

     

    The poetry that doesn’t seek to foreground the materiality of the signifier is not automatically less “ambitious” or of a lesser order than poetry that does. Much of today’s mainstream poetry can be dull and unexciting, but much of it also can be inventive and inspiring; Perloff’s way of describing the so-called establishment poetry as “tepid and unambitious” is no more useful or critically penetrating than a mainstream book-reviewer calling experimental poetry meaningless and badly written; both kinds of evaluation mean nothing and lead nowhere. Perloff overstates her case when she says that the dominant “epiphanic” mode of the last three decades, which is largely a continuation of the Romantic lyric tradition, “has evidently failed to kindle any real excitement on the part of the public” (4). Evidently? All evidence points to the contrary. Rita Dove, Robert Pinsky, Stanley Kunitz–the Poet Laureates she herself cites in her argument– have produced considerable followings among both specialized and general audiences, and they even sell books. Granted, poetry is still largely marginalized in the United States, but doesn’t the rising number of literary publications, poetry festivals and slams, even poetry workshops (no matter what Perloff thinks about them), testify to the existence of some real excitement among the public? And what about Nobel Prize laureates Czeslaw Milosz, Joseph Brodsky, Octavio Paz, Derek Walcott, Seamus Heaney, and Wislawa Szymborska? Though one wouldn’t call them experimental poets, they certainly manage to attract large numbers of readers in the United States, as well as around the world, something that can’t be said of any of the contemporary poets Perloff discusses in her book. If public enthusiasm is to be the criterion of a movement’s poetic success, as Perloff seems at times to suggest, then it is hard to share her faith in modernist experimentalism as a continuing force in the new century. Referring to the poetic innovations of Eliot and Pound, Randall Jarrell once said that a great revolution is hardest of all on the great revolutionists. This is not always true, for revolutionists may also grow into reactionaries, as Eliot did. But Perloff’s catastrophic reading of the modernist avant-garde as a vibrant movement tragically stopped by the historical realities of the twentieth century makes one wonder, at times, whether its “unfulfilled promise” can ever be realized.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • MacLeod, Glen, ed. Wallace Stevens and Ezra Pound. A special issue of The Wallace Stevens Journal 26.2 (Fall 2002): 131-266.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. The Poetics of Indeterminacy: Rimbaud to Cage. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1981.

     

  • “The World Will Be Tlön”: Mapping the Fantastic onto the Virtual

    Darren Tofts

    Department of Media and Communications
    Swinburne University of Technology
    dtofts@groupwise.swin.edu.au

     

    The world may be fantastic. The world willbe Tlön.

     

    The cartographers of antiquity have left a profound and fearsome legacy. Only now can we speak of its dread morphology. Spurning the severe abstractions of scale, they achieved exact correspondence: the map occupies the territory, an exact copy in every detail. Here, after centuries of vanity, is exactitude in science, pitiless, coincident, and seamless. I have stood on the threshold of the cave, having escaped the bondage of shadows. I have climbed to the top of the mountain and sought out the tattered ruins of that map. I have discoursed with the scattered dynasty of solitary men who have changed the face of the world. I have come to offer my report on knowledge. I have come to tell you that the world will be Tlön.

     

    The figure of the map covering the territory has become an indexical figure in discussions of postmodernism. It has come to stand for a problematic diminution of the real in the wake of a proliferating image culture, obsessed with refining the technologies of reproduction, making the copy even better than the real thing. As Hillel Schwartz, author of the remarkable Culture of the Copy, notes, with untimely emphasis, “the copy will transcend the original” (212).

     

    Preoccupied with the relationship between reality and its copies, postmodernism deflects the idea of an absolute reality in favor of high-fidelity facsimiles. The passage from postmodernism to virtuality involves a shift from copying to simulating the world, from the reproductive practices of photography and film, to post-reproductive or simulation technologies such as telepresence, advanced digital imaging, virtual reality and other immersive environments. This journey from reproduction to simulation involves the disappearance of difference, the breakdown of binary metaphysics and all that we understand by the term representation. The movement from analogue to digital media is a significant event in the diminution of reality’s a priori status. It comes on the heels of a long artistic tradition of exploration into the relationship between reality and its representability.

     

    Fantastic literature is one such mode that has actively explored this nexus of reality and representation, traditionally doing so through the distorting glass of allegory–whether it be in the writings of J.R.R. Tolkien, with his mythical Middle Earth, the dark and insular labyrinth of Mervyn Peake’s Gormenghast trilogy, or the miraculous world of Gabriel Garcia Marquez’s Macondo. In such writing, the creation of imaginary “other” worlds is astonishing, seductive in its realism, in the persuasive weight of presence it delivers. For the time of reading, Mordor’s fire and cobwebs are oppressively real, as is the stench and menace of Swelter’s kitchen, or the jungle’s embrace of a Spanish galleon, festooned with orchids. While fantasy is seen as a discrete form of writing, like science fiction or the gothic novel, it is still an art of fiction, a conjuror’s verisimilitude, all smoke and mirrors, sleights of hand, and verbal prestidigitation.

     

    While the realities of such writing are convincing, they fall short of actually supplanting our own sense of the real. That is, they don’t disturb our sense of what is real and what is not. Like all fiction, they are temporary zones, carnivalesque moments in which anything is possible. Without thinking too much about it we know that they are realistic. But we also know they are not real. This intuitive understanding is the safety valve of catharsis, the limit point of identification within the boundaries of a particular cultural technology, whether it is literature or cinema. This certitude, that we are immersed in realistic unrealities, is the metaphysic that allows us to tune into fantasy, live there for a time, and then re-inhabit the real without believing that the fantasy continues beyond the book or the film. It is fantasy’s exit strategy. Without this strategy, this metaphysical way out, we run the risk of psychosis, certainly as Sigmund Freud had imagined it, as a sustained and problematic over-identification with a fictional character or world. Please allow me to introduce myself: I am Titus Groan, and my quest in life lies somewhere beyond the agonizing rituals of Gormenghast. I must flee its stone lanes and unforgiving walls. Can anyone here help me?

     

    Cultural theorists, such as Umberto Eco and Jean Luis Baudrillard, have given other names to such extreme identifications with fictions, names that defined the cultural climate of the last decades of the twentieth century–terms such as simulacrum, hyperreality, the desert of the real, faith in fakes, the culture of the copy. Not wanting to be seen to lag behind the po-mo cognoscenti of Europe, Hollywood has manufactured a genre of cyber-technology films that equally responds to this perception of the closure of fantasy’s exit strategy, in which there is no longer a way out, a return to the real. Films such as The Truman Show, The Matrix, and Dark City, to name but a few, postulate worlds of hard-wired false consciousness, in which what is taken for reality is, respectively, the most insidious reality TV, the ultimate simulation, the perfect virtual reality. To be outside the deception is not to be mad, as Michel Foucault would perhaps have it, but rather to be all-powerful, in control of reality and its representations, the architect of representation as reality–the auteur, in other words, as demiurge.

     

    This brings us to the qualitative and disquieting difference between the fantastic and the virtual. In the realm of the fantastic, we don’t need anyone to welcome us to the real world, since we reliably know what it is and what it is not. When the exit strategy of fantasy is closed, or denied, we have no way of knowing that we don’t even know there is a difference anymore between fantasy and reality. Unless we are liberated from the simulacrum, like Neo in The Matrix, or find the out-door to a reality we never knew existed, like Truman, it’s business as usual in the real world, where people go to work, go to the football on the weekends and catch the occasional paper at cultural events, such as the Biennale of Sydney. Welcome to the desert of the real.

     

    In the desert of the real you can still find, if you are lucky, ruptures in the seam of things, little tears in the otherwise flawless surface of the map that covers the territory. One of these is in fact a parable about maps and territories, simulation and fabricated reality–a parable about the creation of the world. This artifact is a short fictional text written by the Argentinean writer Jorge Luis Borges. First published in 1940, “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” occupies an important place in the history of twentieth-century speculation on the relationship between fantasy and reality. It is at once a meditation on and an example of this relationship. Indeed, for Borges, terms such as fantasy and reality are in no way absolutes, nor are they dependent figures within a binary opposition. They are rather manifestations of possible worlds, projections of the world as it may be.

     

    We have much to learn from “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius.” Although he died in 1986, Borges is still very much our contemporary. His presence, more than we can perhaps ever realize, or imagine, is everywhere felt but nowhere seen at the start of the third millennium, this year, this day, this afternoon. As we invest more time, money, and metaphysical capital in the cultural technologies of virtuality, we are perhaps closing off our own exit strategies, dissolving the liminal zones of genre and metaphysics that partition the fantastic and the real. We can learn something of how we are doing this, as well as the consequences of doing it, from “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius.” It is worthwhile, therefore, briefly to review the fiction in this context, to refresh the memory of those who are familiar with it, to submit it to the memory of those who are not. For those of you from the border, who have difficulty with me describing Tlön as if it is a fiction–and not an assured commentary on your world–I humbly beg your indulgence.

     

    As with many of Borges’s stories, “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” begins with a found object. It is a single volume, number 46 to be precise, of a pirated edition of the Anglo-American Cyclopaedia, published in New York in 1917. The volume is unremarkable in every way, apart from four extra pages that are contained in this singular volume only and not in any other copy of this particular edition. The superfluous pages contain a detailed account of a previously unknown and uncharted region of Asia Minor called Uqbar. The narrator and his companion, Adolpho Bioy Cesares, search in vain for further references to Uqbar, but nothing in the way of corroborating evidence emerges from their labors, even from hours spent at the National Library of Argentina. The entry on Uqbar contains detailed information on the history, customs, geography, and literature of this mysterious region. One piece of information will suffice to impart a flavor of the piece:

     

    The section on Language and Literature was brief. Only one trait is worthy of recollection: it noted that the literature of Uqbar was one of fantasy and that its epics and legends never referred to reality, but to the two imaginary regions of Mlejnas and Tlön. (29)

     

    After further research, “events,” the narrator observes, “became more intense” (40). It is discovered that the documentation of Uqbar was in fact the aborted precursor of a more ambitious project, undertaken by what is subsequently revealed as a secret society, originating in the seventeenth century–a kind of enlightenment Sokal hoax on a trans-historical scale. More ambitious and sublime in its conception and scope, this society, which included George Berkeley as one of its number, set out to invent the fictitious history of an entire planet, called Tlön. The imprimatur of this society, Orbis Tertius, is found in a similarly unlikely volume–of which there exists, again, only one copy–entitled A First Encylopaedia of Tlön. In this one volume we encounter the eclectic miscellany of detail, the reassuring kind of data and information that adheres reality to representation, the documentary veracity that endows the encyclopedia with the solidity of truth, authenticity, and knowledge:

     

    Now I held in my hands a vast methodical fragment of an unknown planet’s entire history, with its architecture and its playing cards, with the dread of its mythologies and the murmur of its languages, with its emperors and its seas, with its minerals and its birds and its fish, with its algebra and its fire, with its theological and metaphysical controversy. And all of it articulated, coherent, with no visible doctrinal intent or tone of parody. (31)

     

    As James Woodall, Borges’s most recent biographer, has noted, “The discovery of another. . . planet in science fiction is generally a cue for extravagant fantasy; for Borges in this story it was a way of reviewing the world, of offering a critique of reality” (115). In this respect history is everything. Just as Mervyn Peake had used his fiction to explore his time spent at Belsen as a war-time illustrator, so Borges attempted to come to terms with the chaotic horrors of war and the spurious symmetries of the day–dialectical materialism, anti-Semitism, Nazism–in the creation of a harmonious world. But in coming to terms with it he did not attempt to understand it, but rather to replace it altogether. For a world at war, the desire to submit to Tlön, to yield to the “minute and vast evidence of an orderly planet,” was overwhelming (42). But such is the stuff of allegory, the tidy protocols of hermeneutic neatness. What better way to explain the embrace of a fictitious reality that is superior in every way to the wreckage of contemporary history?

     

    But this is not all there is to the story. Borges in fact turns the allegorical mode of fantasy in on itself, closing off its exit strategy and interpolating us, the readers outside-text, along the way. There are a number of things in this fiction that can’t be simply written off as allegorical parallel (that is, the interpretation of Tlön as metaphor, as the projection of an ideal world). The world of Tlön, we quickly realize, is palpable and capable of affecting dramatic outcomes in the real world. The First Encylopaedia of Tlön first makes its appearance in 1937, received, as certified mail, by a mysterious person called Herbert Ashe. Little is known about Ashe, other than the inscrutable, yet forthright detail that in his lifetime “he suffered from un-reality” (30). What is beyond doubt is that Ashe was one of the collaborators of Orbis Tertius, and three days after he received the book of Tlön, the book he helped bring into this world, he died of a ruptured aneurysm. We know, too, that as part of their process of rhetorical corroboration, the society of Orbis Tertius disseminates objects throughout the world that cohere with information to be found in the First Encylopedia of Tlön. Such objects, like the forty volumes of the First Encyclopedia of Tlön, are attenuations, material reinforcements, simulacra that solidify the fictitious detail of the books in memory. We could call these objects “proof artifacts,” like the scattered ephemera of a holiday never actually taken in Philip K. Dick’s 1962 story, “We Can Remember It For You Wholesale” (the text which became the basis of the film Total Recall), or the family photographs coveted by the replicant Leon in the film Blade Runner.

     

    But there is a difference, of a metaphysical kind, between a suggestive corroboration, a simulated mnemonic device, and something that can’t be accounted for in material terms, such as the small, oppressively heavy cone that is found on the body of a dead man in 1942. Representing the divinity in certain regions of Tlön, it is, according to the narrator, “made from a metal which is not of this world,” and is so heavy that a “man was scarcely able to raise it from the ground” (41). No one knew anything of the man in whose possession the cone was found, other than the fact that he “came from the border” (41). Here is an instance of the imaginary made flesh, the uncomfortable collision of worlds that we expect to forever remain discrete. It is a kind of perverse, Eucharistic event, the transubstantiation of the fictional into the material, the crossing over from one border to another, from one ontological realm into another–the “intrusion of this fantastic world into the world of reality” (41). Holding this enigmatic object in his hand, the narrator reflects on “the disagreeable impression of repugnance and fear” it instills in him (41). Here is the nausea of the simulacrum, the supplanting of reality by fantasy. Rachael Rosen encounters this dread in Blade Runner when Deckard exposes her childhood memories as belonging to someone else. The contemporary technological shift from one media regime to another, from reproductive to simulation or virtual technologies, entails a similar ontological blurring of worlds that may not be so easily resolved through allegory.

     

    How do we comprehend, for example, the ability of Neo in The Matrix to “know Kung Fu” without ever having been taught it, without learning its philosophies and techniques as a discipline? The fact is there is little “ability” to his knowing Kung Fu, because he has not acquired it, but rather he has been programmed to know it (together with its cultural resonances and quotations, from Chuck Norris roundhouse kicks to Bruce Lee’s trademark cockiness). His experience of Kung Fu is a simulated rather than an actual thing, akin to the competence that airline or military pilots derive from spending hours in flight simulators. The ability to know how to do Kung Fu, repeatedly and without thinking about it, is an issue of second nature, of acquired habit that has become intuitive. The difference here is that second nature, in Neo’s case, is not preceded by first-hand experience.

     

    Such is the consequence of the shift from one media regime to another. In a fine essay that discusses virtuality in relation to Ray Bradbury’s 1952 short story “The Veldt,” Ken Wark argues that the futuristic, holographic nursery in that text is a technology of the “too real.” This virtual technology–which is a cross between a children’s playroom and the Holodeck from Star Trek–exceeds the real by manifesting simulacra, such as lions, into the real world. Such manifestations are akin to psychiatric irruptions of the unconscious in waking life. They are affects capable of real and, as it turns out, destructive consequences. This is no allegorical wunderkammer, since the logic of representation has ceased to exist within its machinations.

     

    If Bradbury’s holographic nursery has anticipated anything achieved so far in the name of new media, it is not so much the immersive, virtual-reality environment as the new, “total realism” of hybrid cinema (that is, the convergence of film and digital effects). Lev Manovich, in The Language of New Media, describes how the use of digital technologies in the pursuit of greater realism in cinema has created effects that are “too real” (199). That is, the ability to simulate three-dimensional visual realities–such as the dinosaurs in Jurassic Park–has created a perfect visuality that, paradoxically, has to be “diluted to match the imperfection of film’s graininess” (202). For Manovich, digital simulation has precipitated a new order of experience, a synthetic reality that exceeds the limitations of film’s attempts to represent real-world experience.

     

    As evidence of the persuasiveness of synthetic reality, I submit the following image:

     

    Figure 1

     

    This image, created by artist Troy Innocent, represents the kind of fusion of real people with computer-simulated objects that Manovich describes in relation to the formation of synthetic realities. Created at my request, this image beautifully illustrates the point that synthetic realities can blur the distinction between formerly discrete worlds. Bill Mitchell, author of The Reconfigured Eye. Visual Truth in the Post-Photographic Era, would probably refer to this image as a “fake photograph,” an example of the new aesthetic possibilities of digital imaging. I prefer to think of it as a snapshot from Tlön, the infiltration of one world by another. Mitchell is sensitive to the metaphysical implications of digital imaging, noting that “as we enter the post-photographic era, we must face once again the ineradicable fragility of our ontological distinctions between the imaginary and the real” (225).

     

    It is such forecasts of the consequences of our embrace of the virtual that confirm the continued importance of “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” in today’s world. As a “critique of reality,” it not only documents an account in the 1940s of the changing of the face of the world, but also anticipates the technological reinvention of the real. Such reinvention, in the name of virtual and simulation technologies, prompts the question: do we need a reality any more, when multiple realities can be created synthetically? As a synthetic reality, “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” draws us, the readers of Borges the writer, the people outside-text, into its perplexing ontological orbits. That is, our experience of the world is affected by our involvement in the story. Like the inhabitants of Tlön, we find ourselves engaging with metaphysics as if it were a “branch of fantastic literature” (34). Borges defiantly teases the readers’ desire to believe in the reality of the discovered world, secure, as they are, in their assured, known world outside-text. He tests, in other words, the extent to which readers are prepared to forestall their exit strategy, to explore the outer limits of credulity to do with this previously unknown world. After all, all the reference points in the story are verifiably factual, such as the Brazilian hotel, Las Delicias, in which Herbert Ashe is sent the mysterious First Encylopaedia of Tlön, or the narrator’s companion, Adolfo Bioy Cesares, the person who brings the troubling issue of Uqbar to his attention, in reality one of Borges’s closest friends and literary collaborators. Borges’s style is clearly documentary-like in approach: prudent, well researched, and sound, with very few literary flourishes or overt metafictional moments. Indeed, it is more accurate to call “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” an essay rather than a fiction, reading, as it does, with the impersonal, measured factuality of the encyclopedia entry. In the hands of an essayist documenting the conceit of Tlön, Borges’s methods of persuasion–or are they in fact forms of evidence?–are compelling. In reflecting on one of the theories of time subscribed to by the inhabitants of Tlön, for example, he notes that “it reasons that the present is indefinite, that the future has no reality other than as a present hope, that the past has no reality other than as a present memory” (34). Furthermore, he notes, in a footnote, that this question had detained the attention of the great Bertrand Russell, who supposed “that the planet has been created a few minutes ago, furnished with a humanity that ‘remembers’ an illusory past” (34). He identifies the reference as The Analysis of Mind, 1921, page 159. You can pursue the citation if you like, but take it from me, it is not bogus.

     

    This is one of the many troubling moments in which information from outside-text corroborates the collaborative, invented world of Borges’s fiction. That is, facets of this grand guignol can be chased down as referential points in our own world. We can confirm these references from scholarly sources, such as The Analysis of Mind, or volume 13 of the writings of Thomas De Quincey. As with the people within the diegetic world of the story, it is difficult to rationalize the feeling that our reality, or at least my reality, is not yielding to Tlön. In considering the parallels between “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” and The Matrix, I was startled when I re-read the story and came upon one of the doctrines of Tlön: that “while we sleep here, we are awake elsewhere and that in this way every man is two men” (35). The duality of actual self and digital representation in The Matrix is the anchor that smoothes out and reconciles the split between the worlds of meat and of virtuality–the conduit between different ontologies, different metaphysical states. So, in playing around with this parallel, looking for an angle, an opening gambit, you can imagine my concern, when reading of the progressive reformation of earthly learning in the name of Tlön, at discovering that “biology and mathematics also await their avatars” (43).

     

    Figure 2: A Surreal Visitor

     

    Events became more intense as I moved deeper into the vertigo of writing about Tlön. On reading the Melbourne The Age Saturday Extra on the 20th of April 2002, it was with a mixture of fascination and alarm that I came across an account of a little-known visit to Melbourne by Borges in the late Autumn of 1938. Written by Guy Rundle, under the title of “A Surreal Visitor,” the piece took me quite by surprise. My first inclination was to check the date: it wasn’t the 1st of April. To my knowledge Borges had never traveled to Australia, a view quickly confirmed in the pages of the biographies at my disposal. Yet the detail was all here: he arrived on May 16th at the invitation of John Willie, a member of Norman Lindsay’s bohemian circle and admirer of Borges’s work, gave a lecture at the Royal Society entitled “The Author’s Fictions,” and spent much of his time in the domed reading room of the State Library of Victoria. These were all likely, Borgesian places, places that I would expect the great man of letters to frequent if he was in Melbourne, right down to the oneiric epiphany of a set of locks in a Glenhuntly shop window. In all, Borges spent ten days in Melbourne before returning to Buenos Aires, the smell of eucalyptus no doubt still lingering in his mind (a sensation that would seem to have found its way into the remarkable opening line of his story “Death and the Compass,” published in 1944).

     

    On closer inspection, it became clear that Rundle was playing a very erudite joke on his readers, treating Borges by the rules of his own game, so to speak. Indeed, the first line read like a Borges pastiche, citing an author, a prodigious event and an ironic allusion, all within the strict economy of a single sentence: “Devotees of the writings of Jorge Luis Borges will not be surprised by the recent discovery that the great Argentinean writer once spent some time in Melbourne.” The rhythm and balance of the syntax recalls the opening sentence from “Death and the Compass”: “Of the many problems which exercised the reckless discernment of Lönnrot, none was so strange–so rigorously strange, shall we say–as the periodic series of bloody events which culminated at the villa of Triste-le-Roy, amid the ceaseless aroma of the eucalypti” (106). The suggestion that Borges’s admirers “will not be surprised” is the ironic allusion, a rhetorical maneuver gesturing to the fact that a devotee of Borges, well versed in the art of fabulation, would recognize that Borges is the perfect subject for such a fiction.

     

    Rundle’s piece cannily imitates distinctive features of Borges’s writing and, in particular, “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius”–a text famous for its challenge to readers to accept, or at least consider, the reality of a fictitious world. For all we know, Rundle may have written his story with “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” at his elbow, open at page twenty-eight. On that page you will find one of Borges’s own ironic, reflexive allusions, as the narrator and Bioy Cesares discuss the article on Uqbar in the Anglo-American Cyclopaedia. The key detail here is that they found the piece “very plausible” (28). Rundle’s piece is crowded with plausible detail that is very specific and combines known facts about Borges’s life–such as his involvement with Victoria Ocampo and the important literary magazine, Sur–with previously unknown information. It sounds plausible that someone in Norman Lindsay’s bohemian circle would have been aware of Sur and passionate enough to mentor the Argentinean writer’s visit to Australia. Most of all, Rundle exploits Borges’s delight–especially indulged in “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius”–in inviting the reader to trust in evidence that is confined to fugitive or lost documents, missing or unverifiable detail. The record of Borges’s visit, for instance, is “confined to a few notes made for a poem (never written) that Borges made in a notebook, which recently came to light at a house in Cordoba, and some letters written to fellow novelist Bioy Cesares” (5). The reference to Bioy Cesares is a delightful touch, an unquestionable source offsetting the potential unreliability of such fragmentary, incomplete records. Borges’s lecture, presented to the Royal Society is, not surprisingly, “also lost, if ever written down” (5). Nor should we be surprised to detect the occasional flash of audacity as Rundle warms to his work, noting that a vernacular reference to a “strange lecture by a Spanish chap” is attributed to Harold Stewart, who, along with James McAuley and writing under the pseudonym of Ern Malley, perpetrated one of the great literary hoaxes of the twentieth century.

     

    I have reflected that it is permissible to see in this story of a visit never taken a kind of palimpsest, through which the traces of Borges’s “previous” writing are translucently visible. It is especially noteworthy that Rundle exploits the plausible conveyance of tenuous information, or what Borges, in “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius,” refers to as a tension between “rigorous prose” and “fundamental vagueness” (28). This is noteworthy. Of the Borges stories Rundle refers to in the piece–and they are some of his most well known–no mention is made of “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius,” arguably his most famous work. This absence is also a tour de force of citation by omission, implicit in the gesture to a line from “The Garden of Forking Paths,” in which the word “chess” is the answer to the following question: “In a riddle whose answer is chess, what is the only prohibited word?” (53).

     

    One can imagine that such a persuasive piece of writing would be not only plausible, retrospectively writing Jorge Luis Borges into Melbourne’s literary memory, but revelatory to many readers. Once again a line from “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius” came to mind: “a fictitious past occupies in our memories the place of another, a past of which we know nothing with certainty–not even that it is false” (42-3). A trip to the Exhibition Gardens or the reading room at the State Library would never be the same again, knowing that the great Borges had left his trace there. But literary hoaxes don’t fool everyone. Nor are they to everyone’s taste.

     

    Figure 3: Disclaimer

     

    On the following weekend, I can’t say that I was surprised to read the following disclaimer:

     

    An article in Saturday Extra on April 20 called “A surreal visitor” about writer Jorge Luis Borges’s apparent visit to Melbourne was in fact a piece of fiction, mimicking Borges’s own style of placing people in imaginary situations. The editor of Saturday Extra regrets this was not acknowledged at the time of publication. (2)

     

    Now this is a real Borgesian test of credulity. I find the idea of Jason Steger, the literary editor of the Saturday Extra, forgetting to mention this fact far less plausible than the idea of Tlön itself. Jason Steger is clearly the Herbert Ashe of this conspiracy. This disclaimer, while predictable, was actually quite dissatisfying and ruined what, for me, was a marvellous piece of invention. I could see it now, many years down the track, my students wondering, with restrained awe, if they had sat where Borges had in the domed reading room of the State library. So out of some peculiar nostalgia for the lost memory of a visit that never was, I decided, in the spirit of Rundle’s piece, to look into the some of the “facts” he assembled, to re-trace and re-claim some of the steps of this sublime, phantom visitation. I didn’t expect to find any corroboration, but I wanted to at least participate in the fiction, to walk in the ubiquitous shadow of this rigorous Latin American genius. Now this is where this story gets really weird.

     

    On the 23rd of April I went to do some research at the State Library of Victoria. Had the domed reading room been open (it was then still under renovation), I would have sought out that imaginary vibe. Mindful of the lessons of “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius,” I suppose I wanted to imaginatively place Borges in the scene, to fill the gaps that I knew, full well, I would find. A strange inclination, I know, but then we are dealing with a writer who, more than any other, has encouraged us to question what we accept as real, as verifiable, as truth. I wanted to find the spaces of his absent presence. After all, Borges was a deconstructionist avant la lettre and he would have known only too well that if there are no traces, there is no presence.

     

    Figure 4: National Register of Shipping Arrivals

     

    My first reference, the National Register of Shipping Arrivals: Australia and New Zealand, was promising, but by no means conclusive. The volume was in fact an index of passenger lists between the years 1924 and 1964, held elsewhere, at the Melbourne Office of the National Archives of Australia to be precise, which is part of the Public Record Office of Victoria. While a deferral, it was at least a start. That reference would have to wait for another day. Cook’s Australasian Sailing List was my next port of call. When requesting the book, I received every indication that it was available, and as the stacks are not open to public access, it was highly likely that I would get a return.

     

    Figure 5: Cook’s Australasian Sailing List

     

    I was disappointed, then, to receive my request slip and no book. The slip indicated that the volume could not be found. The librarian on duty acknowledged that this was indeed unusual, but I was prepared to accept it as part of the hit-or-miss process of library research.

     

    I started to get concerned, though, when my next request also bounced on me. Consistent with Rundle’s imaginary itinerary, I wanted to consult the Author Index of the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria to find no evidence of Borges’s guest lecture there.

     

    Figure 6: Author Index of
    Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria

     

    Not only did I receive a note saying that the volume was not found, but on the request slip there was also a handwritten note indicating that the volume was “Not on shelf.” I left the library with nothing to show for my efforts. While, as I had expected, I did not find any positive evidence of Borges’s visit to Melbourne, I did not find, either, any negative evidence to prove that he did not visit.

     

    I returned to the library the following day. On the way there, I stopped off at the Royal Society. The person with whom I spoke, while decidedly brusque and unhelpful, did confirm that a guest speaker would indeed have been registered in their Proceedings.

     

    Figure 7: Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria

     

    This time at the library, the exact volume of the Proceedings, containing everything from 1938, was not found. A trip around the block to the Public Records Office was more promising. A database search of passenger ships yielded no records whatsoever of the Koumoundouros, nor did a search of passengers coming into Melbourne as “legal aliens” in 1938 include a Jorge Luis Borges, though, as you will see from this sample of the inventory, the name Borges was not an uncommon one for arrivals in Melbourne that year:

     

    Figure 8
    Click on image for larger view

     

    But what was starting to disconcert me, in an odd, metaphysical kind of way, was that this confirmed evidence sat cheek by jowl with inconclusive, irresolute results. Nothing, it seemed, could be proved false. The whole thing was actually starting to resemble “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius”–real life as an uncanny form of allusion or repetition. It was as if the very task of researching Borges’s imaginary visit to Melbourne had unleashed a kind of strange code or virus, a meme, a Borges meme that had the potential to change the way we perceive reality. But unlike the genetic or ideological connotations of this notion that we find in Richard Dawkins and Douglas Rushkoff, the Borges meme was of a metaphysical nature, short-circuiting all attempts to confirm its unreality, even in the face of other plausible evidence that declared that the whole affair was a fabulation (not the least of these being Jason Steger’s disclaimer printed in The Age). Indeed, for a fleeting instant, the idea did cross my mind that along with Steger, Rundle belonged to the same secret society of intellectuals, Orbis Tertius, who made the world Tlön. Their quest, it could be argued, was an attempt to animate what Rundle called, referring to Melbourne, an “unremarkable and overfamiliar city” (5). This could be achieved through projecting the city anew through the exotic eyes of a “mysterious visitor” (5). The tantalizing possibility that this imaginary event might be real, or the more interesting dynamic of its ambivalent veracity, is the occasion for a kind of belief, a virtual, simulated belief in the reality of the unreal. To paraphrase a line from Borges’s “The Library of Babel,” it suffices that his visit to Melbourne be possible for it to exist.

     

    To conclude, the idea of a Borges meme gets us to the disconcerting heart of this writer’s metaphysics. Unlike fantasy in its allegorical mode, Borges’s metaphysical fictions intrude into what we understand to be real, the obvious world outside-text. Borges writes of the undecidable, the interzone between fiction and non-fiction, documentary writing, and fabulation. It is an unclassifiable space of paradox and contradiction, the sensation, vague yet familiar, that what seems unlikely may be a forgotten reality–a confused sensation akin to the afterglow of a vivid dream, before it vanishes in wakefulness. As we have seen, this is a paradox that we have been confronting for some time in the name of postmodernism and more recently in relation to virtual technologies. In the age of virtuality, we are once again retracing Borges’s footsteps as he guides us, a latter-day Ariadne, through the labyrinthine fantasy that we call the real.

     

    Postscript

     

    In the days leading up to my departure for Sydney, I received a parcel from the Royal Society. Unaccompanied by a letter or note of explanation–they were as perfunctory as ever–I found this photograph.

     

    Figure 9

     

    It is without doubt a photograph of Borges, probably in his late thirties. This would date it around 1938 or 1939. The intriguing detail is the plaque at his feet. On closer inspection–thanks to my friend Chris Henschke–it reveals the State of Victoria coat of arms. The botanical name of the tree on which he is reclining, the Ribbon Tree of Otago, grown in Melbourne since the nineteenth century, can be verified in Guilfoyle’s Catalogue of Plants Under Cultivation in the Melbourne Botanic Gardens, published in 1883.

     

    Figure 10

     

    The only other thing of note about the photograph is that its verso bears an inscription in an elegant copperplate. For some reason this would not scan properly, but I offer the following transcription:

     

    I remember him, with his face taciturn and Indian-like and singularly remote, behind the cigarette.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Borges, Jorge Luis. “Garden of the Forking Paths.” Labyrinths 44-54.
    • —. “Death and the Compass.” Labyrinths 106-17.
    • —. Labyrinths: Selected Stories and Other Writings. Eds. Donald A. Yates and James E. Irby. Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin, 1970 [1964].
    • —. “Tlön, Uqbar, Orbis Tertius.” Labyrinths 27-43.
    • “Clarification.” The Age Saturday Extra. May 4, 2002.
    • Manovich, Lev. The Language of New Media. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 2001.
    • Mitchell, William J. The Reconfigured Eye: Visual Truth in the Post-Photographic Era. Cambridge, MA: MIT P, 1992.
    • Rundle, Guy. “A Surreal Visitor.” The Age Saturday Extra. April 20, 2002.
    • Schwartz, Hillel. The Culture of the Copy: Striking Likenesses, Unreasonable Facsimiles. New York: Zone, 1996.
    • Wark, McKenzie. “Too Real.” Prefiguring Cyberculture: An Intellectual History. Eds. Darren Tofts, Annemarie Jonson, and Alessio Cavallaro. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT P, 2003.
    • Woodall, James. Borges: A Life. New York: Basic, 1996.

     

  • Liberal Multiculturalism and the Ethics of Hospitality in the Age of Globalization

    Meyda Yegenoglu

    Department of Sociology
    Middle East Technical University
    meyda@metu.edu.tr

     

    The increasing political presence of refugees and immigrants in post-Cold war Europe has generated considerable debate about the nature of multicultural society. The demand for the recognition of cultural, racial, and ethnic differences has come to occupy a central place in the forms of post-national politics emergent today. Yet, a closer examination of the juridico-political regulations developed in response to these demands reveals a troubling tendency: cultural/racial difference is translated into an understanding of cultural diversity that treats minorities, to use David Bennett’s term, as “add-ons” (5) to the existing nation form. Thus the question becomes whether such an “additive model” (5) is capable of inducing a radical transformation in the concept of the sovereign position of the national self. This essay addresses the limitations of this procedural multiculturalist valorization and argues that the liberal imperative to tolerate and respect cultural difference is far from displacing the sovereignty of the host society in question. In discussing these limitations, I will situate liberal multiculturalism in the context of today’s capitalist globalization.

     

    When we examine the policies and programs through which the culturally different is valorized today, it becomes clear that liberalism has become the regulative principle in many metropolitan countries. Yet it is far from clear whether such a liberal valorization and the granting of legal rights to non-normative citizens, the ethnically and racially “different,” will prove to be a counter-hegemonic political force. Is the legal codification of respect for identities in their particularity adequate for reinventing a democratic political space? If such politicization does not flourish in particularist liberal multiculturalism, then we need to be vigilant about what is being left intact. In fact, we need to take our vigilance one step further and question the ways in which such codification regulates the destabilizing force of the political and entails its repudiation, suspension, limitation, or foreclosure.

     

    We are witnessing an increasing proliferation of literature trying to understand the new economic, political, and cultural arrangements that are inaugurated by global capital. The accelerating rate of the international division of labor, the extended capacity of multinational production, the development and concentration of global financial and banking services and culture industries, the rapid development in telecommunications, and the growth of a global mass culture have led many to talk about a process by which the world is now becoming a single and unified space. Globalization, according to the advocates of this position, marks the beginning of a process whereby difference is dissolved within the logic of sameness and cultural homogenization. Consequently we are reminded of the hazards and shortcomings of limiting our inquiries with nations and nation-states, for the sovereignty of nation-states has been declared to be undermined in the age of cultural, economic, social homogeneity, and integration.

     

    On the other side of the debate, there are those who emphasize the impossibility of envisioning a unified global culture. For example, in “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy,” Arjun Appadurai suggests that when forces are brought from various metropoles into different societies they tend to become indigenized in some way. To understand the complexity of the process of globalization, he suggests that we examine the fundamental disjunctures between economy, politics, and culture. For Appadurai the global cultural flows occur in and through the disjunctures between five “scapes”: ethnoscapes, mediascapes, technoscapes, finanscapes, and ideoscapes. Such disjunctures and flows point not only to the fluid and irregular nature of international capital but also constitute the building blocks of the replacement of Benedict Anderson’s “imagined community” with “imagined worlds.”

     

    Those who, like Appadurai, are critical of the global homogenization argument suggest that the globalized world is a contested and contradictory space. These critics point to the increasing proliferation of ethnic and racial struggle to argue that the homogenizing pressure of globalization paradoxically produces cultural heterogeneity. It is the encounter of the local with the global that is deemed to force the recognition of alternative histories, traditions, and cultures that have hitherto remained silent under the ruins of the project of modernity and colonialism. For example, Ulf Hannerz, in “Cosmopolitans and Locals in World Culture,” points out that cultural differences now exist not between cultures but within cultures and suggests that world culture implies a reorganization of diversity rather than a replication of uniformity. It is no longer possible to talk about the homogenization of systems of meaning; between the different regions of the globe there are now flows of meanings, people, and goods. The globe can be imagined as a homogenized unity only when localities are discarded and when power relations among its constituting parts are ignored.

     

    Thus globalization increasingly reveals the limits of Western modernity: various ethnic and racial minorities, their traditions, memories, myths, and symbols are now woven together in the increasingly dense web of metropolitan culture. In an attempt to understand how particularity and difference are articulated in this global culture, Stuart Hall, in “The Local and the Global,” questions attributing a singular and unitary logic to capital. The notion of the global which is capable of getting hold of and neutralizing everybody and everything and thereby contains all marginality in an uncontradictory and uncontested space does not accurately capture the specificity of this decentralized and de-centered form of globalization. Hall suggests that with the accelerating rate of migration, older unitary cultural formations are now breaking down. The emergent form of globalization simultaneously valorizes the local and the global. Hall does not deny the homogenizing form of this new cultural representation, but he argues that it is a peculiar form of homogenization–one that simultaneously absorbs and recognizes difference. This form of global homogenization does not obliterate difference but rather works in and through difference. While capital is spreading globally, it works through specificity. Although the growing global culture is now located in the West and speaks English, it is increasingly invaded by other languages and accents. It is therefore forced to negotiate and incorporate a difference that it formerly tried to conquer. In a paradoxical turn, as minorities reclaim representation for themselves, marginality has been turned into a powerful space. The identities that have hitherto been excluded now signal the emergence of new subjects, new ethnicities, and new communities, and they have acquired the means to speak for themselves. Although Hall acknowledges that resorting to such localities by retreating into exclusivist and defensive enclaves might become dangerous and can lead to forms of fundamentalism, he nevertheless thinks that ethnicity is the necessary position of enunciation from which the formerly excluded marginality speaks and grounds itself.

     

    As is clear from this brief review of current critical discourse, one of the characterizing features of the debate on globalization is the opposition between homogenization and heterogenization or between universalization and particularization. Moreover, the particular or different is presumed to be endowed with some resistive and liberative capacity in the face of the universalizing tendency of global capital. I would suggest that this is a misleading opposition as it identifies globalization with universalization1 and consequently locates the counter-hegemonic political struggle against the global force of capital in the affirmation of particular identities. In “A Leftist Plea for Eurocentrism,” Slavoj Zizek rightly points out that it is deeply misleading to posit the rising globalization in opposition to particular identities since the true opposition is between globalization and universalism. For him, the new world is global but not universal; it is an order, which, rather than negating the particular, allocates each and every particular a place.2 Therefore, what is threatened by globalization is not particularity but universality itself. Universalism, for Zizek, is the “properly political domain” as it implies “universalizing one’s particular fate as representative of global injustice” (1007). If we want to go beyond the rather simplistic praising of the particular, one of the tasks that awaits us is to develop a conceptual framework that will allow us to rethink globalization and the apparent counter-tendency of valorization of particular identities as a double gesture of capital. What needs to be questioned is whether the particular that is valorized in multiculturalist politics constitutes a destabilizing political force in the wake of global abstraction of transnational capitalism which now operates completely divorced from its specific origins in Europe, as Dirlik argues in “The Global in the Local,” and whose immanent logic remains indifferent to the boundaries of the nation-state, as Zizek suggests in “Multiculturalism, or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism.”

     

    The decentering of capitalism, its deterritorialization and abstraction, implies the difficulty of pointing to any nation or region as the center of global capitalism. This has led many to emphasize the qualitatively different nature of global capitalism from its earlier forms. For Dirlik, this qualitative difference of global capitalism can be discerned in the authentic global abstraction capitalism has achieved, in the decentering and production of networks of urban formations without a clearly definable center–a network which is then relinked via transnational corporations (30). Likewise, in “Ambiguous Universality,” Etienne Balibar delineates the transformations created in the geographical and geopolitical pattern of the world and points to the multiplication of centers, which form a network rather than a “core” area (52). Similarly, Zizek suggests that the final moment of capitalism entails the cutting of the umbilical cord of global companies with their mother-nation. It is thus no longer possible to pin down a colonizing agency as in the case of traditional imperialist colonialism. The paradox of this form of colonization resides in the fact that it takes place without a colonizing nation-state, as the colonizing agents now become the global companies themselves (“Multiculturalism” 43-52). Dirlik finds the concern with the local in the wake of global capitalism ironic for the following reason: while disorganizing earlier forms and reconfiguring global relations, global capitalism enhances an awareness of the local so as to be able to render the local manipulable in its hands, pointing to it as the site of resistance to capital (35). Therefore the privileging of the local without the recognition of this context and the concomitant ideological criticism of global capitalism voiced from the presumably resistive site of the local falls prey to the ideological legitimization of the structures which are indeed the very production of global capitalism. For Dirlik, the limitations of such criticism stem from the fact that global capitalism leaves no local that is not already worked over, continually disorganized, reconstituted, or assimilated as part of its universalizing and homogenizing operations (37).

     

    What do we make of the growing liberal multiculturalist dictum to respect and tolerate the racially, culturally, and ethnically different in the wake of the tendency of capital for global abstraction? Can these two trends be regarded as contradictory? In other words, does multiculturalist tolerance for difference, which not only acknowledges the value of each and every group’s cultural characteristics but also tries to amend the wrong each one of them is subjected to through various juridical and legal procedures, signal the emergence of a counter-political force against the global hegemony of capital?

     

    Slavoj Zizek, in his reading of the three different meanings of universality distinguished by Balibar, sees multiculturalist tolerance, respect and protection of human rights, democracy, and so forth as the hegemonic fiction of the real universality of today’s globalization. (“Multiculturalism” 41). The concrete universality of global order is supplanted by allowing each particular lifestyle to flourish in its particularity. For Zizek, the modern era, whose predominant form of concrete universality is the nation-state, worked by seizing the individual directly, restraining his or her freedom as the citizen of a nation-state. Against the de-nationalization of the ethnic into the national of the modern period, the intensification of global market forces entails the ethnicization of the national and renewed reconstitution of ethnic roots. Respect and tolerance for the ethnically different is a reaction to the universal dimension of the world market and hence occurs against its background and on its very terrain (42). Multiculturalism, in Zizek’s formulation, is the form of the appearance of universality in its exact mirror opposite and is therefore the ideal form of the ideology of global capitalism. In A Critique of Postcolonial Reason, Gayatri Spivak also points to the bond between liberal multiculturalism and global capitalism. She suggests that “liberal multiculturalism is determined by the demands of contemporary transnational capitalisms” (397) which secure the means of gaining the consent of developing nations in the financialization of the globe.

     

    Perhaps the originality of Zizek’s argument does not lie in the link he establishes between multiculturalism and the interests of global capitalism. Spivak, Jameson, Dirlik and Hall, in their different ways, have developed similar arguments. But there is more to Zizek’s formulation. Focusing his attention particularly on the implications of the notions of respect and tolerance, he suggests that multiculturalism entails a Eurocentric distance when it respects and tolerates the local and particular cultures (44). In this sense, multiculturalism is based on a disavowed and inverted self-referential form of racism as it empties its own position of all positive content. The racism of multiculturalism does not reside in its being against the values of other cultures. Quite the contrary: it respects and tolerates other cultures, but in respecting and tolerating the different, it maintains a distance which enables it to retain a privileged position of empty universality. It is this emptied universal position which enables one to appreciate (or depreciate) other local cultures. Thus multiculturalist respect for the particularity of the other is indeed a form of asserting one’s own superiority and sovereignty. As David Lloyd cogently describes in “Race under Representation,” the alleged neutrality and universality is at the same time a process that secures a sovereign status for the subject:

     

    The position occupied by the dominant individual is that of the Subject without properties. The Subject with “unlimited properties” is precisely the undetermined subject . . . Its universality is attained by virtue of literal indifference: this Subject becomes representative in consequence of being able to take anyone’s place, of occupying any place, of a pure exchangeability. Universal where all others are particular, partial, this Subject is the perfect, disinterested judge formed for and by the public sphere. (70)

     

    In Colonial Fantasies: Towards a Feminist Reading of Orientalism, I have suggested that it is the centering of the self, which, by setting itself off from the particular, allows its universalizing gesture (103). But, as Zizek suggests, the critical task here is not to expose the truth of multiculturalism, which is presumed to be the concealment of particular roots behind the mask of universality. Rather, the problematic of multiculturalism, premised on the hybrid co-existence of diverse cultural forms, “is the form of appearance of its opposite, of the massive presence of capitalism as universal world system; it bears witness to the unprecedented homogenization of the contemporary world” (“Multiculturalism” 45). Therefore, for Zizek, “the true horror does not reside in the particular content hidden beneath the universality of global Capital, but rather in the fact that Capital is effectively an anonymous global machine blindly running its course, that there is effectively no particular Secret Agent who animates it” (46). Precisely for this reason, the fight for cultural difference and respect for minorities leaves the basic universalizing operation of global capitalism unharmed and intact and hence needs to be seen as symptomatic of the suffocation and regulation of “politics proper” (“A Leftist Plea” 988-999).3 The task, therefore, is to understand the mechanisms by which this regulation, suffocation, and foreclosure are managed. If the institutionalized multiculturalist pluralism that characterizes the post-national global order implies a foreclosure of politics proper and is far from offering a potential for democratic politicization, then where do we locate the possibility of a politics that interrupts this foreclosure? To discuss this, allow me to make a detour through Jacques Derrida’s argument concerning conditional and unconditional hospitality.

     

    HOSPITALITY AS LAW

     

    In Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas, Derrida reads Kant’s writings on cosmopolitan law and draws our attention to his essay “Toward Perpetual Peace: A Philosophical Project,” particularly the “Third Definitive Article for a Perpetual Peace” which pertains to the “right of hospitality”: “The Law of World Citizenship Shall be Limited to Conditions of Universal Hospitality.” Derrida notes that this article is limited by a number of conditions. From the very beginning we are confronted with the question of conditional hospitality. The question of hospitality in Kant’s writings pulls us into the domain of law, citizenship and the relation the state has with its subjects. Universal hospitality here is only juridical and political. Cosmopolitan law is about international agreement and refers to the condition of justice and law that is to be decided by nations. Hospitality is treated as a question of rights, justice and obligation that is to be regulated by law.4 Resting on a juridical and political definition, the Kantian formulation is based not on granting the right of residence but only the right of temporary sojourn. As a juridical regulation, it concerns the rights of citizens of states that are to be regulated and deliberated by a cosmopolitical constitution. As such, it suspends and conditions the immediate, infinite, and unconditional welcoming of the other (87).

     

    Derrida directs our attention to the fact that conditional hospitality is offered at the owner’s place, home, nation, state, or city–that is, at a place where one is defined as the master and where unconditional hospitality or unconditional trespassing of the door is not possible. The host, the non-guest, the one who accepts, the one who offers hospitality, the one who welcomes, is the owner of a home and therefore is the master of the home.5

     

    As I mentioned above, Derrida directs our attention to the fact that in Kant’s essay, hospitality is framed as a question of law, an obligation, a duty, and a right: it refers to the welcoming of an alien/stranger other as a non-enemy. The formulation of hospitality as a question of law weaves it with contradiction because the welcoming of the other within the limits of law is possible on the condition that the host, the owner of the home, the one who accepts, remains the master of the home and thereby retains his/her authority in that place. The law of hospitality is the law of oikonomia, the law of one’s home. Offered as the law of place, hospitality lays down the limits of a place and retains the authority over that place, thus limiting the gift that is offered, retaining the self as self in one’s own home as the condition of hospitality. In making this the condition of hospitality, it affirms the law of the same. Hospitality is a giving gesture. But with the hospitality as law, what this gesture in fact does is to subject the stranger/foreigner to the law of the host’s home. In this way, the foreigner is allowed to enter the host’s space under conditions the host has determined. Hence conditional welcoming entails a way of insinuating a place from which one invites the other and hence lays down the conditions for “appropriating for oneself a place to welcome the other, or, worse, welcoming the other in order to appropriate for oneself a place and then speak the language of hospitality” (15-6). Therefore the law of hospitality is characterized by a limitation. The host affirms the position of a master in his/her own home; in the space and things he/she provides to the stranger/guest, the host assures his/her sovereignty and says: this space belongs to me; we are in my home. Welcome to me. Feel at home but on the condition that you obey the rules of hospitality (14). This gesture affirms one’s sovereignty and one’s being at one’s own home. For this reason, hospitality as law limits itself with a threshold.6

     

    Drawing on Derrida’s deconstructive reading of the contradictions inherent in conditional hospitality, we can suggest that multiculturalist tolerance of minorities within the host nation-state is not for nothing. Welcoming the other in the form of codified multiculturalist tolerance implies a conditional welcoming, as the hospitality offered remains limited within law and jurisdiction. But more importantly, this kind of tolerance does not result in a fundamental modification of the host subject’s mode of inhabiting the territory that is deemed to be solely within his/her possession. Far from laying the grounds for an interruption of sovereign identity of the self, multiculturalist respect and tolerance implies the conditional welcoming of the guest within the prescribed limits of the law and hence implies a reassertion of mastery over the national space as it enables the subject to appropriate a place for itself–an empty and universal and therefore sovereign place–from which the other is welcomed. Thus the place from which multiculturalist tolerance welcomes the particularity of the other, fortified by codifications such as affirmative action and other legal measures, is what precisely enables the disavowed and inverted self-referentiality of racist hospitality which by emptying the host’s position from any positive content asserts its superiority and sovereignty.

     

    The inherent paradox of multiculturalism’s conditional and lawful welcoming of the other as guest can be productively understood as conforming to “the structure of exception” that Giorgio Agamben discusses in Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. In discussing this, I want to refer to the German case where the paradox of the inclusion of minorities within the limits of law can be illustrated. All of the laws that regulate the conditions of arrival, presence, and departure of “guest-workers” in Germany reveal that the overriding concern is that of recruitment of a short-term labor force. For this reason, residence permits are conferred only as work permits. Laws explicitly anticipate that the workers will leave Germany when the needs of capital are fulfilled. The fact that the workers’ presence is regarded as temporary makes clear that the new regulations are seen as an exception: a parenthesis to be opened and eventually closed. The logic underlying these laws is that the acceptance/welcoming of foreign labor is a conditional one, as the workers’ presence, which is expected to be temporary, is deemed to be an exception to the general rule. Tellingly, the term “migrant” is not typically used to name this group. As guests, these workers are accepted as an exception to the general rule of membership in the German polity. Their welcoming is not regulated within the framework of the general rule of law. In accordance with the persistent and widespread sentiment that declares that “Germany is not a land of immigration,” the conditional welcoming or the temporary hosting of foreign labor appears at first glance to be set outside the purview of general law. Hence these regulations are nothing but the name of an interim, an exception.

     

    Following Agamben, we can ask whether as an exception, the conditional welcoming of workers indicates that they are left outside the sovereign law of the host society? It is clear that this temporary foreign labor force has been included in the German territory without being turned into proper members of the polity. Their membership is undecidable from the perspective of the German self and law since their inclusion exceeds membership, testifying to the impasse of a system based on law, which is incapable of making their inclusion coincide with membership. As guests having temporary abode, they are not properly inside. But does this indicate that they are outside the purview of sovereign and general law? One way to approach this dynamic between outside and inside is to see them as a limit figure which brings into crisis the clear distinction between what is inside and what is outside. Surely this not an altogether invalid way of grasping the dynamic between the guest and the host that is structured through the law, but it is a limited one insofar as the paradox of exception is concerned.

     

    Exception, Agamben notes, “embodies a kind of membership without inclusion” (24). What defines the German sovereign claim of ownership of the land can be understood with Agamben’s following remarks: “what defines the character of the sovereign claim is precisely that it applies to the exception in no longer applying to it, that it includes what is outside itself . . . . What cannot be included in any way is included in the form of the exception” (24). It seems that we can talk about a paradoxical inclusion of guest-workers, which is indeed an “inclusive exclusion” (21). For Agamben, the regulation that is exercised by the law is achieved not by a command or prescription, but by the creation of “the sphere of its own reference in real life and make that reference regular” (26). The sovereign claim of the general law is constituted by having a grip over the exception and by articulating it into its domain through an inclusive exclusion. It is through the exception, through the inclusive exclusion of the exception, that the law is able to generate and cultivate itself. The apparent exclusion of the exception is in fact an indication of its paradoxical inclusion in the juridical order.

     

    For Agamben, when we see exception as fundamental to the structure of the constitution of sovereignty, then sovereignty can be grasped neither as an exclusively political nor as a juridical category; it is not “a power external to law (Schmitt)” or to the supreme rule of juridical order (Hans Kelsen): it is the originary structure in which law refers to life and includes it in itself by suspending it” (28). Following Jean-Luc Nancy’s suggestion, he gives the name ban to “this potentiality . . . of the law to maintain itself in its own privation, to apply in no longer applying” (28). The law, in excluding or banning, does not place the exception to its exteriority, but abandons or threatens it on a threshold where the distinction between outside and inside, life and law, becomes blurred. It becomes difficult to say in a definite manner whether the one who is banned is outside or inside the juridical order. The paradox of sovereignty is that it leaves nothing outside the law as it has a hold on life even when it abandons what it interdicts.

     

    In offering hospitality that is conditional, the German national self appropriates a place for himself/herself so as to be able to say welcome. This entails not only maintaining the status of the German national self as master, but more importantly it institutes a welcoming in order to nourish the sovereignty of the German subject that was already in place. To understand the dynamic that is operating here, we can establish a link between Derrida’s understanding of “conditional hospitality” and what Agamben calls “inclusive exclusion.” Though pushed outside, the provisional acceptance of the guest-workers enables the regeneration and nourishment of the German national self, which needs to reconstitute its sovereignty each time anew. Such a sovereign self maintains and nurtures itself not by pushing particular others to its exteriority or outside the purview of general law. On the contrary, it is their inclusive exclusion, which the conditional welcoming enables, that is indispensable for a reassertion of a sovereign German national self. The empty and universal position of the sovereign claim enabled by the general rule of law is capable of instituting conditional hospitality as an exception and this enables the means to codify respect and tolerance for the different and confer upon them rights in the form of law. It is precisely at this point that we need to be vigilant and to problematize this codification by asking what is being negated and foreclosed here. Does this codification entail the opening of the space of politics or does it effectively signal the circumscription of what Zizek calls “politics proper” or what Antonio Negri calls “constituent power”?

     

    POLITICS

     

    In his discussion of the three forms of universality, Balibar gives the proposition concerning human rights as the example of ideal universality (65). Reversing the traditional relationship between subjection and citizenship, ideal universality justifies the universal extension of political (civic) rights by explaining that equality and liberty are inseparable, which Balibar calls “equaliberty.” As such, it introduces the notion of unconditional into the realm of politics: “equaliberty is an all-or-nothing” notion and hence cannot be relativized. It is either recognized or ignored as a principle or as a demand. Balibar links this characteristic of equaliberty to what Hannah Arendt calls “the right to have rights,” which is distinct from having this or that specific right that is guaranteed by law. Nor is it a moral notion. It is a political notion and delineates a process, which starts with resistance and ends with the actual exercise of constituent power (66). For this reason, for Balibar, the “right to have rights” can also be called the “right to have politics.” As an unconditional force, the demand for equaliberty sets in motion a permanent insurrection that can never be gentrified or “fully integrated into the harmonious whole of the concrete universality” (65). But does this mean that constituent power, as the irreducible excess (to use Zizek’s formulation), is allowed to exercise its full destabilizing potential of the political? Certainly not. The question thus becomes: what are the means through which this insurrectionary demand is domesticated, suffocated, limited, regulated, neutralized, or congealed?

     

    To answer this question–to understand the dynamic by which the “right to have rights” or the “right to have politics” of minorities and foreigners is regulated and hence limited through institutionalized multiculturalism and through the granting of a set of rights guaranteed by law–it is useful to turn to (and to revise) Antonio Negri’s conception of constituent and constitutive power as articulated in Insurgencies: Constituent Power and the Modern State. I have already suggested, following Zizek, that it is through liberal multiculturalist institutional and juridical regulations that the post-national global order renders its global universalizing tendency indiscernible and thereby forecloses the possibility for a right to have politics or democratic politics. But does the current global management of the conditional and legal hosting of immigrants mean that any change in the law or any attempt to modify the law will by definition play into the hands of the forces of globalization? Can the legal conditions of hospitality or laws on immigration be improved? The analysis that Negri offers regarding the relation between constitutive and constituent power seems to imply that any attempt to improve or change the law is a vain effort; that it’s futile to attempt to replace existing laws with better ones, for any politics that remains within the purview of law is doomed to fail as it implies suffocation of democratic politics through constitutional arrangements. After a brief discussion of the analysis Negri offers and its limitations, I will discuss Derrida’s deconstructive reading of the relation between law and justice on the one hand and conditional and unconditional hospitality on the other hand and suggest that the latter offers a radically different opening of politics.7

     

    For Negri, to speak of constituent power is to speak of democracy for it is constituent power that regulates democracy. It is not only all-powerful, but also has an expansive and unlimited quality. It emerges from the vortex of the void and is characterized by the openness of its needs and the absence of determinations and finalities. Its strength lies in the fact that it never ends up in power, nor its multitude results in a totality. As an open multiplicity, it is always based upon a set of singularities. Its all-powerful and expansive tendency, its strength, which opens a horizon, never results in a vertical or totalitarian dimension. The active elements of constituent power are resistance, desire, and an ethical impulse. It does not seek institutionality but aims at constructing an ethical being. It is for these reasons that Negri emphasizes the strong link between constituent power and democracy. Democracy is the political form of constituent power. The concept of democracy in Negri’s formulation is not treated as a subspecies or a subcategory of liberalism but refers to a form of governability that enables the freeing of constituent power, because it entails a totality without a closure and the exclusion of any sign of external definition. It is a project of the multitude and is a creative force. This multitude is not an ungraspable multiplicity but is the strength of singularities and differences. As a singular multidirectionality it refers to an irreducible concept of the political and to an ethics that recognizes singularities. Like democracy, constituent power resists being constitutionalized.

     

    The opposite of democracy and constituent power is not totalitarianism but sovereignty itself and constitutional power. The establishment of constitutional power presents a closure to the always-open nature of constituent power. When constituent power is articulated in juridical definitions, it is limited, closed, reduced to juridical categories, and is restrained in administrative routines. The State’s constitutionality and its various other regulatory activities bring a form of control, well-defined limits, and procedures to the all-expansive force of the constituent power. Once it is situated in the concept of the nation and absorbed by the mechanism of representation, constituent power is perverted, desiccated, congealed in a static system. Representation is one of the fundamental juridical-constitutional instruments in exercising control and in segmenting constituent power. Its dilution in representative mechanisms manifests itself in political space but is disguised in the activity of the Supreme Court and other organs of the State. These mechanisms restore traditional sovereignty and close the possibility of democratic innovation. The taming and suffocation of constituent power by constitutionalist arrangements entails the mediation of inequalities and hence the neutralization of its strength. The fixing and institutionalization of constituent power implies its de facto termination and negation. And in this way, the sovereignty inverts the ostensible foundation of democratic polity and reconstructs itself as the foundation.

     

    Although Negri’s analysis of the ways in which constitutive power tames and suffocates constituent power is a useful one to think how laws of conditional hospitality limit the unconditional welcoming of foreigners, it nevertheless suffers from certain limitations. Negri does not use the concept of constituent power as a theoretical or philosophical device that enables him to better understand how constitutive arrangements limit a more expansive politics. Rather, he treats constituent power as something that can actually be established as such by its affirmation or as a self-affirming power. Moreover, Negri posits the relation between constitutive and constituent power as an opposition or a dialectical contradiction; he poses the relation between constitutive and constituent power as an either/or question. The heterogeneity between the two is reduced to an antinomy. As such, his analysis risks leaving intact the very structure it aims to criticize; it risks repeating the same desire for a sovereign position, shifted now to the side of the hegemonized second term.

     

    In an attempt to rethink another philosophical and theoretical framework that might help us to envision the possibility of reinventing a political space that is neither locked within the limits and congealments of conditional hospitality nor one that pretends to go beyond the law by simply reversing it, I want to discuss Derrida’s reading of the relation between conditional and conditional hospitality and law and justice.

     

    ETHICS OF HOSPITALITY AND THE POSSIBILITY OF DEMOCRATIC POLITICS

     

    How does Derrida think the relationship between conditional and unconditional hospitality? Are they mutually exclusive of each other and hence standing in a relation of opposition? Does unconditional hospitality simply imply that nation-states make it their official policy and open their borders and unconditionally welcome anyone who wants to come? Does it have the status of a regulative idea and hence constitute the name of a correct politics? Or does it have the status of a deconstructive tool devised to read the limits of conditional hospitality?

     

    While Kant is concerned with hospitality as law and thereby with the conditions and limitations of hospitality, Levinas engages with it as a question of ethics or as the question of ethicity itself. In his reading of Levinas’s formulation of the ethics of hospitality, Derrida orients our attention to the fact that in the lawful admittance of the other as guest there is a level that exceeds and hence cannot be captured by those analyses that take the nation-state and the juridical regulation as the model to work on. Or rather, his question is whether the ethics of hospitality, in Levinas’s thought, is conducive for “a law and a politics beyond the familial dwelling, within a society, nation, State, or Nation-State” (Adieu 20). It is this level that Derrida’s reading of Levinas’s ethics of hospitality brings to the fore.

     

    Pointing to a hiatus between the law and ethics of hospitality, Derrida underlines how the ethics of hospitality cannot be treated as a decree nor can it be imposed by a command. The hiatus between the law and ethics of hospitality also pertains to the fact that it is unthematizable, implying that a particular law or politics of hospitality cannot be deduced from Levinas’s discourse of the ethics of hospitality, for it is irreducible to a theme, thematization, or some kind of formalization. Ethics as such is an attentive intention, a welcome and tending toward the other, an unconditional “yes” to the other. Hospitality as ethicity is infinite (it is either infinite, unconditional or not at all) and cannot be limited in the sense that Kant talks about it; it cannot be regulated by a particular political or juridical practice of a nation and therefore cannot be circumscribed.

     

    Derrida notes that the ethics of hospitality, the welcome made to the other, entails the subordination or putting in question of the freedom of the subject and an interruption of the self as other. But this interruption is not something that can be enforced by a decree or law. It is an interruption produced in the intentional attention to the other. The subordination of the freedom of the subject does not imply depriving the subject of its birth. Rather it implies the subjection of the subjectum and enables the birth of the subject along with freedom: the coming of the subject to itself as it welcomes the other. Responsibility for the other, the being-host of the subject, puts the subject into question; it puts the subject’s being in question. Therefore, for Derrida, “the host is a hostage insofar as he is a subject put into question, obsessed (and thus besieged), persecuted in the very place where he takes place, where as emigrant, exile, stranger, a guest from the very beginning, he finds himself elected to or taken up by a residence before himself electing or taking one up” (20).

     

    Unconditional hospitality entails a reversal, since the owner of the home can perform hospitality on the condition that she is invited to her own home by the one whom she invites, by being welcomed, accepted by the one whom she welcomes or accepts, and shown hospitality in her own home by the guest. Unconditional hospitality or hospitality as ethics implies the interruption of a full possession of a place called home and when its inhabitant becomes a guest received in her home–that is, when the owner becomes a tenant in her place. The inexorable law of hospitality therefore involves a situation in which

     

    the hote who receives (the host), the one who welcomes the invited or received hote (the guest), the welcoming hote who considers himself the owner of the place, is in truth a hote received in his own home. He receives the hospitality that he offers in his own home; he receives it from his own home–which, in the end, does not belong to him. The hote as host is a guest. The dwelling opens itself to itself, to its “essence” without essence, as a “land of asylum or refuge.” The one who welcomes is first welcomed in his own home. The one who invites is invited by the one whom he invites. The one who receives is received, receiving hospitality in what he takes to be his own home, or indeed his own land . . . . (41-2)

     

    Hospitality in this sense precedes property, since home, in this unconditional welcoming, is not owned, or is owned only in a very singular sense. That is, only insofar it is already hospitable to its owner, when the master of the house is already a received hote or a guest in her own home. When home is no longer a property but a place that welcomes its owner, the question of hospitality cannot be reduced to a multiculturalist tolerance, for there is no longer a question of limiting, restricting, or regulating tolerance for the other. As Derrida puts it:

     

    That a people, as a people, “should accept those who come and settle among them–even though they are foreigners,” would be the proof [gage] of a popular and public commitment [engagement], a political res publica that cannot be reduced to a sort of “tolerance,” unless this tolerance requires the affirmation of a “love” without measure. (Adieu 72)

     

    In the hospitality without conditions, the host should, in principle, receive even before knowing anything about the guest. A pure welcome consists not only in not knowing anything or acting as if one knows nothing, but also in avoiding any questions about the Other’s identity, their desire, their rules, their language, their capacity for work, for integration, for adaptation . . . From the moment that I formulate all of these questions, and posit these conditions . . . the ideal situation of non-knowledge–non-savoir–is broken–rompue. (“A Discussion” 9)

     

    Above I have delineated the characterizing features of what unconditional hospitality is. To be able to understand its relation to conditional hospitality, I want to briefly review how Derrida understands the relation between law and justice in “Force of Law: The ‘Mystical Foundation of Authority,’” as it has a parallel structure with conditional and unconditional hospitality. This will enable us to better comprehend the nature of the relation between conditional and unconditional hospitality and thus better understand how unconditional hospitality is not simply the name of a political program.

     

    For Derrida, there lies an aporia within the drive for justice because it has to respect universality on the one hand and absolute singularity on the other. One faces difficulty in justice precisely because of the necessity to speak in terms of the universal principles when one is deciding about particular cases. Since law includes these two conditions simultaneously, the singularity has to be translated into universality. The aporia resides in the principle of universality which cannot directly speak to the particular case: in the fact that it is not possible to be just for everyone and for every single case. This is what Derrida means in saying that “justice is impossible.” However, justice is the principle in the name of which law is deconstructed; that is, it is possible to change and improve the law, the legal system. Law can be criticized and therefore is deconstructible, but justice is not deconstructible. Thus despite the absolute radical heterogeneity between the two, the relation between them is not one of opposition. Law is not opposed to justice, nor is justice opposed to law. Derrida makes clear that justice and law are indissociable because it is in the name of justice that one deconstructs the law. The relation between them will remain endlessly open and irreducible. To tend to justice one has to deconstruct and improve the law, but it is never just–and it is there, in the space between law and justice, that one negotiates between the universal and the particular.

     

    Like justice, unconditional hospitality is also impossible. But this impossibility does not mean that one does not aspire to pure hospitality. Its impossibility lies in the very structure of unconditional hospitality itself. In principle, it is offered to an unlimited number of Others and to an unlimited extent, without asking any questions. The Other’s welcoming is not to be contingent upon the Other’s identity or the questions asked. The very notion of pure or unconditional hospitality assumes that one must offer to any stranger the right of entry to a territory, home, or nation of which one is legitimately in possession.

     

    With the concept of unconditional hospitality, Derrida is not trying to offer a political program about how a pure hospitality might be implemented; rather, he is trying to expose the presuppositions of conditional hospitality and the series of concepts that it is based upon–such as one’s proper residence, proper identity, and proper cultural identity. For Derrida, there is an essential link between society or culture and hospitality. In every society there is space allocated for those who are invited and this enables the welcoming of the strangers who arrive. In other words, conditional hospitality is what enables one’s being at home. There is no culture, no home, no nation or family without a door. It is the opening of this door that functions as a means of welcoming strangers. When the stranger, the Other, is welcomed on the condition that he adjust to the chez soi, the hospitality that is offered is a conditional one, one of visitation: the stranger is welcome only as long as he respects the order and rules of the home, the nation or culture, and learns to speak the language. In contrast (but not in opposition) to conditional hospitality is unconditional or pure hospitality: the pure welcoming of the unexpected guest or anyone who arrives or visits, the hospitality of invitation. Conditional hospitality of invitation is distinguished from the unconditional hospitality of visitation by the fact that in the former, the master remains the master, the host remains the host at home, and the guest remains an invited guest. As an invited guest, one is expected not to alter the rule and order of the home. Derrida imagines the hospitality of visitation in order to distinguish it from the hospitality of invitation where the stranger is not an invited guest, but one who arrives unexpectedly, where the host opens the house without asking any questions.

     

    Derrida reminds us that the relation between the two forms of hospitality has the same structure between law and justice (and let’s remember that according to Derrida justice is impossible); they are heterogeneous but at the same time absolutely indissociable. These two forms of hospitality refer to the legal and just forms of hospitality. Like justice, unconditional hospitality is impossible as one cannot deduce a rule from it. In other words, it is impossible to make it a rule that nations, families, cultures, or governments should open their house unconditionally to everyone and hence to turn it into an official policy. Although it is impossible, Derrida nevertheless designates with the term unconditional what hospitality should be in principle. Thus the concept of conditional hospitality enables Derrida to conceive of unconditional hospitality. As he puts it:

     

    to think of this conditional hospitality one has to have in mind what would be a pure hospitality to the messianic Other, the unexpected one who just lands in my country and to whom I simply say: come and eat and sleep and I won’t even ask your name. (“A Discussion” 13)

     

    If we have a concept of conditional hospitality, it’s because we have also the idea of a pure hospitality, of unconditional hospitality. (15)

     

    If unconditional or pure hospitality is impossible, then what is the possibility of the politics of hospitality? Like the relation between law and justice, where it is in the name of justice that one deconstructs the law, it is in the name of unconditional hospitality that conditional hospitality can be deconstructed. To tend to unconditional hospitality one has to deconstruct and improve the laws on hospitality (such as immigration laws), but these laws will never guarantee unconditional hospitality as such. The relation between them will remain open and irreducible. As Derrida notes, the law is perfectible and there is progress to be performed on the law that will improve the conditions of hospitality. The condition of the laws on immigration has to be improved without claiming that unconditional law should become an official policy. The very desire for unconditional hospitality is what regulates the improvement of the laws of hospitality.

     

    CONCLUSION

     

    So how, then, can we rethink the forces of capitalist globalization and institutionalized multiculturalism, which I suggested are working hand in hand, in light of the Derridian notion of unconditional hospitality? This essay has not meant to imply that the operation of the forces of globalization are limited by the laws that regulate the welcoming of immigrants or through institutionalizing multiculturalist respect and tolerance. Globalization works on many fronts, and we need to be vigilant: about the complicated links between globalization and the workings of nation-states in the so-called Third World; about the novel ways in which the rural is now accessed by global capital; about the interventions of the World Trade Organization, the International Monetary Fund, and the World Bank which impose as international law the laws of the national economies of the global North; about the reinstitution of the repressive powers of the nation-states in the Third World so as to enable the smooth operation of global capital.8My analysis here engages with the question of globalization in terms of its ideological and political presuppositions. The reason for my discussion of how liberal multiculturalism functions as the ideal form of global capitalism and how it is conditioned by its demands is twofold: first, to examine the hegemonic ideological form of global capitalism as it relates to the ethnically and culturally Other; second, to challenge the idea that the valorization of particular identities can be seen as a destabilizing counter-hegemonic political force in the wake of the global abstraction of transnational capitalism. I have suggested that Derrida’s concept of conditional hospitality is a useful philosophical and theoretical apparatus for deconstructing the ideology embedded in liberal multiculturalism.

     

    But let me be clear: I do not mean to suggest that conditional hospitality should be dismantled, that the welcoming of immigrants based on legal regulations should be done away with, or that unconditional hospitality should be substituted as the official policy of the host nations. I do not recommend the concept of unconditional hospitality as a technical application of a rule or norm. Unconditional hospitality is not to be regarded as the name of a counter-political program against the global management of the ethnically and culturally different. Nor is it a command that can be conformed to or deviated from, as it cannot be treated as a rule or an injunction that can organize the nature of the relation with immigrants. Unconditional hospitality is neither a means of determining judgment nor a rule of action. It is, rather, the condition of the possibility of the perfection and improvement of conditional hospitality. Speaking of unconditional hospitality, Derrida notes:

     

    It’s impossible as a rule, I cannot regularly organise unconditional hospitality, and that’s why, as a rule, I have a bad conscience, I cannot have a good conscience because I know that I lock my door, and that a number of people who would like to share my house, my apartment, my nation, my money, my land and so on so forth. I say not as a rule, but sometimes, exceptionally, it may happen. I cannot regulate, control or determine these moments, but it may happen, just as an act of forgiveness, some forgiveness may happen, pure forgiveness may happen. I cannot make a determinate, a determining judgement and say: ‘this is pure forgiveness,’ or ‘this is pure hospitality,’ as an act of knowledge, there is no adequate act of determining judgment. That’s why the realm of action, of practical reason, is absolutely heterogeneous to theory and theoretical judgments here, but it may happen without even my knowing it, my being conscious of it, or my having rules for its establishment. Unconditional hospitality can’t be an establishment, but it may happen as a miracle . . . in an instant, not lasting more than an instant, it may happen. This is the . . . possible happening of something impossible which makes us think what hospitality, or forgiveness, or gift might be. (“A Discussion” 15-16)

     

    This “possible happening of something impossible” can be seen as the condition of a democratic possibility. To use Derrida’s formulation in The Other Heading: Reflections on Today’s Europe, this condition of democratic possibility is something “to be thought and to come [à venir]: not something that is certain to happen tomorrow, not the democracy (national or international, state or trans-state) of the future, but a democracy that must have the structure of a promise–and thus the memory of that which carries the future, the to-come, here and now” (78). It is the introduction of the notion of unconditionality into politics–or to put it in Balibar’s term, the politics of equaliberty, which is an all-or-nothing notion–that can open the possibility of a democratic politics. As we saw earlier, Balibar argues that as an unconditional force, the demand for equaliberty or the right to have rights cannot be relativized. The unconditional nature of equaliberty, like the unconditionality of hospitality, is distinct from this or that specific right guaranteed by law. However neither equaliberty nor unconditional hospitality in themselves are possible. But their impossibility should not be taken as the closure of the possibility of democracy; on the contrary, it is the principle of unconditionality which is the driving force behind the condition of possibility of a democratic opening and, with it, a revision in law.

     

    At this point, it might be useful to situate the demand for equaliberty and the ethics of hospitality in the context of contemporary global capitalism, as my aim is not to theorize them as pure, atemporal and context-independent forces ultimately separated from forces of economy and politics.

     

    From the point of view of politics proper, globalization can be characterized as a contradictory process: on the one hand, the very processes of globalization produce the demand for equaliberty. The globalization of production and other market forces necessarily create the conditions for the welcoming of immigrants as well as the granting of certain rights. These very same groups, as a consequence of the production of new political and ideological needs, make claims that may be against the interests of global capitalism. On the other hand, however, globalization is a law-governed process, and institutionalizing forces such as the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank absorb the demand for equaliberty through the mechanism of the law. Thus, the ideal of the right to have rights or the demand for equaliberty is necessarily compromised as it becomes articulated within global capitalism. And it is in this regard that Negri’s analysis becomes useful for understanding the constriction of politics proper through constitutional means. Such institutionalization coincides with the direction global capitalism has taken. Demands for equaliberty are always compromised, always diluted and contained by their expression within lawful and institutionalized processes.

     

    In the face of this compromise, where can we situate the possibility of a democratic politics? In the face of this containment of the politics for equaliberty in global capitalism, must we forfeit the desire for unconditional hospitality? In a word: no. But the task is to rethink the very force of the demand for equaliberty not in terms of its full realization–as this would imply a total transcendence of global capitalism, which at the very least will not come any time soon–but precisely in terms of its inevitable containment or dilution by global forces. For unconditional hospitality or the demand for equaliberty is not exhausted by or reduced to the current historical context of the granting of conditional and legal rights. Neither is its full realization contingent upon the transcendence of the capitalist world system. Instead, unconditional hospitality has to be understood as immanent to the present–“the possible happening of something impossible”– demanding, in the present, the immediate transformation of the present conditions of hospitality.

     

    Notes

     

    I am grateful to Kenneth Bar and Mahmut Mutman for their close reading of the essay and for providing suggestions which helped me to clarify the arguments developed here.

     

    1. The distinction Etienne Balibar makes between three forms of universality, namely “real universality,” “fictitious universality,” and “ideal universality,” is a very useful one to rethink the difference between the nature of the universality that globalization implies (which Balibar calls “real universality”). He differentiates it from “ideal universality.” The latter refers to a subversive element and is intrinsically linked with the notion of insurrection and rebellion in the name of freedom and equality. See “Ambiguous Universality.”

     

    2. Balibar designates this “new world order” with the term “real universality.” See “Ambiguous Universality.”

     

    3. For Zizek the term “politics proper” “always involves a kind of short circuit between the universal and the particular; it involves a paradox of a singular that appears as a stand-in for the universal . . . . This singulier universel is a group that . . . not only demands to be heard on equal footing with the ruling oligarchy or aristocracy . . . but, even more, presents itself as the immediate embodiment of society as such, in its universality, against the particular power interests of aristocracy and oligarchy” (“A Leftist Plea” 988-89).

     

    4. Derrida notes that the German word for hospitality is about the stranger’s right, upon arrival to the domain of another, to be treated not as an enemy. Hence hospitality is in opposition precisely to opposition itself, that is, to hostility. The guest, who is hosted as the opposite of the one who is treated as an enemy, is a stranger who is treated as an ally.

     

    5. Kant adds the word Wirbarkeit as synonymous to the word hospitality. The word Wirt(in), Derrida writes, refers to host and guest, the host who accepts the guest. Derrida notes that the word Gastgeber refers to the owner (proprietor) of a hotel or restaurant. Like Gastlich, Wirtlich, also means the one who hosts or accepts. Wirt, Wirtschaft thus refers to the domain of economy, the governing of home.

     

    6. By this way, hospitality becomes the threshold itself. For hospitality to exist there has to be a door. But when there are doors that means there is no (unconditional) welcoming as this implies that someone has the key for the door and thus controls the condition of hospitality.

     

    7. As it will become clear in the following pages, it is legitimate to discuss the relation between these two as they have the same structure.

     

    8. For a fuller discussion of these issues see Yegenoglu and Mutman.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • Appadurai, Arjun. “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy.” Global Culture: Nationalism, Globalization and Modernity. Ed. Mike Featherstone. London: Sage, 1990: 295-310.
    • Balibar, Etienne. “Ambiguous Universality.” differences 7.1 (1995): 48-74.
    • Bennett, David. “Introduction.” Multicultural States: Rethinking Difference and Identity. Ed. David Bennett. London: Routledge, 1998: 1-25.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas. Ed. Werner Hamacher and David E. Wellbery. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • —–. “A Discussion with Jacques Derrida.” Theory and Event 5.1: 2001. Available: <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/theory_and-event?v005/5.1 derrida.html>.
    • —–. “Force of Law: The ‘Mystical Foundation of Authority.’” Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice. Ed. Drucilla Cornell et. al. New York: Routledge, 1992: 3-67.
    • —–. “Hospitality.” Angelaki 5.3 (Dec. 2000): 3-18.
    • —–. The Other Heading: Reflections on Today’s Europe. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael B. Naas. Bloomington, IN: Indiana UP, 1992.
    • Dirlik, Arif. “The Global in the Local.” Global/Local: Cultural Production and the Transnational Imaginary. Ed. Rob Wilson and Wimal Dissanayake. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996: 21-45.
    • Hall, Stuart. “The Local and the Global: Globalization and Ethnicity.” Culture, Globalization and the World-System: Contemporary Conditions for the Representation of Identity. Ed. Anthony D. King. Binghamton, NY: Macmillan, 1991: 19-39.
    • Hannerz, Ulf. “Cosmopolitans and Locals in World Culture.” Global Culture: Nationalism, Globalization and Modernity. Ed. Mike Featherstone. London: Sage, 1990: 237-251.
    • Laclau, Ernesto. “Subject of Politics, Politics of the Subject.” differences 7.1 (1995): 146-164. Lloyd, David, “Race under Representation.” Oxford Literary Review 13.1-2 (1991): 62-94.
    • Negri, Antonio. Insurgencies: Constituent Power and the Modern State. Trans. Maurizia Boscagli. Minneapolis, MN: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the Vanishing Present. Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • Yegenoglu, Meyda. Colonial Fantasies: Towards a Feminist Reading of Orientalism. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998.
    • Yegenoglu, Meyda, and Mahmut Mutman. “Mapping the Present: Interview with Gayatri Spivak.” New Formations 45 (Winter 2001-02): 9-23.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “A Leftist Plea for ‘Eurocentrism.’” Critical Inquiry 24. 4 (Summer 1998): 988-1009.
    • —–. “Multiculturalism, Or, the Cultural Logic of Multinational Capitalism.” New Left Review. 225 September/October (1997): 28-51.

     

  • Whatever Image

     

    Zafer Aracagök

    Department of Graphic Design
    Bilkent University
    aracagok@bilkent.edu.tr

     

    The evocative remarks of Giorgio Agamben on the concept of whatever have received relatively little attention. In opening the question of the whatever and its implications for the nature of representation, my intention is to investigate the possibilities for another concept, that is, the whatever image.

     

    Whatever

     

    For Agamben, language depends upon the notion of singularity, a concept he derives from an investigation of the “the Scholastic enumeration of transcendentals” that begins “quodlibet ens est unum, verum, bonum seu perfectum–whatever entity is one, true, or perfect.” Agamben points out that the adjective “whatever,” the Latin quodlibet, is the term that “remaining unthought in each, conditions the meaning of all the others” (1). “Whatever” is that which is neither universal nor particular; it is being “such as it is” (66). I will elaborate this critical notion in a moment, but at this point I would simply point out that, when considering language and writing, Agamben is drawn to the sensation of whatever from the viewpoint of the singularity that this whateverness endows the being with. The whatever singularityin a singular language calls into question the pre-eminence of central linguistic conventions, such as the I and its representations. It is this that enables Agamben to assert that “the perfect act of writing comes not from a power to write, but from an impotence that turns back on itself and in this way comes to itself as a pure act” (36). His figure for the perfect act of writing that is not-writing is Melville’s Bartleby, “a scribe who does not simply cease writing but prefers not to, . . . [who] writes nothing but its potentiality to not-write” (36).

     

    The body has emerged as a subject of much recent critical and theoretical concern, and I believe there is merit in reconsidering the body in terms of whatever singularities. This would entail thinking of the body as the locus or the generator of representation. But if the body is seen as a generator of representation, what happens to art, to image, and to the broader question of representation in art criticism? And what happens to the relationship between art theory and politics, or indeed what happens to the “political” itself?

     

    My intention here is to attempt to draw the possible relationships between the body and the image, understood as the singular experience of a singular language, largely ignoring the difference between visual and verbal language. To that extent the following investigation can also be seen as a contribution to the development of art criticism that will be based on a new community, a coming community of whatever singularities. My discussion will move through Leibniz and his interpreters Benjamin, Deleuze, and Adorno, and then return, at last, to Agamben.

     

    Benjamin and Constellations

     

    “The Epistemo-Critical Prologue” of Benjamin’s Trauerspiel study conceptualizes Adam as the father of philosophy. Adam’s naming of the things foregrounds for Benjamin the linguistic base of representation of philosophical truth. The name before the Fall is thus the linguistic being which captures the intended object in its singularity. The period that comes after the Fall is the one in which names are transformed into words, and now they fail to capture the singularity of the objects to which they refer. For Benjamin, naming refers to a kind of mimesis that is a one-time-only configuration. The name pays attention to the object’s non-identity by identifying it as singular; in this way it imitates nature, whereas the concept or the word subordinates it. Words as concepts can never grasp the singularity of singularities because concepts are formed by means of class names that erase the particularity of the phenomenon.

     

    Given the necessity of the conceptual moment in philosophy, the problem for Benjamin in the Trauerspiel is how to philosophize without falling into the prisonhouse of the concepts or yielding to class names. Or, to articulate this concern in Agamben’s terms, the question is how to move beyond the logic of “belonging,” that is the characteristic relationship between a class name and its subset, between the universal and the particular? Benjamin’s solution in the Trauerspiel is to rely on clusters of concepts in order to get away from the totalizing tendency of the concepts. It means to work with continuous combination and arrangement of words–in constellations–for the representation of philosophical truth.

     

    Philosophical experience, for Benjamin, is concerned with the representation of truth and therefore raises the question of the objectivity of the structure of ideas constituted by the subject. For the structure of ideas to be objective, it should be constituted by the particular phenomena themselves, that is, by their inner logic. Philosophical experience–“the objective interpretation of phenomena”–is a representation of ideas gathered from out of empirical reality itself (The Origin of German Tragic Drama 34). Concepts thus function as the mediators between empirical phenomena and ideas without yielding to a totality. Here the crucial difference between cognitive knowledge and philosophical representation lies in the difference between the concept’s claim to capture the phenomena and the conceptualization process undertaken by a subject for each singular phenomenon–the difference between concepts and conceptualization as such.

     

    In this way, Benjamin inverts Plato’s theory of ideas, in which ideas are transcendental forms whose likenesses appear within the empirical objects as pale reflections of their own eternal truth: he constructs the Platonic absolute (ideas) out of empirical fragments. Here ideas do not constitute a metaphysical first principle; rather, they are derived from various configurations of the phenomena in the form of constellations. In other words, ideas are treated as empirical phenomena: phenomenal elements are the absolutes while the ideas, hence the truth, are historically specific and subject to change.

     

    For Benjamin this was a way of rescuing phenomena from temporal extinction by redeeming them within the name–Utopia for him was the reestablishment of the language of names through a theory of constellations. One-time-only configuration of names meant for him the production of a quasi-objective interpretation of phenomena whose truth is only momentary. When elaborating this theory with respect to a claim for objectivity, Benjamin supported his argument by referring to an infinitesimal calculus, and, unavoidably, to Leibniz. Perhaps this was for him the only way of defeating the conceptual prisonhouse of language, or the Platonic representation of ideas. However, Benjamin’s account of Leibniz deserves special attention at this juncture for it will throw light on both how Benjamin’s claim for objectivity through a theory of constellation leads to a certain production of truth, and also on how this truth is interpreted by him as a means for constituting an image, or rather a total image.

     

    As can be witnessed in Benjamin’s inversion of Platonic idealism, “The Epistemo-Critical Prologue” can be seen as an attempt to ground philosophy on a materialist base. However, toward the end of the “Prologue,” where he discusses the finite number of ideas that deserve to be redeemed by philosophy, Benjamin with a strange move seems to be approaching a phenomenology of essences:

     

    Ideas are displayed, without intention, in the act of naming, and they have to be renewed in philosophical contemplation. In this renewal the primordial mode of apprehending words is restored. And so, in the course of its history, which has so often been an object of scorn, philosophy is–and rightly so–a struggle for the representation of a limited number of words which always remain the same–a struggle for the representation of ideas. In philosophy, therefore, it is a dubious undertaking to introduce new terminologies which are not strictly confined to the conceptual field, but are directed towards the ultimate objects of consideration. Such terminologies–abortive denominative processes in which intention plays a greater part than language–lack that objectivity with which history has endowed the principal formulations of philosophical reflections. These latter can stand up on their own in perfect isolation, as mere words never can. And so ideas subscribe to the law which states: all essences exist in complete and immaculate independence, not only from phenomena, but, especially, from each other. Just as the harmony of the spheres depends on the orbits of stars which do not come into contact with each other, so the existence of the mundus intelligibilis depends on the unbridgeable distance between pure essences. Every idea is a sun and is related to other ideas just as suns are related to each other. The harmonious relationship between such essences is what constitutes truth. Its oft-cited multiplicity is finite; for discontinuity is a characteristic of the “essences.” (37)

     

    I quote this long passage because it is here that Benjamin asserts a strange relationship between materialism and an obscure phenomenology: if from the materialist tradition he borrows the term “objectivity,” he borrows “essence” from phenomenology. And the resolution of this problem–the reconciliation of materialism and phenomenology–rests on the production of a limit which not only frees the rigid boundaries of conceptual knowledge but also marks the reconciliation with a finite multiplicity. “The discontinuous finitude” on which Benjamin bases his resolution is also that which, according to him, is neglected by Romanticists in whose “speculations truth assumed the character of a reflective consciousness in place of its linguistic character” (38). I will return to this “linguistic character” of truth later, but for the time being we must dwell a bit more on how Benjamin makes a move from this question of “discontinuous finitude” to Leibnizian monadology.

     

    If Benjamin resolves the question of limit by introducing the idea of discontinuous finitude, his intention is probably to give flesh to his idea of “objective interpretation” by means of which the truth of a system of constellations could be maintained. In the following paragraphs it is not in vain that he opens his discussion by taking on the question of origins:

     

    Origin [Ursprung], although an entirely historical category, has, nevertheless, nothing to do with genesis [Entstehung]. The term origin is not intended to describe the process by which the existent came into being, but rather to describe that which emerges from the process of becoming and disappearance. Origin is an eddy in the stream of becoming, and in its current it swallows the material involved in the process of genesis. (45)

     

     

    The objective interpretation–that is, the moment of coming-into-being of a constellation and its truth–should therefore be understood not as a moment of “genesis” but as a moment of “origin”: as coming-into-being and going-out-of-being. This characteristic of a constellation is what makes both itself and its truth momentary. Once redeemed under a name, the empirical phenomena are supposed to yield to a truth that is momentary due to its being conditioned by this limit, that is, discontinuous finitude.

     

    Given the limited number of names (essences) in contrast to the infinite multiplicity of concepts or words that attempts to define them conceptually, such moments of reconciliation, or, such momentary moments of coming-into-being of truth, could not be easily maintained by Benjamin without referring to this limit in the form of a discontinuous finitude which he apparently found in Leibniz:

     

    The idea is a monad. The being that enters into it, with its past and subsequent history, brings–concealed in its own form–an indistinct abbreviation of the rest of the world of ideas, just as, according to Leibniz’s Discourse on Metaphysics (1686), every single monad, in an indistinct way, all the others. The idea is a monad–the pre-stabilized representation of phenomena resides within it, as in their objective interpretation. The higher the order of the ideas, the more perfect the representation contained within them. And so the real world could well constitute a task, in the sense that it would be a question of penetrating so deeply into everything real as to reveal thereby an objective interpretation of the world. In the light of such a task of penetration it is not surprising that the philosopher of the Monadology was also the founder of infinitesimal calculus. The idea is a monad–that means briefly: every idea contains the image of the world. The purpose of the representation of the idea is nothing less than an abbreviated outline of this image of the world. (47-48)

     

    However, as can be observed in the paragraph above, what Benjamin finds in Leibniz with a concern for a limit yields to another expression: “image.” One thing that is obvious in this paragraph is that Benjamin’s appropriation of the Leibnizian monad is conditioned by its relation to the visible, to that which is representable in the form of an image. The possibility of redeeming ideas for Benjamin lies in the capacity to represent them, and he is at pains to find a way to establish a relationship between an idea and its representation that is not based on the question of “belonging,” or on the question of a hierarchy of representation. Yet, as Benjamin conceives it, the momentary representation of an idea that is found resonating in a constellation is an image.

     

    I would like to argue at this point that although Benjamin formulates ideas as that which can be derived from empirical phenomena, there is still a relationship between an idea and its image based on belonging, on the hierarchy between an idea and its image. This is so because Benjamin’s theory of constellation still preserves a sense of idealism. For him, an idea is necessarily that which should be represented in the finitude of an image.

     

    Leibniz

     

    At this moment, I think it will be illuminating to divert the question from the relation between an idea and its image to the question of the possibility of such a moment of representation, such an image. For this purpose I would like to compare Benjamin’s reading of Leibniz (of the necessity of a discontinuous finitude, a limit, an image) with Deleuze’s reading of Leibniz. This, I believe, will also foreground why such a moment of visibility is necessary for Benjamin and at what cost he obtains these results that he adopts from Leibniz.

     

    As Deleuze recounts clearly, neither seeing nor the production of an image can be a function of a monad. For Deleuze, a Leibnizian monad is not something whose perception can be projected in the form of an image, not even momentarily: a monad is made of infinite “folds” that cannot be limited. As Deleuze reads Leibniz, there is no “consciousness interpolating images, a third element, between itself and what it thinks.”1 Leibniz’s position does not emanate from a ban put on images, but it develops as a result of his formulation of the monad and its body with respect to perception. The Benjaminian theory of constellation, on the other hand, produces representations, images, finite totalities which are continuous in themselves and yet, although momentarily, have a moment of coming into being.

     

    Every monad in Leibniz contains the entire world: the monad is finite and the world is infinite. However, this opposition between the two does not mean that they constitute oppositional pairs because if the monad contains the entire world then it is itself made of infinite and infinitely small parts. What makes a monad finite is not that it can have or represent the world to itself in clear images but its capacity to have perceptions– clear zones of expression. As Deleuze puts it:

     

    In brief, it is because every monad possesses a clear zone that it must have a body, this zone constituting a relation with the body, not a given relation, but a genetic relation that engenders its own “relatum.” It is because we have a clear zone that we must have a body charged with traveling through it or exploring it, from birth to death. (The Fold 86)

     

    Thus, having a body is a necessary part of having perceptions: either clear or obscure, such perceptions owe their state-of-being-perceived to the body, which is itself made of infinitely small parts. To put both the world and the monad into such an infinite structure of constitution, however, does not lead to chaos but to flux. At this point Deleuze draws our attention to the passage between microperceptions and macroperceptions: microperceptions are those minute, obscure, confused perceptions from which a monad obtains its conscious or macroscopic perceptions. The relationship between the two kinds of perceptions is not of the parts to the whole, but it is structured as a passage from “ordinary” to what is “notable” or “remarkable.” This passage from the ordinary to the remarkable is marked with the constitution of a threshold in the monad. The constitution of this threshold creates a qualitative difference between the sum of minute perceptions and what is perceived as conscious perception.

     

    This is an important move in Deleuzes’s reading of Leibniz because here we observe a consideration of inconspicuous, infinitely small, minute perceptions within the finite monad that will mark the monad’s finitude with a strange obscurity. Having a clear, a conscious perception never means a completely clear zone of expression, for if the monad is finite, it is not because it can have basically clear perceptions out of obscure perceptions but because, given the infinite number of representatives of the world within itself, it can reach only an obscurely clear or clearly obscure perception. Comparing it with Cartesian “clarity” of reason, Deleuze has the following remarks:

     

    What then is the implication of the Cartesian expression “clear and distinct,” which Leibniz nonetheless retains? How can he say that the privileged zone of every monad is not only clear but also distinct, all the while it consists of a confused event? It is because clear perception as such is never distinct. (91)

     

    Rather, it is “distinguished,” in the sense of being remarkable or notable (91).

     

    Once the difference between clear and obscure perception is understood as a question of being “distinguished,” Deleuze stresses that inconspicuous perceptions are included within conscious perception not in a relation of parts to the whole but as a qualitative difference between two heterogeneous parts. The part still remains the part before and after the threshold. Conscious perception is not separated from infinite inconspicuous perceptions: it is only “distinguished” from the latter by simply stressing its heterogeneity which does not only apply to the relationship between parts but also to the ones between “wholes” and “parts.” The moment of heterogeneity is what puts the conscious perception and inconspicuous perceptions into a differential relationship. What would be called a totality in a metaphysical framework is still considered a part here–a part that includes all the other parts within itself and that differs qualitatively from the others without being separated from them.

     

    Fold over folds: such is the status of the two modes of perception, or of microscopic and macroscopic processes. That is why the unfolded surface is never the opposite of the fold, but rather the movement that goes from some to the others. Unfolding sometimes means that I am developing–that I am undoing–infinite tiny folds that are forever agitating the background, with the goal of drawing a great fold on the side whence forms appear; it is the operation of a vigil: I project the world “on the surface of a folding …” [Jean Cocteau, La Difficulte d’etre, Paris, Rocher, 1983, pp. 79-80]. At other times, on the contrary, I undo the folds of consciousness that pass through every one of my thresholds, “the twenty-two folds” that surround me and separate me from the deep, in order to unveil in a single movement this unfathomable depth of tiny and moving folds that waft me along at excessive speeds in the operation of vertigo, like the “enraged charioteer’s whiplash…” [Henri Michaux, “Les 22 plis de la vie humaine,” in Ailleurs, Paris, Gallimard, 1948, p. 172]. I am forever unfolding between two folds, and if to perceive means to unfold, then I am forever perceiving within the folds. (93)

     

    When Deleuze makes us aware of the folds between the finite and the infinite, he is relying on one of Leibniz’s fundamental principles of philosophy: “inseparability.”2 This latter enables Deleuze not only to see an obscure zone of separation between clear and indistinct perceptions but also to make us aware that this ensuing flux of perception in Leibniz leads to one of the most original points in philosophy: a monad’s level of perception is dependent upon its body’s relation to other bodies, that is, to the infinite. However, if this is so, we must first answer the following question: if the monad includes all the monads within its infinite inconspicuous, minute, obscure perceptions, then how can it have an extrinsic possession, such as a body, outside itself?

     

    For Leibniz, as Deleuze puts it,

     

    Every perception is hallucinatory because perception has no object. Conscious perception has no object and does not even refer to a exclusively physical mechanism of excitations that could explain it from without: it refers only to the physical mechanism of differential relations among unconscious perception that are comprising it within the monad. And unconscious perceptions have no object and do not refer to physical things. (93)

     

    Hence, Leibniz, at one stroke, refutes not only the possibility of having one finite perception (for if body cannot be thought without its relationship to other bodies, then what is produced as a perception is never free from echoes that open it to an infinity), but also the question of belonging by denying an exteriority to the monad. Even if one should insist on the exteriority of the body to the monad, this exteriority will be included within the monad because the body is a materiality that has its own monad or, simply, the body is just another monad within which differential perceptions comprise, and which, get into infinite differential relationships with the monad called “I.” Thus, if the monad “I” has a body, this body is related to the “I” not in a relationship of belonging but on the principle of inseparability. Neither the monad “I” nor its body truly belongs to the other because each is already included in the other.

     

    Deleuze’s reading of Leibniz is remarkable in two senses: first, it locates the body in the process of perception and, second, it produces a critique of Gestalt such that the constitution of an image as such is put into question:

     

    That we were always perceiving in folds means that we have been grasping figures without objects, but through the haze of dust without objects that the figures themselves raise up from the depths, and that falls back again, but with time enough to be seen for an instant…I do not see into God, but I do see into the folds. The situation of perception is not what Gestalt theory describes when it erects the laws of the “proper form” against the idea of hallucinatory perception, but what Leibniz and de Quincey describe: When a herd or an army approaches, under our hallucinated gaze …–the event. (94)

     

    Given the limited scope of this essay, I cannot dwell here on the importance of the Stoic concept of “event” for Deleuze’s philosophy; suffice to say that it is through such a dynamic conception of event that Deleuze sees in perception a sense of “becoming.” To look at the relationship between body and perception from the viewpoint of becoming so that none of them truly comes to the fore as such raises questions about the individuation of the “I” and the particular certain body. In other words, if, as everything else, the body does not exist outside the monad, then it is what becomes, or comes into being when the monad perceives it as a difference between at least two heterogeneous parts–or, say, when the monad expresses what happens to its infinity of perceptions. Simply put, here the body is what is perceived or what is expressed through perception where “expression” is understood not only as a verbal activity but also as what appears as conscious perception.

     

    Now, if we return to one of our earlier considerations of Benjamin, there is a special point where Benjamin and Deleuze, or Deleuze’s reading of Leibniz, come closest: this is where we quoted Benjamin saying: “Origin is an eddy in the stream of becoming.” The question of origin that post-structuralist thought elaborated thoroughly seems to be one of Benjamin’s most serious concerns, where the proximity between Benjamin and Deleuze occurs with the latter’s conceptualization of “becoming” based on “event.” However, as we slightly adumbrated earlier, there is a cost that Benjamin pays in concluding his discussion on constellations with a “discontinuous finitude”: forgetting the body, the body as the locus of generator of perceptions.

     

    Adorno

     

    Given the discrepancy between the Leibnizian monad on the one hand, and its appropriation by Benjamin in his theory of constellations on the other, it is interesting, at this juncture, to look at what Adorno might have said about similar issues in Negative Dialectics, and in some of his earlier work.

     

    For example, one can observe such passages in Adorno’s inaugural lecture:

     

    The task of philosophy is not to search for concealed and manifest intentions of reality, but to interpret the unintentional reality in that, by the power of constructing figures, images, out of the isolated elements of reality, it negates questions whose exact articulation is the task of knowledge. (“Die Aktualitat der Philosophie” 95)

     

    What kind of an image is Adorno talking about here?

     

    According to Frederic Jameson, the project of constructing constellations in the form of images led Adorno in Negative Dialectics to put a ban on images, as in the case of the ban on graven images (119).

     

    However, let us look briefly at the context in which Adorno mentions this so-called ban.3 At the end of the second chapter (“Concepts and Categories”) of Negative Dialectics, Adorno critically reconsiders the possibility of representational thinking. Adorno suggests that representational thinking is merely “a consciousness interpolating images, a third element between itself and that which it thinks,” and that the “materialist longing to grasp the thing” aims at the “absence of images where the full object could be conceived” (207). However, his evocation of the body in the same paragraph does not in any sense allow for an interpretation as a ban on images. For Adorno critically maintains this ban only to the extent of formulating materialism at its most materialistic moment where he claims that this materialistic ban has resulted in a prohibition of picturing a positive Utopia. Adorno’s immanent criticism of materialism sees it as the possibility of the “resurrection of the flesh” (207), the body, and it does not necessarily mean that resurrection can take place only within the absence or prohibition of images. As a dialectician without a position, Adorno is silent on whether the reconsideration of the body necessitates a ban on images or requires a new constellation of representation. I believe that Adorno’s position cannot be put into an either/or framework and can best be interpreted as opening up the possibility of reconsidering the body as the locus of representation. At this point I would like to raise the following question: is it possible to formulate an image, a form of representation, without necessarily dealing with the question of its belonging or not-belonging to a body?

     

    Agamben

     

    If Adorno’s thoughts on image resonate well with Leibniz’s monadology, it is because, for both, image is that which cannot be thought of as separate from the body. Yet Adorno does not elaborate this thought in the rest of Negative Dialectics, and Benjamin, as we have seen, closes the matter with a “discontinuous finitude.” I would like to suggest it is precisely in this sense that Agamben’s The Coming Community can be read as the unthought of Benjamin’s theory of constellations and Adorno’s questions about the image. One of the main problems–the question of belonging, which Benjamin criticizes but then reappropriates in his theory of constellations–remains a problem for Agamben; however, the question of belonging is no longer seen within a program of redemption or sublation but is now understood with respect to “whatever.”

     

    Whatever, as Agamben formulates it, is not something that can be logically deduced from a series of properties that condition the belonging of a certain particular to a certain universal. For example, if a class name is constituted by the properties it contains, it is the presence of the properties which makes a class name belong to a universal, whereas the “whatever” is that which, “remaining unthought in each, conditions the meaning of all the others” (1). Consequently, whatever is that term whose inclusion among properties is that which creates the difference between particular and singular, or that which transforms particularity into a whatever singularity. Up to that point, the proximity between Agamben and the Benjamin of the “Epistemo-Critical Prologue” is unmistakable, for in the two accounts of singularity one observes a debt to Leibnizian monadology. This is a question of the “countables” which, as we have seen, is answered differently by Benjamin and Leibniz: discontinuous finitude for Benjamin and discontinuous infinitude for Leibniz. For Agamben, however, the question of the countables is considered in terms of properties that constitute a singularity such that the concepts of property and singularity are put into question. What are those properties that go into the constitution of such entities? Can they be counted as things that have an identity, the summation of which will endow an identity to that which is consequently constituted?

     

    First of all, the whatever, within the context of the questions above, is not only a term whose inclusion among properties can be translated to a “being such that it always matters” (1) but also the whatever is that which “remains unthought” in each singularity. This peculiarity of the term, the whatever, thus opens the thought of singularity to a space where “its being such as it is” (1) is valued as the unthought with respect to properties, or common properties. This means that the space of the unthought puts to the test not only countability but also the definition of the properties of a singularity. One immediate question that concerns the whatever singularity, then, is the one related to the individuation of a whatever singularity. If the properties that go into the constitution of a singularity are put at stake, then, how is it possible to individuate whatever singularities? Such questions also underline the suppositions concerning common nature, or the speculations on form, which Agamben traces in Duns Scotus:

     

    …Duns Scotus conceived individuation as an addition to nature or common form (for example, humanity)–an addition not of another form or essence or property, but of an ultima realitas, of an “utmostness” of the form itself. Singularity adds nothing to the common form, if not a “haecceity.” … But, for this reason, according to Duns Scotus, common form or nature must be indifferent to whatever singularity, must in itself be neither particular nor universal, neither one nor multiple, but such that it “does not scorn being posed with a whatever singular unity” (16).

     

    Agamben builds this argument on a previous introduction of the whatever according to which whatever is that whose addition to a singularity creates the singularity’s difference from others–not because whatever’s addition brings about another, a different identity, to the singularity in question, but because it endows the singularity with an indifference to difference. Thus, with this move, what creates the difference–the inclusion of certain properties within a certain singularity and, also, what went into the constitution of properties–is made irrelevant. This indifference, however, cannot be thought without whatever singularity’s relation to common nature because the moment of addition of the whatever also abolishes the singularity’s concern with common nature or properties in the sense of installing indifference as the main trait of a whatever singularity. In Agamben’s words:

     

    Whatever is constituted not by the indifference of common nature with respect to singularities, but by the indifference of the common and the proper, of the genus and the species, of the essential and the accidental. Whatever is the thing with all its properties, none of which, however, constitutes difference. In-difference with respect to properties is what individuates and disseminates singularities, makes them loveable (quodlibetable). (18)

     

    The whatever is that whose addition does not mean “being, it does not matter which” but “being such that it always matters” (1). Within the context of singularities, what happens to our earlier considerations related to the questions of continuity, discontinuity, finite and infinite–the question of countability? Agamben’s formulation of whatever singularities as “being such as they are” makes irrelevant not only such concerns (because a question concerning countability can only be relevant where entities come into being as such), but also the questions of representability of such moments of being, whether they be in the form of images, concepts, constellations, or identities.

     

    One thing that renders whatever singularity unrepresentable can be found in the parallels that Agamben draws between the unbaptized children in limbo and the location of whatever singularities. Limbo is a non-place, where the inhabitants, lacking a conception of a first metaphysical principle, experience a condition of being lost. This lack of a first principle incapacitates any moment of representation and, thus, any possibility of having a memory and not having a memory, both remembering and forgetting. Since there is no sense of redemption, limbo is also marked by a temporality that is a not-yet-taking place. Time can only take place in the end, at the apocalypse; however, even then the inhabitants of limbo will not be absorbed into it, for they are characterized as “letters with no addressee” with no destination (6). Time is only relevant for those who have a destination to reach, who have committed an act to be punished, or for those who have something to redeem.

     

    If life in limbo describes the whatever singularities’ relation to the first metaphysical principle and temporality, and in this way describes their unrepresentability in terms of an identity, the question of whether language as such can grasp them is explained by Agamben by referring to whatever singularities’ indifference to antinomies such as the universal and the particular, or in short, to class names. Language as such transforms singularities into members of a class. Subsumed under a class name, the meaning of the singular is defined by a common property shared by dissimilar particulars–meaning is a condition of belonging to a name. “Linguistic being,” on the other hand, is different from that which is signified by a name for linguistic being comes into being only by being-called something such as “the tree, a tree, this tree” (8). The being-called of tree, that is, for example, the tree, signifies both one certain tree and also its belonging to a class of trees, and this is why linguistic being is a class that both belongs and does not belong to itself.

     

    Linguistic being in this sense is a whatever singularity that is best exemplified by the concept of the example. Considering a class name and any particular subsumed under it as the example of this class name, the difficulty that arises when giving an example of the concept of example is what endows the latter with a singularity. Here the impossibility of giving an example of the concept of example is due to the concept’s lack of its own properties or its lack of a common property with other examples. In this sense, an example is a singularity that does not have any common property with other examples; that is, it comes into being by being-called, by referring to properties that neither belong to itself nor to the class name it constitutes. Each example in this sense is both a class name and a singularity on its own. In Agamben’s words,

     

    Exemplary being is purely linguistic being. Exemplary is what is not defined by any property, except by being called. Not being-red, but being-called red … defines the example. (10)

     

    If nothing could be tied to a classifying concept–if it were possible to get rid of the linguistic convention, that is the first principle–then everything could be an example. Pure singularities with no property of their own would communicate “without being tied by any common property, by any identity” (11). Singularities would exist with no identities, no selves, no belonging to any class name. In Agamben’s words, this would be “an absolutely unrepresentable community” (24).

     

    Agamben’s theory of such an unrepresentable community, based on whatever singularities, without doubt, is a critique of today’s linguistic situation which he, building on Debord’s theory of the spectacle, describes with a story (Shekinah) from the Talmud. This story, according to Agamben, bears witness to the separation of knowledge and the word with the following risk:

     

    The risk here is that the word–that is, the non-latency and the revelation of something (anything whatsoever)–be separated from what it reveals and acquire an autonomous consistency. Revealed and manifested (and hence common and shareable) being is separated from the thing revealed and stands between it and humans. In this condition of exile, the Shekinah loses its positive power and becomes harmful. (80-1)

     

    For Agamben, this risk transforms language, spectacle, image, or indeed, any representative claim, into an autonomous sphere or, as Adorno puts it, into a third term between consciousness and what it thinks. What has happened to the body is closely related to what has happened to representation in the modern era with respect to language and image, or, to the verbal and the visual.

     

    Describing the process with a chapter entitled “Dim Stockings,” Agamben sees in the commodification of the body–in mass-media reproductions of body images–its redemption from theological foundations.4 The invention of the camera, photographic reproduction, and the ensuing businesses of advertisement and pornography signal the end of a kind of a ban on graven images which has left no part of the body unrepresented in technologically manipulated images. The emergence of such images by the beginning of the nineteenth century held a promise for the body to come: “Neither generic nor individual, neither an image of the divinity nor an animal form, the body now became something truly whatever” (47). The technologically reproduced image of the human body had no resemblance now with its archetypal model formulated in Genesis.5 Still preserving a certain sense of resemblance without having any archetype, now the body severs its ties from an obligation to belonging, or to belonging to a class name. In Agamben’s words, this situation bore witness to becoming-whatever of the body where the whatever should be understood as a “resemblance without archetype–in other words, an Idea” (48).

     

    If the emancipation from an archetypal resemblance had a promise of a whatever-body-to-come, it was because it claimed to abolish the “third term,” any claim of representation determined by belonging; however, the reason why it has never been realized must be sought, according to Agamben, in the failure of technology which technologized only the image, that transformed not the body, but its representation.

     

    To appropriate the historic transformations of human nature that capitalism wants to limit to the spectacle, to link together image and body in space where they can no longer be separated, and thus to forge the whatever body, whose physics is resemblance–this is the good that humanity must learn how to wrest from commodities in their decline. (50)

     

    At this point, it is useful to remember what Adorno offered in the passage from Negative Dialectics that I cited earlier and the critique of Benjamin’s reading of Leibniz. If Benjamin insisted on an image, though a momentary one, we have seen how Adorno defended a position in which the image is questioned by opening the possibility of the “resurrection of the flesh,” the body. Earlier, this question of whether the body can become the locus of representation received a certain explanation in Deleuze’s reading of Leibniz; yet after bringing Agamben’s whatever into our discussion, we are faced with slightly different question: whether the whatever body can lead to a formulation of a whatever image? If there is such a thing as whatever image, can it be said to come between “a consciousness and what it thinks”?

     

    Now, as can be concluded from Agamben’s discussion of the body in “Dim Stockings,” separation of the representation of the body from an archetype not only saves the image from being a third term, but also introduces the “whatever” into the body-as such itself. The addition of the “whatever” to the body-as such does not transform it into another body–does not deepen the body/consciousness distinction–it only gives birth to whatever singularities, thereby blurring such oppositions between antinomies. Addition of whatever, one can argue, brings along an indifference of body and consciousness with respect to whatever singularities.

     

    I mentioned earlier the space of the unthought that the whatever adds to the singularities. Considering such an addition, such an opening to singularities, is it still possible to talk about image as a third term?

     

    If we follow Agamben to the end of the book, there is a passage in which he summarizes this space in the following terms:

     

    Whatever adds to singularity only an emptiness, only a threshold: Whatever is a singularity plus an empty space. . . But a singularity plus an empty space can only be a pure exteriority, a pure exposure. Whatever, in this sense, is the event of an outside. Quodlibet is, therefore, the most difficult to think: the absolutely non-thing experience of a pure exteriority. (66)

     

    Agamben reaches this point, the “non-thing experience of a pure exteriority,” by recounting Spinoza’s concept of extension in relation to the common. “All bodies, he [Spinoza] says, have it in common to express the divine attribute of extension. . . . And yet what is common cannot in any case constitute the essence of the single case” (17). The extension in question here is what opens the singularity to a space, the space of the unthought, to an exteriority. This outside, or “the threshold,” in Agamben’s terms, is determined not by an essential commonality; this is a commonality with neither substance nor no property. “The threshold is not, in this sense, another thing with respect to limit; it is, so to speak, the experience of the limit itself, the experience of being-within an outside” (67). This passage from common form to singularity, or, the limit-experience, which is the “event of an outside,” should thus be understood not as an event accomplished once and for all, but as an experience of “an infinite series of modal oscillations” (19).

     

    If singularities are accomplished in “an infinite series of modal oscillations,” then it means, in a Spinozian sense, that they exist as substanceless extensions–with no property of their own–but it is each singularity’s way of establishing a neighborhood with others that determines its accomplishment. Agamben illustrates the coming-to-itself of each singularity with a life story:

     

    Toward the end of his life the great Arabist Louis Massignon … founded a community called Bahaliya, a name deriving from the Arabic term for “substitution”. The members took a vow to live substituting themselves for someone else, that is, to be Christians in the place of others. (23)

     

    For Agamben, the moment of substitution signifies the interconnectedness of each singularity’s existence. The place where this substitution takes place does not belong to anyone nor to itself: the coming-into-being of each singularity is a common thing. One is singular and common at the same time in the process of its taking place.Hence, the unrepresentability of such a community where there would be no identity, for the latter will be a substanceless extension always in the form of its taking place. For Agamben, this is the space of becoming whatever of each singularity, and he calls this unrepresentable space the “Ease”:

     

    The term “ease” designates, according to its etymology, the space adjacent (ad-jacens, adjacentia), the empty place where each can move freely. … In this sense, ease names perfectly that “free use of the proper” that, according to an expression of Freidrich Hölderlin’s, is “the most difficult task.” (25)

     

    Without doubt, the difficulty of this task arises from the possibility of acting within the space of the Ease where identity and representation as such disappear: or, rather, in the Ease, in this “being-within an outside,” what disappears is the possibility of an image that comes as a third term between a consciousness and what it thinks. The constitution of such an image is determined by the way the passage from potentiality to act is formulated. For Aristotle, as Agamben explains, the decisive potentiality is the “potentiality to not-be.”

     

    In the potentiality to be, potentiality has as its object a certain act in the sense that for it energhein, being-in-act, can only mean passing to a determinate activity …; as for the potentiality to not-be, on the other hand, the act can never consist of a simple transition de potentia ad actum. It is, in other words, a potentiality that has as its object potentiality itself, a potentia potentiae. (34-35)

     

    What happens to the antinomy of “a consciousness and what it thinks” in this framework is that, having the potentiality to not-think, thought turns back to itself and, without having an object, or, without being able to form a pure image, it thinks of its own potentiality to not-be.

     

    Whatever-singularity’s affinity with the potentiality to not-be, with such a limit-experience of “being-within an outside,” eases not only the question concerning the possibility of action within the space of the Ease, but also trivializes the question of the disappearance of representation. Representation, or the image, does not disappear but is absorbed into whatever singularity’s potentiality to not-be.

     

    Given this limit-experience, can one still preserve the body as such at the moment of the potentiality to not-be? Do whatever singularities leave room for a possibility of raising distinctions such as that between body and consciousness? Are we still talking about something visible when we talk about “whatever image“?

     

    Does this potentiality to not-be or this limit-experience point toward a direction where whatever singularities might ask for the abolition not only of the possibility of a politics of identity but also the establishment of art and art-criticism? Our answer would be “yes,” if the whatever image were simply “no image.” But if a character like Bartleby in Melville’s story is still in our heads with “no image,” or if it behaves like a ghost whenever we are put into a position of “preferring not to,” I would like to conclude this essay without an answer.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Adorno, “Die Aktualitat der Philosophie.”

     

    2. “One of Leibniz’s essential theses consists in positing at once the real distinction and the inseparability: it is not because two things are really distinct that they are separable” (The Fold 107-8).

     

    3. “Representational thinking would be without reflection – an undialectical contradiction, for without reflection there is no theory. A consciousness interpolating images, a third element, between itself and what it thinks would unwittingly produce idealism. A body of ideas would substitute for the object of cognition, and the subjective arbitrariness of such ideas is that of the authorities. The materialist longing to grasp the thing aims at the opposite: it is only in the absence of images that the full object could be conceived. Such absence concurs with theological ban on images. Materialism brought that ban into secular form by not permitting Utopia to be positively pictured; this is the substance of its negativity. At its most realistic, materialism comes to agree with theology. Its great desire would be the resurrection of the flesh, a desire utterly foreign to idealism, the realm of the absolute spirit” (Negative Dialectics 207).

     

    4. “In the early 1970s there was an advertisement shown in Paris movie theaters that promoted a well-known brand of French stockings, “Dim” stockings. It showed a group of young women dancing together. Anyone who watched even a few of its images, however, distractedly, would have hard time forgetting the special impression of synchrony and dissonance, of confusion and singularity, of communication and estrangement that emanated from the bodies of the smiling dancers. This impression relied on a trick: Each dancer was filmed separately and later the single pieces were brought together over a single sound track. But that facile trick, that calculated asymmetry of the movement of the long legs sheathed in the same inexpensive commodity, that slight disjunction between the gestures, wafted over the audience a promise of happiness unequivocally related to the human body” (The Coming Community 46).

     

    5. Here Agamben refers to a phrase in Genesis: “in the image and likeness” (48).

    Works Cited

     

    • Adorno, T. W. “Die Aktualitat der Philosophie.” 1931. Gesammelte Schriften, vol. 1: Frühe Philosophische Schriften. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1973.
    • —. Negative Dialectics. London: Routledge, 1990.
    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Benjamin. Walter. The Origin of German Tragic Drama. London: Verso, 1990.
    • Buck-Morss, Susan. The Origin of Negative Dialectics: Theodore W. Adorno, Walter Benjamin, and the Frankfurt Institute. NY: Free P, 1977.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. The Fold. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Late Marxism: Adorno, or the Persistence of the Dialectic. London: Verso, 1990.

     

  • Stirner and Foucault: Toward a Post-Kantian Freedom

    Saul Newman

    Department of Political Science
    University of Western Australia
    snewman@cyllene.uwa.edu.au

     

     

    Max Stirner and Michel Foucault are two thinkers not often examined together. However, it has been suggested that the long-ignored Stirner may be seen as a precursor to contemporary poststructuralist thought.1 Indeed, there are many extraordinary parallels between Stirner’s critique of Enlightenment humanism, universal rationality, and essential identities, and similar critiques developed by thinkers such as Foucault, Jacques Derrida, Gilles Deleuze, and others. However, the purpose of this paper is not merely to situate Stirner in the “poststructuralist” tradition, but rather to examine his thinking on the question of freedom, and to explore the connections here with Foucault’s own development of the concept in the context of power relations and subjectivity. Broadly speaking, both thinkers see the classical Kantian idea of freedom as deeply problematic, as it involves essentialist and universal presuppositions which are themselves often oppressive. Rather, the concept of freedom must be rethought. It can no longer be seen in solely negative terms, as freedom from constraint, but must involve more positive notions of individual autonomy, particularly the freedom of the individual to construct new modes of subjectivity. Stirner, as we shall see, dispenses with the classical notion of freedom altogether and develops a theory of ownness [Eigneheit] to describe this radical individual autonomy. I suggest in this paper that such a theory of ownness as a non-essentialist form of freedom has many similarities with Foucault’s own project of freedom, which involves a critical ethos and an aestheticization of the self. Indeed, Foucault questions the anthropological and universal rational foundations of the discourse of freedom, redefining it in terms of ethical practices.2Both Stirner and Foucault are therefore crucial to the understanding of freedom in a contemporary sense–they show that freedom can no longer be limited by rational absolutes and universal moral categories. They take the understanding of freedom beyond the confines of the Kantian project–grounding it instead in concrete and contingent strategies of the self.

     

    Kant and Universal Freedom

     

    In order to understand how this radical reformulation of freedom can take place, we must first see how the concept of freedom is located in Enlightenment thought. In this paradigm, the exercise of freedom is seen as an inherently rational property. According to Immanuel Kant, for instance, human freedom is presupposed by moral law that is rationally understood. In the Critique of Practical Reason, Kant seeks to establish an absolute rational ground for moral thinking beyond empirical principles. He argues that empirical principles are not an appropriate basis for moral laws because they do not allow their true universality to be established. Rather, morality should be based on a universal law–a categorical imperative–which can be rationally understood. For Kant, then, there is only one categorical imperative, which provides a foundation for all rational human action: “Act only on that maxim whereby thou canst at the same time will that it should become a universal law” (38). In other words, the morality of an action is determined by whether or not it should become a universal law, applicable to all situations. Kant outlines three features of all moral maxims. Firstly, they must have the form of universality. Secondly, they must have a rational end. Thirdly, the maxims that arise from the autonomous legislation of the individual should be in accordance with a certain teleology of ends.

     

    This last point has important consequences for the question of human freedom. For Kant, moral law is based on freedom–the rational individual freely chooses out of a sense of duty to adhere to universal moral maxims. Thus, for moral laws to be rationally grounded they cannot be based on any form of coercion or constraint. They must be freely adhered to as a rational act of the individual. Freedom is seen by Kant as an autonomy of the will–the freedom of the rational individual to follow the dictates of his own reason by adhering to these universal moral laws. This autonomy of the will, then, is for Kant the supreme principle of morality. He defines it as “that property of it by which it is a law to itself (independently of any property of objects of volition)” (59). Freedom is, therefore, the ability of the individual to legislate for him or herself, free from external forces. However, this freedom of self-legislation must be in accordance with universal moral categories. Hence, for Kant, the principle of autonomy is: “Never choose except in such a way that the maxims of the choice are comprehended in the same volition as a universal law” (59). It would appear that there is a central paradox in this idea of freedom–you are free to choose as long as you make the right choice, as long as you choose universal moral maxims. However, for Kant there is no contradiction here because, although adherence to moral laws is a duty and an absolute imperative, it is still a duty that is freely chosen by the individual. Moral laws are rationally established, and because freedom can only be exercised by rational individuals, they will necessarily, yet freely, choose to obey these moral laws. In other words, an action is free only insofar as it conforms to moral and rational imperatives–otherwise it is pathological and therefore “unfree.” In this way, freedom and the categorical imperative are not antagonistic but, rather, mutually dependent concepts. Individual autonomy, for Kant, is the very basis of moral laws.

     

    But that the principle of autonomy […] is the sole principle of morals can be readily shown by mere analysis of concepts of morality; for by this analysis we find that its principle must be a categorical imperative, and that [the imperative] commands neither more nor less than this very autonomy. (59)

    The Authoritarian Obverse

     

    Nevertheless, it would seem that there is a hidden authoritarianism in Kant’s formulation of freedom. While the individual is free to act in accordance with the dictates of his own reason, he must nevertheless obey universal moral maxims. Kant’s moral philosophy is a philosophy of the law. That is why Jacques Lacan was able to diagnose a hidden jouissance–or enjoyment in excess of the law–that attached itself to Kant’s categorical imperative. According to Lacan, Sade is the necessary counterpart to Kant–the perverse pleasure that attaches itself to the law becomes, in the Sadeian universe, the law of pleasure.3 The thing that binds Kantian freedom to the law is its attachment to an absolute rationality. It is precisely because freedom must be exercised rationally that the individual finds him or herself dutifully obeying rationally founded universal moral laws.

     

    However, both Foucault and Stirner have called into question such universal rational and moral categories, which are central to Enlightenment thought. They contend that absolute categories of morality and rationality sanction various forms of domination and exclusion and deny individual difference. For Foucault, for instance, the centrality of reason in our society is based on the radical and violent exclusion of madness. People are still excluded, incarcerated, and oppressed because of this arbitrary division between reason and unreason, rationality and irrationality. Similarly, the prison system is based on a division between good and evil, innocence and guilt. The incarceration of the prisoner is made possible only through the universalization of moral codes. What must be challenged, for Foucault, are not only the practices of domination that are found in the prison, but also the morality which justifies and rationalizes these practices. The main focus of Foucault’s critique of the prison is not necessarily on the domination within, but on the fact that this domination is justified on absolute moral grounds–the moral grounds that Kant seeks to make universal. Foucault wants to disrupt the “serene domination of Good over Evil” central to moral discourses and practices of power (“Intellectuals” 204-17).

     

    It is this moral absolutism that Stirner is also opposed to. He sees morality as a “spook”–an abstract ideal that has been placed beyond the individual and held over him in an oppressive and alienating way. Morality and rationality have become “fixed ideas”–ideas that have come to be seen as sacred and absolute. A fixed idea, according to Stirner, is an abstract concept that governs thought–a discursively closed fiction that denies difference and plurality. They are ideas that have been abstracted from the world and continue to dominate the individual by comparing him or her to an ideal norm that is impossible to attain. In other words, Kant’s project of taking moral maxims out of the empirical world and into a transcendental realm where they would apply universally, would be seen by Stirner as a project of alienation and domination. Kant’s invocation of absolute obedience to universal moral maxims Stirner would see as the worst possible denial of individuality. For Stirner, the individual is paramount, and anything which purports to apply to or speak for everyone universally is an effacement of individual uniqueness and difference. The individual is plagued by these abstract ideals, these apparitions that are not of his own creation and are imposed on him, confronting him with impossible moral and rational standards. As we shall see, moreover, the individual for Stirner is not a stable, fixed identity or essence–this would be just as much an idealist abstraction as the specters that oppress it. Rather, individuality may be seen here in terms similar to Foucault’s–as a radically contingent form of subjectivity, an open strategy that one engages in to question and contest the confines of essentialism.

     

    The Critique of Essentialism

     

    The exorcism that Stirner performs on this “spirit realm” of moral and rational absolutes is part of a radical critique of Enlightenment humanism and idealism. His “epistemological break” with humanism may be seen most clearly in his repudiation of Ludwig Feuerbach. In The Essence of Christianity, Feuerbach applied the notion of alienation to religion. Religion is alienating, according to Feuerbach, because it requires that man abdicate his essential qualities and powers by projecting them onto an abstract God beyond the grasp of humanity. For Feuerbach, the predicates of God were really only the predicates of man as a species being. God was an illusion, a fictitious projection of the essential qualities of man. In other words, God was a reification of human essence. Like Kant, who tried to transcend the dogmatism of metaphysics by reconstructing it on rational and scientific grounds, Feuerbach wanted to overcome religious alienation by re-establishing the universal rational and moral capacities of man as the fundamental ground for human experience. Feuerbach embodies the Enlightenment humanist project of restoring man to his rightful place at the center of the universe, of making the human the divine, the finite the infinite.

     

    Stirner argues, however, that by seeking the sacred in “human essence,” by positing an essential and universal subject and attributing to him certain qualities that had hitherto been attributed to God, Feuerbach has merely reintroduced religious alienation, placing the abstract concept of man within the category of the Divine. Through the Feuerbachian inversion man becomes like God, and just as man was debased under God, so the individual is debased beneath this perfect being, man. For Stirner, man is just as oppressive, if not more so, than God. Man becomes the substitute for the Christian illusion. Feuerbach, Stirner argues, is the high priest of a new universal religion–humanism: “The human religion is only the last metamorphosis of the Christian religion” (158). It is important to note here that Stirner’s concept of alienation is fundamentally different from the Feuerbachian humanist understanding as alienation from one’s essence. Stirner radicalizes the theory of alienation by seeing this essence as itself alienating. As I shall suggest, alienation in this instance may be seen more along the lines of a Foucauldian notion of domination–as a discourse that ties the individual to a certain subjectivity through the conviction that there lies within everyone an essence to be revealed.

     

    According to Stirner, it is this notion of a universal human essence that provides the foundations for the absolutization of moral and rational ideas. These maxims have become sacred and immutable because they are now based on the notion of humanity, on man’s essence, and to transgress them would be a transgression of this very essence. In this way the subject is brought into conflict with itself. Man is, in a sense, haunted and alienated by himself, by the specter of “essence” inside him: “Henceforth man no longer, in typical cases, shudders at ghosts outside him, but at himself; he is terrified at himself” (Stirner 41). So for Stirner, Feuerbach’s “insurrection” has not overthrown the category of religious authority–it has merely installed man within it, reversing the order of subject and predicate. In the same way, we might suggest that Kant’s metaphysical “insurrection” has not overthrown dogmatic structures of belief, but only installed morality and rationality within them.

     

    While Kant wanted to take morality out of the domain of religion, founding it instead on reason, Stirner maintains that morality is only the old religious dogmatism in a new, rational guise: “Moral faith is as fanatical as religious faith!” (45). What Stirner objects to is not morality itself, but the fact that it has become a sacred, unbreakable law, and he exposes the will to power, the cruelty and the domination behind moral ideas. Morality is based on the desecration, the breaking down of the individual will. The individual must conform to prevailing moral codes; otherwise, he becomes alienated from his essence. For Stirner, moral coercion is just as vicious as the coercion carried out by the state, only it is more insidious and subtle, since it does not require the use of physical force. The warden of morality is already installed in the individual’s conscience. This internalized moral surveillance is also found in Foucault’s discussion of Panopticism–in which he argues, reversing the classical paradigm, that the soul becomes the prison for the body (Foucault, Discipline 195-228).

     

    A similar critique may be leveled at rationality. Rational truths are always held above individual perspectives, and Stirner argues that this is merely another way of dominating the individual. As with morality, Stirner is not necessarily against rational truth itself, but rather against the way it has become sacred, transcendental, and removed from the grasp of the individual, thus abrogating the individual’s power. Stirner says: “As long as you believe in the truth, you do not believe in yourself, and you are a —servant, a–religious man” (312). Rational truth, for Stirner, has no real meaning beyond individual perspectives–it is something that can be used by the individual. Its real basis, as with morality, is power.

     

    So while, for Kant, moral maxims are rationally and freely obeyed, for Stirner they are a coercive standard, based on an alienating notion of human “essence” that is forced upon the individual. Moreover, they become the basis for practices of punishment and domination. For instance, in response to the Enlightenment idea that crime was a disease to be cured rather than a moral failing to be punished, Stirner argues that curative and punitive strategies were just two sides of the same old moral prejudice. Both strategies rely on a universal norm which must be adhered to: “‘curative means’ always announces to begin with that individuals will be looked on as ‘called’ to a particular ‘salvation’ and hence treated according to the requirements of this ‘human calling’” (213). Is not the individual, for Kant, also “called” to a particular “salvation” when he is required to do his duty and obey moral codes? Is not the Kantian categorical imperative also a “human calling” in this sense? In other words, Stirner’s critique of morality and rationality may be applied to Kant’s categorical imperative. For Stirner, although moral maxims may be ostensibly freely followed, they still entail a hidden coercion and authoritarianism. This is because they have become universalized in the Kantian formulation as absolute norms which leave little room for individual autonomy, and which one cannot transgress, because to do so would be to go against one’s own rational, universal “human calling.”

     

    Stirner’s critique of morality and its relation to punishment has striking similarities with Foucault’s own writings on punishment. For Stirner, as we have seen, there is no difference between cure and punishment–the practice of curing is a reapplication of the old moral prejudices in a new “enlightened” guise:

     

    Curative means or healing is only the reverse side of punishment, the theory of cure runs parallel with the theory of punishment; if the latter sees in an action a sin against right, the former takes it for a sin of the man against himself, as a falling away from his health. (213)

     

    This is very similar to Foucault’s argument about the modern formula of punishment–that medical and psychiatric norms are only the old morality in a new guise. While Stirner considers the effect of such forms of moral hygiene on the individual conscience, where Foucault’s focus is more on the materiality of the body, the formula of cure and punishment is the same: it is the notion of what is properly “human” that authorizes a whole series of exclusions, disciplinary practices, and restrictive moral and rational norms. For Foucault, as well as for Stirner, punishment is made possible by making something sacred or absolute–in the way that Kant makes morality into a universal law. There are several points to be made here. Firstly, both Stirner and Foucault see moral and rational discourses as problematic–they often exclude, marginalize, and oppress those who do not live up to the norms implicit in these discourses. Secondly, both thinkers see rationality and morality as being implicated in power relations, rather than constituting a critical epistemological point outside power. Not only are these norms made possible by practices of power, through the exclusion and domination of the other, but they also, in turn, justify and perpetuate practices of power, such as those found in the prison and asylum.

     

    Thirdly, both thinkers see morality as having an ambiguous relation to freedom. While Stirner argues that on the surface moral and rational norms are freely adhered to, they nevertheless entail an oppression over ourselves–a self-domination–that is far more insidious and effective than straightforward coercion. In other words, by conforming to universally prevailing moral and rational norms, the individual abdicates his own power and allows himself to be dominated. Foucault also unmasks this hidden domination of the moral and rational norm that is found behind the calm visage of human freedom. The classical Enlightenment idea of freedom, Foucault argues, allowed only pseudo-sovereignty. It claims to hold sovereign “consciousness (sovereign in the context of judgment, but subjected to the necessities of truth), the individual (a titular control of personal rights subjected to the laws of nature and society), basic freedom (sovereign within, but accepting the demands of an outside world and ‘aligned with destiny’)” (Foucault, “Revolutionary” 221). In other words, Enlightenment humanism claims to free individuals from all sorts of institutional oppressions while, at the same time, entailing an intensification of oppression over the self and denial of the power to resist this subjection. This subordination at the heart of freedom may be seen in the Kantian categorical imperative: while it is based on a freedom of consciousness, this freedom is nevertheless subject to absolute rational and moral categories. Classical freedom only liberates a certain form of subjectivity, while intensifying domination over the individual who is subordinated by these moral and rational criteria. That is to say that the discourse of freedom is based on a specific form of subjectivity–the autonomous, rational man of the Enlightenment and liberalism. As Foucault and Stirner show, this form of freedom is only made possible through the domination and exclusion of other modes of subjectivity that do not conform to this rational model. In other words, while morality does not deny or constrain freedom in an overt way–in Kant’s case moral maxims are based on the individual’s freedom of choice–this freedom is nevertheless restricted in a more subtle fashion because it is required to conform to moral and rational absolutes.

     

    It is clear, then, that for both Stirner and Foucault, the classical Kantian idea of freedom is deeply problematic. It constructs the individual as “rational” and “free” while subjecting him to absolute moral and rational norms, and dividing him into rational and irrational, moral and immoral selves. The individual freely conforms to these rational norms, and in this way his subjectivity is constructed as a site of its own oppression. The silent tyranny of the self-imposed norm has become the prevailing mode of subjection. While for Kant, moral maxims and rational norms existed in a complementary relationship with freedom, for Stirner and Foucault the relationship is much more paradoxical and conflicting. It is not that transcendental moral and rational norms deny freedom per se–indeed in the Kantian paradigm they presuppose freedom. It is rather that the form of freedom brought into being through these absolute categories implies other, more subtle forms of domination. This domination is made possible precisely because freedom’s relationship with power is masked. For Kant, as we have seen, freedom is an absence from coercion. However, for Stirner and Foucault, freedom is always implicated in power relations–power relations that are creative as well as restrictive. To ignore this, moreover, to perpetuate the comforting illusion that freedom promises a universal liberation from power, is to play right into the hands of domination. It may be argued, then, that Foucault and Stirner uncover, in different ways, the authoritarian underside or the “other scene” of Kantian freedom.

     

    Foucauldian Freedom: The Care of the Self

     

    This does not mean, however, that Stirner and Foucault reject the idea of freedom. On the contrary, they interrogate the limits of the Enlightenment project of freedom in order to expand it–to invent new forms of freedom and autonomy that go beyond the restrictions of the categorical imperative. Indeed, as Olivia Custer shows, Foucault is as engaged as Kant in the problematic of freedom. However, as we shall see, he seeks to approach the question of freedom in a different way–through concrete ethical strategies and practices of the self.

     

    For Foucault, the illusion of a state of freedom beyond the world of power must be dispelled. Moreover, freedom’s attachment to essentialist categories and pre-ordained moral and rational coordinates must at least be questioned. However, the concept of freedom is very important for Foucault–he does not want to dispense with it, but rather to situate it in a realm of power relations that necessarily make it indeterminate. It is only through a rethinking of freedom in this way that it can be wrested from the metaphysical world and brought to the level of the individual. Rather than the abstract Kantian notion of freedom as a rational choice beyond constraints and limitations, freedom for Foucault exists in mutual and reciprocal relations with power. Moreover, rather than freedom being presupposed by absolute moral maxims, it is actually presupposed by power. According to Foucault, power may be understood as a series of “actions upon the action of others” in which multiple discourses, counterdiscourses, strategies, and technologies clash with one another–specific relations of power always provoking specific and localized relations of resistance. Resistance is something that exceeds power and is at the same time integral to its dynamic. Power is based on a certain freedom of action, a certain choice of possibilities. In this sense, “power is exercised only over free subjects, and only insofar as they are free” (Foucault, “Subject” 208-26). Unlike classical schema in which power and freedom were diagrammatically opposed, Foucauldian thinking asserts the total dependency of the former on the latter. Where there is no freedom, where the field of action is absolutely restricted and determined, according to Foucault, there can be no power: slavery, for instance, is not a power relationship (Foucault, “Subject” 221).

     

    Foucault’s notion of freedom is a radical departure from Kant’s. Whereas, for Kant, freedom is abstracted from the constraints and limitations of power, for Foucault, freedom is the very basis of these limits and constraints. Freedom is not a metaphysical and transcendental concept. Rather, it is entirely of this world and exists in a complicated and entangled relationship with power. Indeed, there can be no possibility of a world free from power relations, as power and freedom cannot exist without one another.

     

    Moreover, Foucault is able to see freedom as being implicated in power relations because, for him, freedom is more than just the absence or negation of constraint. He rejects the “repressive” model of freedom which presupposes an essential self–a universal human nature–that is restricted and needs to be liberated. The liberation of an essential subjectivity is the basis of classical Enlightenment notions of freedom and is still central to our political imaginary. However, both Foucault and Stirner reject this idea of an essential self–this is merely an illusion created by power. As Foucault says, “The man described for us, whom we are invited to free, is already in himself the effect of a subjection much more profound than himself” (Discipline 30). While he does not discount acts of political liberation–for example when a people tries to liberate itself from colonial rule–this cannot operate as the basis for an ongoing mode of freedom. To suppose that freedom can be established eternally on the basis of this initial act of liberation is only to invite new forms of domination. If freedom is to be an enduring feature of any political society it must be seen as a practice–an ongoing strategy and mode of action that continuously challenges and questions relations of power.

     

    This practice of freedom is also a creative practice–a continuous process of self-formation of the subject. It is in this sense that freedom may be seen as positive. One of the features that characterizes modernity, according to Foucault, is a Baudelairean “heroic” attitude toward the present. For Baudelaire, the contingent, fleeting nature of modernity is to be confronted with a certain “attitude” toward the present that is concomitant with a new mode of relationship that one has with oneself. This involves a reinvention of the self: “This modernity does not ‘liberate man in his own being’; it compels him to face the task of producing himself” (Foucault, “What” 42). So, rather than freedom being a liberation of man’s essential self from external constraints, it is an active and deliberate practice of inventing oneself. This practice of freedom may be found in the example of the dandy, or flâneur, “who makes of his body, his behavior, his feelings and passions, his very existence, a work of art” (Foucault, “What” 41-2). It is this practice of self-aestheticization that allows us, according to Foucault, to reflect critically on the limits of our time. It does not seek a metaphysical place beyond all limits, but rather works within the limits and constraints of the present. More importantly, however, it is also a work conducted upon the limits of ourselves and our own identities. Because power operates through a process of subjectification–by tying the individual to an essential identity–the radical reconstitution of the self is a necessary act of resistance. This idea of freedom, then, defines a new form of politics more relevant to contemporary regimes of power: “The political, ethical, social, philosophical problem of our days is not to liberate the individual from the State and its institutions, but to liberate ourselves from the State and the type of individualisation linked to it” (Foucault, “Subject” 216).

     

    For Foucault, moreover, the liberation of the self is a distinctly ethical practice. It involves a notion of “care for the self” whereby one’s desires and behavior are regulated by oneself so that freedom may be practiced ethically. This sensitivity to the care for oneself and the ethical practice of freedom could be found, Foucault suggests, among the Greeks and Romans of antiquity. For them the freedom of the individual was an ethical problem. Because the desire for power over others was also a threat to one’s own freedom, the exercise of power was something that had to be regulated, monitored, and limited. To be a slave to one’s own desires was as bad as being subject to another’s desires. This regulation of one’s desires and practices required an ethics of behavior that one constructed for oneself. In order to practice freedom ethically, in order to be truly free, one had to achieve power over oneself, over one’s desires. As Foucault shows, in ancient Greek and Roman thinking, “the good ruler is precisely the one who exercises his power correctly, i.e., by exercising at the same time his power on himself” (“Ethics” 288).

     

    This ethical practice of freedom associated with the care for the self begins, however, at a certain point to sound somewhat Kantian. Indeed, as Foucault says, “for what is ethics, if not the practice of freedom? […]. Freedom is the ontological condition of ethics” (“Ethics” 284). Does this not appear to re-invoke the categorical imperative where, for Kant, morality presupposes and is founded on freedom? Has Foucault, in his attempt to escape the absolutism of morality and rationality, reintroduced the categorical imperative in this careful regulation of behavior and desire? There can be no doubt about the stringency of this form of ethics. In The Use of Pleasure and The Care of the Self, Foucault describes the Greeks’ and Romans’ prescriptions concerning everything from diet and exercise to sex. However, I would suggest that there is an important difference between the ethics of care and the universal moral maxims insisted on by Kant. The regulation of behavior and the problematization of freedom central to the ethic of care are things that one applies to oneself, rather than being imposed externally from a universal point beyond the individual. Foucault’s practice of freedom is, in this sense, an ethics, rather than a morality. It is a certain consistency of modes and behaviors that has as its object the consideration and problematization of the self. In other words, it allows the self to be seen as an open project to be constituted through the ethical practices of the individual, rather than as something defined a priori by universal, transcendental laws. Moral laws do not apply here–there is no transcendental authority or universal imperative that sanctions these ethical practices and penalizes infractions. According to Foucault, morality is defined by the type of subjectification it entails. On the one hand, there is the morality that enforces the code, through injunctions, and which entails a form of subjectivity that refers the individual’s conduct to these laws, submitting it to their universal authority. This, it could be argued, is the morality of Kant’s categorical imperative. On the other hand, argues Foucault, there is the morality in which

     

    the accent was placed on the relationship of the self that enabled the person to keep from being carried away by the appetites and pleasures, to maintain a mastery and superiority over them, to keep his senses in a state of tranquility, to remain free from interior bondage to the passions, and to achieve a mode of being that could be defined by the full enjoyment of oneself, or the perfect supremacy of oneself over oneself. (Use 29-30)

     

    We can see, then, that Foucault’s notion of freedom as an ethical practice is radically different from Kant’s idea of freedom as the basis of universal moral law. For Foucault, freedom is ethical because it implies an open-ended project that is conducted upon oneself, the aim of which is to increase the power that one exercises over oneself and to limit and regulate the power one exercises over others. In this way, one’s personal freedom and autonomy are enhanced. For Kant, on the other hand, freedom is the basis of a metaphysical morality that must be universally obeyed. For Foucault, in other words, ethics intensifies freedom and autonomy, whereas for Kant, freedom and autonomy are ultimately circumscribed by the very morality they make possible.

     

    So, there are two related aspects of Foucault’s concept of freedom that must be emphasized here. Firstly, there is the practice of freedom that allows one to liberate oneself, not from external limits that repress one’s essence, but rather from the limits imposed by this very essence. It involves, in a sense, the transgression of these limits through a transgression and reinvention of oneself. It is a form of freedom which operates within the limits of power, enabling the individual to make use of the limits in inventing him/herself. Secondly, there is the aspect of freedom that is distinctly ethical–it is a practice of care for the self that has as its aim an increase of the power over oneself and one’s desires, thus keeping in check one’s exercise of power over others. In this way, the practice of care for the self allows the individual to navigate an ethical course of action amidst power relations, with the aim of intensifying freedom and personal autonomy. Therefore, freedom is conceived as an ongoing and contingent practice of the self that is not determined in advance by fixed moral and rational laws.

     

    The Two Enlightenments

     

    In his later essay “What Is Enlightenment?,” Foucault considers Kant’s insistence on the free and public use of autonomous reason as an escape, a “way out” for man from a state of immaturity and subordination. While Foucault believes that this autonomous reason is useful because it allows a critical ethos toward modernity, he refuses the “blackmail” of the Enlightenment–the insistence that this critical ethos at the heart of the Enlightenment be inscribed in a universal rationality and morality. The problem with Kant is that he opens up a space for individual autonomy and critical reflection on the limits of oneself, only to close this space down by re-inscribing it in transcendental notions of rationality and morality that require absolute obedience. For Foucault, the legacy of the Enlightenment is deeply ambiguous. As Colin Gordon shows, for Foucault there are two Enlightenments–the Enlightenment of rational certainty, absolute identity, and destiny, and the Enlightenment of continual questioning and uncertainty. According to Foucault, this ambiguity is reflected in Kant’s own treatment of the Enlightenment.

     

    There is perhaps a Kantian moment in Foucault (or could we say a Foucauldian moment in Kant?). Foucault shows how one might read Kant in a heterogeneous way, focusing on the more libratory aspect of his thinking–where we are encouraged to interrogate the limits of modernity, to reflect critically on the way we have been constituted as subjects. As Foucault shows, Kant sees the Enlightenment (Aufklärung) as a critical condition, characterized by an “audacity to know” and the free and autonomous public use of reason. This critical condition is concomitant with a “will to revolution”–with the attempt to understand revolution (in Kant’s case the French Revolution) as an Event that allows an interrogation of the conditions of modernity–“an ontology of the present“–and the way we as subjects stand in relation to it (Foucault, “Kant” 88-96). Foucault suggests that we may adopt this critical strategy to reflect upon the limits of the discourse of the Enlightenment itself and its universal rational and moral injunctions. We may in this sense use the critical capacities of the Enlightenment against itself, thus opening up spaces for individual autonomy within its edifice, beyond the grasp of universal laws.

     

    This critical stance toward the present, and the practice of the “care for the self” with which it is bound up, outline a genealogical strategy of freedom–a strategy that, as Foucault says “is not seeking to make possible a metaphysics that has finally become a science; it is seeking to give new impetus […] to the undefined work of freedom” (“What” 46).

     

    Stirner’s Theory of Ownness

     

    As we shall see, it is precisely this desire to give new impetus to freedom, to take it out of the realm of empty dreams and promises, that is reflected in Stirner’s theory of ownness. He adopts a “genealogical” approach similar to Foucault’s in making the focus of freedom the self and situating freedom amidst relations of power.

     

    The idea of transgressing and reinventing the self–of freeing the self from fixed and essential identities–is also a central theme in Stirner’s thinking. As we have seen, Stirner shows that the notion of human essence is an oppressive fiction derived from an inverted Christian idealism that tyrannizes the individual and is linked with various forms of political domination. Stirner describes a process of subjectification which is very similar to Foucault’s: rather than power operating as downward repression, it rules through the subjectification of the individual, by defining him according to an essential identity. As Stirner says: “the State betrays its enmity to me by demanding that I be a man . . . it imposes being a man upon me as a duty” (161). Human essence imposes a series of fixed moral and rational ideas on the individual, which are not of his creation and which curtail his autonomy. It is precisely this notion of duty, of moral obligation–the same sense of duty that is the basis of the categorical imperative–that Stirner finds oppressive.

     

    For Stirner, then, the individual must free him- or herself from these oppressive ideas and obligations by first freeing himself from essence–from the essential identity that is imposed on him. Freedom involves, then, a transgression of essence, a transgression of the self. But what form should this transgression take? Like Foucault, Stirner is suspicious of the language of liberation and revolution–it is based on a notion of an essential self that supposedly throws off the chains of external repression. For Stirner, it is precisely this notion of human essence that is itself oppressive. Therefore, different strategies of freedom are called for–ones that abandon the humanist project of liberation and seek, rather, to reconfigure the subject in new and non-essentialist ways. To this end, Stirner calls for an insurrection:

     

    Revolution and insurrection must not be looked upon as synonymous. The former consists in an overturning of conditions, of the established condition or status, the state or society, and is accordingly a political or social act; the latter has indeed for its unavoidable consequence a transformation of circumstances, yet does not start from it but from men’s discontent with themselves, is not an armed rising but a rising of individuals, a getting up without regard to the arrangements that spring from it. The revolution aimed at new arrangements; insurrection leads us no longer to let ourselves be arranged, but to arrange ourselves, and sets no glittering hopes on “institutions.” It is not a fight against the established, since, if it prospers, the established collapses of itself; it is only a working forth of me out of the established. (279-80)

     

    So while a revolution aims at transforming existing social and political conditions so that human essence may flourish, an insurrection aims at freeing the individual from this very essence. Like Foucault’s practices of freedom, the insurrection aims at transforming the relationship that the individual has with himself. The insurrection starts, then, with the individual refusing his or her enforced essential identity: it starts, as Stirner says, from men’s discontent with themselves. Insurrection does not aim at overthrowing political institutions. It is aimed at the individual, in a sense transgressing his own identity–the outcome of which is, nevertheless, a change in political arrangements. Insurrection is therefore not about becoming what one is–becoming human, becoming man–but about becoming what one is not.

     

    This ethos of escaping essential identities through a reinvention of oneself has many important parallels with the Baudelarian aestheticization of the self that interests Foucault. Like Baudelaire’s assertion that the self must be treated as a work of art, Stirner sees the self–or the ego–as a “creative nothingness,” a radical emptiness which is up to the individual to define: “I do not presuppose myself, because I am every moment just positing or creating myself” (135). The self, for Stirner, is a process, a continuous flow of self-creating flux–it is a process that eludes the imposition of fixed identities and essences: “no concept expresses me, nothing that is designated as my essence exhausts me” (324).

     

    Therefore, Stirner’s strategy of insurrection and Foucault’s project of care for the self are both contingent practices of freedom that involve a reconfiguration of the subject and its relationship with the self. For Stirner, as with Foucault, freedom is an undefined and open-ended project in which the individual engages. The insurrection, as Stirner argues, does not rely on political institutions to grant freedom to the individual, but looks to the individual to invent his or her own forms of freedom. It is an attempt to construct spaces of autonomy within relations of power, by limiting the power that is exercised over the individual by others and increasing the power that the individual exercises over himself. The individual, moreover, is free to reinvent himself in new and unpredictable ways, escaping the limits imposed by human essence and universal notions of morality.

     

    The notion of insurrection involves a reformulation of the concept of freedom in ways that are radically post-Kantian. Stirner suggests, for instance, that there can be no truly universal idea of freedom; freedom is always a particular freedom in the guise of the universal. The universal freedom that, for Kant, is the domain of all rational individuals, would only mask some hidden particular interest. Freedom, according to Stirner, is an ambiguous and problematic concept, an “enchantingly beautiful dream” that seduces the individual yet remains unattainable, and from which the individual must awaken.

     

    Furthermore, freedom is a limited concept. It is only seen in its narrow negative sense. Stirner wants, rather, to extend the concept to a more positive freedom to. Freedom in the negative sense involves only self-abnegation–to be rid of something, to deny oneself. That is why, according to Stirner, the freer the individual ostensibly becomes, in accordance with the emancipative ideals of Enlightenment humanism, the more he loses the power he exercises over himself. On the other hand, positive freedom–or ownness–is a form of freedom that is invented by the individual for him or herself. Unlike Kantian freedom, ownness is not guaranteed by universal ideals or categorical imperatives. If it were, it could only lead to further domination: “The man who is set free is nothing but a freed man […] he is an unfree man in the garment of freedom, like the ass in the lion’s skin” (152).

     

    Freedom must, rather, be seized by the individual. For freedom to have any value it must be based on the power of the individual to create it. “My freedom becomes complete only when it is my–might; but by this I cease to be a merely free man, and become and own man” (151). Stirner was one of the first to recognize that the true basis of freedom is power. To see freedom as a universal absence of power is to mask its very basis in power. The theory of ownness is a recognition, and indeed an affirmation, of the inevitable relation between freedom and power. Ownness is the realization of the individual’s power over himself–the ability to create his or her own forms of freedom, which are not circumscribed by metaphysical or essentialist categories. In this sense, ownness is a form of freedom that goes beyond the categorical imperative. It is based on a notion of the self as a contingent and open field of possibilities, rather than on an absolute and dutiful adherence to external moral maxims.

     

    Conclusion

     

    This idea of ownness is crucial in formulating a post-Kantian concept of freedom. Perhaps, in Stirner’s words, “Ownness created a new freedom” (147). Firstly, ownness allows freedom to be considered beyond the limits of universal moral and rational categories. Ownness is the form of freedom that one invents for oneself, rather than one that is guaranteed by transcendental ideals. Foucault, too, sought to “free” freedom from these oppressive limits. Secondly, ownness converges closely with Foucault’s own argument about freedom being situated in power relations. Like Foucault, Stirner shows that the idea of freedom as entailing a complete absence of power and constraint is illusory. The individual is always involved in a complex network of power relations, and freedom must be fought for, reinvented, and renegotiated within these limits. Ownness may be seen, then, as creating the possibilities of resistance to power. Similarly to Foucault, Stirner maintains that freedom and resistance can always exist, even in the most oppressive conditions. In this sense, ownness is a project of freedom and resistance within power’s limits–it is the recognition of the fundamentally antagonistic and ambiguous nature of freedom. Thirdly, not only is ownness an attempt to limit the domination of the individual, but it is also a way of intensifying the power that one exercises over oneself. We have seen that for both Stirner and Foucault, Kant’s universal freedom is based on absolute moral and rational norms that limit individual sovereignty. Foucault and Stirner are both interested, in different ways, in reformulating the concept of freedom: through the ethical practice of care of the self and through the strategy of ownness, both of which are aimed at increasing the power that the individual has over himself.

     

    These two strategies allow us to conceptualize freedom in a more contemporary way. Freedom can no longer be seen as a universal emancipation, the eternal promise of a world beyond the limits of power. The freedom that forms the basis of the categorical imperative, the freedom exalted by Kant as the province of reason and morality, can no longer serve as the basis for contemporary ideas of freedom. It has been also shown by Stirner and Foucault to exclude and oppress where it includes, to enslave where it also liberates. Freedom must be seen as no longer being subservient to absolute maxims of morality and rationality, to imperatives that invoke the dull, cold inevitability of law and punishment. For Stirner and Foucault, freedom must be “freed” from these absolute notions. Rather than a privilege that is granted from a metaphysical point to the individual, freedom must be seen as a practice, a critical ethos of the self, and as a struggle that is engaged in by the individual within the problematic of power. It necessarily involves a reflection on the limits of the self and the ontological conditions of the present–a constant reinvention and problematization of subjectivity. A post-Kantian freedom, in this way, is not only a recognition of power, but also a reflection upon power’s limits–an affirmation of the possibilities of individual autonomy within power and of the critical capacities of modern subjectivity.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Koch.

     

    2. This rejection of the anthropological foundations of freedom is also discussed by Rajchman. Indeed Rajchman sees Foucault’s project of freedom as an ethical attitude of continual questioning of the borders and limits of our contemporary experience–a freedom of philosophy as well as a philosophy of freedom. My discussion of Foucault’s reconfiguration of the problematic of freedom in terms of concrete ethical strategies of the self may also be seen in this context.

     

    3. See Lacan. In this essay, Lacan shows that the Law produces its own transgression, and that it can only operate through this transgression. The excess of Sade does not contradict the injunctions, laws, and categorical imperatives of Kant; rather, they are inextricably linked to it. Like Foucault’s discussion of the “spirals” of power and pleasure, in which power produces the very pleasure it is seen to repress, Lacan suggests that the denial of enjoyment–embodied in Law, in the categorical imperative–produces its own form of perverse enjoyment, or jouissance as a surplus–le plus de jouir. Sade, according to Lacan, exposes this obscene enjoyment by reversing the paradigm: he turns this perverse pleasure into a law itself, into a sort of Kantian categorical imperative or universal principle: “Let us enunciate the maxim: ‘I have the right of enjoyment over your body, anyone can say to me, and I will exercise this right, without any limit stopping me in the capriciousness of the exactions that I might have the taste to satiate’” (58). In this way the obscene pleasure of the Law that is unmasked in Kant is reversed into the Law of obscene pleasure through Sade. As Zizek remarks in “Kant with (or against) Sade,” the crucial insight of Lacan’s argument here is not that Kant is a closet sadist, but rather that Sade is a “closet Kantian.” That is, Sadean excess is taken to such an extreme that it becomes emptied of pleasure and takes the form of a cold-blooded, joyless universal Law.

    Works Cited

     

    • Custer, Olivia. “Exercising Freedom: Kant and Foucault.” Philosophy Today 42 (1989): 137-146.
    • Feuerbach, Ludwig. The Essence of Christianity. New York: Harper, 1957.
    • Foucault, Michel. Discipline and Punish: The Birth of the Prison. Trans. Alan Sheridan. London: Penguin, 1977. 195-228.
    • —. “The Ethics of the Concern for the Self as a Practice of Freedom.” Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth. Essential Works of Michel Foucault, 1954-1984. Ed. Paul Rabinow. Trans. Robert J. Hurley. Vol. 1. London: Penguin, 1997. 281-301.
    • —. “Intellectual and Power: A Conversation between Michel Foucault and Gilles Deleuze.” Foucault, Language 204-217.
    • —. “Kant on Enlightenment and Revolution.” Trans. Colin Gordon. Economy and Society 15.1 (1986): 88-96.
    • —. Language, Counter-Memory, Practice: Selected Essays and Interviews. Ed. Donald Bouchard. Oxford: Blackwell, 1977. 204-217.
    • —. “Revolutionary Action: ‘Until Now.’” Foucault, Language 218-233.
    • —. “The Subject and Power.” Michel Foucault: Beyond Structuralism and Hermeneutics. By Hubert L. Dreyfus and Paul Rabinow. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1982. 208-226.
    • —. The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality, Volume 2. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Pantheon, 1985. 29-30.
    • —. “What is Enlightenment?” The Foucault Reader. Ed. Paul Rabinow. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 32-50.
    • Gordon, Colin. “Question, Ethos, Event: Foucault on Kant and the Enlightenment.” Economy and Society 15.1 (1986): 71-87.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Critique of Practical Reason. Trans. Thomas Kingsmill Abbot. London: Longmans, 1963.
    • Koch, Andrew. “Max Stirner: The Last Hegelian or the First Poststructuralist.” Anarchist Studies 5 (1997): 95-107.
    • Lacan, Jacques. “Kant with Sade.” October 51 (1989): 55-75.
    • Rajchman, John. Michel Foucault: The Freedom of Philosophy. New York: Columbia UP, 1985.
    • Stirner, Max. The Ego and Its Own. Trans. David Leopold. Cambridge and London: U of Cambridge P, 1995.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “Kant with (or against) Sade.” The Zizek Reader. Eds. Elizabeth Wright and Edmond Wright. Oxford: Blackwell, 1999.